08 MIR Centrifuge

Sultanate of Oman
Saraya Bandar Jissah

Sewage Treatment Plant
Title Material Inspection Request – Centrifuge Document no. MS-ME-PE&E-SBJ-50-008
Project Saraya Bandar Jissah Sewage Treatment Plant Date 7th Nov-2016
Contractor Drake and Scull International L.L.C. Manufacturer
Client Saraya Bandar Jissah Rev.no 00
Material Inspection Request
Centrifuge/Dewatering Unit
Drake and Scull International L.L.C.

Sultanate of Oman
Title Material Inspection Request – Centrifuge Document no. MS-ME-PE&E-SBJ-50-008
Project Saraya Bandar Jissah Sewage Treatment Plant Date 7th Nov-2016
Contractor Drake and Scull International L.L.C. Manufacturer
Table of Contents
1. Consultant Approval
2. Approved Datasheet
3. Delivery Note
4. Bill of Lading
5. Certificate of Origin
6. Test Certificate/ Quality Certificate
7. O&M Manual
8. Warranty Certificate
Sulanate of Oman
Title Technical Submittal for MBR TANKS AIR Document no. MS-ME-PE&E-SBJ-15-032
BLOWER
Project Saraya Bandar Jissah Sewage Treatment Plant Date 23/03/2016
Contractor Drake and Scull International L.L.C. Manufacturer MAPRO
Consultant's Approval
K. Approved Design Data

Sulanate of Oman
BLOWER
Approved Data Sheet


Sulanate of Oman


Title Technical Submittal for &HQWULIXJH8QLW Document no. MS-ME-PE&E-SBJ-15-015


Contractor Drake and Scull International L.L.C. Manufacturer GEA, GERMANY


& 7HFKQLFDO'DWD6KHHWV

Decanter UCD 205
Technical data | Equipped with standard gear drive or 2-gear drive
Frame, hood and drive ä Lowest power consumption Auxiliary equipment

The decanter UCD 205 from GEA Westfalia of < 1 kW/m3 (at extra cost)
Separator Group is a continuously ä Highest g-force for higher solids ä Control unit for automatic operation
operating horizontal solid wall centrifuge output ä Tools
for dewatering requirements of industrial ä Adjustable bowl speed via VFD ä Bearing temperature monitoring
and municipal sewage sludge. (option) ä Vibration control
The frame is of open design with gravity ä Automatic adjustment of differential ä Automatic grease lubrication
discharge of the clarified phase. speed via VFD ä Set of spare parts
ä In-line secondary motor ä Liquid and solids chutes
Features ä Belts for main drive motor only ä Solids gate valve
ä All parts coming into contact with
the product are made of CrNiMo Advantages
stainless steel ä Easy installation
ä 3-phase AC motor for controlled ä Easy operation and maintenance
torque starting in star-delta circuit ä Low space requirement (easy
or via frequency converter retrofitting)
engineering for a better world GEA Mechanical Equipment

Technical Data UCD 205
The information contained in this brochure merely serves as a non-binding description of our products and is without guarantee. Binding information, in particular relating to capacity data and suitability for specific applications, can only be provided within the framework of concrete
TD_ET-13-11-0017 EN
Operating principles and constructional features
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 Secondary motor 11 Bowl bearings
2 Coupling 12 Feed
3 Secondary gear 13 Gravity discharge of the
4 Bowl bearings clariﬁed liquid
5 Primary gear 14 Separation chamber
6 Scroll bearings 15 Scroll
7 Bowl 16 Housing
8 Distributor 17 Solids discharge
9 Scroll bearings 18 Bowl drive
10 Regulating ring 19 Scroll drive
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
20 Primary motor
inquiries. Printed on chlorine-free bleached paper · Printed in Germany · Subject to modification · Westfalia® and Westfalia Separator ® are registered trademarks of GEA Mechanical Equipment GmbH.
Bowl
Diameter 200 mm
L / D ratio 4.0
Speed max. 5500 rpm
g-force, (z) max. 3400 g
Bowl drive
Rating 7.5 kW Dimensions in mm
500 kg*
Speed at 50 Hz / 60 Hz 3000 rpm / 3600 rpm
Scroll drive
Rating at 50 Hz 0.75 kW
A
Shipping data
Decanter weight approx. 800 kg
D
Case dimensions 2750 x 850 x 1600 mm
Shipping weight approx. 910 kg C
Components Standard Option F
Bowl and scroll Stainless steel CrNiMo Super duplex steel H

E
Liquid outlet Free Centripetal pump
B
Flight hard facing TTungsten carbide Sintered tungsten car-
G
bide tiles E
Solids outlet ports Exchangeable —
Seals, inner bearings NBR (Perbunan) P.T.F.E. / Viton
Drive 2-gear drive Fixed differential speed A B C D
Solids discharge — Slide valve 1850 t 500 890 t 1650

Solids chute — Upon request E F G H
Liquid chute — Upon request t 500 t 1400 t 1000 t 350
*Min. lifting capacity of trolley hoist for service and maintenance: 500 kg.
GEA Mechanical Equipment

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
Werner-Habig-Straße 1, 59302 Oelde, Germany
Phone: +49 2522 77-0, Fax: +49 2522 77-2950
www.gea.com
%240(5HY'DWHG
3URMHFW6DUD\D%DQGDU673
'HZDWHULQJFHQWULIXJH
+LJKSHUIRUPDQFHGHFDQWHU
IRUVOXGJHGHZDWHULQJ
PDNH :HVWIDOLD6HSDUDWRU
PRGHO 8&'

7KHGHFDQWHU8&'LVHTXLSSHGZLWKD
VWDQGDUGJHDUGULYHV\VWHP2SHUDWHVZLWKDIL[
GLIIHUHQWLDOVSHHGDOOWKHWLPH

technical specifications:
ERZOGLDPHWHU PP
ERZOOHQJWK DSSUR[
PP
OGUDWLR
ERZOVSHHG PD[USP
JIRUFH
ZHLJKW DSSUR[NJ

drive motor (bowl drive):
operating voltage: 380 - 420 V
rating: 9.2 kW DOL (400 V / 50 Hz) heavy duty start
speed: 2945 rpm (400 V / 50 Hz)

Materials:
URWDWLQJSURGXFWFRQWDFWLQJSDUWV
VWDWLRQDU\SURGXFWFRQWDFWLQJSDUWV
DOORWKHUSDUWVSDLQWHGVWHHOSDLQWJUHHQ5$/VWUXFWXUH

Abrasion protection:
VFUROOZHDUSURWHFWLRQKDUGIDFLQJWXQJVWHQFDUELGHRQ1LFNHOEDVLV
ZHDUSURWHFWLRQLQERZOGLVFKDUJHSRUWV
WHPSHUHGFDVWLURQEXVKHVUHSODFHDEOHDWVLWH
ZHDUSURWHFWLRQLQVROLGVFROOHFWLRQFKDPEHU
ZHDUOLQHUUHSODFHDEOHDWVLWH
ZHDUSURWHFWLRQLQVFUROOGLVWULEXWRU
ZHDUOLQHUVUHSODFHDEOHDWVLWH

,QFOXGHGLQWKHDERYHPDFKLQHSULFHDUH
IRXQGDWLRQIUDPHDQGVHWRIUXEEHUGDPSHUVIRUYLEUDWLRQLQVXODWLRQ

-8"4)&3%*4, 1$,"6'

Material Specification for UCD 205
Liquid contacted parts Material BEST FIT Version

according to DIN 17007 comparable with AISI
Bowl shell 1.4362-G * -

Bowl screw 1.4541 321
Bearing hub 1.4462 329/F51
Regulating plate/disc 1.4404 (F) 316 L
Conveyor screw body 1.4404 (F) 316 L
Conveyor screw flights 1.4404 (F) 316 L
Infeed pipe 1.4541 / 1.4404 321 / (F) 316 L
Lining (catch chamber) 1.4404 (F) 316 L
Material DUPLEX
according to DIN 17007 comparable with AISI
Bowl shell 1.4470 F51

Bowl screw 1.4541-1.4462 321-F51
Bearing hub 1.4462 F51
Regulating plate/disc 1.4462 F51
Conveyor screw body 1.4462 F51
Conveyor screw flights 1.4462 F51
Infeed pipe 1.4462 F51
Lining (catch chamber) 1.4462 F51
(Status 13.12.2013)
* This is the same material as 1.4470-B1 !

Nr.: 072355/2010-A
WEG GERMANY GMBH Date: 05-JUL-2010
DATA SHEET
Three-phase Induction Motor - Squirrel Cage
Customer : GEA WESTFALIA SEPARATOR GMBH

Product code : 5290-2829-039
Product line : W22 - IE2 HIGH EFFICIENCY
Frame : 132M Enclosure : IP55 (TEFC)

Output : 9.2 kW Mounting : B8
Frequency : 50 Hz Rotation : Both
Poles : 2 Aprox. weight* : 70.0 kg
Rated speed : 2905-2915-2920 rpm Moment of inertia : 0.0234 kgm²
Slip : 3.17-2.83-2.67 % Sound Pressure Level : 67.0 dB(A) (global)
Rated voltage : 380-400-415/660-690V
Load Power factor Efficiency (%)**
Rated current : 17.7-17.3-17.1/10.2-10.0 A
100% 0.89-0.86-0.84 88.6-89.0-89.0
L. R. Amperes : 135-131-130/77.5-76.2 A
75% 0.85-0.81-0.77 89.0-89.0-88.6
Il/In : 7.6
50% 0.75-0.70-0.65 89.1-88.5-87.6
No load current : 6.60-7.60-8.60/3.80-4.41 A
Rated torque : 30.3-30.2-30.1 Nm Bearing Quantity (lubricant)
Locked rotor torque : 220-250-280 % Front 6308-ZZ -----
Breakdown torque : 280-320-330 % Rear 6207-ZZ -----
Design : N
Insulation class : F Lubrication interval: -----
Temperature rise : 80 K Grease - Polyrex EM - ESSO
Locked rotor time : 10-10-10 s (hot)
Service factor : 1.00
Duty cycle : S1
Ambient temperature : -20°C to +40°C
Altitude : 1000 m.a.s.l
Notes:
B8R (BRA)
Motor for VFD
- 25Hz 200VD 3,8kW 1470Upm 14,3A 24Nm
- 50Hz 400VD 7,5kW 2940Upm 14,3A 24Nm
The figures given herewith are regarded as guaranteed values and applied to sinusoidal power supplied motors, within permissible tolerances
under IEC 60034-1. Noise level with tolerance of +3 dB(A). (*) Weight value can be changed without previous notification. (**) Efficiencies
according to the indirect method of IEC 60034-2-1:2007 with stray load losses determined from measurement.
Performed Checked Revision Approved

stefan AUTOMATICO Nr.: 0 Date: 05-JUL-2010
WORKS STANDARD Edition: 13.02.2015
Corrosion protection :61

Decanters
General information, standards and manufacturer information 66-1100-01
Preparation and surface treatment 4 Sheets Sheet 1
(1'(
Sphere of application
This standard applies to all paint coatings on decanters.
General information
- Subject oil and water separator and blasting/painting machines to a visual inspection at least once per shift
to check function and soiling.
- The blast-cleaning material must be dry and free from dirt and oil.
- Blast-cleaning abrasives for outside and inside, sharp and angular.

Metallic blast-cleaning abrasives to ISO 11124, or non-metallic to ISO 11126.
- Subject roughness to a visual inspection in the form of a random sample, assess in line with
ISO surface roughness comparator "G", segment 2, to ISO 8503-1.
- Perform a visual inspection of degree of surface cleanliness,

assess in accordance with comparison standards ISO 8501-1; degree of cleanliness SA 2 ½ .
- Inspect the surface for defects of all kinds after blasting, have rework or repeat blasting carried out if necessary.
- After blasting, components must be primed within max. 24 hours in order

to prevent renewed corrosion forming on the blast-cleaned surfaces. Ensure that the components are stored
Copyright - reserved
dry in the meantime. If renewed corrosion cannot be ruled out, then blast-cleaning will have to be repeated
before painting.
- Relative humidity may not exceed 85 %.
- Air temperature may not be below 15 °C or above 35 °C during painting.
- Surface temperature must be at least 3 °C above the dew point.
- The surface of the component to be painted should be thoroughly cleaned - there should be no loose or
adherent dirt on or in the component. Before any further processing, ensure that surfaces are free from dust
and parting substances.
- Measure the wet film thickness WFT of individual coatings on a random sample basis.
- Allow to flash off in accordance with the processing specifications for the coating materials.
To avoid spoiled surfaces, the freshly-painted workpieces should be allowed to flash off before being oven-
dried and drying temperatures must be observed.
- Drying time in accordance with manufacturers' instructions only start once the component is completely heated
through.
- Check that drying times are adhered to between individual coatings and the
whole coating in accordance with the processing specifications for the coating materials
- Measure the dry film thickness (DFT) to DIN EN ISO 2808 of each individual coating and for the whole coating
on a random sample basis.
- At least 90 % of all measured values for film thickness must be greater than or equal to nominal dry film
thickness NDFT
and none of the other measured values may be less than 0.9 x NDFT (PSPC 90/10 standard). Maximum film
thickness should not exceed double nominal film thickness.
Worked: Checked: Standard Checked: GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

Data Management
13.02.15 C.Mumm 13.02.15 V.Knospe B.Wingenfeld 59302 Oelde, Germany
Edition: 13.02.2015 WORKS STANDARD
Sheet 2 WSN66-1100-01
- Inspect the surface of each individual coating for defects of all kinds have rework carried out if necessary
Manufacturer information
The application instructions and product data sheets provided by the manufacturers of the coating materials
should be read and observed.
Information on special request
- If the customer requests this specially, all ambient conditions and painting conditions can be recorded in the
form of a daily log which is then used as a basis for compiling a separate certificate.
- Check the coating adhesion of each individual coating and of the coating as a whole.
DIN EN ISO 2409/DIN EN ISO 16276 < 250 μm cross-cut to Gt0 /
> 250 μm X-cut to KW0
- Test of paint resistance using solvent.

(Place a cloth soaked in solvent on the cured paint surface for approx. 15 sec.
Then rub the cloth, applying gentle pressure. The cloth may not take on any colour, or at least only a minimal
amount. If minimal pull-off is visible, then the tested surface may not be sticky/the surface which has become
matt should polish up again easily. Use the original solvent for use with the paint tested as the test fluid.)
WORKS STANDARD Edition: 13.02.2015
:61
Corrosion protection
Decanters 66-1000-14
Textured paint (DIN EN ISO 12944-5: C3) 4 Sheets Sheet 1
(1'(
This standard applies to decanters.
6FRSH
All parts which are painted for the project in accordance with individual parts drawings and the section
on coating materials. Specific drawing information or order text information may supplement the
standard (e.g. surface)
Corrosion protection to DIN EN ISO 12944-5

Comparative paint system: A1.16 (corrosivity category: C3; duration of protection: medium)
Observe general specifications in line with WSN66-1100-01.
D 3ULPHLQGLYLGXDOSDUWV
Blast-clean individual parts

Surface preparation to DIN EN ISO 12944
- Degree of preparation SA 2 ½
- max. roughness depth approx. 60 μm (ISO surface roughness comparator "G", segment 2 to ISO 8503-1)
Clean, degrease if necessary, apply phosphate conversion coating (phosphate conversion coating ISO
9717-Fe/Feph 0.2 - 0.6/T1)
Prime with 2-component EP primer

Copyright - reserved
- Seevenax Universal primer 113-62, "blassgrün" [pale green] (WS mat. no. 6966-0295-090)
- Thickness 80 μm DFT
- Treat small pores and small bubbles
0DFKLQHZKROHSDUW
Apply temporary protection to machined surfaces if necessary
6WRUHSURWHFWHGIURPZHDWKHULQJ
2SWLRQDO
Step 2 can also be performed before Step 1. In this case, however,
the machined surfaces will have to be masked off (dust sheets and masking tape).
E )LQDOFRDWRISDLQW
(Before assembly or for components which are put into storage with final coat of paint already applied)
3UHDVVHPEOHRSWLRQDO
6PRRWKRIIWRXFKHGXSDUHDVRSWLRQDO
'HJUHDVHDSSO\SKRVSKDWHFRQYHUVLRQFRDWLQJSKRVSKDWHFRQYHUVLRQFRDWLQJ,62)H)HSK
7
$SSO\PRUHSULPHU
Make good any damaged areas in accordance with priming specifications
$SSO\ILOOHUDQGVDQGVPRRWKZLWKJUDGHDEUDVLYH
- Polyester filler, Finalin/22 grey (WS mat. no. 6966-0292-040)
- In the case of castings, only fill coarse surface defects (bubbles, relatively large pores)
- In the case of welded parts, only fill coarse surface defects (poor transitions between materials)
0DVNRIIGXVWVKHHWVDQGPDVNLQJWDSH
Worked: Checked: Standard Checked: GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

Data Management
13.02.15 C.Mumm 13.02.15 V.Knospe B.Wingenfeld 59302 Oelde, Germany
Edition: 13.02.2015 WORKS STANDARD
Sheet 2 WSN66-1000-14
3ULPHZLWKFRPSRQHQW(3SULPHU
- Seevenax Universal primer 113-62
- Colour to suit top coat
- Treat small pores and small bubbles with paint roller
3DLQWZLWKHSR[\UHVLQEDVHGFRPSRQHQWSDLQW
- Seevenax protective paint 112 (WSN66-0033-00)
- Coarse effect
- Nozzle: 1.5 mm
- Air pressure 2.5 - 3 bar/material pressure 5 bar
- Colour and RAL no. as per order
7RWDOQRPLQDOGU\ILOPWKLFNQHVV1')7ZLWKSUHWUHDWPHQW
- Nominal dry film thickness NDFT 160 μm
3UHSDUHIUDPHIRUDVVHPEO\
Remove masking (take off dust sheets and masking tape)
Clean
Preserve
6WRUHSURWHFWHGIURPZHDWKHULQJ
Documentation
Depending on customer requirements, the tests and checks are recorded in a daily log
as per WSN 66-1100-02
Sulanate of Oman


Title Technical Submittal for &HQWULIXJH8QLW Document no. MS-ME-PE&E-SBJ-15-015


Contractor Drake and Scull International L.L.C. Manufacturer GEA, GERMANY


' &XUYHV

Specific Energy Consumption
UCD 205
specific energy consumption (kWh/m³)

1
0
0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
capacity in m³/h incl. flocculent / dilution water (if installed)
Mechanical Separation / GEA Westfalia Separator

CD 205-00-02
Current - time - diagram
40
35
30
current (Amp.)
25
20
15
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
time (sec.)
decanter bowl speed starting time motor

size speed power frequency current
type rpm sec. - rpm KW Hz A
CD 205-00-02 5500 100 132 2915 7,5 50 13,7

Sulanate of Oman
BLOWER
Delivery Note

Sulanate of Oman
BLOWER
Bill of Lading

_____
Shipper
,__'i:ADING
Bill.. OF
Shippe(s Ref. B ill of Lading No.
GEA WE$TFALIA.SEPARATOR GROUP GMBH FMOJEAG03037
WERN.ER'- HABIG-STR. 1 icountryoforig!n ----------t--,;:-:-;---;-:------·--·----
Shipment No.
593'02 OE'.LDE 4/2450/09/003273
t;\
�,
GERMANY
�
I BILL OF LADING
- C�Q,iS·ig
- nee·-(if "T0-61°d-er" so indicate) PELORUS OCEAN LINE LIMITED
TO THE ORDER OF COMMERCIAL BANK OF Room 905, Silvercord Tower II, 30
Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon/
DUBAI, UAE Hong Kong
I hellogic-blanK-A4-2016
I
I
Notify Party (No calin shall attach for failure to notify) 1Y

DRAKE AND SCULL INTERNATIONAL 1 FFPl&�t'1·£�tiit8r a;gI$TICS
! JEBEL ALI FREE ZONE
P.O. BOX 15119, DUBAI ! POBOX: 27974
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES ! DUBAI,
j UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
! Tel: +971 48994111 / Fax: +971 42990488
j Port of Transhipment (if applicable) Transhipment Vessel (if applicable)
Pre-Carriage by ! Port of Loading

iPlace of Receipt ··· --···-···---···-·-·-··---+�.,..-,,---cc------
! HAMBURG, NORTH EUROPEAN
------ �---------···---- I SEAPORT
Vessel
--=-:--,---------------+''-::-,-
! Port of Discharge
----------- - -·----· ---·
Place of Delivery
-·-"''"···-·---·-·· --· --·-·····--·--- ----
No. of Original Bills of Lading
MSr-"YAMBURG / BER7404 I JEBEL ALI SEAPORT, 3 / THREE
, UAE
Number of pkgs.
·-·-------··· ·-· -
· -- -�- �---'----
- - ---
- --
Marks & Numbers Description of Goods and Pkgs.
or shipping units •··· ·- -- --·-·----- ---·-----Gross
---�--Weight Measurement
---------- -- · ---- - --�
FCL/FCL
ONE (1X20') CONTAINER
SAID TO CONTAIN:
CONTAINER NO/SEAL NO
AMFU3016489/A106942/20'/5CA/1517.000KG/25.000CBM(FCL/FCL)
5 CASE(S) 1517.000 KG 25.000 CBM
DRAKE AND SCULL 2ND PARTIAL SHIPMENT
INTERNATIONAL 1 PC UCO 205 DECANTER AND ITS ACCESSORIES.
ALL OTHER DETAILS AS PER APPLICANT'S PO
PO NO. 00014111 NO. 00014111 DATED 15/05/2016 AND BENEFICIARY'S
PORT OF DISCHARGE: OFFER NO. NOB-0257-15 REV 3 DATED 19/05/2016.
JEBEL ALI SEAPORT UAE
COVERING:
ACCESSORIES OF 1 PC UCO 205 DECANTER
SHIPMENT TERMS: CFR JEBEL ALI SEAPORT, UAE
-CONTINUED ON ATTACHED STATEMENT //FREIGHT PREPAID//

TOTAL: ONE (1X20') CONTAINER ONLY 1517.000 KG 25.000 CBM
Total No Temperature Control Instructions:

of Pkgs. 5 COPY NON-NEGOTIABLE
I
Freight Payable At i Excess Value Declaration: Refer to Clause 6 (3) (Bl + (C) on reverse side
HAMBURG !
-- Freight Details, Charges Etc.

!!S______ _ ___________ ____ __
pecial Clauses_ _
___
!! wise
RECEIVED by the Canierlhe Goods ns specified above in apparent good order and_ condition unless other-
staled, to be transported to such place as agreed, authorized or permitted herein and subject to all terms
I and conditions appearing on the rront and reverse or this Bill of Lading_to v.tiich the Merchant agrees by
j .,iccepting this Bill of Lading, any local privileges and customs notwithstanding
! The Particulars given above as sta1ed by the s�ipper and the weight. measure. quantity, condition, contents
! and value of the Good are unknown to the Carner.
! One of the original bill of lading shall lJe presented to the Carrier or his agent, duly endorsed, before the
] cargo shall be released, and the othel"(S) to become vr;il1.
--------i
Shipped On Board The Vessel
MSC HAMBURGBER7404 iPlace and Date of issue LADBERGEN, 05.09.2016
At HAMBURG On(date) 05.09.2016 I Signed on behalf of the Carrier: PELORUS OCEAN LINE
Signed By
HELLMANN WORLDWIDE LOGISTICS HELLMANN WORLDWIDE LOGISTICS
GMBH & CO. KG GMBH & CO. KG
By: --·----·-···----···-··
As Agents for Carrier Pelorus Ocean Line As Agents
Sulanate of Oman
BLOWER
Certificate of Origin

1----------------------�--------------r---------,
1 Absender - Consignor - Expediteur - Expedidor
A DURCHSCHRIFT
GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH COPY - COPIE - COP/A
Werner-Habig-Strasse 1
D-593 02 Oelde
EU RO PA ISCH E GEM EINS CH A FT
2 Empfiinger - Consignee - Destinataire - Destina/aria EUROPEAN COMMUNITY - COMMUNAUTE EUROPEENNE -
COMUNIDAD EUROPEA
DRAKE AND SCULL INTERNATIONAL
P.O. BOX 15119,
URSPRUNGSZEUGNIS
DUBAI,
CERTIFICATE OF ORIGIN - CERTIFICAT D'ORIGINE -
CERTIFICADO DE OR/GEN
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
3 Ursprungsland - Country of origin - Pays d'origine - Pais de origen
Federal Republic of Germany, Czech Republic
4 Anaaben iiber die Befiirderung - means of transport - expedition - expedicitin 5 Bemerkungen - remarks - observations - observaciones
by safreight DOCUMENTARY CREDI T NUMBER DLC1602163-02

DATE OF ISSUE 12.06.2016
ISSUING BANK COMMERCIAL BANK OF DUBAI
6 Laufende Nummer; Zeichen, Nummern, Anzahl und Art der Packstiicke; Warenbezeichnung 7 Menge
Item no., marks, nos., number and kind of packages, description of goods Quantity
No. de pas., marquage, nos., nombre et nature des co/is, description de marchandises Quantile
No. de orden, marcas, nos., cantidad y naturaleza de /os bultos, descripci6n de las mercancfas Cantidad
5 CASE(S)
total gross: 1517.0 KG
total net: 914,0 kg
Description of Goods and/or Services shall be:
2nd partial shipment
1 PC UCO 205 DECANTER AND I TS ACCESSORIES . ALL OTHER DETAILS
AS PER APPLICANT'S PO NO. 00014111 DATED 15/05/2016 AND BENEFICIARY'S
OFFER NO. N08-0257-15 REV 3 DATED 19/05/2016.
Covering:
ACCESSORIES OF 1 PC UCO 205 DECANTER
(details as per attached delivery n ote)
8 DIE UNTERZEICHNENDE STELLE BESCHEINIGT, DASS DIE OBEN BEZEICHNETEN WAREN IHREN URSPRUNG IN DEM IN FELD 3 GENANNTEN LAND HABEN
The undersigned authority certifies that the goods described above originate in the country shown in box 3
L'autorite soussignee certifie que Jes marchandises designees ci-dessus sont originaires du pays figurant dans la case No. 3
La autoridad infrascrita certifica que las mercancfas arriba mencionadas son originarfas def pafs que figura en la casilla no. 3
...a:
w
a: a,
w 0
:,
,o
�
..:
...w :fai
...
:c
Ort und Datum der Ausstellung; Bezeichnung, Unterschrift und Stempel der zusliindigen Stelle
i m Q)
i
Place and date of issue; name, signature and stamp of competent authority
Lieu et date de de/ivrance; designation, signature et cachet de J'autorite competente
Lugar y fecha de expedici6n; nombre, firma y sel/o de la autoridad competente
Genehmigt mil Verfiigung durch die Bundesfinanzdirektion Siidost vom 01. Marz 2010 Z 4275 2 / ZF 411
Sulanate of Oman
BLOWER
Test Certificate

Qualitatspri.if-Zertifikat DIN 55 350-18 - 4.2.2 * Blatt 1 / 1
Quality Test Certificate DIN 55 350-18 - 4.2.2 • Page 1 / 1
Unsere Auflrags-Nr.: 638077/02 Typ: UCO 205-00-00/30
Our Order No.: Model:
Beste lier: DRAKE AND SCULL INTRNATIONAL Kunden Bestell-Nr.:

Purchaser: Custome(s Order No.:
Empfanger: DRAKE AND SCULL INTERNATIONAL

Receiver:
-
Prufstandslauf mit Flussigkeit
Test bay run with liquid
Masch.-Fabr.-Nr.: 8061-484 Trommel-Fabr.-Nr.: 8061-484 Schnecken-Fabr.-Nr.: 8061-484

Machine Serial No.: Bowl Serial No.: Conveyor screw No.:
Betriebsbedingungen: Zulauf: 1.0 m3/h Trommeldrehzahl: 5500 min- 1

Load Conditions: Feed: Bowl speed:
Motordaten
Motor
Hersteller: WEG Motor-Nr.: 1031928103 Motortyp: W22 132M-2 (IE3)
Manufacturer: Serial No.: Motor Model:
P= 9.2kW U= 415V = 16.1 A n= 2935 min·1 f = 50 Hz cos <p= 0.87
PrOfdatum: 18/08/2016 Name des Prufers: SURESH KUMAR.S

Test date: Name of tester:
Der Dekanter wurde beim Probelauf mit Wasser getestet.

The decanter was tested by feeding water.

Wemer-Habig-Stralle 1, 59302 Oelde, Deutschland
Abnahme / Inspection
12/09/2016 by order
Stempelung Datum Hersteller-PrOfbeauflragter
Stamp Date Inspection Representative of the Manufacturer
• entspricht dem: AbnahmeprOfzeugnis 3.1 nach EN 10204 : 2004
equivalen1 of: lnspedion Certificate 3.1 acc. to EN 10204 : 2004
Sulanate of Oman
BLOWER
O & M Manual

TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION
TECHNISCHE DOKUMENTATION
Decanter
EDITION / AUSGABE - 22.08.2016
CUSTOMER / KUNDE: Drake & Scull International

WS-ORDER NO. / WS-BESTELL 1.452.638.077
NR.:
SERIE / SERIE: 8061-484
MODEL / MODELL: UCD 205-00-00/30
REVISION / REVISION: 00
engineering for a better world www.gea.com

1.452.638.077 / 00 / 22.08.2016
Die Verfasser freuen sich immer über Kommentare und Ratschläge

diese Dokumentation betreffend. Sie können gesandt werden an
The authors are always for comments and suggestions for

improving the documentation. They can be sent to
© GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde, Germany
Tel.: +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@gea.com, www.gea.com

1.452.638.077 / 00 / 22.08.2016
CONTENTS / INHALT
COVER SHEET
DECKBLATT
1 SAFETY
SICHERHEIT
1.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATIONS 5
SICHERHEITSHINWEISE FUER ANLAGEN
1.2 QUALIFICATION PERSONNEL 21
QUALIFIKATION PERSONAL.
1.3 SAFETY 29
SICHERHEIT
2 DOCUMENTS RELATING TO ORDERS
PROJEKTBEZOGENE DOKUMENTE
2.1 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS 55
GRAFIKSYMBOLE
2.2 ORDER INFORMATION SPARE PARTS FOR INSTALLATIONS 67
BESTELLINFO ERSATZTEILE F. ANLAGEN
3 CONTROL UNIT
STEUER- UND REGELEINRICHTUNG
3.1 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 73
STROMLAUFPLAN
3.2 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 219
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
3.3 CONTROL UNIT
STEUERGERAET
IM-71-CTU_OP177B 331
4 CENTRIFUGE
ZENTRIFUGE
4.1 CENTRIFUGE 711
ZENTRIFUGE
4.2 DIMENSIONED DRAWING 833
MASSBLATT
4.3/8%5,&$7,21&+$57 841
SCHMIERPLAN
4.4 PARTS CATALOGUE 863
ERSATZTEILKATALOG
1.452.638.077 / 00 / 22.08.2016
5 PUMP
PUMPE
5.1 ECCENTRIC SCREW PUMP UNIT
EXZENTERSCHNECKENPUMPE
NM038BY - D8384292-D8384293 905
6 MEASUREMENT
MESSTECHNIK
6.1 PROXIMITY SENSOR
NAEHERUNGSINITIATOR
NJ5-11-N-G 1151
7 MOTOR
MOTOR
7.1 THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
DREHSTROMMOTOR
IM-133-MOT 1155

Safety precautions
for plants
No.: 9001
Edition: 0712
Designation: Safety precautions

2 9001 / 0712 / Safety precautions / 25.07.2012
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION
Subject to modification!
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving the
documentation. They can be sent to

Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@geagroup.com,· www.westfalia-separator.com
GEA Westfalia Separator Group

9001 / 0712 / Safety precautions / 25.07.2012 3
For your safety

• Strictly adhere to instructions marked with this symbol.
This avoids damage to the plant or plant components.
• Take special care when carrying out operations marked with this
symbol -
otherwise danger to life.
Note: • This symbol is not a safety precaution but rather a reference to infor-
mation which help to better understand the plant components and the
processes.
• Observe the accident prevention regulations!

The local safety and accident prevention regulations apply uncondi-
tionally to the operation of the plant. The plant operator must ensure
compliance with these regulations.
• Follow the instructions in the manual.

Follow only the instructions given in this manual.
Repair and maintenance work that goes beyond the scope described
in this manual may not be carried out.

1 Safety precautions
1.1 Safety markings ....................................................................................... 5

1.1.1 Safety markings and their meaning ......................................................... 5
1.2 Performing work on a plant ...................................................................... 8
1.2.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel ......................... 8
1.2.2 Spare part requirements .......................................................................... 9
1.2.3 Electrical installation ................................................................................ 9
1.2.4 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 10
1.2.5 Start-up .................................................................................................. 11
1.2.6 Shut-down and »Emergency-Off« ......................................................... 13

1.1 Safety markings

The safety markings (adhesives and metal plates) are attached to all plants, on
the hood and frame of the respective plant component in such a way that they
are clearly visible.
All safety markings on the plant, control system and plant components must al-
ways be in perfect condition.
• Clean dirty safety markings.
• Replace damaged safety markings.
1.1.1 Safety markings and their meaning

The following safety markings must be attached to the monitoring system as
adhesive labels:
Be sure to adhere to the plant

documentation!
• Every person who is assigned the
task of installing, operating, main-
taining and repairing the plant must
have read and understood the doc-
umentation.
• The documentation must be com-
plete kept near to the installation
and be readily accessible to the op-
erators. It must be available to the
operators at all times!
Fig. 1
Disconnect power prior to start-

ing work!
Risk of injury due to electrical voltage
and unintended start-up of the plant!
Before carrying out work on the

plant and electrical plant compo-
nents:
• Make sure the plant is at a standstill.
• Switch off all electrical appliances
via the main switch,
• Lock the installation to prevent it
Fig. 2 from being accidentally switched on.

Frequency converter operation!

• When setting the frequency convert-
er, do not exceed the admissible
speed (see nameplate)!
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for
frequency converter operation.
Fig. 3
Warning of extreme surface

temperatures!
The surfaces of the plant components

can be hot!
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for hot
operation.
Fig. 4
Danger due to electrical current!

Non-compliance with the protective
measures can result in serious dam-
age to persons or property.
Before working on electrical com-

ponents:
• Switch off all electrical appliances
via the main switch,
CAUTION:
The parts marked in this way can
carry voltage even when the main
Fig. 5 switch is off!
• Lock the installation to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.

• Take adequate preventive measures according to the national orovisions (in
Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verein
Deutscher Elektriker / Association of German Electrical Engineers) or EVU
(Europäische Vereinigung für Unfallforschung und Unfallanalyse / European
Association for Accident Research and Analysis) institutions.
• The work may only be carried out by competent persons (qualified technical
specialists).

Potential equalisation (protec-

tive-earth terminal)
The grounding protection is a measure
which, in the case of a malfunction,
leads off the touch voltage into the
earth.
Fig. 6

1.2 Performing work on a plant
The plant works reliably, provided that

it is operated and maintained in ac-
cordance with our operating instruc-
tions.
Fig. 7
Special attention must be given to:

• assembly
• electrical installation
• before start-up
• start-up
• shut-down
• maintenance and repair
1.2.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel

Operating, maintaining or repairing the plant requires specialized knowledge!
CAUTION!
Operating, maintenance or repair work by unqualified or unauthorized
personnel can lead to operating, assembly and handling errors and severe
damage to persons and property.
Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by unqualified

or unauthorized personnel!
For operation, maintenance and repair work, personnel may only be deployed
who
• have reached a minimum age of 18 years.
• are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings and train-
ing.
• are adequately qualified for performing the work and checking it.
Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized electrician!
The operator of the plant

• is responsible for the necessary skills and knowledge of the personnel.
• is responsible for briefing and training the personnel.
• must be sure that the personnel have read and understood the manuals nec-
essary to carry out their work.

Westfalia Separator offers a an extensive range of training and advanced train-

ing courses. You can obtain further information from Westfalia Separator or from
one of the authorized representatives.
1.2.2 Spare part requirements
• Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia

Separator.
The use of non-genuine parts leads to:
– safety risks,
– less durability and availability,
– increased service requirement.
If a safety risk occurs when using non-original
spare parts, this may have legal consequences
Fig. 8 for the responsible persons. In such cases,
Westfalia Separator accepts no liability or war-
ranty claims.
1.2.3 Electrical installation
• Electrical work may only be car-

ried out by an authorized electri-
cian!
• The governing accident prevention
regulations apply for the electrical
appliances and installations.
• Special attention must be paid to the
installation guidelines of Westfalia
Separator.
• The frequency and voltage of the
power supply must correspond to
the machine specifications.
Fig. 9
• Carry out voltage equalization.

• Observe legal regulations; e.g. in the EU:
– Low-voltage guideline 73/23/EWG
– Electro-magnetic compatibility 89/336/EWG.
– Guidelines of the classification societies.

1.2.4 Before start-up
• Check that the lubrication and cool-

ing systems are serviceable.
Fig. 10
• Check whether the supervisory

equipment is operational and the
correct limit values are adjusted.
• When hoods, concentrate collectors
and vessels are pressurized, e.g. by
– inert gas blanketing,
– cooling,
– steam sterilization etc.
the pressures stated on the boiler
plate must not be exceeded.
Fig. 11
• Check that the product lines are set

to operation.
• Regularly check hoses for signs of
ageing.
• Check sight glasses for mechanical
damage.
• Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately by new or reconditioned
parts.
Fig. 12

1.2.5 Start-up
• Wear ear protection.
Fig. 13
In case of frequency converter

operation:
• Do not under any circumstances
manipulate the frequency converter
to exceed the permissible speed
(see nameplate).
• The plant may only be operated with
an independent device for speed
limiting.
Fig. 14
• Do not feed product which is catego-

rised as explosive.
• Do not operate the equipment in ex-
plosion-hazarded areas.
Note:
This is except for plants equipped for
operation in explosion-hazarded areas.
Fig. 15

• The plant may be fed with inflam-

mable product only when being in-
ert-gas blanketed.
• The oxygen level has to be kept be-
low limit of inflammability by means
of an appropriate inert gas.
Fig. 16
• When processing products harmful

to persons, observe the pertinent
safety regulations.
• Refer to the safety data sheet of the
product.
• Wear protective clothing.
Fig. 17
Only in case of hot operation:

• Product-contacting parts such as
– pipes and hoses,
– components,
– vessels
o
reach temperatures over 80 C
o
(176 F).
Fig. 18

1.2.6 Shut-down and »Emergency-Off«
• For shut-down refer to the chapter

"Operation".
Fig. 19

Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Для записей
Muistiinpanot
Σημειώσεις
Notater
Notes
Note


Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488
Qualification of staff
Edition: 0712
Designation: Qualification of staff

2 0712 / Qualification of staff
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving the
documentation. They can be sent to

Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488

0712 / Qualification of staff 3
Qualification of staff
Work on / with separators requires special skills.

• Provide staff with special training / instruction for the following tasks:
– Operation,
– Maintenance,
– Repair.
• Clearly define responsibilities:
– Work performed by authorised persons only.
Type and source of danger:

Storage, transportation, erection, operation and maintenance of the sep-
arator / system by insufficiently trained staff.
Possible consequences of failure to observe:

Danger Incorrect operation, assembly and handling errors can cause serious damage,
injury / death.
Measures to prevent the danger:

– Use Westfalia Separator service.
– Take advantage of training opportunities.
– Read/follow operating manuals / operating instructions.
Westfalia Separator offers a comprehensive range of training measures.
The owner-operator is responsible for the training of staff.
NOTE
Contact Westfalia Separator or your nearest representative for more infor-

mation.
The owner-operator must select staff who, for example, fulfil the following re-
quirements:
• Minimum requirement:
– Read / understand the markings on the separator,
– Read / understand user instructions.
• Further requirements and skills:
– Basic general technical skills.
– Content of the operating manual / operating instruction.
– Measures for the prevention of accidents.
– Planning and implementation of installation.
– Securing of loads.
– Planning and implementation of start-up.
– Operation of the separator / system.
– Cleaning of the separator / system.
– Maintenance of the separator / system.
– Repair of the separator / system.
– Storage in case of extended periods of stoppage.

– Decommissioning of the separator / system.

– Disposal of operating material.
– Disposal of the separator / system.
• Other suitability:
– Only assign tasks to dependable persons.
– Minimum age of 18 years.
• Only employ persons undergoing training / apprenticeship under supervision.
The required skills and knowledge depend on the

tasks assigned.
NOTE
We reserve all rights to these documents. They may only be passed onto third parties after obtaining prior consent from Westfalia Separator Group GmbH.


Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note


Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488
Safety Precautions and User Instructions
for
Machine and Plant Components
No. 2058-9601-100
Edition 1110
GEA Mechanical Equipment / GEA Westfalia Separator Group

2 2058-9601-100 / 1110
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving
the documentation. They can be addressed to:

Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde
Tel. +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@geagroup.com, www.westfalia-separator.com
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 3
1 About this document 5
1.1 Scope of application ................................................................................ 6

1.2 Qualification of the personnel .................................................................. 6
1.2.1 Operating personnel ................................................................................ 6
1.2.2 Service and repair personnel ................................................................... 6
1.3 Structure of the documentation................................................................ 7
1.4 Symbols used .......................................................................................... 7
1.5 Warnings .................................................................................................. 8
2 Safety precautions 9
2.1 Intended use .......................................................................................... 10

2.2 Non-compliance with the intended use .................................................. 10
2.3 Residual risk .......................................................................................... 10
2.4 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 11
2.5 Safety instructions for the personnel ..................................................... 12
2.6 Adjustments / commissioning ................................................................ 12
2.7 Maintenance and servicing .................................................................... 12
2.8 Special types of hazard ......................................................................... 12
2.8.1 Electricity................................................................................................ 12
2.9 Oils, greases and other chemical substances ....................................... 13
3 Product overview 15
3.1 Description and operating principles ..................................................... 16

3.2 Operating conditions .............................................................................. 16
3.3 Transport................................................................................................ 16
3.4 Storage .................................................................................................. 16
4 Installation 17
4.1 Measures to be taken prior to installation .............................................. 18

4.2 Mounting ................................................................................................ 18
4.2.1 Fitting with threaded connection ............................................................ 18
4.2.2 Fitting with flange connection ................................................................ 18
4.3 Electrical connection .............................................................................. 19
4.4 Pneumatic connection ........................................................................... 19
4.5 Explosion-hazarded zone ...................................................................... 19
5 Maintenance and servicing 21
5.1 Cleaning and care .................................................................................. 22

5.2 Maintenance .......................................................................................... 22
5.3 Repair .................................................................................................... 22
6 Disposal 23
®
Westfalia Separator
4 2058-9601-100 / 1110
7 Spare parts 23
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 5
1 About this document
1.1 Scope of application ................................................................................ 6

1.2.1 Operating personnel ................................................................................ 6
1.2.2 Service and repair personnel ................................................................... 6
1.3 Structure of the documentation................................................................ 7
1.4 Symbols used .......................................................................................... 7
1.5 Warnings .................................................................................................. 8
®
Westfalia Separator
6 2058-9601-100 / 1110
1.1 Scope of application

These Safety Precautions and User Instructions provide important support for
– avoiding risks,
– reducing repair cost and down times, and
– extending the life cycle of components
The term “component” will be used in singular although this document is appli-
cable to all components incorporated in the separators/plants.
To ensure perfect operating safety of the component, these safety precautions
and user instructions have to be thoroughly read and understood prior to:
– installation
– transport, storage
– maintenance work (cleaning and care, maintenance, servicing, repair) and
– disposal
For questions that cannot be solved with the aid of this documentation, please
check back with GEA Westfalia Separator Group.
1.2 Qualification of the personnel

Using these safety and user instructions and direct handling of the component
require specialist qualification of the staff. For identifying the qualification level
GEA Westfalia Separator Group uses the following standard terms:
1.2.1 Operating personnel

• Qualified staff have the necessary technical know-how and extensive expe-
rience enabling them to avoid the risks that can arise when handling electrical
or mechanical components. English language skills are prerequisite.
• Trained staff are instructed or supervised by qualified staff to enable them to
avoid the risks that can arise when handling electrical or mechanical compo-
nents.
When installing, operating and testing the equipment, the staff has to adhere to
the safety rules applicable in the respective industry.
1.2.2 Service and repair personnel

Service and repair work require specialist knowledge and skills. Such work may
be carried out only by competent persons in terms of specialist knowledge and
skills. Documents in English are provided for this circle of persons. It is essential
that this circle of persons has an adequate command of English.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 7
1.3 Structure of the documentation
• Refer to all the documents listed!

Danger through non-observance of the documentation
– Instruction manuals for separators and/or start-up and shut-down instruc-

WARNING! tions for plants
– Safety and user instructions on machine and plant documentation
• All safety precautions and warning instructions given in the documents have
– Component manual
• Access to the documentation on site must be ensured at all times.

to be adhered to!
The standard documentation for components comprises:
1. Instruction manuals for separators and/or start-up and shut-down instruc-

tions for plants
2. Safety and user instructions on machine and plant documentation (this
document).
3. Reference to component manual and / or technical datasheet of the com-
ponent.
1.4 Symbols used
This symbol gives information for better understanding the compo-

nent and its functions.
• A bullet point used when describing work and/or operation steps.

Be sure to proceed in correct order: from top to bottom.
– The dash (horizontal bar) is used for listing.
®
Westfalia Separator
8 2058-9601-100 / 1110
1.5 Warnings
Hazards are marked as warnings with a signal word reflecting the gravity and
probability and allocated safety colours according to ANSI Z535.
Warning Meaning
Stands for an impending threat of a hazard which will result in

severe physical injury or even death.
DANGER!
Stands for a potentially hazardous situation which could result

in severe physical injury or death.
WARNING!
Stands for a potentially hazardous situation which could result

in minor physical injury. This signal word can also be used for
warnings against damage to assets.
CAUTION!
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 9
2.1 Intended use .......................................................................................... 10

2.2 Non-compliance with the intended use .................................................. 10
2.3 Residual risk .......................................................................................... 10
2.4 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 11
2.5 Safety instructions for the personnel ..................................................... 12
2.6 Adjustments / commissioning ................................................................ 12
2.7 Maintenance and servicing .................................................................... 12
2.8 Special types of hazard ......................................................................... 12
2.8.1 Electricity................................................................................................ 12
2.9 Oils, greases and other chemical substances ....................................... 13
®
Westfalia Separator
10 2058-9601-100 / 1110
The machine or plant component is built according to state-of-the-art and to

prevailing safety rules and regulations. However, when using the component,
risks may arise for the user or third party or the component or other assets
might get damaged if it is
– operated by untrained or uninstructed staff,
– incorrectly used,
– inadequately maintained or serviced.
2.1 Intended use

The component is incorporated in machines and plants.
Precise details on the function of the component are found in the component
manufacturer’s manual.
The characteristics of the medium specified in the data sheet and the pressure
and temperature limit values for the medium mentioned in the specification must
be adhered to at all times.
The specific values stated in the documents furnished with the component have
to be observed and adhered to.
Any use in an explosion-hazarded area is not allowed. The only exception: this
is confirmed in the order or is mentioned in the Instruction Manual or in the
manufacturer’s data sheet.
2.2 Non-compliance with the intended use

Any use that deviates from or exceeds the intended use is considered to be
non-compliant. Solely the user of the machine/plant will be responsible for dam-
age resulting from incorrect usage. This also applies to modifications performed
on one’s own.
Non-intended use is the use of
– materials with excessively high temperature
– materials under excessively high pressure
– material containing smouldering, burning, or sticking particles
– highly explosive and pasty materials
– materials chemically reacting with the material of the component
The user is solely responsible for the operation and/or rating of the component.
Incorrect usage of components

Death or severe bodily injury to persons or damage to assets through disre-
garding mechanical, chemical and electrical risks.
• The specific values stated in the documents furnished with the component
WARNING!
have to be observed and adhered to.
2.3 Residual risk

An element of risk will remain when using the components, even when strictly
adhering to all safety rules and regulations.
Any person working with the component has to be aware of these remaining
risks and must follow all the instructions avoiding accidents or damage.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 11
Hazardous voltage - danger to life

Risk of death or serious injury through electric shock!
DANGER! • Work on electric apparatus and/or on live component equipment must be
performed by qualified staff only.
• Disconnect the power supply to electric equipment if required.
• Secure against unexpected restarting.
• Apply a warning sign prohibiting switching back on.
Danger when not using personal protective equipment

Risk of lethal injury when not using personal protective equipment (PPE)!
• Operating/maintenance staff must be obliged to wear PPE.
• Wear safety boots, safety goggles, ear protection, etc., depending on tasks
DANGER!
and conditions.
• When surface temperatures of > 50 °C or < 0 °C (> 122 °F or < 32 °F) pr e-
vail, wear temperature-resistant protective gloves when working on compo-
nents.
Danger through lack of attention when working in the area of the compo-
nent
Crushing, cutting and abrasion injuries.
WARNING! • Be sure to work and move carefully in the area around the component.
Risk of eye and/or skin injuries when medium discharges under high
pressure
Abrasive or corrosive substances destroy the component!
• Wear protective goggles or face-mask with eye protection against spouting
WARNING!
medium.
2.4 Safety markings

The following markings (adhesive and metal plates) are fastened to the compo-
nent or its accessories:
Warning of dangerous voltage!
The sign is fastened on the electric terminal box.

The terminal box may only be opened by a qualified electrician.
Nameplate The nameplate contains specific component data.
All safety markings must always be in perfect condition.

• Clean dirty safety markings.
• Replace damaged safety markings.
• Note the safety marking.
®
Westfalia Separator
12 2058-9601-100 / 1110
2.5 Safety instructions for the personnel

The component must be operated only in perfect condition, for the intended use,
taking into account security rules and being aware of risks, duly adhering to the
documentation.
Any fault – especially those potentially impairing safety - must be remedied im-
mediately!
Clearly define and adhere to responsibilities for operation and maintenance.
This is the only way to avoid errors – especially in dangerous situations.
Do not use the component until all protection and safety devices are installed
and serviceable! Do NOT remove them during operation.
In case of malfunction or safety-relevant change in operational behaviour, shut
down and secure the separator or the plant. Have faults remedied by qualified
staff immediately.
Leaking dangerous material must be discharged so as to avoid danger to the
operator and to the environment.
Do NOT touch damaged, cracked and, especially, live components.
2.6 Adjustments / commissioning

The medium throughput might change or be interrupted while the component is
being commissioned. Prior to commissioning, make sure that there will be no
risk for people or the environment while performing adjustments.
Each adjustment must be followed by a functional check.
Take appropriate measures to prevent crushing injuries by moving adjustment
devices.
2.7 Maintenance and servicing

When carrying out maintenance work, strictly adhere to all rules and regulations
applicable for handling the component or the medium (e.g. protective clothing,
no smoking).
Adhere to the check-up or inspection intervals specified in applicable laws
and/or in the documentation.
Check wires and hoses for damage and replace if necessary, especially on
moving components.
2.8 Special types of hazard
2.8.1 Electricity
Never carry out work on live parts!
Do not change safety-related design parameters! Especially, do NOT restrict
leakage paths, air gaps, and clearances with insulating coatings.
Check wires for damage at regular intervals and replace if necessary.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 13
2.9 Oils, greases and other chemical substances

When handling oils, greases, and chemicals, adhere to the applicable rules and
regulations and manufacturers’ data sheets for these materials concerning stor-
age, handling, usage, and disposal!
After eye or skin contact, rinse the affected area immediately with water.
®
Westfalia Separator
14 2058-9601-100 / 1110
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 15
3 Product overview
3.1 Description and operating principles ..................................................... 16

3.2 Operating conditions .............................................................................. 16
3.3 Transport................................................................................................ 16
3.4 Storage .................................................................................................. 16
®
Westfalia Separator
16 2058-9601-100 / 1110
3.1 Description and operating principles

The detailed description and functional principle of the respective component
are given in the corresponding component manual.
3.2 Operating conditions

Housing and gasket materials are selected in accordance with operating condi-
tions. Operating conditions essentially determine the service live of the compo-
nent.
• Technical characteristics and the essential permissible limit values, especially
for pressure and temperature of the medium, are given in the manufacturer’s
manual.
• Care must be taken that the component is only used where the rating criteria
comply with the values stated on the nameplate. Correct transport and appro-
priate storage are prerequisite.
• Faults arising from moving elements must be prevented by taking appropriate
measures.
3.3 Transport
Be sure to comply with the following:
Danger through contact with substances hazardous to health

During operation the component might have come into contact with substances
that are hazardous to health.
WARNING!
• De-contaminate the component prior to packing and/or transport.
• Use lifting devices to transport heavy components that cannot be moved by

hand.
• Screw eye bolts or lugs into the component and suspend them properly to the
lifting device, and then transport.
• When using lifting straps, place them around the component, provide sharp-
edge protection if required, and watch for proper weight distribution.
• During transport, protect the component against external force (impacts, vi-
bration, etc.).
• Protect the sealing surfaces of connections against damage.
• Do not damage the corrosion-preventive coating.
3.4 Storage
• Protect the component against external impacts and contamination.
– Keep the storage room as dry and dust-free as possible.
– Avoid water condensation.
– Protect open connection ports from dirt.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 17
4 Installation
4.1 Measures to be taken prior to installation .............................................. 18

4.2 Mounting ................................................................................................ 18
4.2.1 Fitting with threaded connection ............................................................ 18
4.2.2 Fitting with flange connection ................................................................ 18
4.3 Electrical connection .............................................................................. 19
4.4 Pneumatic connection ........................................................................... 19
4.5 Explosion-hazarded zone ...................................................................... 19
®
Westfalia Separator
18 2058-9601-100 / 1110
• Refer to the component manual for specific information on the component.

• Before installation, read and follow the instructions in the chapter “Safety pre-
cautions”.
• Observe the accident prevention regulations!
4.1 Measures to be taken prior to installation
Packaging damaged during transport and/or storage

Component might not comply with safety rules.
• Check for possible damage prior to installation.
• Do not install any defective component.
CAUTION!
Ta ke th e fo llo win g m e a s u re s p rio r to in s ta lla tio n :

• Check that the line system and the component are perfectly clean.
• Remove protection caps from the connectors directly before installation only.
• Do NOT damage sealing surfaces and threads respectively.
4.2 Mounting
• Remove all packaging material immediately before installation only.
• No dirt particles must seep into the component!
• Bear in mind the flow direction indicated on the component if required.
Afte r in s ta lla tio n

• Check for possible leakage and for proper function.
• Create the specified operating status.
4.2.1 Fitting with threaded connection

• Use appropriate sealing aid.
• Arrange the piping layout so that flux across the component will be avoided.
4.2.2 Fitting with flange connection

• Use the specified screws. Use all the flange bores provided.
• Insert appropriate seals and center them properly between the flanges.
• Tighten the screws evenly and crosswise to prevent warping. Under no cir-
cumstances should the pipeline be pulled against the component.
• Watch for proper location of seals.
• Tighten screws to the specified torques.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 19
4.3 Electrical connection

For a component with electric equipment:
Hazardous voltage - danger to life

Risk of death or serious injury through electric shock!
DANGER! • Work on electric apparatus and/or on live component equipment must be per-
formed by qualified staff only.
• Disconnect the power supply to electric equipment.
• Prevent unexpected restarting.
• Apply a warning sign prohibiting switching back on.
• Earth the component according to local rules.
• Take adequate preventive measures according to the provisions of the local
electric power company.
4.4 Pneumatic connection

Actuate only with treated compressed air. If necessary, install a compressed air
control unit upstream-
4.5 Explosion-hazarded zone

Any use in an explosion-hazarded area is not allowed. The only exception: this
is confirmed in the order or is mentioned in the Manual or in the manufacturer’s
data sheet.
®
Westfalia Separator
20 2058-9601-100 / 1110
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 21
5 Maintenance and servicing
5.1 Cleaning and care .................................................................................. 22

5.2 Maintenance .......................................................................................... 22
5.3 Repair .................................................................................................... 22
®
Westfalia Separator
22 2058-9601-100 / 1110
This chapter comprises: cleaning and servicing, maintenance and repair.

• Before carrying out maintenance and repair, read and follow the instructions
in the chapter “Safety precautions”.
5.1 Cleaning and care
Damage to the component, caused by a layer of dirt

Clogging of functional openings. Impairment of heat dissipation!
• Arrange for efficient covering of the component when carrying out dirty work
CAUTION!
near the separator or the plant (e.g. laying concrete, brickwork, painting, sand-
blasting).
• Clean the component regularly.
Malfunction due to damage to the component

Risk of material damage through inappropriate cleaning!
• When cleaning with aqueous detergents, note the type of protection of electric
CAUTION! components. Do not apply them when in doubt!
• Do not use aggressive cleaning agents. Otherwise metal or plastic surfaces as
well as hose connections might be attacked.
• Never clean sensitive components with hard brushes applying excessive force.
• Use lint-free cleaning rags only.
5.2 Maintenance
• The maintenance intervals have to be re-determined (shortened) by the oper-
ator according to prevailing operating conditions.
• Check or maintain the component for safety reasons. When doing so, observe
the following minimum requirements:
– Check visible condition of the component and its accessories at regular in-
tervals.
– Actuate the component parts on a regular basis to ensure that proper func-
tioning of all moving parts will not be impaired by long-term standstill.
5.3 Repair
Material damage due to mechanical overload on component parts

Impacts by kicks, mechanical stress originating from connected pipelines, ex-
cessive ambient temperatures will destroy the component!
• Install parts without force. Avoid tension and strain.
WARNING!
• Avoid excessive load, e.g. impacts by kicks (wrongfully climbing on the com-
ponent).
• Avoid welding and thermal treatment.
• Avoid working on the components with tools (e.g. drilling).
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 23
6 Disposal
• Comply with the prevailing statutory regulations to ensure proper, environ-

mentally sound disposal.
Danger through contact with substances hazardous to health

During operation the component might have come into contact with substances
that are hazardous to health.
• Decontaminate prior to disposal.
WARNING!
7 Spare parts
Spare, wear parts and operating materials can cause damage

to persons and assets if they do not meet the requirements.
Genuine spare parts and operating materials from GEA West-
falia Separator Group satisfy all requirements for the operating
• Use only genuine spare parts.

safety of the machine or installation.
• Use only original operating materials.

• Use the spare parts catalogue supplied.
®
Westfalia Separator
24 2058-9601-100 / 1110
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde (Germany)
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
How to Order Spare Parts and other consumables for Equipment supplied
by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
Please contact the local GEA Westfalia Separator Group office closest to your site for
all your support requirements, to place spare parts orders or to request local on-site
support for all of your GEA Westfalia Separator Group equipment needs.
If you do not have the contact information handy, the contact details can easily be
found at:
www.westfalia-separator.com/service/service-contacts-worldwide.html
If you do not have Internet access, please call us and ask us for the local contact
details at our Headquarter in Oelde Germany:
Telephone: +49 2522 77 - 0
To speed up the handling of your request and to ensure that we supply the correct
parts, please include the following information with your requests:
- Machine Model and Serial Number (can be found on the machine ID label)
- Part numbers from the attached spare part list.
- Part description as taken from the spare part list.
- Requested quantity of each part.
- Your requisition number / Purchase Order number.
- Requested date of delivery.
Page 1 / 6 GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

- Your Company Contact details
 Your complete company name
(so we may research your account number)
 Your Billing address (if different from the Delivery address)
 Your requested Delivery address including Postal Zip Codes
The GEA Westfalia Separator Group Service Philosophy
Under the brand name serv&care we offer you as our customer and the operator who
is maintenance responsible of our delivered machine, these added values.
Please contact your local GEA Westfalia Separator Service Center in your area; for
contact information, see the above Internet link. The local serv&care team will be
pleased to provide support for all of your Spare Parts, On-Site Service and Repair
related matters.
The name serv&care combines two aspects of the modern service world
“serv” stands for service, meaning concrete actions to help in any way to maintain
the equipment of our customers. Whether it is for Spare Parts supply, assistance
using our excellent Field Service Engineers or our factory authorized comprehensive
repairs, all are covering the requirements of our customers. The main values of these
services for our customers are speed and quality. Our worldwide service network
serves as a basis to allow us to fulfill your requirement. GEA Westfalia Separator
Group offers on-time delivery of spare parts through our logistic hubs, local stock
levels and a global network of highly trained and experienced Field Service
Engineers and also having the specialized machinery in our Authorized Workshops
for comprehensive and safe repairs that only we can provide.

“care” stands for the driving force of our service organization to be an innovative and
reliable partner. Together with our customers we strive to find optimum solutions that
fulfill and exceed their expectations. We are not only servicing the equipment, we
offer solutions that satisfy the central task of our customers to increase the reliability
of their equipment, operates efficient processes and ensure that the customer meets
his own corporate mandates for total quality. Our motivation is to supply complete
and timely support that is “one step ahead” of your support requirements.
“care-thinking” is the basis of our self-understanding as the market leader and being
recognized as the first choice service provider by our customers.
Our main foundations are:
 Customer Relationships
 Speed
 Quality
 Communication
The serv&care Service Products
Spare Parts
Original Spare Parts from GEA Westfalia Separator Group provide our customers
with the reliability and safety that they need for protecting their investments.
Customers who buy our machines and equipment, decided to rely on the engineering
and quality of products made in Germany, with its strong focus on innovation and on
excellent quality. Why should they be satisfied with less in regard to any spare part?

Field Service
Our customers expect GEA Westfalia Separator Group as a service provider to have
the necessary expertise to carry out all required maintenance measures for their
particular machine and/or process. Services have to be provided world-wide,
irrespective of the market locale in which our customers operate and also irrespective
of where the company creates value.
We are always nearby waiting to assist you, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year!
Repairs
Our repair service reflects the level of care, precision and responsibility as the
manufacturer. Depending on the complexity, we are able to carry out repair work in
our authorized workshops around the world or in our factories. All authorized
workshops are certified in accordance with DIN EN ISO 9001 and follow the same
manufacturing methods and high standard which our company bases its reputation.
Rental Bowls / Exchange Parts
GEA Westfalia Separator Group always aims to keep the availability and security of
your equipment at the highest level. Depending on your particular model machine,
‘Rental Bowls‘, “Trade-In’s” and “Exchange” services are always available to keep
downtime to a minimum. In addition to Bowls and Scroll exchange parts, this is also
available for Decanter Gears, Clutches, Spindles, Hubs and Pistons.
Upgrades / Modernization
Changing market conditions or technological changes often require Upgrades /

Modernization, to increase efficiency, reduce power consumption, extend the life, or
to increase safety.

With an Upgrade / Modernization we replacing existing older parts, modules or
controls components with the latest designed parts and components engineered
specifically for your machine, not just made to work.
Condition Monitoring
By use of the GEA Westfalia Separator wewatch® Condition Monitoring system, a

predictive maintenance approach can be applied. This approach provides an active
enhancement with constant data accumulation of the important parameters of your
machine that have a direct influence on the availability of the equipment. In
conjunction with regular preventive service intervals it ensures a status orientated
maintenance scheme that effectively saves our customers money.
Service Level Agreements
Written agreement between our customer and a GEA Westfalia Separator Group
subsidiary that optimize the support levels we can provide you. We have the
following types of support systems available to you: Preventive, Predictive,
Proactive, Premium or Customized.
Customer Training
The technology behind our machines is becoming more and more complicated. One
technical development is followed by another and another and so on. This is
particularly applicable to leading innovative companies such as ours. This is why we
place great emphasis on modern training approaches with the aim of dealing with
your own practical situations. We work closely with our customers to provide
operators and machinery mechanics with the latest knowledge required for achieving
this high level of added value.

Factory Rebuilt Machines
If our customers are looking for used separators and decanters in not just
reconditioned but in First- Class quality, with high running reliability, an expected long
service life and the know-how of the manufacturer, then they have found the right
partner in us. This level of service is only available within the characteristics of a
market leader with the expert knowledge gained from decades of experience in the
construction of separators and decanters.
Applied Consulting
Service consulting is a fundamental step taken in the direction of optimizing and

adjusting operations to take the next step to using state-of-the-art technology and
become leaders in meeting the requirements of our customers markets and his own
customers.
This is the reason that we bring all the tools along with the latest technical knowledge
and our experience in problem analysis, evaluations and complex problem solving to
help meet the challenges we both face.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Werner-Habig-Str. 1 - 59302 Oelde ( Germany ) - Phone +49 2522 77-0
Kunde : Saraya Bandar

Customer
Anlagenbezeichnung : UCD 205-00-00
Designation of plant
Zeichnungsnummer : 8158-2200-482
Drawing no.
Kommission : 1451 638 077.006
Internal order no.
Hersteller (Firma) : GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

Manufacturer (company)
Projektname : Dekantersteuerung
Name of project Decanter control
Typ : UCD 205-00-00 (9,2kW)
Type
Sprache : De
Language : En
Technische Daten : 400V AC 50 Hz +/- 5%
Technical data
Erstellt am : 16.06.2016 Bearbeitet am : 11.08.2016 Angewandte Normen : IEC 61346

Prepared Processed BER/S&W Applied standards IEC 61355
IEC 60617
GEA Projektsachbearbeiter : Dahlhoff
GEA project contact
Date 19.07.2016 Kunde: Saraya Bandar GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: =

Customer: UCD 205-00-00 Rev.
Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Titel- / Deckblatt +
Projekt:
Tested Dahl. 19.07.2016 Dekantersteuerung Sprache: De Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 1
Project: Title- / cover sheet
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: En Drawing No.: 8158-2200-482 & EAA 73 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Dokumentenart Seite Seitenbeschreibung Anlage Einbauort Datum Bearbeiter
Document type Page Page description Plant Mounting place Date Editor
Titel- / Deckblatt
&EAA 1 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Title- / cover sheet
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 2 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 3 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 4 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 5 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Table of contents
Reserve
&EBH 6 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Spare
Informations-Blatt
&EDB 7 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Information-sheet
Informations-Blatt
&EDB 8 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Information-sheet
Strukturkennzeichenübersicht
&EDB 9 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Structure indicator
Einspeisung
&EFS 10 =0 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Power supply
Steuerspannung
&EFS 11 =0 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Control voltage
Steuerspannung
&EFS 12 =0 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Control voltage
Steuerspannung
&EFS 13 =0 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Control voltage
Schaltschranklüfter
&EFS 14 =0 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Cabinet fan
Not-Halt
&EFS 15 =0 +CC 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Emergency stop
Dekanter Hauptmotor
&EFS 16 =01 +CC 10.08.2016 BER/S&W
Decanter main drive motor
Dekanter Hauptmotor
&EFS 17 =01 +CC 17.06.2016 BER/S&W
Decanter main drive motor
Drehzahlmessung Dekanter
&EFS 18 =01 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Speed measuring decanter
Zulaufpumpe 1
&EFS 19 =11 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Feed pump 1

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Inhaltsverzeichnis +
Projekt:
Project: Table of contents
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: En Drawing No.: 8158-2200-482 & EAB 73 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Polymerpumpe 1
&EFS 20 =12 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Polymer pump 1
Polymerstation
&EFS 21 =13 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Polymer station
Zulaufpumpe 2
&EFS 22 =18 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Feed pump 2
Polymerpumpe 2
&EFS 23 =19 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Polymer pump 2
Durchfluss Zulauf
&EFS 24 =40 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Flow feed
Durchfluss Polymer
&EFS 25 =41 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Flow polymer
Ventile
&EFS 26 =50 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Valves
Ventil spülen Zulauf
&EFS 27 =50 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Valve flushing feed
Ventil spülen Feststoffweg
&EFS 28 =50 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Valve flushing solids path
Signalaustausch
&EFS 29 =100 +CC 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Signal exchange
Signalaustausch
&EFS 30 =100 +CC 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Signal exchange
Analoge Massebrücken
&EFS 31 =00 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Analog earth bridges
OP 177B
&EFS 32 =00 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
OP 177B
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 33 =00 +CC 10.08.2016 BER/S&W
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 34 =00 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 35 =00 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 36 =00 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 37 =00 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 38 =00 +CC 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
PLC overview

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Schaltschrankaufbau
&ELU 39 +CC 10.08.2016 BER/S&W
Cabinet arrangement
Klemmenplan =0+CC-N
&EMA 40 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-N
Klemmenplan =0+CC-PE
&EMA 41 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-PE
Klemmenplan =0+CC-PE
&EMA 42 10.08.2016 BER/S&W
Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-PE
Klemmenplan =0+CC-SC
&EMA 43 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-SC
Klemmenplan =0+CC-X1
&EMA 44 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-X1
&EMA 45 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Klemmenplan =0+CC-XQ1
&EMA 46 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-XQ1
&EMA 47 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
&EMA 48 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Klemmenplan =01+CC-XT3
&EMA 49 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Terminal connection diagram =01+CC-XT3
&EMA 50 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
&EMA 51 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
&EMA 52 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
&EMA 53 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
&EMA 54 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
&EMA 55 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
&EMA 56 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
&EMA 57 16.06.2016 BER/S&W

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
&EMA 58 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
&EMA 59 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
&EMA 60 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
&EMA 61 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Klemmenplan =DEK+JB-X7
&EMA 62 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Terminal connection diagram =DEK+JB-X7
Hinweise zur Installation
&EMB 63 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Instructions for installation
Potentialausgleich Dekanter
&EMB 64 16.06.2016 BER/S&W
Potential equalization decanter
Kabelübersicht
&EMB 65 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Cable layout
Kabelübersicht
&EMB 66 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Cable layout
Stückliste
&EPB 67 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 68 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 69 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 70 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 71 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 72 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 73 11.08.2016 BER/S&W
Parts list

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Reserve +
Projekt:
Project: Spare
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: En Drawing No.: 8158-2200-482 & EBH 73 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Vorschriften / Spezifikation
Instruction / specification
Schaltschrank : Ausführung:
Control cabinet : Version:
Bezeichnung Schaltschrank Aderkennzeichnung Nein
Denomination control cabinet +CC Core indentification No
Lackierung Gehäuse Potentialbezeichnung Nein
Painting cabinet
RAL 7035 Potential designation No
Schutzart Halogenfreie Verdrahtung / Kanäle Nein
Protective rating IP54 Halogen free wiring / channels No
Umgebungstemperatur Kabelkennzeichnungsschilder
Ambient temperature 5-35 °C Cable marking plates -
Klassifizierung
Classification -
Schaltschrank: Zusätzliche Spezifikation Nein
Control cabinet: Extra specification No
Bezeichnung Schaltschrank
Denomination control cabinet
Lackierung Gehäuse
Painting cabinet
Schutzart Schnittstelle:
Protective rating Interface:
Zulässige Umgebungstemperatur Bus Verbindung zum Kunden PLC Modbus TCP/IP
Permissible ambient temperature Bus connection to customer PLC MODBUS TCP/IP
Schaltschrank: Einspeisung:
Control cabinet: Power supply:
Bezeichnung Schaltschrank Netz - / Anschlussspannung
Denomination control cabinet Mains - / connection voltage 400V AC
Lackierung Gehäuse Netzfrequenz
Painting cabinet Mains frequency 50 Hz
Schutzart Netzform
Protective rating Mains form TN-C-S
Zulässige Umgebungstemperatur Drehfeld Rechtsdrehfeld
Permissible ambient temperature Rotary field Clockwise rotary field
Spannungstoleranz
Voltage tolerance +/- 5%
Kabeleinführung Unten
Cable inlet Bottom
Einspeisung redundant Nein
Incoming redundant No
Steuerspannung:
Control voltage:
Steuerspannung 1
Control voltage 1 230V AC
Steuerspannung 2
Control voltage 2 24V DC

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Informations-Blatt +
Projekt:
Project: Information-sheet
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: En Drawing No.: 8158-2200-482 & EDB 73 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Verdrahtung
Wiring
Stromkreise Leiter Farbe Querschnitt Stromkreise Leiter Farbe Querschnitt
Electrical circuits Conductor Colour Cross-section Electrical circuits Conductor Colour Cross-section
Hauptstromkreise 400V AC Schwarz Steuerspannung 230V AC Rot
L1 ≥ 1,5mm² L ≥ 0,75mm²
Main circuits Black Control voltage Red
Schwarz Rot / weiß
L2 " N "
Black Red/white
Schwarz
L3 "
Black
Blau Steuerspannung 24V AC Rot
N ≥ 1,5mm² L ≥ 0,75mm²
Blue Control voltage Red
Grün / gelb Rot / weiß
PE ≥ 2,5mm² N "
Green / yellow Red/white
Steuerspannung 24V DC Blau

+ ≥ 0,75mm²
Control voltage Blue
Blau / weiß
- "
Blue/white
Analog abgeschirmt Weiß

L+ ≥ 0,75mm²
Analog screened White
Braun
M "
Brown
Stromwandlerleitungen Schwarz
≥ 2,5mm²
Current transformer lines Black
Leitungen mit Fremdspannung (AC/DC) Orange

≥ 1,0mm²
Conductors with external voltage (AC/DC) Orange

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Informations-Blatt +
Projekt:
Project: Information-sheet
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: En Drawing No.: 8158-2200-482 & EDB 73 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Strukturkennzeichenübersicht
Structure indicator F24_WS_002
Vollständige Bezeichnung Beschriftung Strukturbeschreibung

Complete name Labelling Structure descprition
Dokumentenart Deckblatt
&EAA
Document type Cover sheet
Dokumentenart Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB
Document type Table of contents
Dokumentenart Revisionsübersicht
&EBH
Document type Revision overview
Dokumentenart Strukturkennzeichen Übersicht / Vorschriften
&EDB
Document type Structure indentification overview / instructions
Dokumentenart Stromlaufplan
&EFS
Document type Circuit diagram
Dokumentenart Aufbauplan
&ELU
Document type Arrangement drawing
Dokumentenart Klemmenplan, Klemmenanschlussplan
&EMA
Document type Terminal connection diagram, terminal connecting plan
Dokumentenart Kabelübersicht
&EMB
Document type Cable layout
Dokumentenart Artikelstückliste
&EPB
Document type Article parts list
Anlage Allgemein
=0
Plant General
Anlage Dekanter
=01
Plant Decanter
Anlage Produktpumpe 1
=11
Plant Product pump 1
Anlage Polymerpumpe 1
=12
Plant Polymer pump 1
Anlage Polymerstation
=13
Plant Polymer station
Anlage Produktpumpe 2
=18
Plant Product pump 2
Anlage Polymerpumpe 2
=19
Plant Polymer pump 2
Anlage IDM Zulauf
=40
Plant IFM feed
Anlage IDM Polymer
=41
Plant IFM polymer
Anlage Ventile
=50
Plant Valves
Anlage Signalaustausch
=100
Plant Signal exchange
Anlage SPS Übersicht
=00
Plant PLC overview
Anlage Dekanter allgemein
=DEK
Plant Decanter general
Anlage Kunde
=CUSTOMER
Plant Customer
Einbauort Kompaktsteuerschrank
+CC
Mounting place Compact control cabinet
Einbauort Klemmenkasten
+JB
Mounting place Terminal box
Einbauort Lokal
+L
Mounting place Local

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Strukturkennzeichenübersicht +
Projekt:
Project: Structure indicator
2 Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: En Drawing No.: 8158-2200-482 & EDB 73 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400V AC
L1 / 11.0
L2 / 11.0
L3 / 11.0
400V AC
L1.1 / 16.0
L2.1 / 16.0
L3.1 / 16.0
1
-Q1
Eb.:32-40A
In.:40A
I> I> I>
2
-XQ1
-PE -N -PE -PE -PE

Daten Einspeisung :
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
Data power supply :
-PE
-N
Min. Querschnitt :
10 mm²
Min. Cross-section :
Vorsicherung :
NH 50 A
PEN
PEN
Pre-fuse :
Umgebungstemperatur :
-WD1 5-35 °C
PE
PE
PE
Ambient temperature :
_-J 4x10 mm²
Max. Kabellänge:
-XE1 -XE2 -XE3 Max. Cable length:
Zuleitung: 50 m
Incoming:
PEN
L1
L2
L3
Schaltschrank / Feldgeräte: 50 m
Earthing mounting plate 1
Control cabinet / field devices:

Erdung Montageplatte 1
=CUSTOMER U: 400V AC
+L-X
Erdung Gehäuse 1
f: 50 Hz
Earthing cabinet 1
Earthing door 1
P: ~16 kW
Erdung Tür 1
Icn :
36 kA
Einspeisung
Power supply Volllaststrom :
~40 A
Full load current :
Date 19.07.2016 Kunde: Saraya Bandar GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: =0

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Einspeisung + CC
Projekt:
Project: Power supply
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: En Drawing No.: 8158-2200-482 & EFS 73 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400V AC
10.9 / L1 L1 / 19.0
10.9 / L2 L2 / 19.0
10.9 / L3 L3 / 19.0
230V AC
L / 12.0
N / 12.0
12.1 / 1N.A 1N.A / 16.6
1
5
-F1
Eb.:1,1-1,6A
In.:1,1A
I> I> I>
2
1
-F3
2
C6A
400V
380V
420V
L1
N
0
-T1 -T2
INPUT
400/230V 120/230VAC GEA
400VA 24VDC/5A power
OFF
ON
0
230V
A
-PE B
OUTPUT
-PE
PE
-
-PE
-PE
1
-F2
2
D6A
24V DC
L+ / 13.0
M / 13.0
1
5
-X1 -X2
-PE
-PE
-PE -PE
Steuerspannung AC Steuerspannung DC
Control voltage AC Control voltage DC

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Steuerspannung + CC
Projekt:
Project: Control voltage
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V AC
11.9 / L
1
-F4 2 -F5
2
C4A C4A
23
-K1
24
/15.3
2L.A / 16.4
1L.A / 14.0
3L.A / 17.0
1
3
-X1.1
24.0 / 2L.X
1N.A / 11.5
11.9 / N
1
-X1.2
14.0 / 1N.X
17.0 / 1N.Q
Steuerspannung AC Steuerspannung AC Steuerspannung AC

Lüfter Allgemein hinter Not Halt
Control voltage AC Control voltage AC Control voltage AC
fan general behind emergency stop

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
11.9 / L+
1
-F8 2 -F9 -F10
2
C4A C4A C4A
1L+.A / 15.5
2L+.K / 33.0
3L+.A / 27.0
1L+.F / 19.8
1
4
-X2.1 -X2.1 -X2.1
15.0 / 1L+.X
32.0 / 2L+.T
33.0 / 2L+.A
27.0 / 3L+.X
26.0 / 3L+.R
1M.A / 15.0
2M.A / 33.0
2M.K / 31.0
3M.A / 27.0
1M.F / 19.4
11.9 / M
1
-X2.2
17.7 / 1M.R
24.0 / 1M.X
32.0 / 2M.T
26.0 / 3M.X
Steuerspannung DC Steuerspannung DC Steuerspannung DC

Steuerung SPS Ventile
Control voltage DC Control voltage DC Control voltage DC
control PLC valves

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V AC
12.1 / 1L.A
12.1 / 1N.X 1N.X / 24.0
-B1
30°C
-PE
1
-X100
N
L
-M1
M
1~
PE
Schaltschranklüfter
Cabinet fan

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Schaltschranklüfter + CC
Projekt:
Project: Cabinet fan
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC 24V DC
13.1 / 1L+.X 1L+.X / 21.7 13.1 / 1L+.A 1L+.A / 16.4
-PE
-PE
6
-X2
33
-K1
/15.3
Brücke entfernen,
34
bei Anschluss eines
Not-Halt externen Not-Halt
extern
Emergency
stop external
7
-X2
13
X12
-PE
E1.1
-PE
/35.4
11
8
-X2
-S01 =00-K1
12
Not-Halt
Emergency stop
Not-Halt
Emergency stop
Brücke entfernen,
Not-Halt bei Anschluss eines
extern externen Not-Halt
Emergency
stop external
13
-K3
/15.8
14
=00-K1
9
-X2
IN F/S /35.5
A0.1
A1
T4
-K1 X12
13
23
33
41
23
Siemens AUTO
3SK1111-1AB30 X MONITORED
14
24
34
42
/12.3 /15.8
A1
-K3
A2
IN1
T1
IN2
T2
IN 3
T3
A2
13.1 / 1M.A 1M.A / 18.0
13 14 /15.3
23 24
33 34
43 44
Not-Halt Relais Not-Halt Entriegeln

Emergency stop relay Emergency stop reset

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Not-Halt + CC
Projekt:
Project: Emergency stop
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400V AC 230V AC
10.3 / L1.1 12.2 / 2L.A
24V DC
10.3 / L2.1 15.9 / 1L+.A 1L+.A / 17.7
10.3 / L3.1
-T1
2 7+
S1
Input
0-1A
-B1
3 Output 9- -SC
S2
50/1A 4-20mA
=0-SC
1 2 3 4
On x
off x x x
3
X11
PEW752I
/34.4
1
5 4-20mA=0-50A
-Q2 -Q1 -Q3 =00-K1
2
/17.3 /17.1 /17.4

Motorstrom Trommel
Motor current bowl
-SC
=0-SC
A1
T2
-F3 M
A2
T1
11.9 / 1N.A 1N.A / 17.0
-PE -PE
-SC
=0-PE
1
2
-X1 -X1 -X2
=0-SC
-WD1.1 -WD1.2 -WG1
_-J 4x6 mm² _-J 4x6 mm² .CY-O 2x0,75 mm²
PE
Rechtslauf W1 V2
13 14 /17.1
Clockwise rotation 21 22
V1
M U2
3~
Θ
U1 W2
+L-M1
T2
T1
9,2kW/22A
50 Hz
Dekanter Trommel PTC-Fühler

Decanter bowl Dekanter Trommel
PTC thermistor
decanter bowl
Date 19.07.2016 Kunde: Saraya Bandar GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: = 01

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Dekanter Hauptmotor + CC
Projekt:
Project: Decanter main drive motor
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V AC 24V DC
12.3 / 3L.A 16.9 / 1L+.A 1L+.A / 18.0
43
43
-Q1 -Q3
/17.1 /17.4
44
44
13
-F3
/16.7
14
11
14
-K1
X12
12
14
/17.8
E1.2
/35.4
=00-K1
Rückmeldung Trommel
Feed back bowl
15
13
21
-K4 -Q1 -Q1
/17.1 /17.1
16
18
14
22
/17.2
21
13
43
-Q3 -Q2 -Q2 =00-K1
/17.4 /17.3 /17.3
22
14
44
/35.5
A0.2
X12
24
1
A1
A1
A3
A1
A1
A1
-Q1 -K4 -Q2 -Q3 -P1 -K1
h
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
2min
2
12.1 / 1N.Q 13.1 / 1M.R 1M.R / 19.8
16.9 / 1N.A
0,15...3min
67%
1 2 /16.2 18 1 2 /16.1 1 2 /16.3 14

15 /17.1 11 /17.1
3 4 /16.2 16 3 4 /16.1 3 4 /16.3 12
5 6 /16.2 5 6 /16.1 5 6 /16.3
13 14 /17.3 13 14 /17.3 13 14
21 22 /17.4 21 22 21 22 /17.1
31 32 31 32 31 32
43 44 /17.8 43 44 /17.4 43 44 /17.8
Sternschütz Netzschütz Dreieckschütz Betriebsstundenzähler Umschaltung Ansteuerung Trommel

Star contactor Mains contactor Delta contactor Hours counter Change over Actuating bowl

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Dekanter Hauptmotor + CC
Projekt:
Project: Decanter main drive motor
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
17.9 / 1L+.A
15.9 / 1M.A
=00-K1 =00-K1
/35.4 /35.4
E0.0 E0.6
X12 X12
8
-SC -SC
=0-SC
=0-SC
5
6
7
8 24V DC
-T3
Turck
MK1-2RP/24VDC
1+
2-
3+
4-
-XT3
-SC
=0-SC
-WG3
.CY-O 7x0,75 mm²
=DEK+JB
1
Klemmenkasten Dekanter -X7

Terminal box decanter
+ BN
+ BN
BU
BU
+L +L
-B13 -B11
-
C A
SE nT SE nE
option
SE nE
option

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Drehzahlmessung Dekanter + CC
Projekt:
Project: Speed measuring decanter
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400V AC 24V DC
11.9 / L1 L1 / 20.0 13.1 / 1M.F 1M.F / 20.4 13.1 / 1L+.F 1L+.F / 20.8
11.9 / L2 L2 / 20.0
11.9 / L3 L3 / 20.0
Drehzahl Sollwert
Zulaufpumpe 1
Speed set value
feed pump 1
01
1
5
-F1 =00-K5 -T1
4-20mA=0-100%
03
02
Eb.:2,8-4A /19.1
In.:3,5A /37.5
I> I> I>
PAW272
2
6 X1
22
X11
E2.0
/34.5
-PE
=00-K1
=0-PE
Rückmeldung
Zulaufpumpe 1
Feed back
feed pump 1
SC
SC
91
92
93
95
42
39
50
53
55
-T1
4-20mA
0V
10V
4-20mA
0V
Betrieb
OFF:U
Operation
ON:I
OFF
FC301P1K5
ON
03
02
ON=abgeschlossen
BUS TER. 1 ● ON=abgeschlossen
A53 1 ●
OFF:U
● ●
ON:I
(S801) 2 OFF=offen (S201) 2
=00-K1
/19.8 01
OFF=open
P-FC301P1K5-1,5KW-400504-4-1187 A54 1 ●
(S202) 2 ● /35.5
A0.6
+24V
X12
D IN
D IN
A IN
10V
28
96
97
98
99
SC
54
50
SC
12
18
27
-XT1 -XT1
A1
11
-K1 -K1
12
14
A2
/19.8
17.9 / 1M.R 1M.R / 20.8
-WD1 -WG1
FC.CY-J 4x2,5 mm² .CY-O 2x0,75 mm²
W1
U1
V1
PE
14
+L-M1 11 /19.5
M 12
1,5kW/≈3,4A
11
3~
Rechtslauf Θ
T1
T2
Clockwise rotation
Zulaufpumpe 1 PTC Fühler Start/Stop Ansteuerung

Feed pump 1 Zulaufpumpe 1 Start/stop Zulaufpumpe 1
PTC feeler Actuating
feed pump 1 feed pump 1

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Zulaufpumpe 1 + CC
Projekt:
Project: Feed pump 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400V AC 24V DC
19.2 / L1 L1 / 21.0 19.6 / 1M.F 1M.F / 22.4 19.9 / 1L+.F 1L+.F / 22.8
19.2 / L2 L2 / 21.0
19.2 / L3 L3 / 21.0
Drehzahl Sollwert
Polymerpumpe 1
Speed set value
polymer pump 1
01
1
5
-F1 =00-K5 -T1
4-20mA=0-100%
03
02
Eb.:0,9-1,25A /20.1
In.:1A /37.5
I> I> I>
PAW274
2
6 X1
23
X11
E2.1
/34.5
-PE
=00-K1
=0-PE
Rückmeldung
Polymerpumpe 1
Feed back
polymer pump 1
SC
SC
91
92
93
95
42
39
50
53
55
-T1
4-20mA
0V
10V
4-20mA
0V
Betrieb
OFF:U
Operation
ON:I
OFF
FC301PK75
ON
03
02
ON=abgeschlossen
A53 1 ●
OFF:U
● ●
ON:I
(S801) 2 OFF=offen (S201) 2
=00-K1
/20.8 01
OFF=open
P-FC301PK75-0,37KW-400504-4-1187 A54 1 ●
(S202) 2 ● /35.5
A0.7
+24V
X12
D IN
D IN
A IN
10V
29
96
97
98
99
SC
54
50
SC
12
18
27
-XT1 -XT1
A1
11
-K1 -K1
12
14
A2
/20.8
19.9 / 1M.R 1M.R / 22.8
-WD1 -WG1
W1
U1
V1
PE
14
+L-M1 11 /20.5
M 12
0,37kW/≈1A
12
3~
Rechtslauf Θ
T1
T2
Clockwise rotation
Polymerpumpe 1 PTC Fühler Start/Stop Ansteuerung

Polymer pump 1 Polymerpumpe 1 Start/stop Polymerpumpe 1
polymer pump 1 polymer pump 1

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Polymerpumpe 1 + CC
Projekt:
Project: Polymer pump 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400V AC 24V DC
20.2 / L1 L1 / 22.0 15.3 / 1L+.X 1L+.X / 26.0
20.2 / L2 L2 / 22.0
1
20.2 / L3 L3 / 22.0 -X2
-WG1
.-J 3x0,75 mm²
+L
1
5
Kunde
-F1 -Q1
PE
Eb.:5,5-8A
In.:6,6A
I> I> I>
-WG1
2
=0-PE
2
-X2
-PE
24
X11
E2.2
/34.5
=00-K1
Störung
Polymerstation
Failure
polymer station
-N -PE
=0-PE
1
-X1
-WD1
_-J 5x2,5 mm²
PE
L1
L2
L3
+L
-S1
3kW
Polymerstation
Polymer station

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Polymerstation + CC
Projekt:
Project: Polymer station
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400V AC 24V DC
21.2 / L1 L1 / 23.0 20.6 / 1M.F 1M.F / 23.4 20.9 / 1L+.F 1L+.F / 23.8
21.2 / L2 L2 / 23.0
21.2 / L3 L3 / 23.0
Drehzahl Sollwert
Zulaufpumpe 2
Speed set value
feed pump 2
01
1
5
-F1 =00-K5 -T1
4-20mA=0-100%
03
02
Eb.:2,8-4A /22.1
In.:3,5A /37.5
I> I> I>
PAW276
2
6 X1
11
2
X1
E8.0
/38.5
-PE
=00-K6
=0-PE
Rückmeldung
Zulaufpumpe 2
Feed back
feed pump 2
SC
SC
91
92
93
95
42
39
50
53
55
-T1
4-20mA
0V
10V
4-20mA
0V
Betrieb
OFF:U
Operation
ON:I
OFF
FC301P1K5
ON
03
02
ON=abgeschlossen
A53 1 ●
OFF:U
● ●
ON:I
(S801) 2 OFF=offen (S201) 2
=00-K1
/22.8 01
OFF=open
P-FC301P1K5-1,5KW-400504-4-1187 A54 1 ●
(S202) 2 ● /35.5
A1.4
+24V
X12
D IN
D IN
A IN
10V
36
96
97
98
99
SC
54
50
SC
12
18
27
-XT1 -XT1
A1
11
-K1 -K1
12
14
A2
/22.8
20.9 / 1M.R 1M.R / 23.8
-WD1 -WG1
W1
U1
V1
PE
14
+L-M1 11 /22.5
M 12
1,5kW/≈3,4A
18
3~
Rechtslauf Θ
T1
T2
Clockwise rotation
Zulaufpumpe 2 PTC Fühler Start/Stop Ansteuerung

Feed pump 2 Zulaufpumpe 2 Start/stop Zulaufpumpe 2
feed pump 2 feed pump 2

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Zulaufpumpe 2 + CC
Projekt:
Project: Feed pump 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400V AC 24V DC
22.2 / L1 22.6 / 1M.F 22.9 / 1L+.F
22.2 / L2
22.2 / L3
Drehzahl Sollwert
Polymerpumpe 2
Speed set value
polymer pump 2
01
1
5
-F1 =00-K5 -T1
4-20mA=0-100%
03
02
Eb.:0,9-1,25A /23.1
In.:1A /37.5
I> I> I>
PAW278
2
6 X1
15
3
X1
E8.1
/38.5
-PE
=00-K6
=0-PE
Rückmeldung
Polymerpumpe 2
Feed back
polymer pump 2
SC
SC
91
92
93
95
42
39
50
53
55
-T1
4-20mA
0V
10V
4-20mA
0V
Betrieb
OFF:U
Operation
ON:I
OFF
FC301PK75
ON
03
02
ON=abgeschlossen
A53 1 ●
OFF:U
● ●
ON:I
(S801) 2 OFF=offen (S201) 2
=00-K1
/23.8 01
OFF=open
P-FC301PK75-0,37KW-400504-4-1187 A54 1 ●
(S202) 2 ● /35.5
A1.5
+24V
X12
D IN
D IN
A IN
10V
37
96
97
98
99
SC
54
50
SC
12
18
27
-XT1 -XT1
A1
11
-K1 -K1
12
14
A2
/23.8
22.9 / 1M.R 1M.R / 26.0
-WD1 -WG1
W1
U1
V1
PE
14
+L-M1 11 /23.5
M 12
0,37kW/≈1A
19
3~
Rechtslauf Θ
T1
T2
Clockwise rotation
Polymerpumpe 2 PTC Fühler Start/Stop Ansteuerung

Polymer pump 2 Polymerpumpe 2 Start/stop Polymerpumpe 2
polymer pump 2 polymer pump 2

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Polymerpumpe 2 + CC
Projekt:
Project: Polymer pump 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K1
/34.4
PEW758I
X11
12
-SC
=0-SC
13.1 / 1M.X 1M.X / 25.0

230V AC
12.2 / 2L.X 2L.X / 25.0
14.9 / 1N.X 1N.X / 25.0
-PE -SC -PE
=0-PE
=0-SC
=0-PE
1
-X1 -X2
-WD1 -WG1 -WE1

.-J .CY-O PL
3x1,5 mm² 2x0,75 mm² 1x10 mm²
PA
PE
+
N
L
+L
-B1 I
F
IDM
230V AC Durchfluss Zulauf Potenzialausgleich

230V AC Flow feed Durchflussaufnehmer
Potential equalization
flow transmitter

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Durchfluss Zulauf + CC
Projekt:
Project: Flow feed
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K4
/36.5
PEW268
X1
16
-SC
=0-SC
24.9 / 1M.X
230V AC
24.9 / 2L.X
24.9 / 1N.X
-PE -SC -PE
=0-PE
=0-SC
=0-PE
1
-X1 -X2
-WD1 -WG1 -WE1

.-J .CY-O PL
3x1,5 mm² 2x0,75 mm² 1x10 mm²
PA
PE
+
N
L
+L
-B1 I
F
IDM
230V AC Durchfluss Polymer Potenzialausgleich

230V AC Flow polymer Durchflussaufnehmer
flow transmitter

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Durchfluss Polymer + CC
Projekt:
Project: Flow polymer
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
13.3 / 3L+.R
11
-K1
12
14
/26.2
=00-K1 =00-K6
/35.5 /38.5
A1.3 E8.2
X12 X1
35
4
A1
-K1
A2
21.9 / 1L+.X 1L+.X / 29.0

23.9 / 1M.R 1M.R / 30.0
13.2 / 3M.X 3M.X / 27.0
-PE
=0-PE
1
-X2 -X2
-WG1 -WG2
.-J 3x0,75 mm² .-O 2x0,75 mm²
14
11 /26.1
12
1
2
PE
1
+L +L
-M1 -B1 F
2
Ventil Verdünnungswasser Durchfluss Verdünnungswasser

Valve diluting water Flow diluting water

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Ventile + CC
Projekt:
Project: Valves
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
13.3 / 3L+.A 3L+.A / 28.0

13.2 / 3M.A 3M.A / 28.0
13.3 / 3L+.X 3L+.X / 28.0
26.9 / 3M.X 3M.X / 28.0
13
43
-K2
14
44
/27.7
51
63
21
31
-K2 -K2
52
64
22
32
/27.7 /27.7
=00-K1
/35.5
-PE -PE A1.2
=0-PE
=0-PE
X12
10
5
9
-X2 -X2
34
-WG3
.-J 5x1,5
PE
1
A1
+L -K2
-M2
A2
NE03
24VDC/0,6A M
-PE
Magnetventil
=0-PE
(OPTION)
1
-X2 Solenoid valve

(option)
-WG2
_-J 3x1,5 13 14 /27.3
21 22 /27.4
PE
31 32 /27.4
1
+L 43 44 /27.4
-M2 51 52 /27.1
2
63 64 /27.1
Ventil
Ansteuerung
Zulauf spülen
Zulauf spülen
Valve
Actuating
feed flushing
feed flushing

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Ventil spülen Zulauf + CC
Projekt:
Project: Valve flushing feed
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
27.9 / 3L+.A
27.9 / 3M.A
27.2 / 3L+.X
27.2 / 3M.X
13
43
-K3
14
44
/28.7
51
63
21
31
-K3 -K3
52
64
22
32
/28.7 /28.7
=00-K1
/35.5
-PE -PE A0.4
=0-PE
=0-PE
X12
11
12
13
14
15
16
-X2 -X2
26
-WG4
.-J 5x1,5
PE
1
A1
+L -K3
-M3
A2
NE03
24VDC/0,6A M
-PE
Magnetventil
=0-PE
(OPTION)
1
-X2 Solenoid valve

(option)
-WG3
_-J 3x1,5 13 14 /28.3
21 22 /28.4
PE
31 32 /28.4
1
+L 43 44 /28.4
-M3 51 52 /28.1
2
63 64 /28.1
Ventil
Ansteuerung
Feststoffweg spülen
Feststoffweg spülen
Valve
Actuating
solids path flushing

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Ventil spülen Feststoffweg + CC
Projekt:
Project: Valve flushing solids path
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
26.9 / 1L+.X
3
-X2 -X2
-WG2
.-J 3x0,75 mm²
+L
Kunde
-S2
PE
-WG2
=0-PE
=0-PE
2
4
-X2 -X2
-PE -PE
25
26
X11 X11
E2.3 E2.4
/34.5 /34.5
=00-K1 =00-K1
Reserve Reserve
Spare Spare

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Signalaustausch + CC
Projekt:
Project: Signal exchange
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1

/35.5 /35.5 /35.5
A0.0 A1.0 A1.1
X12 X12 X12
22
32
33
A1
A1
A1
-K1 -K2 -K3

A2
A2
A2
26.9 / 1M.R
14 14 14
11 /30.1 11 /30.2 11 /30.4
12 12 12
11
11
11
-K1 -K2 -K3

-PE -PE -PE
12
14
12
14
12
14
/30.1 /30.2 /30.4

=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
-K1
-K1
-K1
-K2
-K2
-K2
-K3
-K3
-K3
-X2 -X2 -X2

-WG6 -WG7 -WG8
.-J 4x0,75 mm² .-J 4x0,75 mm² .-J 4x0,75 mm²
+L +L +L
PE
PE
PE
Kunde Kunde Kunde

-X . . . -X . . . -X . . .
Sammelstörung Dekanter Ansteuerung

Common failure betriebsbereit Zulauf
Decanter Actuating
ready for operation feed

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Signalaustausch + CC
Projekt:
Project: Signal exchange
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1

/34.4 /34.4 /34.4 /34.4 /34.4 /34.4
PEW752- PEW754I PEW754- PEW756I PEW756- PEW758-
X11 X11 X11 X11 X11 X11
10
13
13.1 / 2M.K
=00-K4 =00-K4 =00-K4 =00-K4 =00-K4 =00-K4 =00-K4 =00-K4

/36.5 /36.5 /36.5 /36.5 /36.5 /36.5 /36.5 /36.5 /36.5 /36.5 /36.5 /36.5
PEW256 - PEW258 - PEW260 - PEW262 - PEW264 PEW264- PEW266 PEW266-
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
2
12
13
14
15
=00-K4 =00-K4 =00-K4 =00-K5 =00-K5 =00-K5 =00-K5
/36.5 /36.5 /36.5 /37.5 /37.5 /37.5 /37.5
PEW268- PEW270 PEW270- Mana Mana Mana Mana
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
17
18
19
10
14
18
2M.K / 33.0

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Analoge Massebrücken + CC
Projekt:
Project: Analog earth bridges
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-P1
Taste Benennung Symbol
Button Designation Symbol
Westfalia Separator
K1
Service
F1 F2 K2
Service
Dekanter Ein
K3 ON
F3 F4 Decanter on
Produkt aus
K4 0
F5 OP 177B F6 K5
Product off
Produkt ein
Product on
Prod
Spülen ein
K6 H²O
F7 Flush on
F8
K7
K8
K9
Error
K1 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 K2 K10 Error
Error
Dekanter Aus
K11 OFF
K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 K10 Decanter off
K12-K17
K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 K17 ACK
DP/MPI/PPI 1F1B USB

1 2 3 4
ON
POWER DC OFF ● ● ● ●
SC
SC
A
A
B
B
24V
0V
PE
24V DC
13.2 / 2L+.T
13.1 / 2M.T
-PE
33.0 / MPI_A
33.0 / MPI_B
=0-PE

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH OP 177B + CC
Projekt:
Project: OP 177B
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1 -K4 -K5 -K6

4AO
8AI 16DI
0005-4050-820 0005-4281-030 0005-4281-020 0005-4280-020
0005-4050-820 6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0 6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0 6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0
Slot: 4 Slot: 5 Slot: 6

SF GEA
BF
Slot: 0-2
DC5V 0 0 0
FRCE X11 1 1
X12 1
RUN
2 2 2
STOP
3 3 3
4 4 4
RUN
5 5 5
STOP
6 6 6
PAW754I
PEW760-
PEW270
MRES
PAW278
7 7 7
A1.7
E2.7
E1.7
E9.7
IN IN OUT
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PAW752U
PEW752V
E2.0
E0.0
A0.0
E8.0
PEW256
PAW272
L+ 0 0
1 1
M
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
X1 MPI X2 DP
A A
32.2 / MPI_A
B B
32.2 / MPI_B
SC SC
A A
COMP+ /36.5
COMP- /36.5
Mana /34.4
B B
1L+ /35.4
2L+ /35.5
3L+ /35.5
1L+ /36.5
1L+ /37.5
1M /35.4
2M /35.5
3M /35.5
1M /36.5
1M /38.5
4M /34.5
1M /37.5
SC SC
DC 24V
X11 X12 X1 X1 X1
20
30
20
21
30
31
40
10
11
20
20
20
L+
24V DC
13.2 / 2L+.K
31.9 / 2M.K
-WF1
Profibus
1x2x0,64 mm²
SC1
SC2
-A1
A1
A2
B1
B2
24V DC
13.2 / 2L+.A +
13.1 / 2M.A - Profibus Slave
HMS
Modbus-TCP Slave
+L
-WF2
MODBUS
_CY-O 4x2x0,5 mm² Ethernet

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH SPS Übersicht + CC
Projekt:
Project: PLC overview
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1
X11:1 X11:21
X11:2 PEW752V E2.0

X11:22 /19.8 =11-T1:02
Rückmeldung Zulaufpumpe 1
V
Feed back feed pump 1
Motorstrom Trommel
PEW752I /16.6
X11:3 PEW752I A E2.1
X11:23 /20.8 =12-T1:02
Rückmeldung Polymerpumpe 1
Motor current bowl Feed back polymer pump 1
PEW752- /31.2
X11:4 - E2.2
X11:24 /21.8 =13+L-Q1
Störung Polymerstation
Failure polymer station
X11:5 PEW754V E2.3
X11:25 /29.1 =100+L-S2
Reserve
V
Spare
PEW754I /31.3
X11:6 PEW754I A E2.4
X11:26 /29.2 E2.4
Reserve
Spare
PEW754- /31.4
X11:7 - E2.5
X11:27
X11:8 PEW756V E2.6

X11:28
V
PEW756I /31.5
X11:9 PEW756I A E2.7
X11:29
X11:10
PEW756- /31.6 -
4M
X11:30 /33.3 0V
X11:11 PEW758V V X11:31
Durchfluss Zulauf
=40+L-B1:+ /24.2
X11:12 PEW758I A
Flow feed X11:32
PEW758- /31.8
X11:13 -
X11:33
X11:14 PEW760+
PT100
X11:34
X11:15 PEW760-
X11:35
X11:16 PAW752U
X11:36
X11:17 PAW752I
X11:37
X11:18 PAW754U
X11:38
X11:19 PAW754I
X11:39
Mana /33.3
X11:20 MANA
X11:40

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1
24V /33.3
X12:1 1L+ 2L+
X12:21 /33.3 24V
Reserve
E0.0 /18.4
X12:2 E0.0 A0.0
X12:22 /30.1 =100-K1:A1
Sammelstörung
Spare Common failure
X12:3 E0.1 A0.1
X12:23 /15.8 =0-K3:A1
Not-Halt Entriegeln
Emergency stop reset
X12:4 E0.2 A0.2
X12:24 /17.8 =01-K1:A1
Ansteuerung Trommel
Actuating bowl
X12:5 E0.3 A0.3
X12:25
X12:6 E0.4 A0.4

X12:26 /28.7 =50-K3:A1
Ansteuerung Feststoffweg spülen
Actuating solids path flushing
X12:7 E0.5 A0.5
X12:27
SE nE option
=01-T3:6 /18.5
X12:8 E0.6 A0.6
X12:28 /19.8 =11-K1:A1
Ansteuerung Zulaufpumpe 1
SE nE option Actuating feed pump 1
X12:9 E0.7 A0.7
X12:29 /20.8 =12-K1:A1
Ansteuerung Polymerpumpe 1
Actuating polymer pump 1
X12:10 2M
X12:30 /33.3 0V
X12:11 3L+
X12:31 /33.4 24V
X12:12 E1.0 A1.0

X12:32 /30.2 =100-K2:A1
Dekanter betriebsbereit
Decanter ready for operation
Not-Halt
=0-K1:34 /15.8
X12:13 E1.1 A1.1
X12:33 /30.4 =100-K3:A1
Ansteuerung Zulauf
Emergency stop Actuating feed
Rückmeldung Trommel
=01-Q1:44 /17.8
X12:14 E1.2 A1.2
X12:34 /27.7 =50-K2:A1
Ansteuerung Zulauf spülen
Feed back bowl Actuating feed flushing
X12:15 E1.3 A1.3
X12:35 /26.2 =50-K1:A1
Ansteuerung Ventil Verdünnungswasser
Actuating valve diluting water
X12:16 E1.4 A1.4
X12:36 /22.8 =18-K1:A1
Ansteuerung Zulaufpumpe 2
Actuating feed pump 2
X12:17 E1.5 A1.5
X12:37 /23.8 =19-K1:A1
Ansteuerung Polymerpumpe 2
Actuating polymer pump 2
X12:18 E1.6 A1.6
X12:38
X12:19 E1.7 A1.7

X12:39
0V /33.3
X12:20 1M 3M
X12:40 /33.4 0V

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K4
1L+
X1:1 /33.4 24V
PEW256
X1:2 /31.1 PEW256
V
A X1:3
- /31.1 PEW256-
A
PEW258
X1:4 /31.2 PEW258
V
A X1:5
- /31.2 PEW258-
PEW260
X1:6 /31.3 PEW260
V
A X1:7
- /31.3 PEW260-
A
PEW262
X1:8 /31.4 PEW262
V
A X1:9
- /31.4 PEW262-
COMP+
X1:10 /33.4 COMP+ COMP+
COMP
COMP-
X1:11 /33.4 COMP- COMP-
PEW264
X1:12 /31.5 PEW264
V
A X1:13
- /31.6 PEW264-
C
PEW266
X1:14 /31.7 PEW266
V
A X1:15
- /31.8 PEW266-
PEW268
X1:16 /25.2 =41+L-B1:+
Durchfluss Polymer
Flow polymer
V
A X1:17
- /31.2 PEW268-
C
PEW270
X1:18 /31.3 PEW270
V
A X1:19
- /31.4 PEW270-
1M
X1:20 /33.5 0V

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K5
1L+
X1:1 /33.5 24V
X1:2
PAW272
X1:3 /19.5 =11-T1:53
Drehzahl Sollwert Zulaufpumpe 1
Speed set value feed pump 1
S+
X1:4
S-
X1:5
Mana
X1:6 /31.5
PAW274
X1:7 /20.5 =12-T1:53
Drehzahl Sollwert Polymerpumpe 1
Speed set value polymer pump 1
S+
X1:8
S-
X1:9
Mana
X1:10 /31.6
PAW276
X1:11 /22.5 =18-T1:53
Drehzahl Sollwert Zulaufpumpe 2
Speed set value feed pump 2
S+
X1:12
S-
X1:13
Mana
X1:14 /31.7
PAW278
X1:15 /23.5 =19-T1:53
Drehzahl Sollwert Polymerpumpe 2
Speed set value polymer pump 2
S+
X1:16
S-
X1:17
Mana
X1:18 /31.8
X1:19
1M
X1:20 /33.6 0V

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K6
X1:1
E8.0
X1:2 /22.8 =18-T1:02
Rückmeldung Zulaufpumpe 2
Feed back feed pump 2
E8.1
X1:3 /23.8 =19-T1:02
Rückmeldung Polymerpumpe 2
Feed back polymer pump 2
E8.2
X1:4 /26.5 =50+L-B1:2
Durchfluss Verdünnungswasser
Flow diluting water
E8.3
X1:5
E8.4
X1:6
E8.5
X1:7
E8.6
X1:8
E8.7
X1:9
X1:10
X1:11
E9.0
X1:12
E9.1
X1:13
E9.2
X1:14
E9.3
X1:15
E9.4
X1:16
E9.5
X1:17
E9.6
X1:18
E9.7
X1:19
1M
X1:20 /33.7 0V

Projekt:
Changes
Date
0
100 mm 2000 mm
Name
Date
Editor
Tested
Make:
1
F7
F5
F3
F1
K3
K1
K11
BER/S&W
Fabrikat: Rittal
19.07.2016
F9
K4
K12
Westfalia Separator
K5
F10
K13
K6
F11
K14
=00-P1@1
K7
F12
K15
Dahl. 19.07.2016
OP 177B
=0-M1
K8
F13
K16
=0-S01
=00-P1
K9
F14
K17
800 mm
F8
F6
F4
F2
K2
ACK
K10
Kunde:
Project:
Projekt:
Customer:
Colour:
2
Farbe: RAL 7035
Saraya Bandar
Dekantersteuerung
=0-S01
=0-S01@1
=0-Q1
Depth:
=00-K1@1
=00-K1@2
=00-K1@3
=00-K1@4
3
=0-Q1
=0-K1 =0-F1 =00-K1
=0-N:N =0-K3
=01-B1
=01-X1 =0-Q1
=01-X1:1
=01-X1:2 =11-F1
=01-X1:3
=00-K4@1
=01-X1:4
=01-X1:5 =01-Q2 =00-K4
Tiefe: 500mm
=01-X1:6 =12-F1
=13-X1
=13-X1:1
=00-K5@1
=13-X1:2
=13-X1:3
=13-X1:4
=0-X1 =01-Q3 =00-K5
=0-X1:1 =01-F3
=0-X1:2 =13-F1
=0-X1:3 =00-K6@1
=0-X1:4
=0-X1:5 =01-K4 =00-K6
=40-X1
=40-X1:1
=12-T1
=40-X1:2
=01-Q1@2
=01-Q1@3
=01-Q1@1
=41-X1
=41-X1:1
=01-Q1
=41-X1:2
=0-X2
=01-T1 =18-F1 =0-F1@1
=0-F1@2
=0-F1@3
=0-X2:1
=0-X2:2
=0-X2:3 =50-K2@1
=50-K2@2
=0-X2:4 =01-P1 =01-Q2@1

=01-Q2@2
=0-X2:5
=0-X2:6
=0-X2:7
=0-X2:8
=0-X2:9
=01-X2=01-X2:1
=11-T1 =50-K3@1
=50-K3@2
=19-F1 =01-Q3@1
=01-Q3@2
=01-X2:2
=13-X2
=13-X2:1
=13-X2:2
=40-X2
=40-X2:1
=40-X2:2 =01-K1
=41-X2
=41-X2:1
=11-K1
=41-X2:2 =12-K1
=50-X2
=50-X2:1
=18-K1
=50-X2:2 =19-K1
=50-X2:3
=50-X2:4 =50-K1
=50-X2:5
=50-X2:6
=50-X2:7
=50-X2:8
=50-X2:9
=12-T1
SC
=50-X2:10
=50-X2:11
=50-X2:12
=50-X2:13
800 mm
=50-X2:14
=50-X2:15
=50-X2:16
=100-X2
=100-X2:1
=100-X2:2
=100-X2:3
=100-X2:4
=100-K1
=0-F2
=100-K2 =0-F3
=100-K3 =50-K2
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
=0-F4
4
=18-T1 =0-F5 =00-A1

=50-K3
=0-B1
GEA Westfalia
=0-F8@1
=0-X100
=0-X100:1 =0-F8
=0-X100:2
=0-X100:3
=0-X1.1
=0-X1.1:1
=0-F9
=0-T2
=0-X1.1:2
=0-X1.1:3 =0-F10=0-F3@1
=0-X1.2
=0-X1.2:1
=0-X1.2:2
=19-T1 =0-X2.1
=0-X2.1:1
=0-X2.1:2
=0-X2.1:3 =01-T3
=0-X2.1:4
=0-X2.2
=0-X2.2:1
=0-X2.2:2
=0-X2.2:3
=0-T1
Benennung/Description:
Separator Group GmbH Schaltschrankaufbau
5
Cabinet arrangement
500 mm
6
Sprache:
Language:
7
UCD 205-00-00
En Drawing No.:
De Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
Rev.
8158-2200-482
=
DCC
+ CC
& ELU
9
Bl./Sh.
73 Bl./Sh.
39
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Klemmenleistenbezeichnung
terminal strip designation
cable type
cable type
=0+CC-N
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
Funktionstext Zielbezeichnung Zielbezeichnung Seite / Spalte
link
function text target designation target designation page / column
Einspeisung
Power supply
-PE PEN N -N &EFS/10.2

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Klemmenplan =0+CC-N +
Projekt:
Project: Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-N
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: En Drawing No.: 8158-2200-482 & EMA 73 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 4x0,75 mm²
.-J 3x0,75 mm²
_-J 5x2,5 mm²
_-J 4x10 mm²

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²

PL 1x10 mm²
PL 1x10 mm²
_-J 4x6 mm²
_-J 4x6 mm²
cable type
cable type
=0+CC-PE
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=100+CC
=50+CC
=01+CC
=01+CC
=41+CC
=41+CC
=40+CC
=40+CC
=13+CC
=0+CC
link
-WD1
-WD1
-WD1
-WD1
-WD1
-WD1
-WG6
-WG1
-WE1
-WE1
Einspeisung
Power supply
GNYE =CUSTOMER+L-X PEN PEN -PE PE &EFS/10.1
-PE PEN
Einspeisung
Power supply
-N N PEN -PE PEN &EFS/10.2
Polymerstation
Polymer station
GNYE =13+L-S1 PE PE -PE &EFS/21.2
230V AC
230V AC
GNYE =40+L-B1 PE PE -PE &EFS/24.1
Potenzialausgleich Durchflussaufnehmer
Potential equalization flow transmitter
GNYE =40+L-B1 PA PE -PE &EFS/24.3
230V AC
230V AC
GNYE =41+L-B1 PE PE -PE &EFS/25.1
Potenzialausgleich Durchflussaufnehmer
Potential equalization flow transmitter
GNYE =41+L-B1 PA PE -PE &EFS/25.3
Dekanter Trommel
Decanter bowl
GNYE =01+L-M1 PE PE -PE &EFS/16.2
= GNYE =01+L-M1 PE PE -PE &EFS/16.2
Ventil Verdünnungswasser
Valve diluting water
Sammelstörung
Common failure
GNYE =100+L-X PE PE -PE &EFS/30.1

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Klemmenplan =0+CC-PE +
Projekt:
Project: Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-PE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 3x0,75 mm²
.-J 3x0,75 mm²
.-J 4x0,75 mm²
.-J 4x0,75 mm²

.-J 5x1,5 mm²
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
cable type
cable type
=0+CC-PE
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
=13+CC
=50+CC
=50+CC
link
-WG1
-WG2
-WG4
-WG3
-WG8
-WG7
Ansteuerung Zulauf
Actuating feed
Ventil Zulauf spülen

Valve feed flushing
= PE -PE &EFS/27.4
Ventil Feststoffweg spülen

Valve solids path flushing
= PE -PE &EFS/28.4
Reserve
Spare
GNYE =100+L-S2 PE PE -PE &EFS/29.1
Reserve
Spare
PE -PE &EFS/29.2
Einspeisung
Power supply
-PE PEN PE -PE &EFS/10.1
Erdung Montageplatte 1
Earthing mounting plate 1
-XE1 PE PE -PE &EFS/10.5
Erdung Tür 1
Earthing door 1
Erdung Gehäuse 1
Earthing cabinet 1
Steuerspannung AC
Control voltage AC
-PE PE -T1 GND &EFS/11.1
Steuerspannung AC
Control voltage AC
-PE PE -X1 5 &EFS/11.3
Steuerspannung DC
Control voltage DC
-PE PE -T2 PE &EFS/11.6
= -PE PE -X2 5 &EFS/11.7
Not-Halt Taster Option

Emergency stop button option
PE -PE &EFS/15.2
= PE -PE &EFS/15.2
Zulaufpumpe 1
Feed pump 1
-PE PE =11-T1 95 &EFS/19.2
Polymerpumpe 1
Polymer pump 1
-PE PE =12-T1 95 &EFS/20.2
GNYE =13+L-Q1 PE PE -PE &EFS/21.8
Zulaufpumpe 2
Feed pump 2
-PE PE =18-T1 95 &EFS/22.2
Polymerpumpe 2
Polymer pump 2
-PE PE =19-T1 95 &EFS/23.2
=00-P1 PE PE -PE &EFS/32.1

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Klemmenplan =0+CC-PE +
Projekt:
Project: Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-PE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.CY-O 2x0,75 mm²
.CY-O 2x0,75 mm²
.CY-O 7x0,75 mm²
.CY-O 2x0,75 mm²

cable type
cable type
=0+CC-SC
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=41+CC
=40+CC
=01+CC
=01+CC
link
-WG1
-WG1
-WG3
-WG1
PTC-Fühler Dekanter Trommel
PTC thermistor decanter bowl
SC =01-WG1 SC SC -SC &EFS/16.8
Drehzahlüberwachung Dekanter
Speed monitoring device decanter
SC =DEK+JB-X7 1 SC -SC &EFS/18.4
Durchfluss Zulauf
Flow feed
Durchfluss Polymer
Flow polymer

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Klemmenplan =0+CC-SC +
Projekt:
Project: Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-SC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
cable type
cable type
=0+CC-X1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
link
Steuerspannung AC
Control voltage AC
1 -F2 2 &EFS/11.2
= 2 -F3 1 &EFS/11.2
= 3 -T1 0 &EFS/11.3
= 4 -X1.2 1 &EFS/11.3
= -PE PE 5 &EFS/11.3

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Klemmenplan =0+CC-X1 +
Projekt:
Project: Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-X1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
cable type
cable type
=0+CC-X2
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
link
Steuerspannung DC
Control voltage DC
1 -T2 + &EFS/11.6
= 2 -F8 1 &EFS/11.6
= 3 -T2 - &EFS/11.6
= 4 -X2.2 1 &EFS/11.6
= -PE PE 5 &EFS/11.7
Not-Halt Taster Option

Emergency stop button option
6 -S01 11 &EFS/15.2
= 7 &EFS/15.2
= 8 &EFS/15.2
= 9 -X2.1 1 &EFS/15.2
=13-X2 1

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
_-J 4x10 mm²
cable type
cable type
=0+CC-XQ1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=0+CC
link
-WD1
Einspeisung
Power supply
1 =CUSTOMER+L-X L1 2 -Q1 2 &EFS/10.1
= 2 =CUSTOMER+L-X L2 4 -Q1 4 &EFS/10.1
= 3 =CUSTOMER+L-X L3 6 -Q1 6 &EFS/10.1

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Klemmenplan =0+CC-XQ1 +
Projekt:
Project: Terminal connection diagram =0+CC-XQ1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
_-J 4x6 mm²
_-J 4x6 mm²
cable type
cable type
=01+CC-X1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=01+CC
=01+CC
link
-WD1
-WD1
Dekanter Trommel
Decanter bowl
1 +L-M1 U1 1 -Q2 2 &EFS/16.1
= 2 +L-M1 V1 2 -Q2 4 &EFS/16.1
= 3 +L-M1 W1 3 -Q2 6 &EFS/16.1
= 1 +L-M1 W2 4 -Q3 4 &EFS/16.3
= 2 +L-M1 U2 5 -Q3 6 &EFS/16.3
= 3 +L-M1 V2 6 -Q3 2 &EFS/16.3

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.CY-O 2x0,75 mm²

cable type
cable type
=01+CC-X2
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=01+CC
link
-WG1
PTC-Fühler Dekanter Trommel
PTC thermistor decanter bowl
1 +L-M1 T1 1 -F3 T1 &EFS/16.8
= 2 +L-M1 T2 2 -F3 T2 &EFS/16.8

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.CY-O 7x0,75 mm²

cable type
cable type
=01+CC-XT3
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=01+CC
link
-WG3
Reserve
Spare
2 =DEK+JB-X7 2 1+ -T3 1+ &EFS/18.4
SE nT 3 =DEK+JB-X7 3 2- -T3 2- &EFS/18.4
SE nE option
SE nE option
6 =DEK+JB-X7 6 3+ -T3 3+ &EFS/18.5
= 7 =DEK+JB-X7 7 4- -T3 4- &EFS/18.5

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Klemmenplan =01+CC-XT3 +
Projekt:
Project: Terminal connection diagram =01+CC-XT3
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FC.CY-J 4x2,5 mm²

.CY-O 2x0,75 mm²
cable type
cable type
=11+CC-XT1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=11+CC
=11+CC
link
-WD1
-WG1
Zulaufpumpe 1
Feed pump 1
1 +L-M1 U1 96 -T1 96 &EFS/19.1
= 2 +L-M1 V1 97 -T1 97 &EFS/19.1
= 3 +L-M1 W1 98 -T1 98 &EFS/19.1
= GNYE +L-M1 PE 99 -T1 99 &EFS/19.1
= SC +L-M1 PE SC -T1 SC &EFS/19.2
PTC Fühler Zulaufpumpe 1

PTC feeler feed pump 1
2 +L-M1 T2 54 -T1 54 &EFS/19.3
= 1 +L-M1 T1 50 -T1 50 &EFS/19.3
= SC -WG1 SC SC -T1 SC &EFS/19.4

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FC.CY-J 4x1,5 mm²

.CY-O 2x0,75 mm²
cable type
cable type
=12+CC-XT1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=12+CC
=12+CC
link
-WD1
-WG1
Polymerpumpe 1
Polymer pump 1
1 +L-M1 U1 96 -T1 96 &EFS/20.1
= 2 +L-M1 V1 97 -T1 97 &EFS/20.1
= 3 +L-M1 W1 98 -T1 98 &EFS/20.1
= GNYE +L-M1 PE 99 -T1 99 &EFS/20.1
PTC Fühler Polymerpumpe 1

PTC feeler polymer pump 1
2 +L-M1 T2 54 -T1 54 &EFS/20.3
= 1 +L-M1 T1 50 -T1 50 &EFS/20.3

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
_-J 5x2,5 mm²
cable type
cable type
=13+CC-X1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=13+CC
link
-WD1
Polymerstation
Polymer station
1 +L-S1 L1 1 -F1 2 &EFS/21.1
= 2 +L-S1 L2 2 -F1 4 &EFS/21.1
= 3 +L-S1 L3 3 -F1 6 &EFS/21.1
= 4 +L-S1 N 4 -N &EFS/21.1

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 3x0,75 mm²
cable type
cable type
=13+CC-X2
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=13+CC
link
-WG1
1 +L-Q1 1 =0-X2 9 &EFS/21.8
=50-X2 3
2 +L-Q1 2 =00-K1 X11:24 &EFS/21.8

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FC.CY-J 4x2,5 mm²

.CY-O 2x0,75 mm²
cable type
cable type
=18+CC-XT1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=18+CC
=18+CC
link
-WD1
-WG1
Zulaufpumpe 2
Feed pump 2
1 +L-M1 U1 96 -T1 96 &EFS/22.1
= 2 +L-M1 V1 97 -T1 97 &EFS/22.1
= 3 +L-M1 W1 98 -T1 98 &EFS/22.1
= GNYE +L-M1 PE 99 -T1 99 &EFS/22.1
PTC Fühler Zulaufpumpe 2

PTC feeler feed pump 2
2 +L-M1 T2 54 -T1 54 &EFS/22.3
= 1 +L-M1 T1 50 -T1 50 &EFS/22.3

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FC.CY-J 4x1,5 mm²

.CY-O 2x0,75 mm²
cable type
cable type
=19+CC-XT1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=19+CC
=19+CC
link
-WD1
-WG1
Polymerpumpe 2
Polymer pump 2
1 +L-M1 U1 96 -T1 96 &EFS/23.1
= 2 +L-M1 V1 97 -T1 97 &EFS/23.1
= 3 +L-M1 W1 98 -T1 98 &EFS/23.1
= GNYE +L-M1 PE 99 -T1 99 &EFS/23.1
PTC Fühler Polymerpumpe 2

PTC feeler polymer pump 2
2 +L-M1 T2 54 -T1 54 &EFS/23.3
= 1 +L-M1 T1 50 -T1 50 &EFS/23.3

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
cable type
cable type
=40+CC-X1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=40+CC
link
-WD1
230V AC
230V AC
1 +L-B1 L 1 =0-X1.1 2 &EFS/24.1
=41-X1 1
230V AC
230V AC
2 +L-B1 N 2 =0-X100 2 &EFS/24.1
=41-X1 2

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.CY-O 2x0,75 mm²

cable type
cable type
=40+CC-X2
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=40+CC
link
-WG1
Durchfluss Zulauf
Flow feed
1 +L-B1 + 1 =00-K1 X11:12 &EFS/24.2
= 2 +L-B1 - 2 =0-X2.2 1 &EFS/24.2
=41-X2 2

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
cable type
cable type
=41+CC-X1
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=41+CC
link
-WD1
230V AC
230V AC
1 +L-B1 L 1 =40-X1 1 &EFS/25.1
= 2 +L-B1 N 2 =40-X1 2 &EFS/25.1

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.CY-O 2x0,75 mm²

cable type
cable type
=41+CC-X2
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=41+CC
link
-WG1
Durchfluss Polymer
Flow polymer
1 +L-B1 + 1 =00-K4 X1:16 &EFS/25.2
= 2 +L-B1 - 2 =40-X2 2 &EFS/25.2

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-O 2x0,75 mm²
.-J 3x0,75 mm²

.-J 5x1,5 mm²
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
cable type
cable type
=50+CC-X2
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=50+CC
=50+CC
=50+CC
=50+CC
link
-WG4
-WG3
-WG2
-WG1
Valve diluting water
1 +L-M1 1 1 -K1 14 &EFS/26.1
= 2 +L-M1 2 2 =0-X2.2 3 &EFS/26.1
Flow diluting water
1 +L-B1 1 3 =13-X2 1 &EFS/26.4
=100-X2 1
Flow diluting water
2 +L-B1 2 4 =00-K6 X1:4 &EFS/26.5
Ventil Zulauf spülen

Valve feed flushing
1 +L-M2 1 5 &EFS/27.1
= 2 +L-M2 2 6 =0-X2.1 4 &EFS/27.1
= 3 +L-M2 3 7 -K2 52 &EFS/27.1
= 4 +L-M2 4 8 -K2 64 &EFS/27.1
= 9 -K2 14 &EFS/27.3
= 10 -K2 44 &EFS/27.4
Ventil Feststoffweg spülen

Valve solids path flushing
1 +L-M3 1 11 &EFS/28.1
= 2 +L-M3 2 12 &EFS/28.1
= 3 +L-M3 3 13 -K3 52 &EFS/28.1
= 4 +L-M3 4 14 -K3 64 &EFS/28.1
= 15 -K3 14 &EFS/28.3
= 16 -K3 44 &EFS/28.4

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 4x0,75 mm²
.-J 4x0,75 mm²
.-J 4x0,75 mm²
.-J 3x0,75 mm²
cable type
cable type
=100+CC-X2
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
=100+CC
link
-WG8
-WG7
-WG6
-WG2
Reserve
Spare
1 +L-S2 1 =50-X2 3 &EFS/29.1
= 2 +L-S2 2 =00-K1 X11:25 &EFS/29.1
Reserve
Spare
3 &EFS/29.2
= 4 =00-K1 X11:26 &EFS/29.2
Sammelstörung
Common failure
1 +L-X . -K1 -K1 12 &EFS/30.1
= 2 +L-X . -K1 -K1 14 &EFS/30.1
= 3 +L-X . -K1 -K1 11 &EFS/30.1
1 +L-X . -K2 -K2 12 &EFS/30.2
= 2 +L-X . -K2 -K2 14 &EFS/30.2
= 3 +L-X . -K2 -K2 11 &EFS/30.3
Ansteuerung Zulauf
Actuating feed
1 +L-X . -K3 -K3 12 &EFS/30.4
= 2 +L-X . -K3 -K3 14 &EFS/30.4
= 3 +L-X . -K3 -K3 11 &EFS/30.4

Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.CY-O 7x0,75 mm²

cable type
cable type
=DEK+JB-X7
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
connection
connection
terminal
Klemme
Anschluss
Anschluss
cable name
cable name
Kabelname
Kabelname
Brücke
=01+CC
link
-WG3
Drehzahlüberwachung Dekanter
Speed monitoring device decanter
1 =0+CC-SC SC SC &EFS/18.4
Reserve
Spare
=01+L-B13 + 2 =01+CC-XT3 1+ 2 &EFS/18.4
SE nT =01+L-B13 - 3 =01+CC-XT3 2- 3 &EFS/18.4
SE nE option
SE nE option
=01+L-B11 + 6 =01+CC-XT3 3+ 6 &EFS/18.5
= =01+L-B11 - 7 =01+CC-XT3 4- 7 &EFS/18.5

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Klemmenplan =DEK+JB-X7 +
Projekt:
Project: Terminal connection diagram =DEK+JB-X7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Hinweise zur Installation von Kabeln und Leitungen

Directions for the installation of cables and conductors
Allgemein
General
* Alle Schutzmaßnahmen (z.B. Einspeisung Schaltschrank) sind gemäß der Bestimmungen des jeweiligen nationalen Standards bzw. des zuständigen Enerieversorgers auszuführen!
All protective measures (e.g. feed control panel) are to be taken in accordance with the applicable national electric codes and the regulations of the local power authorities!
* Kabel und Leitungen sind so auszuwählen und zu verlegen, dass eine Gefährdung von Personen und der Umgebung ausgeschlossen ist.
Die angegebenen Kabelquerschnitte sind bezogen auf eine Kabellänge von 50m, Kupfer als Leitermaterial, Verlegeart "C" und eine maximale Umgebungstemperatur von 30°C. Siehe hierzu DIN VDE 0298-4 (Verwendung von
Kabeln und isolierten Leitungen für Starkstromanlagen -Teil 4. Empfohlene Werte für die Strombelastbarkeit von Kabeln und Leitungen für feste Verlegung in und an Gebäuden und von flexiblen Leitungen). Neben der
Strombelastung sind bei der Errichtung von Kabel- und Leitungsanlagen weitere Faktoren zu berücksichtigen. Siehe hierzu DIN VDE 0100-520 (IEC 60364-5-52), Errichten von Niederspannungsanlagen - Teil 5: Auswahl und
Errichtung elektrischer Betriebsmittel - Kapitel 52: Kabel- und Leitungsanlagen.
Cables and conductors must be selected and installed in a way to eliminate any risk to persons and the environment. The cable cross-sections specified in these drawings are based on a max. length of 50m, copper as conducting
material, laying version "C" and a maximum ambient temperature of 30°C. Refer also to DIN VDE 0298-4 (Usage of cables and cords in power installations - Part 4. Recommended current-carrying capacity for cables for fixed
wirings in and around buildings and for flexible cables and cords). Besides the current load are in the erection of wiring systems additional parameters to take into account. Refer also to DIN VDE 0100-520 (IEC 60364-5-52)
erection of low voltage installations - Part 5: Selection and erection of electrical equipment - Chapter 52: Wiring systems.
* Kabel und Leitungen für sicherheitsrelevante Funktionen (z.B. Not-Halt, Sicherer Halt) sind geschützt zu verlegen (im Sinne der DIN EN ISO 13849-2, Tabelle D.4 bzw. EN 60204-1, Kapitel 13.4).
Cables and conductors for safety relevant functions (e.g. Emergency Stop, Safe Stop) must be installed in suitable ducts (according to DIN EN ISO 13849-2, Table D.4 and EN 60204-1, chapter 13.4).
* Messleitungen sind grundsätzlich abgeschirmt zu verlegen!
Measuring lines must always be laid shielded!
* WD-Kabelname getrennt vom WF-/WG-Kabelnamen verlegen!

WD-cables name to be installed separate from WF-/WG-cable naming!
WD-Kabel Energiekabel < 1kV WE-Kabel Erdungs-/Potentialausgleichsleiterleiter

WD-cable = Energy cable < 1kV WE-cable = Earth-/ Equipotential bonding conductor
WF-Kabel Datenbus WG-Kabel Steuer-/ Messkabel WH-Kabel Lichtwellenleiter
WF-cable = Data bus WG-cable = Control-/measuring cable WH-cable = Optical fibre
Legende Kabeltypen (Kabelliste)

Legend cable typ (list of cables)
Kabel / Leitung mit Schutzleiter

-J = Cable / conductor with protective conductor FC.CY = Motorkabel FU mit konzentrischem Außenleiter (PE)
Motor cable FC with concentric outer (PE)
Kabel / Leitung ohne Schutzleiter
-O = Cable / conductor without protective conductor PL = Potentialausgleichsleiter
Equipotential bonding conductor
Kabel / Leitung mit Schutzleiter geschirmt
CY-J = Cable / conductor with protective conductor screened Ex-CY = Steuerleitung blau für eigensichere Stromkreise
Control line blue for intrinsically safe circuits
Kabel / Leitung ohne Schutzleiter geschirmt
CY-O = Cable / conductor without protective conductor screened CY-TP = Datenleitung paarverseilt
Data line twisted pair
Motorkabel FU geschirmt mit Schutzleiter
FC.CY-J = Motor cable FC screened with protective conductor

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Hinweise zur Installation +
Projekt:
Project: Instructions for installation
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: En Drawing No.: 8158-2200-482 & EMB 73 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FU
FC
=..-U.
Generelle Information zum Potentialausgleich.
Die Informationen auf diesem Blatt sind nicht
kundenspezifisch angepasst.
IP54
General Information for the equipotential bonding system.

Please note, that the information shown on this page are
not customised.
PE-Schiene
protective earth - rail
IDM
PE
Potentialausgleichsschiene
equipotential bonding strip
PA7
PA6
PA5
PA4
PA3
PA2
PA1
equipotential bonding building
Potentialausgleich Gebäude
Fundamenterder
foundation earth

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Potentialausgleich Dekanter +
Projekt:
Project: Potential equalization decanter
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Kabelliste
List of cables
Verwendete
Kabelname Seite / Pfad Quelle (von) Ziel (bis) Kabeltyp Adern gesamt
Adern
Querschnitt Länge Außendurchmesser Bemerkung
Cable name Page / path Source (from) Target (up to) Cable type Wires total Cross-section Length External diameter Remark
Used cores
Störung
=13+CC-WG1 &EFS/21.8 =0+CC-PE;=13+CC-X2 =13+L-Q1 .-J 3x 3 0,75 mm² 7,6 mm Polymerstation
Failure
polymer station
=50+CC-WG1 &EFS/26.1 =0+CC-PE;=50+CC-X2 =50+L-M1 .-J 3x 3 0,75 mm² 7,6 mm Valve diluting water
Reserve
=100+CC-WG2 &EFS/29.1 =0+CC-PE;=100+CC-X2 =100+L-S2 .-J 3x 3 0,75 mm² 7,6 mm Spare
Sammelstörung
=100+CC-WG6 &EFS/30.1 =0+CC-PE;=100+CC-X2 =100+L-X .-J 4x 4 0,75 mm² 8,3 mm Common failure
Dekanter
=100+CC-WG7 &EFS/30.2 =0+CC-PE;=100+CC-X2 =100+L-X .-J 4x 4 0,75 mm² 8,3 mm betriebsbereit
Decanter
ready for operation
Ansteuerung
=100+CC-WG8 &EFS/30.4 =0+CC-PE;=100+CC-X2 =100+L-X .-J 4x 4 0,75 mm² 8,3 mm Zulauf
Actuating
feed
230V AC
=40+CC-WD1 &EFS/24.1 =0+CC-PE;=40+CC-X1 =40+L-B1 .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² 9,4 mm 230V AC
=41+CC-WD1 &EFS/25.1 =0+CC-PE;=41+CC-X1 =41+L-B1 .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² 9,4 mm =
Ventil
=50+CC-WG3 &EFS/27.1 =0+CC-PE;=50+CC-X2 =50+L-M2 .-J 5x 5 1,5 mm² 11,4 mm Zulauf spülen
Valve
feed flushing
Ventil
=50+CC-WG4 &EFS/28.1 =0+CC-PE;=50+CC-X2 =50+L-M3 .-J 5x 5 1,5 mm² 11,4 mm Feststoffweg spülen
Valve
=50+CC-WG2 &EFS/26.4 =50+CC-X2 =50+L-B1 .-O 2x 2 0,75 mm² 5,4 mm Flow diluting water
PTC-Fühler
=01+CC-WG1 &EFS/16.8 =0+CC-SC;=01+CC-X2 =01+L-M1 .CY-O 2x 2 0,75 mm² 7,4 mm Dekanter Trommel
PTC thermistor
decanter bowl
PTC Fühler
=11+CC-WG1 &EFS/19.3 =11+CC-XT1 =11+L-M1 .CY-O 2x 2 0,75 mm² 7,4 mm Zulaufpumpe 1
PTC feeler
feed pump 1
PTC Fühler
=12+CC-WG1 &EFS/20.3 =12+CC-XT1 =12+L-M1 .CY-O 2x 2 0,75 mm² 7,4 mm Polymerpumpe 1
PTC feeler
polymer pump 1
PTC Fühler
=18+CC-WG1 &EFS/22.3 =18+CC-XT1 =18+L-M1 .CY-O 2x 2 0,75 mm² 7,4 mm Zulaufpumpe 2
PTC feeler
feed pump 2

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Kabelübersicht +
Projekt:
Project: Cable layout
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Kabelliste
List of cables
Verwendete
Kabelname Seite / Pfad Quelle (von) Ziel (bis) Kabeltyp Adern gesamt
Adern
Querschnitt Länge Außendurchmesser Bemerkung
Cable name Page / path Source (from) Target (up to) Cable type Wires total Cross-section Length External diameter Remark
Used cores
PTC Fühler
=19+CC-WG1 &EFS/23.3 =19+CC-XT1 =19+L-M1 .CY-O 2x 2 0,75 mm² 7,4 mm Polymerpumpe 2
PTC feeler
polymer pump 2
Durchfluss Zulauf
=40+CC-WG1 &EFS/24.2 =0+CC-SC;=40+CC-X2 =40+L-B1 .CY-O 2x 2 0,75 mm² 7,4 mm Flow feed
Durchfluss Polymer
=41+CC-WG1 &EFS/25.2 =0+CC-SC;=41+CC-X2 =41+L-B1 .CY-O 2x 2 0,75 mm² 7,4 mm Flow polymer
Drehzahlüberwachung
=01+CC-WG3 &EFS/18.4 =0+CC-SC;=01+CC-XT3 =DEK+JB-X7 .CY-O 7x 4 0,75 mm² 9,7 mm Speed monitoring device
Polymerpumpe 1
=12+CC-WD1 &EFS/20.1 =12+CC-XT1 =12+L-M1 FC.CY-J 4x 4 1,5 mm² 11,3 mm Polymer pump 1
Polymerpumpe 2
=19+CC-WD1 &EFS/23.1 =19+CC-XT1 =19+L-M1 FC.CY-J 4x 4 1,5 mm² 11,3 mm Polymer pump 2
Zulaufpumpe 1
=11+CC-WD1 &EFS/19.1 =11+CC-XT1 =11+L-M1 FC.CY-J 4x 4 2,5 mm² 13,5 mm Feed pump 1
Zulaufpumpe 2
=18+CC-WD1 &EFS/22.1 =18+CC-XT1 =18+L-M1 FC.CY-J 4x 4 2,5 mm² 13,5 mm Feed pump 2
Potenzialausgleich
=40+CC-WE1 &EFS/24.3 =0+CC-PE =40+L-B1 PL 1x 1 10 mm² 6,5 mm Durchflussaufnehmer
flow transmitter
=41+CC-WE1 &EFS/25.3 =0+CC-PE =41+L-B1 PL 1x 1 10 mm² 6,5 mm =
=00+CC-WF1 &EFS/33.1 =00+CC-A1 =00+CC-K1 Profibus 2 0,64 mm²

1x2x
Polymerstation
=13+CC-WD1 &EFS/21.1 =0+CC-PE;=13+CC-X1 =13+L-S1 _-J 5x 5 2,5 mm² 14,0 mm Polymer station
Dekanter Trommel
=01+CC-WD1.1 &EFS/16.1 =0+CC-PE;=01+CC-X1 =01+L-M1 _-J 4x 4 6 mm² 17,0 mm Decanter bowl
=01+CC-WD1.2 &EFS/16.2 =0+CC-PE;=01+CC-X1 =01+L-M1 _-J 4x 4 6 mm² 17,0 mm =
Einspeisung
=0+CC-WD1 &EFS/10.1 =0+CC-PE;=0+CC-XQ1 =CUSTOMER+L-X _-J 4x 4 10 mm² 19,0 mm Power supply
=00+CC-WF2 &EFS/33.1 =00+CC-A1 _CY-O 4x2x 0 0,5 mm² 9,4 mm

Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Kabelübersicht +
Projekt:
Project: Cable layout
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
Funktionszeichen Seite / Pfad Bestell-Nr. Bezeichnung Hersteller
Function sign Page / path Order no.. Name Manufacturer
=0+CC-PE &EFS/10.1 CU 20x05 mm Kupferschiene Meterware blank

Copper rail
=0+CC-PE &EFS/10.1 SV9340030 RiLine60 Sammelschienenhalter 1polig RITTAL GMBH
bus bar holder
=0+CC-PE &EFS/10.1 SV9340040 Sammelschienenhalter 2polig RITTAL GMBH
busbar support
=0+CC-PE &EFS/10.1 SH 1 Schienenhalter PA (Bügel u. Sockel) komplett WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
rail holder
=0+CC-PE &EFS/10.1 CU 10x03 mm Kupferschiene Meterware blank
Copper rail
=0+CC-PE &EFS/10.1;& AK 16 Anschlussklemme 16 mm² PHOENIX CONTACT
EFS/16.2;&EF connection terminal
=0+CC-Q1 &EFS/10.1 NZMC1-A40 Leistungsschalter 3polig 32-40 A Anl.-/Kabelschutz EATON ELECTRIC GMBH
circuit-breaker
=0+CC-Q1 &EFS/10.1 NZM1-XTVD Türkupplungsdrehgriff schwarz für NZM1 abschließbar EATON ELECTRIC GMBH
door coupling rotating handle
=0+CC-Q1 &EFS/10.1 NZM1/2-XV6 Verlängerungsachse 600 mm MOELLER GMBH
extension axis
=0+CC-Q1 &EFS/10.1 NZM1-XIPK Fingerschutz 3polig für Rahmenkl. NZM1/PN1/N1 EATON ELECTRIC GMBH
finger protection
=0+CC-Q1 &EFS/10.1 NZM1-XKSA Klemmenabdeckung 3polig für Bgr. 1 EATON ELECTRIC GMBH
terminal cover
=0+CC-N &EFS/10.2 WDU 16 BL Reihenklemme 16 mm² blau WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
terminal
=0+CC-PE &EFS/10.2 AK 35 Anschlussklemme 35 mm² PHOENIX CONTACT
connection terminal
=0+CC-F1 &EFS/11.1 0005-1872-150 Leistungsschalter für Motorschutz 1,1-1,6 A Schraub SIEMENS AG
motor protection switch
=0+CC-F1 &EFS/11.1 3RV2925-5AB 3-Phasen-Einspeiseklemme S00-S0 4-16 mm² SIEMENS AG
feeder terminal block
=0+CC-F1 &EFS/11.1 3RV1915-1BB 3-Phasen-Sammelschiene für 3RV1, 3-fach SIEMENS AG
busbar
=0+CC-F1 &EFS/11.1 3RV1915-1CB 3-Phasen-Sammelschiene für 3RV1, 4-fach SIEMENS AG
busbar
=0+CC-PE &EFS/11.1;& AK 4 Anschlussklemme 4 mm² PHOENIX CONTACT
EFS/11.3;&EF connection terminal
=0+CC-T1 &EFS/11.1 ST 400/4/23 Steuertransformator 400/230 V / 400 VA BLOCK GMBH & CO. KG
control-power transformer
Editor BER/S&W Separator Group GmbH Stückliste +
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: En Drawing No.: 8158-2200-482 & EPB 73 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
=0+CC-F2 &EFS/11.2 5SY4106-8 Leitungsschutzschalter 1polig D 6 A / 10 kA SIEMENS AG

circuit breaker
=0+CC-X1 &EFS/11.2;& WDU 2.5 Reihenklemme 2,5 mm² beige WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
EFS/11.3 terminal
=0+CC-X1 &EFS/11.3 WTR 2.5 Trennklemme beige 2,5 mm² WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
disconnect terminal
=0+CC-T2 &EFS/11.5 0005-1407-050 GEA-Westfalia-Stromversorg. 120/230 V / 24 V DC 5 A SIEMENS AG
power supply
=0+CC-F3 &EFS/11.6 5SY6106-7 Leitungsschutzschalter 1polig C 6 A SIEMENS AG
circuit breaker
=0+CC-F3 &EFS/11.6 ES-S10310 Sammelschiene 1phasig 3 Stifte 10 mm² o. HS FTG GÖHRINGER GMBH
busbar
EFS/15.2 terminal
=0+CC-X2 &EFS/11.7 WTR 2.5 Trennklemme beige 2,5 mm² WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
disconnect terminal
circuit breaker
=0+CC-X1.1 &EFS/12.1... ZDU 2.5/4AN Doppelklemme mit Zugfeder 2,5 mm² / 4 Anschlüsse WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
&EFS/12.3 double terminal
=0+CC-X1.2 &EFS/12.1 ZDU 2.5/4AN Doppelklemme mit Zugfeder 2,5 mm² / 4 Anschlüsse WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
double terminal
circuit breaker
circuit breaker
=0+CC-F8 &EFS/13.1 ES-S10310 Sammelschiene 1phasig 3 Stifte 10 mm² o. HS FTG GÖHRINGER GMBH
busbar
=0+CC-X2.1 &EFS/13.1... ZDU 2.5/4AN Doppelklemme mit Zugfeder 2,5 mm² / 4 Anschlüsse WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
&EFS/13.3 double terminal
=0+CC-X2.2 &EFS/13.1 ZDU 2.5/4AN Doppelklemme mit Zugfeder 2,5 mm² / 4 Anschlüsse WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
double terminal
circuit breaker
circuit breaker
=0+CC-B1 &EFS/14.2 01141.0-00 Thermostat 0 - +60 °C für Lüftersteuerung / 1S IBB
thermostat
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
=0+CC-M1 &EFS/14.2 0005-1409-340 Filterlüfter 116 m³/h 230 V IP54 / RAL 7035 PFANNENBERG GMBH
cabinet fan
=0+CC-M1 &EFS/14.2 0005-1409-240 Austrittsfilter IP54 / RAL 7035 PFANNENBERG GMBH
discharge filter
EFS/14.3 terminal
=0+CC-X100 &EFS/14.3 WPE 2.5 Schutzleiterklemme 2,5 mm² grün-gelb WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
protective conductor terminal
=0+CC-K1 &EFS/15.1 3SK1111-1AB30 Not-Aus-Schaltgerät 24 V AC/DC mit Rel.-FK 3S + Rel.-MK 1Ö SIEMENS AG
emergency stop relay
=0+CC-S01 &EFS/15.1 3SB3000-1HA20 Pilzdrucktaster 40 mm rot SIEMENS AG
mushroom-head pushbutton switch
=0+CC-S01 &EFS/15.1 3SB3921-0DY Unterlegschild Not-Aus gelb blanko rund da= 60 mm SIEMENS AG
legend plate
=0+CC-S01 &EFS/15.1 3SB3400-0M Hilfsschalter 1Ö Front für Montageüberwachung SIEMENS AG
auxiliary switch
=0+CC-K3 &EFS/15.8 0005-1870-200 Koppelschütz 4S 24 V DC Schraub SIEMENS AG
contactor relay
=01+CC-B1 &EFS/16.1 ASK 31.4 Aufsteck-Stromwandler 50-1 A 1,25 VA Kl. 1 MBS SULZBACH GMBH
current transformer
=01+CC-X1 &EFS/16.1;& WDU 10 Reihenklemme 10 mm² beige WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
EFS/16.3 terminal
=01+CC-T1 &EFS/16.4 WAS1 CMA LP 1/5/10A ac Messumformer E: 1/5/10A 50/60 Hz / A: 4-20 mA WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
measuring transducer
=01+CC-F3 &EFS/16.7 0005-1100-070 Kaltleiter-Auslösegerät 230 V 50/60 Hz 1S 1Ö SIEMENS AG
thermistor protection relay
=0+CC-SC &EFS/16.8 KLBUE 4-13.5 Schirmklemme 4-13,5 mm WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
shield terminal
=01+CC-X2 &EFS/16.8 WDU 2.5 Reihenklemme 2,5 mm² beige WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
terminal
=01+CC-Q1 &EFS/17.1 0005-1871-630 Leistungsschütz 3polig 15 kW / 400 V / 1S+1Ö SIEMENS AG
power contactor
=01+CC-Q1 &EFS/17.1 0005-1873-080 Hilfsschalterblock 1S 1Ö Schraub SIEMENS AG
auxiliary switch
=01+CC-Q1 &EFS/17.1 3RA2923-2BB1 Verdrahtungsbausatz Schraub für Bgr. S0 3RT2 Stern-Dreieck SIEMENS AG
conductor set
=01+CC-Q1 &EFS/17.1 0005-1875-120 RC-Glied 127-240 V AC / 150-250 V DC SIEMENS AG
RC element
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
=01+CC-K4 &EFS/17.2 3RP1525-1AP30 Zeitrelais 0,05s-100h 24 AC/DC / 200-240 V AC 1W SIEMENS AG

time-delay relay
power contactor
auxiliary switch
RC element
power contactor
auxiliary switch
RC element
=01+CC-P1 &EFS/17.5 BW 70.29 230V/50-60HZ Stundenzähler 230 V 50-60 Hz HUGO MUELLER GMBH
hours counter
=01+CC-K1 &EFS/17.8 PLC-RSC-24DC/21 Koppelrelais 24 V DC 1 W mit Schraubklemmen PHOENIX CONTACT
coupling relay
=0+CC-SC &EFS/18.4;& KLBUE 3-8 Schirmklemme 3-8 mm WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
EFS/24.2;&EF shield terminal
=01+CC-T3 &EFS/18.4 MK1-2RP/24VDC Schaltverstärker 2-kanalig 24 V DC TURCK GMBH
switching amplifier
=11+CC-F1 &EFS/19.1 0005-1872-240 Leistungsschalter für Motorschutz 2,8-4 A Schraub SIEMENS AG
=11+CC-T1 &EFS/19.1 FC-301 P1K5 Frequenzumrichter 1,5 kW DANFOSS GMBH
frequency converter
coupling relay
=12+CC-T1 &EFS/20.1 FC-301 PK75 Frequenzumrichter 0,75 kW DANFOSS GMBH
frequency converter
coupling relay
=13+CC-X1 &EFS/21.1 ZEW 35 Endbock für TS35 b= 6 mm WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
end bracket
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
=13+CC-X1 &EFS/21.1 WDU 4 Reihenklemme 4 mm² beige WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
terminal
end bracket
=13+CC-X2 &EFS/21.8 WDU 2.5 Reihenklemme 2,5 mm² beige WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
terminal
=18+CC-T1 &EFS/22.1 FC-301 P1K5 Frequenzumrichter 1,5 kW DANFOSS GMBH
frequency converter
coupling relay
=19+CC-T1 &EFS/23.1 FC-301 PK75 Frequenzumrichter 0,75 kW DANFOSS GMBH
frequency converter
coupling relay
=40+CC-X1 &EFS/24.1 WDK 2.5 ZQV Doppelstockklemme 2,5 mm² WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
two-tier terminal
two-tier terminal
two-tier terminal
two-tier terminal
end bracket
=50+CC-X2 &EFS/26.1;& WDK 2.5 ZQV Doppelstockklemme 2,5 mm² WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
EFS/26.4;&EF two-tier terminal
coupling relay
=50+CC-K2 &EFS/27.7 0005-1870-030 Hilfsschütz 2S 2Ö 24 V DC Schraub SIEMENS AG
contactor relay
=50+CC-K2 &EFS/27.7 0005-1873-080 Hilfsschalterblock 1S 1Ö Schraub SIEMENS AG
auxiliary switch
=50+CC-K2 &EFS/27.7 0005-1875-070 Diodenkombination 12-250 V DC SIEMENS AG
diode combination
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
=50+CC-K3 &EFS/28.7 0005-1870-030 Hilfsschütz 2S 2Ö 24 V DC Schraub SIEMENS AG

contactor relay
=50+CC-K3 &EFS/28.7 0005-1873-080 Hilfsschalterblock 1S 1Ö Schraub SIEMENS AG
auxiliary switch
=50+CC-K3 &EFS/28.7 0005-1875-070 Diodenkombination 12-250 V DC SIEMENS AG
diode combination
end bracket
=100+CC-X2 &EFS/29.1;& WDK 2.5 ZQV Doppelstockklemme 2,5 mm² WEIDMÜLLER GMBH & CO. KG
EFS/29.2 two-tier terminal
coupling relay
coupling relay
coupling relay
=00+CC-P1 &EFS/32.1 0005-4050-810 GEA-TP OP 177 B Blue Mode SIEMENS AG
operating panel
=00+CC-P1 &EFS/32.1 0005-4050-724 Steckleitung 3 m mit 2 Sub-D-Steckern 9polig SIEMENS AG
plug line
=00+CC-A1 &EFS/33.1 AB 7634 Gateway Modbus-TCP-Slave / Profibus-Slave 24 V DC HMS INDUSTRIAL NETWORKS
gateway
=00+CC-K1 &EFS/33.1 0005-4050-820 S7-300 Zentralbaugruppe CPU 314-2DP (96 kB) SIEMENS AG
central processing unit
=00+CC-K1 &EFS/33.1 0005-4050-721 Micro Memory Card 128 kB SIEMENS AG
micro memory card
=00+CC-K1 &EFS/33.1 6ES7392-1AM00-0AA0 S7-300 Frontstecker 40-polig Schraubanschluss SIEMENS AG
front connectors
=00+CC-K1 &EFS/33.1 6ES7390-1AE80-0AA0 S7-300 Profilschiene 480 mm SIEMENS AG
profile bar
=00+CC-K1 &EFS/33.1 6ES7328-0AA00-7AA0 S7-300 Fronttür erhöht für 32-kanalige Bgrp. SIEMENS AG
front door
=00+CC-K4 &EFS/33.4 0005-4281-030 S7-300 Analogeingabe 8 AE SIEMENS AG
analog input module
=00+CC-K4 &EFS/33.4 0005-3396-010 S7-300 Frontstecker 20-polig Schraubanschluss SIEMENS AG
front connectors
=00+CC-K5 &EFS/33.5 0005-4281-020 S7-300 Analogausgabe 4 AA SIEMENS AG
analog output module
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
=00+CC-K5 &EFS/33.5 0005-3396-010 S7-300 Frontstecker 20-polig Schraubanschluss SIEMENS AG

front connectors
=00+CC-K6 &EFS/33.6 0005-4280-020 S7-300 Digitaleingabe SM 321 / 16 DE SIEMENS AG
digital input module
=00+CC-K6 &EFS/33.6 0005-3396-010 S7-300 Frontstecker 20polig Schraubanschluss SIEMENS AG
front connectors
+CC-CABINET &ELU/39.0 TS8805500 TS-Schaltschrank 800x2000x500 mm RAL 7035 RITTAL GMBH
switchgear cabinet
+CC-CABINET &ELU/39.0 TS8105235 TS-Seitenwand 2000x500 mm² RAL 7035 RITTAL GMBH
side wall
+CC-CABINET &ELU/39.0 TS4118000 Schaltplantasche Stahlblech für Türbreite 800 mm RITTAL GMBH
pocket for circuit diagram
+CC-CABINET &ELU/39.0 TS8601800 TS-Sockelelemente 800x100 mm² RAL 7022 RITTAL GMBH
plinth components
+CC-CABINET &ELU/39.0 TS8601050 TS-Sockelblende seitlich 500x100 mm² RAL 7022 RITTAL GMBH
plinth components

Projekt:
Project: Parts list
Instruction manual
No.: 8185-9001-018
Edition: 3108
Description: Decanter control unit
Type: DCU 8
On 0 Prod. H2O Error
Off ACK
Mechanical separation / GEA Westfalia Separator

2 8185-9001-018 / 3108
GEA Westfalia Separator
D-59302 Oelde (F. R. Germany)
Prüfnummer
Control No.
Bemessungsspannung V, 3/AC Hz
Nominal voltage
Steuerspannung VAC Hz VDC

Control voltage
Volllaststrom A
Full-load current
Bemessungsstrom
(größter Motor/Verbraucher) A
Nominal Current
(largest motor/consumer)
Kurzschlussausschaltvermögen Ion kA
Short-circuit breaking capacity
Schaltplan-Nr.
Wiring diagram No.
Programm-Nr.
Program No.
Teile-Nr.
Part-No.
This form has to be filled in by the end user.

Please copy the data shown on the name plate.
Translation of the original instruction manual 8185-9000-018 / 3108.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 3
For Your Safety
• Warning indicating a danger to parts of the unit. Strictly adhere to

instructions marked with this symbol.
This avoids damage to or destruction of the centrifuge or other system
units.
• Take special care when carrying out operations marked with this
symbol –
otherwise there is danger to life and limb.
• Observe accident prevention regulations.

The local safety and accident prevention regulations apply
unconditionally to the operation of the centrifuge.
• When operating electrical devices, some components carry a

hazardous voltage.
Protective measures must be taken in line with national and local regu-
lations when working on electrical parts.
Non-compliance with the protective measures can result in serious in-
jury or damage.
Only suitably qualified specialists are allowed to work on electrical e-
quipment.
• Comply with the instruction manual.

Follow the instructions given in this manual and the centrifuge manual.
• Operate the centrifuge only in accordance with agreed process

and operating data.
• Maintain the centrifuge as specified in the centrifuge instruction

manual.
• Carry out safety checks on the centrifuge,

as described in chapter “Safety” in the centrifuge instruction manual.

4 8185-9001-018 / 3108
• Liability for the function of the unit passes to the owner.

Liability for the function of the unit unconditionally passes to the owner
or operator, irrespective of existing warranty or guarantee periods in so
far as the unit is improperly maintained or serviced by persons other
than Westfalia Separator service personnel or if the machine is not u-
sed in accordance with the intended use.
Westfalia Separator shall not be liable for damage which occurs as a
result of non-compliance with the above. Warranty and liability condi-
tions in the Conditions of Sale and Delivery of Westfalia Separator are
not extended by the above.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 5
1 Safety 7
1.1 Foreword.................................................................................................. 8
1.2 Intended use ............................................................................................ 8
1.3 Unallowed use ......................................................................................... 8
1.4 Electrical installation ................................................................................ 9
1.5 Frequency converter operation................................................................ 9
1.6 Explosion protection .............................................................................. 10
1.7 Operation ............................................................................................... 11
1.8 Maintenance and repair ......................................................................... 12
1.8.1 Care instructions.................................................................................... 12
1.8.2 Requirements concerning the service personnel and spare parts ........ 13
1.8.3 Deactivation and "Emergency stop" ...................................................... 13
2 Device description 15
2.1 Function ................................................................................................. 16

2.2 Features................................................................................................. 17
2.3 Areas of application ............................................................................... 18
2.3.1 Standard drive ....................................................................................... 18
2.3.2 Differential drive..................................................................................... 19
2.3.3 2-gear drive............................................................................................ 20
2.4 Technical data ....................................................................................... 21
2.5 Part numbers ......................................................................................... 22
2.6 Special versions..................................................................................... 22
3 Operation 23
3.1 Getting acquainted with the operating elements ................................... 24

3.1.1 Function keys......................................................................................... 25
3.1.2 Soft keys ................................................................................................ 26
3.1.3 System keyboard ................................................................................... 28
3.1.4 Editing text/numerical values/fields ....................................................... 30
3.2 Switching on the control unit.................................................................. 31
3.3 Password protection .............................................................................. 32
3.4 Program runs ......................................................................................... 33
3.4.1 Decanter operation ................................................................................ 33
3.4.2 Grease lubrication operation (option) .................................................... 36
3.5 Menu overview....................................................................................... 37
3.6 Main menu ............................................................................................. 38
3.6.1 Description of icons ............................................................................... 39
3.6.2 Manual /Automatic mode ....................................................................... 40
3.7 Feed decanter........................................................................................ 42
3.7.1 Feed controller....................................................................................... 43
3.8 Decanter menu ...................................................................................... 45
3.8.1 Bearing temperature on liquid side........................................................ 47
3.8.2 Bearing temperature on solids side ....................................................... 48
3.8.3 Vibration................................................................................................. 49
3.8.4 Torque limit values................................................................................. 50
3.8.5 Bowl motor amperage............................................................................ 51
3.8.6 Differential speed................................................................................... 52
3.8.7 Bowl speed ............................................................................................ 53

6 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.8.8 Timer menu............................................................................................ 54

3.8.9 Decanter control mode .......................................................................... 57
3.8.10 Speed control (2-gear control)............................................................... 58
3.8.11 Setting instructions for speed control .................................................... 59
3.8.12 Torque control........................................................................................ 68
3.8.13 Setting instructions for torque control .................................................... 70
3.9 Project information................................................................................. 71
3.10 Service settings ..................................................................................... 72
3.10.1 Maintenance intervals............................................................................ 72
3.10.2 Service message ................................................................................... 74
3.10.3 Service buffer......................................................................................... 75
3.11 Decanter configuration........................................................................... 76
3.12 System settings ..................................................................................... 79
4 Maintenance 81
4.1 Accident prevention ............................................................................... 82

4.2 Requirements concerning the service personnel and spare parts ........ 82
4.3 Alarms.................................................................................................... 83
4.3.1 Failure messages .................................................................................. 83
4.3.2 Active failure .......................................................................................... 84
4.3.3 Failure buffer.......................................................................................... 85
4.3.4 Failure report: Reasons and remedies .................................................. 86
4.3.5 Varying/missing speed display .............................................................. 91
4.3.6 Checking the speed sensors ................................................................. 91
4.3.7 Status and alarm indicator ..................................................................... 92
4.4 Changing the Micro Memory Card (MMC)............................................. 94
4.5 CPU reset .............................................................................................. 95
4.6 Importing a new visualisation ................................................................ 96
4.7 Centralised control via potential-free contacts....................................... 97
5 Installation and connection 99
5.1 Installing the control cabinet ................................................................100

5.2 Connecting the control unit ..................................................................100
5.3 Particularity; electrical connecting cable..............................................101
6 Appendix 103
6.1 Speed sensor types; clearances and pulses .......................................104

6.2 Parameter tables .................................................................................108

8185-9001-018 / 3108 7
1 Safety
1.1 Foreword.................................................................................................. 8
1.2 Intended use ............................................................................................ 8
1.3 Unallowed use ......................................................................................... 8
1.4 Electrical installation ................................................................................ 9
1.5 Frequency converter operation................................................................ 9
1.6 Explosion protection .............................................................................. 10
1.7 Operation ............................................................................................... 11
1.8 Maintenance and repair ......................................................................... 12
1.8.1 Care instructions.................................................................................... 12
1.8.2 Requirements concerning the service personnel and spare parts ........ 13
1.8.3 Deactivation and "Emergency stop" ...................................................... 13

8 8185-9001-018 / 3108
1.1 Foreword
The instruction manual is primarily intended for persons entrusted with the task
of operating and maintaining the control unit. To assure safe operation it is the-
refore imperative that the manual is handed over to these persons.
In the event of any queries please state the model designation and the serial
number (see nameplate inside the control unit).
1.2 Intended use

The control unit DCU 8 is used for the:
• visualisation of the decanter with the associated drives and valves,
• menu-driven user prompting,
• control of decanter including all drives, valves and controllers provided on the
decanter,
• measuring the bowl and the gear speed,
• calculating the differential speed between bowl and screw speed,
• regulating the differential speed (only with 2-gear drive and differential drive),
• displaying the bowl speed, the differential speed and the secondary drive tor-
que (only with 2-gear drive and differential drive) of the connected decanter,
• monitoring of sensors and safety functions,
• control and/or locking of pumps and peripheral units.
1.3 Unallowed use

Any operation deviating from the intended use shall be considered as unallowed
use.
Unallowed use can not only endanger efficient operation of the control unit
DCU 8, but may also cause damage to the control unit DCU 8, the centrifuge
and other components. Even danger to life and limb of the user or of other per-
sons cannot be excluded.
If you wish to deviate from the agreed operation, such other operation has to be
authorised by Westfalia Separator.
The instruction manual is primarily intended for persons entrusted with the task
of operating and maintaining the control unit. To assure safe operation it is the-
refore imperative that the manual is handed over to these persons.
In the event of any queries please state the model designation and the serial
number (see nameplate inside the control unit).
When ordering spare parts, please also state the circuit diagram number speci-
fied which would be helpful for a rapid and correct processing of your order.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 9
1.4 Electrical installation
• Adhere to local regulations for all

matters concerning electrical sys-
tems and equipment.
• In particular, the installation instruc-
tions by Westfalia Separator shall
be observed.
• The frequency and voltage of the
power supply have to match the unit
specification.
Fig. 1
• Set up equipotential bonding.

• Adhere to legal regulations, e.g., within the EU:
– Low-voltage regulation 2006/95/EC
– Electromagnetic compatibility 2004/108/EC
– Regulations by the classification societies.
1.5 Frequency converter operation

• If a frequency converter is used for
the decanter, simple speed monitor-
ing (SAH=overspeed) with the
DCU 8 is not sufficient. Please con-
tact the motor control unit manufac-
turer in this matter and/or observe
the centrifuge standard EN 12547
and the standard EN 945-1 or EN
ISO 13849-1 regarding the safety of
machinery.
Fig. 2

10 8185-9001-018 / 3108
1.6 Explosion protection

• The local regulations in force for potentially explosive areas must absolutely
be observed.
The potentially explosive area is an area where an explosive atmosphere is
present or can be expected in such quantities that special measures are re-
quired for design, construction and operation of centrifuges and control sys-
tems.
• Operating the centrifuges/control systems in areas of "zone 0",
i.e. in areas where a hazardous explosive atmosphere is present perma-
nently or for a long time is not allowed.
• Only such centrifuges/control systems may be used which are equipped for
operation in potentially explosive areas.
• Centrifuges installed in potentially explosive rooms may be operated from an
explosion-proof control panel installed near the centrifuge. The control cabinet
in this case must be installed outside of the potentially explosive room.
• In potentially explosive areas, only devices with Ex certification may be oper-
ated.
• All electric equipment belonging to the centrifuge/system such as motor con-
trol units, valve control units, electric heaters, heater control units and electri-
cally controlled valves shall be provided in the corresponding protective sys-
tem and, if provided in the usual protective system, shall be accommodated in
a room which is not potentially explosive.
• Monitoring devices on the centrifuge such as pressure and flow control de-
vices and temperature switches shall be connected to intrinsically safe EEx(i)
circuits with Ex(i) buffer amplifier.
• Take protective measures according to the measures for primary explosion
protection in the near vicinity of the centrifuge/control system (ventilation etc.).

8185-9001-018 / 3108 11
1.7 Operation
• Adhere to the instructions stated in
chapter “Operation”.
• Comply with the information stated
on the nameplate. The values stated
for
– Bowl speed
– density of the heavy liquid
– density of the solid matter (dried
by centrifugal hydroextractor)
Fig. 3
are maximum values and must not
be exceeded.
If unusual noises or vibrations occur
on the centrifuge:
• Shut down centrifuge immediately
by "Emergency stop".
• Evacuate the room.
• Get back into the room only after the
centrifuge has come to a standstill.
Fig. 4
• Do not operate the bowl of the de-

canter for longer than max. 30 min-
utes without liquid as this may result
in an unallowable heating of the
bowl material.
Fig. 5

12 8185-9001-018 / 3108
1.8 Maintenance and repair

Maintenance of the control system in good time and replacement of worn or
damages system components is a must for reliable operation.
Maintenance and repair work may only be carried out by the operator to the
extent described in the present manual.
Maintenance and repair work not described in the present manual may
only be carried out by the manufacturer or by the "Central repair work-
shops" authorised by him.
We recommend having the control system checked regularly by our specialists.
These checks help maintain the operational reliability and avoid unexpected op-
erational standstills.
Prior to performing any maintenance
and care operations:
• Disconnect all electrical systems
and equipment parts from the power
supply by actuating the main switch.
• Secure the unit against accidental
reconnection to power using locking
devices.
• Do not start any maintenance work
before the centrifuge has been swit-
ched off for at least 2 hours. This is
necessary to allow all parts to cool
down sufficiently so that there is no
Fig. 6
longer danger of injury due to hot
surfaces.
Start maintenance and repair work only after the centrifuge has come to a
complete standstill!
Please refer to the centrifuge instruction manual for how to check if the centri-
fuge has come to a standstill.
1.8.1 Care instructions

The operating device may only be cleaned when it is switched off.
Do not clean the control unit surfaces (display, keyboard) using aggressive or
acid-containing cleaning agents (pH-value 6 – 8, surfactant content
< 5%, free from aromatic substances and ethanol).
The operating device may not be cleaned using compressed air or water steam-
jet air ejector. Us a moist cleaning cloth with cleaning agent for cleaning. Use
only washing-up liquid or foaming display screen cleaning agent.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 13
1.8.2 Requirements concerning the service personnel and spare parts

• Use genuine spare parts by Westfalia Sepa-
rator only.
The use of non-genuine parts results in:
– safety risks,
– reduced service life and availability,
– increased service needs.
If a safety risk results, any persons not comply-
ing with this information might be subject to pro-
Fig. 7 secution under criminal law. Westfalia Separator
shall not assume any liability or give any war-
ranty in such cases.
• Make sure that only properly qualified personnel are entrusted with maintain-
ing the unit. This is the case with the service personnel of Westfalia Separator
or personnel trained by Westfalia Separator.
An inadequately maintained/installed machine presents a high safety risk for
the operating personnel.
1.8.3 Deactivation and "Emergency stop"

Depending on its version, the control cabinet is equipped either with an Emer-
gency Stop button or with a main switch with Emergency stop function which al-
lows shutting down the drive in case of danger or abnormal centrifuge operation.
The centrifuge is shut down in combination with external and internal Emer-
gency stop switches, there is no discharge.
When actuating the main switch with Emergency stop function, the complete
control system is disconnected from the power supply.
• When shutting down the unit, ob-

serve the chapter "Operation".
• Do not use the Emergency stop
switch for a normal shut-down!
Fig. 8

14 8185-9001-018 / 3108
Note
Notes
Notes
Anotaciones
Notes
Notes
Note

8185-9001-018 / 3108 15
2 Device description
2.1 Function ................................................................................................. 16

2.2 Features................................................................................................. 17
2.3 Areas of application ............................................................................... 18
2.3.1 Standard drive ....................................................................................... 18
2.3.2 Differential drive..................................................................................... 19
2.3.3 2-gear drive............................................................................................ 20
2.4 Technical data ....................................................................................... 21
2.5 Part numbers ......................................................................................... 22
2.6 Special versions..................................................................................... 22

16 8185-9001-018 / 3108
2.1 Function
Control:
The control unit DCU 8 is programmed at the factory for the required control
function.
• The connected motors and valves are activated according to the respective
control task.
Measuring:
The bowl and gear speeds of the connected decanter are measured. This is re-
alised using speed sensors installed on the decanter (see chapter 2.3 "Areas of
application").
The following speeds are measured:
• Bowl speed
• Gear input speed
• Gear housing speed (only with 2-gear decanters)
Calculating:
The differential speed between bowl and screw speed is calculated. The calcu-
lation is based on the measured speeds and the entered decanter parameters.
Display:
The following measured and/or calculated values are displayed:
• Bowl speed
• Differential speed
• Torque of secondary drive (only with 2-gear drive and differential drive, this
value is measured in the frequency converter)
• Status of connected valves and motors

8185-9001-018 / 3108 17
Control:
The differential speed of the connected decanter is controlled. This is done as a
function of the torque occurring during solids conveyance.
Automatic differential speed control requires that two pre-conditions are met:
• the decanter has a 2-gear drive or a differential drive
• the control unit DCU 8 is connected to a frequency converter
Modifications to the program by the end user are not allowed.
The operator can use the keyboard to make the following settings:
• Machine- and product-specific presets
• Limit values
• System-specific settings
2.2 Features
The control unit has the following features:
• Graphic display for machine observation and intervention
• Control unit with modular extensions
• Multi-language text display
• Function keys with LED status indication
• Programmable logic controller
• 24V control voltage
• High functional reliability
• Long service life

18 8185-9001-018 / 3108
2.3 Areas of application

The arrangement of the speed sensors is shown in the following function dia-
grams. The function diagrams explain the different applications, i.e. standard
drive, differential drive and 2-gear drive.
2.3.1 Standard drive
Fig. 9
1 Control unit DCU 8

2 Decanter
X7 Terminal box on the decanter
A Gear input speed sensor
C Bowl speed sensor

8185-9001-018 / 3108 19
2.3.2 Differential drive
Fig. 10

2 Frequency converter
3 Decanter
C Bowl speed sensor

20 8185-9001-018 / 3108
2.3.3 2-gear drive
Fig. 11

2 Frequency converter
3 Decanter
B Gearbox housing speed sensor
C Bowl speed sensor

8185-9001-018 / 3108 21
2.4 Technical data
Technical data
Mains voltage 115/230 VAC (±10%), selectable
Frequency 50 Hz to 60 Hz
Control voltage 24 VDC
Supply line fuse see circuit diagram
Ambient temperature 0 °C to 40 °C
Painted steel sheet, RAL 7032
Housing
Customised models: stainless steel
IP 55 (when installed properly in accor-
Enclosure dance with the instructions stated in chap-
ter "5 Installation and connection")
Dimensions W x H x D see schematic diagram
Cable entry From below through cable glands
Graphic display (4-colour, blue mode
115.18mm x 86.38 mm = 5.7“)
Display Resolution: 320 x 240 pixels and back-
lighting.
Touchscreen, analogue, resistive
Electrical design in accordance with EN 60204-1 (optional core identification)
Ambient conditions 3C2 in accordance with EN 60721-3-3
The maximum power consumption per solenoid valve to be connected is 5 watts

(24V DC).
AC/DC valves are not permissible.

22 8185-9001-018 / 3108
2.5 Part numbers
Description Number
Operating device OP 0005-4050-810
Operating device OP (coated PCB) 0005-4050-818
Processor CPU 0005-4050-820
Micro Memory Card (MMC) for CPU 128 kB 0005-4050-721
Multi Memory Card (MMC) for OP 128 MB 0005-3668-080
Protective cover 0005-4050-713
2.6 Special versions

Special versions deviating from the versions described in this manual can be
supplied:
• The housing can be made of stainless steel.
• Parts of the control system can be integrated in a compact control cabinet
(e. g. with motor control unit etc.) or in a central control unit.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 23
3 Operation
3.1 Getting acquainted with the operating elements ................................... 24

3.1.1 Function keys......................................................................................... 25
3.1.2 Soft keys ................................................................................................ 26
3.1.3 System keyboard ................................................................................... 28
3.1.4 Editing text/numerical values/fields ....................................................... 30
3.2 Switching on the control unit.................................................................. 31
3.3 Password protection .............................................................................. 32
3.4 Program runs ......................................................................................... 33
3.4.1 Decanter operation ................................................................................ 33
3.4.2 Grease lubrication operation (option) .................................................... 36
3.5 Menu overview....................................................................................... 37
3.6 Main menu ............................................................................................. 38
3.6.1 Description of icons ............................................................................... 39
3.6.2 Manual /Automatic mode ....................................................................... 40
3.7 Feed decanter........................................................................................ 42
3.7.1 Feed controller....................................................................................... 43
3.8 Decanter menu ...................................................................................... 45
3.8.1 Bearing temperature on liquid side........................................................ 47
3.8.2 Bearing temperature on solids side ....................................................... 48
3.8.3 Vibro....................................................................................................... 49
3.8.4 Torque limit values................................................................................. 50
3.8.5 Bowl motor amperage............................................................................ 51
3.8.6 Differential speed................................................................................... 52
3.8.7 Bowl speed ............................................................................................ 53
3.8.8 Timer menu............................................................................................ 54
3.8.9 Decanter control mode .......................................................................... 57
3.8.10 Speed control (2-gear control)............................................................... 58
3.8.11 Setting instructions for speed control .................................................... 59
3.8.12 Torque control........................................................................................ 68
3.8.13 Setting instructions for torque control .................................................... 70
3.9 Project information................................................................................. 71
3.10 Service settings ..................................................................................... 72
3.10.1 Maintenance intervals............................................................................ 72
3.10.2 Service message ................................................................................... 74
3.10.3 Service buffer......................................................................................... 75
3.11 Decanter configuration........................................................................... 76
3.12 System settings ..................................................................................... 79

24 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.1 Getting acquainted with the operating elements
1 2
Off ACK
3
Fig. 12
The operating device is built into the control cabinet door. The operating inter-
face consists of:
1 Touchscreen
2 Softkeys (depending on the screen display)
3 Function keys with LED status indication
All unmarked function keys have no function in the standard model.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 25
3.1.1 Function keys

The function keys have a global function:
The actions which can be triggered are independent of the text on the touch-
screen. They each incorporate an LED which provides information on the state
of the respective function.
Key Key description Description
Decanter On This key switches the decanter on.

The LED lights up when the decanter is switched on.
Decanter Off This key switches the decanter and the LED off.
The LED lights up when the decanter is switched off.
Product / Water OFF Pressing this key during production stops production and acti-
vates the flushing program.
Pressing this key while the flushing program is running will stop
the flushing program.
The LED lights up when the production and the flushing pro-
gram are switched off.
Product ON This key starts production and opens the feed valve (if pro-
vided).
The LED lights up when production is active.
Water ON This key starts the flushing program.
The LED lights up when the flushing program is activated.
Service This key calls up the page with the currently pending service
messages (see chapter 3.10.2 "Service messages").
The LED flashes as long as the service has not been carried
out.
Failure message This key calls up the screen displaying an overview of the cur-
rent fault messages or the fault message buffer (see chapter
4.3 "Faults").
The LED flashes as long as an unacknowledged failure mes-
sage is queued.
Acknowledge alarm mes- This key is used for acknowledging the currently displayed a-
sages larm messages and/or all messages of an acknowledgement
group (group acknowledgements).
However, the failure is not automatically remedied.
The LED lights up as long as unacknowledged alarm messages
are queued.

26 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.1.2 Soft keys

Softkeys have a local function: The actions which can be triggered depend on
the display on the touchscreen and are represented by an icon.
The following icons always have the same meaning:
Previous menu Calls up the previous menu.
Previous menu Calls up the previous menu.
Next menu Calls up the next menu.
Decanter Menu Calls up the "Decanter Menu".
Timer menu Calls up the “Timer menu”.
Service settings Calls up the service settings menu.
System settings Calls up the system settings menu.
Language selection Up to 5 languages are available. The next language is selected

each time the key is pressed. The currently set language is
displayed on the touchscreen.
Project information Calls up the "Project information" menu.
Decanter configuration Calls up the “Decanter configuration” menu.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 27

Limit values Key for e.g. "Torque limit values".
Save on MMC The values currently set are saved on the MMC. The symbol is
shown inverted during the storage process.
Read from MMC The values are read from the MMC. All settings saved before
are restored. The symbol is shown inverted during the read
process.
Delete failure buffer All failure messages queued in the buffer so far are deleted.
Change to the Windows Con- Certain functions, e.g. importing a new visualisation (see chap-
trol Panel ter 4.6), require changing to the Windows Control Panel.
Torque curve Calls the menu "Torque curve" for the differential speed.

28 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.1.3 System keyboard

Editing texts, numerical values and fields is always done in the same way. By
touching the respective entry mask or input field, a numeric or alphanumerical
keyboard is opened.
Note:
The upper window opens for numeric input and the lower window opens for
alphanumerical input.
Fig. 13
1 Input window
2 Numeric keyboard
3 Alphanumeric keyboard

8185-9001-018 / 3108 29
Cursor right / left The cursor in the input window moves from field to field by tou-
ching the cursor keys.
ESC (Cancel) Touching this key is used to cancel inputs provided that they
have not been confirmed using the Enter key.
If the ESC key is pressed in an entry mask, the program returns
to the previous menu.
ENTER (Accept) Touching this key confirms and completes an entry.
Shift (upper case / lower ca- Touching this key shifts back and forth between upper case and
Shift se) lower case letters.
Delete character (backspace) Touching this key deletes the character left of the cursor in the
input window.

30 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.1.4 Editing text/numerical values/fields
Fig. 14
Editing texts, numerical values and fields is always done in the same way. The
following example shows how to edit a numerical value.
Example:
The value "Time" is to be changed from "15:45:20" to "16:45:20".
• By touching the input window "15:45:20", the window with the alphanumeric
system keyboard opens.
• The new time is entered into the input window by touching the individual
numbers or characters.
• Touching the ENTER key confirms the entry and the window closes.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 31
3.2 Switching on the control unit

When the control unit is switched on, it performs an operating system test for
the CPU and the OP. Any required data are read in from the Micro Memory
Card (MMC).
Then the unit starts up with the following message.
• Start-up takes about 1 minute.
System report:
No. Control unit
140000
Connection set up: Control unit_1, station 2, rack 0, position 2
The main menu is displayed. According to chapter 3.6 "Main menu", the individ-
ual submenus can be called up from this main menu.

32 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.3 Password protection

Certain entries and functions are only possible after entering a user name and
password. You will be requested to enter the required information in a window.
Note:
• Enter "WS" as user
• The password is available from Westfalia Separator
• The respective user is blocked after three consecutive incorrect entries of the
password. To unblock, the control unit must be switched off on the control ca-
binet and subsequently switched on again.
Fig. 15
The menu called up after entry of the password is not protected. This means
that unauthorised persons may carry out changes in this menu.
If no operation occurs after 5 minutes, the user is logged out. The password has
to be re-entered in order to use the program again.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 33
3.4 Program runs
3.4.1 Decanter operation
Key Description
Starting the decanter (decanter with grease lubrication)
Press the „Dec. Start” key.
• The message „Decanter starting up“ appears in the „De-

canter menu“.
• The following functions are performed in the decanter
start-up phase:
– The bowl motor is switched on.
– The secondary motor is switched on.
– The “Decanter start-up” time starts.
• When the start-up phase is complete, the message
“Decanter ready for operation” appears in the “Decanter
menu”.
– The bowl motor is now switched on.
– The secondary motor is now switched on.
Starting the decanter (decanter with oil circulation lubrication)
Press the "Decanter Start" key.
• When pressing the "Decanter Start" key, the lubricating oil

pump starts and the pre-lubrication time elapses. The
message "Dec. prelubrication" appears in the
"Decanter" menu.
• The following functions are performed during pre-
lubrication:
– The lubricating oil pump is switched on.
• The following functions are performed in the decanter
start-up phase:
– The bowl motor is switched on.
– The secondary motor is switched on.
– The “Decanter start-up” time starts.
• When the start-up phase is complete, the message
“Decanter ready for operation” appears in the “Decanter
menu”.
– The lubricating oil pump is now activated.

34 8185-9001-018 / 3108
Key Description
Starting production
Press the „Prod. Start” key.
• The message „Decanter product“ appears in the „Decanter

menu“.
– The feed pump is now activated.
Stopping production
Press the „Prod. Stop” key.
• The message "Del. flushing" appears in the "Decanater

Menu:
– The feed pump is now shut down.
• When the "Del. flushing" time has elapsed, "Decanter flus-
hing" appears in the decanter menu. The following func-
tions are running:
– The feed pump is now shut down.
– The flushing valve is open.
– The “Flush feed line” time starts.
• The flushing valve is closed after the flushing time has
elapsed.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 35
Key Description
Stopping the decanter (decanter with grease lubrication)
Press the "Dec. Stop" key.
• The message „Decanter Off/Post running“ appears in the

„Decanter menu“.
• The following functions are performed in the post running
phase:
– The “Decanter post running” time starts.
– The bowl motor is switched off.
– The secondary motor continues running.
• When the post running time has elapsed, the secondary
motor is shut down.
Stopping the decanter (decanter with oil circulation lubrication)
Press the "Dec. Stop" key.
• The message „Decanter Off/Post running“ appears in the

„Decanter menu“.
• The following functions are performed in the post running
phase:
– The “Decanter post running” time starts.
– The bowl motor is switched off.
– The secondary motor continues running.
– The lubricating oil pump continues running.
• When the post-running time has elapsed, the secondary
motor and the lubricating oil pump are switched off.

36 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.4.2 Grease lubrication operation (option)

„Grease lubrication“ is an option for decanters provided with grease lubrication.
Key Description
Lubricating cycle
When the start-up time is over, the lubricating cycle starts

after pressing the ACK/Grease pump On key.
Upon starting the grease pump, the following functions are

performed:
• The grease pump is switched on.
• The "delay grease distributor failure" time starts.
– The grease is pumped towards the grease distributor
until a grease distributor switches, then the grease is
pumped back in reverse direction until another grease
distributor switches.
• This process is identified by the digital „Grease distributor“
input and the lubricating cycle is complete.
• The “Grease lubrication interval” time starts.
• The “Grease distributor failure delay” time stops.
– When the „Grease distributor failure delay“ time has
elapsed and the grease distributor has not switched
within that time, the „Grease distributor“ failure is indi-
cated and the grease pump is shut down.
• After expiry of the “Grease lubrication interval” time, the
lubricating cycle is started again.
• After expiry of the “Decanter post running” time, the lubri-
cating cycle is cancelled.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 37
3.5 Menu overview
1 8
2 7
3 6
4 5
Fig. 16
1 Main menu
2 Decanter menu
3 Project information
4 Service settings
5 Decanter configuration
6 Feed decanter
7 System settings
8 Language selection

38 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.6 Main menu

The main menu appears after the control unit has been switched on.
• Date and time are displayed in the top line (changes are possible in the
"System settings" menu).
• The decanter type and the gear factor are displayed in the screen centre.
Fig. 17 =
From the main menu, the following submenus can be called up by touching the
respective function key on the touchscreen:
Key Key description see chapter

Calls up the "Decanter" menu 3.8
Calls up the “Project information” 3.9
Calls up the "Service settings" menu 3.10
Calls up the “Decanter configuration” menu 3.11
Calls up the "Feed decanter" menu 3.7.1
Calls up the "System settings" menu 3.12
Up to 5 languages are available.

The next language is selected each time the
key is pressed. The currently set language is
displayed on the screen above the soft key.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 39
3.6.1 Description of icons
Symbol Description
Valves
Valve closed in automatic mode
Valve open in automatic mode
Valve closed in manual mode
Valve open in manual mode
Valve fault
Constant-pressure valves
Valve not throttled
Valve throttled
Symbol Description
Pumps
Pump OFF in automatic mode
Pump ON in automatic mode
Pump OFF in manual mode
Pump ON in manual mode
Pump fault
Sensors
covered / activated
not covered / not activated

40 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.6.2 Manual /Automatic mode

Call-up is from the individual menu and is opened by touching the valves / the
drives.
Editing is performed as described in chapter 3.1.4 "Editing text/numerical values
/ fields".
Fig. 18 =

8185-9001-018 / 3108 41
The valves / drives are in normal automatic mode. For operation in manual
mode, proceed as follows:
• For manual operation touch desired valve or drive on the the touchscreen and
a window opens.
• By touching the "Man" button, the manual mode is activated and the state of
the valve/drive remains unchanged (an open valve remains open).
• Touching the "Man" key again toggles the state (an open valve closes).
• Touching the "auto" activates the automatic mode. In automatic mode, the
valve/drive takes on the state from the automatic program.
• After expiry of a delay time (see below the Manual/Auto field), the valve/drive
must show the correct state, otherwise a fault message appears.
• Switching between the following valve descriptions can be done in the field
next to the valve:
– NC (normally closed) means normally closed.
– NO (normally open) means normally open.
• Touching the "ESC" key closes the window.
• At the top is an empty field in which the valve/drive description can be en-
tered.
Note:
After manual operation of a valve / drive, ensure that the valve / drive is set back
to automatic mode again.

42 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.7 Feed decanter

Call-up is from the "Main menu" or "Decanter" menu.
/ fields".
Fig. 19 =
1 Flow meter counter for the feed.

2 By touching the "0", the flow meter counter is reset (Reset) to "0".
3 Current flow display. The set value (output value) of the controller is
shown by the bar display.
By touching the flow display, the "Feed controller" window opens.
Other functions:
Key Key description

Main menu
Decanter Menu

8185-9001-018 / 3108 43
3.7.1 Feed controller

Call-up is from the "Decanter" menu or "Feed decanter" by touching the meas-
ured value.
/ fields".
The feed controller can be used both in automatic and in manual mode.
2
13 3
12 4
11 5
10 6
7
9
Fig. 20 =
Parameters Meaning
Setpoint ramp (1) Display of current setpoint of the ramp.
Start setpoint ramp Display and input of the start setpoint ramp. The con-
(2) troller runs with this setpoint for "Product start".
Start-up time (3) Display and input of the start-up time. Using the "Prod-
uct start" key, "Start setpoint ramp" is started with the
setpoint and is raised to the setpoint "SP" in this time.
Limit value flow (4) Display and input of the limit value from the flow (FAL).
Delay limit value Display and input of the delay time. If the flow limit
flow (5) value is fallen below with switched on product pump,
the production is switched off after this delay time.
Gain Kp (6) Proportional coefficient (P portion of controller).
This value indicates the constant variable with which
the controller reacts upon a controller difference and
changes the control variable accordingly. A higher
proportional coefficient Kp makes the controller faster.

44 8185-9001-018 / 3108
Display Meaning
Integration time Tn Readjustment time (I portion of controller).
(7)
This value described the speed at which the set value
changes when a control difference occurs. This speed
is proportional to the control difference. A longer read-
justment time Tn makes the controller slower.
Set value range (8) The set value range of the variable speed drive can be
limited here.
CV (9) Set value display
Numerically and graphically as bars (0 – 100 %). The
set value indicates the actual setting of the variable
speed drive independently from whether it is a "nor-
mally open" or a "normally closed" variable speed
drive.
• 0% = closed
• 100% = open
Manual and auto- Change between manual and automatic mode.
matic mode (10)
Manual on (blinking) (manual operation).
Measuring range Display and input of the measuring range limit value
limit value (11) of the flow sensor e.g. 0 – 10 m³ corresponds to
4 – 20 mA.
PV (12) Display of the actual value.
The display is numerical and graphical as bars.
SP (13) Display and input of the setpoint.
Other functions:
Key Key description

Decanter Menu
Feed decanter

8185-9001-018 / 3108 45
3.8 Decanter menu

This is called up from the "Main menu".
This menu shows the decanter and the associated valves, pumps and motors.
Note:
The figure below is an example. This figure may deviate for other decanter
types and applications.
1 2 3 4 5
9 8
Fig. 21 =
Note:
The individual menus are called up by touching the respective measured value.
1 Feed quantity / Feed controller
2 Bearing temperature on liquid side
3 Vibro
4 Bearing temperature on solids side
5 Torque
Speed control / Torque control
6 Bowl motor amperage
7 Setpoint bowl speed (setting in %)
– 0% = Half bowl speed
– 100% = max. bowl speed
8 Differential speed
9 Bowl speed

46 8185-9001-018 / 3108
Other functions:
Key Key description

Calls up the "Feed decanter" menu.
Calls up the "Curves" menu.
Calls up the "Timer" menu.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 47
3.8.1 Bearing temperature on liquid side

Call-up is from the "Decanter" menu by touching the measured value "Bearing
temperature on the liquid side".
/ fields".
Fig. 22 =
Display Meaning
Liquid side Display of the bearing temperature on the liquid side.
Limit value stage 1 Entry of stage 1 limit value. When the current bearing
temperature exceeds this limit value, a failure is dis-
played.
played and the decanter is shut down.
Correction factor A correction factor may be entered here to compen-
sate line lengths, e.g. the correction factor 5 corre-
sponds to subtracting 5°C from the result.
Other functions:
Key Key description

Decanter Menu
Main menu

48 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.8.2 Bearing temperature on solids side

Call-up is from the "Decanter" menu by touching the measured value "Bearing
temperature on the solids side".
/ fields".
Fig. 23 =
Display Meaning
Solids side Display of the bearing temperature on the solids side.
played.
played and the decanter is shut down.
Correction factor A correction factor may be entered here to compen-
sate line lengths, e.g. the correction factor 5 corre-
sponds to subtracting 5°C from the result.
Other functions:
Key Key description

Decanter Menu
Main menu

8185-9001-018 / 3108 49
3.8.3 Vibration
Call-up is from the "Decanter" menu by touching the measured value
"Vibration".
/ fields".
Fig. 24 =
Display Meaning
Vibration Display of decanter vibrations.
Vibration max. Input of the measuring range limit value of the
vibration sensor e.g. 0 – 20 mm/s corresponds to
4 – 20 mA.
Limit value stage 1 Entry of stage 1 limit value. When the current vibra-
tion exceeds this limit value, a failure is displayed.
Limit value stage 2 Entry of stage 2 limit value. When the current vibra-
tion exceeds this limit value, a failure is displayed
and the decanter is shut down.
Delay vibration on After „Production On“ and expiry of the time entered
here, the failures are enabled.
When setting the value –0- as the set time, the fail-
ures are always released.
Other functions:
Key Key description

Decanter Menu
Main menu

50 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.8.4 Torque limit values

Call-up is from the "Speed control" menu.
/ fields".
Fig. 25 =
Display Meaning
Torque Display of current torque. The torque serves for auto-
matic control of the differential speed.
Limit value stage 1 Entry of torque stage 1 limit value. When the current
torque exceeds the limit value, production is stopped
after a delay time.
Limit value stage 2 Entry of torque stage 2 limit value. When the current
torque exceeds the limit value, the decanter is shut
down after a delay time.
Solids slide gate Entry of limit value for opening of the solids slide gate
open (useful only when using a solids slide gate in the solids
discharge). When the current torque exceeds the limit
value during production, the solids slide gate is ope-
ned.
Solids slide gate Entry of limit value for closing of the solids slide gate
close (useful only when using a solids slide gate in the solids
discharge). When the current torque falls below the
limit value, the solids slide gate is closed. A fault is
generated during production.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 51
Other functions:
Key Key description

Decanter Menu
Main menu
3.8.5 Bowl motor amperage

Call-up is from the "Decanter" menu by touching the measured value "Bowl mo-
tor amperage".
/ fields".
Fig. 26 =
Display Meaning
Bowl motor amper- Display of current bowl motor amperage
age
Bowl motor amper- Input of the measuring range limit value of the current
age max. transformer e.g. 0 – 40 A corresponds to 4 – 20 mA.
Other functions:
Key Key description

Decanter Menu
Main menu

52 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.8.6 Differential speed

Call-up is from the "Decanter" menu by touching the measured value "Differen-
tial speed".
Call-up is from the "Decanter" menu.
/ fields".
Fig. 27 =
Display Meaning
Differential speed Display of current differential speed.
Bowl speed Display of current bowl speed.
Gear input speed Display of current gear input speed.
Gear housing speed Display of current gear housing speed.
Differential speed low Entry of differential speed limit value. When the cur-
rent differential speed falls below the limit value, the
decanter is shut down after a delay time.
Other functions:
Key Key description

Decanter Menu
Main menu

8185-9001-018 / 3108 53
3.8.7 Bowl speed

Call-up is from the "Decanter" menu by touching the measured value "Bowl
speed".
/ fields".
Fig. 28 =
Display Meaning
Bowl speed Display of current bowl speed.
Bowl overspeed Entry of overspeed limit value. When the current bowl
speed exceeds the limit value, the decanter is shut
down.
Speed reached Entry of speed limit value. When the current bowl
speed falls below the limit value, production is stop-
ped after a delay time.
Solids slide gate Entry of limit value for closing of the solids slide gate
close / flush (useful only when using a solids slide gate in the
solids discharge). When the current bowl speed falls
below the limit value (e.g. during the post-running
time), the solids slide gate is closed and flushed.
The flushing valve is also opened if the solids slide
gate is closed during production.
Other functions:
Key Key description

Decanter Menu
Main menu

54 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.8.8 Timer menu

This is called up from the „Decanter menu“.
Correct timer setting are very important for flawless decanter function. If in
doubt, contact Westfalia Separator.
The menu comprises two screens.

The actual value of each timer is displayed and the associated target value can
be edited.
/ fields".
Fig. 29
Display Meaning
Pre-lubrication (Option) On decanters with oil circulation lubrication,
the lubricating pump is switched on.
Decanter start-up The bowl takes a certain start-up time to reach
its speed.
The "Differential speed" and "Bowl speed rea-
ched" failures are output only after the start-up
time is over.
Post running The bowl decelerates freely after the bowl
motor is deenergized.
When the post-running time is over, the bowl is
to stand still and the screw motor is switched
off. On decanters with oil circulation lubrica-
tion, the lubricating pump is switched off.
Delay torque stage 1 When the current torque exceeds the limit
value, production is shut down after this delay
time.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 55
Display Meaning
Delay torque stage 2 When the current torque exceeds the limit
value, the decanter is shut down after this de-
lay time.
Delay decanter off / no feed When the decanter is operated without produc-
tion or flushing beyond the time set here, the
decanter is shut down.
Delay filter blocked If the decanter is equipped with a “Filter blo-
cked” sensor and if filter blocking is signalled,
the failure is displayed upon switching on the
lubricating oil pump and after this delay.
Delay filter blocked de- When a blocked filter is detected longer than
canter off this time, the decanter is shut down.
Delay oil level min. If the decanter is equipped with an "Oil level
min." sensor and if oil level min. is signalled,
the decanter is shut down upon pre-lubrication
and upon start-up. When the decanter is off, it
cannot be switched on.
Delay oil level min. de- When „Oil level min.“ is detected during pro-
canter off duction or when the decanter is ready for op-
eration, this failure is displayed and the de-
canter is shut down after this delay.
Delay water detector off If the decanter is equipped with a “Water de-
tector” and if water in the oil is signalled, the
decanter is shut down after this delay.

56 8185-9001-018 / 3108
Fig. 30
Display Meaning
Delay decanter flushing After "Production off" and expiration of the delay
decanter flushing, the flushing valve is opened.
Decanter flushing After "Production Off“ or when pressing the
„H2O start key", the flushing program is started
together with this time. The flushing valve opens
during that period.
Grease cycle After expiry of the “Grease lubrication interval”
time, the lubricating cycle is started again. (see
grease lubrication)
Delay grease distributor When the grease distributor has not switched
failure after expiry of this time, the “Grease distributor”
failure is displayed and the grease pump is
stopped. (see grease lubrication).
Delay close solids slide A fault is generated if the torque falls below the
gate limit value "Close solids slide gate" for opened
solids slide gate and production. After this fault,
the slide gate still remains open for this delay.
Flushing solids slide gate If the bowl speed falls below the limit value "Sol-
ids slide gate close" or if the solids slide gate
closes, then the solids drain flush valve is
opened for this time.
The flushing valve is also opened if the solids
slide gate is closed during production.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 57
Other functions:
Key Key description

Decanter Menu
Previous menu
3.8.9 Decanter control mode

This is called up from the „Decanter menu“. Depending on the control mode se-
lected (see chapter 3.11 "Configuration"), the screens are shown with different
contents. The following control modes can be selected:
• Speed control
• Torque control
The chapters 3.8.11 "Setting instructions for speed control" and 3.8.13 "Setting
instructions for torque control" provide detailed explanations on how to set the
basic decanter data.

58 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.8.10 Speed control (2-gear control)

Call-up is from the "Decanter" menu by touching the measured value "2-gear
control".
/ fields".
Fig. 31 =
Display Meaning
Torque Display of current torque.
Basic differential Actual: Display of current differential speed.

speed
Preset: Entry of the value for the basic differential
speed.
Control beginning Entry of control beginning value.
Control gradation Entry of control gradation value.
Delay time Entry of delay value.
Other functions:
Key Key description

Main menu
Calls up the "Limit values torque"

8185-9001-018 / 3108 59
3.8.11 Setting instructions for speed control

When conveying solids inside the decanter bowl from the separating zone to the
solids outlet, a more or less high torque occurs as a function of product, filling
level and throughput.
On decanters with 2-gear drive and differential drive, this torque is proportional
with the torque of the secondary motor with an upstream frequency converter.
The control unit DCU 8 is connected to a frequency converter. The current
torque occurring during conveyance of solids in the decanter is transmitted by a
4 – 20 mA signal.
The control unit DCU 8 uses the torque for automatic control of the differential
speed.
Fig. 32
The control algorithm can be modified with the following control parameters.
A Control gradation (0 – 100%)

B Control beginning (0 – 99 %)
C Basic differential speed (rpm)
dn Differential speed (rpm)

– dn min. Minimum differential speed
– dn max. Maximum differential speed
M Torque (%)
– M1 Torque stage 1

60 8185-9001-018 / 3108
Basic differential speed:

The basic differential speed is the differential speed at which the decanter works
below the "Control beginning" threshold.
• Change of characteristic curve when
changing the basic differential
speed while keeping all other pa-
rameters constant.
Fig. 33
• The possible differential speed range depends on the decanter type, on the
combination of pulleys used and on the bowl speed.
• The speed table in the machine-related decanter spare parts list shows the
possible differential speeds.
• The minimum frequency of the secondary motor limits the differential speed
at the bottom end.
• The maximum frequency of the secondary motor limits the differential speed
at the top end.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 61
Control beginning:
Above the "Control beginning" threshold, a rising torque results in a differential
speed increase and a reduced torque in a differential speed decrease.
changing the control beginning while
keeping all other parameters con-
stant.
Fig. 34
Adjusting range: 0 to 99 % of max. allowed value

A control beginning which is set too low has the following effects:
• poor de-humidification
• good clarification values
• no plugging of screw
A control beginning which is set too high has the following effects:
• poor clarification values
• good de-humidification values
• danger of screw plugging

62 8185-9001-018 / 3108
Control gradation:
Slope of characteristic curve after exceeding the "Control beginning" threshold.
The bigger the control gradation value, the bigger the differential speed change
per torque unit and the more the control systems tends to override. The differen-
tial speed starts oscillating.
changing the control gradation while
keeping all other parameters con-
stant.
Fig. 35
Adjusting range: 0 to 100 %

• Control gradation = 0 % means that automatic control is shut down. Even
when changing the torque, the differential speed remains constant at the
basic differential speed (also above the "Control beginning" threshold).
• Control gradation = 100 % equals a programmed max. control gradation. This
max. control gradation does not correspond to any horizontal characteristic
curve.
Example:
• The bigger the control gradation
value, the more the control system
tends to override. The differential
speed starts oscillating.
The figure to the left shows an exam-

ple of how to stabilize operation by
reducing the control gradation.
• The bold line represents the varying

solids content in the machine feed,
the grey area shows the decanter
reaction.
• When reducing the control gradation
value even further beyond the stabi-
lisation value, the filling level of the
machine increases as the solids
content rises. This means poorer
clarification values and danger of
plugging.
Fig. 36

8185-9001-018 / 3108 63
Delay time:
The delay time delays the reaction time of the decanter. Decanter reaction be-
comes slow.
• A long delay time results in a slow
decanter reaction.
• A short delay time results in a quick
decanter reaction.
Fig. 37
Adjusting range: 1 to 100

Factory setting: 10

64 8185-9001-018 / 3108
Setting example:
In the following example, the control parameters for basic differential speed,
control beginning, control gradation and delay time are set so an optimum prod-
uct is obtained at maximum throughput.
The method described is not the shortest, but it is the safest method.
With all control parameter changes, be sure to observe the effects and wait for
the process to stabilize. The decanter reaction frequently is in the opposite di-
rection first before the desired change is obtained.
Caution: When raising the basic differential speed, the torque rises first of all.
After some time, a lower torque results.
Goal
The curve to the left represents a cha-
racteristic curve with an optimised
working point.
The working point is optimised be-

cause there is sufficient space both
upwards and downwards for adjusting
the differential speed.
Fig. 38
Step 1
Provide the following conditions:
• The decanter runs at nominal speed.
• The feed line is closed.
• Torque stage 1 = 80 %
• Torque stage 2 = 90 %
• Delay time = 10 seconds
• Control beginning = 99 % (shuts down automatic control)
• Control gradation = 100 %
• Basic differential speed = max. value (see speed table of decanter)

8185-9001-018 / 3108 65
Step 2
• Open feed line
– Constant feed conditions during the adjustment phase make work easier.
However, if the torque rises near "Torque step 1" due to this or if this step is
exceeded, the feed quantity is too high.
Step 3
• Slightly reduce the basic differential speed (10 – 20 %), e.g. from 10 to 8.
• Observe effects and wait for stabilisation (depending on substance to be cen-
trifuged and decanter size, this may take 20 minutes).
– The torque will increase.
– Clarified phase and solid matter will change.
Step 4
• Clarified phase and solid matter now meet the requirements.
• The min. basic differential speed has been reached.
• When the min. basic differential speed is reached without increasing the tor-
que, the feed quantity can be increased.
Intermediate result 1
The working point has been deter-
mined. The values shown for torque
and differential speed represent the
working point.

66 8185-9001-018 / 3108
Step 5
• Adjust the control beginning (approx. 20 per cent below the working point)
• Adjust the basic differential speed.
Example:
• The working point is at 43%. The
control beginning is set to 23%.
• The working point is at 12 min–1.
The basic differential speed is set to
8 min–1.
Fig. 39
Intermediate result 2
The decanter goes back and forth
between basic differential speed and
differential speed. This is because of
the high control gradation
which corresponds to a 2-point control
system.
Fig. 40
Step 6
• Reduce control gradation.
– The torque must remain relatively
stable.
– The variations of solid matter in
the feed line are sufficiently equal-
ized.
• When a constant torque cannot be
obtained using the control gradation,
the delay time must be changed.
Fig. 41

8185-9001-018 / 3108 67
Step 7
The torque achieved now may deviate from the torque with the best product
properties. It depends on the individual case which control parameter is the
most suitable for fine tuning.
Caution: With all control parameter changes, be sure to observe the effects and
wait for the process to stabilize. The decanter reaction frequently is in the oppo-
site direction first before the desired change is obtained.
Defect Remedy
Torque too low • Reduce basic differential speed
• Increase control beginning
• Reduce control gradation
Torque too high • Increase basic differential speed
• Reduce control beginning
• Increase control gradation
Heavy torque variations • Reduce control gradation
• Increase delay time
Reaction too slow • Increase control gradation
• Reduce delay time
Goal
In most applications, the function of the differential drive or the 2-gear drive is
used now since the decanter is optimally adjusted.
Note:
In applications where no satisfactory result can be obtained by this method,
please contact Westfalia Separator.

68 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.8.12 Torque control

Call-up is from the "Decanter" menu by touching the measured value "Torque".
/ fields".
The torque control can be used both in automatic and manual mode.
1
12
2
11
3
10 4
9 5
6
8
Fig. 42 =
Parameters Meaning
Basic differential Display of current differential speed and entry of the
speed (1) basic differential speed.
Start delay upon Display and entry of delay time after which the control-
product start (2) ler starts working after pressing the „Product start“ key.
Controller on (3) Entry of the torque value for which the controller is to
go into operation although the time "Delay start upon
product on" has not yet elapsed.
Gain Kp (4) Proportional coefficient (P portion of controller).
This value indicates the constant variable with which
the controller reacts upon a controller difference and
changes the control variable accordingly. A higher
proportional coefficient Kp makes the controller faster.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 69
Display Meaning
Integration time Tn Readjustment time (I portion of controller).
(5)
This value described the speed at which the set value
changes when a control difference occurs. This speed
is proportional to the control difference. A longer read-
justment time Tn makes the controller slower.
CV+ basic differ- During the "Start after product On" delay, this value is
ence for product added to the frequency set value (at the basic differen-
start (6) tial speed).
Set value range (7) The set value range of the variable speed drive can be
limited here.
CV (8) Set value display
Numerically and graphically as bars (0 – 100%). The
set value indicates the actual setting of the variable
speed drive independently from whether it is a "nor-
mally open" or a "normally closed" variable speed
drive.
• 0% = closed
• 100% = open
Manual and auto- Change between manual and automatic mode.
matic mode (9)
Manual on (blinking) (manual operation).
Measuring range Display of the Measured range limit value of the tor-
limit value (10) que.
PV (11) Display of the actual value.
SP (12) Display and input of the setpoint.
Other functions:
Key Key description

Decanter Menu
Calls up the "Limit values torque"

70 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.8.13 Setting instructions for torque control

• Basic differential speed
– This is the smallest differential speed the decanter can use if the min. and
max. frequency limits of the frequency converter, the speed limitation and
the analogue output limit are respected.
• Set torque
– This is the set torque the controller is to use.
• KP
– This is the proportional coefficient. It indicates the controller gain.
– High values result in oscillating control response.
– Small values result in too-slow control system reaction.
• Tn
– This is the integration time. It determines the time behaviour of the integra-
tor.
Fig. 43
A Basic differential speed
M Torque
dn Differential speed
– dn min. Minimum differential speed
– dn max. Maximum differential speed

8185-9001-018 / 3108 71
3.9 Project information

The Project information menu is called up from the main menu. This menu con-
tains important information that must be indicated when you have any ques-
tions.
Fig. 44 =
Other functions:
Key Key description

Main menu
Decanter menu

72 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.10 Service settings
3.10.1 Maintenance intervals

This menu displays the operating hours, the next maintenance interval and the
address of the responsible service partner.
Note:
The following pages are protected by a service password:
– "Motor lubrication service"
– "Screw bearing service"
– "Machine maintenance service"
– "Operating hours" (for the synchronisation with the mechanical counter)
The control unit stores the entries in the corresponding fields only after the valid
service password has been entered.

/ fields".
Fig. 45 =
Parameters Meaning
Hour counter Displays the operating hours.
Motor lubrication This parameter is visible only on decanters with re-
service lubrication-type main motor and when selected.
The setting value is an interval in hours after which
the motor must be lubricated.
Screw bearing lubri- This parameter is visible only on decanters with re-
cation service lubrication-type screw bearing and when selected.
The setting value is an interval in hours after which
the motor must be lubricated.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 73
Parameters Meaning
Machine mainte- Order a service when the set date has been reached.
nance service
A real-time clock that is independent from the time
displayed in the main menu and cannot be changed
runs in the control unit CPU. The "Machine mainte-
nance service" date is compared with this real-time
clock (D = Day, M = Month, Y = Year).
Service partner Name, address, phone no. etc. are password-
protected. These entries are made by the Westfalia
Separator Service upon commissioning the unit.
Password Resets the service display
• Display reads „Please lubricate motor“: After lubrica-
tion is complete and entry of a value other than „0“ in
the “Password” field.
• Display reads „Please lubricate screw bearing“: After
lubrication is complete and entry of a value other
than „0“ in the “Password” field.
• Display reads “Please order next service”: After
Westfalia Separator has carried out a service and
entry of a valid password in the “Password” field.
Note:
After installing a new program or replacing the CPU, all setting values must
be re-entered or checked by the Westfalia Separator Service or by authorised
personnel.
Other functions:
Key Key description

Main menus

74 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.10.2 Service message

The pending maintenance intervals are displayed in this window.
Fig. 46 =
Key Description
• The LED in the „Service“ function key flashes.
• The service symbol in the top line flashes.
• After pressing the "Service" function key, the "Active ser-
vice" window opens. By pressing again, you can reach
the service buffer.
• This window contains the following information:
– a message number,
– date and time of message arrival,
– the status,
– the service message in plain text (e.g. Please call for
next service).
• Close the window by touching the X in the upper right-
hand corner..
Notes:
Observe the decanter instruction manual. The maintenance
intervals specified there are binding.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 75
3.10.3 Service buffer

Occurring service messages are written to the service buffer. A new entry is
created in the service buffer whenever a status change takes place (come/
gone).
Fig. 47 =
Explanation of the display example:
Display Meaning
No.: 9 Message number and service message in plain
text.
Please call for next
service
Time: Time of status change (come / acknowledged) of
the service message.
12:52:27
Date: Date of the status change (come / acknowledged)
of the service message.
12.06.2008
Status: Status of the service message:
• K = service message has come
(K)G
• G = service message has gone
Close the window by touching the X in the upper right-hand corner.

76 8185-9001-018 / 3108
3.11 Decanter configuration

Configuration of the control unit DCU 8 in connection with the hardware of the
decanter used is performed here.
Caution: To enter the configuration data, the data of the decanter used must be
available. Incorrect entries result in incorrect calculation and/or display. In case
of doubts, be sure to contact Westfalia Separator.
The decanter configuration menu is called up from the main menu. The menu
comprises multiple screens.
/ fields".
• Decanter configuration 1
Fig. 48 =
Display Meaning
Drive Selection of the drive variant.
Main gear factor Entry of main gear transmission ratio.
Secondary gear Entry of secondary gear transmission ratio.
factor
Torque suppression Entry of torque suppression value. The entry serves
for torque zero point adjustment.
Torque factor Entry of factor for offset between decanter screw and
secondary drive. The torque of the secondary drive is
not equal to that of the decanter screw (display).

8185-9001-018 / 3108 77
Other functions:
Key Key description

Previous menu
Decanter menu
Next menu
• Decanter configuration 2
Fig. 49 =
Display Meaning
Decanter control Selection of control mode (selection available only with
decanters equipped with 2-gear drive and differential
drive):
• Speed = speed control (see chapter 3.8.10 "Speed
control").
• Torque = torque control (see chapter 3.8.12 "Torque
control").
Controller The output to the secondary motor can be limited here.

78 8185-9001-018 / 3108
Display Meaning
Speed limitation Selection of speed limitation:
• no = There is no speed limitation, e.g. decanter C.505.
• max = The speed from the gear input is always lower
than the speed from the gear housing, e.g. decanter
C.30.
• min = The speed from the gear input is always higher
than the speed from the gear housing, e.g. decanter
C.45 and C.501.
Other functions:
Key Key description

Previous menu
Decanter menu

8185-9001-018 / 3108 79
3.12 System settings

The System settings menu is called up from the main menu. Date and time can
be edited and further settings carried out in this menu.
/ fields".
Fig. 50 =
Other functions:
Key Key description

Depending on the position of installation and viewing angle, a
parallax may occur when operating the operating device. To
prevent any operating errors that may result from this, please
recalibrate the touchscreen in the startup phase or during run-
ning operation. A new window appears. Follow the instructions.
Touch the button repeatedly to reduce the contrast.
Touch the button repeatedly to increase the contrast.
Main menu.
Change to Windows Control Panel.

Certain functions, e.g. importing a new visualisation (see chap-
ter 4.6, require changing to the Windows Control Panel.
This function is password-protected.

80 8185-9001-018 / 3108
Delete failure buffer

All failure messages queued in the buffer so far are deleted.
Save on MMC
All settings made should be saved to complete a start-up pro-
cedure.
All adjustable parameters and times are saved on the plug-in
memory module (MMC: Micro Memory Card). The program is
stored on the MMC, too.
The parameters are stored in a sector of the MMC which allows
data to be retrieved also after connecting the card to another
device (e.g. to another DCU 8).
This retrieval function can also be useful if the saved status has
to be restored after several parameter changes.
The symbol is shown inverted during the storage process.
Read from MMC
Note:
When this function is carried out, all current settings are over-
written!
The values are read from the MMC. All settings saved before
are restored. The symbol is shown inverted during the read
process.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 81
4 Maintenance
4.1 Accident prevention ............................................................................... 82

4.2 Requirements concerning the service personnel and spare parts ........ 82
4.3 Alarms.................................................................................................... 83
4.3.1 Failure messages .................................................................................. 83
4.3.2 Active failure .......................................................................................... 84
4.3.3 Failure buffer.......................................................................................... 85
4.3.4 Failure report: Reasons and remedies .................................................. 86
4.3.5 Varying/missing speed display .............................................................. 91
4.3.6 Checking the speed sensors ................................................................. 91
4.3.7 Status and alarm indicator ..................................................................... 92
4.4 Changing the Micro Memory Card (MMC)............................................. 94
4.5 CPU reset .............................................................................................. 95
4.6 Importing a new visualisation ................................................................ 96
4.7 Centralised control via potential-free contacts....................................... 97

82 8185-9001-018 / 3108
4.1 Accident prevention

When performing maintenance and repair work, comply with the safety instruc-
tions stated in section 1.
The most important safety instructions which especially concern maintenance
and repairs will now be repeated for reasons of safety.
Prior to performing any maintenance and care

operations:
• Disconnect all electrical systems and equipment
parts from the power supply by actuating the
main switch.
• Secure the unit against accidental reconnection
to power using locking devices.
• Do not start any maintenance work before the
centrifuge has been switched off for at least 2
Fig. 51
hours. This is necessary to allow all parts to
cool down sufficiently so that there is no longer
danger of injury due to hot surfaces.
4.2 Requirements concerning the service personnel and spare parts
• Only use genuine spare parts from Westfalia

Separator.
The use of non-genuine parts results in:
– safety risks
– reduced service life and availability
– increased service needs
If a safety risk results, any persons not comply-
ing with this information might be subject to
Fig. 52 prosecution under criminal law. Westfalia Sepa-
rator shall not assume any liability or give any
warranty in such cases.
Make sure that only properly qualified personnel are entrusted with maintaining
the unit. This is the case with the service personnel of Westfalia Separator or
personnel trained by Westfalia Separator.
An inadequately maintained/installed machine presents a high safety risk for the
personnel.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 83
4.3 Alarms
4.3.1 Failure messages

A failure is signalled by a potential-free contact and by a failure message
window on the control unit display.
Fig. 53 =
Proceed as follows in the failure message window.
Key Description
• Acknowledge the failure message.
• However, the failure is not automatically remedied.
• The LED in the „ERROR“ function key flashes.
• After pressing the "ERROR" function key, the "Failure
report" window opens with the current errors.
After pressing again, the "Active failure" window opens.
– The message number,
– date and time of failure message arrival,
– the failure message in plain text (e.g. Failure bowl
motor).
• Remove the failure, the failure message disappears and
the LED in the “ERROR” function key stops flashing.

84 8185-9001-018 / 3108
4.3.2 Active failure

An active failure is signalled by a floating contact and by a failure message
window on the control unit display.
Fig. 54 =
Proceed as follows in the failure message window.
Key Description
• Acknowledge the failure message.
• However, the failure is not automatically remedied.
• The LED in the „ERROR“ function key flashes.
• After pressing the "ERROR" function key, the "Failure
buffer" window opens with the current errors.
– Message number,
– date and time of failure message arrival,
– Failure message in plain text (e.g. Failure bowl motor),
– Status of the active failure.
• Remove the failure, the failure message disappears and
the LED in the “ERROR” function key stops flashing.
• Close the window by touching the X in the upper right-
hand corner.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 85
4.3.3 Failure buffer

Occurring failure reports are written to the failure buffer. A new entry is created
in the failure buffer whenever an alarm status change takes place (alarm come /
gone / acknowledged).
Fig. 55 =
Explanation of the display example:
Display Meaning
No.: 2010 Failure number and failure message in plain text.
Bowl motor failure
Time: Time of status change (come / acknowledged /
gone) of the failure message.
16:28:59
Date: Date of status change (come / acknowledged /
gone) of the failure message.
17.03.2008
Status: Status of the failure message:
• K = failure message has come
(KQ)G
• Q = failure message has been acknowledged
• G = failure message has gone
Close the window by touching the X in the upper right-hand corner.

86 8185-9001-018 / 3108
4.3.4 Failure report: Reasons and remedies
Failure Reasons Remedies

Status and fault LEDs do not light The circuit breaker in the control Search for reason of tripping, re-
up on the CPU. cabinet has tripped. move failure and switch on circuit
breaker (see status and fault indica-
The operating device OP is swit-
tor).
ched off.
There is a wiring error in the power Correct wiring according to wiring
supply. diagram.
No or varying speed display The speed sensor(s) is/are defec- Check speed sensor(s) and replace
tive. if necessary.
The speed sensor(s) has/have re- Correct connection according to
verse polarity or is/are not properly circuit diagram (blue = minus,
connected. brown = plus).
The speed sensor(s) was/were Adjust speed sensor(s) properly.
incorrectly adjusted. For speed sensor types and clear-
ances see table in chapter 6.1
"Speed sensor types; clearances
and pulses".
Electric wiring is faulty (interrupted Connect speed sensor(s) according
line). to circuit diagram. Cut off the tinned
ends of the speed sensor cable,
remove insulation and mount wire
end ferrules.
Screening is missing, connected on Screening may be connected only
both sides or damaged. directly below the CPU from the
control unit DCU 8.
Incorrect differential speed display The gear factor, drive or pulses/ Correct gear factor, drive or pul-
revolution is incorrectly set. ses/revolution.
Incorrect bowl, gear house or gear The pulses/revolution are incor- Correct the pulses/revolution.
input speed display rectly set.
All variables are labelled with ####. No connection OP-CPU. Check the connection OP-CPU.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 87

The displayed torque is not correct. The decanter factor is incorrectly The torque is displayed correctly
set. only if the decanter factor has been
properly entered.
The 4 – 20 mA torque signal is The 4 – 20mA torque analogue
incorrectly set. signal is calibrated as follows as a
standard:
• 0 % equals 4 mA
• 150 % motor torque equals
20 mA
If the torque is calibrated differently,
it has to be adapted.
Differential speed is above basic The set basic differential speed Set basic differential speed higher.
differential speed in idle mode al- cannot be realised since it corre-
(The frequency converter minimum
ready. sponds to a frequency below the
frequency protects the motor and
minimum frequency of the fre-
the gear against overload).
quency converter.
The set basic differential speed
cannot be realised since the gear
input speed must be above the
gear house speed.
(only C.45.-..-.2 or C.501.-..-.2, see
speed limitation configuration).
Differential speed cannot be in- The frequency of the secondary The frequency converter maximum
creased. frequency converter is at F max. frequency protects the motor and
and cannot be increased any fur- the gear against overload.
ther.
The differential speed cannot be
increased since the gear house
speed must be above the gear in-
put speed.
(Only C.30.-..-.2, see speed limita-
tion configuration.)

88 8185-9001-018 / 3108

The differential speed drops as the The belt tension of the drive belts Check the belt tension, see de-
torque rises (bowl, gear house and gear input) canter operating instructions.
is too low.
SF-LED lights up An additional flow control was set If no analogue output board is in-
for example. An additional ana- stalled, deselect the control.
logue output board, which is not
installed, is required for this.
A bus communication was pro- Establish communication.
grammed, however, no communi-
cation to the other control exists.
Decanter Off Bowl motor failure Check motor circuit-breaker
Check PTC resistor
Secondary motor failure. Check motor circuit-breaker
Check PTC resistor
Check messages on frequency
converter.
Differential speed low failure Check feed quantity and consis-
tency
Check belt tension
Check limit value
Check clearances of speed initia-
tors.
Check if speed initiators have been
mixed up. (negative differential
speed)
Bowl overspeed failure Check bowl speed
Check limit value
Torque stage 2 failure Decanter overload
Check setting of 2-gear controller
Check limit values
Torque broken wire failure Check signal line
Check messages on frequency
converter.
Unlock Emergency stop button and
acknowledge (ACK).
Emergency Stop Unlock Emergency stop button and
acknowledge (ACK).

8185-9001-018 / 3108 89

Decanter Off Vibration stage 2 failure Check vibrations on decanter
Check limit values
Check feed quantity and consis-
tency
Vibration broken wire failure Check signal line
Sensor check
Bearing temperature stage 2 liquid Check bearing temperature
side failure.
Check feed temperature
Check limit values
Bearing temperature stage 2 solids Check bearing temperature
side failure.
Check limit values
Broken wire bearing temperature Check signal line
liquid side failure
Sensor check
Broken wire bearing temperature Check signal line
solids side failure.
Sensor check
Lubrication oil pump failure Check motor circuit-breaker
Filter blocked failure Check filter
Sensor check
Oil level low failure Check oil level
Sensor check
Water detector failure Check if there is water in the oil
Sensor check
Decanter running without product Operate the decanter without feed
failure. only for a limited time.

90 8185-9001-018 / 3108

Feed off Bowl speed low failure Check feed quantity and consis-
tency
Check belt tension and limit value
Check clearances of speed initia-
tors
Torque stage 1 failure Decanter overload
Check setting of 2-gear controller
Check limit values
Feed pump failure Check motor circuit-breaker
Check feedback
Failure solids slide gate Check feedback
Failure torque too low Check limit value.
Check the feed consistency
Failure flow from feed too low Check limit value.
Check feed quantity
Grease pump off Grease pump failure Check motor circuit-breaker
Message only Vibration stage 1 failure Check vibrations on decanter
Check limit values
Check feed quantity and consis-
tency
Grease distributor failure Check grease distributor and grea-
se lines
Check level in grease container
Check "delay grease distributor
failure"
Bearing temperature stage 1 liquid Check bearing temperature
side failure
Check limit values
Bearing temperature stage 1 solids Check bearing temperature
side failure
Check limit values
Control unit goes to stop Wrong control unit. Pleas contact Operate the decanter only with a
Westfalia Separator. Westfalia Separator control unit.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 91
4.3.5 Varying/missing speed display

A varying/missing speed display is frequently caused by defective and/or incor-
rectly adjusted speed sensors. As the measuring values influence each other,
the speed sensors must be checked in the following sequence:
• Switch on decanter and wait during start-up time.
• Have the bowl speed, gear input speed and gear house speed displayed.
– The "Bowl" speed sensor is ok if the displayed bowl speed is close to that
given on the decanter nameplate and the display is constant.
– The "Gear house" and "Gear input" speed sensors are not ok if the display
fails or varies without torque. The corresponding speed sensor must be
checked.
4.3.6 Checking the speed sensors

Note:
The speed sensors used are Namur sensors.
• Check voltage on speed sensor (with decanter at standstill). The voltage
values of a functional and properly installed speed sensor are as follows:
– attenuated approx. 7.5 V
– unattenuated approx. 3.5 V
• Check clearances, see table 6.1.
• Check shape of attenuator sheets.
• Install speed sensors according to the circuit diagram:
– Cut off the tinned ends and remove cable insulation.
– Provide the bare cable ends with wire end ferrules and connect them
according to the circuit diagram (blue = minus, brown = plus).
• The speed sensor screening may be connected only on one side directly be-
low the CPU from the control unit DCU 8.

92 8185-9001-018 / 3108
4.3.7 Status and alarm indicator
Only qualified personnel are allowed to open the control cabinet.

The processor is located on the mounting plate in the control cabinet.
Fig. 56
The operating mode selector switch (1) (RUN;STOP;MRES) must be set to

RUN.
Errors and states are shown by the following LEDs:
Display Meaning
SF (red) Centralised alarm.
This LED goes on in the event of:
• Hardware failures
• Firmware failures
• Programming errors
• Parametrisation errors
• Computing errors
• Timing errors
• Periphery errors concerning internal periphery functions
You have to use a programming device and read out the

diagnostic buffer for precise troubleshooting.
BF (red) Flashing = bus error at the PROFIBUS DP interface.
DC5V (green) 5V DC power supply for the control unit.
This LED lights up when the internal 5V power supply is
OK.
FRCE (yellow) reserved

8185-9001-018 / 3108 93
Display Meaning
RUN (green) Operating status RUN of the control unit CPU.
• This LED lights up when the control unit is processing the
user program.
• This LED flashes (2 Hz) during the control unit start-up (in
addition the STOP display lights up; when the STOP dis-
play goes out, the outputs are released).
STOP (yellow) Operating state STOP of the control unit CPU.
The LED:
• lights up when the control unit is not processing a user
program,
• flashes slowly when the control unit requests a memory
reset,
• flashes rapidly when the control unit performs a memory
reset.

94 8185-9001-018 / 3108
4.4 Changing the Micro Memory Card (MMC)

The control program and all setting/adjustment data are stored on the remov-
able Micro Memory Card (MMC). If required, these data can be downloaded at
a later date, e.g., when the Micro Memory Card (MMC) is inserted into a new
control unit.
The control unit cannot be used without a Micro Memory Card (MMC) or with a
defective card. The LED shows the operating status "STOP".
Only qualified personnel is allowed to open the control cabinet in order to re-
place the Micro Memory Card (MMC).
Fig. 57
1 Release
2 "MMC" slot
3 Micro Memory Card (MMC)
Make sure that the power supply unit is switched off prior to changing the Micro
Memory Card (MMC).
When a new Micro Memory Card (MMC) has been connected, the DCU 8 is
in the STOP mode after it is switched on for the first time. Switch the voltage
supply off and on again. After that the DCU 8 is in the RUN mode.
The Micro Memory Card (MMC) must not be read out using commercially avail-
able card readers. The program may be destroyed.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 95
4.5 CPU reset

Under certain circumstances it might be necessary to reset the CPU of the
control unit.
Resetting the CPU means that the CPU is reinitialised. The program currently
stored in the RAM memory and all data will be overwritten by the content of the
Micro Memory Card (MMC).
Fig. 58
1 Release
2 "MMC" slot
3 Micro Memory Card (MMC)
Proceed as follows:
• Disconnect the control unit from the power supply.
• Press the release and pull out the Micro Memory Card (MMC) from slot (2).
• Re-connect the power supply.
• Disconnect the power supply again after approx. 30 seconds.
• Insert the Micro Memory Card (MMC) (3) again.
• Re-connect the power supply.
– CPU is in STOP status
• Disconnect the control unit from the power supply.
• Re-connect the power supply after approx. 30 seconds.
– CPU is in RUN status
The settings stored on the MMC have been retransferred; the basic settings
have been restored.
The values stored last using the RAM->MMC function can now be loaded back
with the MMC->RAM function, see chapter 3.12 System menu.

96 8185-9001-018 / 3108
4.6 Importing a new visualisation

A new Operator Panel (OP) program can be loaded.
Fig. 59
1 Release
2 "Multi Media Card" slot
3 Multi Media Card
Proceed as follows:
• Press the release (1) and if necessary, pull out the existing Multi Media Card
(MMC) from slot (2).
• Insert the new Multi Media Card (3) into slot (2).
• Go to the Windows Control Panel into the option "Backup-Restore", see also
chapter 3.12 System menu.
• Start the restore procedure by pressing the "Restore" button.
• Confirm that the internal memory is to be completely deleted.
– After this confirmation, the operating system is newly loaded and an auto-
matic operating device restart is carried out.
– After this, the remaining data is transmitted.
– After a successful transmission, the operating device generates a message.
• Remove the Multi Media Card (3) and restart the operating device.
• The new visualisation is now installed.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 97
4.7 Centralised control via potential-free contacts

The control unit can be linked with a centralised control system using hardware
signals. The signals are exchanged as follows.
Customer-
DCU 8 provided con-
trol system
Functions performed Signals
Decanter Start / Stop Decanter external start/stop = 1/0

after approx. 5 minutes, the decanter is
ready for operation Ready for operation = 1
Product program ON / OFF Product start/stop = 1/0
During production Feed On

If the decanter is not ready for operation, the
production is switched off (e.g. for decanter
post-running or decanter off).
Failure
A failure has occurred. Centralised alarm = 0
No failure or previous failure Centralised alarm = 1

was acknowledged and remedied.

98 8185-9001-018 / 3108
Note
Notes
Notes
Anotaciones
Notes
Notes
Note

8185-9001-018 / 3108 99
5 Installation and connection
5.1 Installing the control cabinet ................................................................100

5.2 Connecting the control unit ..................................................................100
5.3 Particularity; electrical connecting cable..............................................101

100 8185-9001-018 / 3108
5.1 Installing the control cabinet

Mount the control system near the centrifuge either on a wall or on a frame.
When installing, observe the chapter "Technical data".
Please consider the following criteria when selecting the installation site:
• Avoid direct sunlight shining on the display if this is possible to ensure good
readability of the display.
• Heating up of the unit due to external heat sources should be reduced to a
minimum.
• The control unit should not be mounted in an excessively humid environment
or in under wet conditions (see chapter "Technical data").
Air humidity/moisture
If the control unit may get moist, the supply voltage shall be applied at all times
to keep the temperature inside the control unit constant.
If power is supplied via the motor control system, the main switch shall remain
activated even if the separator stands still.
5.2 Connecting the control unit

Note that certain terminal blocks on the mounting plate are assigned to the in-
puts of the outputs of the control unit.
Operating voltages
Connect the control unit only to voltages specified on the nameplate inside the
housing.
Solenoid valves are designed to operate with a control voltage of 24 V DC as a

standard value.
The potential-free contacts of the interface relays carry external voltage, for
example if they are integrated in pump controls for interlocking.
Installation instructions:
• Lay the signalling lines separately from lines with higher voltages (e.g. power
cables, motor lines etc.).
• Securely fasten the cable glands for cable entry.
For cabinets without cable glands, seal the cable entry points.

8185-9001-018 / 3108 101
5.3 Particularity; electrical connecting cable
Off ACK
X7
1 2 3 4
Fig. 60
1 Control unit
2 Connecting cable
3 Cable binder (meander-shape fixing)
4 Terminal box on the decanter
Connect the control unit DCU 8 (1) to the terminal box on the decanter (5) using
connecting cable (2).
Notes on the connecting cable (2):
• Guide the cable from the control unit DCU 8 to the decanter without using the
terminal strip inside the control cabinet. This is the only way to guarantee that
proper and EMC-compatible connection of the proximity initiators with the
evaluation unit is provided.
• Cut off the excess cable length. If the cable is not able to be shortened, coil it
to a meander shape and secure with cable binders (3).

102 8185-9001-018 / 3108
Note
Notes
Notes
Anotaciones
Notes
Notes
Note

8185-9001-018 / 3108 103
6 Appendix
6.1 Speed sensor types; clearances and pulses .......................................104

6.2 Parameter tables .................................................................................108

104 8185-9001-018 / 3108
6.1 Speed sensor types; clearances and pulses

The table below shows the installation position of the speed sensors (which drive the control unit DCU 8) on the
various decanter types. In addition, speed sensor type, installation clearance and pulses per revolution are also
stated.
The table below does not claim to be complete, we reserve the right to change the contents.
Decanter type Speed sensor type - Clearance - Pulses per revolution
Gear input Gear house Bowl

CA 15. - . . - . 0 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
• 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
• 2 pulses • 2 pulses
CA 22. - . . - . 0 • NJ2,5–14GH–N–V1 • NJ2,5–14GH–N–V1
±0.5
• 1,5 mm • 1,5 ±0.5 mm
CA 22. - . . - . 0 • NJ2,5–14GH–N–V1 • NJ2,5–14GH–N–V1
±0.5
• 1,5 mm • 1,5 ±0.5 mm
CD 205 - . . - . 2 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
±0.5
• 2,5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
CA 30. - . . - . 0 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
• 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
CB 30. - . . - . 0 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
• 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
CB 30. - . . - . 2 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
• 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
• 2 pulses • 2 pulses • 2 pulses
CD 30. - . . - . 0 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
±0.5
• 2,5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
CD 30. - . . - . 2 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
±0.5 ±0.5
• 2,5 mm • 2,5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm

8185-9001-018 / 3108 105

CA 36. - . . - . 0 • NJ2,5–14GH–N–V1 • NJ2,5–14GH–N–V1
±0.5
• 1,5 mm • 1,5 ±0.5 mm
C . 45. - . . - . 0 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
±0.5
• 2,5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
C . 45. - . . - . 2 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
• 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
CA 501- . . - . 0 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
• 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
CA 501- . . - . 2 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
• 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
CA 506- . . - . 0 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
• 2,5 0.5 mm • 2,5 0.5 mm
CA 506- . . - . 2 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
• 2,5 0.5 mm • 2,5 0.5 mm • 2,5 0.5 mm
CA 505- . . - . 2 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ2–11–SN–G
±0.5 ±0.5
• 2,5 mm • 2,5 mm • 1 ±0.2 mm

106 8185-9001-018 / 3108

CB 505 - . . - . 0 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
±0.5
• 2,5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
CB 505 - . . - . 2 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
±0.5 ±0.5
• 2,5 mm • 2,5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
CB 506 - . . - . 0 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
• 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
CB 506 - . . - . 2 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
• 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
CA 536- . . - . 4 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
• 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
CA 635 - . . - . • NJ10–22–N_G • NJ10–22–N_G • NJ10–22–N_G
± ±
• 5 mm • 5 mm • 5 ± mm
CA 635- . . - . 4 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
±0.5
• 2,5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
CA 65. - . . - . 0 • NJ2–11–SN–G
• 1 ±0.2 mm
• 5 pulses
CA 75. - . . - . 0 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
• 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm
CA 75. - . . - . 2 • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G • NJ5–11–N–G
• 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm • 2,5 ±0.5 mm

8185-9001-018 / 3108 107

CC 75. - . . - . 0 • NJ5–11–N–G
• 2,5 ±0.5 mm
• 2 pulses
CD 75. - . . - . 4 • NJ10–22–N_G • NJ10–22–N_G
±
• 5 mm • 5 ± mm

108 8185-9001-018 / 3108
6.2 Parameter tables

Upon initial commissioning or in case of changes, please enter the set parame-
ters into this table.
Decanter type
Date of initial commissioning __–__–____
• Differential speed control parameters

Settings Value at start-up
Basic differential speed [rpm]
Control beginning [%]
Control gradation [%]
Delay time [s]
• Torque control parameters

Basic differential speed [rpm]
Start delay after product On [s]
Controller on [%]
Set torque [%]
Gain Kp
Integration time Tn [s]
CV+ basic difference after product On
[%]
Set value range [%]

8185-9001-018 / 3108 109
• Limit values
Torque
- Limit value stage 1 [%]
- Limit value stage 2 [%]
Solids slide gate open [%]
Solids slide gate close [%]
Overspeed [rpm]
Speed reached [rpm]
Solids slide gate close / flush [rpm]
Differential speed min. [rpm]
Bearing temperatures on liquid side
- Limit value stage 1 [°C]
- Correction factor
Bearing temperatures on solids side
- Correction factor
Vibration maximum [mm/s]
- Limit value stage 1 [mm/s]
- Limit value stage 2 [mm/s]
- Delay vibration on [s]
Bowl motor amperage max. [A]

110 8185-9001-018 / 3108
• Decanter configuration
Drive
Main gear
Secondary gear
Torque suppression [%]
Decanter factor
Decanter control
Controller Ymin – Ymax [%]
Speed limitation
• Timer settings
Pre-lubrication [s]
Decanter start-up [s]
Post running [s]
Delay torque stage 1 [s]
Delay torque stage 2 [s]
Delay decanter Off no feed [s]
Delay filter blocked [s]
Delay filter blocked decanter off [s]
Delay oil level min. [s]
Delay oil level min. decanter off [s]
Delay water detector off [s]
Delay feed flushing [s]
Feed flushing [s]
Grease lubrication interval [s]
Delay grease distributor failure [s]
Delay close solids slide gate [s]
Flush solids slide gate [s]

8185-9001-018 / 3108 111
• Control parameters feed controller

Start setpoint ramp [m³/h]
Start-up time [s]
Limit value flow [m³/h]
Delay limit value flow [s]
Gain Kp
Integration time Tn [s]
Set value range [%]
Measuring range limit value min-max
[m³/h]
Setpoint [m³/h]
• Service settings
Motor lubrication service [h]
Screw bearing service [h]
Machine maintenance service [Date]

Mechanical separation
GEA Westfalia Separator
Werner-Habig-Str. 1 ● D-59302 Oelde
Phone.: +49 2522 / 77-0 ● Fax: +49 2522 / 77-2488
info@gea-westfalia.de ● www.westfalia-separator.com
Preface
SIMATIC HMI HMI Device TP 177A, TP 177B, OP 177B (WinCC flexible)
1
______________
Overview
Safety Instructions and

2
SIMATIC HMI ______________
General Notes
3
HMI Device ______________
Planning Use
TP 177A, TP 177B, OP 177B 4

(WinCC flexible) ______________
Installation and connection
Operator Controls and

5
Operating Instructions ______________
Displays
Configuring the Operating

6
______________
System
7
______________
Commissioning a project
8
______________
Operating a Project
9
______________
Operating Alarms
10
______________
Operating Recipes
11
______________
Maintenance and care
12
______________
Specifications
A
______________
Appendix
B
Order no.: 6AV6691-1DG01-0AB1
______________
Abbreviations
08/2008
A5E01006556-03
Safety Guidelines
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
WARNING
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only
in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or
recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage,
positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG Ordernumber: 6AV6691-1DG01-0AB1 Copyright © Siemens AG 2008.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 08/2008 Technical data subject to change
Postfach 48 48
90327 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
Purpose of the Operating Instructions

These operating instructions provide information based on the requirements defined by
DIN EN 62079 for mechanical engineering documentation. The information relates to the
HMI device, its place of use, transportation, storage, installation, use, and maintenance.
These operating instructions are intended for:
● Users
● Commissioning engineers
● Service technicians
● Maintenance technicians
Please read the section "Safety instructions and general notes" carefully.
The help integrated in WinCC flexible, the WinCC flexible Information System, contains
detailed information. The information system contains instructions, examples and reference
information in electronic form.
Basic Knowledge Requirements

General knowledge of automation technology and process communication is needed to
understand the operating instructions.
It is also assumed that those using the manual have experience in using personal computers
and knowledge of Microsoft operating systems.
Range of Validity for the Operating Instructions

These operating instructions apply to the HMI devices TP 177A, TP 177B and OP 177B in
combination with the WinCC flexible software package.
TP 177A, TP 177B, OP 177B (WinCC flexible)

Operating Instructions, 08/2008, 6AV6691-1DG01-0AB1 3
Preface
Position in the Information Scheme

These operating instructions form part of the SIMATIC HMI documentation. The following
provides an overview of the information landscape for SIMATIC HMI.
User manuals
● WinCC flexible Micro
Describes the basics of configuration with the WinCC flexible Micro engineering system.
● WinCC flexible Compact/Standard/Advanced
Describes basic principles of configuration using the WinCC flexible Compact/
WinCC flexible Standard/WinCC flexible Advanced engineering systems.
● WinCC flexible Runtime
Describes how to commission and operate your runtime project on a PC.
● WinCC flexible Migration
– Describes how to convert an existing ProTool project to WinCC flexible.
– Describes how to convert an existing WinCC project to WinCC flexible.
– Describes how to convert an existing ProTool project including a change of the
HMI device, for example from OP3 to OP 73 or from OP7 to OP 77B
– Describes how to convert an existing ProTool project including a change from a
graphics device to a Windows CE device.
● Communication
– Communication Part 1 describes the connection of the HMI device to SIMATIC PLCs.
– Communication Part 2 describes the connection of the HMI device to third-party
controllers.

4 Operating Instructions, 08/2008, 6AV6691-1DG01-0AB1
Preface
Operating instructions
● Operating instructions for SIMATIC HMI devices.
– OP 73, OP 77A, OP 77B
– TP 170micro, TP 170A, TP 170B, OP 170B
– OP 73micro, TP 177micro
– TP 177A, TP 177B, OP 177B
– TP 270, OP 270
– MP 270B
– MP 277
– MP 370
– MP 377
● Operating instructions for mobile SIMATIC HMI devices
– Mobile Panel 170
● Operating Instructions(Compact) for SIMATIC HMI devices
– OP 77B
Getting Started
● WinCC flexible for first time users
Based on an example project, this is a step-by-step introduction to the basics of
configuring screens, alarms, recipes and screen navigation.
● WinCC flexible for power users
configuring logs, project reports, scripts, user management, multilingual projects and
integration in STEP 7.
● WinCC flexible Options
configuring the WinCC flexible Sm@rtServices, Sm@rtAccess and OPC server options.
Online Availability
Technical documentation on SIMATIC products and SIMATIC systems is available in
PDF format in various languages at the following addresses:
● SIMATIC Guide Technical Documentation:
"http://www.automation.siemens.com/simatic/portal/html_00/techdoku.htm"

Preface
Conventions
Configuration and runtime software differ with regard to their names as follows:
● "WinCC flexible 2008," for example, refers to the configuration software.
The term "WinCC flexible" is used in a general context. The full name, for example
"WinCC flexible 2008", is always used when it is necessary to differentiate between
different versions of the configuration software.
● "WinCC flexible Runtime" refers to the runtime software that can run on HMI devices.
The name "TP 177B" is the umbrella term for the following HMI devices:
● TP 177B 4"
● TP 177B 6"
Text is highlighted as follows to simplify reading the operating instructions:
Notation Scope
"Add screen" • Terms that appear in the user interface, for example,
dialog names, tabs, buttons, menu commands
• Required input, for example, limits, tag values.
• Path information
"File > Edit" Operator actions, for example, menu commands, shortcut menu
commands.
<F1>, <Alt+P> Keyboard operation
Please observe notes labeled as follows:
Note
Notes contain important information concerning the product, its use or a specific section of
the documentation to which you should pay particular attention.
Trademarks
Names labeled with a ® symbol are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. Other names
used in this documentation may be trademarks, the use of which by third parties for their
own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
● HMI®
● SIMATIC®
● SIMATIC HMI®
● SIMATIC ProTool®
● SIMATIC WinCC®
● SIMATIC WinCC flexible®
● SIMATIC TP 177A®
● SIMATIC TP 177B®
● SIMATIC OP 177B®

Preface
Representatives and offices

If you have any further questions relating to the products described in this manual,
please contact your local representative at the SIEMENS branch nearest you.
You can locate your contact partner on this Internet URL:
"http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner"
Training Center
Siemens AG offers a variety of training courses to familiarize you with automation systems.
Please contact your regional Training Center, or the central Training Center in
D90327 Nuremberg.
Phone: +49 (911) 895-3200
Internet: "http://www.sitrain.com"
Technical Support
You can reach the Technical Support for all A&D products
using the support request form on the web:
"http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request"
Phone: + 49 180 5050 222
Fax: + 49 180 5050 223
For further information about Siemens Technical Support, refer to the Internet at
"http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request"
Service & Support on the Internet

Service & Support provides additional comprehensive information on SIMATIC products
through online services at "http://support.automation.siemens.com:"
● The newsletter provides up-to-date information relating to your products.
● Our Service & Support search engine provides you access to all available documentation.
● A forum for global exchange of information by users and experts
● Current product information, FAQs and downloads
● Your local Automation & Drives representative
● Information about on-site services, repairs, spare parts and much more is available on
our "Services" pages.

Preface

Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 15
1.1 Product Overview.........................................................................................................................15
1.2 Design of the TP 177A HMI Device .............................................................................................16
1.3 Design of the TP 177B 6" HMI device .........................................................................................17
1.4 Design of the TP 177B 4" HMI device .........................................................................................19
1.5 Design of the OP 177B HMI Device ............................................................................................20
1.6 Accessories..................................................................................................................................22
1.7 Miscellaneous ..............................................................................................................................22
1.8 Functional scope with WinCC flexible..........................................................................................23
1.9 Software options ..........................................................................................................................26
1.10 Communication Using the TP 177A.............................................................................................26
1.11 Communication Using the TP 177B and OP 177B ......................................................................27
2 Safety Instructions and General Notes .................................................................................................... 29
2.1 Safety Information........................................................................................................................29
2.2 Standards and Approvals.............................................................................................................30
2.3 Notes about Usage ......................................................................................................................33
2.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility......................................................................................................36
2.5 Transport and Storage Conditions ...............................................................................................38
3 Planning Use ........................................................................................................................................... 39
3.1 Mounting Information ...................................................................................................................39
3.2 Mounting Positions and Fixation ..................................................................................................41
3.3 Preparing for Mounting ................................................................................................................43
3.4 Specifications for Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of Protection..........................45
3.5 Nominal Voltages.........................................................................................................................45
4 Installation and connection ...................................................................................................................... 47
4.1 Checking the package contents...................................................................................................47
4.2 Mounting the HMI Device.............................................................................................................47
4.3 Connecting the HMI Device .........................................................................................................50
4.3.1 Interfaces on the TP 177A ...........................................................................................................51
4.3.2 Interfaces on the TP 177B 4".......................................................................................................51
4.3.3 Interfaces on the TP 177B 6".......................................................................................................52
4.3.4 Interfaces on the OP 177B...........................................................................................................52

Table of contents
4.3.5 Connecting the Equipotential Bonding Circuit............................................................................. 53

4.3.6 Connecting the Power Supply..................................................................................................... 55
4.3.7 Connecting uninterruptible power supply on the TP 177B 4" ..................................................... 58
4.3.8 Connecting the Controller ........................................................................................................... 58
4.3.9 Connecting a configuration PC ................................................................................................... 61
4.3.10 Connecting USB devices to TP 177B and OP 177B .................................................................. 65
4.3.11 Connecting printers to TP 177B and OP 177B ........................................................................... 66
4.4 Switching on and Testing the HMI Device .................................................................................. 68
5 Operator Controls and Displays............................................................................................................... 71
5.1 Front-side Operator Controls ...................................................................................................... 71
5.2 Connecting a memory card to the TP 177B 6" and OP 177B..................................................... 73
5.3 Insert a memory card in the TP 177B 4" ..................................................................................... 76
5.4 Labeling function keys on the TP 177B 4" and OP 177B ........................................................... 78
6 Configuring the Operating System ........................................................................................................... 81
6.1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A.................................................................... 81
6.1.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 81
6.1.2 Control Panel .............................................................................................................................. 82
6.1.2.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 82
6.1.2.2 Changing Screen Settings .......................................................................................................... 84
6.1.2.3 Displaying Information about the HMI Device............................................................................. 86
6.1.2.4 Calibrating the Touch Screen ..................................................................................................... 87
6.1.2.5 Display License Information ........................................................................................................ 89
6.1.2.6 Changing the Password Settings................................................................................................ 89
6.1.2.7 Changing MPI/DP Settings ......................................................................................................... 91
6.1.2.8 Setting the Screen Saver ............................................................................................................ 92
6.1.2.9 Configuring the Data Channel..................................................................................................... 93
6.2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6" and OP 177B................................................ 96
6.2.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 96
6.2.2 Control Panel .............................................................................................................................. 98
6.2.2.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 98
6.2.2.2 Input Using the Screen Keyboard ............................................................................................. 100
6.2.2.3 Configuring the Screen Keyboard............................................................................................. 101
6.2.2.4 Setting the Character Repeat for the Screen Keyboard ........................................................... 103
6.2.2.5 Setting the Double-click on the Touch Screen.......................................................................... 104
6.2.2.6 Backup and Restore Using a Memory Card ............................................................................. 105
6.2.2.7 Setting the Date and Time ........................................................................................................ 108
6.2.2.8 Saving Registry Information ...................................................................................................... 109
6.2.2.9 Changing Screen Contrast........................................................................................................ 111
6.2.2.10 Displaying Information about the HMI Device........................................................................... 112
6.2.2.11 Calibrating the Touch Screen ................................................................................................... 113
6.2.2.12 Changing the Password Settings.............................................................................................. 115
6.2.2.13 Changing Printer Settings ......................................................................................................... 116
6.2.2.14 Changing Regional Settings ..................................................................................................... 118
6.2.2.15 Changing MPI/PROFIBUS DP Settings.................................................................................... 119
6.2.2.16 Setting the Delay Time.............................................................................................................. 123
6.2.2.17 Setting the Screen Saver .......................................................................................................... 124
6.2.2.18 Displaying System Information ................................................................................................. 125
6.2.2.19 Configuring the Data Channel................................................................................................... 126
6.2.2.20 Overview of Network Operation ................................................................................................ 129
6.2.2.21 Setting the Device Name of the HMI Device............................................................................. 131
6.2.2.22 Activating a Direct Connection.................................................................................................. 132

Table of contents
6.2.2.23 Changing Network Settings .......................................................................................................133

6.2.2.24 Changing the Logon Information................................................................................................135
6.2.2.25 Changing Internet Settings ........................................................................................................136
6.3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4"................................................................138
6.3.1 Loader ........................................................................................................................................138
6.3.2 Setting up and disabling SecureMode .......................................................................................140
6.3.3 Control Panel .............................................................................................................................141
6.3.3.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................141
6.3.3.2 Opening the Control Panel.........................................................................................................142
6.3.3.3 Reference for functions..............................................................................................................142
6.3.3.4 Operator control options for the Control Panel ..........................................................................144
6.3.3.5 Operating the Control Panel with the touch screen ...................................................................144
6.3.4 Changing settings for operation .................................................................................................146
6.3.4.1 Configuring the screen keyboard ...............................................................................................146
6.3.4.2 Setting the character repeat.......................................................................................................147
6.3.4.3 Setting the double-click..............................................................................................................148
6.3.4.4 Calibrating the touch screen ......................................................................................................150
6.3.5 Changing password protection ..................................................................................................151
6.3.6 Changing the HMI device settings .............................................................................................153
6.3.6.1 Setting the date and time ...........................................................................................................153
6.3.6.2 Changing regional settings ........................................................................................................155
6.3.6.3 Backup registry information .......................................................................................................156
6.3.6.4 Changing monitor settings .........................................................................................................157
6.3.6.5 Setting the screen saver ............................................................................................................158
6.3.6.6 Changing the printer properties .................................................................................................160
6.3.6.7 Restarting the HMI device..........................................................................................................162
6.3.6.8 Displaying information about the HMI device ............................................................................164
6.3.6.9 Displaying system properties .....................................................................................................165
6.3.6.10 Displaying memory distribution ..................................................................................................166
6.3.6.11 Activate memory management ..................................................................................................167
6.3.7 Setting storage location .............................................................................................................168
6.3.8 Setting the delay time ................................................................................................................169
6.3.9 Enabling PROFINET IO .............................................................................................................170
6.3.10 Changing transfer settings .........................................................................................................172
6.3.10.1 Configuring the data channel .....................................................................................................172
6.3.10.2 Changing MPI/PROFIBUS DP settings .....................................................................................175
6.3.11 Network operation......................................................................................................................178
6.3.11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................178
6.3.11.2 Setting the device name of the HMI device ...............................................................................180
6.3.11.3 Changing the network configuration ..........................................................................................181
6.3.11.4 Changing the logon data............................................................................................................183
6.3.11.5 Changing e-mail settings ...........................................................................................................184
6.3.11.6 Importing and deleting certificates .............................................................................................185
6.3.12 Backup and restore....................................................................................................................186
6.3.12.1 Saving to external storage device (backup)...............................................................................186
6.3.12.2 Restoring from external storage device .....................................................................................188
6.3.13 Setting the uninterruptible power supply....................................................................................190
7 Commissioning a project ....................................................................................................................... 193
7.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................193
7.1.1 Setting the Operating Mode .......................................................................................................195
7.1.2 Reusing Existing Projects ..........................................................................................................196
7.1.3 Data Transmission Options........................................................................................................197
7.2 Transfer......................................................................................................................................198
7.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................198

Table of contents
7.2.2 Starting Manual Transfer........................................................................................................... 199

7.2.3 Starting Automatic Transfer ...................................................................................................... 200
7.2.4 Testing a Project ....................................................................................................................... 202
7.3 Backup and Restore.................................................................................................................. 203
7.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 203
7.3.2 Backup and Restore using WinCC flexible ............................................................................... 204
7.3.3 Backup and Restore using ProSave ......................................................................................... 206
7.4 Updating operating systems on the TP 177A, TP 177B 6" and OP 177B ................................ 208
7.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 208
7.4.2 Resetting to factory settings...................................................................................................... 209
7.4.3 Updating the operating system with WinCC flexible ................................................................. 209
7.4.4 Updating the operating system with ProSave ........................................................................... 211
7.5 Updating the operating system on the TP 177B 4"................................................................... 212
7.5.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 212
7.5.2 Resetting factory settings.......................................................................................................... 213
7.5.3 Updating the operating system using WinCC flexible............................................................... 214
7.5.4 Updating the operating system using ProSave......................................................................... 215
7.5.5 Resetting to factory settings with WinCC flexible ..................................................................... 216
7.5.6 Resetting to factory settings with ProSave ............................................................................... 218
7.6 Installing and Removing Options .............................................................................................. 221
7.6.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 221
7.6.2 Installing and Removing Options using WinCC flexible............................................................ 221
7.6.3 Installing and removing options using ProSave........................................................................ 223
7.7 Transfering License Keys and Transfering Them Back............................................................ 224
7.7.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 224
7.7.2 Transferring and transferring back license keys ....................................................................... 225
8 Operating a Project................................................................................................................................ 227
8.1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A ......................................................................................... 227
8.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 227
8.1.2 Setting the Project Language.................................................................................................... 229
8.1.3 Entries and Help within a Project .............................................................................................. 230
8.1.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 230
8.1.3.2 Entering and Editing Numerical Values .................................................................................... 231
8.1.3.3 Entering and Editing Alphanumerical Values............................................................................ 233
8.1.3.4 Entering and Editing Symbolic Values ...................................................................................... 235
8.1.3.5 Entering and Modifying the Date and Time............................................................................... 236
8.1.3.6 Viewing infotext ......................................................................................................................... 236
8.1.4 Project security.......................................................................................................................... 237
8.1.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 237
8.1.4.2 User logon................................................................................................................................. 239
8.1.4.3 User logoff................................................................................................................................. 240
8.1.4.4 Create user ............................................................................................................................... 241
8.1.4.5 Changing user data................................................................................................................... 242
8.1.4.6 Deleting a user .......................................................................................................................... 243
8.1.5 Closing the project .................................................................................................................... 244
8.1.6 Operating the Trend View ......................................................................................................... 244
8.1.6.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 244
8.1.6.2 Operating the Trend View ......................................................................................................... 245
8.2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B......................................................................... 246
8.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 246
8.2.2 Operating keys on the TP 177B 4" and OP 177B..................................................................... 248
8.2.3 Direct keys ................................................................................................................................ 249

Table of contents
8.2.4 Setting the project language ......................................................................................................250

8.2.5 Entries and help within a project ................................................................................................250
8.2.5.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................250
8.2.5.2 Entering numerical values on the TP 177A, TP 177B and OP 177B.........................................252
8.2.5.3 Entering alphanumerical values on the TP 177A, TP 177B 6" and OP 177B ...........................254
8.2.5.4 Entering alphanumerical values on the TP 177B 4" ..................................................................256
8.2.5.5 Entering and editing symbolic values ........................................................................................258
8.2.5.6 Entering the Date and Time .......................................................................................................258
8.2.5.7 Viewing Infotext..........................................................................................................................259
8.2.6 Operating a Gauge ....................................................................................................................260
8.2.7 Using Switches...........................................................................................................................261
8.2.8 Using a Slider.............................................................................................................................262
8.2.9 Using the Status Force Display..................................................................................................263
8.2.10 Operating the Sm@rtClient View...............................................................................................265
8.2.11 Operating Trends .......................................................................................................................267
8.2.11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................267
8.2.11.2 Operating the Trend View ..........................................................................................................268
8.2.12 Project Security ..........................................................................................................................269
8.2.12.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................269
8.2.12.2 User Logon.................................................................................................................................271
8.2.12.3 User Logoff.................................................................................................................................272
8.2.12.4 Creating a User ..........................................................................................................................273
8.2.12.5 Changing User Data ..................................................................................................................274
8.2.12.6 Deleting a User ..........................................................................................................................276
8.2.13 Closing the Project.....................................................................................................................278
9 Operating Alarms................................................................................................................................... 279
9.1 Operating Alarms TP 177A ........................................................................................................279
9.1.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................279
9.1.2 Displaying Alarms ......................................................................................................................280
9.1.3 Acknowledging Alarms...............................................................................................................282
9.1.4 Editing Alarms ............................................................................................................................283
9.2 Operating Alarms on TP 177B and OP 177B ............................................................................284
9.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................284
9.2.2 Displaying Alarms ......................................................................................................................285
9.2.3 Acknowledging Alarms...............................................................................................................288
9.2.4 Editing Alarms ............................................................................................................................289
10 Operating Recipes ................................................................................................................................. 291
10.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................291
10.2 Structure of a recipe...................................................................................................................292
10.3 Recipes in the Project ................................................................................................................294
10.4 Displaying a Recipe ...................................................................................................................296
10.5 Recipe Values in the HMI Device and the PLC .........................................................................299
10.6 Operating the Enhanced Recipe View.......................................................................................300
10.6.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................300
10.6.2 Creating a recipe data record ....................................................................................................302
10.6.3 Editing a recipe data record .......................................................................................................303
10.6.4 Deleting a recipe data record.....................................................................................................304
10.6.5 Synchronizing Tags on the TP 177B and OP 177B...................................................................305
10.6.6 Reading a recipe data record from the PLC ..............................................................................306
10.6.7 Transferring a recipe data record to the PLC ............................................................................307

Table of contents
10.7 Operating the Simple Recipe View ........................................................................................... 308

10.7.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 308
10.7.2 Creating a Recipe Data Record ................................................................................................ 310
10.7.3 Editing a Recipe Data Record................................................................................................... 311
10.7.4 Deleting a Recipe Data Record ................................................................................................ 312
10.7.5 Reading a Recipe Data Record from the PLC .......................................................................... 313
10.7.6 Transferring a Recipe Data Record to the PLC ........................................................................ 314
10.8 Exporting Recipe Data Records on the TP 177B and OP 177B............................................... 315
10.9 Importing Recipe Data Records on the TP 177B and OP 177B ............................................... 316
11 Maintenance and care ........................................................................................................................... 317
11.1 Maintenance and Service.......................................................................................................... 317
11.1.1 Maintenance and care............................................................................................................... 317
11.1.2 Clean screen on the TP 177A and TP 177B 6" ........................................................................ 318
11.1.3 Protective Membrane ................................................................................................................ 318
11.1.4 Protective covers on the TP 177A and TP 177B 6" .................................................................. 319
11.2 Service and spare parts ............................................................................................................ 323
12 Specifications ........................................................................................................................................ 325
12.1 Dimension drawings of the TP 177B 4" .................................................................................... 325
12.2 Dimension drawings of the TP 177A and TP 177B 6" .............................................................. 326
12.3 Dimension Drawings of the OP 177B ....................................................................................... 327
12.4 Specifications of the TP 177A................................................................................................... 328
12.5 Technical specifications of the TP 177B 4"............................................................................... 329
12.6 Technical specifications of the TP 177B 6"............................................................................... 330
12.7 Specifications of the OP 177B .................................................................................................. 331
12.8 Description of the Interfaces ..................................................................................................... 332
12.8.1 Power Supply ............................................................................................................................ 332
12.8.2 X10/IF 1B (RS 422/RS 485)...................................................................................................... 332
12.8.3 X20 (USB) ................................................................................................................................. 333
12.8.4 X1 (PROFINET) ........................................................................................................................ 333
A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 335
A.1 ESD Guidelines......................................................................................................................... 335
A.2 System Alarms .......................................................................................................................... 337
B Abbreviations......................................................................................................................................... 363
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 365
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 371

Overview 1
1.1 Product Overview
Advanced applications with the Touch Panels TP 177A, TP 177B and OP 177B
The 177 series of panels represents a further advance in the development of the well-known
170 HMI devices. The new TP 177A, TP 177B and OP 177B panels make for more efficient
use of text or graphic-based projects for simple to medium level HMI operating and
monitoring tasks in machines and plants. Projects with Asian and Cyrillic character sets can
be configured, as usual. The ability to vertically mount the TP 177A and the non-volatile
alarm buffer of the TP 177B offer new application possibilities. In addition, the TP 177B and
OP 177B – depending on the models – provide interfaces for connecting to PROFIBUS and
PROFINET.
The TP 177B 4" features a 4.3" TFT display with wide-screen format. This display extends
the visible area on the HMI device by approximately 25 % compared to similar displays with
4:3 format. The HMI device also features four function keys with tactile feedback.
In combination with the intuitive touch operation, it offers maximum operating efficiency.
In addition to MMC cards, the TP 177B 4" supports SD cards and USB memory sticks.
OP 177B offers an additional feature. It can now be operated using widely-available touch
screens in addition to the membrane keyboard. The function keys can be configured to
system keys for specific screens.
The TP 177A, TP 177B and OP 177B panels offer quick commissioning times, large user
memory and high performance, and they are optimized for projects based on WinCC flexible.

Overview
1.2 Design of the TP 177A HMI Device
1.2 Design of the TP 177A HMI Device
Front view and side view
① Opening caused by design - not a slot for a memory card

② Display / touch screen
③ Mounting seal
④ Mounting clamp recess
Bottom view

Overview
1.3 Design of the TP 177B 6" HMI device
Rear view

① Opening caused by design - not a slot for a memory card

② Rating label
③ DIP switch
④ Interface name
① Slot for a MultiMedia card

③ Mounting seal
④ Mounting clamp recess

Overview
Bottom view of a TP 177B 6" DP
Bottom view of a TP 177B 6" PN/DP
Rear view


② Rating label
③ DIP switch
④ Interface name

Overview
① Display / touch screen

② Slot for a MultiMedia / Secure Digital card
③ Recess for mounting clamps
④ Mounting seal
Bottom view

① Interfaces
② Recess for mounting clamps

Overview
1.5 Design of the OP 177B HMI Device
Rear view
① Slot for a MultiMedia / Secure Digital card

② Rating label
③ DIP switch
④ Interface name

③ Recesses for mounting clamps
④ Mounting seal

Overview
Bottom view of an OP 177B DP
Bottom view of an OP 177B PN/DP
Rear view


② Rating label
③ DIP switch
④ Interface name

Overview
1.6 Accessories
1.6 Accessories
Accessory kit
The accessory kit contains the following:
● For the power supply: a plug-in terminal strip
● To install the TP 177A, TP 177B 6", and the OP 177B: Plastic mounting clamps
● For the installation of the TP 177B 4": Metal mounting clamps
Additional documents may be enclosed with the accessory kit.
1.7 Miscellaneous
RS 422 / RS 232 converter

The converter is required to connect a SIMATIC S5 controller and controllers from other
manufacturers. Connect the RS 422-RS 232 converter to the RS 422 / RS 485 interface.
The converter converts the input signals to RS-232 signals.
The converter is not part of the scope of delivery of the HMI device. The converter can be
ordered separately using order number 6AV6 671-8XE00-0AX0.
PC / PPI cable
You need the PC / PPI cable for TP 177A, TP 177B 6" and OP 177B to update the operating
system by resetting it to the factory settings. In addition, with TP 177B and OP 177B you can
use the cable for transferring purposes. Connect the PC/PPI cable to the RS 422/RS 485
interface. The cable converts the input signals to RS-232 signals.
The cable is not included the scope of delivery for the HMI device. The cable can be ordered
separately under the order number 6ES7 901-3CB30-0XA0.
Note
If the connection fails during the operating system update, set the system to a lower bit rate.
If you use a higher bit rate, you must use the PC / PPI cable release 3 or higher.
The version code is printed on the cable (e.g., "E stand 3" corresponds to version 3).
90° elbow adapter

If space is limited, e.g. to install the TP 177A in vertical format, you can use an elbow
adapter at the RS 422 / RS 485 interface.
The adapter is not part of the scope of delivery of the HMI device. The adapter can be
ordered separately with order number 6AV6 671-8XD00-0XA0.

Overview
1.8 Functional scope with WinCC flexible
PROFIBUS bus connector

We recommend using straight PROFIBUS bus connectors. The connectors are not included
in the scope of supply for the HMI device. The connectors can be ordered separately with
order number 6GK1 500-0FC10.
Memory card
Only use SD memory cards or MultiMediaCards tested and approved by Siemens AG for the
respective HMI device.
Protective foil
Protective foil is available for the HMI devices. Suitable protective foil can be ordered
separately under the following order numbers:
● TP 177A, TP 177B 6", OP 177B: Order number 6AV6 671-2XC00-0AX0
● TP 177B 4": Order number 6AV6 671-2EC00-0AX0
Protective cover set

A protective cover set can be ordered for the TP 177A and TP 177B 6" HMI devices with the
order number 6AV6 574-1AE00-4AX0.
General
The following tables show the objects which can be integrated in a project for a TP 177A,
TP 177B and OP 177B.
Note
The specified values are maximum values for the respective objects. It is not possible to use
the maximum values for all objects because the available memory of the HMI device is
limited. For additional information on calculation of the system limits see the WinCC flexible
online help.

Overview
Alarms
Object Specification TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B

Alarm Number of discrete alarms 1000 2000
Number of analog alarms 15 50
Length of the alarm text 80 characters
Number of tags in an alarm Max. 8
Display Alarm view,
Alarm window
Acknowledge single error alarms Yes
Acknowledge several error alarms Yes 16 acknowledgment groups
simultaneously
(group acknowledgement)
Edit alarm Yes
Alarm indicator Yes
Alarm buffer Memory characteristics Volatile Non-volatile
Alarm buffer capacity 256 alarms
Simultaneously queued alarm Max. 64
events
View alarm Yes
Delete alarm buffer Yes
Print alarm line by line No Yes
Tags, Values, Lists and Calculation Functions

Tag Number 500 1000
Limit monitoring Input/Output Yes
Linear scaling Input/Output Yes
Text List Number 300
Screens

Screen Number 250 500
Fields per screen 30 50
Tags per screen 30 50
Complex objects per screen 5
(e.g. bars)
Template Yes

Overview
Recipes

Recipe Number 5 100
Data Records per Recipe 20 200
Entries per Recipe 20 200
Recipe screens No Yes
Info texts

Infotext Length (no. of characters) 320
For alarms Yes
For screens Yes
For screen objects (e.g. IO fields) Yes
Additional functions

Screen settings Touch screen calibration Yes
Contrast setting 1) Yes
Brightness setting2) Yes
Screen saver - Yes
Language change Number of languages 5 16
Graphic object Vector and pixel graphics Yes
Trend views Number 25 50
Trends per view Number 4 8
Task Planner Number of tasks - 10
Text object Number 1000 2500
Security Number of Users 100 50
1) not with TP 177B 4"
2) not with TP 177B 4"

Overview
1.9 Software options
1.9 Software options

The following software options are available for the TP 177B and the OP 177B:
● WinCC Flexible/Sm@rtService
The Sm@rtService option enables you to access a remote HMI device from the
HMI device or PC via Ethernet.
● WinCC Flexible/Sm@rtAccess
The Sm@rtAccess option enables you to set up communication between different
HMI systems.
The following software options are available for the TP 177B 4":
● Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) with USB support
When interfacing an uninterruptible power supply, the HMI device is shut down in a
controlled manner after a buffer time in the event of a power failure. The TP 177B 4"
supports SITOP DC UPS modules connected via the USB port.
1.10 Communication Using the TP 177A
Number of Connections
Interconnection TP 177A
Number with MPI/PROFIBUS DP 4 (on the same bus)
Siemens Controllers
The following table shows the Siemens controllers and protocols or profiles that can be used.
Controller Protocol/Profile TP 177A

SIMATIC S7-200 PPI yes
MPI 1) yes
SIMATIC S7-300/400 MPI yes
PROFIBUS DP up to 1.5 Mbps yes
PROFIBUS DP up to 12 Mbps no
1) If you require a baud rate of 9.6 Kbps, use the "DP" profile in WinCC flexible

Overview
1.11 Communication Using the TP 177B and OP 177B
Number of Connections
Interconnection TP 177B OP 177B

Number using a point-to-point connection 1
Number using a bus connection 4 on the same bus
Siemens Controllers
The following table shows the Siemens controllers and protocols or profiles that can be used.
Controller Protocol/Profile TP 177B 4" TP 177B 6" TP 177B 6" OP 177B OP 177B
PN/DP DP PN/DP DP PN/DP
SIMATIC MPI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
S7-300/400 PROFIBUS DP up to Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
12 Mbps Yes No Yes No Yes
PROFINET
SIMATIC S5 PROFIBUS DP up to Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
12 Mbps
SIMATIC S7-200 PPI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
MPI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
PROFIBUS DP CPU 215 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
PROFIBUS DP standard Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
SIMATIC 500/505 NITP Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes 1) Yes Yes
PROFIBUS DP up to Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
12 Mbps
1) PROFINET IO must be locked.

Overview
Third-party controllers
The following table shows controllers of other manufacturers and protocols or profiles that
can be used.
Controller Protocol
Allen-Bradley • DF1 1) 3) 4) 6)
PLC series SLC500, SLC501, SLC502, SLC503, SLC504, • DH+ via DF1 gateway
SLC505, MicroLogix (KF2 module) 2) 3) 4) 6)
• DH485 via DF1 gateway
(via KF3 module)3) 4) 6)
• DH485
Allen Bradley • DF1 4) 6)
PLC series PLC 5/11, PLC5/20, PLC 5/30, PLC 5/40, PLC 5/40L, • DH+ via DF1 gateway
PLC 5/60, PLC 5/60L, PLC 5/80 (KF2 module) 3) 4) 6)
Allen Bradley • Ethernet/IP 5)
PLC series ControlLogix 5500 (with 1756-ENBT) and
CompactLogix 5300 (1769-L32E and 1769-L35E)
GE Fanuc Automation SNP 4) 6)
PLC series 90-30, 90-70, 90-Micro
LG Industrial Systems (Lucky Goldstar)/IMO Dedicated communication 4) 6)
PLC series GLOFA-GM/G4, G6, G7M
Mitsubishi Electric FX (Mitsubishi PG) 4) 6)
PLC series MELSEC FX, MELSEC FX0
Mitsubishi Melsec Protocol 4 4) 6)
PLC series FX, A, Ans, Q, QnAS
Modicon (Schneider Automation)
PLC series Modicon 984, TSX Quantum and TSX Compact • Modbus RTU 3) 4) 6)
PLC series Quantum, Momentum, Premium und Micro
PLC series Compact and 984 via Ethernet bridge • Modbus TCP/IP (Ethernet) 5)
OMRON Hostlink/Multilink
PLC series SYSMAC C, SYSMAC CV, SYSMAC CS1, (SYSMAC Way) 4) 6)
SYSMAC alpha, CP
Telemecanique Uni-Telway 4) 6)
PLC series:
• TSX 7 with P47 411
• TSX 7 with P47/67/87/107 420
• TSX 7 with P47/67/87/107 425
• Module TSX SCM 21.6 with the aforementioned TSX 7 CPUs
• TSX 17 with module SCG 1161
• TSX 37 (Micro)
• TSX 57 (Premium)
1) Applies to controllers SLC503, SLC504, SLC505, MicroLogix

2) Applies to controllers SLC504, via DF1.
3) Only with converter RS 422-RS 232 6AV6 671-8XE00-0AX0 (Option)
4) PROFINET IO must be locked.
5) Not approved for TP 177B 6" DP or OP 177B DP
6) Deactivate the "Remote Control" check box under "Channel 1" in the "Transfer Settings".

Safety Instructions and General Notes
2.1 Safety Information
Safety Instructions and General Notes 2

2.1 Safety Information
Working on the cabinet
WARNING
Open equipment
The HMI device is an open equipment. This means that the HMI device may only be
installed in cubicles or cabinets, whereby the device can be operated from the front panel.
Access to the cubicle or cabinet in which the HMI device is installed should only be possible
by means of a key or tool and for personnel who have received instruction or are
authorized.
Danger, high voltage
Opening the cabinet will expose high voltage parts. Contact with these parts could be fatal.
Switch off the power supply to the cabinet before opening it.
Hazardous areas
When operating the HMI device in hazardous areas the following warning applies.
WARNING
Explosion Hazard
Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known to be non-hazardous.
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2.
High frequency radiation
NOTICE
Unintentional operating situations
High frequency radiation, from mobile phones for example, can cause unintentional
operating situations.

2.2 Standards and Approvals
Valid certifications
CAUTION
Valid certifications
The overview below provides information on available certifications.
The HMI device itself is certified as shown on the label on its rear panel.
CE Certification
The automation system meets the general and safety-related requirements of the following
EC directives and conforms to the harmonized European standards (EN) for programmable
logic controllers published in the official gazettes of the European Union:
● 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
● 94/9/EC "Equipment and Protective Systems Intended for Use in Potentially Explosive
Atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive)
EC Declaration of Conformity
The EC Declarations of Conformity are available to the relevant authorities at the following
address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Industry Sector
I IA AS RD ST PLC
P.O. Box 1963
D-92209 Amberg

UL approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. conforming to

● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 142, (Process Control Equipment)
or
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. conforming to

● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 142, (Process Control Equipment)
● UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
● CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
Approved for use in
● Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D or
● Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC or
● non-hazardous locations
FM Approval
FM
APPROVED
Factory Mutual Research (FM) conforming to

● Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
Approved for use in
● Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4
● Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Ex Certification
The following certifications apply to the HMI device in accordance with
● EN 60079-0:2006
● EN 60079-15:2005
● EN 61241-1:2004
● IEC 61241-0:2004+Cor.2005
valid:
II 3 G Ex nA II Tx
II 3 D Ex tD A22 IP6X T xx °C
x ... Temperature values, see EU design examination certificate
The EU design examination certificates are available on the Internet at

"http://support.automation.siemens.com".
The table below describes the test numbers of the HMI device classes.
Manufacturer site HMI device class Test number

Siemens AG 177 KEMA 04ATEX1297X
Industry Sector
Werner-von-Siemens-Strasse 50
D92224 Amberg
Germany
Label for Australia
N117
The HMI device fulfills the requirements of standard AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).
IEC 61131
The HMI device fulfills the requirements and criteria conforming to IEC 61131-2,
Programmable Logic PLCs, Part 2: Operating resource requirements and tests.

2.3 Notes about Usage
Use in Industrial Environments

The HMI device is designed for industrial use. It conforms to the following standards:
● Requirements for unintentional emissions EN 61000-6-4: 2007
● Requirements for interference immunity DIN EN 61000-6-2:2005
Use in Residential Areas
Note
The HMI device is not suitable for use in residential areas. If you use the HMI device in
residential areas, the radio/TV reception may be impeded.
If the HMI device is used in residential areas, you must take measures to achieve limit
class B conforming to EN 55011 for RF interference.
A suitable measure for achieving the required RF interference level for limit class B includes
for example:
● Use of filters in electrical supply lines
Individual acceptance is required.
Use in Potentially Explosive Atmosphere, Zones 2 and 22.
CAUTION
The following overview shows possible certifications.
The HMI device itself is certified as shown on the label on its rear panel.
DANGER
Explosion hazard
Operate the HMI device in a potentially explosive zone 2 atmosphere only if it has been
approved and certified for such environments.
WARNING
Personal Injury and Property Damage Can Occur
Personal injury and property damage can occur in potentially explosive atmospheres if an
electric plug is disconnected from the HMI device while the system is in operation.
In potentially explosive atmospheres, always turn off power to the HMI device before
disconnecting any connectors.

Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Zones 2 and 22

Potentially explosive atmospheres are classified by zones. The zones are classified
according to the probability of the presence of an explosive atmosphere.
Zone Explosion hazard Example

2 Explosive gas atmospheres occur Areas around flanged pipe joints with flat
seldom and briefly gaskets in closed rooms
22 Explosive dust atmospheres -
occur seldom and briefly
Safe zone No • Outside zone 2
• Outside zone 22
• Standard applications for distributed IO
Approval
The following certifications apply to the HMI device in accordance with
● EN 60079-0:2006
● EN 60079-15:2005
● EN 61241-1:2004
● IEC 61241-0:2004+Cor.2005
valid:
II 3 G Ex nA II Tx
II 3 D Ex tD A22 IP6X T xx °C
x ... Temperature values, see EU design examination certificate
The EU design examination certificates are available on the Internet at

"http://support.automation.siemens.com".
The table below describes the test numbers of the HMI device classes.
Manufacturer site HMI device class Test number

Siemens AG 177 KEMA 04ATEX1297X
Industry Sector
Werner-von-Siemens-Strasse 50
D92224 Amberg
Germany

Operating conditions for Zones 2 and 22

● The HMI device must be installed in some form of enclosure. In accordance with
EN 60529, the enclosure must guarantee the following:
– Protection type IP54 or higher for zone 2
– Protection type IP5x or higher for zone 22
Installation must ensure that at least IP65 degree of protection is given
(according to EN 60529).
Make allowances for the ambient conditions under which you install the HMI device.
A manufacturer declaration must be provided for the enclosure in accordance with
EC directive 94/9, stating that it is fit for purpose.
Follow the operating instructions to ensure that the protection type on the front panel
is guaranteed.
● The ambient temperature range is 0 °C ≤ T ≤ 50 °C. Under these conditions, the
HMI device will satisfy temperature class Tx for category 3G and support a maximum
surface temperature of xx °C for category 3D. (x ... temperature values, see design
examination certificate).
Refer to the operating instructions for details of limitations resulting from the ambient
temperature range.
● In situations where the temperature on the cable at the cable inlet of this enclosure
exceeds 70 °C, or where the temperature on the wire branching point exceeds 80 °C
under operating conditions, the temperature specifications of the cables must match the
actually measured temperatures.
● Put measures in place to ensure the rated voltage is not exceeded.
Any transient interference voltages above the rated value must not exceed 40 %.
● The HMI device should be protected from mechanical loads > 4 J or > 2 J in the region of
the display.
● Ensure that the atmosphere is not explosive during servicing.
Measures that impair or remove the protection type of the HMI device are not permitted
while the system is in operation.
● If the HMI device was dismantled, check the mounting seal for damage before
reassembling the HMI device. A damaged, porous or used mounting seal no longer
meets the requirements of the protection type. In this case, the mounting seal must be
replaced.
● Turn the HMI device off if any cracks appear in the front coating, holes are damaged or
the front coating starts to peel off.
Exchange the HMI device. Restart the system again after the device has been
exchanged.

2.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility
Repairs
The HMI device is maintenance-free. In case of repair, the HMI device must be shipped to
the Return Center in Fürth. The HMI device may only be repaired there. The address is:
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Returns Center
Siemensstrasse 2
90766 Fürth
Germany
Additional Information
Please also observe the product information "Use in potentially explosive atmospheres,
zones 2 and 22."
The product information is located on the mini CD that is enclosed with the HMI device
upon delivery.
Approval
Note
HMI devices with approval to II 3G Ex nA II T4 may only be used on SIMATIC systems of
device category 3.
Introduction
The HMI device fulfills requirements of the EMC directive of the domestic European market
and other requirements.
EMC-compliant mounting of HMI devices

EMC-compliant mounting of the HMI device and the use of interference-proof cables will
ensure trouble-free operation. The "Directives for Interference-free installation of PLCs" and
the "PROFIBUS Networks" manual also apply for the installation of the HMI device.

Pulse-shaped Interference
The following table shows the EMC properties of the modules with respect to pulse-shaped
interference. The HMI device must fulfill the specifications and directives relating to electrical
installation as a basic prerequisite.
Pulse-shaped Tested with Corresponds to test

interference intensity
Electrostatic discharge Air discharge: 8 kV 3
conforming to Contact discharge: 6 kV
IEC 61000-4-2
Burst pulses 2 KV power cable 3
(high-speed transient 2 KV signal cable, > 30 m
interference) 1 KV signal cable, < 30 m
conforming to
IEC 61000-4-4
High-power surge pulses conforming to IEC 61000-4-5, external protective circuit required
(refer to the manual, Programmable Controller S7-300, Installation,
chapter "Lightning and Overvoltage Protection").
• Asymmetric coupling 2 kV power cable 3
DC voltage with protective elements
2 KV signal/data cable, > 30 m,
with protective elements as required
• Asymmetric coupling 1 kV power cable 3
DC voltage with protective elements
1 KV signal cable, > 30 m,
with protective elements as required
Sinusoidal Interferences
The table below shows the EMC properties of the modules as they relate to sinusoidal
interference. The HMI device must fulfill the specifications and directives relating to electrical
installation as a basic prerequisite.
Sinusoidal interference Test values Corresponds to test

intensity
RF interference 3
(electromagnetic fields)
• Conforming to 80% amplitude modulation at 1 kHz
IEC 61000-4-3 with 10 V/m in the range of 80 MHz to 1 GHz
with 3 V/m in the range 1.4 GHz to 2 GHz
• Conforming to with 1 V/m the range 2 GHz to 2.7 GHz
IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m with 50% pulse modulation at 900 MHz
10 V/m with 50% pulse modulation at 1.89 GHz
RF interference current Test voltage 10 V, with 80% amplitude modulation 3
on cables and cable of 1 kHz in the 10 MHz to 80 MHz range
shielding conforming to
IEC 61000-4-6

2.5 Transport and Storage Conditions
Emission of Radio Interference

Emission of electromagnetic interference conforming to 55011,
Limit value class A, Group 1, measured at a distance of 10 m:
From 30 to 230 MHz < 40 dB (V/m) quasi-peak

From 230 to 1000 MHz < 47 dB (V/m) quasi-peak
Additional Measures
Before you connect an HMI device to the public electricity supply, ensure that it is compliant
with Limit Class B conforming to 55022.
2.5 Transport and Storage Conditions
Mechanical and Climatic Transport and Storage Conditions

The transport and storage conditions of this HMI device exceed requirements conforming to
IEC 61131-2. The following specifications apply to the transport and storage of an
HMI device in its original packing.
The climatic conditions comply to the following standards:
● IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3K7 for storage
● IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2K4 for transport
The mechanical requirements are compliant with EC 60721-3-2, Class 2M2.
Type of Condition Permissible range
Drop test (in transport package) ≤1m
Temperature from –20 to +60° C
Air pressure from 1080 to 660 hPa,
corresponds to an elevation of -1000 to 3500 m
Relative humidity from 10 to 90% without condensation
Sinusoidal vibration conforming to 5 to 8.4 Hz: 3.5 mm
IEC 60068-2-6 8.4 Hz to 150 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Shock conforming to IEC 60068-2-29 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks
NOTICE
Ensure that no condensation (dewing) develops on or inside the HMI device after
transporting it at low temperatures or after it has been exposed to extreme temperature
fluctuations.
The HMI device must have acquired room temperature before it is put into operation.
Do not expose the HMI device to direct radiation from a heater in order to warm it up.
If dewing has developed, wait approximately four hours until the HMI device has dried
completely before switching it on.
Prerequisite for the trouble-free and safe operation of the HMI device is proper transport and
storage, installation and assembly and careful operation and maintenance.
Warranty for the HMI device is deemed void if these specifications are ignored.

Planning Use 3
3.1 Mounting Information
Mechanical and Climatic Conditions of Use

The HMI device is intended for installation in weatherproof permanent locations.
The conditions of use are compliant with requirements to DIN IEC 60721-3-3:
● Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
● Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)
Use with Additional Measures

Examples of applications where the use of the HMI device requires additional measures:
● In locations with a high degree of ionizing radiation
● In locations with extreme operating conditions resulting from situations such as
the following:
– Corrosive vapors, gases, oils or chemicals
– Electrical or magnetic fields of high intensity
● In plants requiring special monitoring features, for example:
– Elevator systems
– Systems in especially hazardous rooms
Mechanical ambient conditions

The mechanical ambient conditions for the HMI device are specified in the following table in
terms of sinusoidal vibration.
Frequency range Constant Intermittent

in Hz
10 ≤ f ≤ 58 Amplitude 0.0375 mm Amplitude 0.075 mm
58 ≤ f ≤ 150 Constant acceleration 0.5 g Constant acceleration 1 g

Planning Use
3.1 Mounting Information
Reduction of Vibration
If the HMI device is subjected to greater shocks or vibrations, you must take appropriate
measures to reduce acceleration or amplitudes.
We recommend fitting the HMI device to vibration-absorbent material (on metal shock
absorbers, for example).
Testing for Mechanical Ambient Conditions

The following table provides information on the type and scope of tests for mechanical
ambient conditions.
The check Test standard Comments

includes
Vibrations Vibration test conforming to Type of vibration:
IEC 60068, part 2–6 Transitional rate of the frequency:
(sinusoidal) 1 octave/minute.
10 ≤ f ≤ 58,
Constant amplitude 0.075 mm
58 ≤ f ≤ 150,
Constant acceleration 1 g
Vibration duration:
10 frequency cycles per axis in each of the
three axes vertical to each other
Shock Shock testing in accordance Type of shock: half sine
with IEC 60068, Part 2 –29 Shock intensity:
Peak value 15 g, duration 11 ms
Direction of impact:
3 shocks in ± direction of axis in each of the
three axes vertical to each other
Climatic ambient conditions

The HMI device may be used under the following climatic ambient conditions:
Ambient conditions Permissible range Comments

Temperature See the "Mounting positions and type
• Vertical installation 0 to 50° C of fixation" section
• Inclined mounting 0 to 40° C
Relative humidity 10 to 90% Without condensation, corresponds to
a relative humidity, stress class 2
conforming to IEC 61131, part 2
Air pressure 1080 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an elevation of
-1000 to 2000 m
Pollutant concentration SO2: < 0.5 vpm; Check: 10 vpm; 4 days
Relative humidity < 60 %,
no condensation
H2S: < 0.1 vpm; Check: 1 vpm; 4 days
relative humidity < 60 %,
no condensation

Planning Use
3.2 Mounting Positions and Fixation
Mounting position
The HMI device is designed for mounting in racks, cabinets, control boards and consoles.
In the following, all of these mounting options are referred to by the general term "cabinet".
The HMI device is self-ventilated and approved for vertical and inclined mounting in
stationary cabinets.
– +

Mounting position Deviation from the vertical

① Inclined ≤ –35°
② Vertical 0°
③ Inclined ≤ 35°
CAUTION
Impermissible ambient temperatures
Do not operate the HMI device without auxiliary ventilation if the maximum permissible
ambient temperature is exceeded. The HMI device may otherwise get damaged and its
certifications and warranty will be void.

Planning Use
Horizontal mounting for TP 177A, TP 177B and OP 177B

When mounted horizontally, the cable inlets are located at the bottom.
Vertical mounting for TP 177A

When mounted vertically, the cable inlets are located on the right.
Securing the TP 177A, TP 177B 6" and OP 177B

Plastic mounting clamps are provided for mounting the device. The mounting clamps
hook into recesses on the HMI device. The overall HMI device dimensions are not
exceeded by this.

① Hook
② Cross-tip screw

Planning Use
3.3 Preparing for Mounting
Securing the TP 177B 4"

Metal mounting clamps are provided for mounting. The mounting clamps hook into recesses
on the HMI device. The overall HMI device dimensions are not exceeded by this.

① Threaded stud
② Hook
Select the mounting location of the HMI device

Points to observe when selecting the mounting location:
● Position the HMI device so that it is not subjected to direct sunlight.
● Position the HMI device such that it is ergonomically accessible for the user. Choose a
suitable mounting height.
● Ensure that the air vents of the HMI device are not covered as a result of the mounting.
● Observe the permissible mounting positions for the HMI device.
Degrees of protection
The degrees of protection are only guaranteed when the following is observed for the
mounting cut-out:
● Material thickness at the mounting cut-out for IP65 degree of protection:
2 to 6 mm
● Material thickness at the mounting cut-out for NEMA 4X/NEMA 12 degree of protection
(indoor use only):
3 mm to 6 mm
● Permitted deviation from plane at the mounting cut-out: ≤ 0.5 mm
This condition must be fulfilled for the mounted HMI device.
● Permissible surface roughness in the area of the seal: ≤ 120 µm (Rz 120)

Planning Use
Dimensions of the mounting cut-out

The following table shows the dimensions of the mounting cut-out required.
Mounting cut-out TP 177A TP 177A vertical TP 177B 6" TP 177B 4" OP 177B
horizontal mounting Horizontal horizontal Horizontal
mounting mounting
Width 198+1 mm 142+1 mm 198+1 mm 123+1 mm 228+1 mm
Height 142+1 mm 198+1 mm 142+1 mm 99+1 mm 196+1 mm
Depth 50 mm 50 mm 50 mm 50 mm 55 mm
Maintaining clearances
The HMI device must be installed with the following clearances:
● 50 mm above and below the mounting cut-out for ventilation
● 15 mm to the right and left of the mounting cut-out for inserting the mounting clamps for
installation
● At least 10 mm clearance in addition to the depth of the HMI device is required at the rear
NOTICE
Ensure that the maximum ambient temperature is not exceeded when mounting the
device in a cabinet and especially in a closed enclosure.

Planning Use
3.4 Specifications for Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of Protection
3.4 Specifications for Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of

Protection
Test Coltages
Insulation resistance is demonstrated in the type test with the following test voltages
conforming to IEC 61131-2:
Circuits with a nominal voltage of Ue to other Test voltage

circuits or ground
< 50 V 500 V DC
Protection Class
Protection Class I conforming to IEC 60536, i.e. equipotential bonding conductor to profile
rail required!
Protection from foreign objects and water
Degree of protection conforming to Explanation

IEC 60529
Front When mounted:
• IP65
• NEMA 4X/NEMA 12 (indoor use only)
Rear IP20
Protection against touch with standard test fingers.
There is no protection against ingress by water.
The degree of protection provided by the front side can only be guaranteed when the
mounting seal lies completely against the mounting cut-out.
3.5 Nominal Voltages

The following table details the allowed rated line voltages and associated tolerance ranges.
HMI device Rated voltage Tolerance range

TP 177A, TP 177B 6", OP 177B +24 VDC 20.4 to 28.8 V (–15%, +20%)
TP 177B 4" +24 VDC 19.2 to 28.8 V (–20 %, +20 %)

Planning Use
3.5 Nominal Voltages

Installation and connection 4
4.1 Checking the package contents
Check the package contents for visible signs of transport damage and for completeness.
NOTICE
Damaged parts
Do not install parts damaged during shipment. In the case of damaged parts, contact your
Siemens representative.
The following is contained in the delivery:

● HMI device
● Accessory kit
The accessory kit contains the following:
– 1 terminal block for the power supply
– Mounting clamps for mounting the HMI device
Additional documents may be enclosed with the accessory kit.
Keep the supplied documentation in a safe place. The documentation belongs to the
HMI device and is required for subsequent commissioning.
4.2 Mounting the HMI Device
Requirement
All packaging components and protective foils should be removed from the HMI device.
You need the mounting clamps from the accessories kit for the installation. The mounting
seal must be available on the HMI device. If the mounting seal is damaged, order a
replacement seal. The mounting seal is part of the associated service pack.
Note
Plastic mounting clamps are enclosed in the TP 177A, TP 177B 6" and the OP177B.
Metal mounting clamps are included with the TP 177B 4".

Mounting clamps on the TP 177A and TP 177B 6"

Use a plastic mounting clamp on each side of the HMI device to secure it in the mounting
cut-out.
Mounting clamps TP 177B 4"

The recesses required to suspend the metal mounting clamps are marked with an arrow on
the back of the HMI device.
① Marking for position of a mounting clamp
To ensure one of the degrees of protection IP65 or NEMA 4, suspend the metal mounting
clamps in the marked recesses.
In each case use one metal mounting for the right, left and bottom, and two at the top.
Mounting clamps on the OP 177B

If IP65 or NEMA 4 degrees of protection are required for the OP 177B, the mounting clamps
must be installed as follows.
① Additionally required plastic mounting clamps for IP65 and NEMA 4 degrees of protection

Mounting
NOTICE
Always mount the HMI device according to the instructions in this manual.
Risk of guaranteed level of protection not being met
If the mounting seal is damaged or protrudes beyond the HMI device, the level of protection
is not ensured.
Check the fit of the mounting seal.
Note
Tighten the set screw or the cross-tip screw of the mounting clamps until the HMI device is
flush with the surface of the control cabinet. As an alternative, you can tighten the mounting
clamps using the following torque:
• Plastic mounting clamps: max. 0.15 Nm
• Metal mounting clamps: max. 0.2 Nm
Proceed as follows:
1. Check that the mounting seal is fitted on the HMI device.
Do not install the mounting seal turned inside out. This may cause leaks in the
mounting cut-out.
2. Insert the HMI device into the mounting cut-out from the front.
3. Insert a mounting clamp into the intended recesses on the HMI device.
Example: Inserting plastic mounting clamps Example: Inserting metal mounting clamps
on the TP 177A on the TP 177 4"
4. Tighten the mounting clamp using a threaded stud or a cross-tip screwdriver.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all mounting clamps.
6. Check the fit of the mounting seal.
If necessary, repeat steps 1 to 6.

4.3 Connecting the HMI Device
Result
The HMI device is mounted and the relevant level of protection is ensured at the front.
See also
Accessories (Page 22)
Requirement
● The HMI device must be mounted according to the specifications of these operating
instructions.
● Always use standard shielded cables.
Note
Connector on the TP 177B 4"
Use only straight connectors on the TP 177B 4". Angled connectors could conceal
neighboring ports.
You can find more information about this on the Internet at

"http://mall.automation.siemens.com".
Connection sequence
Connect the HMI device in the following sequence:
1. Equipotential bonding
2. Power supply
Perform a power-up test to ensure the power supply is connected with the
correct polarity.
3. PLC / configuring PC if needed
NOTICE
Connection sequence
Always follow the correct sequence for connecting the HMI device. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the HMI device.
Connecting the cables

When connecting the cables, ensure that the contact pins are not bent. Secure the
connectors with screws.
The pin assignment of the ports is described in the technical specifications.
See also
Safety Information (Page 29)

4.3.1 Interfaces on the TP 177A

The figure below shows the interfaces of the TP 177A HMI device.

① Chassis terminal for equipotential bonding

② Power supply connector
③ RS 422 / 485 interface (IF 1B)
See also
Power Supply (Page 332)
X10/IF 1B (RS 422/RS 485) (Page 332)
4.3.2 Interfaces on the TP 177B 4"

The figure below shows the interfaces of the TP 177B 4" HMI device.

① RS 422 / RS 485 port X10 / IF 1B

② Chassis terminal for equipotential bonding
③ PROFINET interface X1 P1
④ USB port X20
⑤ Power supply connector
You connect the PROFIBUS DP or MPI to the X10 / IF 1B port.
See also
Connecting the Power Supply (Page 55)
Connecting the Controller (Page 58)
X20 (USB) (Page 333)
X1 (PROFINET) (Page 333)

4.3.3 Interfaces on the TP 177B 6"

The figure below shows the interfaces of the TP 177B 6" HMI device.


③ RS 422 / 485 interface (IF 1B)
④ PROFINET connection (applies to TP 177B 6" PN/DP)
⑤ USB connection
See also
X10/IF 1B (RS 422/RS 485) (Page 332)
4.3.4 Interfaces on the OP 177B

The figure below shows the interfaces of the OP 177B HMI device.


③ RS -485/RS -422 interface (IF 1B)
④ PROFINET connection (applies to OP 177B PN/DP)
⑤ USB connection
See also
X10/IF 1B (RS 422/RS 485) (Page 332)

4.3.5 Connecting the Equipotential Bonding Circuit
Potential Differences
Differences in potential between spatially separated system parts can lead to high equalizing
currents over the data cables and therefore to the destruction of their interfaces.
This situation may arise if the cable shielding is terminated at both ends and grounded at
different system parts.
Potential differences may develop when a system is connected to different mains.
General Requirements for Equipotential Bonding

Potential differences must be reduced by means of equipotential bonding in order to ensure
trouble-free operation of the relevant components of the electronic system. The following
must therefore be observed when installing the equipotential bonding circuit:
● The effectiveness of equipotential bonding increases as the impedance of the
equipotential bonding conductor decreases or as its cross-section increases.
● If two system parts are connected to each other via shielded data lines with shielding
connected to the grounding/protective conductor on both sides, the impedance of the
additionally installed equipotential bonding cables may not exceed 10% of the shielding
impedance.
● The cross-section of a selected equipotential bonding conductor must be capable of
handling the maximum equalizing current. The best results for equipotential bonding
between two cabinets were achieved with a minimum conductor cross-section of 16 mm2.
● Use equipotential bonding conductors made of copper or galvanized steel. Establish a
large-surface contact between the equipotential bonding conductors and the
grounding/protective conductor and protect these from corrosion.
● Terminate the shielding of the data cable on the HMI device flush and near the
equipotential busbar using suitable cable clamps.
● Route the equipotential bonding conductor and data cables in parallel with minimum
clearance between these. See following wiring diagram.
NOTICE
Equipotential Bonding Conductor
Cable shielding is not suitable for equipotential bonding. Always use the prescribed
equipotential bonding conductors. The minimum cross-section of a conductor used for
equipotential bonding is 16 mm². When you install MPI and PROFIBUS DP networks,
always use cables with a sufficient crosssection since otherwise the interface modules
may be damaged or destroyed.

Wiring diagram

① Chassis terminal on the HMI device (example)

② Equipotential bonding conductor cross-section: 4 mm2
③ Cabinet
④ Equipotential bonding conductor cross-section: min. 16 mm2
⑤ Ground connection
⑥ Cable clip
⑦ Voltage bus
⑧ Parallel routing of the equipotential bonding conductor and data cable
See also
Electromagnetic Compatibility (Page 36)

4.3.6 Connecting the Power Supply
Wiring diagram
The figure below illustrates the connection between the power supply and the HMI device.
23%
73$
73%
73%
Note when connecting

The power terminal block is included in the assembly kit and is designed for conductors with
a maximum cross-section of 1.5 mm2.

Connecting the terminal block
NOTICE
Damage
The pressure of the screwdriver may damage the socket if the terminal strip is plugged into
the HMI device when you tighten the screws.
Only connect the wires when the plug-in terminal strip is withdrawn.
There are two types of plug-in terminal strips that can be used for the TP 177A, TP 177B
and OP 177B.
*1' *1'
9'& 9'&
Plug-in terminal strip, version 1 Plug-in terminal strip, version 2
Connect the power supply cables to the terminal strip as shown in the figure above. Ensure
that the lines are connected properly to the correct terminals. Refer to the label for the
contact pins on the rear of the HMI device.
Reverse polarity protection

The HMI device is equipped with a reverse polarity protection.

Connecting the power supply
CAUTION
Supply voltage
With the supply voltage, pay attention to a secure electrical separation. Always use power
supply modules that conform to IEC 364-4-41 or HD 384.04.41 (VDE 0100, Part 410).
Always use power supply modules that comply to SELV (Safety Extra-Low Voltage) and
PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) standards.
The power supply voltage must always be within the specified range to prevent
malfunctions on the HMI device.
Equipotential bonding
Connect the 24 V DC voltage to the GND conductor at a central connection point for
equipotential bonding. This ensures the GND supply for the HMI device.
See also
Interfaces on the TP 177A (Page 51)
Interfaces on the TP 177B 4" (Page 51)
Interfaces on the OP 177B (Page 52)

4.3.7 Connecting uninterruptible power supply on the TP 177B 4"
Wiring diagram
The following figure shows the connection between the uninterruptible power supply and
HMI device. The uninterruptible power supply is connected to the 24-V input and one of
USB ports of the HMI device.
When connected to the USB port of the HMI device, the following uninterruptible power
supplies are supported:
SITOP DC UPS modules as of a rated power value of 6 A, e.g. 6EP1931-2DC42.
8QLQWHUUXSWLEOHSRZHUVXSSO\836
73%
Note
Observe all the notes relating to connecting a power supply.
See also
4.3.8 Connecting the Controller
Wiring diagram
The figure below illustrates the connection between the HMI device and controller.
6,0$7,&6
56
73$

6,0$7,&6
352),1(7
7KLUGSDUW\
FRQWUROOHUV
5-
6,0$7,&6
56
6,0$7,&
56
7KLUGSDUW\
FRQWUROOHUV
5656
7KLUGSDUW\
56
FRQWUROOHUV
56
23%
73%ಯ
73%
NOTICE
Cables
Always use the approved cables to connect a SIMATIC S7 PLC.
Standard cables are available for the connection. You can find more information about this
on the Internet at "http://mall.automation.siemens.com".

Connecting PROFINET
NOTICE
Use a cross-cable for the PROFINET connection of the TP 177B 6" and the OP 177B when
using a point-to-point connection.
NOTICE
PROFINET IO is not capable of function
If you connect the HMI device directly to the controller, it could cause PROFINET IO
direct keys not to function properly. Connect the switch with a PROFINET cable to the
HMI device. For detailed instructions regarding the installation of PROFINET networks,
please refer to the PROFINET system description manual.
Only connect the HMI device to public Ethernet networks using a switch or
comparable device.
Configuring the RS-485 Interface

A DIP switch for the configuration of the RS -485 interface is located on the back side of the
HMI device.
In the factory state, the DIP switch is set for communication with the SIMATIC S7 controller.
Note
Note the diagrams of the DIP switch settings on the back of the HMI device.
The following table shows the settings of the DIP switch. The transmitting and receiving
directions will be switched over internally with the RTS signal.
Communication Switch setting Meaning

RS 485 No RTS on plug, for data transfer between PLC and
HMI device
21 (factory state)
RTS on pin 4, same as PLC,

for example, for commissioning
21
RTS on pin 9, same as programming device,

for example, for commissioning
21
RS 422 RS-422 port is active.
21

See also
4.3.9 Connecting a configuration PC
Wiring diagram
The figure below illustrates the connection between the HMI device and the configuration
PC. You can use this connection to transfer the image, the project and further project data.
3&
56
56 56
3& 56
56
73$

3&
86%
3&
5-
3&
56
56 56
3&
56
56
23%
73%
73%
Use a cross-cable for the Ethernet connection of the TP 177B 6" and the OP 177B when
You can use a standard cable for the Ethernet connection of the TP 177B 4", as this
HMI device has an automatic cross-over function.
The interfaces are described in the technical specifications.
For RS-485-RS-232 conversion, you can order the PC / PPI cable from Siemens AG using
order number 6ES7 901-3CB30-0XA0.

Configuring a PC / PPI cable

Use the DIP switches to configure the transfer rate of the PC / PPI cable.
Note
If the connection fails during the operating system update, set the system to a lower bit rate.
If you use a higher bit rate, you must use the PC / PPI cable release 3 or higher. The version
code is printed on the cable (e.g., "E stand 3" corresponds to version 3).

① DIP switch
② LEDs
Set the DIP switches 1 to 3 to the same bit rate as in WinCC flexible. DIP switches 4 to 8
must be set to "0".

① DIP switch
The following bit rates can be set:
Bit rate in kbit/s DIP switch 1 DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3

115.2 1 1 0
57.6 1 1 1
38.4 0 0 0
19.2 0 0 1
9.6 0 1 0
4.8 0 1 1
2.4 1 0 0
1.2 1 0 1
In the figure, the bit rate is set to 115.2 kbit/s.

NOTICE
USB connection sequence
Observe the following sequence when connecting by USB:
1. HMI device
2. PC
USB host-to-host cable
Use only the driver for the USB host-to-host cable that is included in the WinCC flexible
package. Never use the driver supplied with the USB host-to-host cable.
Updating the operating system
If there is no HMI device image on the HMI device or the HMI device image is corrupt,
the operating system can only be updated via the HMI device's RS 485 interface or the
PC / PPI cable.
See also

4.3.10 Connecting USB devices to TP 177B and OP 177B

You can connect the following devices to the USB port of the HMI device:
● External mouse
● External keyboard
● Printer
● USB memory stick
● Industrial USB Hub 4
Industrial USB hub 4 can be obtained using order number 6AV6671-3AH00-0AX0.
NOTICE
Functional problem with USB port
If you connect an external device with an independent power supply without equipotential
bonding to the USB port, you may experience functional problems.
Ensure a non-insulated installation.
Excessive rated load on port
A USB device with too high a power load may possibly cause functional problems.
Observe the values for the maximum load of the USB port. You will find the values in the
technical specifications.
See also
Specifications (Page 325)

4.3.11 Connecting printers to TP 177B and OP 177B
Wiring diagram
You can connect a printer as a peripheral.
86%
5-
23%
73%
73%

NOTICE
Only use cables with two-ended grounded metal braided shielding between the HMI device
and printer.
Use a cross-cable for the Ethernet connection of the TP 177B 6" and the OP 177B when
The list of current printers and required settings for HMI devices can be found on the Internet
under "http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/11376409".
NOTICE
Rated load of the USB port
Observe the values given in the specifications for the load on the USB port. Loads greater
than those specified may result in malfunctions in connected devices.
Note
Documentation for peripherals
Also, read the documentation provided with the printer before connecting it.
See also
Specifications (Page 325)

4.4 Switching on and Testing the HMI Device
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Connect the plug-in terminal strip on the HMI device.
2. Restart the power supply.
The display lights up after power on. A progress bar is displayed during startup.
If the HMI device does not start, it is possible the wires on the terminal block have been
crossed. Check the connected wires and change the connections if necessary.
The Loader opens once the operating system has started.
The HMI device automatically switches to "Transfer" mode during initial startup under the
following conditions:
– No project is loaded on the device.
– At least one data channel has been configured.
The following dialog appears:
3. Press "Cancel" to stop the transfer.

Result
The Loader appears again.
Note
When restarting the system, a project may already be loaded on the HMI device.
In this case, the project will then start after an adjustable delay or when you press the
"Start" button.
Use the relevant operator control object to close the project.
Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic.
Function test
Perform a function test following commissioning. The HMI device is fully functional when one
of the following states is indicated:
● The "Transfer" dialog is displayed.
● The Loader opens.
● A project is started.
Switching off the HMI Device

You have the following options for switching off the HMI device:
● Shut down the power supply.
● Disconnect the plug-in terminal strip on the HMI device.


Operator Controls and Displays 5
5.1 Front-side Operator Controls
Operating elements on the TP 177A and TP 177B 6"
① Display with touch screen
TP 177B 4" operating elements

② Function keys without LED

Operator Controls and Displays
5.1 Front-side Operator Controls
Operating elements on the OP 177B

② Function keys with LED
③ Function keys without LED
Touch screen
The standard input unit on the HMI device is the touch screen. All operator controls required
for operation are displayed on the touch screen once the HMI device has started.
CAUTION
Damage to the touch screen
Pointed or sharp objects can damage the plastic surface of the touch screen.
Always operate the touch screen with your fingers or with a touch pen only.
Triggering unintended actions
Touching several operator controls at the same time can trigger unintended actions.
Always touch only one operator control on the screen.

5.2 Connecting a memory card to the TP 177B 6" and OP 177B
Function keys
On the TP 177B 4" you can also use the function keys F1 to F4 for inputs.
Information can be also entered on the OP 177B using the function keys F1 to F14 and
K1 to K18.
The function assigned to a specific function key is defined during configuration. The function
keys have no function before a project has been opened.
NOTICE
Damage to the keyboard possible
Always use your fingers to operate the keys of your HMI device.
Using hard instruments to press the keys considerably reduces the service life of the key
mechanism.
See also
Design of the TP 177A HMI Device (Page 16)
Design of the TP 177B 4" HMI device (Page 19)
Design of the TP 177B 6" HMI device (Page 17)
Design of the OP 177B HMI Device (Page 20)
Approved memory cards

Only use MultiMediaCards tested and approved by Siemens AG for the respective
HMI device.
NOTICE
The SIMATIC S7 MultiMedia card can no longer be used
If you format a MultiMedia card for the SIMATIC S7 in the HMI device, this MultiMedia card
can no longer be used in the SIMATIC S7.
Only use MultiMedia cards that are approved for the HMI device.

Procedure - Inserting a memory card

Proceed as follows:
1. Insert the memory card into the relevant slot.
When inserting the memory card, please note that it can only be inserted in the slot when
the front side of the memory card is visible.
The following figure shows you how to insert the memory card, for example, in the
TP 177B 6".
1 Memory card interlock

2 Memory card
3 Memory card slot
2. Check that the memory card is properly seated.

If the memory card is inserted correctly in the memory card slot, the memory card lock
engages behind the memory card.
Using a memory card for the first time
NOTICE
Data loss
When requested by the HMI device to format a memory card for first time use, you should
save a backup copy of memory card data to a PC.
Proceed as follows to prevent data loss:

1. Cancel the formatting procedure by pressing "ESC".
2. Save a backup copy of vital data to a PC.
3. Format the memory card on the HMI device.
4. If you require on the HMI device data that has been saved on the PC, transfer the data
back to the memory card.
You can now transfer the backup data from the memory card to the HMI device.

Procedure – Ejecting a Memory Card
NOTICE
Loss of data possible
The data on the memory card is lost if you attempt to remove it while the HMI device is
accessing its data.
Do not remove the memory card while data is being accessed. Observe the corresponding
alarms on the screen.
The following figure shows you how to eject the memory card on the example of
the TP 177B.
① Eject button
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the ejection button.
This ejects the memory card out of the slot.
NOTICE
Do not force the ejector. This could damage its mechanism.
2. Unplug the memory card from the memory card slot.

3. Store the memory card in a safe place.

5.3 Insert a memory card in the TP 177B 4"
Approved memory cards

Only use SD memory cards or MultiMediaCards tested and approved by Siemens AG for the
respective HMI device.
NOTICE
The SIMATIC S7 MultiMedia card can no longer be used
If you format a MultiMedia card for the SIMATIC S7 in the HMI device, this MultiMedia card
can no longer be used in the SIMATIC S7.
Only use MultiMedia cards that are approved for the HMI device.
Procedure - Inserting a memory card

The memory card can be inserted during operation.
Proceed as follows:
1. Insert the memory card in the slot until it stops.
When inserting the memory card, please note that it can only be inserted in the slot when
the front side of the memory card is visible.
2. Check that the memory card is properly seated.

Using a memory card for the first time
NOTICE
Data loss
When requested by the HMI device to format a memory card for first time use, you should
save a backup copy of memory card data to a PC.
Proceed as follows to prevent data loss:

4. If you require on the HMI device data that has been saved on the PC, transfer the data
back to the memory card.
You can now transfer the backup data from the memory card to the HMI device.
Procedure – removing a memory card
NOTICE
The data on the memory card is lost if you attempt to remove it while the HMI device is
accessing its data.
Do not remove the memory card while data is being accessed. Observe the corresponding
alarms on the screen.
Proceed as follows:
1. Unplug the memory card from the memory card slot.
2. Store the memory card in a safe place.

5.4 Labeling function keys on the TP 177B 4" and OP 177B
Introduction
You can label the function keys as required for your project. Use labeling strips to do so.
NOTICE
Do not write on the keyboard to label the function keys.
Printing Labeling Strips

WinCC flexible comes with a range of labeling strip templates. You will find further
information regarding the location of the templates in the WinCC flexible online help.
Any printable and writable foil can be used as labeling strips. You can use transparency film,
the keyboard membrane of the HMI device is printed on the reverse side. Use transparent
foil so that the LEDs of the function keys can be seen. The permitted thickness of the
labeling strip is 0.15 mm. Paper should not be used as labeling strips.
Dimensions for the labeling strips of the the TP 177B 4"

[r

Dimensions for the labeling strips of the OP 177B

[r
ದ

[r
ದ


Procedure
Note
With TP 177B 4" the slots are located at the sides of the HMI device.
With OP 177B, the slots for the labeling strips are located on the bottom of the HMI device.
Proceed as follows:
1. Edit and then print the template.
You can also print out an empty template and later write on it by hand.
2. Spray the labeling strips with fixing spray.
The fixing spray ensures that the text is water resistant and does not smear, and that the
printer ink on the keyboard membrane does not run.
3. Cut out the labeling strip.
Ensure that the corners are cut according to the diagram shown above as this makes it
easier to slide them into the slot.
4. Remove any existing labeling strips.
Note
Wait for the printed labeling strips to dry before you insert them.
5. Slide the labeling strips ② into the slot ①.

Labeling strips on the Labeling strips on the

OP 177B TP 177B 4"
6. Slide the labeling strips into the slot up to the stop.

The labeling strips will protrude approximately 3 cm out of the slot. The template
dimensions for the labeling strips are designed so that the labeling is correctly placed for
the function keys. It is not necessary to secure the labeling strip.
When mounting the HMI device, ensure that the labeling strips do not become jammed
between the mounting cut-out and the HMI device.


Configuring the Operating System 6
6.1 Configuring the Operating System on the TP 177A
6.1.1 Overview
Loader
The figure below shows the Loader. It appears briefly when the HMI device starts up.
The Loader buttons have the following functions:

● Use the "Transfer" button to set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
● Press the "Start" button to open the project stored on the HMI device
● Press "Control Panel" to open the HMI device Control Panel
The Control Panel is used to configure various settings such as the transfer settings.
The loader also appears every time you close the project.

Configuring the Operating System
Protecting the Control Panel with a password

You can protect the Control Panel and taskbar from unauthorized access. Without a
password, you can still read the settings in the Control Panel, but you cannot change
all the settings.
This prevents inadvertent operations and increases security for the plant or machine
because the settings cannot be changed when a project is not open.
NOTICE
If the password is no longer available, you cannot change settings in the Control Panel and
taskbar unless you update the operating system.
All data on the HMI device will be overwritten when you update the operating system!
See also
Switching on and Testing the HMI Device (Page 68)
Changing the Password Settings (Page 89)
Configuring the Data Channel (Page 93)
6.1.2 Control Panel
6.1.2.1 Overview
Control Panel of the HMI Device

The HMI device Control Panel can be used to modify the following HMI device settings:
● Screen settings
● Transfer settings
Opening the Control Panel

Open the Control Panel using the HMI device Loader.
The following options are available to open the Loader:
● The Loader appears briefly after starting the HMI device.
● During runtime:
If configured, touch the relevant operator control object to stop the project. The Loader
opens. Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic.

Touch the "Control Panel" button in the Loader to open the HMI device Control Panel.
OP Changing screen settings, displaying information about HMI device, calibrating

the touch screen
Password Setting password protection for the Control Panel
MPI/DP settings Changing MPI/DP Settings
Screen saver Configuring the screen saver
Transfer Change transfer settings, configure the data channel
Procedure
Proceed as follows to change settings in the Control Panel:
1. You must exit the project before changing settings in the Control Panel. Use the relevant
operator control object provided in the project.
2. Open the Control Panel as described above.
3. Open the desired dialog by double-clicking on the corresponding icon in the
Control Panel.
4. To change settings, touch the respective input field or check box and use the displayed
screen keyboard if necessary. Enter the required password if the Control Panel is
protected against unauthorized access. Change the HMI device settings in the dialog.
5. Press or to close the dialog.
6. Press or to close the dialog.
7. Start the project using the Loader.

6.1.2.2 Changing Screen Settings
Requirement
The "OP Properties" dialog has been opened with the "OP" icon.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. From the "OP Properties" dialog, select the "Display" tab.
① Button for increasing the contrast

② Button for reducing the contrast
③ Setting the orientation of the screen
④ Input field for the startup delay on the HMI device
2. The buttons "UP" and "DOWN" are located in the "Contrast" group. Proceed as follows to
change contrast of the screen:
– Touch the "UP" button to increase the contrast of the screen
– Touch the "DOWN" button to decrease the contrast of the screen
3. The radio buttons "Landscape" and "Portrait" are located in the "Orientation" group.
Proceed as follows to change the orientation of the screen:
– Enable the "Landscape" radio button to orientate the screen of the HMI device
diagonally
– Enable the "Portrait" radio button to orientate the screen of the HMI device vertically
4. In the input field "Delay time", which is located in the "Startup Delay" group, set the delay
time for the startup of the HMI device. The delay time is the time in seconds that is waited
from the appearance of the loader until the start of the project.
With the value "0", the project starts immediately. It is then no longer possible to call the
loader after switching on the HMI device. In this case, an HMI device with the function
"End project" would have to be configured.
Valid value range is 0 s to 60 s.
5. Close the dialog and save your entries with . Touch to discard the entries

Result
The regional settings for the HMI device screen have now been changed
Screen orientation
The orientation of the screen has already been configured by the configuration engineer
when setting up the project. When transferring the project to the HMI device, a suitable
orientation of the screen is set automatically.
NOTICE
When a project is available on the HMI device, do not change the screen orientation
afterwards.
You can, for example, change the orientation of the screen in the Control Panel if you need
to operate the loader on a vertically mounted HMI device without a project.

6.1.2.3 Displaying Information about the HMI Device
Requirement
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "OP Properties" dialog and select the "Device" tab.

① HMI device name

② Size of the internal flash memory in which the HMI device image and project are stored
③ Version of the boot loader
④ Boot loader release date
⑤ Version of the HMI device image
2. The "Device" tab displays the HMI-device-specific information and is read-only.

You will need this information if you contact A&D Technical Support.
3. Use or to close the dialog when the information is no longer required.
Note
The size of the internal flash memory does not correspond to the available working
memory for a project.

6.1.2.4 Calibrating the Touch Screen
Introduction
Depending on the mounting position and viewing angle, it is possible that parallax may occur
when operating the HMI device. In order to prevent any operating errors as a result, calibrate
the touch screen again in the startup phase or during runtime.
Requirement
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "OP Properties" dialog, then select the "Touch" tab.
① If the HMI device does not react precisely to a touch, the touch screen may require
calibration.
② Button for calibrating the touch screen
2. Touch the "Recalibrate" button.

The following dialog appears.
&DUHIXOO\SUHVVDQGEULHIO\KROGVW\OXVRQWKHFHQWHURI
WKHWDUJHW5HSHDWDVWKHWDUJHWPRYHVDURXQGWKHVFUHHQ
① Carefully press the center of the calibration crosshairs. Repeat the process as long as the
calibration crosshairs move on the touch screen.
② Calibration crosshair

3. Briefly touch the calibration crosshairs.

The calibration crosshairs then goes to four more positions. Touch the center of the
calibration crosshairs for each position. If you do not touch the center of the calibration
crosshair, the procedure is repeated.
Once you have touched the calibration crosshairs for all positions, the following
dialog appears:
New calibration settings have been measured.

Tap the screen to register saved data.
Wait for 30 seconds to cancel saved data and
keep the current setting.
Time limit: 30 sec
① The new calibration values are measured. Touch the touch screen to save the calibration
values. If you do not touch the screen within 30 seconds, the new calibration values will be
discarded.
② Time remaining until the calibration values are discarded
4. Touch the screen within 30 seconds

The new calibration is saved. If you wait longer than 30 seconds, the new calibration is
discarded and the original calibration remains in effect.
5. Close the dialog with
The Control Panel is displayed.
Result
The HMI device touch screen is now recalibrated.

6.1.2.5 Display License Information
Requirement
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. From the "OP Properties" dialog, select the "License" tab.
The "License" tab displays the license information for the software of the HMI device.
6.1.2.6 Changing the Password Settings
Requirement
The "Password Properties" dialog has been opened with the "Password" icon.
① Input field for the password

② Input field for repeating the password

Procedure – entering a password

Proceed as follows:
1. Enter a password in the "Password" input field.
Touch the input field. The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed.
2. Repeat the password entry in the "Confirm Password" input field.
3. Close the dialog with .
NOTICE
Your password must not contain blank spaces or special characters * ? . % / \ ' ".
Result
The Control Panel is now protected against unauthorized access. Without entering a
password, you can read some settings but you cannot change them.
NOTICE
Procedure – deleting a password

Proceed as follows:
1. Delete the entries in the "Password" and "Confirm password" input fields.
Result
The password protection for the Control Panel has been removed.

6.1.2.7 Changing MPI/DP Settings
Requirement
The "MPI/DP - Transfer Settings" dialog has been opened with the
"MPI/DP Settings" icon.
① Bus address of the HMI device

② Data transmission rate
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the bus address for the HMI device in the "Address" input field
Touch the input field. The numerical screen keyboard is displayed.
2. Select the data transfer rate for communication in the "Baud rate" input field.
Touch the input field. The symbolic screen keyboard is displayed.
NOTICE
Address in the MPI / PROFIBUS DP network
The value specified in the "Address" input field should be used in an
MPI / PROFIBUS DP network just once.
Note
During the transfer of a project to the HMI device, the MPI / DP settings will be
overwritten with the values from the transferred project.
Result
The MPI / DP settings of the HMI device have been changed.

General information
NOTICE
Transfer mode using MPI / PROFIBUS DP
The bus parameters for MPI / PROFIBUS DP transfer, e.g. the MPI / PROFIBUS DP
address of the HMI device, will be read from the project currently loaded on the HMI device.
You can change the settings for MPI / PROFIBUS DP transfer. To do this, you must first
end the project and then change the settings on the HMI device. Then return to transfer
mode.
The HMI device uses the new MPI / PROFIBUS DP settings until you transfer another
project to it. During the transfer of a project to the HMI device, the MPI / PROFIBUS DP
settings will be overwritten with the values from the transferred project.
You can thus edit the MPI / DP settings for the TP 177A irrespective of the project settings.
Transfer settings
A project can only be transferred from the configuration PC to the HMI device when at least
one of the data channels is enabled on the HMI device.
Do not change the transfer settings if a project is running or the HMI device is in transfer
mode.
6.1.2.8 Setting the Screen Saver
Introduction
You can set a period of time for automatic activation of the screen saver on the HMI device.
The screen saver is automatically activated if the HMI device is not operated within the
specified period of time.
The screen saver switches off in the following cases:
● When you touch the touch screen.
● A message is displayed.
Requirement
The "Screen Saver Settings" dialog has been opened with the "Screen Saver" icon.

Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the number of minutes before the screen saver is to be activated.
Touch the input field. You can enter a value between 5 and 360 minutes. Entering "0"
deactivates the screen saver.
2. Close the dialog and save your entries with . Touch to discard the entries.
NOTICE
Activating the screen saver
You should always activate the screen saver. Otherwise, the screen contents may leave
a burn-in effect in the background if they appear too long.
This effect is reversible, however.
Result
The screen saver for the HMI device has now been set.
6.1.2.9 Configuring the Data Channel
Introduction
If you block all data channels, the HMI device is protected against unintentional overwriting
of the project data and HMI device image.
Requirement
The "Transfer Settings" dialog has been opened with the "Transfer" icon.
① Group for the data channel 1 (channel 1)

② Group for the data channel 2 (channel 2)
③ Button for the "MPI / DP Transfer Settings" dialog

Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Configure the data channel that you want to use.
You can clear the required data channel by activating the associated "Enable Channel"
check box in the "Channel 1" or "Channel 2" group. In the "Channel 1" group, the
RS 485 port is configured for the serial data transfer.
– Activate the "Enable Channel" check box to enable the data channel.
– Deactivate the "Enable Channel" check box to lock the data channel.
2. Automatically configure the transfer for the data channel 2.
– Deactivate the "Remote Control" check box to disable automatic transfer.
– Activate the "Remote Control" check box to enable automatic transfer.
WARNING
Unintentional transfer mode
Ensure that the configuration PC does not inadvertently switch the HMI device to
transfer mode during the open project. This could cause unintentional actions to be
triggered in the plant.
3. Using the "Advanced" button, go to the "MPI / DP - Transfer Settings" dialog where you
can change the MPI / DP settings
Close the "MPI / DP - Transfer Settings" dialog after changing the MPI / DP settings
with .
4. Close the "Transfer Settings" dialog and save your entries with to accept the entries.
Touch to discard the entries
Result
The data channel is configured.

General information
NOTICE
end the project and then change the settings on the HMI device. Then return to "Transfer"
mode.
During the transfer of a project to the HMI device, the MPI / DP settings will be overwritten
with the values from the transferred project.
Transfer settings
See also
Changing MPI/DP Settings (Page 91)

6.2 Configuring the operating system for TP 177B 6" and OP 177B
6.2.1 Overview
Loader
The figure below shows the Loader.

● Use the "Transfer" button to set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
The transfer mode can only be activated when at least one data channel has been
enabled for the transfer.
● Press the "Start" button to open the project stored on the HMI device.
● Press "Control Panel" to open the HMI device Control Panel
The Control Panel is used to configure various settings such as the transfer settings.
● Press the "Taskbar" button to activate the taskbar containing the open
Windows CE Start menu.

Password protection
You can protect the Control Panel and taskbar from unauthorized access. When password
protection is enabled, the message "password protect" is displayed in the Loader.
If the password is not entered, only the "Transfer" and "Start" buttons are operable.
This prevents inadvertent operations and increases security for the plant or machine
because the settings cannot be changed when a project is not open.
NOTICE
See also
Changing the Password Settings (Page 115)
Switching on and Testing the HMI Device (Page 68)
Configuring the Data Channel (Page 126)

6.2.2 Control Panel
6.2.2.1 Overview
Control Panel of the HMI Device

The settings you can make in the Control Panel of the HMI device include:
● Communication
● Date/time
● Screen saver
● Backup and restore
● Regional settings
● Delay time
● Password
Opening the Control Panel

Touch the "Control Panel" button in the Loader to open the HMI device Control Panel.
● Closing a Project
If configured, touch the relevant operator control object to stop the project. The Loader
opens. Refer to your plant documentation to find any additional information on this topic.

"Backup / Restore" Backing up and restoring the HMI device image and the project on
memory cards
"Communication Properties" Setting device names for network operation
"Date / Time" Setting the date and time of day on the HMI device
"InputPanel" Configuring the screen keyboard
"Keyboard" Setting the character repeat for the screen keyboard
"Mouse" Setting the double-click on the touch screen
"Network" Setting network parameters
"OP" Changing screen settings, displaying information about HMI device,
calibrating the touch screen
"Password" Setting password protection for the Control Panel
"Printer" Configuring printers
"Regional Settings" Making local region settings
"S7 Transfer Settings" Setting the transfer parameters for MPI / DP
"Screen Saver" Configuring the screen saver
"System" Displaying information about the operating system, processor and
memory
"Transfer" Configuring a data channel for the transfer
"WinCC Internet Settings" Parameters for using the Internet - for PN HMI devices only
Procedure
1. You must exit the project before changing settings in the Control Panel.
Use the provided operating element.
2. Open the Control Panel as described above.
3. Open the desired dialog by double-clicking on the corresponding icon in the
Control Panel.
Enter the required password if the Control Panel is protected against unauthorized
access.
4. Change settings for your HMI device in the Control Panel
To change settings, touch the respective input field or check box and use the displayed
screen keyboard if necessary.
5. Press or use the button to close the dialog.
6. Press the button or to close the Control Panel.
7. Start the project in the loader.

6.2.2.2 Input Using the Screen Keyboard
Introduction
A variety of screen keyboards are available to input information outside an open project,
for example in the Control Panel. A screen keyboard appears as soon as you touch an input
field. You can switch the screen keyboard and change its position on screen. Confirm your
entries with or discard your entries with . Either action closes the screen keyboard.
Screen Keyboard Outside an Open Project

● Numerical screen keyboard
● Alphanumerical screen keyboard
The alphanumerical keyboard has multiple levels.

1. Normal level
2. Shift level
3. Level on which the control keys are activated
The figure shows the normal level of the alphanumeric screen keyboard.
You can also reduce both screen keyboards:

Switching between Screen Keyboards

● switches between the alphanumerical and numerical screen keyboards
● switches between the normal level and Shift level of the alphanumerical
screen keyboard
● activates and deactivates the numerical and alphanumerical keys of the

alphanumerical screen keyboard
● switches from full display to reduced display
● switches from reduced display to full display
● closes the reduced display of the screen keyboard
Moving the Screen Keyboard on the Touch Screen

You can move the screen keyboard if it blocks you from operating a dialog in any way.
1. Touch .
Keep touch contact to move the screen keyboard on the touch screen. Release touch
contact on the icon when the required position is reached.
6.2.2.3 Configuring the Screen Keyboard
Introduction
In the Control Panel you can configure the screen keyboard that is used to make entries
outside an open project.
Requirement
The "Siemens HMI Input Panel - Options" dialog has been opened with the
"Input Panel" icon.
① Button for displaying the screen keyboard

② Button for saving the screen keyboard

Procedure
1. Touch the "Open Input Panel" button.
The screen keyboard is displayed.
The "Siemens HMI Input Panel – Options" dialog changes its appearance.
① Button for closing the screen keyboard

② Button for saving the screen keyboard
2. Touch the <Num> button of the screen keyboard two toggle between the numerical and
alphanumerical screen keyboard.
Set the position of the screen keyboard.
3. Touch the "Save" button to save the settings.
4. Touch the "Close Input Panel" button to close the screen keyboard.
5. Close the dialog with or .
Result
The screen keyboard settings have been modified.
See also
Input Using the Screen Keyboard (Page 100)

6.2.2.4 Setting the Character Repeat for the Screen Keyboard
Introduction
In the Control Panel you can set the character repeat for the screen keyboard that is used to
make entries outside an open project.
Requirement
The "Keyboard Properties" dialog has been opened with the "Keyboard" icon.
① Check box for activating the character repeat

② Slider control and buttons for the delay time before character repeat
③ Slider control and buttons for the rate of the character repeat
④ Test field
You can change the settings in the "Keyboard Properties" dialog with the buttons or the
slide bar.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Specify whether or not the character repeat of the keyboard should be activated
– Activate the "Enable character repeat" check box to enable the character repeat
– Deactivate the "Enable character repeat" check box to disable the character repeat
2. Use the buttons or slide bar to set the use and rate of the character repeat
3. Verify your settings
– Touch the test field. The screen keyboard opens.
– Move the screen keyboard as needed.
– Touch any character and keep it pressed
– Check the activation of the character repeat and its rate in the test field
– Correct your setting if necessary
Result
The character repeat for the keyboard is now set.

6.2.2.5 Setting the Double-click on the Touch Screen
Introduction
You can start application in the Control Panel and in Windows CE with a double-click,
two brief touches is sequence.
Set the time between two touches in the Control Panel.
Requirement
The "Mouse Properties" dialog has been opened with the "Mouse" icon.
① Touch the pattern ② twice in sequence to set the time and spatial distance between the
touches on the screen.
② Specimen
③ Icon
④ Touch the ③ icon twice in sequence to check the settings of your double-click. If the icon
does not change, adjust your settings using the ② pattern again.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the pattern twice
– The pattern is displayed in inverse colors at the second touch
2. Touch the icon twice

If the double-click is detected, the icon is displayed as follows at the second touch.
3. If the icon remains unchanged, double-click on the pattern again.

Result
The double-click on the touch screen is now set.

6.2.2.6 Backup and Restore Using a Memory Card
Introduction
A backup involves copying the operating system, applications and data in flash memory of
the HMI device to a memory card.
A restore operation deletes all old data from flash memory of the HMI device on
confirmation. The data stored on the memory card is then copied to the internal
flash memory.
Requirement
A memory card with ≥16 MB capacity is inserted in the HMI device.
The "Backup/Restore" dialog has been opened with the "Backup/Restore" icon.
① Button for data backup

② Button for data restore
Procedure for backup

Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the "BACKUP" button.
The message "Starting backup" is displayed.
The following message appears if no memory card is inserted in the card slot or if the
memory card is damaged:
Then perform steps 2 and 3.

2. Touch .
This message is displayed: "Backup aborted".
3. Confirm with "OK."
The Control Panel is displayed again.

Repeat the procedure with a suitable memory card.

1. Using the memory card
2. Touch the "BACKUP" button.
The message "Storage card detected" is displayed.
– A warning is displayed if the available space is insufficient. The backup is aborted.
Delete any unneeded data on the memory card using the Windows CE Explorer.
– If the memory card contains data, the following message is displayed:
"You have an old backup on the storage card. Do you want to delete it?".
3. Press "Yes" if you want to delete the data.
Press "No" if you want to retain the data.
The messages "Checking the registry settings" and "Saving CE image" are displayed in
sequence when the backup begins. A progress bar shows the status of the process.
The backup ends with the following message: "Backup successfully completed.
Touch OK and remove memory card."
4. Touch the "OK" button.
Result
The HMI device data is now saved on the memory card.
Procedure for restoring

Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the "RESTORE" button.
The message "Restore started" is displayed.
The following message appears if no memory card is inserted in the card slot or if the
memory card is damaged:
Then perform steps 2 and 4.

2. Touch .
This message is displayed: "Restore aborted". Remove the memory card".
3. Remove the memory card.
4. Confirm with "OK."

Repeat the procedure with a suitable memory card.

1. Using the memory card
2. Touch the "RESTORE" button.
This message is displayed: "Restore started". The following message appears:
"Checking data". When the data has been checked, the following message appears:
"You are starting a restore. All files except those on the memory card and the registry
files will be deleted. Are you sure?"
3. Press "Yes" if you want to restore the data.
Press "No" if you want to cancel the restore.
The messages "Deleting files in the internal Flash memory" and "Restoring CE image"
are displayed in sequence once the restore process begins. A progress bar shows the
status of the process.
The restore ends with the message "The restore of the CE images is completed.
The HMI device will now be restarted. Do not remove the memory card."
The operating system boots, opening the Loader and Control Panel in sequence.
Two messages appear.
Then the final message appears: "Restore successfully completed. Touch OK and
remove memory card."
The HMI device boots. The Control Panel is displayed.
6. Remove the memory card, if necessary.
Store the memory card in a safe place.
Result
The data from the memory card is now on the HMI device. The existing licenses are retained
on the HMI device, all other files have been deleted.

6.2.2.7 Setting the Date and Time
Requirement
The "Date/Time Properties" dialog has been opened with the
"Date/Time Properties" icon.

① Time zone
② Time
③ Date
④ "Daylight savings" check box
⑤ Button for applying changes
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the appropriate time zone for the HMI device from the "Time Zone" selection list.
2. Touch the "Apply" button to confirm your entry.
The time of day shown in the "Current Time" box is adjusted correspondingly to the
selected time zone.
3. Set the date in the selection field.
4. Set the current time of day in the "Current Time" text box.
5. Touch the "Apply" button to confirm your input.
The values you have set are now in effect.
Note
The system does not automatically switch between winter and summer time!

6. If you want to switch from winter to summer time, select the

"Daylight savings time currently in effect" check box.
When you press the "Apply" button, the time is brought forward by one hour.
7. If you want to switch from summer to winter time, deactivate the
When you press the "Apply" button, the time is moved backwards by one hour.
8. Close the dialog and save your entries with .
Touch to discard the entries.
NOTICE
Reboot the HMI device if you have made changes to the time zone.
Result
The settings for the date and time of day have now been changed.
Synchronizing the date and time with the PLC

The date and time of the HMI device can be synchronized with the controller, if this has been
configured in the project and the controller program.
Additional information on this subject is available in the "WinCC flexible" system manual.
NOTICE
Synchronize the date and time if time-based reactions are to be triggered in the PLC.
6.2.2.8 Saving Registry Information
Introduction
If you are running your own programs on the HMI device under MS Windows CE, you should
back up the registry information after installing the programs. There are several ways to
save files:
● Save the registry information to the Flash memory.
● Save files in a temporary folder to the Flash memory.
Saving to the Flash memory allows you to automatically restore the file system on the
HMI device.

Requirement
① Saves the current registry information to the flash memory. The HMI device loads the saved
registry information the next time it boots.
② Button for saving registry information
③ Button for saving temporary files
④ Saves all the files in temporary storage to the flash memory (for example, from the
"Program Files" directory). These files are written back the next time the HMI device starts.
The "\Temp" directory is not saved.
⑤ Check box for automatically restoring the file system on the memory card when the
HMI device starts up and when a memory card is inserted.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the "Save Registry" button to save the current registry settings
2. Touch the "Save Files" button to save temporary files
3. Specify whether or not the file system on the memory card should be restored when the
HMI device starts up or when a memory card is inserted.
– Activate the check box "Automatically Repair ...", if you wish to have the files system
restored automatically.
– Deactivate the check box "Automatically Repair ...", if you wish to have the files
system restored only upon prompting.
Result
The HMI device uses the saved registry information the next time it starts. The temporary
files are copied back.

6.2.2.9 Changing Screen Contrast
Requirement
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. From the "OP Properties" dialog, select the "Display" tab.
① Button for increasing the contrast

② Button for reducing the contrast
2. Proceed as follows to change contrast of the screen:

– Touch the "UP" button to increase the contrast of the screen
– Touch the "DOWN" button to decrease the contrast of the screen
Result
The HMI device screen contrast has now been changed.
Note
You can also adjust the contrast within an open project. Refer to the corresponding system
documentation for more information in this regard.

6.2.2.10 Displaying Information about the HMI Device
Requirement
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "OP Properties" dialog, then select the "Device" tab.

① HMI device name

② Version of the HMI device image
⑤ Size of the internal flash memory in which the HMI device image and project are stored
⑥ MAC address of the HMI device
⑦ Button for restarting the HMI device
2. The device-specific information is displayed in the "Device" tab.

You will need this information if you contact A&D Technical Support.
3. Activate the "Reboot" button if you want to reboot the HMI device
After you have activated the "Reboot" button, a warning is displayed on the screen.
If you acknowledge this with "OK", the HMI device is rebooted immediately.
CAUTION
Data loss when the HMI device is restarted
All volatile data is lost when the HMI device is rebooted. No check is carried out as to
whether or not the project on the HMI device is running, the communication is active
whether or not data are currently being written into the flash memory.
Note
The size of the internal flash memory does not correspond to the available working
memory for a project.

6.2.2.11 Calibrating the Touch Screen
Introduction
when operating the HMI device. In order to prevent any operating errors as a result, calibrate
the touch screen again in the startup phase or during runtime.
Requirement
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "OP Properties" dialog, then select the "Touch" tab.
① If the HMI device does not react precisely to a touch, the touch screen may require
calibration.
2. Touch the "Recalibrate" button.

The following dialog appears.
① Carefully press the middle of the calibration crosshairs. Repeat the process as long as the
calibration crosshairs move on the touch screen.

3. Briefly touch the calibration crosshairs.

The calibration crosshairs then goes to four more positions. Touch the middle of the
calibration crosshairs for each position. If you do not touch the middle of the calibration
crosshairs, the procedure is repeated.
Once you have touched the calibration crosshairs for all positions, the following dialog
appears:

Time limit: 30 sec
values. If you do not touch the screen within 30 seconds, the new calibration values will
be discarded.
4. Touch the screen within 30 seconds

The new calibration is saved. If you wait longer than 30 seconds, the new calibration is
discarded and the original calibration remains in effect.
Result
The HMI device touch screen is now recalibrated.

6.2.2.12 Changing the Password Settings
Introduction
You can protect the Control Panel and Windows CE taskbar with a password.
Requirement
The "Password Properties" dialog has been opened with the "Password" icon.

① Input field for the password

② Input field for repeating the password
Procedure – entering a password

Proceed as follows:
1. Enter a password in the "Password" input field.
Touch the input field. The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed.
2. Repeat the password entry in the "Confirm Password" input field.
NOTICE
Your password must not contain blank spaces or special characters * ? . % / \ ' ".
Result
You cannot open the Control Panel or Windows CE taskbar without entering a password.
NOTICE
If the password is no longer available, you cannot make changes in the Control Panel or
use the Windows CE taskbar unless you update the operating system.

Procedure – deleting a password

Proceed as follows:
1. Delete the entries in the "Password" and "Confirm password" input fields
Result
Password protection for the Control Panel and Windows CE taskbar has been removed.
6.2.2.13 Changing Printer Settings
Printing on Network Printers

HMI devices with a PROFINET interface can also print on network printers.
Hardcopies and logs can be printed on network printers. Individual new incoming or outgoing
alarms cannot be printed.
Requirement
The "Printer Properties" dialog has been opened with the "Printer" icon.

① Printer selection list

② Interface
③ Network address of the printer (applies to TP 177B 6" PN/DP and OP 177B PN/DP)
④ Paper size selection list
⑤ Orientation setting
⑥ Print quality setting

Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the "Printer Language" selection list and select a printer
2. Touch the "Port" selection list and set the port for the printer
3. Applies to TP 177B 6" PN/DP and OP 177B PN/DP with a "Network" interface:
Touch the "Network" selection field to enter the network address of the printer.
The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed.
4. Touch the "Paper Size" selection field and select the format of the paper.
5. Touch the desired check box in the "Orientation" field:
– "Portrait"
– "Landscape"
6. Select the print quality.
– Activate the check box "Draft Mode", if you wish to print a draft.
– Deactivate the check box "Draft Mode", if you wish to print with higher quality.
7. Set the color mode.
– Activate the check box "Color", if you wish to print in color. Deactivate it to print in
monochrome.
Result
The settings for the printer have now been changed.
Note

6.2.2.14 Changing Regional Settings
Introduction
The display format of the date, time and decimal point etc. differ from region to region.
You can adjust the regional settings on the HMI device to meet local requirements.
Requirement
The "Regional Settings Properties" dialog has been opened with the
"Regional Settings" icon.
① Region selection list
Procedure - Changing Regional Settings

Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the "Regional" selection list for the language in the "Regional Settings" tab
2. Select the desired language.
To do this, touch the input field. The symbolic screen keyboard is displayed.
Procedure - Changing the Number Format

Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "Number" tab.
2. Set the following in the selection lists:
– The character for the decimal separator
– The character for the thousand separator
– The separator character for number sequences
3. Touch the respective selection list and set the desired value using the screen keyboard

Procedure - Changing the Time Format

1. Open the "Time" tab.
– Time of day format
– Define the separator between hours, minutes and seconds.
– The format for the time before 12:00 noon.
– The format for the time after 12:00 noon.
Procedure - Changing the Date Format

1. Open the "Date" tab.
– Define the separator between year, month and day.
– The abbreviated format of the date
– The full format of the date
Procedure - Closing the Dialog

1. Close the dialog and save your entries with .
Touch to discard the entries.
Result
The regional settings for the HMI device screen have now been changed.
6.2.2.15 Changing MPI/PROFIBUS DP Settings
Requirement
The "S7 Transfer Settings" dialog has been opened with the "S7 Transfer" icon.
① Network selection
② Button for opening the properties dialog

Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select a network and then touch the "Properties" button
One of the two following dialogs is displayed.

① The HMI device is the only master on the bus.

② Bus address of the HMI device
③ Time-out
④ Data transmission rate in total network
⑤ Highest station address in the network
⑥ Profile
⑦ Button for displaying the bus parameters
2. If more masters are connected to the bus, deactivate the check box
"Panel is the only master on the bus"
3. Enter the bus address for the HMI device in the "Address" input field
Touch the input field. A selection list is displayed.
4. Select the highest transmission rate from the "Transmission rate" input field

5. Select the highest station address on the bus in the "Highest Station Address" input field.
6. Select the desired profile from the "Profile" selection field. Touch the input field.
The symbolic screen keyboard is displayed.
7. The profile data is displayed when you press the "Bus Parameters" button in the
PROFIBUS dialog. This dialog is read-only.
Press the button or to close the dialog.

NOTICE
Address in the MPI / PROFIBUS DP network
The value specified in the "Address" input field should be used in an
MPI / PROFIBUS DP network just once.
Bus parameters in the MPI / PROFIBUS DP network
The bus parameters must be the same for all stations in the MPI / PROFIBUS DP
network.
Note
When a project is opened, the MPI / DP settings are overwritten with the values from
the project.

General information
NOTICE
end the project and then change the settings on the HMI device. Then return to transfer
mode.
The HMI device uses the new MPI / PROFIBUS DP settings until you start a project or
transfer a project to it. The MPI / PROFIBUS DP settings are then overwritten by the values
from this project.
Transfer settings
Do not change the transfer settings if a project is running or the HMI device is in transfer
mode.
Result
The MPI / DP settings of the HMI device have been changed.

6.2.2.16 Setting the Delay Time
Introduction
The project is opened following a delay time when the HMI device is switched on.
The Loader is displayed during the delay time.
Requirements
You have opened the "Directories" tab.
① Memory location for the project file

② Memory location for the compressed source file of your project for backtransfer.
The external memory card or the network connections can be defined as the memory
location. During the next backup process, the project's source file is stored in the
specified location.
③ Storage location and initialization file of the HMI device for process operation
④ Selection list for the delay time
NOTICE
Settings in "Project File" and "Path"
Do not change the setting in the "Project File" and "Path" fields if you are working on a
project. The project may not open at the next start of the HMI if changes are made here.
Procedure for setting the delay time

1. Touch the "Wait [sec]" section list.
A selection list is displayed. Select the desired delay time.
With the value "0", the project starts immediately. It is then no longer possible to call
the loader after switching on the HMI device. If you still wish to access the loader,
an operating element must be configured to close the project.
Result
The delay time for the HMI device is now set.

6.2.2.17 Setting the Screen Saver
Introduction
You can set a period of time for automatic activation of the screen saver on the HMI device.
The screen saver is automatically activated if the HMI device is not operated within the
specified period of time.
The screen saver is deactivated when any key is pressed or the touch screen is touched.
The function assigned to that key is not triggered.
Requirement
The "Screen Saver" dialog has been opened with the "Screen Saver" icon.

① Period of time in minutes before the screen saver is activated

② Screen saver setting
③ Enter '0' to disable the screen saver. The minimum value is 5 and the maximum value is
71582 minutes.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
Touch the input field. A selection list is displayed. Entering "0" disables the screen saver.
2. Select either the standard screen saver or an empty screen.
– Activate the "Standard" radio button to enable the screen saver
– Activate the "Blank Screen" radio button to enable a blank screen as the screen saver
NOTICE
Generally, you should always activate the screen saver. Otherwise, the screen contents
may leave a burn-in effect in the background if they appear for too long.
This effect is reversible, however.
Result
The screen saver for the HMI device has now been set.

6.2.2.18 Displaying System Information
Requirement
The "System Properties" dialog has been opened with the "System" icon.
Procedure - Displaying System Information

Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "General" tab.
The system information is displayed. This dialog is read-only.

① Copyright to Microsoft Windows CE

② Information about the processor, amount of the internal Flash memory, and capacity of a
memory card when inserted

Procedure - Displaying Memory Information

Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "Memory" tab.
The memory information is displayed.
NOTICE
"Memory" Tab
Do not change the amount of memory in the "Memory" tab.
6.2.2.19 Configuring the Data Channel
Introduction
Requirement
① Group for the data channel 1 (channel 1)

② Group for the data channel 2 (channel 2)
③ Button for the "MPI / DP Transfer Settings" or "Network Configuration" dialog

Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Configure the data channel that you want to use
You can clear the required data channel by activating the associated "Enable Channel"
check box in the "Channel 1" or "Channel 2" group. In the "Channel 1" group, the
RS -485 port is configured for the serial data transfer.
– Activate the "Enable Channel" check box to enable the data channel
– Deactivate the "Enable Channel" check box to lock the data channel
2. Configure the automatic transfer
– Deactivate the "Remote Control" check box to disable automatic transfer
– Activate the "Remote Control" check box to enable automatic transfer
WARNING
Ensure that the configuration PC does not inadvertently switch the HMI device to
transfer mode during the open project. This could cause unintentional actions to be
triggered in the plant.
3. Enter the required protocol for "Channel 2".

Touch the input field. A selection list is displayed.
4. Touch the "Advanced" button
– Applies to the "MPI / PROFIBUS DP" protocol:
Touch the "Advanced" button if you wish to switch to the "S7 Transfer Settings" dialog.
You can change the settings for MPI / PROFIBUS DP there.
Close the "S7 Transfer Settings" dialog with .
– Applies to the "ETHERNET" protocol:
Touch the "Advanced" button if you wish to switch to the "Network Configuration"
dialog. You can change the settings for TCP / IP there.
Close the "Network Configuration" dialog with after making the changes.
5. Close the "Transfer Settings" dialog and save your entries with to accept the entries.
Touch to discard the entries
Result

General information
Note
Changes during the "Transfer" mode
If the HMI device is in "Transfer" mode while changes are made to the transfer settings,
the settings only go into effect after the transfer function is restarted. This may occur if the
Control Panel is opened to change the transfer properties in an active project.
NOTICE
Transfer mode via channel 2
The bus parameters, such as the address of the HMI device, are read from the project
currently loaded on the HMI device.
You can change the settings for the transfer via channel 2. To do this, you must first end
the project and then change the settings on the HMI device. Then return to "Transfer"
mode.
The next time the project is started on the HMI device, the settings will be overwritten by
the values from the project.
Transfer settings
A project can only be transferred from the configuration PC to the HMI device when at
least one of the data channels is enabled on the HMI device.
See also
Changing Network Settings (Page 133)
Changing MPI/PROFIBUS DP Settings (Page 119)

6.2.2.20 Overview of Network Operation
Introduction
The HMI device with a PROFINET interface can be connected to a TCP/IP network.
Connection to a TCP/IP network can offer the following advantages:
● Printing via a network printer
● Saving recipe records to a server
● Exporting recipe records
● Importing recipe records
● Transferring a project
● Backing up data
These advantages are not available with a direct PC connection. However, peripherals
connected to the PC can be used. For example, you can use a local printer for printing.
NOTICE
The HMI device can only be used in TCP/IP and PROFINET networks.
The HMI device only has client functionality in the PC network. This means that users can
access files of a subscriber with TCP/IP server functionality from the HMI device via the
network. However, it is not possible to access files on the HMI device via the network
from a PC.
Note
Information on communication using SIMATIC S7 via PROFINET is provided in the
"WinCC flexible Communication" user manual.
Requirements
Within a TCP/IP or PROFINET network, computers are addressed using network names.
These network names are translated from a DNS or WINS server to TCP/IP and PROFINET
addresses. Direct addressing via TCP/IP and PROFINET addresses is also supported by the
operating system. This is why a DNS or WINS server is needed for addressing via device
name names when the HMI device is in a TCP/IP or PROFINET network. Appropriate
servers are available in common TCP/IP and PROFINET networks. Consult your network
administrator if you have questions in this regard.
Printing via a Network Printer

The HMI device's operating system does not support the direct alarm logging via a network
printer. All other printer functions, such as printing hardcopies or logs, are possible via the
network without restriction.

General Procedure for Configuring the Network

The HMI device must be appropriately configured before setting into network operation.
The configuration is basically divided into the following steps:
● Set device name of the HMI device.
● Configure the network address.
● Set the logon information.
● Save the settings.
● Switch off the HMI device once the network is configured.
If your network address is assigned automatically:
Before switching the HMI device on, insert the network cable in the corresponding
interface so that a unique IP address for the HMI device can be assigned during startup.
● Switch on the HMI device.
Preparation
Before beginning the configuration, request the following network parameters from your
network administrator.
● Does the network use DHCP for dynamic assignment of network addresses?
If not, get a new TCP/IP network address for the HMI device.
● What is the TCP/IP address of the default gateway?
● If a DNS network is used, what is the address of the name server?
● If a WINS network is used, what is the address of the name server?

6.2.2.21 Setting the Device Name of the HMI Device
Requirement
The "Communications Properties" dialog has been opened with the
"Communications" icon.
① The HMI device uses this information to identify itself to other PCs.
② Device name of the HMI device
③ Description for the HMI device (optional)
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the device name for the HMI device in the "Device name" input field.
Touch the input field. The screen keyboard is displayed.
2. Enter a description for the HMI device in the "Device description" input field.
Result
The device name for the HMI device is now set.
Note
Change the device name for the HMI device in the "Device name" input field to activate the
network functions.
See also
Overview of Network Operation (Page 129)

6.2.2.22 Activating a Direct Connection
Requirement
The "Communications Properties" dialog has been opened with the
"Communications" icon.

① These settings control the connection between the HMI device and a desktop computer.
② Enabling a direct connection
③ Button for changing the desktop computer
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "PC Connection" tab.
The information about the direct connection is displayed.
NOTICE
"PC Connection" Tab
If you want to operate a project on the HMI device, do not change the information in the
"PC Connection" tab.

6.2.2.23 Changing Network Settings
Requirement
The "Network Configuration" dialog has been opened with the "Network" icon.
① Selection for PROFINET adapters

② MAC address of the HMI device
③ Button for the properties dialog
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the " SMSC100FD1: Onboard LAN Ethernet Driver"
2. Touch the "Properties" button
The "Onboard LAN Ethernet Driver" dialog is displayed.

① Address assignment setting

② Input field for the IP address
③ Input field for the address of the subnet mask
④ Input field for the address of the default gateway

3. Select either automatic address assignment via DHCP or manual address assignment
4. If you set the address yourself, use the screen keyboard and enter the respective
addresses in the input fields for "IP Address", "Subnet Mask" and, if used,
"Default Gateway."
5. If a name server (DNS) is used in the network, open the "Name Server" tab.
The "Name Servers" tab of the "Onboard LAN Ethernet Driver" dialog is displayed:
6. Enter the respective addresses in the input fields using the screen keyboard.
Once you have applied the settings, you are prompted to reboot the HMI device.
8. When prompted, open the "Device" tab of the "OP Properties" dialog and reboot the
HMI device
Result
The network parameters for the HMI device have now been set.
See also
Displaying Information about the HMI Device (Page 112)

6.2.2.24 Changing the Logon Information
Requirements
The "Network Configuration" dialog has been opened with the "Network" icon.

① Windows CE uses this information to gain access to the network resources.

Enter the user name, password and domain you have received from your administrator
② Input field for the user name
③ Input field for the password
④ Input field for the domain
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the user name in the "User name" input field
2. Touch the input field. The screen keyboard is displayed.
3. Enter your password in the "Password" input field
4. Enter the domain name in the "Domain" input field
Result
The logon data has now been set.
See also

6.2.2.25 Changing Internet Settings
Requirement
The "WinCC flexible Internet Settings" dialog has been opened with the
"WinCC Internet Settings" icon.
Procedure - Changing E-mail Settings

Proceed as follows:
1. Select the "Email" tab.
① Setting for the SMTP server

② Name for the sender
③ E-mail account
2. Specify the SMTP server

– Activate the check box "Use the default of the project file" if you want to use the
SMTP server permanently configured in the project
– Deactivate the check box "Use the default of the project file" if you do not want to use
the SMTP server permanently configured in the project
Touch the input field to enter the SMTP server. The screen keyboard is displayed.
3. Enter the name for the sender in the "Sender" input field
4. Enter the e-mail account for your e-mail in the "Authentication" input field
Some e-mail providers only allow you to send mail if you specify the e-mail account.
The "Authentication" input field can remain empty if your e-mail provider allows you to
send mail without checking the account.

Procedure - changing proxy settings

Proceed as follows:
1. Select the "Proxy" tab

① Check box for using a proxy server

② Address of the proxy server
③ Port
2. Activate the check box "Use proxy server" if you want to use a proxy server
3. If you use a proxy server:
Specify the address of the proxy server and the desired port. Touch the corresponding
input field. The screen keyboard is displayed.
Result
The Internet settings have been changed.
Note
Options
Additional tabs may appear in the "WinCC Internet Settings" tab. This depends on the
options that have been enabled for network operation in the project.
See also

6.3 Configuring the operating system on the TP 177B 4"
6.3.1 Loader
Overview
The figure below shows the Loader. The header line contains details of the loader version.
These details are not shown in the following figure.

● Press the "Transfer" button to set the HMI device to "Transfer" mode.
The transfer mode can only be activated when at least one data channel has been
enabled for the transfer.
● Press the "Start" button to start the project on the HMI device.
If you do not perform an operation, the project on the HMI device will automatically start
after a delay.
● Press the "Control Panel" button to open the HMI device Control Panel.
You can change various settings in the Control Panel, for example, the transfer settings.
● Press the "Taskbar" button to activate the taskbar with the Windows CE start menu open.

Open Loader
● The Loader appears when the project is closed.
If configured, use the relevant operating element to close the project.
For further information on this, refer to your plant documentation.
Protection against unauthorized access

You can use a password to protect the Control Panel and taskbar from unauthorized access.
In addition, you can protect the taskbar and the desktop with the aid of the SecureMode.
If the HMI device is protected, the label "secure mode" will be displayed on the Windows CE
desktop. For more information, refer to SecureMode in section
"Setting up and disabling SecureMode (Page 140)".
The "Transfer" and "Start" buttons can always be operated without a password entry.
Password protection prevents maloperation. This in turn increases security on the plant or
machine. The settings for the active project can only be changed by entering the password.
NOTICE
Password not available
If the password is no longer available, you can execute the following once you have first
reset the computer to factory settings:
• Change settings in the Control Panel
• Operating the Windows CE taskbar
All data on the HMI device will be deleted when you update the operating system!
Therefore use the password to protect against loss.

6.3.2 Setting up and disabling SecureMode
Overview
You can use a password to protect the Control Panel against unauthorized access.
You can also protect the taskbar and the desktop with the aid of the SecureMode.
Function of SecureMode
You set up the SecureMode by setting up a password in the Control Panel.
The SecureMode is then automatically activated. The label "secure mode" will be displayed
on the Windows CE desktop.
For more information, refer to the "Changing password protection (Page 151)" section.
If you now operate a function in the taskbar or the desktop, you must enter a password.
After entering the password, the label "secure mode" is no longer displayed. All functions in
the taskbar and the desktop can now be operated. To reactivate SecureMode, double-click
the symbol on the desktop. The label "secure mode" will be shown again.
The HMI device is protected again.
Disabling SecureMode
To completely disable SecureMode, delete the password.

6.3.3 Control Panel
6.3.3.1 Overview
The HMI device's Control Panel is similar to the control panel on a PC.
The Control Panel looks like this:
The control panel can be used to modify the following settings:

● Date and time
● Screen saver
● Regional settings
● Network settings
● Delay time
● Password

6.3.3.2 Opening the Control Panel
Introduction
The HMI device Control Panel can be opened as follows:
● Independently of a running project
– Press the "Control panel" button in the loader.
– By calling up from the Windows CE start menu.
● With active project
An operating element must be configured to open the Control Panelfor this purpose.
Procedure – open the Control Panel via the Start menu

Proceed as follows:
1. Open the Windows CE start menu.
Alternatively, press the key twice on the alphanumerical screen keyboard.
2. Select "Settings > Control panel".
Result
The control panel is opened.
6.3.3.3 Reference for functions
Overview of functions
The following table shows the settings in the Control Panel.
Icon Function Tab / entry

Saving and restoring with external storage device –
Importing, displaying and deleting certificates "Stores"
Setting the date and time "Date/Time"
Configuring the screen keyboard –
Setting the character repeat for the keyboard "Repeat"
Setting the double-click "Double-Click"

Icon Function Tab / entry

Configuring the LAN connection "LAN9115"
Setting the IP address "'LAN9115'Settings" "IP Address"
Set name server "'LAN9115'Settings" "Name Servers"
Changing Ethernet settings "'LAN9115'Settings" "Ethernet Parameters"
Changing the logon data "Network ID"
Backup registry information "Persistent Storage"

Changing monitor settings "Display"
Displaying information about the HMI device "Device"
Restarting the HMI device "Device"
Calibrating the touch screen "Touch"
Activate memory management "Memory Monitoring"
Changing password protection "Password Settings"
Changing the printer properties –
Changing the PROFINET IO setting –
Changing regional settings "Regional Settings"

Changing the number format "Number"
Changing the currency format "Currency"
Changing the time format "Time"
Changing the date format "Date"
Changing transfer settings "MPI"
Changing the PROFIBUS DP transfer settings "PROFIBUS"
S7 Ethernet settings "S7-Ethernet"
Setting the screen saver –
Reducing the backlit display
Displaying system properties "General"
Displaying memory information "Memory"
Setting the device name of the HMI device "Device Name"
Configuring the data channel "Channel"
Setting the delay time "Directories"
Setting the uninterruptible power supply "Configuration"
State of uninterruptible power supply "Current Status"
Changing e-mail settings1) "Email"
1) Additional tabs may appear in the "WinCC flexible Internet Settings" dialog. This depends on
the options that have been enabled for network operation in the project.

6.3.3.4 Operator control options for the Control Panel
Entries using the touch screen

The operating elements shown in the dialogs are touch-sensitive. Touch objects are
basically operated in the same way as mechanical keys. You activate operating elements by
touching them with your finger. To double-click them, touch an operating element twice in
succession.
Entries using an external USB keyboard

An external keyboard can be used to operate the Control Panel in exactly the same way as
the HMI device keyboard. Use the keys of the external keyboard which correspond to the
HMI device keys in the description.
Operating using an external USB mouse

An external mouse can be used to operate the Control Panel in exactly the same way as the
HMI device touch screen. Click the described operating elements with the mouse.
6.3.3.5 Operating the Control Panel with the touch screen
Introduction
The control panel is operated with the HMI device touch screen or a connected mouse.
Requirement
An active project has been terminated. The Loader appears.
Procedure
1. Open the Control Panel with the "Control Panel" button.
2. To open the required dialog, double-click on its icon.
3. Change the tab as required.
4. Make the necessary changes.
Touch the corresponding input object.
– Use the screen keyboard of the HMI device to enter the new values in the text boxes.
– Touch a button to operate it.
– To open a selection list, touch the triangle at the end of the field. Touch the required
entry from the selection list.
– Touch the check box to activate or deactivate a check box.
– Touch a radio button to select it.
5. Confirm the selection with the button or abort the entry with the button.
The dialog closes.
6. Close the Control Panel with the button.
The Loader appears.

Input with the screen keyboard

A screen keyboard is available for data input. The screen keyboard is displayed as soon as
you touch a text box. You can also call up the screen keyboard directly from the
Control Panel.
Display methods for the screen keyboard

You can change the display method for the screen keyboard and fix the position on the
screen. Confirm the entry with the button or abort the entry with the key.
Either action closes the screen keyboard.
● Numerical screen keyboard
● Alphanumerical screen keyboard
The alphanumerical keyboard is organized in the following two layers:

– Normal level
– Shift level
● Reduced screen keyboard

Changing the display of the screen keyboard
Key Function
Switching between the numerical and alphanumerical keyboard
Switching between the normal level and Shift level of the alphanumerical
screen keyboard
Switching from full display to reduced display
Switching from reduced display to full display
Closing the reduced display on the screen keyboard
6.3.4 Changing settings for operation
6.3.4.1 Configuring the screen keyboard
Introduction
You can set at which screen position and in which view the screen keyboard will open.
Requirements
You have opened the "Siemens HMI Input Panel - Options" dialog with the
"InputPanel" icon.
① Button for displaying the screen keyboard

② Button for saving the screen keyboard settings

Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Use the "Open Input Panel" button to open the screen keyboard.
2. If you want to switch between the numerical and alphanumerical screen keyboard,
press the key.
3. If you want to change the position of the screen keyboard, use the mouse pointer to
select a free space between the keys.
Move the screen keyboard to the required position and release the mouse pointer once
you have reached the required position.
4. If you want to save the settings, press the "Save" button.
5. Confirm your entries.
The dialog closes.
Result
The screen keyboard settings have been modified.
6.3.4.2 Setting the character repeat
Introduction
You can use this function to set the character repeat and associated delay for the
screen keyboard.
Requirement
You have opened the "Keyboard Properties" dialog with the "Keyboard" icon.
① Check box for activating the character repeat

② Slider control and buttons for the delay time before character repeat
③ Slider control and buttons for the rate of the character repeat
④ Test field

Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If you want to enable character repetition, activate the "Enable character repeat"
check box.
2. If you want to change the delay, press a button or the slider in the "Repeat delay" group.
Moving the slider to the right will shorten the delay. Moving to the left will extend
the delay.
3. If you want to change the repeat rate, press a button or the slider in the
"Repeat rate" group.
Moving the slider to the right will shorten the repeat rate. Moving to the left will extend
the repeat rate.
4. Touch the test field in order to check the settings.
The screen keyboard opens.
5. Move the screen keyboard as needed.
6. Press an alphanumeric key and keep the key pressed down.
Check the implementation of the character repetition and the rate of the character
repetition in the test field.
7. If the settings are not perfect, correct them.
The dialog closes.
Result
The character repetition and delay are set.
6.3.4.3 Setting the double-click
Introduction
You can start applications in the Control Panel and in Windows CE with a double-click.
A double-click corresponds to two brief touches in sequence.
In the "Mouse Properties" dialog, make the following adjustments for touch screen operation
and operation with external mouse:
● Interval between touch contacts on the touch screen
● Interval between mouse clicks

Requirement
You have opened the "Mouse Properties" dialog with the "Mouse" icon.
① Pattern
② Icon
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Click the pattern twice.
After one double-click, the grid is shown in inverse colors. The white fields change to
grey. The time before the second click is saved.
2. Check the double-click.

Click on the icon twice in succession to do this. If the double-click is recognized, the icon
is displayed as follows:
3. If the settings are not perfect, correct them.

To do this, repeat steps 1 to 2.
The dialog closes.
Result
The double-click adjustment is completed.

6.3.4.4 Calibrating the touch screen
Introduction
when operating the touch screen. In order to prevent any operating errors as a result,
calibrate the touch screen again in the startup phase or during runtime.
Requirement
You have opened the "OP Properties" dialog box, "Touch" tab, by touching the
"OP" icon.
① If the HMI device does not react precisely to a touch, the touch screen may require calibration.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Click on the "Recalibrate" button.
The following dialog opens:
① Carefully press the center of the calibration crosshairs. Repeat this process as long as the
calibration crosshair moves on the touch screen.

2. Briefly touch the center of the calibration crosshairs ②.

The calibration crosshairs is then displayed at four more positions.
3. Briefly touch the middle of the calibration crosshairs for each position.
Once you have touched all the positions of the calibration crosshairs, the following
dialog appears:

Time limit: 30 sec
values. If you do not touch the screen within 30 seconds, the new calibration values will
be discarded.
4. Touch the touch screen.

The calibration is saved. The "OP Properties" dialog box, "Touch" tab is displayed again.
If you do not touch the touch screen within the time shown, your original setting will be
retained.
5. Close the dialog.
Result
The HMI device touch screen is calibrated.
6.3.5 Changing password protection
Introduction
You can protect access to the Control Panel and the Windows CE taskbar with a password.
When you set up the password protection, the SecureMode is activated automatically.
For more information, refer to SecureMode in section
"Setting up and disabling SecureMode (Page 140)".

Requirements
You have opened the "Password Properties" dialog with the "Password" icon.
NOTICE
Password not available
If the password is no longer available, you can execute the following once you have first
reset the computer to factory settings:
• Change settings in the Control Panel
• Use the Windows CE taskbar
All data on the HMI device will be deleted when you update the operating system!
Therefore use the password to protect against loss.
Procedure – setting up password protection
Note
The following characters cannot be used in passwords:
• Blank
• Special characters * ? . % / \ ' "
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter a password in the "Password" text box.
2. Repeat the password entry in the "Confirm password" text box.
The dialog closes.
Result
You cannot open the Control Panel or Windows CE taskbar without entering a password.

Procedure – disabling password protection

Proceed as follows:
1. Delete the entries in the "Password" and "Confirm password" input fields.
The dialog closes.
Result
Password protection for the Control Panel and the Windows CE taskbar is disabled.
There is free access to these applications.
6.3.6 Changing the HMI device settings
6.3.6.1 Setting the date and time
Introduction
You can set the date and time on the HMI device. The HMI must be restarted in the
following cases:
● You have changed the time zone setting.
● You have changed the "Daylight savings time currently in effect" check box setting.
Requirements
You have opened the "Date/Time Properties" using the "Date/Time Properties" icon.
① Date selection field

② Input field for the time
③ Button for applying changes
④ Time zone selection list
⑤ "Daylight savings" check box

Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the appropriate time zone for the HMI device from the "Time Zone" selection list.
2. Touch the "Apply" button to confirm your entry.
The time of day shown in the "Current Time" field is adjusted correspondingly to the
selected time zone.
3. Set the date in the selection field.
4. Set the current time of day in the "Current Time" text box.
5. Touch the "Apply" button to confirm your input.
The values you have set are now in effect.
Note
The system does not automatically switch between winter and summer time.
6. If you want to switch from winter to summer time, activate the

When you press the "Apply" button, the time is brought forward by one hour.
7. If you want to switch from summer to winter time, deactivate the
When you press the "Apply" button, the time is moved backwards by one hour.
The dialog closes.
Result
The settings for the data and time of day have now been changed.
Internal clock
The HMI device has an internal buffered clock. The buffering is time-restricted.
Synchronizing the date and time with the PLC

The date and time of the HMI device can be synchronized with the PLC if this has been
configured in the project and the PLC program.
Further information on this subject is available in the "WinCC flexible" system manual.
NOTICE
Time-dependent reactions
You have to synchronize the date and time when time-controlled responses are triggered in
the PLC by the HMI device.

6.3.6.2 Changing regional settings
Introduction
In different countries, for example, the date, time and decimal points are displayed
differently. You can adjust this display to meet the requirements of different regions.
The country-specific settings apply to the current project. If the project language is changed,
the country-specific settings are also changed.
Requirements
You have opened the "Regional and Language Settings" dialog with the
"Regional Settings" icon.
① Region selection list
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the region from the selection list.
2. Change to the "Number", "Currency", "Time" and "Date" tabs and set the selection lists
to the desired settings.
The dialog closes.
Result
The HMI device's regional settings have been changed.

6.3.6.3 Backup registry information
Registry information and temporary data

You can install and uninstall your own programs on the HMI devices under Windows CE.
You must save the registry settings after installation or uninstallation.
You can save the following data to the flash memory:
● Registry Information
● Temporary files
Restoring the file system of a memory card

If memory cards are used, the file system on the memory card may become damaged,
perhaps due to a power failure. The HMI device detects the defective file system on start-up
or when the memory card is inserted. The HMI device can restore the file system
automatically or on request.
Requirements
You have opened the "OP Properties" dialog, "Persistant Storage" tab with the
"OP" icon.

① Saves the current registry information to the flash memory. The HMI device loads the saved
registry information the next time it boots.
② Button for saving registry information
③ Button for saving temporary files
④ Saves all the files in temporary storage to the flash memory (for example, from the
"Program Files" directory). These files are written back when the HMI device is started.
The "\Temp" directory is not saved.
⑤ Automatically restores the file system on the memory card when the HMI device starts up and
when a memory card is inserted.

Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If you want the system to be restored automatically, activate the "Automatically repair
file system errors ..." check box.
If the check box is unchecked, the system is restored only once prompted to do so.
2. Click on the necessary buttons.
The dialog closes.
Result
The HMI device uses the saved registry information the next time it starts. The temporary
files are copied back.
6.3.6.4 Changing monitor settings
Requirements
You have opened the "OP Properties", dialog "Display" tab with the "OP" icon.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If you want to increase the brightness, press the "UP" button.
2. If you want to decrease the brightness, press the "DOWN" button.
The dialog closes.
Result
The screen settings have been changed.

6.3.6.5 Setting the screen saver
Introduction
You can activate a screen saver for the HMI device. You can also set the HMI device so that
the backlighting of the screen is reduced if it is not used for a while. This has the following
advantages:
● The service life of the screen LEDs is extended.
● The HMI device uses less power.
You can set the following time intervals on the HMI device:
● For the automatic activation of the screen saver
● For the automatic reduction in the screen's backlighting
When you do not undertake an operation within the configured interval, the configured
function will be activated automatically.
The screen saver and the reduced screen backlighting functions are switched back off by
means of the following actions:
● By pressing any key
● By touching the touch screen
The function associated to the key or button will not be executed by this.
NOTICE
Reduce backlighting
The brightness of the backlighting decreases incrementally during its operational life.
In order to not shorten the operational lifetime of the backlighting unnecessarily, activate
the backlighting reduction.
Screen contents which remain unchanged for long periods can remain dimly visible in the
background. This effect is reversible.
Therefore activate the screen saver. When the screen saver is active, the backlighting is
also reduced. If you set the screen saver "Blank Screen", the backlighting is switched off
completely.

Requirements
You have opened the "Screensaver" dialog with the "ScreenSaver" icon.

① Time interval in minutes until backlighting is reduced

② Period of time in minutes before the screen saver is activated
③ Radio buttons for the screensaver
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the interval in minutes after which the backlighting is to be reduced.
Entering "0" will deactivate the backlighting reduction.
The minimum time is 5 minutes and the maximum time is 71582 minutes.
Entering "0" disables the screen saver.
3. Select either the screen saver or an empty screen.
– If you want the screen saver to function, activate the "Standard" radio button.
– If you do not want the screen saver to function, activate the "Blank Screen" radio
button. With this setting, the backlighting of the HMI device is switched off completely
if the set interval for activating the screen saver expires.
The dialog closes.
Result
The screen saver and the reduced backlighting for the HMI device is set.

6.3.6.6 Changing the printer properties
Introduction
The HMI device can print on local printers or network printers. You can print hardcopies and
reports on a network printer. Line printing of alarms is not possible on a network printer.
Requirements
You have opened the "Printer Properties" dialog with the "Printer" icon.

① Selection list for the printer

② Selection list for the interface
③ Network address of the printer
④ Paper format selection list
⑤ "Orientation" group with radio buttons for print orientation
⑥ Check box to improve the color quality (only for Brother HL 2700 printers)
⑦ Color printing check box
⑧ Print quality check box

Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select a printer from the "Printer Language" selection list.
2. Select the port for the printer from the "Port" selection list.
3. If you wish to print via the network, enter the printer's network address in the "Network"
text box.
4. Select a paper format in the "Paper Size" selection list.
5. Activate a radio button in the "Orientation" group.
– "Portrait" for portrait
– "Landscape" for landscape
6. Select the print quality.
– Select the "Draft Mode" check box if you wish to print in draft mode.
– Deactivate the "Draft Mode" check box if you wish to print with higher quality.
7. If the printer selected can print in color and you wish it to do so, select the "Color"
check box.
8. If you use the Brother HL 2700 printer model, enable the "CMY" check box. In this way
you can increase the color quality when printing.
The dialog closes.
Result
The settings for the printer have now been changed.

6.3.6.7 Restarting the HMI device
Introduction
You can restart the HMI device or reset it to factory settings prior to the restart.
For more information, refer to the section "Resetting factory settings (Page 213)".
Essential restart
The HMI device must be restarted in the following cases:
● You have activated or deactivated the PROFINET IO direct keys.
● You have changed the time zone setting.
● You have changed the automatic daylight savings and standard setting.
NOTICE
Data loss when the HMI device is restarted
All volatile data is lost when the HMI device is rebooted.
Check the following:
• The project on the HMI device is complete.
• No data is being written to the flash memory.
The HMI device must be restarted in the following cases:
Requirement
● You have opened the "OP Properties", dialog "Device" tab with the "OP" icon.
① Button for restarting the HMI device
● If you wish to start the HMI device by resetting to factory settings: The HMI device is
connected via PROFINET to a configuration PC.

Procedure
1. If you want to restart the HMI device, press the "Reboot" button.
The following message is displayed:

① If you run this function, all data which has not been backed up will be lost. Please close
all applications before restarting.
② Button for resetting factory settings and subsequent restart
③ Button for the restart
2. Click on one of the buttons.

● If you want to restart the HMI device, press the "Reboot" button.
The HMI device restarts without delay.
● If you want to reset the HMI device to factory settings and then perform a restart,
press the "Prepare for Reset" button.
You are given the option to reset the HMI device via ProSave to factory settings.
Then restart the HMI device.
● If you want do not want to restart the HMI device, press the "No" button.
The message ends. There will be no restart.
Result
The HMI device starts.

6.3.6.8 Displaying information about the HMI device
Introduction
You will need the device-specific information if you contact A&D Technical Support.
Requirements
You have opened the "OP Properties", dialog "Device" tab with the "OP" icon.
The HMI device-specific information is displayed in the "Device" tab.
The data displayed are device-specific and may therefore deviate from that of your
HMI device.

① HMI device name

② Version of the HMI device image
⑤ Size of the internal flash memory in which the HMI device image and project are stored
⑥ MAC address of the HMI device
⑦ See section Restarting the HMI device (Page 162)
Note
The size of the internal flash memory does not correspond to the available working memory
for a project.

6.3.6.9 Displaying system properties
Introduction
The general system-specific information provides you with information about the processor,
operating system and memory.
Requirements
You have opened the "System Properties" dialog box, "General" tab, by touching the
"System" icon.
The data displayed are device-specific and may therefore deviate from that of your
HMI device.
① Copyright to Microsoft Windows CE

② Details on processor and size of internal Flash memory
Result
The system properties are displayed. This dialog is read-only. Close the dialog.

6.3.6.10 Displaying memory distribution
Introduction
The "Memory" system-specific information provides you with information about the
distribution and size of the memory in the HMI device.
NOTICE
"Memory" tab
Do not change the memory distribution in the "Memory" tab.
Applies for the usage of options:
An alteration to the memory distribution may be necessary. Please refer to the
accompanying documentation for further information.
Requirements
You have opened the "System Properties" dialog box, "Memory" tab, by touching the
"System" icon.
Procedure
1. Determine the HMI device's current memory structure.
2. Close the dialog.

6.3.6.11 Activate memory management
Memory management
Provided the memory management is activated, the HMI device will automatically close the
project if the memory needs reorganizing during an active project.
The project is shut down and the HMI device will display a message. You have to restart
the project.
NOTICE
Memory management
If you do not activate memory management, undefined states can occur during the runtime
of the project.
Activate the memory management.
Requirements
You have opened the "OP Properties" dialog, "Memory Monitoring" tab with the
"OP" icon.

① Maximum memory used since the HMI device was last switched on
② Percentage of memory currently used
③ Activate memory management
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If you want to enable memory management, activate the check box.
If memory management is active and there is not enough working memory,
the SIMATIC HMI runtime and therefore the current project will be closed.
The dialog closes.
Result
Memory management is activated.

6.3.7 Setting storage location
Introduction
There are various storage locations available for storing the compressed source file of your
project. The following describes how you can set the storage location.
Requirements
You have opened the "Transfer Settings", dialog "Directories" tab with the
"Transfer" icon.
① Memory location for the project file

② Memory location for the compressed source file of your project for backtransfer
③ Storage location and initialization file of the HMI device for process operation
NOTICE
Settings under "Project File" and "Path"
The project may not open the next time the HMI device is started if changes are made in
the "Project File" and "Path" text boxes.
Do not change the entries in the "Project File" and "Path" text boxes.
Procedure
1. Select a memory location from the "Project Backup" input field.
The external memory card or the location in the data network can be defined as the
storage location. During the next backup process, the project's source file is stored in the
specified location.
The dialog closes.
Result
The storage location for the source file is now set.

6.3.8 Setting the delay time
Introduction
Once the HMI device has been switched on, a project can be started after a delay.
The Loader is displayed during the delay time.
Requirements
You have opened the "Transfer Settings", dialog "Directories" tab with the
"Transfer" icon.
NOTICE
Settings under "Project File" and "Path"
The project may not open the next time the HMI device is started if changes are made in
the "Project File" and "Path" text boxes.
Do not change the entries in the "Project File" and "Path" text boxes.
Procedure
1. Select the desired delay time in seconds from the "Wait [sec]" selection list.
With the value "0", the project starts immediately. It is then no longer possible to call the
Loader after switching on the HMI device. If you still wish to access the loader,
an operating element must be configured to close the project.
The dialog closes.
Result
The delay time for the HMI device is now set.

6.3.9 Enabling PROFINET IO
PROFINET IO
If the HMI device is connected to the PLC via PROFINET, function keys or buttons, for
example, can be configured as PROFINET IO direct keys. If PROFINET IO direct keys are
used in the project, they must be enabled.
Note
If you enable PROFINET IO direct keys, you cannot use the RS 422 / RS 485 port for
serial communication.
PROFINET IO direct keys and PROFIBUS DP direct keys are mutually exclusive.
Requirements
You have opened the "PROFINET" dialog with the "PROFINET" icon.

① Activating or deactivating the PROFINET IO direct keys

② Text box for the device name
③ MAC address of the HMI device
NOTICE
Inconsistent device name
If the device name does not match the device name entered in the HW Config of STEP 7,
the direct keys do not work.
Use the device name from the HW Config of STEP 7. This device name does not
correspond to the device name used under Windows CE.

Within the ETHERNET data network, the device name must be unique and satisfy the
DNS conventions. These include:
● The device name can consist of maximum 240 characters.
● If the device name is longer than 63 characters, it must be classified in the name
component. Each name component can consist of maximum 63 characters.
Name components are separated from each other by means of points.
Example: <Subdomain-Name>.<Domain-Name>.<Top-Level-Domain-Name>
● The device name may include characters, figures, hyphens or points.
● The device name must not start or end with a "-" character.
● The device name must not take the form n.n.n.n (n = 0 to 999).
● The device name must not start with the character sequence "port-xyz-" (x, y, z = 0 to 9).
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If you want to enable the PROFINET IO direct keys, activate the "PROFINET IO enabled"
check box.
2. Enter the device name of the HMI device.
The dialog closes.
Result
The PROFINET IO direct keys are enabled.

6.3.10 Changing transfer settings
6.3.10.1 Configuring the data channel
Introduction
Note
A project can only be transferred from the configuring PC to the HMI device when at least
Requirements
The "Transfer Settings" dialog, "Channel" tab has been opened with the
"Transfer Settings" icon.
① Group for the data channel 1 (Channel 1)

② Group for the data channel 2 (Channel 2)
③ Button for the "S7-Transfer Settings" and / or "Network and Dial-Up Connections" dialog

WARNING
Unintentional transfer mode could cause unintentional actions to be triggered in the plant.
Ensure that the configuring PC does not inadvertently switch the HMI device to transfer
mode during the open project.
NOTICE
"Remote control" for "Channel 1"
If the "Remote Control" check box is activated during "Online" operating mode,
the X10 / IF 1B port cannot be used for communication.
The "Remote Control" check box must be deactivated for "Online" operating mode.
Once the serial transfer is complete, in the "Channel 1" group you must therefore
deactivate the "Remote Control" check box.
Transfer mode using "Channel 2"
When the project on the HMI device starts, transfer parameters, e.g. HMI device address,
for MPI / PROFIBUS DP are overwritten with the values from the project.
You can change the settings for the transfer via "Channel 2".
The following steps are required:
• Close the project.
• Change the settings on the HMI device.
• Then return to "Transfer" mode.
The next time the project is started on the HMI device, the settings will be overwritten by
the values from the project.
Note
the settings only go into effect after the transfer function is restarted.
This may occur if the Control Panel is opened to change the transfer properties in an
active project.

Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If you want to enable a data channel, activate the "Enable Channel" check box in the
"Channel 1" or "Channel 2" group.
In the "Channel 1" group, the RS-422/RS-485 port is enabled for the serial data transfer.
The network port is enabled in the "Channel 2" group.
2. If you want to enable the automatic transfer, activate the associated "Remote Control"
check box.
3. If you have enabled the data channel for "Channel 2", select the log from the
selection list.
4. Enter further parameters if required.
Applies to "MPI / PROFIBUS / S7 Ethernet":
– Press the "Advanced" button to switch to the "S7-Transfer Settings" dialog box.
You can change the settings for MPI / PROFIBUS / S7 Ethernet there.
– Confirm your entries.
– The "S7-Transfer Settings" dialog box closes.
Applies to "ETHERNET":
– Use the "Advanced" button to change to "Network&Dial-Up Connections".
– Open the "LAN9115" entry. You can change the TCP/IP settings there.
– Confirm your entries.
– Close "Network&Dial-Up Connections".
Applies to "USB":
– No settings are needed for "USB".
The dialog closes.
Result

6.3.10.2 Changing MPI/PROFIBUS DP settings
Introduction
The communication settings for MPI, PROFIBUS DP and S7 Ethernet are defined in the
HMI device project.
In the following cases, the transfer settings might have to be changed:
● With the first project transfer.
● If changes are made to the project but are only applied later.
NOTICE
The bus parameters are read from the project currently loaded on the HMI device.
You can change the settings for MPI / PROFIBUS DP transfer. The following steps
are required:
• Close the project.
• Change the settings on the HMI device.
• Then return to "Transfer" mode.
The changed MP/PROFIBUS DP settings will be overwritten in the following cases:
• The project is started again.
• A project is transferred and started.
Transfer settings
the settings only go into effect after the transfer function is restarted.
Requirements
You have opened the "S7-Transfer Settings" dialog with the
"S7-Transfer Settings" icon.
① Network selection
② Button for opening the properties dialog

Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select a network.
If you have chosen S7 Ethernet, continue as described under
Changing the network configuration (Page 181).
2. Use the "Properties" button to open the "MPI" or "PROFIBUS" dialog.

① The HMI device is the only master on the bus.

② Bus address of the HMI device
③ Time-out
④ Data transmission rate in total network
⑤ Highest station address in the network
⑥ Profile
⑦ Button for displaying the bus parameters
3. If there are several masters connected on the bus, deactivate the

"Panel is the only master on the bus" check box.
NOTICE
The bus address in the "Address" text box must be unique throughout the
MPI/PROFIBUS DP network.

4. Enter the bus address for the HMI device in the "Address" text box.
5. Select the transmission rate from the "Transmission Rate" selection list.
6. Enter the highest station address on the bus in the "Highest Station Address" or
"Highest Station" text box.
7. With PROFIBUS settings: Select the required profile in the "Profile" selection list.
8. With PROFIBUS settings: If you want to view the profile data, press the "Busparameter"
button of the PROFIBUS dialog.
The profile data are displayed. The "Profile" dialog is read-only.
NOTICE
The bus parameters must be the same for all stations in the MPI/PROFIBUS DP
network.
9. Close the "Profile" dialog.

The dialog closes.
Result
The MPI/PROFIBUS DP settings of the HMI device have been changed.

6.3.11 Network operation
6.3.11.1 Overview
Introduction
You can connect the HMI device to a PROFINET network via the Ethernet port.
Note
The HMI device can only be used in PROFINET networks.
If Sm@rtService or Sm@rtAccess are not used on the HMI device, the following applies:
The HMI device only has client functionality in the PC network. This means that users can
access files of a node with TCP / IP server functionality from the HMI device via the network.
However, you cannot, for example, access data on the HMI device from a PC via the
network.
The Sm@rtService or Sm@rtAccess options enable access to an HMI device located
somewhere else.
Note
Information on communication using SIMATIC S7 via PROFINET is provided in the
"WinCC flexible communication" user manual.
The connection to a network offers, for example, the following options:

● Printing via a network printer
● Saving, exporting and importing of recipe data records on or from a server
● Transferring a project
● Saving data
Addressing
Within a PROFINET network, computers are usually addressed using computer names.
These computer names are translated from a DNS or WINS server to TCP/IP addresses.
This is why a DNS or WINS server is needed for addressing via computer names when the
HMI device is in a PROFINET network.
The corresponding servers are generally available in PROFINET networks.
Note
The use of TCP / IP addresses to address PCs is not supported by the HMI device's
operating system.
Consult your network administrator if you have questions in this regard.

Printing via a network printer

The HMI device's operating system does not support line by line alarm logging via a network
printer. All other printing functions, for example hardcopy or logs are available without
restriction via the network.
Preparation
Before beginning the configuration, request the following network parameters from your
network administrator.
● Does the network use DHCP for dynamic assignment of network addresses?
If not, get a new TCP/IP network address for the HMI device.
● Which TCP/IP address does the default gateway have?
● If a DNS network is used, what are the addresses of the name server?
● If a WINS network is used, what are the addresses of the name server?
General procedure for configuring the network

The HMI device must be configured prior to network operation. The configuration is basically
divided into the following steps:
1. Enter the computer name of the HMI device.
2. Configure the network address.
3. Set the logon information.
4. Save the settings.

6.3.11.2 Setting the device name of the HMI device
Introduction
The HMI device uses the device name to identify itself in the communication network.
Requirements
You have opened the "System Properties" dialog box, "Device Name" tab, by touching the
"System" icon.
① Device name of the HMI device

② Description for the HMI device (optional)
Note
To activate the network functions, enter a unique computer name in the Device name
input field.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the device name for the HMI device in the "Device name" text box.
2. If necessary, enter a description for the HMI device in the "Device description" text box.
The dialog closes.
Result
The device name for the HMI device is now set.

6.3.11.3 Changing the network configuration
Introduction
You can change the network settings for the LAN connection under
"Network&Dial-Up Connections".
Requirements
You have opened the following display by touching the
"Network&Dial-Up Connections" icon.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "LAN9115" entry.
The "'LAN9115' Settings" dialog opens.
2. If you need automatic issuing of addresses, select the "Obtain an IP address via DHCP"
radio button.
3. If you need manual issuing of addresses, select the "Specify an IP address" radio button.
4. If you have selected manual issuing of addresses, enter the corresponding addresses in
the following input fields:
– "IP Address"
– "Subnet Mask"
– If necessary: "Default Gateway"

5. If a name server is used in the network, change to the "Name Servers" tab.
6. If you wish to change the Ethernet settings, switch to the "Ethernet Parameters" tab.
For the data rate and the transmission speed of the Ethernet connection, the following is
set as default "Mode and Speed" "Automatic". With this setting, the HMI device detects
the data rate and the speed of communication via the Ethernet and automatically
employs it.
7. If you do not want to use these settings, select the required combination of data rate and
transmission speed in the selection list.
The dialog closes.
9. Close the "Network&Dial-Up Connections" display.
Result
The LAN connection parameters for the HMI device have been changed.

6.3.11.4 Changing the logon data
Introduction
Windows CE uses this logon data to gain access to the network resources. Enter the
user name, password and domain you have received from your administrator.
Requirements
You have opened the "Owner Properties" dialog with the "Network ID" icon.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the user name in the "User name" text box.
2. Enter your password in the "Password" text box.
3. Enter the domain name in the "Domain" text box.
The dialog closes.
Result
The logon information has now been set.

6.3.11.5 Changing e-mail settings
Requirements
You have opened the "WinCC flexible Internet Settings" dialog with the
"WinCC Internet Settings" icon.
① Setting the SMTP server

② Name for the sender
③ E-mail account
Note
Additional tabs may appear in the "WinCC flexible Internet Settings" dialog. This depends on
the options that have been enabled for network operation in the project.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Specify the SMTP server.
– Activate the "Use the default of the project file" radio button if you want to use the
SMTP server configured in the project.
– Deactivate the "Use the default of the project file" radio button if you do not want to
use the SMTP server configured in the project. Specify the required SMTP server.
2. Enter the name for the sender in the "Sender" text box.
3. Enter the e-mail account for your e-mail in the "Authentication" text box.
Some e-mail providers only allow you to send mail if you specify the e-mail account.
The "Authentication" text box can remain empty if your e-mail provider allows you to send
mail without checking the account.
The dialog closes.
Result
The e-mail settings have been changed.

6.3.11.6 Importing and deleting certificates
Overview
You can import, view and delete certificates that have been imported for the HMI device.
The certificates differ in the following ways:
● Certificates that you trust
● Own certificates
● Other certificates
You can import additional certificates and delete certificates that are not required.
The required settings can be obtained from your network administrator.
Requirements
You have opened the "Certificates" dialog with the "Certificates" icon.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the type of certificate from the selection list:
– "Trusted Authorities"
– "My Certificates"
– "Other Certificates"
2. If required, start the importing process with the "Import" button.
A dialog with source details will open.
3. If required, delete certificates with the "Remove" button.
Mark the desired certificate.
4. If you want to list the properties of the certificate marked, press the "View" button.
The dialog closes.
Result
The certificates have been changed.

6.3.12 Backup and restore
6.3.12.1 Saving to external storage device (backup)
Introduction
A backup involves copying the operating system, applications and data from the internal in
flash memory of the HMI device to an external storage device.
Requirements
● The HMI device features an external storage device with sufficient free space.
● You have opened the "Backup/Restore" dialog with the "Backup/Restore" icon.
Procedure - using a memory card for the first time
NOTICE
The first time you use a memory card the HMI device will request that you format the card.
Save a backup copy of memory card data to a PC before formatting.
Proceed as follows:
2. Remove the memory card from the HMI device.
4. Insert the memory card into the HMI device.

Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the "BACKUP" button to open the "Select Storage Card" dialog.
The --- no storage card available --- message appears if there is no external memory
in the HMI device or if this memory is defective. Insert an external memory or a
different one.
2. Select the external memory for backup from the "Please select a Storage Card"
selection field.
3. Click on the "Start Backup" button.
The HMI device checks the external memory.
If an external memory with a greater memory capacity is needed, a message is
displayed. Acknowledge this message. Backup is aborted. Insert an external memory
with a greater memory capacity and restart the backup process.
If the "You may have an old backup on the storage card. Do you want to delete it?"
message appears, there is already a backup on the external memory. If you do not want
to overwrite the backup, press the "No" button. Otherwise, click on the "Yes" button.
Several messages are displayed in sequence during the backup process:
– "Saving registry data"
– "Copy files"
A progress bar shows the status of the backup process. When the backup process is
completed, the following message is displayed:
"The operation completed successfully."
4. Acknowledge this message.
The dialog closes.
Result
The HMI device data is now saved on the external memory.

6.3.12.2 Restoring from external storage device
Introduction
A restore operation deletes the old data from flash memory of the HMI device on
confirmation. The data stored on the external memory is then copied to the internal
flash memory.
Requirements
● The external memory holding the backed up data is inserted in the HMI device.
● You have opened the "Backup/Restore" dialog with the "Backup/Restore" icon.
NOTICE
All data on the HMI device will be deleted during a restore operation. License keys are
deleted after counter-inquiry.
Back up the HMI device's data before restoring if required.
External memory with data backup
If several external memories with data backups are plugged in, the data cannot be
restored.
Remove the external memory with the data backups not needed.

Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select "RESTORE" to start restore.
The HMI device checks the external memory.
The HMI device issues messages in the following situations:
– The external memory is not available or is defective:
Acknowledge the displayed messages.
Replace the external memory.
– More than one external memory with valid backup is available:
Remove all external memories with backups that are not needed.
If necessary, you can check the available external memories using the
"REFRESH" button.
2. If necessary, start the restore process with the "RESTORE" button.
The data to be restored is checked.
When the check is complete, one of the following prompts is displayed:
– "You are starting RESTORE now. All files (except files on storage cards) and the
registry will be erased. Are you sure?"
At this point you can cancel the restore using the "No" button to prevent the data on
the HMI device from being deleted.
– You are now starting RESTORE. All files on the panel and the licenses listed below as
well as the registry will be erased. Are you sure?
This query is displayed when license keys are available both on the HMI device and in
the backup data. If necessary, cancel the restore process with the "No" button and first
back up the HMI device's license keys. For more information, refer to the section
"Transferring and transferring back license keys (Page 225)".
– Then restart the restore process.
3. Start to restore the data by selecting "Yes".
A progress bar shows the status of the restoration of the Windows CE image.
4. After successful restoration of the Windows CE image, the following message is
displayed: "Restore of CE Image is finished. The device will be rebooted now.
Don`t remove the storage card."
Acknowledge this message.
5. The HMI device starts. The operating system boots, opening the Loader and Restore
dialog in sequence.
6. The restore process is resumed. All data stored on the flash file system is restored.
Afterwards the following message is displayed: "Restore succesfully finished.
Press ok, remove your storage card and reboot your device."
7. Remove the external memory.
8. Acknowledge this message.
The HMI device starts.

Result
The data from the external memory is now on the HMI device.
Note
Calibrating the touch screen
After the reset, you may have to recalibrate the touch screen.
6.3.13 Setting the uninterruptible power supply
Introduction
UPS monitoring is an option you load as an add-on with ProSave.
A UPS ensures that the HMI device is shut down in a controlled manner after a buffer time in
the event of a power failure. This avoids the loss of data.
The following uninterruptible power supplies are supported:
● SITOP DC UPS modules as of a rated power value of 6 A, e.g. 6EP1931-2DC42
Connect the UPS to the 24-V input and a USB port. Configure the USB port for
UPS monitoring.
Requirements
You have opened the "UPS Properties", dialog "Configuration" tab with the "UPS" icon.

① Text box for the time after which the "Battery mode activated" message is displayed
② Check box for enabling battery mode
③ Text box for the time after which the "Faulty port" message is displayed
④ Check box for the "Faulty port" message

Procedure for setting the UPS

Proceed as follows:
1. Activate the "Battery mode" check box to enable battery mode.
2. Delete the entries in the "min" and "s" input fields.
You will receive a message when UPS takes effect.
If battery mode is enabled, the applications on the HMI device are closed after the
specified interval.
3. If the port to which the UPS is connected is faulty and you therefore want to receive a
message, activate the "Port disturbed" check box.
4. Select the desired message from the selection list.
5. Enter the time after which the "Faulty port" message is displayed in the "min" and "s"
input fields.
Result
Port monitoring for the UPS is set.
Procedure for displaying the USP status

To display the monitoring status of the USP, switch to the "Current Status" tab. If you want to
refresh the display, press the "Update" button.


Commissioning a project 7
7.1 Overview
Configuration and Process Control Phases

HMI devices can be used to operate and monitor tasks in process and production
automation. The plant screens on the HMI devices are used to provide a clearer overview of
active processes. The HMI device project, which includes the plant screens, is created
during the configuration phase.
Once the project is transferred to the HMI device and the HMI device is connected to a PLC
in the automation system, processes can be operated and monitored in the process
control phase.
&RQILJXUDWLRQSKDVH &RQILJXUDWLRQ3& &UHDWHSURMHFW

7HVWWKHSURMHFW
6LPXODWHWKHSURMHFW
+0,GHYLFHGHSHQGHQW
6DYHWKHSURMHFW
7UDQVIHUWKHSURMHFW
3URFHVVFRQWUROSKDVH
+0,GHYLFH 2SHUDWHWKHSURMHFW
&RQQHFWLRQWRWKH3/&
3/&

7.1 Overview
Transferring the project to the HMI device

To transfer a project to an HMI device, the following procedures can be selected:
● Transfer from the configuration PC
● Restore from a PC using ProSave
In this case, an archived project is transferred from a PC to the HMI device.
The configuration software need not be installed on this PC.
● On the TP 177B and OP 177B: Restoring from an external storage device
These procedures can be selected both during the initial startup as well as in the
recommissioning of a project.
Initial startup and recommissioning

● When the HMI device is initially started up there is no project at first.
The HMI device is also in this state after the operating system has been updated.
● When recommissioning, any project already on the HMI device is replaced.
See also
Transfer (Page 198)
Backup and Restore using WinCC flexible (Page 204)
Backup and Restore using ProSave (Page 206)
Backup and Restore Using a Memory Card (Page 105)
Restoring from external storage device (Page 188)

7.1 Overview
7.1.1 Setting the Operating Mode
Operating Modes
Operating modes of the HMI device:
● Offline
● Online
● Transfer
"Offline mode" and "Online mode" can be set on the configuration computer and on the
HMI device. To set these modes on the HMI device, use a corresponding operator control
object of the project.
Switching the Operating Mode

The configuration engineer must have configured an appropriate operator control object to
allow a change of the operating mode on the HMI device during ongoing operation.
"Offline" Operating Mode

In this mode, there is no communication between the HMI device and PLC. Although the
HMI device can be operated, it cannot exchange data with the PLC.
"Online" Operating Mode

In this mode, the HMI device and PLC communicate. You can operate the plant on the
HMI device according to your system configuration.
"Transfer" Operating Mode

In this mode, you can transfer a project from the configuration computer to the HMI device or
backup and restore HMI device data, for example.
The following options are available for setting "Transfer" mode on the HMI device:
● When the HMI device starts up
Start "Transfer" mode manually in the HMI device Loader.
● During ongoing operation
Start the "Transfer" mode manually within the project using an operator control object.
The HMI device toggles to "Transfer" mode when automatic mode is set and a transfer is
initiated on the configuring PC.

7.1 Overview
7.1.2 Reusing Existing Projects

You can reuse existing projects from the following HMI devices:
● Projects from TP 170A on the TP 177A or TP 177B
● Projects from TP 170B on the TP 177B
● Projects from OP 17 on the OP 177B
● Projects from OP 170B on the OP 177B
● Projects for the OP 77B for the TP 177B 4"
● Projects for the TP 177B 6" for the TP 177B 4"
The following cases are possible:
1. A project created with ProTool is available.
Migrate the project to WinCC flexible and then switch the HMI device.
2. A project created with WinCC flexible is available.
Switch the HMI device in WinCC flexible.
If you switch to TP 177B 4", the available images will automatically adapt to the broader
screen on the HMI device.
For more information, please see the online help for WinCC flexible or the
"WinCC flexible Migration" user manual.

7.1 Overview
7.1.3 Data Transmission Options
Overview
The table below shows the channels for data transfer between TP 177A, TP 177B or
OP 177B and a configuration computer.
Type Data channel TP 177A TP 177B 6", TP 177B 4"

OP 177B
Backup Serial Yes Yes Yes
MPI/PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes Yes
USB 3) – Yes Yes
PROFINET 4) – Yes Yes
Serial Yes Yes Yes
Restoring Serial, with reset to factory setting Yes 1) / No 2) No No
Serial Yes Yes Yes
USB 3) – Yes Yes
Updating the Serial, with reset to factory setting Yes Yes No
operating system Serial Yes Yes Yes
USB 3) – Yes Yes
PROFINET 4), with restore to – No Yes
factory setting
Transferring a Serial Yes Yes Yes
project MPI/PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes Yes
USB 3) – Yes Yes
Install or remove Serial – Yes Yes
option 3) MPI/PROFIBUS DP – Yes Yes
USB 3) – Yes Yes
Transferring license Serial – Yes Yes
keys and uploading MPI/PROFIBUS DP – Yes Yes
license keys 3)
USB 3) – Yes Yes
1) Applies to complete restoring

2) Applies to restoring the password list
3) Applies to TP 177B 6" DP, TP 177B 4" PN/DP, TP 177B 6" PN/DP, OP 177B DP, and
OP 177B PN/DP when using a USB master-master cable.
You will find more information about transferring via USB on the Internet at
"http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19142034."
4) Applies to TP 177B 4" PN/DP, TP 177B 6" PN/DP, and OP 177B PN/DP

7.2 Transfer
Serial data transmission with the TP 177A

You can use one of the following adapters for serial transmission between TP 177A and
a configuration PC:
● RS 232/PPI cable MM Multimaster
● USB/PPI cable MM Multimaster (as of manufacturer version 05 of the cable)
Serial data transmission with TP 177B and OP 177B

Use a PC / PPI cable, order number 6ES7 901-3CB30-0XA0, for serial transmission
between TP 177B or OP 177B and a configuration PC .
Resetting to factory settings via USB with TP 177B 6" and OP 177B
You can only use the USB/PPI cable MM Multimaster adapter (as of manufacturer version
05) if you have updated the operating system with reset to factory setting in stand-alone
mode via ProSave.
7.2 Transfer
7.2.1 Overview
Transfer
During transfer, the project is downloaded from the configuration computer to the
HMI device.
The "Transfer" mode can be started manually or automatically on the HMI device.
Transferred data is written directly to the flash memory on the HMI device. The transfer
function uses a data channel you need to configure before you initiate any transfers.

7.2 Transfer
7.2.2 Starting Manual Transfer
Introduction
You can manually switch the HMI device to "Transfer" mode as follows:
● With a configured operating element during ongoing operation.
● In the Loader of the HMI device.
Requirements
● The project "*.hmi" is opened in WinCC flexible.
● The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC.
● The data channel is configured on the HMI device.
● The HMI device is in "Transfer" mode.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Transfer settings" command in the menu
"Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
The "Select devices for transfer" dialog opens.
2. Select the HMI device in the left area of the dialog.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC.
Set the connection parameters.
4. Set the transfer parameters in the right area of the dialog.
5. Start transfer in WinCC flexible with "Transfer".
The configuring PC checks the connection to the HMI device. The project is transferred to
the HMI device. If the connection is not available or is defective, an error message is
displayed on the configuring PC.
Result
When the transfer is completed successfully, the project can be found on the HMI device.
The transferred project is then started automatically.
See also
Configuring the data channel (Page 172)
Setting the Operating Mode (Page 195)
Data Transmission Options (Page 197)
Overview (Page 198)

7.2 Transfer
7.2.3 Starting Automatic Transfer
Introduction
The HMI device can be automatically switched to "Transfer" mode during runtime as soon as
transfer is started on the configuring PC connected.
Automatic transfer is particularly suited for the test phase of a new project since transfer is
completed without interfering with the HMI device.
Automatic transfer is available for the following data channels:
HMI device Serial MPI/PROFIBUS DP USB PROFINET

TP 177A No Yes - -
TP 177B, OP 177B Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTICE
If the automatic transfer has been activated on the HMI device and a transfer is initiated on
the configuring PC, the project currently running is automatically stopped. The HMI device
then automatically switches to "Transfer" mode.
After the commissioning phase, deactivate the automatic transfer so that the HMI device
cannot be inadvertently switched to transfer mode. The transfer mode can trigger
unintentional actions in the device.
You can set a password for the Loader of the HMI device to restrict access to the transfer
settings and thus avoid unauthorized modifications.
Requirements
● The project *.hmi is opened in WinCC flexible.
● The automatic transfer is activated in the data channel for the transfer.
● The project is started on the HMI device.

7.2 Transfer
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Transfer settings" command in the menu
The "Select devices for transfer" dialog opens.
2. Select the HMI device in the left area of the dialog.
4. Set the transfer parameters in the right area of the dialog.
5. Start transfer in WinCC flexible with "Transfer".
The configuring PC checks the connection to the HMI device. The HMI device shuts
down the current project and automatically switches to "Transfer" mode. The project is
transferred to the HMI device. If the connection is not available or is defective, an error
message is displayed on the configuring PC.
Result
When the transfer is completed successfully, the project can be found on the HMI device.
The transferred project is then started automatically.
See also
Overview (Page 198)

7.2 Transfer
7.2.4 Testing a Project
Introduction
There are two options to test a project:
● Test the project on the configuring PC
You can test a project at a configuring PC, using a simulator. For detailed information,
refer to the "WinCC flexible" user manual and to the WinCC flexible Online Help.
● Offline testing of the project on the HMI device
Offline testing means that communication between the HMI device and PLC is down
while the test is being carried out.
● Online testing of the project on the HMI device
Online testing means that the HMI device and PLC communicate with each other
during testing.
Perform the tests, starting with the "Offline test", followed by the "Online test".
Note
You should always test the project on the HMI device on which the project will be used.
Check the following:

1. Check the correct layout of the screens.
2. Check the screen navigation.
3. Check the input objects.
4. Enter the tag values.
The test increases the certainty that the project will run error-free on the HMI device.
Requirements for offline testing

● The project has been transferred to the HMI device.
● The HMI device is in "Offline" mode.
Procedure
In "Offline" mode, you can test individual project functions on the HMI device without them
being affected by the PLC. PLC tags, therefore, are not updated.
Test the operating elements and visualization of the project as far as possible without
connecting to the PLC.
Requirements for online testing

● The project has been transferred to the HMI device.
● The HMI device is in "Online" mode.

7.3 Backup and Restore
Procedure
In "Online" mode, you can test individual project functions on the HMI device without them
being affected by the PLC. PLC tags are updated in this case.
You have the option to test all communication-dependent functions, for example alarms, etc.
Test the operating elements and views of the project.
See also
7.3.1 Overview
Backup and restoring

You can back up and restore the following data found in the internal flash memory of the
HMI device with a PC:
● Project and HMI device image
● User administration
● Recipe data
● License keys
Use one of the following tools for backup and restoring:
● WinCC flexible
● ProSave
General information
NOTICE
Power failure
If a complete restore operation is interrupted due to power failure on the HMI device, the
operating system of the HMI device may be deleted! In this case, you have to reset the
HMI device to its factory settings.
Compatibility conflict
If a message is output on the HMI device warning of a compatibility conflict during the
restore operation, the operating system must be updated.

7.3.2 Backup and Restore using WinCC flexible
Requirements
● No project is open in WinCC flexible.

Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Communication settings" command in the menu
The "Communication Settings" dialog opens.
2. Select the type of HMI device.
4. Close the dialog with "OK".
5. Select the "Backup" command in the menu "Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
The "SIMATIC ProSave [Backup]" dialog opens.
6. Select the data to be backed up.
7. Select a destination folder and a file name for the "*.psb" backup file.
8. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the HMI device automatically
sets "Transfer" mode when a backup is initiated.
9. Start the backup operation in WinCC flexible with "Start Backup" on the configuration PC.
Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible.
A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation.
Result
The system outputs a message when the backup is completed.
The relevant data is now backed up on the configuration PC.


Proceed as follows:
4. Set the connection parameters.
6. Select the "Restore" command in the menu "Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
The "SIMATIC ProSave [Restore]" dialog opens.
7. Select the "*.psb" backup file to be restored from the "Open" field.
You can see the HMI device for which the backup file was created and the type of
backup data the file contains.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when a restore operation is initiated.
9. Start the restore operation in WinCC flexible with "Start Restore" on the
configuration PC.
If there are license keys both on the HMI device and in the backup, a dialog box will
appear. Use this dialog to establish whether you want to overwrite the license keys or
abort the restore process.
– If necessary, abort the backup and first back up the License Keys of the HMI device.
For more information, refer to the section
10. Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible.
Result
When the restore is successfully completed, the data backed up on the configuring PC is
now on the HMI device.

7.3.3 Backup and Restore using ProSave
Requirement
● The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed.

Proceed as follows:
1. From the Windows Start menu, start ProSave on the PC.
2. Select the HMI device type in the "General" tab.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC.
4. Select the data to be backed up in the "Backup" tab.
5. Select the folder and file name for the backup file "*.psb."
If you are working with the TP 177A with WinCC flexible 2008 or higher and backup
recipes in CSV format, then select a folder. A CSV file is created for each recipe in
this folder.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the HMI device automatically
sets "Transfer" mode when a backup is initiated.
7. Start the backup operation in ProSave with "Start Backup".
Follow the instructions in ProSave.
Result
The system outputs a message when the backup is completed.
The relevant data is now backed up on the PC.


Proceed as follows:
5. Select the "*.psb" backup file to be restored from the "Restore" tab.
You will receive information for which HMI device the backup file was created and which
type of backup data are available in the file.
If you are working on a TP 177A with WinCC flexible 2008 or higher and want to restore
recipes in CSV format, then select one or more CSV files from the source directory.
"Transfer" mode when a restore operation is initiated.
7. Start the restore operation in ProSave on the PC with "Start Restore".
If there are license keys both on the HMI device and in the backup, a dialog box will
appear. Use this dialog to establish whether you want to overwrite the license keys or
abort the restore process.
– If necessary, abort the backup and first back up the License Keys of the HMI device.
For more information, refer to the section
8. Follow the instructions in ProSave.
Result
When the restore is successfully completed, the data backed up on the PC is now on the
HMI device.
Procedure for restoring by resetting to factory settings on the TP 177A

On the TP 177A, when restoring data you can also reset the HMI device to factory settings.
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch off power to the HMI device.
2. Execute steps 1 through 5 as described in "Procedure for restoring".
3. Select the "Bootstrap" check box.
4. Execute steps 7 through 8 as described under "Procedure for restoring".
5. Switch on the power supply of the HMI device.
Result
When the restore is successfully completed, the data backed up on the PC is now on the
HMI device.
The HMI device is reset to factory settings.

7.4 Updating operating systems on the TP 177A, TP 177B 6" and OP 177B
7.4 Updating operating systems on the TP 177A, TP 177B 6" and

OP 177B
7.4.1 Overview

A compatibility conflict may occur when transferring a project to the HMI device. This is
caused by different versions of the configuration software used and the HMI device image
available on the HMI device. If there are different versions, the transfer is aborted.
A message indicating a compatibility conflict is displayed on the configuring PC.
There are two ways to match the versions:
● Update the HMI device image if the project was created with the most recent version of
the configuration software.
● Transfer a matching older version of the HMI device image if you do not want to adapt the
project to the most recent version of the configuration software for the project.
NOTICE
Data loss
All data on the HMI device, such as the projects and passwords, will be deleted when
you update the operating system.
Data channels
An operating system update resets all parameters for the data channels. The transfer
can only be started in the Loader following reconfiguration of the data channels.
Note
After updating, you may have to re-calibrate the touch screen.

7.4.2 Resetting to factory settings
Resetting to factory settings

In ProSave or WinCC flexible, you can update the operating system with or without resetting
to factory settings, depending on the HMI device used.
● Updating the operating system without reset to factory setting
First, set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device or use the automatic transfer function if the
project is active. Then start the operating system update in ProSave or WinCC flexible.
● Updating the operating system with reset to factory setting
First, start the operating system update in ProSave or WinCC flexible. Then switch the
power on the HMI device off and on again.
Note
Updating the operating system by resetting to factory settings must be carried out in the
following cases:
• No operating system is loaded on the HMI device.
• The operating system of the HMI device is damaged.
Point-to-point coupling with a PC / PPI cable is necessary in order to update the
operating system with reset to factory settings.
In ProSave or WinCC flexible, set the "Reset to factory state" check box status according to
your selected operating system update mode.
7.4.3 Updating the operating system with WinCC flexible
Requirements
● When updating the operating system without reset to factory setting only:
The data channel is configured on the HMI device.

Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. When updating the operating system with reset to factory setting only:
Switch off power to the HMI device.
2. On the configuration PC, select the "Communication settings"
command in the menu "Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible. The dialog
"Communication settings" opens.
4. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuration PC, then set
the connection parameters.
6. In WinCC flexible, select the command "OS Update" in the "Project > Transfer" menu.
7. Select whether to update the operating system with / without resetting to factory settings
by setting the "Reset to factory settings" check box accordingly.
8. In "Image path", select the HMI device image file "*.img".
The HMI device image files are available under "WinCC flexible Images" in the
WinCC flexible installation folder or on the WinCC flexible installation CD.
In the output area, you are provided information on the version of the HMI device image
file after it is opened.
9. When updating without reset to factory setting only:
Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
"Transfer" mode when an update is initiated.
10. In WinCC flexible, select "Update OS" on the configuration PC to run the operating
system update.
11. When updating with reset to factory setting only:
Switch on the power supply to the HMI device.
During the operating system update a status view opens to indicate progress.
Result
A message is displayed when the operating system update is successfully completed.
This operation has deleted the project data from the HMI device.

7.4.4 Updating the operating system with ProSave
Requirement
● When updating the operating system without reset to factory setting:
The data channel is configured on the HMI device.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. When updating the operating system with reset to factory setting:
Switch off power to the HMI device.
4. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC, then set the
connection parameters.
5. Select the "OS Update" tab.
6. Select whether to update the operating system with / without resetting to factory settings
by setting the "Reset to factory settings" check box accordingly.
8. When updating without reset to factory setting:
Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
"Transfer" mode when an update is initiated.
9. Select "Update OS" on the PC to run the operating system update.
10. When updating with reset to factory setting only:
Switch on the power supply to the HMI device.
Result

7.5 Updating the operating system on the TP 177B 4"
7.5.1 Overview

A compatibility conflict may occur when transferring a project to the HMI device. This is
caused by different versions of the configuration software used and the HMI device image
available on the HMI device. If there are different versions, the transfer is aborted.
A message indicating a compatibility conflict is displayed on the configuring PC.
There are two ways to match the versions:
● Update the HMI device image if the project was created with the most recent version of
the configuration software.
● Transfer a matching version of the HMI device image if you do not want to adapt the
project for the HMI device to the most recent version of the configuration software for
the project.
NOTICE
Data loss
All data on the HMI device, such as the project and passwords, will be deleted when
you update the operating system.
Note
After updating, you may have to re-calibrate the touch screen.

7.5.2 Resetting factory settings

In ProSave or WinCC flexible, you can update the operating system with or without resetting
to the factory setting.
● Updating the operating system without resetting to factory settings
First, switch into "Transfer" mode on the HMI device or use the automatic transfer
function if the project is active. Then start the operating system update in ProSave or
WinCC flexible.
● Updating the operating system with resetting to factory settings
Note
Updating the operating system by resetting to factory settings must be carried out in the
following cases:
• No operating system is loaded on the HMI device.
• The operating system of the HMI device is damaged.
NOTICE
Loss of license keys
The license keys on the HMI device will be deleted when resetting to factory settings.
The license keys on the HMI device will be retained when updating the operating
system without resetting to factory settings.
NOTICE
Data channels
When resetting to factory settings, all data channel parameters are reset. The transfer
can only be started following reconfiguration of the data channels.

7.5.3 Updating the operating system using WinCC flexible
Requirements
● No project is open on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible.
● The HMI device is connected to this configuring PC.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. On the configuring PC, select the "Communication settings" command from the
"Projekt > Transfer" menu in WinCC flexible.
6. In WinCC flexible, select the command "OS Update" from the "Projekt > Transfer" menu.
8. Switch into "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If you have activated automatic transfer mode for the HMI device, the device
automatically switches to "Transfer" mode when an update is initiated.
9. In WinCC flexible, select "Update OS" on the configuring PC to run the operating
system update.
Result

7.5.4 Updating the operating system using ProSave
Requirements
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
5. Select the "OS Update" tab.
7. Switch into "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If you have activated automatic transfer mode for the HMI device, the device
automatically switches to "Transfer" mode when an update is initiated.
8. Select "Update OS" n the PC to run the operating system update.
Result

7.5.5 Resetting to factory settings with WinCC flexible
Requirements
● No project is open on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible.
● The HMI device is connected to this configuration PC over the standard Ethernet cable.
● Have the MAC address of the Ethernet interface on your HMI device to hand.
– The MAC address is displayed briefly when the HMI device is turned on.
– The MAC address is displayed in the "PROFINET" dialog in the Control Panel.
Procedure - Setting the PC interface

1. Select "Start > Control Panel > Set PG / PC interface" on the configuration PC.
2. Select "S7ONLINE (STEP7) -> TCP / IP" from the "Application access point" area.
3. Select the interface which is connected to the HMI device from the "Interface
parameterization used" area.
Procedure - Restoring factory settings

Proceed as follows:
2. Select the HMI device type from the "General" tab, and select "Ethernet" from the
"Connection" area.
3. Enter an IP address.
Note
Possible address conflicts with incorrect IP address
Do not use a dynamic IP configuration for "Reset to factory settings".
Specify a unique IP address in which the configuration PC is located. For the duration of
the update process, the HMI device is automatically assigned to the specified address.
If the HMI device has already been used with WinCC flexible or ProSave you can use
the existing IP address for "Reset to factory settings."


5. In WinCC flexible, select the command "Update OS" in the "Project > Transfer" menu.
6. Activate the "Reset to factory settings" check box.
A text box opens where you can enter the MAC address.
7. Enter the HMI device's MAC address in the text box.
9. In WinCC flexible, select "Update OS" on the configuring PC to run the operating
system update.
10. In the Control Panel of the HMI device, open the "OP Properties" dialog and select the
"Device" tab.
11. Click on the "Reboot" button.
A query is opened.
12. Click on the "Prepare for Reset" button.
13. On the configuration PC, follow the instructions in WinCC flexible.

Result
This operation has deleted the project data from the HMI device. The factory settings
are reset.
Note
If you can no longer call the Control Panel on the HMI device, as the operating system is
missing, switch off the HMI device. Then reset to factory settings and restart the HMI device.
If the HMI device doesn´t start up, switch it off and then on again.
Note
7.5.6 Resetting to factory settings with ProSave
Requirement
● The HMI device is connected over the Ethernet to a PC on which ProSave is installed.
● Have the MAC address of the Ethernet interface on your HMI device to hand.
– The MAC address is displayed briefly when the HMI device is turned on.
– The MAC address is displayed in the "PROFINET" dialog in the Control Panel.
Procedure - Setting the PC interface

1. Select "Start > Control Panel > Set PG / PC interface" on the configuration PC.
2. Select "S7ONLINE (STEP7) -> TCP / IP" from the "Application access point" area.
3. Select the interface which is connected to the HMI device from the "Interface
parameterization used" area.

Procedure - Restoring factory settings

Proceed as follows:
2. Select the HMI device type from the "General" tab, and select "Ethernet" from the
Connection area.
3. Enter an IP address.
Note
Possible address conflicts with incorrect IP address
Do not use a dynamic IP configuration for "Reset to factory settings".
Specify a unique IP address of the subnet in which the configuration PC is located.
For the duration of the update process, the HMI device is automatically assigned to the
specified address of ProSave.
If the HMI device has already been used with WinCC flexible or ProSave you can use
the existing IP address for "Reset to factory settings."

4. Change to the "OS Update" tab.

5. Activate the "Reset to factory settings" check box.
A text box opens where you can enter the MAC address.
6. Enter the HMI device's MAC address in the text box.
8. Select "Update OS" on the PC to start the "Reset to factory settings" process.
9. In the Control Panel of the HMI device, open the "OP Properties" dialog and select the
"Device" tab.
10. Click on the "Reboot" button.
A query is opened.
11. Click on the "Prepare for Reset" button.
Result
This operation has deleted the project data from the HMI device. The factory settings
are reset.
Note
If you can no longer call the Control Panel on the HMI device, as the operating system is
missing, switch off the HMI device. Then reset to factory settings and restart the HMI device.
If the HMI device doesn´t start up, switch it off and then on again.
Note

7.6 Installing and Removing Options
7.6.1 Overview
Options
You can install options on for the HMI device, for example, additional programs developed
especially for the HMI device.
You can also remove options from the HMI device.
Note
A license key may be need to run an option. The license key unlocks the option for use.
7.6.2 Installing and Removing Options using WinCC flexible
Requirements
Procedure for installing an option

Proceed as follows:
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC, then set
5. Select the "Options" command in the menu "Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
6. Select the desired option under "Available options".
"Transfer" mode when the installation of an option is initiated.
8. Start the installation of the option in WinCC flexible on the configuring PC with the
">>" button.
A status display appears indicating the progress of the installation.

Result
The option has now been installed on the HMI device.
Procedure for removing an option

Proceed as follows:
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC, then set
5. Select the "Options" command in the menu "Project > Transfer" in WinCC flexible.
6. Select the desired option under "Installed options".
"Transfer" mode when the removal of an option is initiated.
8. Start the removal of the option in WinCC flexible on the configuring PC with the
"<<" button.
A status display appears indicating the progress of the removal.
Result
The option has now been removed on the HMI device.
See also
Overview (Page 221)

7.6.3 Installing and removing options using ProSave
Requirements
Procedure for installing an option

Proceed as follows:
5. Select the "Options" tab.
6. Select the desired option under "Available options".
"Transfer" mode when the installation of an option is initiated.
8. Start the installation of the option in ProSave with the ">>" button.
A status display appears indicating the progress of the installation.
Result
The option has now been installed on the HMI device.
Procedure for removing an option

Proceed as follows:
5. Select the "Options" tab.
6. Press the "Device status" button to update the display.
7. Select the desired option under "Installed options".
"Transfer" mode when the removal of an option is initiated.
9. Start the removal of the option in ProSave with the "<<" button.
Follow the instructions in ProSave.
A status display appears indicating the progress of the removal.

7.7 Transfering License Keys and Transfering Them Back
Result
The option has now been removed on the HMI device.
See also
Overview (Page 221)
7.7.1 Overview
Transferring and transferring back license keys

With the purchase of an optional package, you obtain a specific user license with an
associated license key. Once you have installed an option, transfer a license key to the
HMI device. The license key unlocks an option for use.
You can also transfer back the license key from the HMI device to the storage location.
Note
You only transfer License Keys with the Automation License Manager or WinCC flexible.

7.7.2 Transferring and transferring back license keys
Requirements
● When transferring or transferring back using WinCC flexible:
No project is open on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible.
● The HMI device is connected to this configuring PC.
● The storage location and the license key awaiting transfer are ready.
Procedure for transferring a license key

Proceed as follows:
1. Switch to "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
2. When transferring using WinCC flexible:
Select the "License Keys" command in the menu "Project > Transfer".
The Automation License Manager opens.
When transferring using the Automation License Manager:
Start the Automation License Manager via the Windows Start menu.
3. In the Automation License Manager, select the command "Connect HMI device" in the
menu "Edit > Connect target system".
The "Connect Target System" dialog opens.
4. Under "Device Type", select the appropriate HMI device type.
5. Select the type of connection from the "Connection" box.
7. Select "OK".
The connection to the HMI device is established. The connected HMI device is displayed
in the left window of the Automation License Manager.
8. In the left window, select the source drive.
The right window displays the available license keys.
9. Drag one or more license keys from the right window and drop them on the HMI device in
the left window.
The license keys are then transferred to the HMI device.
Result
The license key is transferred from the storage location to the HMI device.

Procedure for transferring a license key back

Proceed as follows:
1. Switch to "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
2. When transferring back using WinCC flexible:
Select the "License Keys" command in the menu "Project > Transfer".
The Automation License Manager opens.
When transferring back using the Automation License Manager:
Start the Automation License Manager via the Windows Start menu.
3. In the Automation License Manager, select the command "Connect HMI device" in the
menu "Edit > Connect target system".
The "Connect Target System" dialog opens.
4. Under "Device Type", select the appropriate HMI device type.
5. Select the type of connection from the "Connection" box.
7. Select "OK".
The connection to the HMI device is established. The connected HMI device is displayed
in the left window of the Automation License Manager.
8. In the left window, select the HMI device.
The right window displays the available license keys.
9. Drag one or more license keys from the right window and drop them on the destination
drive in the left window.
The license keys are transferred back to the storage location.
Result
The license key is transferred back from the HMI device to the storage location.
See also
Overview (Page 224)

Operating a Project 8
8.1 Operating a Project on the TP 177A
8.1.1 Overview
Using Operator Controls on the Touch Screen

Operator controls are touch-sensitive objects on the HMI screen such as buttons, I/O fields
and alarm windows. Touch objects are basically operated in the same way as mechanical
keys. You activate operator controls by touching them with your finger.
Some operations with the project may require in-depth knowledge about the specific plant on
the part of the operator. It is therefore important to take special care, for example, in
displaying typing. Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
CAUTION
Always touch only one operator control on the screen. Never touch more than one operator
control at a time, otherwise you may trigger unintentional actions.
CAUTION
Do not use any pointed or sharp objects when operating the touch screen as this may
damage the plastic membrane of the touch screen.
Operation Feedback
The HMI provides optical feedback when it detects that an operator control has been
touched. This feedback is independent of any communication with the PLC. Therefore,
this feedback does not indicate whether the relevant action is actually executed or not.
The configuration engineer may also have configured the feedback function in a different
manner. Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.

Operating a Project
Optical Operation Feedback

The type of optical feedback depends on the operator control object:
● Buttons
The HMI outputs different views of the "Touched" and "Untouched" states, provided the
configuration engineer has configured a 3D effect:
– "Touched" state:
– "Untouched" state:
The configuration engineer defines the appearance of a selected field, for example,
its line width and color for the focus.
● Invisible buttons
The focus for invisible buttons is not identified after selection by default. No optical
operation feedback is provided in this case.
The configuration engineer may, however, configure invisible buttons so that their outline
appears as lines when touched. This outline remains visible until the you select another
operator control object.
● I/O fields
After you touch an IO field, a screen keyboard appears as optical operation feedback.

Operating a Project
8.1.2 Setting the Project Language
Introduction
The HMI device supports multilingual projects. You need to configure a corresponding
operator control object which lets you change the language setting on the HMI device
during runtime.
The project always starts with the language set in the previous session.
Requirements
● The relevant project language must be available on the HMI device.
● The language switching function must be logically linked to a configured operator control
object such as a button.
Selecting a Language
You can change project languages at any time. Language-specific objects are immediately
output to the screen in the relevant language when you switch languages.
The following options are available for switching the language:
1. A configured operator control object switches from one project language to the next
in a list.
2. A configured operator control directly sets the desired project language.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.

Operating a Project
8.1.3 Entries and Help within a Project
8.1.3.1 Overview
Procedure
Values are entered in the project input fields. The values are transferred from the input fields
to the PLC.
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the input field required on the screen.
Based on your configuration, you can enter the following type of values in the input field:
– Numerical
– Alphanumerical
– Symbolic
– Date/time
2. Set the value.
3. Confirm the entry.
Screen keyboard
When you touch an input object such as an IO field on the HMI touch screen, a screen
keyboard appears. This screen keyboard is also displayed when it is necessary to enter a
password to access protected functions. The keyboard is automatically hidden again when
input is complete.
Based on the configuration of the input object, the system opens a screen keyboard for
entering numerical, alphanumerical or symbolic values.
Note
The screen keyboard display is independent of the configured project language.
Numerical values
You can enter numerical values character-by-character using the numerical screen keyboard
Formats for Numerical Values

You can enter values in numerical input fields based on the following formats:
● Decimal
● Hexadecimal
● Binary

Operating a Project
Limit Value Test of Numerical Values

Variables can be assigned limit values. The current limit values are indicated in the
numerical screen keyboard. If an Alarm window has been configured, a system message is
automatically output to indicate any violation of the configured input value limits.
For example, 80 exceeds the configured limit value of 78. The entered value entered is
rejected. The original value is displayed again.
Decimal places for numerical values

If a numerical input field is configured for a specific number of decimal points, decimal places
in excess of the limit are ignored. Empty decimal places are filled with "0" after the number is
confirmed.
Alphanumerical values
Alphanumerical values (numbers and letters) can be entered character-by-character using
the alphanumerical screen keyboard.
Symbolic values
Symbolic values are entered from a list of predefined entries using the symbolic
screen keyboard.
Date and time

You can enter date/time values character-by-character using the alphanumerical
screen keyboard
8.1.3.2 Entering and Editing Numerical Values
Numerical screen keyboard

When you touch an IO field on the HMI touch screen, the numerical screen keyboard
appears. The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete.
The display of the screen keyboard with a vertical mounting of the HMI device slightly
differentiates from the figure above.

Operating a Project
Procedure
Numerical and hexadecimal values can be entered character-by-character via the buttons on
the numerical screen keyboard.
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the required input field on the screen.
The numerical screen keyboard opens and the existing value is displayed in the
screen keyboard.
2. Enter the value.
You can only operate the keys that are displayed in the 3D view. The operation of the
keys depends on the nature of the values that are entered.
You have the following options to enter a value:
– The existing value is deleted when you enter the first character. Completely reenter
the value.
– Use the and keys to move the cursor within the current value. You can
now edit or add to the characters of the current value.
Use the key to delete the character to the left of the cursor.
– Change the sign of the value using the key.
– Select the key to view the infotext of the IO field.

This button is only enabled if infotext has been configured for the IO field or for the
screen which contains the IO field.
3. Use the key to confirm your entry or cancel it with . Either action closes the
screen keyboard.
Note
Numerical I/O fields can be assigned limit values. The entered values are only accepted
if they lie within these limits. Values outside of the configured limits are not accepted.
A system alarm is then triggered on the HMI device.
When the screen keyboard appears, the high and low limit values are indicated if
configured.
Result
You have changed the numerical value or entered a new one.

Operating a Project
8.1.3.3 Entering and Editing Alphanumerical Values
Alphanumerical Screen Keyboard

When you touch an IO field on the HMI touch screen, the alphanumerical screen keyboard
appears. The keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete.
Figure 8-1 Alphanumerical screen keyboard, normal level
The layout of the screen keyboard for a vertically mounted HMI device differs slightly from
that shown in the figure above.
Keyboard Levels
The alphanumerical keyboard is organized on several levels:
● Normal level
● Shift level

Operating a Project
Procedure
You can enter alphanumerical values character-by-character using the alphanumerical
screen keyboard.
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the relevant IO field on the screen.
The alphanumerical screen keyboard opens and displays the current value.
2. Set the value.
The following options for entering values are available:
– The current value is deleted when you enter the first character. Enter the value again.
now edit the characters of the current value or add characters.
Use the key to delete the character to the left of the cursor.
– You can quickly switch between screen keyboard level using he key. When you
toggle the level, the key labels on the screen keyboard change.
– Select to view the infotext of the IO field.

This button is only enabled if infotext has been configured for the IO field or for the
screen which contains the IO field.
3. Select to confirm your entries or cancel them with . Both actions close the
screen keyboard.
Result
You have changed the alphanumerical value or entered a new one.

Operating a Project
8.1.3.4 Entering and Editing Symbolic Values
Symbolic Screen Keyboard

When you touch a symbolic IO field on the HMI touch screen, the symbolic screen keyboard
appears. The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete.
The display of the screen keyboard with a vertical mounting of the HMI device slightly
differentiates from the figure above.
Procedure
Enter the symbolic values using the symbolic screen keyboard.
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the required symbolic IO field on the screen.
The symbolic screen keyboard opens and the existing value is displayed in the
screen keyboard.
2. Select an item from the selection list.
– Set the cursor directly on the entry in the selection list, by touching the entry.
– Move the cursor to an entry in the selection list using the , , or
keys.
– Select the key to view the infotext of the symbolic IO field.

This button is only enabled if infotext has been configured for the symbolic IO field or
for the screen which contains the IO field.
screen keyboard.
Result
You have changed the symbolic value or entered a new one.

Operating a Project
8.1.3.5 Entering and Modifying the Date and Time
Entering the Date and Time

Enter the date and time in the same way you enter alphanumerical values.
Note
When entering the date and time, please note that the format is determined by the
configured project language.
See also
Entering and Editing Alphanumerical Values (Page 233)
Setting the Project Language (Page 229)
8.1.3.6 Viewing infotext
Purpose
The configuration engineer uses infotext to provide additional information and operating
instructions with respect to screens and operable screen objects.
Infotext can provide information on the value to be entered in an IO field, for example.
Infotext for Input Objects
Touch the key on the screen keyboard. This key is only enabled if infotext or the
current screen has been configured for the input object.
Note
Switching between displayed infotext
If infotext has been configured for an IO field and a screen, touching the infotext window
toggles between the two.

Operating a Project
Infotext for the Current Screen

Infotext can also be configured for screens. The infotext for the current screen is called up
or by the screen keyboard or by an operator control object assigned to this function.
Closing the Infotext

Close the infotext with .
8.1.4 Project security
8.1.4.1 Overview
Overview
The configuration engineer can protect the operation of a project by implementing a
security system.
The security system of the HMI device is based on permissions, user groups and users.
If operator control objects protected by a password are operated, the HMI device requests
the entry of a password. A logon screen is displayed in which you enter your user name and
password. After logging in, you can operate the operator control objects for which you have
the necessary permissions.
The logon dialog can be set up by the configuration engineer via an individual operator
control object.
In the same way, the configuration engineer can set up an operator control object to log off.
After logging off, objects assigned password protection can no longer be operated; to do so,
log in again.
Additional information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
User groups and permissions

Project-specific user groups are created by the configuration engineer. The "Administrators"
group is included in all projects by default. User groups are assigned permissions.
The permission required for an operation is specifically defined for each individual object and
function in the project.
The operating permissions can be saved with the "Backup" function.
Users
Each user is assigned to exactly one user group.
Users can be created as follows:
● By the configuration engineer during configuration
● By the administrator on the HMI device
● By a user with user management permission on the HMI device

Operating a Project
Logoff times
A logoff time is configured in the system for each user. If the time between any two user
actions, e.g, entering a value or changing screens, exceeds this logoff time, the user is
automatically logged off. The user must then log in again to continue to operate objects
assigned password protection.
Passwords
If an administrator or a user with administrator permission is logged on, all users on the
HMI device are displayed in the User view.
If a user without user management permission is logged on, only the personal user entry
is displayed.
The permissions of a user after logging in depends on the user group to the user is
assigned. Additional information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
The user data is encrypted and saved on the HMI device to protect it from loss due to
power failure.
Note
Depending on the transfer settings, changes to the user data are overwritten when the
project is transferred again.
User view
Use the User view to display the users on the HMI device.
HMI device are displayed in the User view. If a user without user management permission
is logged on, only the personal user entry is displayed.
The group to which each user is assigned is displayed next to the user names.
As administrator or user with user management permission, you can also add new users.
Use the "<New User>" entry.

Operating a Project
Backup and Restore

The users, passwords, group assignments and logoff times set up on the HMI device can be
backed up and restored. This prevents you having to enter all of the data again on another
HMI device.
NOTICE
During a restore, the currently valid user data is overwritten. The restored user data and
passwords are valid immediately.
Limits for User, Password and User View
Number of characters
Length of user name, maximum 40
Length of password, minimum 3
Length of password, maximum 24
Entries in user view, maximum 50
8.1.4.2 User logon
Requirements
Use the logon dialog to log into the security system of the HMI device. Enter user name and
password in the logon dialog.
You have the following options for displaying the logon dialog:
● Touch the operator control object with password protection.
● Touch an operator control object that was configured for displaying the logon dialog.
● Double-click on the "<ENTER>" entry in the User view.
● At the beginning of the project, the logon dialog will be automatically displayed in certain
circumstances.

Operating a Project
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the user name and password.
Touch the corresponding input field. The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed.
Note
The user name is not case-sensitive.
The password is case-sensitive.
Result
After successful logon to the security system, you can execute password-protected functions
on the HMI device for which you have permissions.
An error message is displayed if you enter the wrong password. In this case, no user is
logged in to the project.
8.1.4.3 User logoff
Requirements
You have logged into the security system of the HMI device.
Procedure
You have the following options for logging off:
● When no operator actions occur and the logoff time has expired, the user is automatically
logged off.
● Touching an operator control configured for logging off.
The current user is also logged off if an incorrect password is entered.
Result
The user is no longer logged into the project. In order to operate an operator control object
with password protection, you must first log in again.

Operating a Project
8.1.4.4 Create user
Requirements
New users are created in the user view.
To display the user view, switch to the screen that contains the user view.
To add a new user, you must have user management permission.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the "<New User>" entry in the user view.
2. Enter the desired user information.

Touch the corresponding input field. The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed.
– The password may not contain space characters or the special characters
* ? . % / \ ' ".
– For the logoff time, you can use values of 0 to 60 minutes. The value 0 stands for
"no automatic logoff."
Result
The new user is created.

Operating a Project
8.1.4.5 Changing user data
Requirements
Change user data in the user view.
The following options are available for the range of changes that can be made:
● The administrator or a user with user management permission can change the data for all
users on the HMI device system in the user view.
– User name
– Group assignment
– Password
– Logoff time
● Users without user management permission can only change their own user data.
– Password
– Logoff time
Note
You can only change the logoff time and password for the "Admin" user.
You can only change the logoff time for the "PLC_User". This user entry is used for
logging in via the PLC.
Procedure
This procedure describes changing user data by the administrator or a user with user
management permission.
Proceed as follows:
1. In the user view, touch the user whose user data you want to change.
2. Change the desired user data.

Result
The user data for the user is changed.

Operating a Project
8.1.4.6 Deleting a user
Requirements
You delete users in the user view:
To delete a user, you must have user management permission.
Note
The "Admin" and "PLC_User" users exist by default and cannot be deleted.
Procedure - Deleting a user

Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the user entry that you want to delete in the user view.
2. Touch the "User" input field.

3. Touch the button on the screen keyboard.

The existing user name is deleted from the screen keyboard.

The user name in the "User" input field is deleted.
Result
The user is deleted.

Operating a Project
8.1.5 Closing the project
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Use the corresponding operator control object to close the project.
Wait for the Loader to open after you closed the project.
8.1.6 Operating the Trend View
8.1.6.1 Overview
Trends
Trends continuously display the current process data.
Trend View
Trends are displayed in the Trend view. A Trend view can display up to four trends
simultaneously. The figure below shows an example of a Trend view:
① Ruler
② Trend value in the value table
The appearance, axes, value range and labels of the Trend view can be set by the
configuration engineer.
The configuration engineer can set limits for the trend values. A color transition can be
configured when the limits are exceeded.

Operating a Project
Value Table
The trend values can be read from the value table, if this is configured.
Ruler
The exact trend values can be read from the ruler, if this is configured.
8.1.6.2 Operating the Trend View
Value Table
The trend values are displayed in the value table. When the ruler is displayed, the trend
values are shown at a position of the ruler. When the ruler is hidden, the latest trend values
are displayed.
Ruler
When configured, a ruler is available to provide an exact reading of the individual values.
The position of the ruler can be changed by touching and dragging it on the touch screen.
The configuration engineer can configure the following actions for operator controls outside
the Trend display:
● Display or hide ruler
● Move ruler forward
● Move ruler backward
Other Operator Actions

the Trend display:
● Enlarge display of time intervals
● Reduce display of time intervals
● Scroll back by one display width
● Scroll forward by one display width
● Stop or resume trend recording

Operating a Project
8.2 Operating a project on TP 177B and OP 177B
8.2.1 Overview
Using Operator Controls on the Touch Screen

Operator controls are touch-sensitive objects on the HMI screen such as buttons, I/O fields
and alarm windows. Touch objects are basically operated in the same way as mechanical
keys. You activate operator controls by touching them with your finger.
Some operations with the project may require in-depth knowledge about the specific plant on
the part of the operator. It is therefore important to take special care, for example, in
displaying typing. Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
CAUTION
Always touch only one operator control on the screen. Never touch more than one operator
control at a time, otherwise you may trigger unintentional actions.
CAUTION
Do not use any pointed or sharp objects when operating the touch screen as this may
damage the plastic membrane of the touch screen.
Locking operator controls

The HMI provides optical feedback when it detects that an operator control has been
touched. This feedback is independent of any communication with the PLC. Therefore,
this feedback does not indicate whether the relevant action is actually executed or not.
The configuration engineer may also have configured the feedback function in a different
manner. Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.

Operating a Project
Optical Feedback from Operator Controls

The type of optical feedback depends on the operator control object:
● Buttons
The HMI outputs different views of the "Touched" and "Untouched" states, provided the
configuration engineer has configured a 3D effect:
– "Touched" state:
– "Untouched" state:
The configuration engineer defines the appearance of a selected field, for example,
its line width and color for the focus.
● Invisible buttons
The focus for invisible buttons is not identified after selection by default. No optical
operation feedback is provided in this case.
The configuration engineer may, however, configure invisible buttons so that their outline
appears as lines when touched. This outline remains visible until the you select another
operator control object.
● I/O fields
After you touch an I/O field, a screen keyboard appears as optical operation feedback.

Operating a Project
8.2.2 Operating keys on the TP 177B 4" and OP 177B
Function keys with global function assignment

A function key with global function assignment always triggers the same action on the
HMI device or in the PLC, regardless of the current screen. An example of such an action is
the activation of a screen or the closing an alarm window.
Function keys with local function assignment

A function key with local function assignment is screen-specific and is therefore only
effective within the active screen.
The function assigned to a function key can vary from screen to screen.
The function key of a screen can be assigned one function only, either a global or local one.
The local assignment function takes priority over the global setting.
Function keys as system keys

Function keys can also be configured as system keys. For example, they can function as the
numerical keypad, the cursor keypad or as a section of the alphanumerical keypad.
Multi-key operation
Unwanted actions may be triggered if the operator unintentionally actuates a key
combination.
CAUTION
Unintentional actions
In "Online" mode, simultaneous operation of more than two keys may cause unintentional
actions in the plant.
Do not press more than two keys simultaneously.

Operating a Project
8.2.3 Direct keys
Introduction
Direct keys on the HMI device are used to set bits in the I/O area of a SIMATIC S7.
Direct keys enable operations with short reaction times that are, for example, a jog
mode requirement.
NOTICE
Direct keys are still active when the HMI device is in "offline" mode.
NOTICE
If you operate a function key with direct key functionality in a running project, the direct
key function is always executed, independent of the current screen contents.
Note
You can only use direct keys when there is a connection via PROFIBUS DP or
PROFINET IO.
Direct keys result in additional basic load on the HMI device.
Direct keys
The following objects can be configured as a direct key:
● Buttons
● On TP 177B 4" and OP 177B: Function keys
You can also define image numbers in the case of HMI devices with touch operation.
In this way, you can configure the direct keys on an image-specific basis.
Further information on configuring direct keys can be found in the
"WinCC flexible Communication" system manual.

Operating a Project
8.2.4 Setting the project language
Introduction
The HMI device supports multilingual projects. You need to configure a corresponding
operator control object which lets you change the language setting on the HMI device
during runtime.
The project always starts with the language set in the previous session.
Requirements
● The relevant project language must be available on the HMI device.
● The language changeover function must be logically linked to a configured operator
control object such as a button.
Selecting a language
You can change project languages at any time. Language-specific objects are immediately
output to the screen in the relevant language when you switch languages.
The following options are available for switching the language:
1. A configured operator control object switches from one project language to the next
in a list.
2. A configured operator control directly sets the desired project language.
8.2.5 Entries and help within a project
8.2.5.1 Overview
Screen keyboard
When you touch an operating element requiring entry on the HMI device touch screen,
a screen keyboard appears. The screen keyboard is displayed in the following cases:
● An I/O field is selected for input.
● A password must be entered for accessing a password-protected function.
The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete.
Based on the configuration of the operating element, the system displays different screen
keyboards for entering numerical or alphanumerical values.
Note
The screen keyboard display is independent of the configured project language.

Operating a Project
General procedure
The operating elements of a screen are operated by touching the touch screen.
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired operating element within the screen.
2. Depending on the operating element, perform further actions. Detailed descriptions can
be found under the respective operating element.
Examples:
– I/O field: Enter numerical, alphanumerical or symbolic values in the I/O field.
– Symbolic I/O field: Select an entry from the selection list.
– Slider control: Move the slider control.
Procedure for text boxes

Values are entered in the project text boxes. Based on your configuration, the values are
saved to tags and transferred, for example, to the PLC.
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the desired text box within the screen.
Depending on your configuration, you can enter values in the text box in the following
manner:
– Numerical values, for example decimal numbers, hexadecimal numbers, binary values
– Alphanumerical values, for example digits and letters
– Date/time
2. Enter the value.
3. Confirm your entry with or discard your entry with the button .

Operating a Project
8.2.5.2 Entering numerical values on the TP 177A, TP 177B and OP 177B
Numerical screen keyboard

When you touch an operating element for numerical input on the HMI-device touch screen,
the numerical screen keyboard appears. This is the case, for example, for a text box.
The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete.
Note
Opened screen keyboard
When the screen keyboard is open, PLC job 51, "Select screen" has no function.
Formats for numerical values

You can enter values in numerical text boxes based on the following formats:
● Decimal
● Hexadecimal
● Binary
Limit value test of numerical values

Tags can be assigned limit values. The current limit values are indicated in the numerical
screen keyboard. If you enter a value that lies outside of this limit, it will not be accepted,
for example, 80 with a limit value of 78. In this case the HMI device will deliver a
system alarm, if an alarm window is configured. The original value is displayed again.

Operating a Project
Decimal places for numerical values

The configuration engineer can define the number of decimal places for a numerical text box.
The number of decimal places is checked when you enter a value in this type of I/O field.
● Decimal places in excess of the limit are ignored.
● Empty decimal places are filled with "0."
Procedure
Numerical and hexadecimal values can be entered character-by-character via the buttons on
the numerical screen keyboard.
Proceed as follows:
The numerical screen keyboard opens. The existing value is displayed in the
screen keyboard and is selected.
2. Enter the value.
You can only operate keys that are required for entering values. The keys with letters
cannot be used, for example, for entering a decimal value. Which keys can be operated
can be seen from the appearance of the keys.
– The selected value is deleted when you enter the first character. Completely reenter
the value.
Use the key to delete the character to the left of the cursor. If the value is
selected, use this key to delete the selected part of the value.
– Change the sign of the value using the key.
– Use the key to display the infotext of the I/O field.

This button is only enabled if infotext has been configured for the input object or the
current screen.
screen keyboard.
Result
You have changed the numerical value or entered a new one.

Operating a Project
8.2.5.3 Entering alphanumerical values on the TP 177A, TP 177B 6" and OP 177B
Alphanumerical screen keyboard

When you touch an operating element for numerical input on the HMI-device touch screen,
the alphanumerical screen keyboard appears. This is the case, for example, for an input field
or a date / time field. The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is
complete. The figure below shows the normal level of the alphanumerical screen keyboard.
Note
Language change
Language change in the project has no influence on the alphanumerical screen keyboard.
The entry of Cyrillic or Asian characters is therefore not possible.
Keyboard levels
The alphanumerical screen keyboard has various levels:
● Normal level
● Shift level
If you change the levels with key , the key assignments change.

Operating a Project
Procedure
Alphanumerical values can be entered character-by-character via the buttons on the
alphanumerical screen keyboard.
Proceed as follows:
The alphanumerical screen keyboard opens. The existing value is displayed in the
screen keyboard and is selected.
2. Enter the value.
the value.
– Using key it is possible to switch between the keyboard levels of the screen
keyboard. On switchover, the key assignments of the screen keyboard change.
– Use the key to display the infotext of the I/O field.

This button is only enabled if infotext has been configured for the input object or the
current screen.
screen keyboard.
Result
You have changed the alphanumerical value or entered a new one.

Operating a Project
8.2.5.4 Entering alphanumerical values on the TP 177B 4"
Screen keyboard
When you touch an operating element on the HMI-device touch screen, the screen keyboard
appears. This is the case, for example, for an input field or a date / time field. The screen
keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete.
Note
Language change
Language change in the project has no influence on the alphanumerical screen keyboard.
The entry of Cyrillic or Asian characters is therefore not possible.
Keyboard levels
All the keys on the screen keyboard are divided over several levels. Using the keys in the
fourth row of the keyboard you can toggle between levels whilst inputting. The following table
shows the levels of the screen keyboard and the associated calls:
Name Available keys Call

Normal level a to m Lowercase letters from a to m
Shift level A to M Uppercase letters from A to M

+
Normal level n to z Lowercase letters from n to z
Shift level N to Z Uppercase letters from N to Z

+
Normal level 0 to 9 Digits from 0 to 9
Normal level +-/* Special characters
Shift level +-/* Special characters

+

Operating a Project
Procedure
The required values can be entered character by character using the screen keyboard
buttons.
Proceed as follows:
The screen keyboard opens. The existing value is displayed in the screen keyboard and
is selected.
2. Enter the value.
the value.
– Using keys , , , and it is possible to switch

between the levels of the screen keyboard. On switchover, the key assignments
change.
screen keyboard.
Result
You have changed the value or entered a new one.

Operating a Project
8.2.5.5 Entering and editing symbolic values
Selection list
When you touch a symbolic IO field on the HMI touch screen, a selection list appears.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the required symbolic IO field.
The selection list of the symbolic IO field is displayed. You can scroll through the
selection list with the and buttons.
2. Select an entry in the selection list.
Touch an entry to select it. This is then taken by the controller.
Result
You have changed the symbolic value or entered a new one.
8.2.5.6 Entering the Date and Time
Entering the date and time

Enter the date and time in the same way you enter alphanumerical values.
Note
When entering the date and time, please note that the format is determined by the
configured project language.
See also
Setting the project language (Page 250)

Operating a Project
8.2.5.7 Viewing Infotext
Purpose
The configuration engineer uses infotext to provide additional information and operating
instructions with respect to screens and operable screen objects.
Infotext can provide information on the value to be entered in an IO field, for example.
Infotext for Input Objects
Touch the key on the screen keyboard. This key is only enabled if infotext or the current
screen has been configured for the input object.
Note
Switching between displayed infotexts
If infotext has been configured for an IO field and a screen, touching the infotext window
toggles between the two.
Infotext for Other Operator Controls

Infotext can also be configured for operator controls, such as buttons. The infotext of the
selected operator control can be displayed by pressing a configured function key.
Infotext for the Current Screen

Infotext can also be configured for screens. The infotext for the current screen is called up or
by the screen keyboard or by an operator control object assigned to this function.
Closing the Infotext

Close the infotext with .

Operating a Project
8.2.6 Operating a Gauge
Introduction
The gauge displays analog numerical values using a pointer. The operator at the HMI device
can thus see at a glance, for example, that the boiler pressure is in the normal range.
Appearance
The appearance of the gauge depends on the configuration.
● A trailing pointer can display the maximum value reached so far on the scale. The trailing
pointer is reset when the screen is reloaded.
● The label on the scale can show the measured variable, e.g. boiler pressure, and the
physical unit, e.g. bar.
Operation
The gauge is for display only and cannot be controlled by the operator.

Operating a Project
8.2.7 Using Switches
Introduction
The switches described in the following have two circuit states. Each circuit state is assigned
a fixed value. When you operate the switch, it changes to the opposite circuit state and
thereby activates the configured value.
Switches can contain sliders, texts or graphics for a specific project.
Procedure - Switch with Slider

Proceed as follows:
Move the slider on the touch screen of the HMI device to the other position or double-click
the slider area.
① Slider
Result
The slider is now in the other position. The assigned value is activated.
Procedure for a slider with text or graphic

Proceed as follows:
Touch the switch on the touch screen of the HMI device.
Result
The switch changes its appearance. The associated value is switched.

Operating a Project
8.2.8 Using a Slider
Introduction
With the slider control you can change and monitor process values within a defined range.
The slider control can also be configured without a slider. No value is entered in this case.
The slider control servers only to display values.
① Slider control for entering values

② Value display with current value
Appearance
You can configure the appearance and the elements of the slider control. The slider control
can contain a label and a setting range, for example. The current value can be configured to
appear below the area of the slider control.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the slider.
2. Move the slider to the required value.
If a value display has been configured, you can check the exact value that has been set.
3. Release the slider.
The set value is applied.
Result
The assigned value has been changed.

Operating a Project
8.2.9 Using the Status Force Display
Use
You read or write access values of the connected controller directly in the status force view.
The status force view allows you to carry out operations such as monitoring or modifying the
addresses of the controller program, without the need of an online connection via PC or PG.
Note
The status force view can only be used in combination with SIMATIC S5 or
SIMATIC S7 controllers.
Appearance
The figure shows the general layout of the status force view. A value can be monitored and
controlled on every line.
The configuration engineer specifies which columns appear in the status force view.
The table shows the significance of the potential columns.
Column Function
"Connection" The PLC of which the address ranges are to be displayed
"Type", "DB Number", "Offset", "Bit" The address range of the value
"Data type", "Format" The data type of the value
"Status value" The value read from the specified address
"Control value" The value to be written to the specified address
Change column sequence

You change the column sequence if this has been configured. To reverse the "Format" and
"Control Value" columns, for example, touch the "Format" header on the touch screen of the
HMI device. Keep the touch screen pressed and drag the column heading to the
"Control Value" heading.

Operating a Project
Operating elements
The buttons have the following functions when configured:
Button Function
"Read" button
Updates the display in the "Status value" column.
The button engages when it is pressed. You cannot operate any input fields until
the button is actuated again and the refresh is stopped.
"Write" button
Applies the new value in the "Control value" column. The control value is then
written to the PLC.
Procedure for reading the status value

Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the address and the desired format of a value for each line. Touch the respective
columns to display the screen keyboard.
2. Once you have entered all of the desired values, touch the button.
Result
All values are read cyclically by the controller and entered in the "Status Value" column until
the button is touched again.
Requirements for controlling

The following requirements must be met to control values:
● The "Control value" column must be available.
● The "Write" button must be available.
Procedure - Controlling a value

Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the address of a value for each line. Enter the desired value in the "Control value"
column. Touch the respective columns to display the screen keyboard.
2. Once you have entered all of the desired values, touch the button.
Result
The values from the "Control value" column are transferred once to the PLC.

Operating a Project
8.2.10 Operating the Sm@rtClient View
Overview
The Sm@rtClient view for PN/DP HMI devices enables you to remotely monitor and operate
an ongoing project on another HMI device. When properly configured, you can also access
several democratic HMI devices on a remote HMI device.
Procedure - Starting Remote Operation

Proceed as follows:
1. Switch to the screen with the Sm@rtClient view on the HMI device.
The following options are available to establish a connection to the remote HMI device:
– The connection is automatically established.
– The connection must be established by touching the appropriate button.
You may be required to enter the address of the remote HMI device and a password.
2. The current screen of the ongoing project on the remote HMI device now appears on your
HMI device.
3. You can now monitor and control this screen according to your configuration.
Scroll bars are displayed if the screen of the remote HMI device is larger than that of the
current HMI device.
Monitoring mode
If the Sm@rtClient view is configured for monitoring mode, you can only monitor the remote
HMI device. You cannot control its operation.
Operating the function keys on the OP 177B and TP 177B 4"

The following options are available for operating the function keys:
● When a local function is configured for the function key:
The function key effects your local HMI device.
● When no local function is configured for the function key:
The function key effects a remote HMI device.

Operating a Project
Procedure - Forcing Permissions

If several HMI devices have access to a HMI device, only one HMI device has operating
permission at any one time.
Two cases must be distinguished for this calculation:
● If another HMI device is already controlling the remote HMI device, you can configure for
emergency situations in which your HMI device is given forced permission to control the
remote HMI device.
– You attempt to operate the remote HMI device.
– A dialog appears in which you are prompted to enter the appropriate password for
remote control.
– You can now operate the remote HMI device.
● If another HMI device is accessing your HMI device via the Sm@rtClient view, you can
force local operating permission for your HMI device.
– Touch the screen of your HMI device five times in sequence.
– You now receive operating permission on the local HMI device.
Procedure - Ending Remote Operation

You can end remote monitoring and remote control with one of the following methods
depending on the configuration:
● By touching a button configured for this action.
● By exiting the screen containing the Sm@rtClient view.
● If configured, a menu appears when you touch an empty location for a given period.
Touch the menu item "Close".
Note
If another HMI device is accessing your HMI device via the Sm@rtClient view, this results in
additional load on your HMI device.

Operating a Project
8.2.11 Operating Trends
8.2.11.1 Overview
Trends
Trends continuously display the current process data.
Trend view
Trends are displayed in the Trend view. A Trend view can display several trends
simultaneously.
① Ruler
② Trend value in the value table
The appearance, axes, value range and labels of the Trend view can be set by the
The configuration engineer can set limits for the trend values. A color transition can be
configured when the limits are exceeded.
Value table
The trend values can be read from the value table, if this is configured.
Ruler
The exact trend values can be read from the ruler, if this is configured.

Operating a Project
8.2.11.2 Operating the Trend View
Value Table
The trend values are displayed in the value table. When the ruler is displayed, the trend
values are shown at a position of the ruler. When the ruler is hidden, the latest trend values
are displayed.
Ruler
When configured, a ruler is available to provide an exact reading of the individual values.
The position of the ruler can be changed by touching and dragging it on the touch screen.
the Trend display:
● Display or hide ruler
● Move ruler forward
● Move ruler backward
Other Operator Actions

the Trend display:
● Enlarge display of time intervals
● Reduce display of time intervals
● Scroll back by one display width
● Scroll forward by one display width
● Stop or resume trend recording

Operating a Project
8.2.12 Project Security
8.2.12.1 Overview
Overview
The configuration engineer can protect the operation of a project by implementing a
security system.
The security system of the HMI device is based on permissions, user groups and users.
If operator control objects protected by a password are operated, the HMI device requests
the entry of a password. A logon screen is displayed in which you enter your user name and
password. After logging in, you can operate the operator control objects for which you have
the necessary permissions.
The logon dialog can be set up by the configuration engineer via an individual operator
control object.
In the same way, the configuration engineer can set up an operator control object to log off.
After logging off, objects assigned password protection can no longer be operated; to do so,
log in again.
User Groups and Permissions

Project-specific user groups are created by the configuration engineer. The "Administrators"
group is included in all projects by default. User groups are assigned permissions.
The permission required for an operation is specifically defined for each individual object and
function in the project.
Users
Each user is assigned to exactly one user group.
Users can be created as follows:
● By the configuration engineer during configuration
● By the administrator on the HMI device
● By a user with user management permission on the HMI device
Logoff Times
A logoff time is configured in the system for each user. If the time between any two user
actions, e.g, entering a value or changing screens, exceeds this logoff time, the user is
automatically logged off. The user must then log in again to continue to operate objects
assigned password protection.

Operating a Project
Passwords
HMI device are displayed in the User view.
If a user without user management permission is logged on, only the personal user entry
is displayed.
The permissions of a user after logging in depends on the user group to the user is
assigned. Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
The user data is encrypted and saved on the HMI device to protect it from loss due to
power failure.
Note
Depending on the transfer settings, changes to the user data are overwritten when the
project is transferred again.
User View
Use the User view to display the users on the HMI device.
All users on the HMI device system are displayed in the User view to the administrator or to
a user with administrator permissions. When user management permission is lacking, only
the personal user entry is displayed.
The configuration engineer can implement simple or advanced User view in the project.
The two user views offer the same functions and differ only in the display of information.
Simple User View

The simple user view only displays the user name and user group.
Enhanced User View

The enhanced user view displays information about the users.

Operating a Project
Backup and Restore

The users, passwords, group assignments and logoff times set up on the HMI device can be
backed up and restored. This prevents you having to enter all of the data again on another
HMI device.
NOTICE
During a restore, the currently valid user data is overwritten. The restored user data and
passwords are valid immediately.
Limits for User, Password and User View
Number of characters
Length of user name, maximum 40
Length of password, minimum 3
Length of password, maximum 24
Entries in user view, maximum 50
8.2.12.2 User Logon
Requirements
Use the logon dialog to log into the security system of the HMI device. Enter user name and
password in the logon dialog.
You have the following options for displaying the logon dialog:
● Touching an operating element with password protection.
● Touching an operating element that was configured for displaying the logon dialog.
● Double-click the "<ENTER>" entry in the simple User view.
● At the beginning of the project, the logon dialog will be automatically displayed in certain
circumstances.

Operating a Project
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the user name and password.
Note
The user name is not case-sensitive.
The password is case-sensitive.
Result
After a successful logon to the security system, you can execute password-protected
functions on the HMI device for which you have authorizations.
If you enter an incorrect password, an error message is displayed when an Alarm window
has been configured.
8.2.12.3 User Logoff
Requirements
You have logged into the security system of the HMI device.
Procedure
You have the following options for logging off:
● The user is logged off automatically if no operations are carried out and if the logoff time
has been exceeded
● By touching the operating object that was configured for logging off
If an incorrect password is entered, the logged-on user is also logged off.
Result
The user is no longer logged into the project. In order to operate an operator control object
with password protection, you must first log in again.

Operating a Project
8.2.12.4 Creating a User
Requirements
New users are created in the user view.
To create a new user, you must have user management permission.
Procedure - Creating a User in the Simple User View

Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the "<New User>" entry in the user view.

The password may not contain space characters or the special characters * ? . % / \ ' ".

For the logoff time, you can use values of 0 to 60 minutes. The value 0 stands for
Result

Operating a Project
Procedure - Creating a User in the Advanced User View

Proceed as follows:
Enter the required user information on the empty lines of the User view.
● The password may not contain space characters or the special characters * ? . % / \ ' ".
● For the logoff time, you can use values of 0 to 60 minutes. The value 0 stands for
Result
8.2.12.5 Changing User Data
Requirements
Change user data in the user view.
The following options are available for the range of changes that can be made:
● The administrator or a user with user management permission can change the data for all
users on the HMI device system in the user view.
– User name
– Group assignment
– Password
– Logoff time
● Users without user management permission can only change their own user data.
– Password
– Logoff time, if configured
Note
You can only change the logoff time and password for the "Admin" user.
You can only change the logoff time for the "PLC_User". This user entry is used for
logging in via the PLC.

Operating a Project
Procedure - Changing User Data in the Simple User View

Proceed as follows:


Result

Operating a Project
Procedure - Changing User Data in the Advanced User View

Proceed as follows:
The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed.

Result
8.2.12.6 Deleting a User
Requirements
You delete users in the user view:
To delete a user, you must have user management permission.
Note
The "Admin" and "PLC_User" users exist by default and cannot be deleted.

Operating a Project
Procedure - Deleting a User in the Simple User View

1. Touch the user that you want to delete in the User view.
2. Touch the "User" input field.



Result
The user is deleted. The User view appears again.

Operating a Project
Procedure - Deleting a User in the Advanced User View

Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the user you want to delete in the "User" input field of the User view.


Result
The user is deleted.
8.2.13 Closing the Project
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Use the corresponding operator control object to close the project.
Wait for the Loader to open after you closed the project.

Operating Alarms 9
9.1 Operating Alarms TP 177A
9.1.1 Overview
Alarms
Alarms indicate events and states on the HMI device which have occurred in the system,
in the process or on the HMI device itself. A status is reported when it is received.
An alarm could trigger one of the following alarm events:
● Incoming
● Outgoing
● Acknowledge
The configuration engineer defines which alarms must be acknowledged by the user.
An alarm may contain the following information:
● Date
● Time
● Alarm text
● Error location
● State
● Alarm class
● Alarm number
● Acknowledgement group

Operating Alarms
Alarm Classes
Alarms are assigned to various alarm classes:
● Error
Alarms in this class must always be acknowledged. Alarms normally indicate critical
errors within the plant such as "Motor temperature too high".
● Warning
Warning alarms usually indicate states of a plant such as "Motor switched on".
● System
System alarms indicate states or events which occur on the HMI device.
● User-specific alarm classes
The properties of this alarm class must be defined in the configuration.
Alarm Buffer
Alarm events are saved to an internal, volatile buffer. The size of this alarm buffer depends
on the HMI device type.
9.1.2 Displaying Alarms
Alarm view and alarm window

Alarms are indicated in the Alarm view or in the Alarm window on the HMI device.
The layout and operation of the Alarm window correspond to that of the Alarm view.
The Alarm window is independent of the process screen. Depending on the configuration,
the Alarm window appears automatically as soon as a new, unacknowledged alarm has
been received. The Alarm window can be configured so that it only closes after all the alarms
have been acknowledged.

Operating Alarms
Operating elements
Functions of the Alarm view buttons:
Button Function
Displays infotext for an alarm
Edit alarm
Acknowledging an alarm
Shows the full text of the selected alarm in a separate window, the alarm text
window.
In the alarm text window, you can view alarm texts that require more space than is
available in the alarm view. Close the alarm text window with .
Select the next or previous alarm in the list.
Scroll one page up or down.
Alarm class layout

The various alarm classes are identified to distinguish them in the Alarm view:
Icon Alarm class

! Error
(empty) Operation
(depends on the configuration) User-defined alarm classes
$ System
The configuration engineer can edit the alarm class symbols. Refer to your plant
documentation to find any additional information on this topic.
Displaying infotext
The configuration engineer can also provide infotext for alarms.
Proceed as follows to view the infotext for an alarm:
1. Select the required alarm in the Alarm view
2. Touch .
If configured, the infotext assigned to this alarm is displayed.
3. Close the infotext window with

Operating Alarms
Alarm indicator
The alarm indicator is a graphic symbol that shows current errors or errors that need to be
acknowledged, depending on the configuration.
The alarm indicator flashes as long as alarms are queued for acknowledgment. The number
indicates the number of queued alarms. The configuration engineer can assign functions to
be executed when the alarm indicator is operated.
Usually, the alarm indicator is only used for error alarms. Refer to your plant documentation
to find any additional information on this topic.
9.1.3 Acknowledging Alarms
Requirements
● The alarm which is to be acknowledged is displayed in the Alarm window or in the
Alarm view.
● Either the Alarm window or the Alarm view is enabled.
● The alarm must be acknowledged.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the alarm by touching it in the Alarm view or Alarm window.
2. Touch .
Result
The alarm or all alarms of the corresponding acknowledgement group are acknowledged.
Further information about acknowledgment groups may be available in your plant
documentation.
See also
Displaying Alarms (Page 280)

Operating Alarms
9.1.4 Editing Alarms
Introduction
The configuration engineer can assign additional functions to each alarm. These functions
are executed when the alarm is processed.
Requirements
● The alarm to be edited is indicated in the Alarm window or in the Alarm view.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
2. Touch .
Result
The system executes the additional functions of the alarm. Further information on this may
be available in your plant documentation.
Note
When you edit an unacknowledged alarm, it is acknowledged automatically.
See also

Operating Alarms
9.2 Operating Alarms on TP 177B and OP 177B
9.2.1 Overview
Alarms
Alarms indicate events and states on the HMI device which have occurred in the system,
in the process or on the HMI device itself. A status is reported when it is received.
An alarm could trigger one of the following alarm events:
● Incoming
● Outgoing
● Acknowledge
The configuration engineer defines which alarms must be acknowledged by the user.
An alarm may contain the following information:
● Date
● Time
● Alarm text
● Error location
● State
● Alarm class
● Alarm number
● Acknowledgement group
● Diagnostics capability

Operating Alarms
Alarm Classes
Alarms are assigned to various alarm classes:
● Error
Alarms in this class must always be acknowledged. Alarms normally indicate critical
errors within the plant such as "Motor temperature too high".
● Warning
Warning alarms usually indicate states of a plant such as "Motor switched on".
● System
System alarms indicate states or events which occur on the HMI device.
● SIMATIC diagnostic alarms
SIMATIC diagnostic alarms show states and events of the SIMATIC S7 or
SIMOTION controllers.
The properties of this alarm class must be defined in the configuration.
Alarm Buffer
Alarm events are saved to an internal buffer. The size of this alarm buffer depends on the
HMI device type.
9.2.2 Displaying Alarms
Alarm view
Alarms are indicated in the Alarm view or in the Alarm window on the HMI device.
The Alarm view can be implemented with the following components:
● Alarm numbers and alarm texts are displayed as single lines.
● As simple Alarm view
● As advanced Alarm view
In the simple or advanced Alarm views the configuration engineer specifies the alarm
information to be displayed.
Alarm window
The layout and operation of the Alarm window correspond to that of the Alarm view.
The Alarm window is independent of the process screen. Depending on the configuration,
the Alarm window appears automatically as soon as a new, unacknowledged alarm has
been received. The Alarm window can be configured so that it only closes after all the alarms
have been acknowledged.

Operating Alarms
Simple Alarm view
The buttons have the following functions:
Button Function
Edit alarm
Select the next or previous alarm in the list.
Scroll one page up or down.
Advanced Alarm view
The buttons have the following functions:
Button Function
Edit alarm

Operating Alarms
Changing the column sequence and sorting in the advanced Alarm view
You can change the column sequence and sorting to suit the project.
● Change column sequence
To reverse the "Time" and "Date" columns, for example, touch the "Date" header on the
HMI device touch screen. Continue to press the touch screen and drag the column
heading to the "Time" heading.
● Changing sorting
To change the sorting of the alarms, touch the respective column heading on the touch
screen of the HMI device.
Alarm class layout

The various alarm classes are identified to distinguish them in the Alarm view:
Icon Alarm class

! Error
(empty) Operation
(depends on the configuration) User-defined alarm classes
S7 SIMATIC or SIMOTION diagnostic alarms
$ System
The configuration engineer can edit the alarm class symbols. Refer to your plant
documentation to find any additional information on this topic.
Displaying infotext
The configuration engineer can also provide infotext for alarms.
Proceed as follows to view the infotext for an alarm:
1. Select the required alarm in the Alarm view.
2. Touch the button in the simple Alarm view or in the advanced

Alarm view.
If configured, the infotext assigned to this alarm is displayed.
3. Close the infotext window with

Operating Alarms
Alarm indicator
The alarm indicator is a graphic symbol that shows current errors or errors that need to be
acknowledged, depending on the configuration.
The alarm indicator flashes as long as alarms are queued for acknowledgment. The number
indicates the number of queued alarms. The configuration engineer can assign functions to
be executed when the alarm indicator is operated.
Usually, the alarm indicator is only used for error alarms. Please refer to your system
documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there.
9.2.3 Acknowledging Alarms
Requirements
● The alarm which is to be acknowledged is displayed in the Alarm window or in the
Alarm view.
● The alarm must be acknowledged.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:

Alarm view.
A soft key can also be configured to acknowledge alarms.
Result
The alarm or all alarms of the corresponding acknowledgement group are acknowledged.
Further information about acknowledgment may be available in your plant documentation.
See also

Operating Alarms
9.2.4 Editing Alarms
Introduction
The configuration engineer can assign additional functions to each alarm. These functions
are executed when the alarm is processed.
Requirements
● The alarm to be edited is indicated in the Alarm window or in the Alarm view.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:

Alarm view.
Result
The system executes the additional functions of the alarm. Further information on this may
be available in your plant documentation.
Note
When you edit an unacknowledged alarm, it is acknowledged automatically.
See also

Operating Alarms

Operating Recipes 10
10.1 Overview
Introduction
Recipes are used when different variants of a product are manufactured with the same
process. In this case, the product variants differ in terms of their type and quantity of the
components, but not in terms of the manufacturing process sequence. The configuration
engineer can store the combination of each individual product variant in a recipe.
Field of application
Recipes can be used everywhere the same product components are used in variable
combinations to create different product variants.
Examples:
● Beverage industry
● Food processing industry
● Pharmaceutical industry
● Paint industry
● Building materials industry
● Steel industry

Operating Recipes
10.2 Structure of a recipe
Recipes
The recipe collection for the production of a product family can be compared to a file cabinet.
A recipe which is used to manufacture a product corresponds to a drawer in a file cabinet.
Example:
In a plant for producing fruit juice, recipes are required for different flavors. There is a recipe,
for example, for the flavors orange, grape, apple and cherry.
① File cabinet Recipe collection Recipes for a fruit juice plant

② Drawer Recipe Orange flavored drinks
③ Drawer Recipe Grape flavored drinks
④ Drawer Recipe Apple flavored drinks
⑤ Drawer Recipe Cherry flavored drinks

Operating Recipes
Recipe data records

The drawers of the file cabinet are filled with suspension folders. The suspension folders in
the drawers represent records required for manufacturing various product variants.
Example:
Product variants of the flavor apple might be a soft drink, a juice or nectar, for example.

① Drawer Recipe Product variants of apple flavored drinks

② Suspension folder Recipe data record Apple drink
③ Suspension folder Recipe data record Apple nectar
④ Suspension folder Recipe data record Apple juice
Elements
In the figure showing the file cabinet, each suspension folder contains the same number of
sheets. Each sheet in the suspension folder corresponds to an element of the recipe data
record. All the records of a recipe contain the same elements. The records differ, however,
in the value of the individual elements.
Example:
All drinks contain the same components: water, concentrate, sugar and flavoring.
The records for soft drink, fruit juice or nectar differ, however, in the quantity of sugar used
in production.

Operating Recipes
10.3 Recipes in the Project
Overview
If recipes are used in a project, the following components interact:
● HMI device recipe memory
Recipes are saved in the form of data records in the HMI device recipe memory.
The recipe data can also be saved in recipe tags.
● Recipe view / recipe screen
On the HMI device, recipes are displayed and edited in the recipe view or in a
recipe screen.
– The recipe data records from the internal memory of the HMI device are displayed and
edited in the recipe view.
– The values of the recipe tags are displayed and edited in the recipe screen.
Note
The same recipe tags can be configured in a variety of recipes. If you modify the value
of a recipe tag, the synchronization changes the value of the recipe tag in all recipes.
● Recipe tags on the TP 177A

The recipe tags contain recipe data. Recipe tags configured in IO fields are always
automatically synchronized with the recipe view. You can exchange the values of the
recipe tags with the PLC.
● Recipe tags on the TP 177B and OP 177B
The recipe tags contain recipe data. When you edit recipes in a recipe screen, the recipe
values are stored in recipe tags.
The recipe tags are not automatically synchronous with the recipe view. You can
synchronize the recipe tags with the recipe data records so that the same values are
saved in both. Depending on the configuration, the values of the recipe tags are
exchanged with the PLC.
● External storage medium on the TP 177B and OP 177B
You can store recipe data records on the memory card of the TP 177B and OP 177B.
On the TP 177B 4" you can also save the recipe data records on a USB stick.
Recipe data records are exported from the HMI device recipe memory and are saved to a
CSV file on the external storage medium. The records can be reimported from the
storage medium to the recipe memory.

Operating Recipes
Data flow
The following figure shows the data flow in a project with recipes:
+0,GHYLFH 5HFLSH0HPRU\
5HFLSHGLVSOD\
5HFLSH
5HFLSH
5HFLSH
5HFLSHQ
5HFLSHWDJ
5HFLSH
VFUHHQ

&RQWUROOHU ([WHUQDO
VWRUDJHGHYLFH

① Editing, saving or deleting a recipe data record

② Display recipe data record
③ Synchronize or do not synchronize recipe tags
The recipe tags are always synchronized on the TP 177A.
④ Display and edit recipe tags in the recipe screen
⑤ Write records from the recipe view to the PLC or read records from the PLC and
display them in the recipe view.
⑥ TP 177B and OP 177B: Recipe tags are to the PLC online or offline
⑦ TP 177B and OP 177B: Export or import recipe data records to an external
storage medium.

Operating Recipes
10.4 Displaying a Recipe
Displaying Recipes
You can display and edit recipes on the HMI device with a recipe view or recipe screen.
Recipe view
A recipe view is a screen object used to manage recipe data records. The recipe view shows
recipe data records in tabular form.
Depending on the configuration, the recipe view is displayed as follows:
● As enhanced recipe view
● As simple recipe view
The configuration engineer also defines which operator controls are displayed in the
recipe view. Only the simple recipe view can be configured on the TP 177A.
Enhanced recipe view on the TP 177B and OP 177B

The figure below shows an example of the enhanced recipe view:

① Selection list for the recipe

② Selection list for the recipe data record
③ Element name
The element name designates a specific element in the recipe data record.
④ Display field
This show the number of the selected recipe or the selected recipe data record.
⑤ Value of the element
⑥ Buttons for editing a recipe data record
⑦ Status bar for display of the status messages

Operating Recipes
Simple recipe view

The simple recipe view consists of three areas:
● Recipe list
● Record list
● Element list
In the simple recipe view, each area is shown separately on the HMI device. Depending on
the configuration, the simple recipe view starts with the recipe list or data record list.
The figure below shows an example of the record list:
-XLFH
%HYHUDJH
1HFWDU

① Number of the recipe data record

② Recipe data records
③ Buttons for changing the displayed list and calling the menu
Display of Values
NOTICE
Changing the recipe data record in the background
Applies to the processing of a recipe data record:
If values of the corresponding recipe data record are changed by a PLC job, the recipe view
is not updated automatically.
To update the recipe view, reactivate the respective recipe data record.

Operating Recipes
Recipe screen
A recipe screen allows the correlation between the plant and the recipe data to be displayed
in graphic form. The configuration engineer combines IO fields and screen objects to form a
custom input screen. The configuration engineer can distribute the IO fields of a recipe over
several recipe screens, thus allowing recipe elements to be arranged by subject. The recipe
screen can be operated using buttons configured accordingly.
The figure below shows an example of the recipe screen:
:DWHU O
5HFLSHQDPH 1R
&RQFHQWUDWH O 2UDQJH
6XJDU NJ 'DWDUHFRUGQDPH 1R
$URPD O 1HFWDU
6DYH 'DWDIURPWKH3/&
/RDG 'DWDWR3/&

① Element names and corresponding values

The element name designates a specific element in the recipe data record.
② Buttons for editing a recipe data record
③ Modified recipe view
④ Buttons for transferring recipe data
The values displayed or entered in the recipe screen are saved in recipe tags. The recipe
values are exchanged with the PLC immediately or later via these tags.
A configured recipe view can itself be a component of a recipe screen. You must
synchronize the tags in order to synchronize data between the tags of the recipe screen
and the recipe data records displayed in the recipe view. The recipe tags are always
automatically synchronized on the TP 177A.

Operating Recipes
10.5 Recipe Values in the HMI Device and the PLC
10.5 Recipe Values in the HMI Device and the PLC
Introduction
You can change the values of a recipe on the HMI device and therefore influence the
manufacturing process or a machine.
Depending on the configuration, the recipe values are displayed, edited and saved in
different ways.
● If you are editing recipes with a recipe view in your project, the values are saved in
recipe data records.
● If you are editing recipes in a recipe screen in your project, the values are saved in
recipe tags.
Differences may occur between the display values in the recipe view and the values saved in
the associated tags in an ongoing project when you edit recipes with a recipe view and in a
recipe screen. To prevent this, you need to synchronized the values of the recipe data
records on the TP 177B and OP 177B with the values of the recipe tags.
The recipe tags are always automatically synchronized on the TP 177A.
Synchronizing Recipe Tags on the TP 177B and OP 177B
Note
Recipe tags can only be synchronized with the enhanced recipe view on the TP 177B and
OP 177B.
Synchronization of the recipe tags depends on the configuration of the enhanced

recipe view:
● Automatic synchronization:
The values of the recipe view are synchronized with the associated recipe tags. In this
case, changes to values in the recipe view have an immediate effect on the values of the
associated recipe tags. The values are only synchronized, when an operator control that
is outside the recipe view is operated.
● Synchronization by the user:
The values of the recipe view and the associated recipe tags are not synchronized
automatically. The configuration engineer has assigned the same function to the
button or a different operator control in the recipe view. The recipe tags and the
recipe view are only synchronized when you operate the buttons or the appropriate
operator control.

Operating Recipes
10.6 Operating the Enhanced Recipe View
Recipe Tags Online / Offline

The configuration engineer can configure a recipe so that changes to the values of the recipe
tags do not have an immediate effect on the current process.
Synchronization of the recipe values between the HMI device and the PLC depends on
whether the configuration engineer has selected the settings "Tags online" or the setting
"Tags offline" for a recipe.
The recipe tags are always offline on the TP 177A.
● "Tags online":
This setting has the following effect:
– When you change recipe values in the recipe screen, these changes are applied
immediately by the PLC and immediately influence the process.
– If recipe values are changed in the PLC, the changed values are displayed
immediately in the recipe screen.
● "Tags offline":
With this setting, changed recipe values are not synchronized immediately between the
HMI device and the PLC.
In this case, the configuration engineer must configure operator controls for transferring
the values to the PLC or reading them from the PLC in a recipe screen. The recipe values
are only synchronized between HMI device and PLC when you operate the appropriate
operator control.
10.6.1 Overview
Operation
The recipe view can be operated as follows:
● Enter values for the recipe elements
● Create recipe data records
● Save recipe data records or save them under a new name
● Delete recipe data records
● TP 177B and OP 177B: Synchronize values of the recipe view with the associated
recipe tags
● Transfer recipe data records from the PLC and to the PLC

Operating Recipes
Operator Controls of the Recipe View

The table below shows the operator controls of the recipe view:
Buttons Function
Creates a new recipe data record.
If a start value is configured, it is shown in the input field.
Saves the displayed values of the recipe data record.
The storage location is predefined by the project.
The recipe data record is saved under a different name irrespective of the recipe
view. A dialog box opens in which the name is entered.
The displayed recipe data record is deleted.
TP 177B and OP 177B:

The values of the recipe view are synchronized with the associated recipe tags.
The values changed during editing are written to the associated recipe tags.
Subsequently all the values of the tags are read out and updated in the table.
The recipe values from the PLC are displayed in the recipe view.
The values of the set recipe data record displayed in the recipe view are
transferred to the PLC.
Operating the Recipe Screen

You operate the recipes in a recipe screen with the operator controls provided by the
Entering the value.

If you want to change the value of a tag, call up the screen keyboard.
The functions listed in the table and the entry of values may also be assigned to a softkey on
the OP 177B. Refer to the plant documentation for more information in this regard.

Operating Recipes
10.6.2 Creating a recipe data record
Introduction
You create a new recipe data record by modifying an existing record. You then save the
modified data record under a new name.
Requirements
A screen with a recipe view is displayed.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe for which you want to create
a new recipe data record.
2. Touch .
A new recipe data record with the next available number is created.
If you change the new data record number to an existing data record number, the existing
data record is overwritten.
3. Enter values for the elements of the data record.
The elements of the recipe data record can be assigned default values depending on the
configuration.
4. Touch .
5. Enter a name for the data record.
The data record is saved under the new name.
If the recipe data record already exists, a dialog is opened. In this dialog, specify whether
the existing data record is to be overwritten.
Result
The new recipe data record is saved to the selected recipe.
See also
Overview (Page 300)

Operating Recipes
10.6.3 Editing a recipe data record
Introduction
Edit the values of the recipe data records and save them in a recipe view.
Synchronization with the PLC

If you want to display the current recipe values from the PLC in the recipe view, you first
have to read the current values from the PLC with .
The values changed in the recipe view only become effective when the amended data record
is transferred to the PLC by means of the button.
Requirements
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record you want to change.
3. Change the data record as required.
4. Save your changes by means of the button.
If you want to save the recipe data record under a different name, touch the key.
5. The recipe data record is saved.
Result
The edited recipe data record has now been saved in the selected recipe.
See also
Overview (Page 300)
Recipes in the Project (Page 294)

Operating Recipes
10.6.4 Deleting a recipe data record
Introduction
You can delete all the data records of a recipe which are not required.
Requirements
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record you want to delete.
3. Touch .
Result
The recipe data record is deleted.
See also
Overview (Page 300)

Operating Recipes
10.6.5 Synchronizing Tags on the TP 177B and OP 177B
Introduction
The values of the recipe elements can be saved to recipe tags, depending on the
configuration.
Differences may occur between the display values in the recipe view and the actual values of
tags in an ongoing project. Synchronize the tags to equalize such differences.
Synchronization always includes all the variables which belong to a recipe data record.
NOTICE
Changed tag name
Tags and the value of the recipe data record cannot be assigned to each other if the tag
name of the tag to be synchronized has been changed. The tags in question are not
synchronized.
Note
Recipe tags can only be synchronized in the enhanced recipe view.
Requirement
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record you want to synchronize.
3. Touch .
Result
The elements of the recipe data record are synchronized with the recipe tags.
If the values of the recipe view and the tag do not match, the more current value is accepted.
See also
Overview (Page 300)
Recipe Values in the HMI Device and the PLC (Page 299)

Operating Recipes
10.6.6 Reading a recipe data record from the PLC
Introduction
In the current project, the values which are also stored in the recipes in the HMI device can
be changed directly in the plant. This is the case, for example, if a valve was opened further
directly at the plant than is stored in the recipe. The values of the recipe data records saved
in the HMI device possibly no longer match the values in the PLC.
To synchronize the recipe values, read the values from the PLC and display them in the
recipe view.
Requirements
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record to which you want to apply the values from the PLC.
3. Touch .
The values are read from the PLC.
4. If you want to store the displayed values in the HMI device, touch the button.
Result
The values were read from the PLC, displayed on the HMI device and saved to the selected
recipe data record.
See also
Overview (Page 300)

Operating Recipes
10.6.7 Transferring a recipe data record to the PLC
Introduction
In order for an edited recipe data record to take effect in the process, you must transfer the
values to the PLC.
The display values in the recipe view are always transferred to the PLC.
Requirements
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record whose values you want to transfer to the PLC.
3. Touch .
Result
The display values in the recipe view were transferred to the PLC and take effect
in the process.
See also
Overview (Page 300)

Operating Recipes
10.7 Operating the Simple Recipe View
10.7.1 Overview
Introduction
The simple recipe view consists of three areas:
● Recipe list
● Record list
● Element list
You can use the shortcut menu to operate each of these display areas.
Operation
The simple recipe view can be operated as follows:
● Create recipe data records
● Save recipe data records or save them under a new name
● Rename recipe data records
● Delete recipe data records
● Transfer recipe data records from the PLC and to the PLC
Operator controls of the simple recipe view

Toggle between the display areas and the shortcut menus to operate the simple
recipe views.
The table below shows the operation of the display area:
Operation Function
Touching an entry The next lower display area opens, i.e. the data record list or the element list.
The next higher display area opens, i.e. the recipe list or the data record list.
The shortcut menu of the display area opens.
The previous entry is selected in the display area.
The next entry is selected in the display area.
A display page is scrolled up in the display area.
A display page is scrolled down in the display area.
The table below shows the operation of the shortcut menu.

Operation Function
The menu is closed.
The display area opens.
Touch the menu The menu command is executed.
command

Operating Recipes
Shortcut menus of the simple recipe view

A shortcut menu can be called for each display area. The commands available in the
shortcut menu depend on the currently selected display area. A number is assigned to each
command. The command is executed when you enter the number of the command.
● Recipe list
Menu command Function
New A new recipe data record is created for the selected recipe.
Display infotext The infotext configured for the simple recipe view is displayed.
Open The record list of the selected recipe opens.
● Record list
New Creates a new recipe data record.
Delete The selected recipe data record is deleted.
Save as The selected recipe data record is saved under another name. A dialog box
opens in which the name is entered.
Rename The selected recipe data record is renamed. A dialog box opens in which
the name is entered.
Opening The element list of the selected recipe data record opens.
Back The recipe list opens.
With the TP 177A HMI device, the following menu commands can also be configured for the
record list:
To PLC The displayed values of the selected record are transferred from the
HMI device to the PLC.
From PLC The recipe values from the PLC are displayed on the HMI device in the
recipe view.
● Element list
Save The selected record is saved.
To PLC The displayed values of the selected record are transferred from the
HMI device to the PLC.
From PLC The recipe values from the PLC are displayed on the HMI device in the
recipe view.
Save as The data record is saved under the new name. A dialog box opens in which
the name is entered.
With the TP 177A HMI device, the following menu commands can also be configured for the
element list:
Rename The selected record is renamed. A dialog box opens in which the name is
entered.
Back The data record list opens.

Operating Recipes
Operating Menus
Touch the desired menu command. The command is executed.
Operating the Recipe Screen

You operate the recipes in a recipe screen with the operator controls provided by the
10.7.2 Creating a Recipe Data Record
Introduction
Create a new recipe data record in the recipe list or in the record list. Then enter the values
for the new record in the element list and save the record.
Requirement
A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe list contains several recipes: Select the recipe for which you want to create a
new recipe data record.
2. Open the recipe list menu.
3. Select the menu command "New".
A new record is created.
The element list of the new record opens.
4. Enter values for the elements of the data record.
The tags of the record can be assigned default values depending on the configuration.
5. Open the menu of the element list and select the command "Save".
6. Enter a name for the new record.
If you change the new data record number to an existing data record number, the existing
data record is overwritten.
Result
The new recipe data record is saved to the selected recipe.
See also
Overview (Page 308)

Operating Recipes
10.7.3 Editing a Recipe Data Record
Introduction
Edit the values of the recipe data records in a simple recipe view.
Synchronization with the PLC

If you want to display the current recipe values from the PLC in the simple recipe view, you
first have to read the current values from the PLC with the menu command "From PLC" in
the element list.
The values changed in the recipe view only take effect in the PLC when you transfer the
edited data record to the PLC with the menu command "To PLC".
Requirement
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe list contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the desired
recipe data record.
2. Open the data record list.
3. Select the recipe data record you want to change.
4. Open the element list.
5. Change the values of the records as required.
6. Save your changes with the menu command "Save".
The recipe data record is saved.
Result
The edited recipe data record has now been saved in the selected recipe.
See also
Overview (Page 308)

Operating Recipes
10.7.4 Deleting a Recipe Data Record
Introduction
You can delete all the data records which are not required.
Requirement
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
recipe data record.
2. Open the data record list.
3. Select the data record you want to delete.
4. Open the menu.
5. Select the menu command "Delete".
Result
The data record is deleted.
See also
Overview (Page 308)

Operating Recipes
10.7.5 Reading a Recipe Data Record from the PLC
Introduction
The values of recipe elements are exchanged with the PLC via tags.
In the current project, the values which are also stored in the recipes in the HMI device can
be changed directly in the plant. This is the case, for example, if a valve was opened further
directly at the plant than is stored in the recipe. The values of the tags on the HMI device
possibly no longer match the values in the PLC.
To synchronize the recipe values, read the values from the PLC and display them in the
recipe view.
TP 177A
With the TP 177A HMI device, the "From PLC" menu command can also be configured for
the data record list: In this case, you can also select the "From PLC" menu command in the
data record list.
Requirement
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
recipe data record.
2. Select the element list of the recipe data record to which you want to apply the values
from the PLC.
3. Open the menu.
4. Select the menu command "From PLC".
The values are read from the PLC.
5. If you want to save the displayed values in the HMI device, select the menu
command "Save".
Result
The values were read from the PLC, displayed on the HMI device and saved to the selected
recipe data record.
See also
Overview (Page 308)

Operating Recipes
10.7.6 Transferring a Recipe Data Record to the PLC
Introduction
In order for an edited recipe data record to take effect in the process, you must transfer the
values to the PLC.
The displayed values in the recipe view are always transferred to the PLC.
TP 177A
With the TP 177A HMI device, the "To PLC" menu command can also be configured for the
data record list: In this case, you can also select the "To PLC" menu command in the data
record list.
Requirement
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
recipe data record.
2. Select the element list of the recipe data record whose values you want to transfer to
the PLC.
3. Open the menu.
4. Select the menu command "To PLC".
Result
The values of the recipe data record were transferred to the PLC and take effect in
the process.
See also
Overview (Page 308)

Operating Recipes
10.8 Exporting Recipe Data Records on the TP 177B and OP 177B
10.8 Exporting Recipe Data Records on the TP 177B and OP 177B
Introduction
You can export one or more recipe data records to a CSV file, depending on the
configuration. After export, the values in the recipe data record can be further processed in a
spreadsheet program such as MS Excel. The degree to which you can influence the export
depends on the configuration:
Requirements
● A screen with a recipe view is displayed
● An operating element with the function "Export record" has been configured.
● The following tags are configured equally in the recipe view and for the "Export record"
operating element.
– Recipe number
– Data record number
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
recipe data record.
2. Select the recipe data record you want to export.
3. Operate the operating element which was configured for export, for example the
"Export data record" button.
The data record is exported as a CSV file to an external data medium.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation
Result
The recipe data record is exported.
See also

Operating Recipes
10.9 Importing Recipe Data Records on the TP 177B and OP 177B
10.9 Importing Recipe Data Records on the TP 177B and OP 177B
Introduction
You can import values from a CSV file to a recipe data record, depending on the
configuration.
Requirements
● An operating element with the function "Import data record" has been configured,
for example a button
● A screen with a recipe view is displayed
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. If the recipe view contains several recipes: Select the recipe which contains the recipe
data record to be imported.
2. Operate the operating element with the function "Import data record".
The record is imported from an external data medium as a CSV file and then displayed in
the recipe view after import.
Result
The imported recipe data record is saved on the HMI device.
Deviating structure
If the structure of the CSV file differs from the structure of the recipe, deviations are handled
as follows:
● Any additional values in the CSV file will be rejected
● The system applies the configured default value to the recipe data record if the CSV file
contains an insufficient number of values
● If the CSV file contains values of the wrong data type, the configured default value is set
in the recipe data record
Example:
The imported CSV file contains values that were entered as floating point numbers
However, the corresponding tag expects an integer value. In this case, the system
discards the imported value and uses the configured default
See also

Maintenance and care 11
11.1 Maintenance and Service
11.1.1 Maintenance and care
Introduction
The HMI device is designed for maintenance-free operation. The touch screen and keyboard
membrane should nevertheless be cleaned regularly.
Requirements
Use a cleaning cloth dampened with a cleaning agent to clean the equipment. Only use
water with a little liquid soap or a screen cleaning foam.
NOTICE
Unintentional response
When cleaning the touch screen, an unintentional response in the controller can be
triggered by touching keys.
Switch the HMI device off before cleaning to prevent unintentional responses.
Damage caused by unauthorized cleaning products
The HMI device may be damaged if compressed air, steam jet-air ejectors, aggressive
solvents or scouring powders are used for cleaning purposes.
Do not clean the HMI device with compressed air or steam jet blowers. Do not use
aggressive solvents or scouring powder.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch off the HMI device.
2. Spray the cleaning solution onto a cleaning cloth.
Do not spray directly onto the HMI device.
3. Clean the HMI device.
When cleaning the display wipe from the screen edge inwards.

11.1.2 Clean screen on the TP 177A and TP 177B 6"
Introduction
The HMI screen can be cleaned when it is switched on and a project is running. An operating
element must be available in the project to open the clean screen. After activating the clean
screen, the touch screen and function keys are locked for the configured interval. The time
the touch screen is locked can be set between 5 and 30 seconds. The time remaining for the
lockout is indicated by a progress bar.
NOTICE
Unintentional actions
Clean the HMI device screen during operation with activated clean screen or switch off the
HMI device.
Once the period for the clean screen has passed, operations are again possible.
The HMI device cannot be operated with an active clean screen
When the clean screen is active, operations on the HMI device are not possible.
Wait for the period for the clean screen to lapse. Then you can operate the plant again with
the HMI device.
11.1.3 Protective Membrane
Protective foil
A protective foil is available for the HMI touch screens. The protective foil is not part of the
scope of delivery of the HMI device. Required order information is available on the Internet at
"http://mall.automation.siemens.com".
The self-adhesive protective foil prevents the screen from being scratched and soiled.
The mat surface of the protective foil reduces reflections under unfavorable lighting.
The protective film can be removed without leaving any adhesive residue on the screen.
CAUTION
Installing and removing the protective foil
Always shut down the HMI device before installing the protective foil. You might otherwise
trigger unintended functions. This also applies when removing the protective foil.
Never use sharp or pointed tools, such as a knife, to remove the protective foil. This may
damage the touch screen.

11.1.4 Protective covers on the TP 177A and TP 177B 6"
Protective cover
The cover protects the front of the TP 177A and TP 177B 6". The cover protects the
display and the frame of the HMI device from dirt, scratches and chemicals. This allows the
HMI devices to also be used in environments with a higher level of harmful substances.
When the cover is used, the protective class NEMA4 is achieved.
The following figure shows the components of protective cover:
① Frame
② Protective cover
③ Base frame

The figure below shows the HMI device with installed protective cover:
① Eyelet for securing a touch screen pen

② Touch screen of the HMI device
③ Protective cover
Note
Custom designs of the front using the protective cover
The front of the HMI device can be adapted for custom designs. You can find template
"Labeling protective_cover_TP070_TP170.doc" for the labeling strips on the WinCC flexible
Installation CD 2 under "\Documents\<Language>\Slides." The templates are formatted for
various languages. <Language> stands for the respective language you are using.
Requirement
The HMI device has been removed.

Procedure for installation

Proceed as follows:
1. Position the HMI device with the front facing down.
Set the HMI device down in such a way that the touch screen cannot be damaged during
the work to follow.
2. Remove the mounting seal on the HMI device
Do not damage the mounting seal.
① Mounting seal
3. Position the base frame on the HMI device

Position the base frame in such a way that the legend field is visible.

① Base frame
② Attachment point for the frame
③ Legend field on the base frame

4. Insert the mounting seal.

Make sure the mounting seal is not twisted when inserting.
① Mounting seal
5. Turn the HMI device and position it on its back.

6. Position the protective cover
Check to ensure that the protective cover and seal adhere to each other without any
gaps. Make sure you use a protective cover that is in perfect condition.
① Protective cover
7. Place the protective cover on the base frame and press down firmly.
You will find eight attachment points on the base frame. Press the base frame and frame
together at these points, until you hear them engage.
8. Insert the HMI device in the mounting cut-out.

9. Secure the HMI device as previously described in the operating instructions.

11.2 Service and spare parts
Procedure for dismantling

To remove the frame from the base frame, insert a screwdriver of a suitable size into a slot
on the base frame. Then you can lever the frame from the base frame.
Repairs
In case of repair, the HMI device must be shipped to the Return Center in Fürth.
The HMI device may only be repaired there.
The address is:
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Returns Center
Siemensstr. 2
90766 Fürth
Germany
Service pack
A service pack can be ordered for servicing purposes. It contains the following spare parts:
● Mounting seal
● Mounting clamps
● Terminal block, 2-pin
The service pack can be ordered from your Siemens representative.


Specifications 12
12.1 Dimension drawings of the TP 177B 4"


Specifications
12.2 Dimension drawings of the TP 177A and TP 177B 6"
12.2 Dimension drawings of the TP 177A and TP 177B 6"


Specifications
12.3 Dimension Drawings of the OP 177B
12.3 Dimension Drawings of the OP 177B


Specifications
12.4 Specifications of the TP 177A
12.4 Specifications of the TP 177A
HMI Device
Weight without packing Approx. 750 g
Display
Type LCD-STN, blue mode

Display area, active 115.18 mm x 86.38 mm (5.7")
Resolution 320 x 240 pixels,
240 x 320 pixels with vertical mounting
Colors, displayable 4 shades of blue
Contrast control yes
Back-lighting CCFL
Half Brightness Life, typical 50 000 h
Input unit
Type Resistive analog touch screen
Memory
Program memory 512 KB
Supply voltage
Rated voltage +24 VDC

Range, permissible 20.4 V to 28.8 V (–15 %, +20 %)
Transients, maximum permissible 35 V (500 msec)
Time between two transients, minimum 50 s
Current input
• Typical • Approx. 300 mA
• Constant current, maximum • Approx. 450 mA
• Power on current surge I2t • Approx. 0.5 A2s
Fuse, internal Electronic
See also
Standards and Approvals (Page 30)
Electromagnetic Compatibility (Page 36)
Transport and Storage Conditions (Page 38)
Mounting Information (Page 39)
Specifications for Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of Protection (Page 45)

Specifications
12.5 Technical specifications of the TP 177B 4"
HMI device
Weight without packing Approximately 500 g
Display
Type LCD-TFT
Display area, active 95 mm x 53 mm (4.3", wide screen)
Resolution 480 x 272 pixels
Colors, displayable 256
Brightness control yes
Backlighting LED
Half Brightness Life Time, typical 30 000 h
Pixel error class according to DIN EN ISO 13406-2 II
Input unit
Memory
Application memory 2 MB
Interfaces
1 x RS 422/RS 485 Max. 12 Mbit/s, applies to DP operations

1 x USB 1.1 USB host, maximum load 500 mA
1 x Ethernet RJ45 10/100 Mbits
Supply voltage

Range, permissible 19.2 V to 28.8 V (-20 %, +20 %)
Transients, maximum permissible 35 V (500 ms)
Current consumption
• Typical • approximately 200 mA
• Constant current, maximum • approximately 550 mA
• Power on current surge I2t • approximately 0.1 A2s

Specifications
HMI device
Display
Type LCD STN

Colors, displayable 256 colors for TP 177B 6" PN/DP
4 colors (blue mode) for TP 177B 6" DP
Contrast control Yes
Back-lighting CCFL
Input unit
Memory
Application memory 2 MB
Supply voltage

Range, permissible 20.4 V to 28.8 V (-15%, +20%)
Transients, maximum permissible 35 V (500 ms)
Current consumption

Specifications
12.7 Specifications of the OP 177B
12.7 Specifications of the OP 177B
HMI Device
Display
Type LCD STN

Colors, displayable 256 colors for OP 177B PN/DP
4 colors (blue mode) for OP 177B DP
Contrast control yes
Back-lighting CCFL
Input unit

Membrane keyboard
Memory
Program memory 2 MB
Supply voltage

Range, permissible 20.4 V to 28.8 V (–15 %, +20 %)
Transients, maximum permissible 35 V (500 msec)
Current input

Specifications
12.8 Description of the Interfaces
12.8.1 Power Supply

Plug connector, 2-pin

PIN Assignment
1 +24 VDC
2 GND 24 V
12.8.2 X10/IF 1B (RS 422/RS 485)

Sub-d socket, 9-pin, with screw lock

PIN Assignment for the RS 422 Assignment for the RS 485

1 n. c. n. c.
2 GND 24 V GND 24 V
3 TxD+ Data channel B (+)
4 RD+ RTS 1)
5 GND 5 V, floating GND 5 V, floating
6 +5 VDC, floating +5 VDC, floating
7 +24 VDC, out (max. 100 mA) +24 VDC, out (max. 100 mA)
8 TxD– Data channel A (–)
9 RxD– RTS 1)
1) On pin 4 or pin 9, can be set with DIP switch on the rear of the device

Specifications
12.8.3 X20 (USB)

USB standard connector

PIN Assignment
1 +5 VDC, out, on TP 177A, TP 177B 6", OP 177B: 100 mA
on the TP 177B 4": 500 mA
2 USB-DN
3 USB-DP
4 GND
12.8.4 X1 (PROFINET)
RJ45 plug connector

PIN Assignment
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 n.c.
5 n.c.
6 RX-
7 n.c.
8 n.c.
Each PROFINET port features one green and one yellow LED. These LEDs show the status
of the PROFINET communication.
The following table shows the meaning of the LEDs:
Green "LINK" Yellow "RX/TX" Meaning

LED LED
off off There is no PROFINET connection.
on off PROFINET communication possible.
on on Data is being sent over the PROFINET connection.

Specifications

Appendix A
A.1 ESD Guidelines
What does ESD mean?

All electronic modules are equipped with highly integrated modules or components. Based
on their design, these electronic components are highly sensitive to overvoltage and thus to
discharge of static electricity. These electronic components are therefore specially identified
as ESD.
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are commonly used for electrostatic sensitive devices:
● ESD – Electrostatic Sensitive Devices
● ESD – Electrostatic Sensitive Device as common international designation
Labeling
ESD modules are labeled with the following symbol:

Appendix
A.1 ESD Guidelines
Electrostatic charge
CAUTION
Electrostatic charge
ESDs may be destroyed by voltages well below the perception threshold of persons.
Voltages of this kind develop when a component or an assembly is touched by a person
who is not grounded against static electricity. Usually, it is unlikely that damage to an ESD
as a result of overvoltage is detected immediately but may become apparent only after a
longer period of operation.
Prevent electrostatic charge of your body before you touch the ESD!
Anyone who is not connected to the electrical potential of their surroundings is subjected to
electrostatic charge.
The figure indicates the maximum electrostatic charge anyone is subjected to when
contacting the materials shown. These values correspond with specifications to IEC 801-2.
>N9@
9ROWDJH

>@
5HODWLYHKXPLGLW\
① Synthetic materials
② Wool
③ Antistatic materials such as wood or concrete

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms
Protective Measures against Discharge of Static Electricity
CAUTION
Grounding Measures
When working with electrostatic sensitive devices, make sure that the person, the
workplace and the packaging are properly grounded. This helps to avoid electrostatic
charge.
As a rule, only touch the ESD if this is unavoidable. Example: for maintenance. When you
touch modules, make sure that you do not touch the pins on the modules or the PCB tracks.
This prevents any discharge of static electricity to sensitive component and thus avoids
damage.
Discharge electrostatic electricity from your body if you are performing measurements on
an ESD. To do so, touch a grounded metallic object.
Always use grounded measuring instruments.
A.2 System Alarms
Introduction
System alarms on the HMI device provide information about internal states of the
HMI device and PLC.
The overview below shows the causes of system alarms and how to eliminate the
cause of error.
Depending on scope of functions, only parts of the system alarms described in this
section apply to the various HMI devices.
Note
System alarms are only indicated if an alarm window was configured. System alarms are
output in the language currently set on your HMI device.
System Alarm Parameters

System alarms may contain encrypted parameters which are relevant to troubleshooting
because they provide a reference to the source code of the Runtime software.
These parameters are output after the text "Error code:"

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms
Meaning of the System Alarms
Number Effect/cause Remedy

10000 The print job could not be started or was canceled Check the printer settings, cable connections and the
due to an unknown error. Faulty printer setup. power supply.
Or: No permission is available for accessing the Set up the printer once again. Obtain a network printer
network printer. authorization.
Power supply failure during data transfer. If the error persists, contact the Hotline!
10001 No printer is installed or a default printer has not Install a printer and/or select it as the default printer.
been set up.
10002 Overflow of the graphics buffer for printing. Up to Allow sufficient intervals between successive print jobs.
two images are buffered.
10003 Images can now be buffered again. —
10004 Overflow of the buffer for printing lines in text mode Allow sufficient intervals between successive print jobs.
(e.g.alarms). Up to 1000 lines are buffered.
10005 Text lines can now be buffered again. —
10006 The Windows printing system reports an error. Repeat the action if necessary.
Refer to the output text and the error ID to
determine the possible causes. Nothing is printed
or the print is faulty.
20010 An error has occurred in the specified script line. Select the specified script line in the configuration.
Execution of the script was therefore aborted. Ensure that the tags used are of the allowed types.
Note the system alarm that may have occurred Check system functions for the correct number and types
prior to this. of parameters.
20011 An error has occurred in a script that was called by In the configuration, select the script that has been called
the specified script. directly or indirectly by the specified script.
Execution of the script was therefore aborted in the Ensure that the tags used are of the allowed types.
called script. Check the system functions for the correct number and
Take the system alarm that may have occurred type of parameters.
prior to this into account.
20012 The configuration data is inconsistent. The script Recompile the configuration.
could therefore not be generated.
20013 The scripting component of WinCC flexible Runtime Reinstall WinCC flexible Runtime.
is not correctly installed. Therefore, no scripts can
be executed.
20014 The system function returns a value that is not Select the specified script in the configuration.
written in any return tag. Check if the script name has been assigned a value.
20015 Too many successive scripts have been triggered Find what is triggering the scripts. Extend the times,
in short intervals. When more than 20 scripts are e.g. the polling time of the tags which trigger the scripts.
queued for processing, any subsequent scripts are
rejected. In this case, the script indicated in the
alarm is not executed.
30010 The tag could not accept the function result, Check the tag type of the system function parameter.
e.g. when it has exceeded the value range.
30011 A system function could not be executed because Check the parameter value and tag type of the invalid
the function was assigned an invalid value or type parameter. If a tag is used as a parameter, check its
in the parameter. value.
40010 The system function could not be executed since Check the parameter types in the configuration.
the parameters could not be converted to a
common tag type.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

40011 The system function could not be executed since Check the parameter types in the configuration.
the parameters could not be converted to a
common tag type.
50000 The HMI device is receiving data faster than it is —
capable of processing. Therefore, no further data is
accepted until all current data have been
processed. Data exchange then resumes.
50001 Data exchange has been resumed. —
60000 This alarm is generated by the —
"DisplaySystemAlarms" function. The text to be
displayed is transferred to the function as a
parameter.
60010 The file could not be copied in the direction defined Restart the system function or check the paths of the
because one of the two files is currently open or the source/target files. Using Windows NT/2000/XP:
source/target path is not available. The user executing WinCC flexible Runtime must be
It is possible that the Windows user has no access granted access rights for the files.
rights to one of the two files.
60011 An attempt was made to copy a file to itself. Check the path of the source/target file.
It is possible that the Windows user has no access Using Windows NT/2000/XP with NTFS:
rights to one of the two files. The user executing WinCC flexible Runtime must be
granted access rights for the files.
70010 The application could not be started because it Check if the application exists in the specified path or
could not be found in the path specified or there is close other applications.
insufficient memory space.
70011 The system time could not be modified. Check the time which is to be set.
The error alarm only appears in connection with Using Windows NT/2000/XP: The user executing
area pointer "Date/time PC". Possible causes: WinCC flexible Runtime must be granted the right to
• An invalid time was transferred in the job change the system time of the operating system.
mailbox.
• The Windows user has no right to modify the
system time.
If the first parameter in the system alarm is
displayed with the value 13, the second parameter
indicates the byte containing the incorrect value.
70012 An error occurred when executing the function Close all programs currently running.
"StopRuntime" with the option "Runtime and Then close Windows.
operating system".
Windows and WinCC flexible Runtime are not
closed.
One possible cause is that other programs cannot
be closed.
70013 The system time could not be modified because an Check the time which is to be set.
invalid value was entered. Incorrect separators may
have been used.
70014 The system time could not be modified. Check the time which is to be set.
Possible causes: Using Windows NT/2000/XP: The user executing
• An invalid time was transferred. WinCC flexible Runtime must be granted the right to
change the system time of the operating system.
• The Windows user has no right to modify the
system time.
• Windows rejects the setting request.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

70015 The system time could not be read because —
Windows rejects the reading function.
70016 An attempt was made to select a screen by means Check the screen number in the function or job with the
of a system function or job. This is not possible screen numbers configured.
because the screen number specified does not Assign the number to a screen if necessary.
exist.
Or: A screen could not be generated due to
insufficient system memory.
70017 Date/Time is not read from the area pointer Change the address or set up the address in the
because the address set in the controller is either controller.
not available or has not been set up.
70018 Acknowledgment that the password list has been —
successfully imported.
70019 Acknowledgment that the password list has been —
successfully exported.
70020 Acknowledgment for activation of alarm reporting. —
70021 Acknowledgment for deactivation of alarm —
reporting.
70022 Acknowledgment to starting the Import Password —
List action.
70023 Acknowledgment to starting the Export Password —
List action.
70024 The value range of the tag has been exceeded in Check the desired calculation and correct it if necessary.
the system function.
The calculation of the system function is not
performed.
70025 The value range of the tag has been exceeded in Check the desired calculation and correct it if necessary.
the system function.
The calculation of the system function is not
performed.
70026 No other screens are stored in the internal —
screen memory.
No other screens can be selected.
70027 The backup of the RAM file system has been —
started.
70028 The files from the RAM have been copied in the —
Flash memory.
The files from the RAM have been copied in the
Flash memory. Following a restart, these saved
files are copied back to the RAM file system.
70029 Backup of the RAM file system has failed. Check the settings in the "Control Panel > OP" dialog
No backup copy of the RAM file system has been and save the RAM file system using the "Save Files"
made. button in the "Persistent Storage" tab.
70030 The parameters configured for the system function Compare the parameters configured for the system
are faulty. function with the parameters configured for the
The connection to the new controller was not controllers and correct them as necessary.
established.
70031 The controller configured in the system function is Compare the S7 controller name parameter configured
not an S7 controller. for the system function with the parameters configured
The connection to the new controller was not for the controller and correct them as necessary.
established.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

70032 The object configured with this number in the tab Check the number of the tab order and correct it if
order is not available in the selected screen. necessary.
The screen changes but the focus is set to the
first object.
70033 An e-mail cannot be sent because a TCP/IP Check the network connection to the SMTP server and
connection to the SMTP server no longer exists. re-establish it if necessary.
This system alarm is generated only at the first
attempt. All subsequent unsuccessful attempts to
send an e-mail will no longer generate a system
alarm. The event is regenerated when an e-mail
has been successfully sent in the meantime.
The central e-mail component in WinCC flexible
Runtime attempts, in regular intervals (1 minute),
to establish the connection to the SMTP server and
to send the remaining e-mails.
70034 Following a disruption, the TCP/IP connection to —
the SMTP server could be re-established.
The queued e-mails are then sent.
70036 No SMTP server for sending e-mails is configured. Configure an SMTP server:
An attempt to connect to an SMTP server has failed In WinCC flexible Engineering System
and it is not possible to send e-mails. using "Device settings > Device settings"
WinCC flexible Runtime generates the system
In the Windows CE operating system
alarm after the first attempt to send an e-mail.
using "Control Panel > Internet Settings > E-mail >
SMTP Server"
70037 An e-mail cannot be sent for unknown reasons. Check the e-mail parameters (recipient etc.).
The contents of the e-mail are lost.
70038 The SMTP server has rejected sending or Check the domain of the recipient address or deactivate
forwarding an e-mail because the domain of the the authentication on the SMTP server if possible.
recipient is unknown to the server or because the SMTP authentication is currently not used in
SMTP server requires authentication. WinCC flexible Runtime.
The contents of the e-mail are lost.
70039 The syntax of the e-mail address is incorrect or Check the e-mail address of the recipient.
contains illegal characters.
The contents of the e-mail are discarded.
70040 The syntax of the e-mail address is incorrect or —
contains illegal characters.
70041 The import of the user management was aborted Check your user management or transfer it again to
due to an error. the panel.
Nothing was imported.
80001 The log specified is filled to the size defined Store the file or table by executing a ‘move’ or ‘copy’
(in percent) and must be stored elsewhere. function.
80002 A line is missing in the specified log. —
80003 The copying process for logging was not —
successful.
In this case, it is advisable to check any
subsequent system alarms, too.
80006 Since logging is not possible, this causes a In the case of databases, check if the corresponding data
permanent loss of the functionality. source exists and start up the system again.
80009 A copying action has been completed successfully. —

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

80010 Since the storage location was incorrectly entered Configure the storage location for the respective log
in WinCC flexible, this causes a permanent loss of again and restart the system when the full functionality
the functionality. is required.
80012 Log entries are stored in a buffer. If the values are Archive fewer values.
read to the buffer faster than they can be physically Or:
written (using a hard disk, for example), Increase the logging cycle.
overloading may occur and recording is then
stopped.
80013 The overload status no longer applies. Archiving —
resumes the recording of all values.
80014 The same action was triggered twice in quick —
succession. Since the process is already in
operation, the action is only carried out once.
80015 This system alarm is used to report DOS or —
database errors to the user.
80016 The logs are separated by the system function Reconnect the logs.
"CloseAllLogs" and the incoming entries exceed
the defined buffer size.
All entries in the buffer are deleted.
80017 The number of incoming events cause a buffer Stop the copy action.
overflow. his can be caused, for example, by
several copying actions being activated at the
same time.
All copy jobs are deleted.
80019 The connection between WinCC flexible and all —
logs were closed, for example, after executing the
system function "CloseAllLogs".
Entries are written to the buffer and are then written
to the logs when a connection is re-established.
There is no connection to the storage location and
the storage medium may be replaced, for example.
80020 The maximum number of simultaneously copy Wait until the current copying actions have been
operations has been exceeded. Copying is not completed, then restart the last copy action.
executed.
80021 An attempt was made to delete a log which is still Wait until the current copying actions have been
busy with a copy action. Deletion has not been completed, then restart the last action
executed.
80022 An attempt was made to start a sequence log, In the project, check
which is not a sequence log, from a log using the • if the "StartSequenceLog" system function was
system function "StartSequenceLog". No sequence properly configured
log file is created. • if the tag parameters are properly provided with data
on the HMI device
80023 An attempt was made to copy a log to itself. In the project, check
The log is not copied. • if the "CopyLog" system function was properly
configured
• if the tag parameters are properly provided with data
on the HMI device
80024 The "CopyLog" system function does not allow Edit the "CopyLog" system function in the project if
copying when the target log already contains data necessary. Before you initiate the system function, delete
("Mode" parameter). The log is not copied. the destination log file.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

80025 You have canceled the copy operation. —
Data written up to this point are retained. The
destination log file (if configured) is not deleted.
The cancellation is reported by an error entry
$RT_ERR$ at the end of the destination log.
80026 This alarm is output after all logs are initialized. —
Values are written to the logs from then on. Prior to
this, no entries are written to the logs, irrespective
whether WinCC flexible Runtime is active or not.
80027 The internal Flash memory has been specified as Configure "Storage Card" or a network path as the
the storage location for a log. This is not storage location.
permissible.
No values are written to this log and the log file is
not created.
80028 The alarm returns a status report indicating that the —
logs are currently being initialized. No values are
logged until the alarm 80026 is output.
80029 The number of logs specified in the alarm could Evaluate the additional system alarms, related to this
not be initialized. The logs are initialized. alarm which is also generated.
The faulty log files are not available for Check the configuration, the ODBC
logging jobs. (Open Database Connectivity) and the specified drive.
80030 The structure of the existing log file does not match Delete the existing log data manually, in advance.
the expected structure.
Logging is stopped for this log.
80031 The log in CSV format is corrupted. Delete the faulty file.
The log cannot be used.
80032 Logs can be assigned events. These are triggered Close WinCC flexible Runtime, delete the log, then
as soon as the log is full. If WinCC flexible Runtime restart WinCC flexible Runtime.
is started and the log is already full, the event is not Or:
triggered. Configure a button which contains the same actions as
The log specified no longer logs data because it the event and press it.
is full.
80033 "System Defined" is set in the data log file as the Install MSDE again.
data source name. This causes an error. No data is
written to the database logs, whereas the logging to
the CSV logs works.
80034 An error has occurred in the initialization of the No action is necessary. However, it is recommended to
logs. An attempt has been made to create the save the backup files or delete them in order to make the
tables as a backup. This action was successful. space available again.
A backup has been made of the tables of the
corrupted log file and the cleared log was restarted.
80035 An error has occurred in the initialization of the It is recommended to save the backups or to delete them
logs. An attempt has been made to create backups in order to release memory.
of the tables and this has failed. No logging or
backup has been performed.
80044 The export of a log was interrupted because The export resumes automatically.
Runtime was closed or due to a power failure.
It was detected that the export needed to be
resume when Runtime restarted.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

80045 The export of a log was interrupted due to an The export is repeated automatically. Check:
error in the connection to the server or at the • the connection to the server
server itself.
• if the server is running
• if there is enough free space on the server.
80046 The destination file could not be written while Check if there is enough space on the server and it you
exporting the log. have permission to create the log file.
80047 The log could not be read while exporting it. Check if the storage medium is correctly inserted.
80048 — —
80049 The log could not be renamed while preparing to Check if the storage medium is correctly inserted and if
export it. there is sufficient space on the medium.
The job can not be completed."
80050 The log which shall be exported is not closed. Make sure the "CloseAll Logs" system function is called
The job can not be completed. before using the "ExportLog" system function. Change
the configuration as required.
90024 No operator actions can be logged due to lack of Make more space available by inserting an empty storage
space on the storage medium for log. The operator medium or swapping out the log files on the server using
action will therefore not be executed. "ExportLog".
90025 Because of error state of the archive no user Check if the storage medium is correctly inserted.
actions can be logged. Therefore the user action
will not be executed.
90026 No operator actions can be logged because the log Before further operator actions are carried out, the log
is closed. The operator action will therefore not be must be opened again using the system function
executed. "OpenAllLogs". Change the configuration as required.
90029 Runtime was closed during ongoing operation Ensure that you are using the correct storage medium.
(perhaps due to a power failure) or an a storage
medium in use is incompatible with Audit Trail.
An Audit Trail is not suitable if it belongs to another
project or has already be archived.
90030 Runtime was closed during ongoing operation —
(perhaps due to a power failure).
90031 Runtime was closed during ongoing operation —
(perhaps due to a power failure).
90032 Running out of space on the storage medium Make more space available by inserting an empty storage
for log. medium or swapping out the log files on the server using
"ExportLog".
90033 No more space on the storage medium for log. Make more space available by inserting an empty storage
As of now, no more operator actions requiring medium or swapping out the log files on the server using
logging will be executed. "ExportLog".
90040 Audit Trail is switched off because of a forced Activate the "Audit Trail" again using the system function
user action. "StartLog".
90041 A user action which has to be logged has been A user action requiring logging should only be possible
executed without a logged on user. with permission. Change the configuration by setting a
required permission for the input object.
90044 A user action which has to be confirmed was Repeat the user action if necessary.
blocked, because there is another user action
pending.
110000 The operating mode was changed. "Offline" mode —
is now set.
110001 The operating mode was changed. "Online" mode —
is now set.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

110002 The operating mode was not changed. Check the connection to the controllers.
Check if the address area for the area pointer 88
"Coordination" in the controller is available.
110003 The operating mode of the specified controller was —
changed by the system function
"SetConnectionMode".
The operating mode is now "offline".
110004 The operating mode of the specified controller has —
been changed by the system function
"SetConnectionMode".
The operating mode is now "online".
110005 An attempt was made to use the system function Switch the complete system to "online" mode, then
SetConnectionMode to switch the specified execute the system function again.
controller to "online" mode, although the entire
system is in "offline" mode. This changeover is not
allowed. The controller remains in "offline" mode.
110006 The content of the "project version" area pointer Check:
does not match the user version configured in • the project version entered on the controller
WinCC flexible. WinCC flexible Runtime is
• the project version entered in WinCC flexible
therefore closed.
120000 The trend is not displayed because you configured Change the configuration.
an incorrect axis to the trend or an incorrect trend.
120001 The trend is not displayed because you configured Change the configuration.
an incorrect axis to the trend or an incorrect trend.
120002 The trend is not displayed because the tag Check if the data area for the tag exists in the controller,
assigned attempts to access an invalid controller the configured address is correct and the value range for
address. the tag is correct.
130000 The action was not executed. Close all other programs.
Delete files no longer required from the hard disk.
130001 The action was not executed. Delete files no longer required from the hard disk.
130002 The action was not executed. Close all other programs.
Delete files no longer required from the hard disk.
130003 No data medium found. The operation is canceled. Check, for example, if
• the correct data medium is being accessed
• the data medium is inserted
130004 The data medium is write-protected. The operation Check if access has been made to the correct data
is canceled. carrier. Remove the write protection.
130005 The file is read only. The operation is canceled. Check if access has been made to the correct file.
Edit the file attributes if necessary.
130006 Access to file failed. The operation is canceled. Check, for example, if
• the correct file is being accessed
• the file exists
• another action is preventing simultaneous access to
the file
130007 The network connection is interrupted. Check the network connection and eliminate the cause
Data records cannot be saved or read over the of error.
network connection.
130008 The storage card is not available. Insert the storage card.
Data records cannot be saved to / read from the
storage card.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

130009 The specified folder does not exist on the Insert the storage card.
storage card.
Any files saved to this directory are not backed up
when you switch off the HMI device.
130010 The maximum nesting depth can be exhausted Check the configuration.
when, for example, a value change in a script
results in the call of another script and the second
script in turn has a value change that results in the
call of yet a further script etc.
The configured functionality is not supported.
140000 An online connection to the controller is —
established.
140001 The online connection to the controller was shut —
down.
140003 No tag updating or writing is executed. Check the connection and if the controller is switched on.
Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel
using "Set PG/PC interface".
Restart the system.
140004 No tag update or write operations are executed Verify the connection and check if the controller is
because the access point or the module switched on.
configuration is faulty. Check the access point or the module configuration
(MPI, PPI, PROFIBUS) in the Control Panel with
"Set PG/PC interface".
Restart the system.
140005 No tag updating or writing is executed because the Use a different HMI device address.
HMI device address is incorrect (possibly too high). Verify the connection and check ifthe controller is
switched on.
Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel
using "Set PG/PC interface".
Restart the system.
140006 No tag updating or writing is executed because the Select a different baud rate in WinCC flexible
baud rate is incorrect. (according to module, profile, communication peer, etc.).
140007 Tag are not updated or written because the bus Check the user-defined bus profile.
profile is incorrect (see %1). Check the connection and if the controller is switched on.
The following parameter could not be written to the Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel
registry:: using "Set PG/PC interface".
1: Tslot Restart the system.
2: Tqui
3: Tset
4: MinTsdr
5: MaxTsdr
6: Trdy
7: Tid1
8: Tid2
9: Gap Factor
10: Retry Limit

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

140008 No tag updating or writing is executed because Check the connection and if the controller is switched on.
baud rate is incorrect. The following parameters Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel
could not be written to the registry: using "Set PG/PC interface".
0: General error Restart the system.
1: Wrong version
2: Profile cannot be written to the registry.
3: The subnet type cannot be written to the
registry.
4: The Target Rotation Time cannot be written to
the registry.
5: Faulty Highest Address (HSA).
140009 Tags are not updated or written because the Reinstall the module in the Control Panel using
module for S7 communication was not found. "Set PG/PC interface".
140010 No S7 communication partner found because the Switch the controller on.
controller is shut down. DP/T:
DP/T: If only one master is connected to the network, disable
The option "PG/PC is the only master" is not set in "PG/PC is the only master" in "Set PG/PC interface".
the Control Panel under "Set PG/PC interface." If several masters are connected to the network, enable
these. Do not change any settings, for this will cause
bus errors.
140011 No tag updating or writing is executed because Check the connection and that the communication
communication is down. partner is switched on.
140012 There is an initialization problem Restart the HMI device.
(e.g. when WinCC flexible Runtime was closed in Or:
Task Manager). Run WinCC flexible Runtime, then start your other
Or: applications.
Another application (e.g.STEP7) with different bus
parameters is active and the driver cannot be
started with the new bus parameters
(transmission rate, for example).
140013 The MPI cable is disconnected and, thus, there is Check the connections.
no power supply.
140014 The configured bus address is in already in use by Edit the HMI device address in the controller
another application. configuration.
140015 Wrong transmission rate Correct the relevant parameters.
Or:
Faulty bus parameters (e.g.HSA)
Or:
OP address > HSA or: Wrong interrupt vector
(interrupt does not arrive at the driver)
140016 The hardware does not support the configured Change the interrupt number.
interrupt.
140017 The set interrupt is in use by another driver. Change the interrupt number.
140018 The consistency check was disabled by Enable the consistency check with SIMOTION Scout and
SIMOTION Scout. Only a corresponding note once again download the project to the PLC.
appears.
140019 SIMOTION Scout is downloading a new project to Wait until the end of the reconfiguration.
the controller. Connection to the controller is
canceled.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

140020 The version in the controller and that of the project The following remedies are available:
(FWX file) do not match. Download the current version to the PLC using
Connection to the controller is canceled SIMOTION Scout.
Regenerate the project using WinCC flexible ES, close
WinCC flexible Runtime and restart with a new
configuration.
150000 No more data is read or written. Possible causes: Ensure that the cable is plugged in, the controller is
• The cable is defective. operational, the correct interface is being used.
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
• The PLC does not respond, is defective, etc.
• The wrong port is used for the connection.
• System overload.
150001 Connection is up because the cause of the —
interruption has been eliminated.
160000 No more data is read or written. Possible causes: Ensure that the cable is plugged in, the controller is
• The cable is defective. operational, the correct interface is being used.
• The wrong port is used for the connection.
160010 No connection to the server because the server Check access rights.
identification (CLS-ID) cannot be determined.
Values cannot be read or written.
160011 No connection to the server because the server Check, for example, if
identification (CLS-ID) cannot be determined. • the server name is correct
• the computer name is correct
• the server is registered
160012 No connection to the server because the server Check, for example, if
identification (CLS-ID) cannot be determined. • the server name is correct
• the computer name is correct
• the server is registered
Note for advanced users:
Interpret the value from HRESULT.
160013 The specified server was started as InProc server. Configure the server as OutProc Server or Local Server.
This has not been released and may possibly lead
to incorrect behavior because the server is running
in the same process area as the WinCC flexible
Runtime software.
160014 Only one OPC server project can be started on a Do not start a second project with OPC server
PC/MP. An alarm is output when an attempt is functionality on the computer.
made to start a second project.
The second project has no OPC server functionality
and cannot be located as an OPC server by
external sources.
170000 S7 diagnostics events are not indicated because it —
is not possible to log in to the S7 diagnostics
functions at this device. The service is not
supported.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

170001 The S7 diagnostics buffer cannot be viewed Set the controller to online mode.
because communication with the controller is shut
down.
170002 The S7 diagnostics buffer cannot be viewed —
because reading of the diagnostics buffer (SSL)
was canceled with error.
170003 An S7 diagnostics event cannot be visualized. —
The system returns internal error %2.
170004 An S7 diagnostics event cannot be visualized. —
The system returns an internal error of error
class %2, error number %3.
170007 It is not possible to read the S7 diagnostics buffer —
(SSL) because this operation was canceled with an
internal error of class %2 and error code %3.
180000 A component/OCX received configuration data with Install a newer component.
a version ID which is not supported.
180001 System overload because too many actions Several remedies are available:
running in parallel. Not all the actions can be • Increase the configured cycle times or basic clock.
executed, some are rejected.
• Generate the alarms at a slower rate (polling).
• Initiate scripts and functions at greater intervals.
If the alarm appears more frequently:
Restart the HMI device.
180002 The on-screen keyboard could not be activated. Reinstall WinCC flexible Runtime.
Possible causes:
"TouchInputPC.exe" was not registered due to a
faulty Setup.
190000 It is possible that the tag is not updated. —
190001 The tag is updated after the cause of the last error —
state has been eliminated
(return to normal operation).
190002 The tag is not updated because communication Select the system function "SetOnline" to go online.
with the controller is down.
190004 The tag is not updated because the configured tag Check the configuration.
address does not exist.
190005 The tag is not updated because the configured Check the configuration.
controller type does not exist for this tag.
190006 The tag is not updated because it is not possible to Check the configuration.
map the controller type in the data type of the tag.
190007 The tag value is not modified because the Set online mode or reconnect to the controller.
connection to the controller is interrupted or the tag
is offline.
190008 The threshold values configured for the tag have Observe the configured or current threshold values of
been violated, for example, by the tag.
• a value entered
• a system function
• a script

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

190009 An attempt has been made to assign the tag a Observe the range of values for the data type of the tags.
value which is outside the permitted range of
values for this data type.
For example, a value of 260 was entered for a byte
tag or a value of -3 for an unsigned word tag.
190010 Too many values are written to the tag Increase the time interval between multiple write actions.
(for example, in a loop triggered by a script).
Values are lost because only up to 100 actions are
saved to the buffer.
190011 Possible cause 1:
The value entered could not be written to the Make sure that the value entered lies within the range of
configured controller tag because the high or low values of the control tags.
limit was exceeded.
The system discards the entry and restores the
original value.
Possible cause 2:
The connection to the controller was interrupted. Check the connection to the PLC.
190012 It is not possible to convert a value from a source Check the range of values or the data type of the tags.
format to a target format, for example:
An attempt is being made to assign a value to a
counter that is outside the valid, PLC-specific
value range.
A tag of the type Integer should be assigned a
value of the type String.
190100 The area pointer is not updated because the Check the configuration.
address configured for this pointer does not exist.
Type
1 Warning alarms
2 Error alarms
3 Controller acknowledgment
4 HMI device acknowledgment
5 LED mapping
6 Trend request
7 Trend transfer 1
8 Trend transfer 2
No.:
consecutive number shown in WinCC flexible ES.
190101 The area pointer is not updated because it is not —
possible to map the PLC type to the area pointer
type.
Parameter type and no.: See alarm 190100
190102 The area pointer is updated after the cause of the —
last error state has been eliminated
Parameter type and no.: See alarm 190100.
200000 Coordination is not executed because the address Change the address or set up the address in the
configured in the controller does not exist/is not set. controller.
200001 Coordination is canceled because the write access Change the address or set the address in the controller
to the address configured in the PLC is not at an area which allows write access.
possible.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

200002 Coordination is not carried out at the moment Internal error
because the address format of the area pointer
does not match the internal storage format.
200003 Coordination can be executed again because the —
last error state is eliminated
200004 The coordination may not be executed. —
200005 No more data is read or written. Possible causes: Ensure that the cable is plugged in and the controller is
• The cable is defective. operational.
200100 Coordination is not executed because the address Change the address or set up the address in the
configured in the controller does not exist/is not set. controller.
200101 Coordination is canceled because the write access Change the address or set the address in the controller
to the address configured in the PLC is not at an area which allows write access.
possible.
200102 Coordination is not carried out at the moment Internal error
because the address format of the area pointer
does not match the internal storage format.
200103 Coordination can be executed again because the —
last error state is eliminated (return to normal
operation).
200104 The coordination may not be executed. —
200105 No more data is read or written. Possible causes: Ensure that the cable is plugged in and the controller is
• The cable is defective. operational.
210000 Jobs are not processed because the address Change the address or set up the address in the
configured in the controller does not exist/has not controller.
been set up.
210001 Jobs are not processed because read/write access Change the address or set up the address in the
to the address configured in the controller is not controller in an area which allows read/write access.
possible.
210002 Jobs are not executed because the address format Internal error
of the area pointer does not match the internal
storage format.
210003 The job buffer is processed again because the last —
error status has been eliminated
210004 It is possible that the job buffer will not be —
processed.
210005 A control request with an illegal number was Check the controller program.
initiated.
210006 An error occurred while attempting to execute the Check the parameters of the control request. Recompile
control request. As a result, the control request is the configuration.
not executed. Observe the next/previous system
alarms.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

220001 The tag is not downloaded because the associated Change the configuration.
communication driver / HMI device does not
support the download of Boolean/discrete data
types.
220002 The tag is not downloaded because the associated Change the configuration.
communication driver / HMI device does not
support write access to the data type BYTE.
220003 The communication driver cannot be loaded. Install the driver by reinstalling WinCC flexible Runtime.
The driver may not be installed.
220004 Communication is down and no update data is Check the connection.
transferred because the cable is not connected or
defective etc.
220005 Communication is up. —
220006 The connection between the specified PLC and the —
specified port is active.
220007 The connection to the specified controller is Check if
interrupted at the specified port. • the cable is plugged in
• the controller is OK
• the correct port is used
• your configuration is OK (interface parameters,
protocol settings, PLC address).
220008 The communication driver cannot access or open Close all the applications which access this port and
the specified port. The port may be in use by restart the computer.
another application or the port used is not available Use another port of the system.
on the destination device.
There is no communication with the controller.
230000 The value entered could not be accepted. Enter a practical value or delete any unneeded users.
The system discards the entry and restores the
previous value.
Either
• the value range has been exceeded
• illegal characters have been entered
• the maximum permitted number of users has
been exceeded
230002 The currently logged in user is not granted write Log on as a user with appropriate rights.
access rights. The system therefore discards the
input and restored the previous value.
230003 Changeover to the specified screen failed because Configure the screen and check the screen selection
the screen is not available/configured. The current function.
screen remains selected.
230005 The value range of the tag has been exceeded in Observe the range of values for the tag when entering
the IO field. a value.
The original value of the tag is retained.
230100 During navigation in the web browser, the system Navigate to another page.
returned a message which may be of interest to
the user.
The web browser continues to run but may not
(fully) show the new page.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

230200 The connection to the HTTP channel was Check the network connection.
interrupted due to an error. This error is explained Check the server configuration.
in detail by another system alarm.
Data is no longer exchanged.
230201 The connection to HTTP channel was established. —
Data is exchanged.
230202 WININET.DLL has detected an error. This error Depending on the cause:
usually occurs when an attempt to connect to the When an attempt to connect fails or a timeout error
server fails or the server refuses to connect occurs:
because the client lacks the proper authorization.
• Check the network connection and the network.
An unknown server certificate may also be the
cause if the connection is encrypted by means • Check the server address.
of SSL. • Check if the web server is actually running on the
The alarm text provides details. destination computer.
This text is always in the language of the Faulty authorization:
Windows installation because it is returned by • The configured user name and/or password do not
the Windows OS. match those on the server. Establish consistency.
Process values are no longer exchanged.
When the server certificate is rejected:
Certificate signed by an unknown CA ( ):
• Either ignore this item in your project, or
• Install a certificate that has been signed with a root
certificate known to the client computer.
The date of the certificate is invalid:
• Install a certificate with a valid date on the server.
Invalid CN (Common Name or Computer Name):
• Install a certificate with a name that corresponds to
that of the server address.
230203 Although a connection can be made to the server, Error 503 Service unavailable: Check if
the HTTP server refuses to connect because WinCC flexible Runtime is running on the server
• WinCC flexible Runtime is not running on the the HTTP channel is supported.
server, or
• the HTTP channel is not supported
(503 Service unavailable).
Other errors can only occur if the web server does
not support the HTTP channel. The language of the
alarm text depends on the web server.
Data is not exchanged.
230301 An internal error has occurred. An English text —
explains the error in more detail. This may be
caused by insufficient memory.
OCX does not work.
230302 The name of the remote server cannot be resolved. Check the configured server address.
The attempt to connect failed. Check if the DNS service is available on the network.
230303 The remote server is not running on the addressed Check the configured server address.
computer. Check if the remote server is running on the target
Wrong server address. computer.
The attempt to connect failed

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

230304 The remote server on the addressed computer is Use a compatible remote server.
incompatible to VNCOCX.
The attempt to connect failed.
230305 The authentication has failed because the Configure the correct password.
password is incorrect.
230306 Error in the connection to the remote server. Check if
This may occur as a result of network problems. • the bus cable is plugged in
• there are network problems
230307 The connection to the remote server was shut —
down because
• the remote server was shut down, or
• the user instructed the server to close all
connections.
The connection is closed.
230308 This alarm provides information on the connection —
status.
An attempt is made to connect.
240000 WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo mode. Install the authorization.
You have no authorization or your authorization is
corrupted.
240001 WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo mode. Load an adequate authorization / powerpack.
Too many tags are configured for the installed
version.
240002 WinCC flexible Runtime is operating with a Restore the full authorization.
time-limited emergency authorization.
240003 Authorization failed. Restart WinCC flexible Runtime or reinstall it.
Without authorization, WinCC will run in demo
mode.
240004 Error while reading the emergency authorization. Restart WinCC flexible Runtime, install the authorization
WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo mode. or repair the authorization (see Commissioning
Instructions Software Protection).
240005 The Automation License Manager has detected an Reboot the HMI device or PC. If this does not solve the
internal system fault. problem, remove the Automation License Manager and
Possible causes: install it again.
• A corrupt file
• A defective installation
• No free space for the Automation License
Manager etc.
250000 The tag in the specified line in "Status force" is not Check the set address and then verify that the address is
updated because the address configured for this set up in the controller.
tag is not available.
250001 The tag in the specified line in "Status force" is not Check the set address.
updated because the controller type configured for
this tag does not exist.
250002 The tag in the specified line in "Status force" is not Check the set address.
updated because it is not possible to map the
controller type in the tag type.
250003 An attempt to connect to the PLC failed. The tags Check the connection to the PLC. Check that the
are not updated. controller is switched on and is online.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

260000 An unknown user or an unknown password has Log on to the system as a user with a valid password.
been entered in the system.
The current user is logged off from the system.
260001 The logged in user does not have sufficient Log on to the system as a user with sufficient
authorization to execute the protected functions on authorization.
the system.
260002 This alarm is triggered by the system function —
"TrackUserChange".
260003 The user has logged off from the system. —
260004 The user name entered into the user view already Select another user name because user names have to
exists in the user management. be unique in the user management.
260005 The entry is discarded. Use a shorter user name.
260006 The entry is discarded. Use a shorter or longer password.
260007 The logon timeout value entered is outside the valid Enter a logon timeout value between 0 and 60 minutes.
range of 0 to 60 minutes.
The new value is discarded and the original value is
retained.
260008 An attempt was made to read a PTProRun.pwl file —
created with ProTool V 6.0 in WinCC flexible.
Reading the file was canceled due to incompatibility
of the format.
260009 You have attempted to delete the user "Admin" or If you need to delete a user, because perhaps you have
"PLC User". These users are fixed components of exceeded the maximum number permitted, delete
the user management and cannot be deleted. another user.
260012 The passwords entered in the "Change Password" You have to log on to the system again. Then enter the
dialog and the confirmation field are not identical. identical password twice to be able to change the
The password has not been changed. User will be password.
logged off.
260013 The password entered in the "Change Password" You have to log on to the system again. Then enter a
dialog is invalid because it is already in use. new password that has not been used before.
The password has not been changed. User will be
logged off.
260014 User has unsuccessfully attempted to log on You can log on to the system with your correct password.
3 times in succession. Only an administrator can change the assignment to a
The user has been locked out and assigned to group.
group no. 0.
270000 A tag is not indicated in the alarm because it Check if the data area for the tag exists in the controller,
attempts to access an invalid address in the the configured address is correct and the value range for
controller. the tag is correct.
270001 There is a device-specific limit as to how many —
alarms may be queued for output (see the
operating instructions). This limit has been
exceeded.
The view no longer contains all the alarms.
However, all alarms are written to the alarm buffer.
270002 The view shows alarms of a log for which there is Delete older log data if necessary.
no data in the current project.
Wildcards are output for the alarms.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

270003 The service cannot be set up because too many Reduce the number of HMI devices which want to use the
devices want to use this service. service.
A maximum of four devices may execute this
action.
270004 Access to persistent buffer is not possible. If the problems persist at the next startup, contact
Alarms cannot be restored or saved. Customer Support (delete Flash).
270005 Persistent buffer damaged: Alarms cannot be If the problems persist at the next startup, contact
restored. Customer Support (delete Flash).
270006 Project modified: Alarms cannot be restored from The project was generated and transferred new to the
the persistent buffer. HMI device; The error should no longer occur when the
device starts again.
270007 A configuration problem is preventing the restore Update the operating system and then transfer your
(a DLL is missing, a directory is unknown, etc.). project again to the HMI device.
280001 No more data is read or written. Possible causes: Check if
• The cable is defective. • the cable is plugged in
• The PLC does not respond, is defective, etc. • the controller is OK
• The wrong port is used for the connection. • the correct port is used
• System overload. Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
280002 The connection used requires a function block in —
the controller.
The function block has responded. Communication
is now enabled.
280003 The connection used requires a function block in Check if
the controller. • the cable is plugged in
The function block has not responded.
• the controller is OK
• the correct port is used
Remedy depends on the error code:
1: The function block must set the COM bit in the
response container.
2: The function block must not set the ERROR bit in the
response container.
3: The function block must respond within the specified
time (timeout).
4: Go online to the PLC.
280004 The connection to the controller is interrupted. Check the connection parameters in WinCC flexible.
There is no data exchange at present. Ensure that the cable is plugged in, the controller is
operational, the correct interface is being used.
290000 The recipe tag could not be read or written. It is Check in the configuration that the address has been set
assigned the start value. up in the controller.
The alarm can be entered in the alarm buffer for up
to four more failed tags if necessary. After that,
alarm 290003 is output.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

290001 An attempt has been made to assign a value to a Observe the value range for the tag type.
recipe tag which is outside the value range
permitted for this type.
to four more failed tags if necessary. After that,
alarm 290004 is output.
290002 It is not possible to convert a value from a source Check the value range or type of the tag.
format to a target format.
to four more failed recipe tags if necessary.
After that, alarm 290005 is output.
290003 This alarm is output when alarm number 290000 is Check in the configuration that the tag addresses have
triggered more than five times. been set up in the controller.
In this case, no further separate alarms are
generated.
290004 This alarm is output when alarm number 290001 is Observe the value range for the tag type.
triggered more than five times.
generated.
290005 This alarm is output when alarm number 290002 is Check the value range or type of the tag.
triggered more than five times.
generated.
290006 The threshold values configured for the tag have Observe the configured or current threshold values of
been violated by values entered. the tag.
290007 There is a difference between the source and target Insert the specified data recipe tag in the source
structure of the recipe currently being processed. structure.
The target structure contains an additional data
recipe tag which is not available in the source
structure.
The data recipe tag specified is assigned its
start value.
290008 There is a difference between the source and target Remove the specified data recipe tag in the specified
structure of the recipe currently being processed. recipe from the project.
The source structure contains an additional data
recipe tag which is not available in the target
structure and therefore cannot be assigned.
The value is rejected.
290010 The storage location configured for the recipe is not Check the configured storage location.
permitted.
Possible causes:
Illegal characters, write protection, data carrier out
of space or does not exist.
290011 The data record with the specified number does Check the source for the number (constant or tag value).
not exist.
290012 The recipe with the specified number does not Check the source for the number (constant or tag value).
exist.
290013 An attempt was made to save a data record under The following remedies are available:
a data record number which already exists. • Check the source for the number
The action is not executed. (constant or tag value).
• First, delete the data record.
• Change the "Overwrite" function parameter.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

290014 The file specified to be imported could not be Check:
found. • The file name
• Ensure that the file is in the specified directory.
290020 Message reporting that the download of data —
records from the HMI device to the PLC has
started.
records from the HMI device to the PLC was
completed.
290022 Message reporting that the download of data Check in the configuration whether:
records from the HMI device to the PLC was • The tag addresses are configured in the controller
canceled due to an error.
• The recipe number exists
• The data record number exist
• The "Overwrite" function parameter is set
records from the PLC to the HMI device has
started.
records from the PLC to the HMI device was
completed.
290025 Message reporting that the download of data Check in the configuration whether:
records from the PLC to the HMI device was • The tag addresses are configured in the controller
canceled due to an error.
• The recipe number exists
• The data record number exist
• The "Overwrite" function parameter is set
290026 An attempt has been made to read/write a data Set the data record status to zero.
record although the data record is not free at
present.
This error may occur in the case of recipes for
which downloading with synchronization has been
configured.
290027 Unable to connect to the controller at present. Check the connection to the PLC.
As a result, the data record can neither be read
nor written.
Possible causes:
No physical connection to the controller
(no cable plugged in, cable is defect) or the
controller is switched off.
290030 This alarm is output after you selected screen Reload the data record from the storage location or retain
which contains a recipe view in which a data record the current values.
is already selected.
290031 While saving, it was detected that a data record Overwrite the data record or cancel the action.
with the specified number already exists.
290032 While exporting data records it was detected that a Overwrite the file or cancel the process.
file with the specified name already exists.
290033 Confirmation request before deleting data records. —

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

290040 A data record error with error code %1 that cannot Check the storage location, the data record, the
be described in more detail occurred. "Data record" area pointer and if necessary, the
The action is canceled. connection to the controller.
It is possible that the data record was not installed Restart the action after a short time.
correctly on the controller. If the error persists, contact Customer Support.
Forward the relevant error code to Customer Support.
290041 A data record or file cannot be saved because the Delete files no longer required.
storage location is full.
290042 An attempt was made to execute several recipe Trigger the action again after waiting a short period.
actions simultaneously. The last action was not
executed.
290043 Confirmation request before storing data records. —
290044 The data store for the recipe has been destroyed —
and is deleted.
290050 Message reporting that the export of data records —
has started.
290051 Message reporting that the export of data records —
was completed.
290052 Message reporting that the export of data records Ensure that the structure of the data records at the
was canceled due to an error. storage location and the current recipe structure on the
HMI device are identical.
290053 Message reporting that the import of data records —
has started.
290054 Message reporting that the import of data records —
was completed.
290055 Message reporting that the import of data records Ensure that the structure of the data records at the
was canceled due to an error. storage location and the current recipe structure on the
HMI device are identical.
290056 Error when reading/writing the value in the Check the specified line/column.
specified line/column.
The action was canceled.
290057 The tags of the recipe specified were toggled from —
"offline" to "online" mode.
Each change of a tag in this recipe is now
immediately downloaded to the controller.
290058 The tags of the specified recipe were toggled from —
"offline" to "online" mode.
Modifications to tags in this recipe are no longer
immediately transferred to the controller but must
be transferred there explicitly by downloading a
data record.
290059 Message reporting that the specified data record —
was saved.
290060 Message reporting that the specified data record —
memory was cleared.
290061 Message reporting that clearing of data record —
memory was canceled due to an error.
290062 The data record number is above the maximum Select another number.
of 65536.
This data record cannot be created.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

290063 This occurs with the system function Check the "ExportDataRecords" system function.
"ExportDataRecords" when the parameter
"Overwrite" is set to No.
An attempt has been made to save a recipe under
a file name which already exists.
The export is canceled.
290064 Message reporting that the deletion of data records —
has started.
290065 Message reporting that the deletion of data records —
has successfully completed.
290066 Confirmation request before deleting data records. —
290068 Security request to confirm if all data records in the —
recipe should be deleted.
290069 Security request to confirm if all data records in the —
recipe should be deleted.
290070 The data record specified is not in the import file. Check the source of the data record number or data
record name (constant or tag value).
290071 During the editing of data record values, a value Enter a value within the limits of the recipe tag.
was entered which exceeded the low limit of the
recipe tag.
The entry is discarded.
290072 When editing data record values, a value was Enter a value within the limits of the recipe tag.
entered which exceeds the high limit of the
recipe tag.
The entry is discarded.
290073 An action (e.g. saving a data record) failed due to —
an unknown error.
The error corresponds to the status alarm
IDS_OUT_CMD_EXE_ERR in the large
recipe view.
290074 While saving, it was detected that a data record Overwrite the data record, change the data record
with the specified number already exists but under number or cancel the action.
another name.
290075 A data record with this name already exists. Please select a different data record name.
The data record is not saved.
300000 Faulty configuration of process monitoring Change the controller configuration.
(e.g. using PDiag or S7-Graph): More alarms are
queued than specified in the specifications of the
CPU. No further ALARM_S alarms can be
managed by the PLC and reported to the
HMI devices.
300001 ALARM_S is not registered on this controller. Select a controller that supports the ALARM_S service.
310000 An attempt is being made to print too many reports Wait until the previous active log was printed.
in parallel. Repeat the print job if necessary.
Only one log file can be output to the printer at a
given time; the print job is therefore rejected.
310001 An error occurred on triggering the printer. The Evaluate the additional system alarms related to this
report is either not printed or printed with errors. alarm.
Repeat the print job if necessary.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

320000 The movements have already been indicated by Deselect the movements on the other display units
another device. and select the motion control screen on the required
The movements can no longer be controlled. display unit.
320001 The network is too complex. View the network in STL.
The faulty addresses cannot be indicated.
320002 No diagnostics alarm selected. Select a diagnostics alarm from the ZP_ALARM alarm
The unit belonging to the alarm could not be screen.
selected.
320003 No alarms exists for the selected unit. The detail Select the defective unit from the overview screen.
view cannot visualize any networks.
320004 The required signal states could not be read by the Check the consistency between the configuration on the
PLC. The faulty addresses cannot be found. display unit and the PLC program.
320005 The project contains ProAgent elements which are In order to run the project, install the optional ProAgent
not installed. ProAgent diagnostic functions cannot package.
be performed.
320006 You have attempted to execute a function which is Check the type of the selected unit.
not supported in the current constellation.
320007 No error-triggering addresses were found on the Switch the detail screen to STL layout mode and check
networks. the status of the addresses and exclusion addresses.
ProAgent cannot indicate any faulty addresses.
320008 The diagnostic data stored in the configuration are Download the project to the HMI device again.
not synchronized with those in the PLC.
ProAgent can only indicate the diagnostic units.
not synchronized with those in the PLC.
The diagnostic screens can be operated as usual.
ProAgent may be unable to show all diagnostic
texts.
not synchronized with those in STEP7.
The ProAgent diagnostics data is not up-to-date.
320011 A unit with the corresponding DB number and Check the parameters of the "SelectUnit" function and the
FB number does not exist. units selected in the project.
The function cannot be executed.
320012 The "Step sequence mode" dialog is no longer Use the ZP_STEP step sequence screen from the
supported. corresponding standard project for your project. Instead
of calling the Overview_Step_Sequence_Mode function,
call the "FixedScreenSelection" function using ZP_STEP
as the screen name.
320014 The selected controller cannot be evaluated for Check the parameters of the "EvaluateAlarmDisplayFault"
ProAgent. system function.
The Alarm view assigned to the
"EvaluateAlarmDisplayFault" system function could
not be found.
330022 Too many dialogs are open on the HMI device. Close all dialogs you do not require on the HMI device.

Appendix
A.2 System Alarms

Abbreviations B
CPU Central Processing Unit
CSV Comma Separated Values
CTS Clear To Send
DC Direct Current
DCD Data Carrier Detect
DIL Dual-in-Line (electronic chip housing design)
DP Distributed I/O
DSN Data Source Name
DSR Data Set Ready
DTR Data Terminal Ready
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EN European standard
ES Engineering System
ESD Electrostatic Discharge, the components and modules endangered by such
ESD Electrostatic Sensitive Device
GND Ground
HF High Frequency
HMI Human Machine Interface
IEC International Electronic Commission
IF Interface
IO Input and Output
LED Light Emitting Diode
MOS Metal Oxide Semiconductor
MPI Multipoint Interface (SIMATIC S7)
MS Microsoft
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
n. c. Not connected
OP Operator Panel
PC Personal Computer
PG Programming device
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PPI Point-to-Point Interface (SIMATIC S7)
RAM Random Access Memory
RJ45 Registered Jack Type 45
RTS Request To Send

Abbreviations
RxD Receive Data

SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage
SP Service Pack
STN Super Twisted Nematic
Sub-D Subminiature D (plug)
TAB Tabulator
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TFT Thin Film Transistor
TxD Transmit Data
UL Underwriter’s Laboratory

Glossary
"Transfer" mode
an operating mode of the HMI device in which an executable project is transferred from the
configuration computer to an HMI device.
Acknowledge
Acknowledging an alarm confirms that you have noted it.
AG
Controller of the SIMATIC S5 series such as the AG S5-115U, for example
Alarm logging
Output of user-specific alarms to a printer, in parallel to their output to the
HMI device screen.
Alarm, acknowledging
Acknowledging an alarm confirms that you have noted it.
Alarm, activated
Moment at which an alarm is triggered by the controller or HMI device.
Alarm, deactivated
Moment at which the initiation of an alarm is reset by the controller.
Alarm, user-specific
A user-specific alarm can be assigned to one of the following alarm classes:
● Error
● Operation
A user-specific alarm designates a certain operating status of the plant connected to the
HMI device via the controller.

Glossary
Array
Area reserved in configured screens for the input and output of values.
AS
Controller of the SIMATIC S7 series such as a SIMATIC S7-300
AS 511
Protocol of the programming device interface of a SIMATIC S5 controller
Boot loader
Used to start the operating system. Automatically started when the HMI device is switched
on. A start screen appears during startup. After the operating system has been loaded, the
Loader opens.
Configuration PC
General term for programming devices (PGs) and PCs on which plant projects are created
using an engineering software.
Control request
Triggers a function via the controller.
Controller
General term for devices and systems with which the HMI device communicates,
e.g. SIMATIC S7.
Display duration
Defines whether and how long a system alarm is displayed on the HMI device.
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of electrical equipment to function properly in its
electromagnetic environment without influencing this environment.
Engineering software
Software for the creation of projects for process visualization – see also project, process
visualization and runtime software

Glossary
Event
Functions are triggered by defined incoming events. Events can be configured. Events which
can be assigned to a button include "Press" and "Release", for example.
Fault time
Refers to the time interval between an activated and deactivated alarm.
Figure
Form of the visualization of all logically related process data for a plant. The visualization of
the process data can be supported by graphic objects.
Flash memory
Non-volatile memory with EEPROM chips, used as mobile storage medium or as memory
module installed permanently on the motherboard.
Function key
Key on the HMI device which supports user-specific functions. A function is assigned to the
key in the configuration. The assignment of the keys may be specific to an active screen
or not.
Half brightness lifetime

Time period until the brightness degrades to 50% of its original value. The specified value is
dependent on the operating temperature.
Hardcopy
Output of the screen content to a printer.
HMI device image

a file which can be transferred from the configuration computer to the HMI device.
The HMI device image contains the operating system and elements of the runtime software
required to run a project.
Infotext
Configured information on objects within a project. An alarm infotext, for example, may
contain information on the cause of the fault and troubleshooting routines.
IO field
Enables the input or output of values on the HMI device which are transferred to the
controller.

Glossary
Notation
System consisting of characters, symbols and rules. In particular used to define the write
format of a programming language in data processing.
Object
Component of a project. Example: screen or alarm. Objects are used to view or enter texts
and values on the HMI device.
Operator control object

Component of a project which is used to enter values and trigger functions. A button,
for example, is an operator control object.
Plant
General term referring to machines, processing centers, systems, plants and processes
which are operated and monitored on an HMI device.
Process visualization
Visualization of processes from the areas of production, logistics and services in text-based
and graphics format. Configured plant screens allow operator intervention in active plant
processes by means of the input and output data.
Project
Result of a configuration using an engineering software. The project normally contains
several screens with embedded system-specific objects, basic settings and alarms.
The project file of a project configured in WinCC flexible is saved under the file name
extension *.hmi.
You need to distinguish between the project on the configuration computer and that on an
HMI device. A project may be available in more languages on the configuration PC than can
be managed on the HMI device. The project on the configuration PC can also be set up for
different HMI devices. Only the project set up for a particular HMI device can be transferred
to that HMI device.
Project file
File which is generated based on a source file for a specific HMI device when the
configuration is completed. The project file is transferred to the corresponding HMI device
and is used to operate and monitor plants. Refer to Source file.
Recipe
Combination of tags forming a fixed data structure. The data structure configured can be
assigned data on the HMI device and is then referred to as a data record. The use of recipes
ensures that when a data record is downloaded, all the assigned data is transferred
synchronously to the controller.

Glossary
Runtime software
is a process visualization software which can be used to test a project on a configuration
computer. Also refer to "Project" and "Engineering software."
Screen object
Configured object for operating and monitoring the system, e.g. a rectangle, an IO field or a
recipe view.
Source file
File from which various project files can be created, depending on the configuration.
The source file is not transferred and remains on the configuration computer.
The file name extension of a source file is *.hmi. Refer to Source file, compressed and
Project file.
Source file, compressed

Compressed form of the source file. Can be transferred in addition to the project file to the
corresponding HMI device. "Enable Backtransfer" must be set in the project on the
configuration computer. The file extension of a compressed source file is *.pdz. The standard
memory location for a compressed source file is the external MMC. Refer to Source file.
To restore a source file, it is necessary to use the same WinCC flexible version which was
used to configure the project.
STEP 7
Programming software SIMATIC S7, SIMATIC C7 and SIMATIC WinAC controllers.
STEP 7 Micro/WIN
Programming software for controllers of the SIMATIC S7-200 series.
Symbolic IO field
Box for the input/output of a parameter. Contains a list of default entries from which one can
be selected.
System alarms
Assigned to the "System" alarm class. A system alarm refers to internal states on the
HMI device and the controller.
Tab order
In the configuration, this sets the sequence in which objects are focused on pressing the
<TAB> key.

Glossary
Tag
Defined memory location to which values can be written to and read from. This can be done
from the controller or the HMI device. Based on whether the tag is interconnected with the
controller or not, we distinguish between "external" tags (process tags) and "internal" tags.
Transfer
The transfer of an executable project to the HMI device.

Index
A B
Accessories Backing up, 203, 204, 206
Accessory kit, 22 With ProSave, 206
Accessory kit, 22 With WinCC flexible, 204
Acknowledging Backlighting
Alarm, 282, 288 Reducing, 158
Error alarm, 282, 288 Setting, 143
Address assignment Backup, 142, 188
in the TCP/IP network, 133 Registry information, 143
LAN network, 181 Registry Information, 156
Addressing, 178 Temporary files, 156
Admin, 242, 243, 274, 276 to external storage device, 142, 186
Alarm, 279, 284 Backup
Acknowledging, 282, 288 to memory card, 105
Editing, 283, 289 Booting, 162
Alarm buffer, 24, 280, 285 Bottom view, 16, 18, 19, 21
Alarm class, 280, 281, 285, 287 Brightness
Alarm event, 279, 284 Changing, 157
Alarm indicator, 282, 288 Bus parameters
Alarm line, 285 Profile, 177
Alarm text window, 281
Alarm view, 280, 285
C
Alarm window, 280, 285
Alarms, 24 Cable cross section, 55
Displaying, 285 Calculation functions, 24
Alphanumerical screen keyboard, 233, 254, 256 Calibrating
Alphanumerical value Touch screen, 87, 113, 143, 150
changing, 257 Care, 317
Changing, 255 Certificate
Entering, 255, 257 Delete, 185
Alphanumerical values, 231 Deleting, 142
Changing, 234 Displaying, 142
Entering, 234 Importing, 142, 185
Ambient temperature Certifications, 31
Impermissible, 41 Changing
Angle adapter, 22 Brightness, 157
Appearance Character repeat, 142
Slider control, 262 Screen keyboard, 147
Approvals, 36 Clean screen, 318
Automatic Clearance
Transfer, 200 TP 177A, 44
Automation License Manager, 224 Climatic
Shipping conditions, 38

Index
Storage conditions, 38 Recipe data record, 302, 310

Communications properties, 131 Currency, 143
Compatibility conflict, 203
Configuration phase, 193
D
Configure
Network, 179 Data channel
Operating system, 138 Authorizations, 197
Screen keyboard, 142, 146 Backing up, 197
Configuring Configuring, 93, 126
Data channel, 93, 126 Enabling, 126
Interfaces, 60 Locking, 126, 172
Network, 129 Parameter assignment, 143
Operating system, 81, 96 Restoring, 197
PC / PPI cable, 63 Transferring, 197
Configuring the network Updating the operating system, 197
General procedure, 130 Data flow, 295
Connecting Date, 142
Configuration PC, 61 Setting, 153
Connection sequence, 50 Synchronizing, 154
Controller, 58 Date and time, 231
Equipotential bonding, 53 Entering, 236, 258
HMI device, 50 Synchronizing, 109
Peripherals, 66 Date format, 143, 155
UPS, 58 Date/time properties, 142, 153
USB device, 65 Decimal, 253
Connecting a configuration PC Decimal places, 231
Connection configurator, 61 Default gateway, 134, 181
Connecting peripherals Degree of protection, 43
Wiring diagram, 66 Delay time
Connecting the PLC Changing, 84
Wiring diagram, 58 Setting, 143, 169
Connecting the terminal block, 56 Delete
Connection configurator Certificate, 185
Configuration PC, 61 Recipe data record, 304, 312
Connection sequence, 50 Deleting
Connections Certificate, 142
Number, 26, 27 Device name
Contrast For network operation, 131, 180
Changing, 84, 111 Setting, 143
Control Panel, 98, 141 DHCP, 134, 181
MPI, 176 DIP switch
MPI / DP settings, 91, 120 Setting, 60
Open, 142 Direct connection, 132
Opening, 82, 98 Direct key, 249
Operating, 144 disabling
Password protection, 82, 97, 139 SecureMode, 140
PROFIBUS, 176 disabling
Screen keyboard, 145 Password protection, 153
Controller Display
Configuring the interface, 60 OP 177B, 331
Controllers TP 177A, 328
Number, 26, 27 TP 177B 4", 329
Creating TP 177B 6", 330

Index
Display format, 252 F

Displaying
Factory setting
Certificate, 142
With ProSave, 219
HMI device information, 143
With WinCC flexible, 216
Information on the TP 177B 4", 164
Feedback
Memory information, 166
Optical, 247
System information, 165, 166
File
DNS, 134, 182
Backup, 110
Server, 178
Forcing
DNS server, 129
Permissions in remote operation, 266
Documentation
Formats, 230
Enclosed, 47
Front view, 16, 17, 19, 20, 21
Domain
Function
Logon, 135
Additional, 25
Double-click, 142
Function keys, 73
Setting, 148
Global function assignment, 248
Labeling, 78
E Local function assignment, 248
Function test, 69
EC Declaration of Conformity, 30
Editing
Recipe data record, 303, 311 G
Electrostatic charge, 336
Element list, 297, 309 Gauge, 260
E-Mail
Setting, 143, 184
H
Emission, 33
Enhanced Recipe View, 296 High frequency radiation, 29
Entering HMI device
Alphanumerical value, 255, 257 Bottom view, 16, 18, 19, 21
Alphanumerical values, 231, 234 Cold restart, 162
Date and time, 231, 236, 258 Connecting, 50
Numerical value, 253 EMC-compliant mounting, 36
numerical values, 232 Front view, 16, 17, 19, 20
Numerical values, 230 Information, 143
symbolic values, 235 Initial startup, 194
Symbolic values, 231, 258 Interfaces, 51, 52
Text box, 251 Mounting, 42, 49
Equipotential bonding Mounting position, 41
Connecting, 53 Rear view, 17, 18, 20, 21
Wiring diagram, 54 Recommissioning, 194
Equipotential Bonding Restarting, 143
Requirements, 53 Side view, 16, 17, 19, 20
Equipotential bonding cable, 53 Switching off, 69
Error alarm Switching on, 68
Acknowledging, 282, 288 Testing, 68
Ethernet settings HMI device image, 86, 112
IP address, 181 HMI Input Panel
Exporting Options, 146
Recipe data record, 315
External
Keyboard, 144
Mouse, 144

Index
I L
Identification, 183 Labeling
Importing Certifications, 31
Certificate, 142, 185 EC Declaration of Conformity, 30
Recipe data record, 316 Function keys, 78
Info texts, 25 Labeling strips
Information Dimensions, 78
for the HMI device, 164 Printing, 78
Security, 33 LAN connection, 143
Infotext Language
Displaying, 236, 259, 281, 287 Setting, 229, 250
Initial startup LEDs
HMI device, 194 PROFINET interface, 333
Input on the HMI device License information, 89
Using function keys, 248 License key, 224
Using operator controls, 227, 246 Transferring, 225
Input Panel, 142 Transferring back, 226
Input unit Limit value test, 231, 252
OP 177B, 331 Limit values
TP 177A, 328 For password, 239
TP 177B 4", 329 For user, 239
TP 177B 6", 330 For user view, 239
Installing Limits
Option, 221, 223 For password, 271
Instructions For user, 271
Security, 29 For user view, 271
Working on the control cabinet, 29 Lists, 24
Interface Loader, 81, 96, 138
Rated load, 65 Open, 139
Interfaces, 51, 52 Logoff
Configuring, 60 User, 272
Rated load, 67 Users, 240
TP 177B 4", 329 Logoff time, 238, 269
Interference Logon
Pulse-shaped, 37 Users, 239, 271
Sinusoidal, 37 Logon data, 183
Internal clock, 154 in the TCP/IP network, 135
Internet
Settings, 143, 184
Internet settings, 136 M
IP address, 181
MAC address, 133, 170
Ethernet, 181
Maintenance, 317, 323
Setting, 143
Manual
Transfer, 199
Mechanical
K
Shipping conditions, 38
Keyboard Storage conditions, 38
External, 144 Memory
Keyboard properties, 103, 142 OP 177B, 331
TP 177A, 328
TP 177B 4", 329
TP 177B 6", 330

Index
Memory card, 23 Screen keyboard, 252

Backup to, 105 Numerical screen keyboard, 231
Ejecting, 75 Numerical value
First use, 186 Changing, 253
Inserting, 74, 76 Decimal places, 253
removing, 77 Display format, 252
Restoring file system, 156 Entering, 253
Restoring from, 105 Limit value test, 252
Memory information, 143 numerical values
Displaying, 166 Changing, 232
Memory management, 143, 167 Entering, 232
Monitoring mode Numerical values
Sm@rtClient view, 265 Decimal places, 231
Mounting, 49 Entering, 230
EMC-compliant, 36 Formats, 230
HMI device, 42 Limit value test, 231
Horizontal mounting, 42
Vertical, 42
O
Mounting clamp, 42
Mounting cut-out Offices, 7
Dimensions, 44 Offline, 195
Preparing, 44 Recipe tag, 300
Mounting location Test, 202
Selecting, 43 Online, 195
Mounting position Recipe tag, 300
HMI device, 41 Test, 202
Mouse OP 177
External, 144 Clearance, 44
Mouse properties, 104, 142 OP properties, 86, 87, 92, 112, 113, 124, 143
MPI Device, 164
Setting, 143, 176 Memory monitoring, 167
MPI / DP settings, 91, 120 Persistent storage, 156
Multi-key operation, 248 Touch, 150
Multimedia card, 73 Open
MultiMedia card, 76 Control Panel, 142
Loader, 139
Operate
N
Recipe menu, 310
Name server, 182 Recipe screen, 310
Name Server, 134 Operating
Network Control Panel, 144
Configure, 179 Operating elements
Logon data, 143 OP 177B, 72
Set up, 178 TP 177A and TP 177B 6", 71
Setting, 181 TP 177B 4", 71
Network & dial-up connections, 143 Operating mode
Network ID, 143 Offline, 195
Network operation Online, 195
Device name, 180 Overview, 195
Options, 143 Switching, 195
Network settings, 133 Transfer, 68, 195
Number format, 143, 155 Operating system
Numerical Configure, 138

Index
Configuring, 81, 96 Permission, 237, 269

Update via ProSave, 215 Pin assignment
Updating, 208, 212 PROFINET interface, 333
Updating using WinCC flexible, 214 RJ45 plug connector, 333
Operation PLC
Recipe screen, 301 Reading recipe data record, 306, 313
Operation feedback, 227, 246 Transferring recipe data record, 307, 314
Optical, 228 PLC_User, 242, 243, 274, 276
Operator control options, 144 Potential differences, 53
Operator controls Potentially explosive atmosphere, 33
Recipe view, 301 Power failure, 203
Simple recipe view, 308 Power supply
Optical feedback, 247 Cable cross section, 55
Optical operation feedback, 228 Connecting, 57
option, 221 Connecting the terminal block, 56
Option Reverse polarity protection, 56
Installing with ProSave, 223 Setting, 143
Installing with WinCC flexible, 221 State, 143
Removing with ProSave, 223 TP 177A, 328
Removing with WinCC flexible, 222 Wiring diagram, 55
Options, 26 Printer
Network operation, 143 Setting, 117
Setting properties, 143
Printer connection
P
Setting, 160
Parameter assignment Printer properties, 143, 160
Data channel, 143 Printing
Password Labeling strips, 78
Deleting, 90, 116 via a network printer, 129
Entering, 90, 115 Via network printer, 179
Password, 238 Process control phase, 193
Password PROFIBUS bus connector, 23
Restore, 239 PROFIBUS DP
Password Setting, 143, 176
Back up, 239 PROFINET, 129, 178
Password, 270 Addressing, 178
Password PROFINET interface
Restore, 271 LEDs, 333
Password Pin assignment, 333
Back up, 271 PROFINET IO
Password list, 238, 270 Disabling direct keys, 170
Password properties, 90, 115, 143, 151 Enabling direct keys, 170
Password protection, 82, 97, 139, 143 Setting, 143
disabling, 153 Project
Set up, 152 Closing, 244, 278
Windows CE taskbar, 139 Offline testing, 202
PC / PPI Operating, 227, 246
Cable, 22 Testing online, 202
Configuring the cable, 63 transferring, 194
Setting the adapter, 63 Protective cover, 319
PC connection, 132 Dismantling, 323
Peripherals Installation, 321
Rated load, 67 Protective cover set, 23

Index
Protective foil, 23, 318 Operate, 310

Protocol Recipe screen, 298
SIMATIC controllers, 26, 27 Operate, 310
Third-party controllers, 28 Operating, 301
Proxy Overview, 298
Server, 184 Recipe tag
Proxy server, 136 Offline, 300
Online, 300
Synchronizing, 299, 305
R
Recipe view, 296
Radiation Expanded, 296
High frequency, 29 Menu commands, 309
Radio interference, 33 Operator controls, 301, 308
Range of functions Simple, 297
additional, 25 Recipes, 25
Alarm buffer, 24 Recommissioning
Alarms, 24 HMI device, 194
Calculation functions, 24 Record list, 297, 309
Info texts, 25 Regional and language settings, 143, 155
Lists, 24 Regional settings, 155
Recipes, 25 Changing, 118
Screens, 24 Registry information
Tags, 24 Backup, 110, 143
Values, 24 Registry Information
Rated load Backup, 156
Interface, 65, 67 Remote control
Rated voltage, 45 Forcing permission, 266
Reading Removing
Recipe data record, 306 Option, 222, 223
Reading out Representatives, 7
Recipe data record, 313 Resetting to factory settings, 209
Real-time clock Restore, 142, 186
Internal, 154 from memory card, 105
Rear view, 17, 18, 20, 21 Restoring, 203, 205, 207
Recipe, 292 from external storage device, 142, 188
Control, 293 From memory card, 156
Data flow, 295 With ProSave, 207
Data record, 293 With WinCC flexible, 205
Field of application, 291 Reverse polarity protection, 56
Recipe screen, 296 RJ45 plug connector
Recipe view, 296 Pin assignment, 333
Synchronizing tags, 305 RS 422 / RS 232 converter, 22
Recipe data record Ruler, 245, 267
Creating, 302, 310
Delete, 304, 312
S
Editing, 303, 311
Exporting, 315 S7 transfer settings, 143
Importing, 316 Safety instruction
Reading from PLC, 306, 313 Backlighting, 158
Synchronize with PLC, 303 Changed tag name, 305
Transferring to PLC, 307, 314 Cold restart, 162
Recipe list, 297, 309 Compatibility conflict, 203
Recipe menu Data channel, 208, 213

Index
Data loss, 186, 208, 212 Security, 237, 269

Device name, 170 Security system, 237, 269
Direct key, 249 Selection list, 258
Functional problem, 65 Service
General, 33 On the Internet, 7
License key, 213 Service pack, 323
Loss of data possible, 188 Set up
Memory card, 75, 77 Network, 178
Memory distribution, 166 Password protection, 152
Path, 168, 169 SecureMode, 140
Power failure, 203 Setting
Preventing inadvertent operation, 317, 318 Backlighting, 143
Project file, 168, 169 Date, 108, 153
Recipe data record in background, 297 Date format, 155
Remote control for channel 1, 173 Date/Time, 142
Time-dependent reactions, 154 Delay time, 143, 169
Transfer mode, 175 Device name, 143
Transfer mode channel 2, 173 Double-click, 148
unauthorized cleaning products, 317 E-Mail, 143
Unintentional response, 317, 318 E-mail connection, 184
Unintentional transfer mode, 173 IP address, 143
USB connection sequence, 64 MPI, 143, 176
USB port, 65 Name server, 143
Safety instructions Network, 181
High frequency radiation, 29 Number format, 155
Potentially explosive atmosphere, 33 PC / PPI adapter, 63
Working on the control cabinet, 29 Power supply, 143
Screen Printer connection, 160
Changing the orientation, 84 Printer properties, 143
Screen keyboard, 142, 230, 250 PROFIBUS, 176
Alphanumerical, 233, 254, 256 PROFIBUS DP, 143
Change layout, 146 PROFINET IO, 143
Character repeat, 147 Regional data, 155
Configure, 146 Screen saver, 158
For Control Panel, 145 Storage location, 168
Keyboard level, 254, 256 Time, 108, 153
Keyboard levels, 233 Time format, 155
Language change, 254, 256 UPS, 190
Numerical, 231, 252 Setting the date, 108
Representation types, 145 Setting the delay time, 123
Setting the character repeat, 103 Setting the double-click, 104
Symbolic, 235 Setting the time, 108
Screen keyboard Setting the time zone, 108
Outside an open project, 100 Settings
Screen saver, 143, 159 Internet, 143
Setting, 92, 124, 158 Language, 143
Screen settings Regional, 143
Changing, 143 regional-specific, 155
Screen settings S7-Transfer, 143
Changing, 84, 111 Shipping conditions, 38
Screens, 24 Side view, 16, 17, 19, 20
SecureMode, 140 Siemens HMI input panel options, 142
disabling, 140 SIMATIC controller

Index
Protocol, 26 System alarms

Protocols, 27 Parameter, 337
Simple recipe view, 297 System features, 143
Simple Recipe View System information
Menu commands, 309 Displaying, 125, 165, 166
Operator controls, 308 System properties, 143
Slider control, 262 Device name, 180
Appearance, 262 General, 165
Sm@rtAccess, 26 Memory, 166
Sm@rtClient view, 265
Monitoring mode, 265
T
Use, 265
Sm@rtService, 26 Tags, 24
SMTP server, 136, 184 Taskbar, 138
Software options, 26 TCP/IP address, 133
Specifications Technical specifications
TP 177A, 328 Display, 328, 329, 330, 331
Start Input unit, 328, 329, 330, 331
HMI device, 162 Interfaces, 329
Starting Memory, 328, 329, 330, 331
HMI device, 112, 143 OP 177B, 331
Status force, 263 PROFINET interface, 333
Operating elements, 264 RJ45 interface, 333
Status force view, 263 Supply voltage, 328, 329, 330, 331
Storage conditions, 38 TP 177B 4", 329
Storage device TP 177B 6", 330
Restoring from external, 188 Technical Support, 7, 86, 112
Saving to external, 186 Temporary files
Storage directories, 123 Backup, 156
Storage location Testing
Setting, 168 HMI device, 68
Subnet mask, 134, 181 Text box, 251
Supply voltage Third-party controllers
OP 177B, 331 Protocols, 28
TP 177B 4", 329 Time, 142
TP 177B 6", 330 Entering, 236, 258
Support Setting, 153
On the Internet, 7 Synchronizing, 154
Switching off Time format, 143, 155
HMI device, 69 Time zone
Switching on Setting, 153
HMI device, 68 Time-dependent reactions, 154
Symbolic screen keyboard, 235 Touch screen, 72
symbolic values Calibrating, 87, 113, 143, 150
Changing, 235 Note, 72
Entering, 235 TP 177A
Symbolic values, 231 Resetting to factory settings, 207
Changing, 258 TP 177B
Entering, 258 Clearance, 44
Synchronizing, 109 TP 177B 4"
Date and time, 154 Interfaces, 329
Recipe tag, 299, 305 TP 177B 4"
System, 125 Displaying information, 164

Index
Trademarks, 6 In industry, 33
Training Center, 7 In residential areas, 33
Transfer, 195 In the potentially explosive atmosphere, 33
Automatic, 200 With additional measures, 39
Cancel, 68 User
Manual, 199 Logoff, 272
Transfer mode User data
MPI / PROFIBUS DP, 95 Back up, 239, 271
Unintentional, 94, 127, 173 Restore, 239, 271
Via MPI, 175 User group, 237, 269
Via PROFIBUS DP, 175 User name, 183
Transfer settings, 95, 128, 143, 172 User view, 238, 270
Channel, 172 Users, 237, 269
Directories, 168, 169 Admin, 242, 243, 274, 276
transferring Change password, 242
Project, 194 Changing group assignments, 242
Transferring Changing the logoff time, 242
License key, 225 Changing the user name, 242
Recipe data record, 307, 314 Changing user data, 242
Transferring back Creating, 241, 273
License key, 226 Deleting, 243, 276
Transport damage, 47 Logoff, 240
Trend view, 244, 267 Logon, 239, 271
Value table, 245, 267 PLC_User, 242, 243, 274, 276
Trends
Limit violation, 244, 267
V
Trends, 244
Trends, 267 Value table, 245, 267
Type of fixation, 42 Values, 24
U W
Unintentional transfer mode, 94, 127, 173 WinCC flexible internet settings, 136
Updating E-mail, 184
About ProSave, 215 E-Mail, 143
Operating system, 64, 208, 212 Windows CE taskbar, 96, 138
using WinCC flexible, 214 Password protection, 97, 139
Updating the operating system, 64 WINS, 182
UPS Server, 178
Connecting, 58 WINS server, 129
Setting, 190, 191 Wiring diagram
Status, 191 Connecting peripherals, 66
Wiring diagram, 58 Connecting the equipotential bonding, 54
UPS properties Connecting the PLC, 58
Configuration, 190 Connecting the power supply, 55
USB UPS, 58
Connection sequence, 64 Working on the control cabinet, 29
USB connection sequence
Safety instruction, 64
USB device
Connecting, 65
Use
Conditions, 39

Pos : 1.2 /BA/Standard/00_Titel_R üc ks eite/Titels eite_BAA @ 28\mod_1447397367329_18.doc x @ 1026302 @ @ 1
Instruction manual
Designation: Decanter
Model: .CD 205-00-00 /-30
No. 8408-9001-822 | Edition 07.06.2016
engineering for a better world

About this document 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

The authors are always grateful for comments and sugges-

tions for improving the documentation. These can be ad-
dressed to:

Tel. +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Titelseite ===
2 GEA Westfalia Separator Group

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 About this document
1 About this document 7
1.1 Application ................................................................................................. 8

1.2 Other applicable documents ...................................................................... 8
1.3 Structure of the safety references ............................................................. 8
1.4 Target groups .......................................................................................... 10
1.4.1 Operator ................................................................................................... 10
1.4.2 Skilled worker .......................................................................................... 10
1.4.3 Trained specialist ..................................................................................... 10
1.5 Additional documentation ........................................................................ 11
1.5.1 Training .................................................................................................... 11
1.5.2 Service ..................................................................................................... 11
2.1 Intended use ............................................................................................ 14

2.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse ............................................................. 14
2.4 Responsibility of the plant operator ......................................................... 15
2.5 Modifications to the centrifuge ................................................................. 16
2.6 Requirements to be met by spare parts and consumables ..................... 16
2.7 Hazards through products and operating materials ................................ 17
3 Description 19
3.1 Noise emissions....................................................................................... 20

3.2 Product hazards....................................................................................... 20
3.3 Hazards caused by cleaning liquid .......................................................... 21
3.4 Hazards due to rotating machine parts ................................................... 22
3.5 Personal protective gear .......................................................................... 22
3.6 Meaning of the safety markings ............................................................... 24
3.7 EMERGENCY STOP ............................................................................... 27
3.8 Danger areas ........................................................................................... 27
3.9 Nameplate ............................................................................................... 28
3.10 Safety markings on the product ............................................................... 29
3.11 Total product ............................................................................................ 30
3.12 Bowl ......................................................................................................... 31
3.13 Housing .................................................................................................... 32
3.14 Lubrication ............................................................................................... 32
3.15 Drive ........................................................................................................ 33
3.16 Motor control ............................................................................................ 34
3.17 Temperature monitoring of the bowl bearings (option)............................ 35
3.18 Vibration monitoring of the decanter (option) .......................................... 35
3.19 Operating principles of the decanter........................................................ 36
4 Technical data 37
4.1 Ambient conditions .................................................................................. 38

4.2 Load on foundation .................................................................................. 38
4.3 Motor data ................................................................................................ 38
4.4 Dimensioned drawing .............................................................................. 39
GEA Westfalia Separator Group 3

5 Transport and storage 41
5.1 Safety during transport ............................................................................ 42

5.2 Storage instructions for the decanter....................................................... 42
5.3 Using load suspension devices safely ..................................................... 43
5.4 Using lifting eye bolts or lifting eye nuts as load handling devices .......... 45
6 Assembly and installation 47
6.1 Safety during assembly and installation .................................................. 48

6.2 Required documents for planning the installation ................................... 48
6.3 Environmental requirements.................................................................... 49
6.4 Allow for sufficient space for maintenance work. .................................... 49
6.5 Requirements to be met by the load suspension devices ....................... 50
6.6 Demands on the configuration of the installation .................................... 50
6.7 Requirements to be met by feed and discharge lines ............................. 50
6.7.1 Rating of compensators ........................................................................... 51
6.8 Configuration of the liquid chute .............................................................. 52
6.9 Configuration of the solid chute ............................................................... 53
6.10 Configuration of the vent ......................................................................... 54
6.11 Overflow at the liquid side ....................................................................... 55
6.12 Flush connections .................................................................................... 55
6.13 Special aspects when operating in hot conditions................................... 55
6.14 Installing the decanter ............................................................................. 56
6.15 Carry out voltage equalisation ................................................................. 57
6.16 Connecting three-phase AC motors ........................................................ 58
6.17 Checking the direction of rotation of the motors ...................................... 59
6.18 Connecting the control ............................................................................. 60
6.19 Connecting the feed and discharge line assemblies ............................... 61
7 Settings 63
7.1 Changing speeds ..................................................................................... 64

7.2 Altering the bowl speed (frequency converter) ........................................ 64
7.3 Mounting and adjusting the speed sensors ............................................. 65
7.4 Regulating ring......................................................................................... 66
7.4.1 Removing theregulating ring.................................................................... 66
7.4.2 Fitting the regulating ring ......................................................................... 67
8 Commissioning 69
8.1 Safety aspects during commissioning ..................................................... 70

8.2 Checking the starting time of the bowl .................................................... 70
8.3 Checking the run-down time of the bowl ................................................. 70
8.4 Checking the direction of rotation of the bowl ......................................... 71
8.5 Start-up check list .................................................................................... 72
8.6 Performing a test run ............................................................................... 74
8.7 Preparing for re-starting ........................................................................... 74
8.8 Start the centrifuge at operating state temperature ................................. 75
9 Operation 77
9.1 Safety during operation ........................................................................... 78

9.2 What must be kept in mind when using third-party controls? .................. 80
9.3 Immediate action in case of power outage .............................................. 80
9.4 Switching on the decanter ....................................................................... 81

9.5 Operation ................................................................................................. 82

9.6 Operation with a vibration monitoring system ......................................... 83
9.7 Switching off the decanter and ordinary cleaning.................................... 84
9.8 Thorough cleaning ................................................................................... 85
9.9 Temporary decommissioning .................................................................. 86
9.10 Restarting ................................................................................................ 86
10 Trouble shooting 87
10.1 Safety when eliminating operating malfunctions ..................................... 88

10.2 Operating malfunctions ............................................................................ 89
11 Maintenance 91
11.1 Safety aspects during maintenance ........................................................ 92

11.2 Regular checks ........................................................................................ 93
11.2.1 Recurring checks on load suspension devices ....................................... 93
11.3 Instructions on handling roller bearings ................................................... 94
11.4 Maintenance schedule ............................................................................. 95
11.5 Scroll ........................................................................................................ 95
11.5.1 Admissible wear to scroll ......................................................................... 95
11.6 Bowl ......................................................................................................... 96
11.7 Bowl bearings .......................................................................................... 97
11.7.1 Option: Adjusting the automatic grease lubrication ................................. 97
11.7.2 Re-lubricating the bowl bearings ............................................................. 97
11.7.3 Filling the grease gun .............................................................................. 98
11.8 Re-tensioning drive belts ......................................................................... 99
11.9 Re-lubricate the gearbox ....................................................................... 101
11.10 Motor bearings ....................................................................................... 102
12 Repair 103
12.1 Avoiding damage during maintenance .................................................. 104

12.1.1 Special tools .......................................................................................... 104
12.1.2 Standard tools........................................................................................ 104
12.2 Screw torques ........................................................................................ 105
12.2.1 Screw torques in Newton meters (Nm) ................................................. 105
12.2.2 Screw tightening torques in inch-pound (inlb) ....................................... 106
12.3 Gaskets.................................................................................................. 106
12.3.1 Radial packing rings .............................................................................. 106
12.4 Replacing the shear pin ......................................................................... 107
13 Decommissioning 109
13.1 Notes on long-time storage of the decanter and individual rotors ......... 110
13.2 Decommissioning the decanter ............................................................. 110
13.2.1 Painted parts.......................................................................................... 110
13.2.2 Unpainted areas and galvanised parts .................................................. 111
13.2.3 Gearbox / spare gearbox ....................................................................... 111
13.2.4 Drive motors .......................................................................................... 111
13.3 Maintenance schedule (machine shut-down for a prolonged period) ... 112
13.3.1 Maintenance work once a month........................................................... 113
13.3.2 Maintenance work once a year.............................................................. 113
13.3.3 Maintenance work before resuming operation ...................................... 114
13.4 Disposing of the centrifuge .................................................................... 115
13.4.1 Disposing of utilities ............................................................................... 115
13.4.2 Disposing of cleaning fluids ................................................................... 116

14 Spare parts 117
14.1 Use only genuine spare parts. ............................................................... 118

14.2 Notes on ordering spare parts ............................................................... 119
14.3 Storing wear parts and operating materials ........................................... 120
14.3.1 Gaskets and drive belts ......................................................................... 120
14.3.2 Roller bearings....................................................................................... 121
14.3.3 Lubricants .............................................................................................. 121
Pos : 3.1 /BA/Standard/00_Übersc hriften/Kapi tel/01_Z u_di es em_D okument @ 0\mod_1315832097673_18.doc x @ 409 @ 1 @ 1

1 About this document
1.1 Application ................................................................................................. 8

1.2 Other applicable documents ...................................................................... 8
1.3 Structure of the safety references ............................................................. 8
1.4 Target groups .......................................................................................... 10
1.4.1 Operator ................................................................................................... 10
1.4.2 Skilled worker .......................................................................................... 10
1.4.3 Trained specialist ..................................................................................... 10
1.5 Additional documentation ........................................................................ 11
1.5.1 Training .................................................................................................... 11
1.5.2 Service ..................................................................................................... 11

Pos : 3.2 /BA/Standard/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Geltungs ber eic h/Geltungs ber eic h_Sep_Dek @ 0\mod_1315827289783_18.doc x @ 332 @ 2 @ 1
1.1 Application
This document applies for all persons who work with or on the centrifuge.
It is applicable for the plant operator as a basis for creating standard operating pro-
cedures for conduct at the workplace at the centrifuge.
Pos : 3.3 /BA/Standard/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Mitgeltende_Dokumente/Mi tgeltende_D okumente_Sep_D ek @ 8\mod_1385643373723_18.doc x @ 474943 @ 2 @ 1
1.2 Other applicable documents

• Centrifuge datasheet
• P&ID (Piping & Instrumentation Diagram)
• Dimensioned drawing
• Documents on control of the centrifuge, e.g. descriptions and settings.
• Instruction manuals of components of other manufacturers such as motors and
valves.
• Further order-specific documents if relevant.
Pos : 3.4 /BA/Standard/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Sig nal wörter/Signal wörter_für _War nhi nwei se @ 8\mod_1385644090593_18.doc x @ 475171 @ 2444 @ 1
1.3 Structure of the safety references

The centrifuge has been designed and built so that it functions and can be operat-
ed safely. Reference will be made in this manual to further potential risks by using
warnings where appropriate.
A differentiation is made between hazards which result in damage to the centri-
fuge, plant components and environment and hazards which lead to possible or
probable injury or loss of life.
Signal words and their meaning
DANGER Denotes impending danger. If the preventive measures are not implemented, death
or serious injury will be the consequence.
WARNING Denotes a potentially dangerous situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, death or serious injury may be the consequence.
CAUTION Denotes a potentially dangerous situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, minor injury may be the consequence.
NOTICE Denotes a potentially damaging situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, the centrifuge or something else in its vicinity can get damaged.
Danger signals
This is the danger signal. It warns of injury risks.

 Comply with all measures marked with the danger signal to avoid injury or
death.

Structuring of the safety references according to the 5-point rule

1. Danger signals as a warning of injury risks.
2. Signal words signal the degree of risk.
3. The type and source of the hazard indicate from where the hazard origi-
nates.
4. Explanation of the hazard and consequences in the case of non-
compliance describe the threat and the consequences of human error.
5. Measures give instructions to avoid the hazard.
DANGER Type and source of the hazard
Explanation of the hazard and the consequences in the event of non-compliance.

 Measures to avert or minimise the hazard.
WARNING Type and source of the hazard

CAUTION Type and source of the hazard

NOTICE Type and source of the hazard

Pos : 3.5 /---Neue Seite--- @ 0\mod_1317283043850_0.doc x @ 550 @ @ 1

Pos : 3.6 /BA/Standard/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Zielgruppen/Zi elgruppen_Sep_D ek @ 0\mod_1323772593170_18.doc x @ 10203 @ 2 @ 1
1.4 Target groups

The target groups for this documentation are all persons involved in installing, as-
sembling, operating, maintaining and repairing the centrifuge.
What work may be carried out by what target group depends on the qualification of
the personnel and on the type of work.
In the tables in the chapters Troubleshooting and Maintenance the responsible
target group as well as the operation is specified.
Pos : 3.7 /BA/Standard/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Bediener /Bedi ener @ 0\mod_1323773718866_18.doc x @ 10437 @ 3 @ 1
1.4.1 Operator
Abbreviation: Op
The operator is employed by the customer and has been briefed in the following
operations:
• Starting and shutting down the machine.
• Monitoring the machine and process (e.g. by means of indicators).
• Execution of easy re-lubrication and cleaning operations.
When given specific directions, the operator is able to carry out simple modifica-
tions to the process, e.g.:
• Adjusting temperatures, pressures and throughput capacities.
• Dosing additives.
Pos : 3.8 /BA/Standard/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Ei ngewi esene_F ac hkraft/Eing ewies ene_F achkr aft @ 8\mod_1385710880463_18.doc x @ 475310 @ 3 @ 1
1.4.2 Skilled worker

Abbreviation: Skilled
The skilled worker is normally employed by the customer and has been briefed in
the following areas:
• Performing easy assembly work
• Performing routine maintenance work or servicing
• Limited settings and parametrization on the components and control system
The skilled worker has basic technical knowledge. The basic knowledge corre-
sponds to a technical apprenticeship (mechanical or electrical).
The skilled worker is selected and deployed by the employer (plant operator).
GEA Westfalia Separator will carry out the briefing only in specific technical fea-
tures that are part of the supply schedule and and will indicate potential hazards.
This briefing is no substitute for an apprenticeship.
Pos : 3.9 /BA/Standard/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Gesc hulte_F ac hkraft/Ges chulte_F ac hkraft @ 0\mod_1323780946726_18.doc x @ 10505 @ 3 @ 1
1.4.3 Trained specialist

Abbreviation: Tspec
The trained specialist normally belongs to the service team of GEA Westfalia Sep-
arator Group.
In exceptional cases, skilled workers employed by the customer can obtain a cor-
responding qualification by attending training courses held by GEA Westfalia Sepa-
rator Group.

Pos : 3.11 /BA/Standard/01_Z u_di es em_D okument/Zus ätzlic he_D okumentati onen/Z usätzliche_Dokumentationen @ 8\mod_1385713605267_18.doc x @ 475588 @ 2 @ 1
1.5 Additional documentation

Request further information and technical documentation from the following places:
• Directly from GEA Westfalia Separator in Oelde.
• From the nearest representative of GEA Westfalia Separator.
• Per Internet under: gea.com
• Vie e-mail at: wsinfo@gea.com
Pos : 3.12 /BA/Standard/01_Z u_di es em_D okument/Ser vice_Schulungsangebot/Sc hul ung _Sep_D ek @ 19\mod_1431351308118_18.doc x @ 938527 @ 3 @ 1
1.5.1 Training
GEA Westfalia Separator regularly holds training courses for customer employees.
The training content is aimed at the operating and service personnel of the cus-
tomer who work with the centrifuge. The operator must know how the centrifuge
functions.
Trained operators assure the operating safety of the centrifuge.
Many different applications require competent process engineering know-how. On-
ly adequately trained employees in service ensure a high quality standard. This re-
quires ongoing further training.
The demands on the qualification of the service staff are growing increasingly.
GEA Westfalia Separator consequently offers a qualification model and training
concept.
Contact the following addresses for training courses for operating and service staff.
• GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH • Werner Habig Straße 1 • 59302 Oelde
(Germany) • Tel. +49 (0)2522 77-1469 • Fax +49 (0)2522 77-31469 • in-
fo.learningcenter@gea.com • www.gea.com
• GEA Westfalia Separator Systems GmbH • Am Neuländer Gewerbepark 6 •
21079 Hamburg (Germany) • Phone +49 40 589650-0 • Fax +49 40 7380585 •
info.learningcenter@gea.com • www.westfalia-separator.com
Pos : 3.13 /BA/Standard/01_Z u_di es em_D okument/Ser vice_Diens tleistung/Dienstl eistung _Sep_D ek @ 1\mod_1352367118051_18.doc x @ 194016 @ 3 @ 1
1.5.2 Service
GEA Westfalia Separator offers comprehensive service for the following areas:
• Assembly
• Commissioning
• Regular maintenance
• Repairs
• Checking the operating state
• Checking in dismantled state
• Decommissioning for a long-term shut-down
• Storage and conservation during long-term standstill
• Restarting
• Decommissioning and disposal
• Training
Pos : 5.1 /BA/Standard/00_Übersc hriften/Kapi tel/02_Sicher heits hi nweis e @ 0\mod_1315831900616_18.doc x @ 402 @ 1 @ 1


8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Safety precautions
2.1 Intended use ............................................................................................ 14

2.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse ............................................................. 14
2.4 Responsibility of the plant operator ......................................................... 15
2.5 Modifications to the centrifuge ................................................................. 16
2.6 Requirements to be met by spare parts and consumables ..................... 16
2.7 Hazards through products and operating materials ................................ 17

Safety precautions 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 5.2 /BA/Standard/02_Sic herheit/Bes ti mmungsgemäß e_Ver wendung/Bes timmungsgemäß e_Ver wendung_Sep_D ek @ 23\mod_1440156298554_18.doc x @ 1005114 @ 2 @ 1
2.1 Intended use

The centrifuge separates media with different densities by centrifugal force.
The centrifuge is intended exclusively for commercial operation. It is technically
designed in compliance with the operating mode contractually agreed with the
manufacturer and the specifications in the technical data of the centrifuge.
The centrifuge is suitable for the following applications:
• Separating liquid mixtures
• Separating solids from liquids
• To combine the tasks separating and solids removal
It must be noted that the solids to be discharged must always be sufficiently fluid to
ensure a uniform solid discharge. In this connection, the rheological characteristics
(deformation and flow behaviour) of the solids play an important role.
For information on process conditions, operating conditions, and environmental
conditions, see:
• Centrifuge nameplate
• Data sheet
The following provisions must be met to ensure that the centrifuge is operated
safely at all times.
 Use only original spare parts and original operating materials.
 Comply with limits.
 Do not alter or upgrade the centrifuge.
 Do not feed product which is categorised as explosive.
 Do not deploy the centrifuge in zones classified as explosion hazardous.
NOTE: Centrifuges suitably equipped for use in explosion hazarded areas are ex-
empt from this restriction.
Pos : 5.3 /BA/Standard/02_Sic herheit/Vor hers ehbare_F ehl anwendung/Vorhersehbar e_F ehlanwendung_Sep_Dek @ 23\mod_1440743378037_18.doc x @ 1007217 @ 2 @ 1
2.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse

The manual contains instructions for the intended use. Operation of the centrifuge
that is not in conformity with the intended use is considered to be misuse.
Reasonably foreseeable misuse includes:
• Use the centrifuge only for its intended use.
• Use of unsuitable spare parts
• Use of non-permitted operating materials
• exceeding the defined limit values
• Modifying or upgrading the centrifuge.
• Changing the process conditions, operating conditions and environmental condi-
tions without the consent of the manufacturer.
Any misuse of the centrifuge can lead to severe damage to persons and property.
Operating modes that result in inbalance due to concentration of product and con-
sequent caking are considered as not in conformity with the intended use. The
plant operator is responsible for damage arising as a consequence of this non-
conformance, the manufacturer is not liable.
Pos : 5.4 /BA/Standard/02_Sic herheit/Pers onalqualifi kation/Pers onalqualifi kati on_Sep_D ek @ 19\mod_1431351819975_18.doc x @ 938632 @ 2 @ 1

2.3 Qualification of the personnel

Special knowledge and skills are required for working on and with centrifuges. The
qualification of the personnel with this expertise is an important requirement for the
operational reliability.
The requirements in respect of qualification levels are set out in the chapter "About
this document / Target groups". They depend on the tasks assigned.
Faulty operation, assembly and handling errors can result in danger to life and limb
as well as causing severe damage to property.
The plant operator must implement measures for the qualification of its personnel:
 Assign only reliable personnel to work on the centrifuge.
 Allow only authorized personnel to work on the centrifuge.
 Give special training and briefings to the personnel for the tasks assigned.
 Clearly define responsibilities.
 Make sure that the authorized persons have read and understood the safety in-
formation before beginning work.
 Make sure that the authorized persons have read and understood all sections of
the instruction manual required for their work before beginning work.
 Give special briefings to persons who cannot read, and monitor their work.
 Persons still undergoing training may only be deployed under supervision.
Pos : 5.5 /BA/Standard/02_Sic herheit/Ver antwortung_Betr eiber/Ver antwortung_Betr eiber_Sep_Dek @ 23\mod_1440510423335_18.doc x @ 1005842 @ 2 @ 1
2.4 Responsibility of the plant operator

The operation of a centrifuge is subject to rules and regulations for machine safety
and occupational health and safety.
The order of the following rules and regulations is not a reflection of their priority.
The list lays no claim to completeness.
• Regulations relating to safety and health (accident prevention regulations) based
on Article 118a of the foundation treaty of the EEC, e.g. RL 89/655/EEC and fol-
low-up versions or corresponding national regulations issued by the country of
operation.
• Regular check of safety devices
• Compliance with the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC or corresponding national
regulations issued by the country of operation when working within the responsi-
bility as manufacturer.
• Compliance with the German Equipment and Product Safety Act or correspond-
ing national regulations issued by the country of operation when working within
the responsibility as manufacturer.
The plant operator is responsible for complying with rules and regulations and the
safety-conscious work of the assigned persons. These include the following
measures:
 Ensuring that the statutory and other binding regulations on safety, accident pre-
vention and health and safety protection are known and complied with.
 Only qualified and authorized personnel with technical understanding and fun-
damental technical knowledge and skills may be assigned to work on the centri-
fuge.
 Clearly define and notify responsibilities for tasks.
 Operate the centrifuge only in perfectly functional conditions in line with the in-
tended use. For the intended use, refer to the section "Intended use".
 Before starting the machine, always check all safety devices.

 Have the centrifuge checked regularly by qualified persons for its operating safe-
ty. Have the centrifuge checked at least once a year in operational status and in
accordance with the maintenance schedule.
Pos : 5.6 /BA/Standard/02_Sic herheit/Ver änderungen_M asc hine/Ver änderungen_M asc hine_Sep_D ek @ 33\mod_1463038522441_18.doc x @ 1329699 @ 2 @ 1
2.5 Modifications to the centrifuge

Modifications to the centrifuge are prohibited. They represent an unintended use
and endanger the operational reliability of the centrifuge. This may cause physical
injury and damage to property.
 Clarify the planning and the measures for the modifications to the centrifuge with
GEA Westfalia Separator.
- If modifications to the centrifuge are necessary, e.g. due to new operational
sequences or product changes, contact GEA Westfalia Separator.
- Modifications or alterations to the centrifuge must be added to the documenta-
tion. The instruction manual, schedule for lubrication and maintenance, as
well as the spare parts catalogue, must be adapted.
Pos : 5.7 /BA/Standard/02_Sic herheit/Ersatzteile_und_Betriebsstoffe/Ers atzteile_und_Betriebss toffe_Sep_Dek @ 0\mod_1323181525318_18.doc x @ 10112 @ 2 @ 1
2.6 Requirements to be met by spare parts and consumables

Spare parts, wear parts and consumables can cause damage to persons and
property if they do not meet the requirements.
Original spare parts and consumables from GEA Westfalia Separator Group satisfy
all pre-conditions for the operating safety of the centrifuge.
 Use only original spare parts.
 Use only original operating materials.
 Use the order-specific spare parts catalog supplied.
 See the chapter "Spare parts" for ordering spare parts and consumables.
 Keep to the limit values.

Pos : 5.9 /BA/Standard/02_Sic herheit/Gefahren_Betriebsstoff_Produkt/Gefahr en_Pr odukte_Betri ebs stoffe_Sep_D ek @ 0\mod_1323180049152_18.doc x @ 10010 @ 2 @ 1
2.7 Hazards through products and operating materials

Hazardous materials are all materials which, on physical contact, represent a haz-
ard for the persons operating in the environment of the centrifuge.
Centrifuges which have been purpose-built for the operation with hazardous mate-
rials are marked with safety stickers.
Hazards resulting from the following product characteristics and operating materi-
als are known from product observation.
• Hot products
• Cold products
• Hazardous, chemically critical products
• Hazardous, biologically critical products
• Detergent
Pos : 7.1 /BA/Standard/00_Übersc hriften/Kapi tel/03_Beschr eibung @ 0\mod_1315902879297_18.doc x @ 467 @ 1 @ 1


8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Description
3 Description
3.1 Noise emissions....................................................................................... 20

3.2 Product hazards....................................................................................... 20
3.3 Hazards caused by cleaning liquid .......................................................... 21
3.4 Hazards due to rotating machine parts ................................................... 22
3.5 Personal protective gear .......................................................................... 22
3.6 Meaning of the safety markings ............................................................... 24
3.7 EMERGENCY STOP ............................................................................... 27
3.8 Danger areas ........................................................................................... 27
3.9 Nameplate ............................................................................................... 28
3.10 Safety markings on the product ............................................................... 29
3.11 Total product ............................................................................................ 30
3.12 Bowl ......................................................................................................... 31
3.13 Housing .................................................................................................... 32
3.14 Lubrication ............................................................................................... 32
3.15 Drive ........................................................................................................ 33
3.16 Motor control ............................................................................................ 34
3.17 Temperature monitoring of the bowl bearings (option)............................ 35
3.18 Vibration monitoring of the decanter (option) .......................................... 35
3.19 Operating principles of the decanter........................................................ 36

Description 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 7.2 /BA/Standard/03_Besc hrei bung/Geräusc hemissionen/Geräusc hemissi onen_Sep_D ek @ 0\mod_1324290587815_18.doc x @ 10810 @ 2 @ 1
3.1 Noise emissions

Noise emissions from the centrifuge are caused by rotating machine parts, sound-
emitting surfaces and resonant plant components.
The intensity of the noise emissions depend on the type of construction of the cen-
trifuge, the operating mode and the ambient conditions.
The operating personnel must observe the local standard operating procedures
(SOPs) issued by the plant operator and wear personal protective gear, e.g. ear
protection.
Refer to the datasheet for the sound pressure level and sound power level.
Factors that increase the noise level in the area of the centrifuge:
• Reverberating walls (e.g. glass, tiles, tank walls etc.),
• Installation in corners of rooms.
• Resonant platforms.
• Resonant fittings.
• Auxiliary equipment (e.g. pumps, valves etc.).
The following measures reduce the noise nuisance for the operators:
• Install the centrifuges in separate rooms.
• Line the walls with sound absorbing materials.
• Organise internal processes so that centrifuge rooms have to be entered as
rarely as possible.
• Use personal noise protection.
Pos : 7.3 /BA/Standard/03_Besc hrei bung/Gefahren_Produkt/Gefahren_Pr odukt @ 19\mod_1431352864552_18.doc x @ 938737 @ 2 @ 1
3.2 Product hazards

In the case of products which have to be allocated to a specific hazard class, ad-
here to the corresponding local safety precautions when handling these products.
The local standard operating procedures must be observed and the required per-
sonal protective gear must be worn.
In the event of accidents, keep to the local rules of conduct when handling prod-
ucts of the respective hazard class and take appropriate first-aid measures when
injury is involved.
Following accidents, notify in-house or local emergency services immediately so
that appropriate action can be taken. The emergency services comprise, for exam-
ple, fire brigade, paramedics, security and other emergency facilities.

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Description
Pos : 7.5 /BA/Standard/03_Besc hrei bung/Gefahren_R einig ungsfl üssig kei t/Gefahren_R einig ungsfl üssig kei t @ 17\mod_1420802052166_18.doc x @ 889647 @ 2 @ 1
3.3 Hazards caused by cleaning liquid

For CIP (cleaning-in-place), only chemicals may be used that have been recom-
mended by GEA Westfalia Separator.
The cleaning media are acids and caustics which can cause severe personal injury
when used without due care.
Cleaning may under certain circumstances be carried out at high temperatures.
The surfaces of the centrifuge, especially the hood and pipes, get hot.
The local standard operating procedures must be observed and the required per-
sonal protective gear must be worn, such as:
• Face protection and protective goggles
• Protective suit
• Protective gloves
• Protective boots or safety shoes
• Apron
The prevailing local rules of conduct pertaining to handling acids and caustics with
a view to preventing accidents must be complied with.
Carry out first-aid measures when injury is involved.
Following accidents, notify in-house or local emergency services immediately so
that appropriate action can be taken. The emergency services comprise, for exam-
ple, fire brigade, paramedics, security and other emergency facilities.
Chemicals and incorrect concentrations of chemicals not specified and approved
by GEA Westfalia Separator can cause damage through corrosion.
Chloric cleaning agents attack stainless steel and can lead to corrosion.
The corrosion can occur both on bowl parts as well as on the hood and the con-
centrate collector.
Carry out regular checks for damage and wear on sight glasses in product lines
through which CIP liquid is fed.
Inadequate flushing can also lead to chemical residues entering the product ren-
dering it useless.
The bowl gaskets can swell as a result of inadequate flushing.

Description 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 7.7 /BA/Standard/03_Besc hrei bung/Gefahren_r oti erende_Masc hi nenteile/Gefahr en_rotierende_M asc hinenteil e_D ek @ 1\mod_1354537608224_18.doc x @ 195787 @ 2 @ 1
3.4 Hazards due to rotating machine parts

The centrifuge is equipped with a metal bowl rotating at high speed which repre-
sents a high hazard potential on account of the rotational energy.
If not handled properly, open, rotating machine parts can be a danger for life and
limb of the operating and maintenance personnel.
The bowl must therefore be stationary before starting work on the centrifuge.
Checking bowl standstill should not be based on just one information source, e.g.
speed indicator. It must always be backed up by at least one further checking op-
tion.
Observing the motor fan alone, for example, is not a reliable method of checking
standstill. The motor or its fan can be at standstill while the bowl is still rotating.
The following options are available for checking standstill on centrifuges depending
on the version:
• Electric speed indicator.
• Visual speed check of the drive motor.
• Noise check.
• Vibration check.
Pos : 7.8 /BA/Standard/03_Besc hrei bung/Pers önlic he_Sc hutzausrüstung/Pers önliche_Sc hutzausr üstung @ 8\mod_1385718838289_18.doc x @ 476070 @ 2 @ 1
3.5 Personal protective gear

To avoid danger to life and limb, the specified protective gear must be worn when
operating the centrifuge or carrying out maintenance work or repairs on the centri-
fuge.
The personal protective gear depends on:
• local accident regulations,
• plant instructions issued by the operator or employer and
• the safety precautions described in this instruction manual.
Everyone who works with or on the centrifuge is responsible for ensuring that the
personal protective gear is worn and that it is in good, functional condition.
 Replace damaged protective gear with new gear.
 Clean dirty protective gear.
Use hearing protection!
 Use hearing protection when working

in loud environments!
The noise level in a plant can exceed

85 dB(A).
Fig. 1

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Description
Wear protective goggles!
 Wear protective goggles when working

on pipes and fittings.
Possible residues of caustic liquids in

valves and pipes and piping systems not
relieved from pressure.
Fig. 2
Wear protective gloves!
 Wear protective gloves when working

on hot or cold surfaces of separator
and piping.
Possible temperature ranges

-10 to +80°C or 14 to 176 °F.
Fig. 3
Wear breathing protection!
If inert gases are used as ignition shield

gases in explosion-hazarded zones,
wearing breathing protection is mandato-
ry if there is a risk of the oxygen content
dropping below the admissible value in
the air.
An inert gas is, e.g. nitrogen. See SOP
issues by the plant operator.
Fig. 4

Description 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 7.10 /BA/Standard/03_Beschr eibung/Bedeutung _Sic her hei ts kennz eichen/Bedeutung_Sic herheits kennz eic hen_Dek @ 4\mod_1377687516157_18.doc x @ 292780 @ 2 @ 1
3.6 Meaning of the safety markings

The following safety markings are attached on the decanter as adhesive labels:
Fig. 5
It is important for all persons working with or on the decanter to be able to identify
the meaning of all the symbols on the safety stickers. The safety stickers are at-
tached to the decanter and / or the control cabinet.
This safety marking means:

• Refer to the machine documenta-
tion!
• Any person who is assigned the task
of installing, operating, maintaining
and repairing the machine must have
read and understood the documenta-
tion.
• The documentation must be complete,
kept near to the machine and be readi-
ly accessible to operating personnel.
Fig. 6
In the event of non-compliance with the above, GEA Westfalia Separator accepts
no liability for resulting damages.

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Description

• Disconnect machine from power
supply!
• Danger of injury through electrical
voltage and unintentional start-up of
the decanter!
Before working on the decanter and elec-
trical plant components:
 Ensure that the decanter is at a stand-
still.
 Isolate all electrically-supplied equip-
ment from the power supply using the
main switch.
Fig. 7
 Secure the plant against unintended
restarting with locking devices.

• Work on rotating bowl is prohibited!
• Do not loosen any part and do not
carry out maintenance or repair work
on the decanter before the bowl is at a
standstill.
Fig. 8

• Warning of unusual noises or vibra-
tions!
• Attention in the case of unusual noises
or vibrations on the decanter!
• Follow the instructions in the instruc-
tion manual!
 Press EMERGENCY STOP!
 Take people to safety and leave the
room.
 Do not enter the room again until the
bowl has come to a standstill! Danger
to life and limb from rotating machine
Fig. 9
parts!

Description 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16

• Frequency converter operation !
Do not exceed bowl speed.
• When setting the frequency converter,
do not exceed the permitted bowl
speed (see rating plate)!
 Only trained specialists may set the

parameters on the frequency convert-
er.
 When starting the machine after re-
placing drive parts, bowl speed must
be checked.
 The decanter may only be operated
with an additional independent device
for speed limiting. Risk of damage to
the decanter!
This adhesive label is only used for fre-

quency converter operation.
Fig. 10

• Warning of hot or cold surfaces.
• The surfaces of the decanter and plant
components can be very hot or cold!
Risk of injury!
This adhesive label is used only for hot

operation or extreme cold operation.
Fig. 11
 Operate the machine only with protec-

tive equipment in accordance with
EN 294.
Fig. 12

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Description
Pos : 7.12 /BA/Standard/03_Beschr eibung/Not_H alt/N OT-HALT _Sep_D ek @ 0\mod_1324369076903_18.doc x @ 11130 @ 2 @ 1
3.7 EMERGENCY STOP

The "EMERGENCY-STOP" ensures functional safety in an emergency or risk situ-
ation. It ensures that processes are stopped, and that all moving parts come to a
standstill, as quickly as possible.
The centrifuge and all auxiliary equipment are not de-energised by the
EMERGENCY-STOP. The functionality of all components is maintained even when
the centrifuge is stationary. The switch to neutral must be done manually.
EMERGENCY-STOP can be triggered manually or automatically. EMERGENCY-
STOP is triggered automatically when the centrifuge is vibrating and either vibra-
tion stage 2 is reached or after 5 minutes of vibration stage 1 status.
EMERGENCY-STOP button
• EMERGENCY-STOP buttons are lo-
cated in the control cabinet.
• Precise information on the position of
the EMERGENCY-STOP buttons is
given in the electrical documentation.
• The control cabinet is installed in ac-
cordance with the specifications of the
plant operator.
• The position of the EMERGENCY-
STOP button is given in the SOP of
the plant operator.
Fig. 13
Main switch
• Precise information on the position of
the main switch on the control cabinet
is given in the electrical documenta-
tion.
• The control cabinet is installed in ac-
cordance with the specifications of the
plant operator.
• The position of the control cabinet with
the main switch is given in the SOP of
the plant operator.
Fig. 14
Pos : 7.13 /BA/Standard/03_Beschr eibung/Gefahr enbereic he/Gefahr enbereic he_D ek @ 0\mod_1315828885956_18.doc x @ 339 @ 2 @ 1
3.8 Danger areas

Touch the centrifuge and the feed and discharge lines only when wearing protec-
tive gloves.
The surfaces reach temperatures of over 80 °C depending on the product pro-
cessed and the operating speeds.
In normal operating mode, with mounted protective devices and functional supervi-
Pos : 7.14 /BA/Standard/03_Beschr eibung/T ypensc hild/T ypensc hild_Dek @ 2\mod_1362571595131_18.doc x @ 233372 @ @ 1
sory equipment, there are no further danger areas on the centrifuge.

Description 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
3.9 Nameplate
GEA Westfalia Separator …….

59302 Oelde, Germany
Type Serial-No.
Year of manufacture
Max. admissible rated bowl speed in min-1
Max. admissible density of the feed product in kg/dm3
Heavy liquid kg/dm3 Solids kg/dm3
Min./max. temperature of the feed product in °C
Min./max. housing pressure in bar
Min./max. throughput in m3/h
Pos : 8 /---Neue Seite--- @ 0\mod_1317283043850_0.doc x @ 550 @ @ 1

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Description
Pos : 9 /BA/8000_D ek/03_Besc hrei bung/Sicherheits kennzeic hnungen_am_Pr odukt/.CD/C E 20x- Sic herheits kennz eichnung _am_Pr odukt @ 4\mod_1378103170238_18.doc x @ 310040 @ 2 @ 1
3.10 Safety markings on the product
Fig. 15
10 Safety markings (the representation is not complete)

Replace damaged safety markings immediately.
Refer to the order-specific parts list. All required safety markings are listed
in the assembly "Set of plates".
20 Nameplate
30 Protective conductor
Pos : 10 /---Neue li nke Seite--- @ 0\mod_1319807883675_0.doc x @ 9280 @ @ 1

Description 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 11 /BA/8000_Dek/03_Besc hrei bung/Ges amtprodukt/xCD /CE 20x-00- xx_Ges amtprodukt @ 4\mod_1378109991694_18.doc x @ 310325 @ @ 1
3.11 Total product
Fig. 16
A Dewatering zone
B Clarifying zone
1 Secondary motor (only for version with 2-gear drive)

2 Clutch (only for version with 2-gear drive)
3 Secondary gear (only for version with 2-gear drive)
4 Bowl bearings
5 Primary gear
6 Scroll bearings
7 Distributor
8 Scroll bearings
9 Regulating ring
10 Bowl bearings
11 Feed tube
12 Feed
13 Gravity discharge of the clarified liquid
14 Separation chamber
15 Scroll
16 Housing
17 Solids discharge
18 Bowl drive
19 Scroll drive
20 Main motor
21 Bowl

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Description
Pos : 13 /BA/8000_Dek/03_Besc hrei bung/Trommel/xC x xxx- 00- xx Trommel_R eguliers cheibe_frei er_Abl auf @ 0\mod_1326190057947_18.doc x @ 12270 @ 2 @ 1
3.12 Bowl
The bowl is of cylindrical-conical design. Clarification and separation of the liquid
phases takes place in the cylindrical section of the bowl, dewatering of the sepa-
rated solids takes place in the conical section of the bowl.
Existing or possible wear and corrosion protection:
• All bowl and scroll parts coming in contact with the product are made of stainless
steel.
• Exchangeable wearing bushes in the solids ejection ports of the bowl.
• Hard-faced scroll flights for products with erosive properties (on special request).
The clarifying and dewatering efficiency can be changed and hence adapted to the
respective process. The following possibilities are available:
Exchanging the regulating ring. This produces the following tendency:
Option 1: Version without immersion disk (for crystalline products)

• Large inner diameter of the regulating ring produces a long dewatering zone (=
good dewatering efficiency) and a short clarifying zone (= less good clarifying ef-
ficiency).
• Small inner diameter of the regulating ring produces a short dewatering zone (=
less good dewatering efficiency) and a long clarifying zone (= good clarifying ef-
ficiency).
Option 2: Version with immersion disk (for pasty products)

• Small inner diameter of the regulating ring produces a high filling level of the
bowl (= good dewatering efficiency).
• Large inner diameter of the regulating ring produces a lower filling level of the
bowl (= less good dewatering efficiency).
Changing the differential speed range

This permits changing the layer thickness and dwell time of the solids in the de-
watering zone. Tendency:
• High differential speeds produce a high residual moisture content with pasty sol-
ids.
• Low differential speeds produce a low residual moisture content but can lead to
higher stressing of the scroll drive.
When processing crystalline solids, the opposite results are obtained.
Altering the bowl speed.
High bowl speeds generally improve the clarification and separation efficiency, but
require higher drive power ratings. They can also make solids conveyance more
difficult and increase material wear.

Description 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 15 /BA/8000_Dek/03_Besc hrei bung/Gestell/.CD /CE 2xx- Gestell @ 5\mod_1378196829195_18.doc x @ 335394 @ 2 @ 1
3.13 Housing
The housing consists of the following components:
• Welded frame with feet
• Stainless steel catchers for the product discharges
• Protective hood
• Motor bracket isolated from the housing by vibration isolators
Vibration isolators underneath the feet largely prevent the transmission of vibra-
tions.
Pos : 16 /BA/8000_Dek/03_Besc hrei bung/Schmi erung/xCD/C E 20/30x-Schmi erung @ 3\mod_1375781375366_18.doc x @ 277399 @ 2 @ 1
3.14 Lubrication
The main bowl bearings, the scroll bearings and the gear boxes are grease-
lubricated.
The grease filling of the scroll bearings will last for the service life of the bearings.
The main bowl bearings must be regreased regularly. Grease regulators discharge
the spent grease. The grease catch chambers must be cleaned regularly.
The re-lubrication intervals, grease quantity and quality are specified in the "Lubri-
cation and maintenance schedule".
A project-related lubrication and maintenance schedule, though a separate docu-
ment, is part of the machine documentation.

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Description
Pos : 19 /BA/8000_Dek/03_Besc hrei bung/Antri eb/xC x 20x- xx-00_Antrieb_Sc her bolzen_und_FU @ 4\mod_1377763701283_18.doc x @ 304360 @ 2 @ 1
3.15 Drive
The decanter is driven by a three-phase AC motor.
Power transmission is via belts.
The belt pulleys are exchangeable so as to be able to alter the bowl and differential
speeds.
The scroll is driven by a gear.
The drive motor is mounted in a vibration damping arrangement on the detached
motor bracket.
Option 1 The drive can be equipped with a shear pin on special order. The shear pin pro-
tects the scroll and gear against overload.
Option 2 The drive motor is controlled via a frequency converter. The bowl speed can be
steplessly adjusted within certain ranges via the frequency converter.
DANGER Danger to life through parts breaking at high speed
If the decanter is operated at an inadmissibly high speed, machine parts can break
and pose a high safety risk.
 Never manipulate the frequency con-

verter to exceed the permissible bowl
speed (see nameplate).
 The machine may only be operated
with an independent device for speed
limitation.
Fig. 17

Description 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 23 /BA/8000_Dek/03_Besc hrei bung/Motors teuerung/xCD 3xx- xx- x0_M otorsteuerung @ 4\mod_1377781100112_18.doc x @ 305329 @ 2 @ 1
3.16 Motor control

Functions of the optional motor control for monitoring start-up and operation:
• Automatic start-up of the drive motors.
• Motor protection of the drive motors (PTC thermistor monitoring).
• Start-up time monitoring.
• Interlocking of the feed (solenoid valve or pump) during the start-up phase, so
that the decanter can't be fed with product until the operating speed has been
reached.
• Switching off the drive and shutting off the feed in case of
- overload
-1
- drop in bowl speed (approx. 100 min below rated speed)
• Indication of the current consumption.
• Indication of the operating hours.
• Indication of an operating fault (e.g. overheating of the motor) with closing of the
feed

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Description
Pos : 25 /BA/8000_Dek/03_Besc hrei bung/Über wachungsei nrichtungen/Temperaturüber wac hung _der_Tr ommell ager @ 1\mod_1350047827611_18.doc x @ 186831 @ 2 @ 1
3.17 Temperature monitoring of the bowl bearings (option)

Depending on the version and application, a PT 100 resistance feeler is fitted to
each bearing point. By this means, mechanical damage is avoided or detected at
an early stage.
In the case of oil-air lubrication of the bowl bearings, the temperature monitoring
system is included in the standard scope of delivery.
Excessively high bearing temperatures can have the following causes:
• distortedly mounted roller bearings
• false roller bearings with insufficient bearing play
• overlubricated roller bearings
Optionally, the measured temperature can be displayed in the control. Threshold
values for the bearing monitoring are programmed in the control. There is a prelim-
inary alarm and a further alarm that results in shut down of the decanter.
Pos : 26 /BA/8000_Dek/03_Besc hrei bung/Über wachungsei nrichtungen/Sc hwi ngungsüber wachung_des _D ekanters _Variable @ 9\mod_1389605335945_18.doc x @ 618166 @ 24 @ 1
3.18 Vibration monitoring of the decanter (option)

Depending on the version and application, the vibrations of the frame are moni-
tored with a vibration recording device.
The signals are processed in the decanter control and lead, corresponding to the
preset limit values, to an alarm or to shut-down of the decanter. By this means,
mechanical damage is avoided or detected at an early stage.
Excessively high vibrations can have the following causes:
• Product deposits
• Worn roller bearings
• Scroll flights worn on one side
• Broken out hard facing
Factory set limit values

• Limit value I (preliminary alarm) = 11 mm/s
• Limit value II (shut-down of the decanter) = 14 mm/s

Description 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 28 /BA/8000_Dek/03_Besc hrei bung/Ar bei ts weis e/xC x xxx- 00- xx Arbeits weise_R eguliersc heiben_fr eier Abl auf @ 1\mod_1349961458029_18.doc x @ 186449 @ 2 @ 1
3.19 Operating principles of the decanter

The decanter is a horizontal scroll centrifuge with cylindrico-conical solid-wall bowl
for the continuous separation of solids from suspensions.
The process liquid enters the decanter through the centrally arranged feed tube
and flows into the inlet chamber of the scroll from where it flows through ports into
the separation space of the bowl where it is accelerated to operating speed.
The solid particles settle against the bowl wall in the shortest space of time due to
the action of centrifugal force.
The scroll, rotating at a slightly higher speed than the bowl shell, continuously con-
veys the separated solids to the narrow bowl end.
In the case of the version without immersion disk, the solids are lifted out of the liq-
uid in the dewatering zone (owing to the conical shape of the bowl) and any liquid
adhering to them is removed by centrifugal force.
At the end of the bowl, the solids are discharged into the catch chamber of the
housing.
The liquid flows between the scroll flights to the cylindrical bowl end.
The specifically light impurities still present in the liquid are centrifugally removed
on their path through the clarifying zone and are conveyed by the scroll to the sol-
ids discharge.
The clarified liquid leaves the separation space via exchangeable regulating rings
and is discharged under gravity.
Pos : 30.1 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/04_T echnisc he_D aten @ 0\mod_1315904497783_18.doc x @ 484 @ 2 @ 1

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Technical data
4 Technical data
4.1 Ambient conditions .................................................................................. 38

4.2 Load on foundation .................................................................................. 38
4.3 Motor data ................................................................................................ 38
4.4 Dimensioned drawing .............................................................................. 39

Technical data 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 30.2 /BA/Standard/04_T ec hni sche_Daten/U mgebungs beding ung en/U mgebungsbedi ngungen_D ek @ 0\mod_1315904787189_18.doc x @ 492 @ 2 @ 1
4.1 Ambient conditions

The decanter is generally designed for operation in closed halls. The dust expo-
sure must not exceed the standard values in industrial environments.
If the decanter is operated in environments which deviate from the specified val-
ues, the design must be modified accordingly.
The order-specific permissible ambient temperatures are given in the datasheet
supplied with the decanter in accordance with EN 12547.
Ambient temperature (min) [°C] 5
Ambient temperature (max) [°C] 40
Product temperature (max) [°C] 80
Ex-operation No
Pos : 30.3 /BA/8000_D ek/04_Tec hnische_Daten/F undamentbelas tung/F undamentbel astung_Ver weis _M aßbl att @ 1\mod_1349772016327_18.doc x @ 186211 @ 2 @ 1
4.2 Load on foundation

The load on the foundation depends on the type of drive and the motors used.
Note order-specific dimensioned drawing !
Pos : 32 /BA/8000_Dek/04_Tec hnisc he_Daten/M otordaten/xxx- xx- xx_M otordaten_Ver weis @ 4\mod_1378105133618_18.doc x @ 310108 @ 2 @ 1
4.3 Motor data

Refer to the motor nameplate and information from the manufacturer.

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Technical data
Pos : 34 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/U nter kapitel_Ü 2_links /Ü2_links_M aß blatt @ 0\mod_1326274777768_18.doc x @ 12602 @ @ 1
4.4 Dimensioned drawing

For information only, do not use as a planning document!
Note order-specific dimensioned drawing!
Pos : 35 /BA/8000_Dek/04_Tec hnisc he_Daten/M aß blatt/.CD /CE 20x- xxx- xx_grafi k @ 4\mod_1378105255812_0.doc x @ 310142 @ @ 1
Fig. 18
Pos : 37 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/05_Trans port_und_Lager ung @ 0\mod_1326207116268_18.doc x @ 12410 @ 2 @ 1

Technical data 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Transport and storage
5 Transport and storage
5.1 Safety during transport ............................................................................ 42

5.2 Storage instructions for the decanter....................................................... 42
5.3 Using load suspension devices safely ..................................................... 43
5.4 Using lifting eye bolts or lifting eye nuts as load handling devices .......... 45

Transport and storage 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 38 /BA/Standard/05_Tr ansport_und_Lag erung/Sic herheit_Transport/Sic her heit_Tr ans port_D ek @ 17\mod_1417009248509_18.doc x @ 877900 @ 2 @ 1
5.1 Safety during transport

When the centrifuge is transported with hoists and fork-lift trucks, hazards can oc-
cur. Risk of injury and material damage are a threat when unsuitable persons are
deployed and unsuitable or damaged lifting gear is used.
Therefore, pay attention to the following points during transportation:
 Assign only qualified personnel with the task of transporting the centrifuge.
 Use approved and intact lifting gear and hoists for transportation.
 Use only suitable hoists with adequate lifting capacity.
 If applicable: Arrest the bowl with the aid of the bowl lock screws.
- The bowl bearings will otherwise get damaged.
 Remove/loosen the coupling of the secondary motor.
- Otherwise the motor shaft/gear shaft will be damaged.
Pos : 39 /BA/Standard/05_Tr ansport_und_Lag erung/Lager hinweise_Z entrifug e/Lag erhinweis e_D ek @ 9\mod_1389608448721_18.doc x @ 618302 @ 2444444 @ 1
5.2 Storage instructions for the decanter

Requirements to be met by the storage room
The storage room must meet the following requirements:
• cool, 15 – 25 °C
• dry, approx. 65 % relative air humidity (perspiration water formation must be
prevented)
• dark (avoid direct sunlight and UV radiation)
• dust-free
• moderately ventilated
• free from aggressive media (e.g. salts, acids, lyes, solvents)
Painted parts
An intact paint coating provides adequate corrosion protection. For this reason,
painted parts must be examined for damage or changes once a month.
Touch up the damage in accordance with the instructions of the paint manufactur-
er.
Unpainted areas and galvanised parts
Unpainted areas and galvanised parts must be treated as follows:
 Carefully clean the area or part.
 Spray on corrosion protection wax (WS Part-No. 6969-0022-010)
 Check and, when necessary, touch up the corrosion protection once a month.
Gearbox / spare gearbox (oil-lubricated)
The gearbox and spare gearboxes must be prepared as follows for long-term stor-
age.
 Drain lubricating oil completely, see chapter "maintenance / Draining gear oil".
 Fill in 0.05 litre preserving oil (WS part no. 6969-0005-010) and close the gear-
box.
 Carefully clean the gearboxes.
- Check and, when necessary, touch up the corrosion protection once a month.
For the purpose of transporting the gearbox for inspection by the manufacturer, the
gearbox must likewise be prepared as described above.

Gearbox / spare gearbox (grease-lubricated)

age.
 Renew the grease filling of the gear, see chapter "Maintenance / Re-lubricating
the gear".
- The grease quality is specified in the maintenance schedule.
- Examine the grease plugs in the area of the screw plugs for impurities (shav-
ings etc.).
 Carefully clean the gearboxes.
- Check and, when necessary, touch up the corrosion protection once a month.
Drive motors
The drive motors must be prepared as follows for long-term storage.
• Option: Connect the space heaters for the motor winding. This is especially im-
portant in the case of high air humidity in the environment.
• Carefully clean the motor.
• Spray on corrosion protection wax (WS Part-No. 6969-0022-010)
• Check and, when necessary, touch up the corrosion protection once a month.
Pos : 40 /BA/Standard/05_Tr ansport_und_Lag erung/Lastaufnahmeei nrichtungen_sic her_ver wenden/Lastaufnahmeeinric htungen_sic her _ver wenden_D ek @ 1\mod_1354540518634_18.doc x @ 195821 @ 244 @ 1
5.3 Using load suspension devices safely

The working load limit of the load carrying equipment and load-securing devices
depends on the method of use. They may only be used for their intended use.
Misuse can result in tearing of the sling gear. There is then danger to life and limb
of persons and damage to property.
See the manufacturer specifications for a reduction of the working load limit in indi-
vidual cases.
GEA Westfalia Separator recommends round slings of chemical fibres as sling
gear.
Pay attention to the following points when using load suspension devices:
• Check the sling gear for damage before use.
• Do not use damaged or incomplete load carrying equipment or load-securing
devices.
• Use the sling gear only in the way approved by the manufacturer.
• Never strain the sling gear beyond the maximum working load limit. The WLL
specification is to be found on the label of the sling gear.
• Train the slingers and persons assigned with transport on a regular basis.
• Use only those suspension points specified in the documentation.
• Use only suitable fork-lift trucks and hoists with adequate lifting capacity.
• Pack and secure the load before transport in accordance with the Cargo
Transport Unit transport guidelines.
• Observe all regional regulations and laws governing transport and transport se-
curing.

Load suspension devices for transporting the centrifuge

Fork-lift trucks and hoist for transporting the centrifuge to the installation site must
be provided by the plant operator.
For removing or fitting heavy components, suitable hoists, e.g. a crane, must be
provided by the plant operator.
• Hood
• Bowl
• Drive
• etc.
Load suspension devices for maintaining the centrifuge

Load suspension devices and sling gear required for removing or fitting the bowl or
scroll are included in the optional "Set of tools".
Use sling gear correctly; pay attention to the following points:
• Use only sling gear with nameplate.
The nameplate attached to the sling

gear shows the following data:
- CE mark
- Manufacturer
- Year of construction
- Part number
- Application
- Maximum load
- Dead weight
Fig. 19 Example of a nameplate
• Use sling gear only as described in this instruction manual.

• Observe the permitted load limit.
• Before use, check the sling gear for visible damage.
• Use only intact sling gear.
• Do not carry out repairs to sling gear.
• Send damaged sling gear to the manufacturer.
• Always screw in threaded rods as far as they will go.
• Tighten all nuts firmly.
• Tighten all screws firmly.
• Do not walk under suspended loads.
• Check sling gear regularly, see "Maintenance schedule".

Pos : 42 /BA/Standard/05_Tr ansport_und_Lag erung/Ringsc hrauben_sicher_ver wenden/Ri ngschr auben_sic her_ver wenden @ 0\mod_1328014263896_18.doc x @ 14472 @ 2 @ 1
5.4 Using lifting eye bolts or lifting eye nuts as load handling devices
Incorrect use of lifting eye bolts or lifting eye nuts during transport can lead to seri-
ous accidents, e.g. due to overload.
WARNING Deformed lifting eye bolts or lifting eye nuts due to overload!
Danger to life and limb through falling loads when lifting eye bolts or lifting eye nuts
break!
Observe the following points to avoid accidents:
• The pertinent standards and guidelines of the national associations in the coun-
try of origin on the operation of load handling devices in lifting mode
• Only trained specialists are authorized to mount lifting eye bolts or lifting eye
nuts.
 Mount lifting eye bolts or lifting eye

nuts only as illustrated.
 Screw in lifting eye bolts or lifting eye
nuts completely.
 Attach load handling devices as verti-
cally as possible, e.g. chains.
– Pull max. 45° diagonally.
– Modes of assembly other than those
shown are not admissible, e.g. lat-
eral pull.
Fig. 20
Pos : 44 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/06_M ontage_und_Installati on @ 0\mod_1326806855797_18.doc x @ 12953 @ 2 @ 1


8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Assembly and installation
6 Assembly and installation
6.1 Safety during assembly and installation .................................................. 48

6.2 Required documents for planning the installation ................................... 48
6.3 Environmental requirements.................................................................... 49
6.4 Allow for sufficient space for maintenance work. .................................... 49
6.5 Requirements to be met by the load suspension devices ....................... 50
6.6 Demands on the configuration of the installation .................................... 50
6.7 Requirements to be met by feed and discharge lines ............................. 50
6.7.1 Rating of compensators ........................................................................... 51
6.8 Configuration of the liquid chute .............................................................. 52
6.9 Configuration of the solid chute ............................................................... 53
6.10 Configuration of the vent ......................................................................... 54
6.11 Overflow at the liquid side ....................................................................... 55
6.12 Flush connections .................................................................................... 55
6.13 Special aspects when operating in hot conditions................................... 55
6.14 Installing the decanter ............................................................................. 56
6.15 Carry out voltage equalisation ................................................................. 57
6.16 Connecting three-phase AC motors ........................................................ 58
6.17 Checking the direction of rotation of the motors ...................................... 59
6.18 Connecting the control ............................................................................. 60
6.19 Connecting the feed and discharge line assemblies ............................... 61

Assembly and installation 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 45 /BA/Standard/06_M ontage_und_Installation/Sicherheit_Montage_Installation/Sicherheit_Montage_Installation_D ek @ 6\mod_1381325230998_18.doc x @ 434962 @ 24 @ 1
6.1 Safety during assembly and installation

Pay attention to the following points during assembly and installation:
 Install the centrifuge at the installation site in accordance with the installation di-
agrams.
 For rating piping, refer to the specifications in the P&ID (Piping and Instrumenta-
tion Diagram) in the installation diagram and in the datasheets.
 Connect all feed and discharge lines flexibly to the centrifuge by means of U-
shaped conduits or compensators.
- Loading the pipelines through tensile force is not admissible.
- All pipe joints are rated without taking into consideration tensile forces.
 Do not fit a shut-off device in the frame drain or connect it with closed piping.
Exception A shut-off device is required to prevent harmful gases from
escaping during maintenance work.
Required Take appropriate action to ensure that the centrifuge only starts
measure when such shut-off devices are completely open.
Fastening material
Unsuitable fastening material endangers the statics and operating safety of the
centrifuge. This can lead to damage to the centrifuge.
 Use the specified fastening means. They are rated for machine frame and foun-
dation.
Pos : 46 /BA/Standard/06_M ontage_und_Installation/Erfor derlic he_D okumente/Erfor derlic he_Dokumente_D ek @ 9\mod_1389609922216_18.doc x @ 618404 @ 2 @ 1
6.2 Required documents for planning the installation

Careful planning of the installation is crucial in terms of service life, safety and op-
erating readiness of the centrifuge.
The following documents are required:
• Order-specific dimensioned drawing
• Order-specific P&ID (Piping and Instrumentation Diagram)
• Order-specific equipment list
• Terminal and circuit diagram
• Decanter instruction manual
• Additional manuals (if applicable), e.g. for oil+air lubrication of the bowl bearings

Pos : 48 /BA/Standard/06_M ontage_und_Installation/Anfor der ung _an_di e_U mg ebung/Anforderungen_an_die_U mgebung_D ek @ 3\mod_1374825503187_18.doc x @ 275060 @ 244 @ 1
6.3 Environmental requirements

Favourable environmental conditions are:
• The decanter is standing in a closed hall.
• The decanter is free-standing and is well ventilated.
• The decanter has low dust exposure. The standard values in industrial environ-
ments are not exceeded.
• Uniform ambient temperatures prevail between min. 5 °C and max. 40 °C.
In the following cases GEA Westfalia Separator must be contacted for more pre-
cise clarification of the optimum installation.
Unfavourable environmental conditions are:
• The decanter is standing outdoors.
o
- In the case of frost risk, pre-heating to +5 C is required before starting the
decanter.
• The decanter is installed at a poorly ventilated site. Bearings and gears are sub-
jected to thermal strain.
• The decanter is exposed to large differences in temperature. Condensate water
impairs lubrication of the bowl bearings.
NOTICE Inadmissible environmental conditions are:
• Corrosive vapours or fumes damage the decanter.

- in such cases, provision must be made for an extraction installation.
• Disturbing external vibrations.
- Avoid disturbing external vibrations since the can endanger the operating
safety of the decanter.
• Ambient temperatures below 5 °C are prevailing.
• Ambient temperatures above 40 °C are prevailing.
Pos : 49 /BA/Standard/06_M ontage_und_Installation/Platzbedarf_War tungsar beiten/Platzbedarf _Wartungsar bei ten_Sep_D ek @ 6\mod_1380630399902_18.doc x @ 431992 @ 2 @ 1
6.4 Allow for sufficient space for maintenance work.

When planning the installation of the centrifuge, ensure that the centrifuge is easily
accessible from all sides.
Keep to the minimum clearances from walls of buildings or other machines so that
the following points are assured.
• All machine parts must be readily accessible for maintenance and repair work.
• Sufficient space must be available for setting down large machine parts safely.
- Protective hoods
- Bowl
- Drive motors

Pos : 51 /BA/Standard/06_M ontage_und_Installation/Anfor der ung en_Las taufnahmeei nrichtungen/Anfor der ung en_an_Las taufnahmeei nrichtungen_D ek @ 12\mod_1394699638512_18.doc x @ 693600 @ 2 @ 1
6.5 Requirements to be met by the load suspension devices

• Hoists and cranes must be adequately dimensioned for the weights of the ma-
chine components. Refer to the order-specific dimensioned drawing.
• A crane must be able to travel in two axes.
• If a monorail crane is used, the crane has to run in the rotor axis.
Pos : 52 /BA/Standard/06_M ontage_und_Installation/Anfor der ung _Gestaltung _Anlag e/Anforderungen_an_Gestaltung_der_Anl age_Sep_D ek @ 1\mod_1347019636552_18.doc x @ 183044 @ 2 @ 1
6.6 Demands on the configuration of the installation

• Configure the installation so that backflows of product or utilities cannot occur.
• Ensure uniform feed rates. Recommendation: Mono pump
• Ensure uniform feed concentration. Recommendation: Agitator
Pos : 53 /BA/Standard/06_M ontage_und_Installation/Anfor der ung _Zul auf_Ablaufl eitungen/Anfor der ung en_an_Z ulauf_Ablauf_Sep_D ek @ 6\mod_1380630662590_18.doc x @ 432066 @ 2 @ 1
6.7 Requirements to be met by feed and discharge lines

• Valves and pumps must be adapted to the product.
• Do not connect feed and discharge lines firmly to the centrifuge. Provide flexible
connections.
• Contact with the rotating bowl must be excluded.
• Operating personnel must not be endangered by discharged product. Danger
zones must be made inaccessible.
• The feed must be provided with a shut-off device so as to be able to interrupt the
product supply in case of operating malfunctions.
• The feed system should enable uniform product supply with a constant solids
content.

Pos : 55 /BA/Standard/06_M ontage_und_Installation/Ausl egung_von_Kompens atoren/Ausleg ung_von_Kompensator en_D ek @ 1\mod_1349687834401_18.doc x @ 185991 @ 244 @ 1
6.7.1 Rating of compensators

Compensators installed in the lines on the centrifuge must meet the following re-
quirements:
Motion absorption [mm] Adjusting forces [N/mm]

Size
axial lateral axial lateral
Up to DN 15 ±6 ±3 50 50
DN 20 to DN 40 ± 10 ±5 100 100
DN 50 to DN 100 ± 10 ±5 100 200
DN 125 to DN 200 ± 15 ±5 200 400
Materials
The material selection must take into consideration the following requirements:
• Corrosion-resistant
• Resistant against product specifications
- Temperature
- Acids
- Lyes
- Solvents
• Resistant against the specified environmental conditions
• Light-resistant when installed outdoors
• If applicable, suitable for use in the food and/or pharmaceutical sector
Pressure range for the compensators

• In the feed line: PN6
• In the discharge line centripetal pump and paring tube PN16

Pos : 57 /BA/Standard/06_M ontage_und_Installation/Ges tal tung_Fl üssig keitsabfuhr /Gestaltung_Flüssig keits abfuhr_D ek @ 1\mod_1347020300966_18.doc x @ 183112 @ 3444 @ 1
6.8 Configuration of the liquid chute

Open chute
Liquid chutes adapted optimally to the decanter can be procured from GEA West-
falia Separator.
Take into account the following points when building your own constructions:
• Provide a vent.
• Fit a compensator.
• Protect operating personnel. To do this:
- Prevent contact with rotating parts.
- Prevent danger through discharging product.
• Rate conveying equipment (e.g. pumps) to handle the throughput capacity of the
decanter. In case of doubt, contact GEA Westfalia Separator.
• Fit a sampling cock (recommendation).
Paring tube
• Provide a vent.
• Fit a compensator.
• Liquid (product) must be discharged into a tank next to the decanter without
pressure.
- Vent the tank.
- In the case of increased backpressure, the leakage at the paring tube will in-
crease.
Centripetal pump
• Liquid (product) is discharged under pressure.
• Provide a compensator between the connections at the decanter and the dis-
charging pipe.

Pos : 59 /BA/Standard/06_M ontage_und_Installation/Ges tal tung_F ests toffsc hacht/xCD xxx- xx- xx Gestaltung _Fes tstoffschac ht @ 8\mod_1386232453352_18.doc x @ 478757 @ 3 @ 1
6.9 Configuration of the solid chute

Solid chutes adapted optimally to the decanter can be procured from GEA West-
falia Separator.
• Design the solids discharge to prevent damming.
• Ensure adequate venting of the solids chute and downstream solids tank. See
also chapter "Assembly and Installation / Configuration of the vent".
• Provide an elastic connection piece (e.g. compensator) when closed discharge
is required.
• In the case of open discharge, provide a compensator with elastic connection to
the decanter.
• When a closed solid discharge is necessary, e.g. in the case of a gastight de-
sign, only a round stainless steel compensator can be used due to the required
tightness.
- This results in a transition between the angular discharge at the housing of
the centrifuge to round.
- Select an adequately large nominal width.
- Prevent bridging.
• Protect operating personnel. To do this:
- Prevent contact with rotating parts.
- Prevent danger through discharging product.
• Rate conveying equipment (e.g. pumps, conveyor belts or solid slides) to handle
the throughput capacity of the decanter. In case of doubt, contact GEA Westfalia
Separator.
• During start-up, run-down and flushing the decanter, liquid discharges through
the solid discharge. A special discharge system must be provided for this. e.g.
- Slide gate valve
- Residual water discharge at trough conveyor
- etc.

Pos : 61 /BA/Standard/06_M ontage_und_Installation/Ges tal tung_Entlüftung/xCD xxx- xx- xx Gestaltung_Entlüftung @ 8\mod_1386232737079_18.doc x @ 478831 @ 2 @ 1
6.10 Configuration of the vent

The correct venting of the liquid and solid catchers is essential for operating the
decanter.
Inadequate venting leads to damage to the decanter (e.g. solid deposits in the
housing) or backmixing of the separated phases.
Fig. 21
• The connection point of the vent line must be laid as close as possible to the
discharge chute of the decanter.
• The connection point must be laid so that no blockage occurs as a result of de-
posited or dammed solids.
- Any connections for discharging dammed product out of the solids chute must
be fitted below the vent point.
• Lay the vent line with a steady slope to prevent the accumulation of aerosol res-
idues from the exhaust air in the line (siphon).
• The air stream in the vent contains solid particles, liquid or vapours. Since they
can deposit or condensate in the vent line, we recommending providing inspec-
tion ports and cleaning possibilities.
• Vent the solid catcher and liquid catcher separately from one another.
• If several machines have to be vented together, contact GEA Westfalia Separa-
tor.
• If a gate valve is fitted in the chute on the solid side, the vent must be located
above the gate valve.

Pos : 63 /BA/Standard/06_M ontage_und_Installation/Ü berl auf_Fl üssig kei tss eite/Überlauf_Flüssigkeits seite_Dek @ 1\mod_1349701684649_18.doc x @ 186025 @ 2 @ 1
6.11 Overflow at the liquid side

After shutting down the decanter, liquid discharges at the overflow of the feed tube
at the liquid side. Depending on the application, up to 20 litres of liquid discharge.
This liquid must be collected.
In the case of open designs, the overflow can be connected to the chute on the liq-
uid side via a flexible hose.
Pos : 64 /BA/Standard/06_M ontage_und_Installation/Spülansc hl üss e/Spülansc hlüs se_Dek @ 1\mod_1349702395569_18.doc x @ 186058 @ 2 @ 1
6.12 Flush connections

Flush connections must be taken into consideration in accordance with the order-
specific dimensioned drawing.
The required water pressures and water volumes are specified in the P&ID.
Use only clean flush liquid for the hood flushing. Flush liquid already contaminated
(e.g. from the centripetal pump discharge) soils the flush nozzles.
Pos : 65 /BA/Standard/06_M ontage_und_Installation/Bes onderheiten_i m_Heiß betrieb/Bes onderheiten_i m H eißbetri eb_Dek @ 0\mod_1332833320987_18.doc x @ 21010 @ 2 @ 1
6.13 Special aspects when operating in hot conditions

Steam must not pass through the decanter when it is at standstill. The steam would
endanger the maintenance personnel and be an influential factor regarding corro-
sion in the decanter.
• Shut-off devices in the feed and discharge lines must be installed such that the
shut-down decanters can be isolated.
• Vent lines must be planned and installed in such a way that the shut-off devices
cannot be bypassed.
• The decanter may only be started when the shut-off devices are open.

Pos : 67 /BA/8000_Dek/06_Montage_und_Ins tall ation/D ekanter _aufstell en/.CD 20x- D ekanter_aufstellen ( komplett) @ 4\mod_1378119580880_18.doc x @ 310537 @ 2 @ 1
6.14 Installing the decanter
Fig. 22
The decanter is delivered as a complete assembly

 Suspend the decanter in a hoist as illustrated (applies for complete decanter in-
cluding rotor).
- Required min. lifting capacity: 1000 kg.
 Install the decanter on a secure foundation and align horizontally.
- For this purpose insert suitable shims between the feet and the rubber-metal
cushions.
- Bolt the housing feet to the foundation (M16 taphole on underside of rubber-
metal cushion).
 Connect the feed and discharge lines.
 Carry out electrical installation.
 Check the belt tension, see chapter "Maintenance / Re-tensioning drive belts".

Pos : 69 /BA/Standard/06_M ontage_und_Installation/Potenti alausgleic h_ausführ en/xCD 3xx- xx- xx Potential ausgleich aus führen @ 3\mod_1375781427318_18.doc x @ 279016 @ 2 @ 1
6.15 Carry out voltage equalisation
 To ensure safe operation of the de-

canter, voltage equalisation MUST be
carried out according to EN 60204-1.
Fig. 23
Omitting voltage equalisation will have the following consequences:
DANGER Danger to life through electric voltage!
As soon as a live power line gets into contact with the machine housing, electric
shock may occur.
 Measuring signals of monitoring devices can be distorted (e.g.: vibration moni-
toring, bearing temperature monitoring).
 Magnetism can give rise to bearing failure.

Pos : 71 /BA/Standard/06_M ontage_und_Installation/Dr ehs trommotor_ans chli ess en/Dr ehstrommotor_ansc hliess en_D ek @ 1\mod_1343821667675_18.doc x @ 180885 @ 24444 @ 1
6.16 Connecting three-phase AC motors
Danger to life and limb through electric shock!

 The electrical connection of the three-phase AC motor may only be performed
by authorized specialists, e.g. electricians and high voltage electricians.
 Power must be shut off to the connections and it must be ensured that it cannot
be switched back on.
Operation with frequency converter
• Never manipulate the frequency converter to exceed the permissible bowl speed
(see nameplate).
• The machine may only be operated with an independent device for speed limita-
tion.
Ceiling speed
 Adjust the ceiling speed 5% above rated speed.
Starting current
The required starting current with frequency converter corresponds roughly to the
rated current.
In the case of controlled torque starting, 2 - 3 times the rated current is required as
starting current.
Motor protection
If the motor is equipped with a PTC thermistor, it must be connected to the corre-
sponding tripping device.
The measuring circuit line (between tripping device and motor) has to be laid sepa-
rate from other lines.

Pos : 73 /BA/8000_Dek/06_Montage_und_Ins tall ation/Dr ehric htung _Motor _kontr ollieren/.CD 3xx- xx- xx_Drehrichtung_M otor_kontrollier en @ 10\mod_1391165576614_18.doc x @ 655356 @ 2 @ 1
6.17 Checking the direction of rotation of the motors

IMPORTANT: The direction of rotation must be checked without V-belts.
 In the case of 2-gear drive: When

looking at the fan, the main and sec-
ondary motor must rotate counter-
clockwise.
 In the case of standard drive: When
looking at the fan, the main motor must
rotate counterclockwise.
Fig. 24
 The direction of rotation can be reversed by interchanging two lead-in wires in

the motor control. Be sure to take into account the direction of rotation of auxilia-
ry units.
Danger to life and limb through electric shock.


Pos : 75.1 /BA/Standard/06_M ontag e_und_Installation/Steuerung_anschli eßen/Steuer ung _ansc hließ en_Sep_Dek @ 2\mod_1366795467224_18.doc x @ 245781 @ 2444 @ 1
6.18 Connecting the control

Connecting the electrical connections
 Comply with the local regulations governing electrical installations and utilities.
 The frequency and voltage of the power supply must correspond to the machine
specification.
 Carry out potential equalisation.
 Observe statutory regulations; e.g. in the EU the EC Directives.
Main switch on the control cabinet

Precise information on the position of the main switch on the control cabinet is giv-
en in the electrical documentation.
The control cabinet is installed in accordance with the specifications of the plant
operator. The position of the control cabinet with the main switch must therefore be
taken from the instruction manual of the plant operator.
Positioning the EMERGENCY STOP button

EMERGENCY STOP buttons are located in the control cabinet.
Precise information on the position of the EMERGENCY STOP buttons is given in
the electrical documentation.
The control cabinet is installed in accordance with the specifications of the plant
operator. The position of the EMERGENCY STOP switches must therefore be tak-
en from the instruction manual of the plant operator.
If the control cabinet is not installed in the direct machine environment, additional
EMERGENCY STOP switches must be installed on site.
Additional EMERCENCY STOP switches may be required in the plant in which the
centrifuge is integrated. They must be installed based on the risk assessment of
the plant operator. The EMERGENCY STOP function of the centrifuge must, if
necessary, be integrated in a shut-down concept of the plant or of plant compo-
nents.

Pos : 75.3 /BA/Standard/06_M ontag e_und_Installation/Z u-und_Abl aufleitungen_anschli ess en/Zu- und_Ablaufl eitung en_ansc hliessen_Sep_D ek @ 0\mod_1328623436091_18.doc x @ 15660 @ 24 @ 1
6.19 Connecting the feed and discharge line assemblies

Checking the feed line installation
When product feed pipes have been installed by welding, it must be ensured that
the inside of the pipes have been deburred and cleaned at the welds.
This work must be carried out by the executing persons or the assigned company
after completion of the installation work and must also be documented.
NOTICE Foreign bodies in the feed installation, e.g. metal fines from welding
If the above is not observed, metal fines can enter the bowl and damage gaskets
and other bowl parts.
Downtime of the centrifuge and high repair costs would be the result. GEA West-
falia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused in this way.
 Check that all feed lines are clean and deburred.
If the pipes have already been installed and bolted tight, request an acceptance
report from the equipment manufacturer confirming that the pipes were deburred,
cleaned and tested upon completion of the installation work.
Feed and discharge line assemblies
 Install the feed and discharge lines flexibly to avoid the transfer of vibrations,
e.g. by means of U-shaped conduits.
 Close the feed and discharge lines to reduce noise development.
 Valves and pumps must be adapted to the product.
 Install feed and discharge assemblies separately from the centrifuge.
 The feed line must be provided with a shut-off device so as to be able to inter-
rupt the product supply in case of operating malfunctions.
 The feed line should enable uniform product supply with a constant solids con-
tent
Pos : 77 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/07_Einstellungen @ 0\mod_1326807237751_18.doc x @ 12986 @ 2 @ 1


8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Settings
7 Settings
7.1 Changing speeds ..................................................................................... 64

7.2 Altering the bowl speed (frequency converter) ........................................ 64
7.3 Mounting and adjusting the speed sensors ............................................. 65
7.4 Regulating ring......................................................................................... 66
7.4.1 Removing theregulating ring.................................................................... 66
7.4.2 Fitting the regulating ring ......................................................................... 67

Settings 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 78 /BA/8000_Dek/07_Ei nstellungen/Drehz ahl en_ändern/Dr ehzahlen _ändern_Dek_CF @ 0\mod_1331632726657_18.doc x @ 19884 @ 2 @ 1
7.1 Changing speeds

The choice of belt pulleys depends on the product. If a change in speed is desired,
please contact GEA Westfalia Separator.
Pos : 80 /BA/8000_Dek/07_Ei nstellungen/Trommeldr ehzahl_ändern/xCF xxx- xx- xx Tr ommel drehz ahl _änder n_(FU) @ 0\mod_1331633046115_18.doc x @ 19952 @ 2 @ 1
7.2 Altering the bowl speed (frequency converter)

The main motor can also be fitted with an optional frequency converter. The bowl
speed can then be infinitely adjusted within certain ranges via the frequency con-
verter.
DANGER Danger to life due to excessively high bowl speeds

limitation.
Fig. 25
The maximum frequency represents the maximum bowl speed attainable with the
fitted pair of belt pulleys.
The bowl speed is proportional to the frequency of the primary motor.
Important: The differential speed also changes even though the frequency on the
secondary frequency converter has not been changed.

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Settings
Pos : 85 /BA/8000_Dek/07_Ei nstellungen/Drehz ahli nitiator en_montieren_ei nstellen/.CD 20x- xx- x0 Dr ehzahliniti atoren_montier en_eins tell en @ 11\mod_1393227438437_18.doc x @ 671450 @ 2 @ 1
7.3 Mounting and adjusting the speed sensors
Fig. 26
 Screw the holder for the speed sensors onto the frame.
- Gear input (A)
- Bowl speed (C)
 Align the holders for the speed sen-

sors.
The sensors are correctly set at the fac-

tory.
When individual sensors are fitted, align
them as illustrated.
- Distance (X) must be 2.5 mm.
Fig. 27

Settings 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 87 /BA/8000_Dek/07_Ei nstellungen/R eguliersc heibe/R eguliersc heibe @ 1\mod_1350031262301_18.doc x @ 186593 @ 2 @ 1
7.4 Regulating ring

The regulating ring determines the overflow diameter of the bowl.
The overflow diameter can be altered by exchanging the regulating ring to adapt
the machine to the respective process by varying the clarifying and drying efficien-
cy.
Pos : 88 /BA/8000_Dek/07_Ei nstellungen/R eguliersc heibe_ausbauen/xCD 20x/34x-00- xx R eguli erschei be_aus bauen @ 34\mod_1465290895327_18.doc x @ 1336366 @ 3 @ 1
7.4.1 Removing theregulating ring
DANGER Danger to life through high-speed rotating machine parts !
 Do not loosen any part of the machine before the decanter bowl has come to a
standstill.
 Wait for the run-down time to elapse, approx. 15 minutes.
 Secure the machine against unintentional switching-on.
 Do not start maintenance work until the components have cooled down to room
temperature. Depending on the application and product temperature, the cooling
phase can take up to 2 hours.
 Unlock the protective hood for the motor and hinge it up.
 Unlock the decanter cover and hinge it up.
 Unscrew screws 5.
 Remove upper part of catcher (3).
Fig. 28
 Unscrew countersunk screws (1).

 Remove the two regulating ring
halves (2).
Fig. 29

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Settings
Pos : 90 /BA/8000_Dek/07_Ei nstellungen/R eguliersc heibe_einbauen/xCD 20x-00- xx_Reg uliersc hei be_einbauen @ 34\mod_1464785652864_18.doc x @ 1334279 @ 3 @ 1
7.4.2 Fitting the regulating ring

 Clean all parts carefully. Replace worn or damaged parts immediately.
 Mount the ring halves so that the joints are not located over an ejection port.
 Tighten first countersunk screws (A),

then countersunk screws (B).
Required tightening torque
(greased screws):
- 15.2 Nm (standard operation)
- 13 Nm (hot operation, product tem-
perature above 100 °C)
Fig. 30
Fig. 31
 Mount the upper part of the catcher (3) and align.

 IMPORTANT: Firmly tighten screws (D) .
 IMPORTANT: Check with a feeler gauge whether uniform gaps (S) and (S1 )are
present between bowl and catcher.
- If the gaps are not equal, the cause must be established.
- The gaps (S) are not adjustable. The gaps will be correct when properly as-
sembled.
- Gaps (S1 ) can be changed within the slits in the lower and upper part of the
catcher.
 Hinge down protective hood and interlock it. Hinge down protective hood and in-
terlock it.
 During the first decanter start-up after assembly work, watch out for unusual
noises and vibrations.
Pos : 92 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/08_Inbetri ebnahme @ 0\mod_1328016769013_18.doc x @ 14577 @ 3 @ 1

Settings 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Commissioning
8 Commissioning
8.1 Safety aspects during commissioning ..................................................... 70

8.2 Checking the starting time of the bowl .................................................... 70
8.3 Checking the run-down time of the bowl ................................................. 70
8.4 Checking the direction of rotation of the bowl ......................................... 71
8.5 Start-up check list .................................................................................... 72
8.6 Performing a test run ............................................................................... 74
8.7 Preparing for re-starting ........................................................................... 74
8.8 Start the centrifuge at operating state temperature ................................. 75

Commissioning 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 93 /BA/Standard/08_Inbetriebnahme/Sic her hei t_Inbetriebnahme/Sic her hei t_Inbetriebnahme_Dek @ 6\mod_1381326066852_18.doc x @ 435164 @ 344 @ 1
8.1 Safety aspects during commissioning

Commissioning
Commissioning of the centrifuge after erection and installation may only be carried
out by specialists from GEA Westfalia Separator or authorized service partners.
Non-professional execution of commissioning by unsuitable personnel can lead to
accidents with damage to persons and property.
Pay attention to the following points during commissioning:
 Assign only trained and authorized specialists with the task of commissioning.
 During commissioning, use only water instead of product.
 Eliminate faults during commissioning immediately, e.g. leaky pipe joints.
 Check the function of all safety and protective devices, identify faults and elimi-
nate them immediately.
Before every start-up

Operate the centrifuge after maintenance or repair work only when no defects are
present which could endanger safe operation.
The plant operator is responsible for assuring that necessary checks are done
carefully.
Take care of the following points before starting the centrifuge:
 Check that all screwed connections are tight.
 Check the "O" marks.
 Check the direction of rotation of the centrifuge.
- The direction of rotation must correspond to the direction of rotation arrow on
the frame.
 Check connections, pressures and temperatures of the product, the operating
materials and utilities.
 Eliminate all faults detected prior to starting.
Pos : 94 /BA/Standard/08_Inbetriebnahme/Anlaufz eit_Trommel_kontr ollieren/Anl aufzei t_Tr ommel _kontrollier en @ 0\mod_1329227264063_18.doc x @ 16174 @ 2 @ 1
8.2 Checking the starting time of the bowl

 The target values for starting time and operating speed are specified in the or-
der-specific datasheet.
 Make sure that the bowl reaches the specified operating speed within the start-
ing time.
Pos : 95 /BA/Standard/08_Inbetriebnahme/Auslaufzeit_Tr ommel _kontr ollieren/Auslaufz eit_Trommel_kontrollier en_D ek @ 1\mod_1343824947525_18.doc x @ 180959 @ 2 @ 1
8.3 Checking the run-down time of the bowl

The run-down time of the bowl is the maximum time span required from switching
off the centrifuge to standstill of the bowl. It can be found in the datasheet.
The run-down time specified in the datasheet refers to the operating speed with
free run-down and at atmospheric pressure. The operating speed is specified on
the nameplate of the centrifuge
The filling level of the bowl and various process factors can influence the run-down
time of the bowl.

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Commissioning
Pos : 97 /BA/Standard/08_Inbetriebnahme/Drehrichtung_Trommel_kontr ollieren/Dr ehric htung _Trommel_kontrollier en_D ek_CA/CD /CE @ 4\mod_1377690452913_18.doc x @ 292948 @ 2 @ 1
8.4 Checking the direction of rotation of the bowl

The bowl must rotate clockwise when looked at from the feed side.
 Pay attention to the direction of rotation arrows on the drive motors.
 The motor fans must run in the direc-

tion of the arrows.
 If this is not the case, the electrical
connection must be checked.
Fig. 32
Danger to life and limb through electric shock.


Commissioning 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 99 /BA/Standard/08_Inbetriebnahme/Chec kliste_Inbetriebnahme/xCD 30x C hec kliste_Inbetriebnahme @ 8\mod_1386237605149_18.doc x @ 478875 @ 2 @ 1
8.5 Start-up check list

Operator: Trained specialist
When must the check list be worked off:
• Before commissioning the centrifuge
• When re-starting after repairs and a long standstill period
Documents
Decanter instruction manual is available.
Datasheet according to EN 12547 is available.
Lubrication and maintenance schedule is available.
Spare parts list is available.
Instruction manuals for optional auxiliary equipment are available, e.g.
- decanter control / decanter monitoring
- automatic lubricating system
P&ID is available.
Order-specific dimensioned drawing is available.
Centrifuge
Centrifuge has been installed and assembled to the specifications.
Bowl is fitted and can be rotated by hand.
Safety stickers are complete, attached properly, are clean and legible.
Feed and discharge connections are fitted correctly and the screwed connections are tight.
Frame drains are free.
Supervisory equipment is connected and connected to the control system.

Limit values for pressurized hoods, concentrate catchers and vessels are set correctly.
Bowl lock screws are loosened and secured (if fitted).
Transportation locking device of the drive has been released and secured (if fitted).
Product paths
Feed lines are deburred and cleaned or acceptance report of the plumber.
The product feed doesn't leak.
The product corresponds to the specifications on the nameplate.
Operating pressures prevail.
Temperature is correct.

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Commissioning
Supply lines
Electrical connections for fittings are properly connected.
flush water
The flush water lines are connected and operational (special request).
Control
Electrical connections have been executed professionally.
Protective devices function, e.g. light barriers or switches on protective covers.
EMERGENCY-OFF buttons are in the intended places and are functioning.

Optional monitoring devices are connected and functional, e.g.
- Speed monitoring
- Vibration monitoring
- Temperature monitoring
- Flowmeter
- Oil flow monitoring
- Temperature indicators
- Pressure gauges
Bowl speed is adjusted correctly.
Torque factor (decanter factor) is adjusted correctly.
Safety switching circuits and alarms have been tested and are functional.
Electric motor
Transportation locking device has been removed (if fitted).
Connection values on the motor nameplate match the specifications on the centrifuge
nameplate and the connectional values of the local power supply.
Electrical connection has been executed professionally.
Direction of rotation of motors/bowl are correct.

Commissioning 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 101 /BA/Standar d/08_Inbetriebnahme/Probel auf_durchführen/Probelauf_durchführen_Dek @ 1\mod_1343826411610_18.doc x @ 181027 @ 2 @ 1
8.6 Performing a test run

IMPORTANT! Commissioning entails risks since hidden faults may not emerge un-
til the decanter is started.
If the product is problematic, it is recommended to carry out the commissioning test
run with water or an inert medium.
 Check that all speeds and limit values are adjusted correctly on the decanter
control. Refer to the control unit manual.
 Start the decanter, see chapter "Operation".
 Feed water to the decanter.
 Check the installation for leaks.
 If unusual noises occur, shut down the decanter immediately.
 Let the decanter run for 30 minutes.
 Shut down the decanter.
Pos : 102 /BA/Standar d/08_Inbetriebnahme/Wi ederinbetriebnahme_vorbereiten/Wiederi nbetriebnahme_vorberei ten_Dek @ 1\mod_1343828649661_18.doc x @ 181095 @ 2 @ 1
8.7 Preparing for re-starting

Before a prolonged shut-down of the centrifuge, various storage measures have
been carried out. machine parts have been dismantled and stored separately, e.g.
the bowl.
Permanent corrosion protection for drive parts with the specified slushing oil can be
guaranteed for a maximum of 1 year.
When the centrifuge is put back into operation after a long standstill period, the fol-
lowing operations and tests must be performed:
 remove packaging and covers.
 Strip down the bowl and check the bowl parts for corrosion damage. In case of
doubt, have the bowl parts checked by service personnel from GEA Westfalia
Separator.
 If the centrifuge has been in storage for longer than one year, carry out the steps
specified in the maintenance schedule (machine out of operation for prolonged
period).
 Check the shut-off devices for functionality and leakage.
 Re-connect the feed lines if they were disconnected before decommissioning.
 Open valves for product feed line and discharge lines.
 If appropriate, carry out a test run with water as described in the section "Per-
forming a test run".
 Only in case of grease-lubricated bowl bearings:
- Displace surplus grease out of the bearings with the aid of compressed air.
- Perform this action when the machine is rotating slowly.
- Too much grease in the bearings can lead to inadmissibly high bearing tem-
peratures.
Pos : 103 /BA/Standar d/08_Inbetriebnahme/Z entrifug e_betriebs warm_s tarten/Z entrifuge_betriebs war m_starten_Sep_D ek @ 26\mod_1443765011345_18.doc x @ 1018797 @ 2 @ 1

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Commissioning
8.8 Start the centrifuge at operating state temperature

Centrifuges with three-phase AC motors which are controlled by a frequency con-
verter can be re-started at all times. This does not apply for motors featuring con-
trolled torque starting.
NOTICE Heating on centrifuges with motors for controlled torque starting
A centrifuge with motor for controlled torque starting is started with a high current
consumption. This can result in overheating of the coupling and the three-phase
AC motor.
 Do not re-start centrifuges with motors for controlled torque starting at operating
state temperature until after a cooling off time of 60 minutes.
Pos : 106.1 /BA/Standar d/00_Ü bersc hriften/Kapitel /09_Betrieb @ 0\mod_1328016902870_18.doc x @ 14611 @ 1 @ 1

Commissioning 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Operation
9 Operation
9.1 Safety during operation ........................................................................... 78

9.2 What must be kept in mind when using third-party controls? .................. 80
9.3 Immediate action in case of power outage .............................................. 80
9.4 Switching on the decanter ....................................................................... 81
9.5 Operation ................................................................................................. 82
9.6 Operation with a vibration monitoring system ......................................... 83
9.7 Switching off the decanter and ordinary cleaning.................................... 84
9.8 Thorough cleaning ................................................................................... 85
9.9 Temporary decommissioning .................................................................. 86
9.10 Restarting ................................................................................................ 86

Operation 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 106.2 /BA/Standar d/09_Betri eb/Sic herheit_beim_Betrieb/Sic herheit_bei m_Betrieb_D ek @ 7\mod_1381387182233_18.doc x @ 435720 @ 2 @ 1
9.1 Safety during operation

Operating a centrifuge can involve risks when the operator does not operate the
centrifuge correctly in accordance with its intended use.
The plant operator is responsible for ensuring that necessary checks are done
carefully and suitable personnel are deployed.
 Follow the operating instructions.
 Operate centrifuges only when no defects are present which could endanger
safe operation.
 Operate the centrifuge only for the intended purpose and in accordance with the
agreed process conditions.
 Operate the centrifuge only at the bowl speed specified on the nameplate and in
the datasheet.
 Use only qualified personnel, see chapter "Safety precautions / Qualification of
the personnel".
 Wear ear protection.
Fig. 33
In case of frequency converter opera-

tion:
limitation.
Fig. 34

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Operation
 Some plant components can get very

hot.
- In normal operating conditions, this
applies, for example, to the bearing
housing.
- In hot operating conditions, this par-
ticularly applies to parts coming in
contact with product (e.g. pipes and
hoses, catchers).
If the hot surfaces are readily accessible,
warning signs must be attached for the
protection of personnel.
Fig. 35
 Shut down the centrifuge immediately

when unusual noises, vibrations or
overheating occur.
 Evacuate the room.
Fig. 36
 The bowl is not allowed to run without

liquid supply for more than 30 minutes,
as otherwise it would result in over-
heating of the bowl material.
Fig. 37

Operation 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 106.4 /BA/Standar d/09_Betri eb/Fremdsteuer ung/xxx- xx- x0 Fremd-Steuer ung en_D ek @ 9\mod_1389620611922_18.doc x @ 618574 @ 2 @ 1
9.2 What must be kept in mind when using third-party controls?

The decanter is normally operated with controls from Westfalia Separator. These
control systems ensure safe operation and protect the decanter from damage due
to overload.
This instruction manual assumes in the sections “Machine description” and “Opera-
tion” that the decanter control has been delivered by GEA Westfalia Separator.
If the decanter control has not been delivered by GEA Westfalia Separator, a num-
ber of requirements must be met by the control system to guarantee at least an
adequate standard of safety.
The following list is not complete since the complete working process including all
relevant parameters and limits must be taken into account to ensure safe and op-
timum operation of the decanter.
DANGER Danger to life through parts breaking at high speed
If the decanter is operated at an inadmissibly high speed, machine parts can break
and pose a high safety risk.
 Shut down the decanter immediately when the max. admissible rated bowl
speed is exceeded by more than 5 %.
- The max. admissible bowl speed is specified on the decanter nameplate or
the technical datasheet.
Pos : 106.5 /BA/Standar d/09_Betri eb/Sofortmaßnahmen_bei_Stromausfall/Sofortmaßnahmen bei Str omausfall_D ek @ 1\mod_1343907997766_18.doc x @ 181130 @ 2 @ 1
9.3 Immediate action in case of power outage

If the voltage is interrupted for more than one second during operation, “Emergen-
cy Stop” is activated:
The main motor and auxiliary units are switched off directly.
If the installation is not shut down automatically by the control, the operator must
do the following:
 Close valve at product feed.
 Open the discharge to the sewer and all other discharge valves.
 Drain ejection systems completely if fitted.
 Secure the plant against unintended restarting with locking devices.

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Operation
Pos : 108 /BA/8000_D ek/09_Betrieb/D ekanter_einschalten/xCF xxx D ekanter einschalten @ 1\mod_1350050217509_18.doc x @ 186931 @ 2 @ 1
9.4 Switching on the decanter

 Switch on main switch of main control. Push the button "Decanter Start".
 Switch on auxiliary equipment, e.g.
- metering pump for flocculent,
- conveying equipment for liquid and solids (screw conveyors, conveyor belts
etc.)
The auxiliary equipment must be electrically interlocked with the decanter so that
these units are running when the decanter starts. The product feed must be cut off
when one of these units fails.
 Wait for the starting time to elapse.
Make sure that the speed stated on the nameplate is reached within the specified
start-up time and maintained during operation.
DANGER Overspeed poses a high safety risk
 Shut down the decanter immediately when the max. admissible rated bowl
speed is exceeded by more than 5 %.
- The max. admissible bowl speed is specified on the decanter nameplate or
the technical datasheet.
 Set control settings on the decanter monitoring unit
- Basic differential speed
- Control gradient
- Control begin
 Open the product feed and adjust the desired throughput capacity.

Operation 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 111 /BA/8000_D ek/09_Betrieb/Betri eb/xCF xxx Betrieb @ 0\mod_1326883729724_18.doc x @ 13412 @ 2 @ 1
9.5 Operation
The machine is monitored to a large extent by the decanter control unit.
The only parameter that can be changed during normal operation is the control
begin.
 In the case off poor clarification results: Adjust the control begin downwards.
 In the case of poor solids drying results: Adjust the control begin upwards.
When faults occur (power failure, gear overload etc.), the product feed must be au-
tomatically cut off and the flush water line opened.
Operations to be carried out regularly:
 Keep to the “Lubrication and maintenance schedule”. The “Lubrication and
maintenance schedule”, though a separate document, is part of the machine
documentation.
 Repairing the scroll: If the wear is extensive, the scroll must be reconditioned or
replaced. excessive wear to the scroll is indicated by, for example:
- frequent speed increases of the secondary drive
- increased residual moisture in the discharged solids
 Check for wear. If the erosive effect of the product is unknown, we recommend
checking for wear every 500 operating hours. Concentrate especially on:
- Conveyor screw
- Components in the solids discharge
- Catch chamber.
 Inspection: We recommend having your decanter inspected by our specialists at
regular intervals. These services help
- to maintain the operating reliability and safety of your decanter and
- undesirable production stoppages are avoided.
IMPORTANT! A deterioration in the processing efficiency of the decanter can also
be caused by changes in the product.

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Operation
Pos : 113 /BA/8000_D ek/09_Betrieb/Betri eb_mit_Sc hwi ngungs über wachung/Betrieb_mit_Sc hwing ungs über wac hung _11_14 @ 3\mod_1375878718597_18.doc x @ 280447 @ 2 @ 1
9.6 Operation with a vibration monitoring system

On special request, the decanter can be equipped with a vibration monitoring sys-
tem.
This system determines the effective vibration velocity (RMS as per ISO 2372)
thereby ensuring objective monitoring of the vibration behaviour of the decanter.
The table below shows the evaluation of the determined vibration characteristics.
Effective vibration
Evaluation as per ISO 2372
velocity (RMS)
0 – 4.5 mm/s Good
4.5 – 11 mm/s Admissible
11 – 14 mm/s Still admissible, but should only be tolerated for
max. 250 operating hours.
Long-term operation with high vibration levels results in
severe damage and therefore poses a safety risk.
above 14 mm/s Inadmissible
The following threshold values must be set on the vibration monitoring unit:
• Limit value 1 (preliminary alarm): 11 mm/s
• Limit value 2 (feed "closed", drive "off"): 14 mm/s

Operation 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 115 /BA/8000_D ek/09_Betrieb/D ekanter_aussc hal ten/D ekanter _aussc halten_und_einfac he_R ei nigung @ 26\mod_1444219710952_18.doc x @ 1019820 @ 2 @ 1
9.7 Switching off the decanter and ordinary cleaning

For shutting down with ordinary cleaning, proceed as follows:
 Close the product feed line and switch off the metering pump for flocculant (if in-
stalled).
 Make provision for a suitable flush liquid at the feed line.
- If product and flush liquid are not allowed to come into contact, actuate the
flow diverting devices.
 Switch off the decanter. The flushing program starts.
Fig. 38
t1 The drive is switched off. The speed drops off.

The flush liquid supply is opened.
t2 The flush liquid supply is closed.
t3 The lower flushing speed is reached. Pause S1 begins.
t4 The decanter runs up again.
t5 The upper flushing speed is reached. The flush liquid supply is opened.
Bowl drive with FC: Bowl drive without FC:
The speed remains at this bowl speed to improve the The speed drops off.
cleaning effect.  Increase the speed n3 and the throughput ca-
 The quantity of liquid fed during S2, must corre- pacity of the flush liquid so that a minimum of
spond to a minimum of one bowl filling. one bowl filling is fed up to t7.
t7 The flush liquid supply is closed.
t8 Bowl drive with FC: Bowl drive without FC:
The speed remains at this bowl speed to improve the Pause S4 begins.
cleaning effect.
t10 The cycle S5 ends. The cycle S5 can be repeated several times depending on the product.
N1 Only on bowl drive with FC: Lower flushing speed
N2 Speed at which the flush liquid supply is closed.
N3 Only on bowl drive with FC: Upper flushing speed
N4 Operating speed

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Operation
Pos : 117 /BA/8000_D ek/09_Betrieb/R einigung/xCD/C E 20x- Gr ündliche R einig ung @ 4\mod_1378127976577_18.doc x @ 310704 @ 2 @ 1
inigung
9.8 Thorough cleaning
WARNING Shearing off fingers
Danger of injury when cleaning the solid discharge ports of the bowl through possi-
ble rotational movement of the scroll.
 Remove the scroll before cleaning the bowl.
 Only reach through the solids discharge ports in the bowl when the scroll has
been removed.
Thorough cleaning should be carried out to avoid infection as well as prior to long-
term shut-downs.
 Clean the upper and lower parts of the catcher.
 Remove the scroll, see chapter “Servicing / Removing the scroll”).
 Thoroughly clean the bowl and scroll with brushes using water or a suitable
caustic solution.
NOTICE Risk of corrosion
If cleaning liquid penetrates into the area of the drive shaft of the gear (toothing),
corrosion will occur, resulting in rough running with high vibrations. The bowl would
then have to be rebalanced.
When using a high-pressure cleaner:
 Remove the bowl and clean separately.
 Seal tapholes at the cylindrical end of the bowl with screws. This is necessary as
otherwise the balancing weights will be flushed out through the holes.

Operation 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 120.1 /BA/8000_D ek/09_Betrieb/Vorübergehende_Außer betriebnahme/Vorübergehende_Außer betriebnahme_Dek_CF @ 0\mod_1326880048555_18.doc x @ 13378 @ 2 @ 1
9.9 Temporary decommissioning

The decanter will get damaged if it is not operated for a prolonged period and in-
adequate preserving measures are taken.
When the machine is shut down for longer than 14 days, special measures are re-
quired to prevent the machine from getting damaged during standstill.
If this action is not taken, the roller bearings of the machine in particular will be
damaged by corrosion and one-sided load. This bearing damage results in high
consequential costs.
GEA Westfalia Separator urgently recommends accelerating the decanter to oper-
ating speed for 30 minutes every 14 days. Note:
 Chapter "Commissioning / commissioning check list".
 If the decanter is operated for maximum 30 minutes, the addition of water or
other flushing media is not required.
 Only in case of grease-lubricated bowl bearings Re-lubricating the bowl bear-
ings:
- If the decanter is equipped with the optional “automatic grease lubrication”, re-
lubrication is carried out automatically.
If the decanter is shut down for a very long period, refer to the chapter “Decommis-
sioning / notes on long-term storage”.
Pos : 120.2 /BA/8000_D ek/09_Betrieb/Wiederi nbetri ebnahme/Wiederinbetri ebnahme_Dek_CD ( ohne Trans portsicherung) @ 9\mod_1389689689356_18.doc x @ 618758 @ 2 @ 1
9.10 Restarting
Whenever machine parts have been dismantled during maintenance or repair
work, special care must be taken when re-starting the machine.
Skilled personnel must ensure the following:
• All parts are fitted correctly.
• The bowl lock screws (if fitted) have been removed and replaced by short
screws.
• Sparking due to grinding of components is excluded.
• To check this, the bowl is rotated several times by hand. When even the slight-
est grinding noises occur, the cause must be investigated and eliminated.
Pos : 122.1 /BA/Standar d/00_Ü bersc hriften/Kapitel /10_Störungen_beheben @ 0\mod_1328017027167_18.doc x @ 14645 @ 2 @ 1

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Trouble shooting
10 Trouble shooting
10.1 Safety when eliminating operating malfunctions ..................................... 88

10.2 Operating malfunctions ............................................................................ 89

Trouble shooting 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 122.2 /BA/Standar d/10_Stör ungen_beheben/Sic herheit bei m Beheben von Betriebsstörungen/Sicherheit_bei m_Beheben_von_Betriebsstör ungen_Sep_D ek @ 8\mod_1385454981438_18.doc x @ 473730 @ 2 @ 1
10.1 Safety when eliminating operating malfunctions

Faults during troubleshooting can endanger the operating safety of the decanter.
This can lead to accidents with damage to persons and property.
 When troubleshooting, pay attention to and comply with the instructions in the
chapter "Servicing / Safety during servicing".
 Determine the source of the fault and inform the responsible departments in the
company if necessary. Carry out troubleshooting and fault elimination with care.
 When safety devices on the centrifuge/installation respond, stop operating the
centrifuge/installation until the cause has been identified and remedied.
 Ensure that persons are not put at risk through the troubleshooting.
 Observe the local standard operating procedures (SOPs) at the workplace and
wear the specified protective gear.
 Cordon off the working area and hang up a warning sign.
 Remove unauthorized persons from the cordoned-off working area.
 Before troubleshooting, all rotating parts of the centrifuge (drive, bowl) must be
at a standstill.
 Prior to troubleshooting, switch off the main switches and secure against re-
activation.
 Set down dismantled centrifuge parts only on level, anti-slip surfaces, e.g. rub-
ber mat or wooden pallet.
 Secure dismantled centrifuge parts by suitable means to prevent them from
overturning or rolling away, e.g. with wooden wedges or square timbers.
 Never weld the bowl, hood or solids catcher.
 Do not machine the bowl, hood and solid catcher.
 Do not climb onto or sit on the centrifuge or parts of the centrifuge.
 Before re-starting, ensure that there is no unbalance due to fouling. Open and
clean the bowl prior to start-up.
 Bowls may be balanced only by authorized specialists and authorized work-
shops.
 After carrying out maintenance and repair work on centrifuges, reattach all pro-
tective devices and check the safety devices.

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Trouble shooting
Pos : 124 /BA/8000_D ek/10_Störungen_beheben/xCC 45x/xC D 30x Betriebss tör ung en @ 4\mod_1377243591672_18.doc x @ 291868 @ @ 1
10.2 Operating malfunctions
Fault Possible cause Measure Operator

Gap constriction due to deposits  Clean gaps. Skilled
between bowl and catcher  Only in the case of a one-
piece catcher: Align the
ring halves of plastic in the
Start-up problems frame or replace them.
Speed indicator faulty  Check speed sensor Skilled
Bowl bearings overpacked with  Remove surplus grease Skilled
grease
Insufficient lubricant  Check lubrication system Skilled
Onsetting bearing damage  Replace roller bearings Tspec
Bowl bearings overpacked with  Re-fill only the quantity of Skilled
Bearing temperature grease lubricant specified in the
too high maintenance schedule.
Excessive lubrication will
bring about an unnecessary
increase in bearing tempera-
ture.
One-sided product deposits  Carry out flushing program. Skilled
 Check scroll and clean if
necessary.
Bearing damage  Replace roller bearings Tspec
Vibrations too high
Loose fits  Contact GEA Westfalia Tspec
Separator
Product deposits that are grind-  Open hood Skilled
ing against rotating parts  Check housing for deposits
Pos : 125 /PRU/Standard/01_Sic her hei tshi nwei se/Legende_Ausführ ender @ 0\mod_1335966770171_18.doc x @ 107068 @ @ 1
Op = Operator / Skilled = Skilled worker / Tspec = Trained specialist

Pos : 127.1 /BA/Standar d/00_Ü bersc hriften/Kapitel /11_Wartung @ 0\mod_1328017202161_18.doc x @ 14679 @ 1 @ 1

Trouble shooting 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
11.1 Safety aspects during maintenance ........................................................ 92

11.2 Regular checks ........................................................................................ 93
11.2.1 Recurring checks on load suspension devices ....................................... 93
11.3 Instructions on handling roller bearings ................................................... 94
11.4 Maintenance schedule ............................................................................. 95
11.5 Scroll ........................................................................................................ 95
11.5.1 Admissible wear to scroll ......................................................................... 95
11.6 Bowl ......................................................................................................... 96
11.7 Bowl bearings .......................................................................................... 97
11.7.1 Option: Adjusting the automatic grease lubrication ................................. 97
11.7.2 Re-lubricating the bowl bearings ............................................................. 97
11.7.3 Filling the grease gun .............................................................................. 98
11.8 Re-tensioning drive belts ......................................................................... 99
11.9 Re-lubricate the gearbox ....................................................................... 101
11.10 Motor bearings ....................................................................................... 102

Maintenance 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 127.2 /BA/Standar d/11_War tung/Sic herheit_Wartung/Sicher heit_War tung_D ek @ 7\mod_1381394962110_18.doc x @ 435940 @ 2 @ 1
11.1 Safety aspects during maintenance

Before all maintenance and servicing:
 Observe the safety precautions in chapter 2.
 Perform a controlled shut-down of the decanter via “decanter off”.
 Isolate all electrically supplied equip-

ment from the power supply using the
main switch.
 Secure the plant against unintended
restarting with locking devices.
Fig. 39
 Wait until the bowl has come to a

standstill.
- Wait for the run-down time of the
decanter bowl to elapse, approx. 15
minutes.
 Do not loosen any part of the machine
before the decanter bowl has come to
a standstill.
Fig. 40
 Do not start maintenance work until all

machine parts have adequately cooled
down.
- The cooling down time depends on
the product processed and the ma-
chine size.
- Check the surface temperature be-
fore starting work.
Fig. 41

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Maintenance
Pos : 127.4 /BA/Standar d/11_War tung/Wieder kehrende_Pr üfungen/Wi eder kehr ende_Prüfungen_Sep_Dek @ 5\mod_1378995628413_18.doc x @ 350390 @ 2 @ 1
11.2 Regular checks

The centrifuge must be checked regularly to ensure operating safety.
The inspection intervals depend on the field of application and the level of stress
and are documented in the instruction manual, see chapter "Maintenance / mainte-
nance Schedule".
In addition, the centrifuge and its supervisory equipment must be checked on the
following occasions:
• before initial start-up
• before start-up after a prolonged standstill
The following points should be particularly kept in mind.

• The scope and result of each check must be documented.
• Have the centrifuge assessed at least once a year by a qualified person.
• Have the centrifuge assessed in a dismantled state at least every three years by
a qualified person.
• When processing corrosive or erosive products, implement shorter inspection in-
tervals.
• Following unusual events which may have a negative impact on safety, have the
centrifuge checked immediately. Unusual events are:
- Modifications to the centrifuge
- Accidents
- Natural events, e,g, earth quakes, sand storm, flooding
Pos : 127.5 /BA/Standar d/11_War tung/Wieder kehrende_Pr üfungen/Wi eder kehr ende_Prüfungen_Lastaufnahmemittel @ 16\mod_1414744990473_18.doc x @ 858841 @ 3 @ 1
11.2.1 Recurring checks on load suspension devices

Load suspension devices must be checked at regular intervals. The recurring
check would be limited to a visual check after cleaning.
IMPORTANT: Cleaning agents may not attack the base material or conceal cracks
or surface damage.
Pay special attention to the following points:
• Visible deformation of parts, e.g. chain links, threads, carrier bolts, eye bolts etc.
• Cuts, notches, cracks, upsetting deformation of contact surfaces.
• Wear in contact areas.
• Jamming of elements that normally move together.
• Excessive corrosion or discolouration through heat.
• Missing or illegible markings.
Every check or test must be documented and the document must be archived.
NOTE: Damaged or incomplete load suspension devices included in the set of
tools must be sent to GEA Westfalia Separator for checking and repair.

Maintenance 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 127.7 /BA/8000_D ek/11_Wartung/Hinweis e_zum_U mgang_mit_Wälzl agern/Hinweise_z um_U mg ang _mit_Wälzlag ern_Dek @ 0\mod_1327397099135_18.doc x @ 13678 @ 244 @ 1
11.3 Instructions on handling roller bearings

Roller bearings must be kept in their original packing; the packing may only be
opened at the workplace and directly prior to fitting. Otherwise there is a risk that
the bearings will become soiled and rust.
Cleanness during assembly
• Roller bearings must under all circumstances be protected from dirt and mois-
ture as even the finest particles which enter the bearing will damage the bearing
surfaces.
• The assembly site must therefore be free from dust and dry. It may not, for ex-
ample, be in the vicinity of grinding machines. The use of compressed air must
be avoided.
• Also pay attention to the cleanness of the shaft and the housing as well as all
other parts.
Premature wear to bearings
If a roller bearing fails prematurely, this can have the following reasons:
• Local damage to the races; e.g., score marks, scratches or dents. Such damage
occurs, for example, when the outer ring of a cylindrical roller bearing is mount-
ed twisted with the roll barrels over the inner ring or when the pressing force is
guided via the roll barrels.
• Insufficient lubricant
• Incorrect lubricant
• Lubricant change intervals too long
Damage becomes evident in the short-term by an increased running noise level. In
the long-term it results in premature fatigue of the bearing surfaces.

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Maintenance
Pos : 129.1 /___Li nie_Satzs pi egel___ @ 0\mod_1342187982593_0.doc x @ 174868 @ @ 1
Pos : 129.2 /BA/Standar d/00_Ü bersc hriften/Unter kapitel _Ü 2_li nks/Ü 2_links _Wartungspl an @ 1\mod_1350312975735_18.doc x @ 187441 @ @ 1
11.4 Maintenance schedule

Pos : 129.3 /BA/8000_D ek/11_Wartung/War tungspl an/Ver weis auf auftr agsbez ogenes Exemplar @ 1\mod_1354718518092_18.doc x @ 196963 @ @ 1
Refer to the order-specific "Lubrication and maintenance schedule" in the machine

documentation.
Pos : 129.4 /___Li nie_Satzs pi egel___ @ 0\mod_1342187982593_0.doc x @ 174868 @ @ 1
Pos : 130 /BA/8000_D ek/11_Wartung/Schnec ke/xC x xxx- xx- xx Sc hnec ke @ 9\mod_1389693039134_18.doc x @ 618860 @ 2 @ 1
11.5 Scroll
The scroll must be checked for wear at regular intervals.
In case of extensive wear to the scroll flights, the operating efficiency of the de-
canter is impaired. This can have the following impact:
• Only in the case of automatically adjustable differential speed: The differential
speed is constantly increased.
• The discharged solids has a higher residual moisture.
• The vibration values of the decanter are increased.
Pos : 131 /BA/8000_D ek/11_Wartung/Z uläs siger_Schnec kenversc hleiß /Zul ässiger _Sc hnec kenverschl eiß _Dek (o. Inspektionsbohnung) @ 4\mod_1377246296347_18.doc x @ 291902 @ 2 @ 1
11.5.1 Admissible wear to scroll
Fig. 42
As a rule, 2 – 3 flights in the product inlet zone are particularly prone to wear (»X«).
As much wear as possible must be allowed for this small area (»Y«).
The wear to the distributors should also be observed.

Maintenance 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 133 /BA/8000_D ek/11_Wartung/Trommel/xC x xxx- xx- xx Trommel @ 0\mod_1328004603347_18.doc x @ 14258 @ 2 @ 1
11.6 Bowl
Check the bowl for signs of wear at regular intervals. The inspection intervals are
given in the "Lubrication and maintenance schedule". Pay special attention to the
following:
• The longitudinal grooves or ribs must be visible in the conical area on the inside.
• Mechanical damage, e.g.:
- grinding marks in the area near the catchers
- cavitation in the area of the solids discharge ports
• Wearing bushes in the solids discharge ports
Replace damaged or worn parts immediately or inform GEA Westfalia Separator.

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Maintenance
Pos : 135 /BA/8000_D ek/11_Wartung/Trommellag er/xCD xx- /CF 46 xx-35 Tr ommell ager @ 4\mod_1377248144081_18.doc x @ 292046 @ 3 @ 1
11.7 Bowl bearings

Pay attention to the following during maintenance work:
• Keep to the “Lubrication and maintenance schedule”. The “Lubrication and
maintenance schedule” is part of the machine documentation.
• Used grease discharges downwards out of the bowl bearings. The grease is col-
lected in catch chambers. Clean the catch chambers regularly (when servicing
the bearings at the latest).
• Roller bearings with special tolerances are required for all bearing points. Use
only those roller bearings specified in the parts list.
Pos : 136 /BA/8000_D ek/11_Wartung/Trommellag er_nac hsc hmier en/xCF 34/40 Opti on_Automatisc he_F etts chmi erung @ 0\mod_1329295918514_18.doc x @ 16554 @ 2 @ 1
11.7.1 Option: Adjusting the automatic grease lubrication

 Refer to the separate manual of the automatic grease lubrication.
Pos : 137 /BA/8000_D ek/11_Wartung/Trommellag er_nac hsc hmier en/xCF 34/46 Trommellager _nac hsc hmier en @ 0\mod_1329213686752_18.doc x @ 16134 @ 3 @ 1
11.7.2 Re-lubricating the bowl bearings

When relubricating, keep in mind the following:
• Check that the grease gun is fully functional. To do this, press the lever and vent
valve simultaneously. Grease must discharge through the vent valve.
• Carefully clean the grease nipple to stop impurities from entering the bearings.
• Re-lubricate only during operation when the bearings have reached working
temperature (with mounted protective hoods).
IMPORTANT! Use only the lubricant quantity specified in the ”Lubrication and
maintenance schedule”. Excessive lubrication will bring about an unnecessary in-
crease in bearing temperature.
• Replace the grease cartridge in the grease gun in good time.
• After a long-term shut-down of the decanter and after re-lubrication the bearing
temperatures can rise to 110 ºC; however, the temperature returns to normal af-
ter max. 4 – 5 hours.
• Spent and surplus grease is discharged by grease regulators; it discharges
downwards out of the bowl bearings. The grease is collected in grease cham-
bers. The grease catch chambers must be cleaned regularly.

Maintenance 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 139 /BA/Standar d/11_Wartung/Handhebel pres se nac hfüll en/Handhebel press e nachfüll en @ 3\mod_1375781413834_18.doc x @ 278620 @ 2 @ 1
11.7.3 Filling the grease gun
Main components of the grease gun
Clamping piece (1)

Piston rod (2)
Vessel (3)
Hand lever (4)
Follow-up piston (5)
Seal (6)
Clamping disk (7)
Gasket 8,
High-pressure part (9)
Hose with mouth piece (10)
Dimensions of the grease cartridge

Length without cover: 235.0 mm
Outer diameter: 53.5 mm
Inner diameter: 51.0 mm
Inserting a new grease cartridge:

 Unscrew vessel (3).
 Apply a thick coat of grease to the seal
(6) so that it slides easily into the
grease cartridge.
Fig. 43
 Pull out piston rod (2) forcefully against

the spring tension.
- Seal (6) must be pulled into the nar-
row end of vessel (3). Only then will
the seal later slide into the grease
cartridge.
- Clamping lever (1) locks the piston
rod when it is let go.
 Take the cover off the grease car-
tridge.
 Read the instructions on the grease
cartridge and insert the grease car-
tridge into the container.
Fig. 44
 Clean gasket (8) on the high-pressure part.

 Screw on the container (hand-tight).
 Hold piston rod (2) by its handle. Press clamping lever (1) with your other hand
while letting go of the piston rod.
- When seated correctly, the spring resistance will push the seal (6) into the
grease cartridge.
- If the seal does not slide into the grease cartridge, pull out piston rod (2) fur-
ther.
 Push the piston rod all the way into the container.

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Maintenance
Pos : 141 /BA/8000_D ek/11_Wartung/Antri ebsriemen_nac hs pannen/xCD /CE/C F Antri ebsri emen_nac hspannen_BG_II @ 4\mod_1378108937328_18.doc x @ 310290 @ 2 @ 1
11.8 Re-tensioning drive belts

The drive belts must be checked regularly for location and condition.
The checking and changing intervals can be found in the lubrication and mainte-
nance schedule.
Signs of inadequate belt tension or worn belts can be:
• increased noise from flapping belts.
• Excessive speed drop under load (bowl or differential speed).
When replacing and tensioning the drive belts, bear in mind the following:
 Always replace the complete set (bowl and scroll drive). This is the only way to
ensure that the belts are identical in length. Identical length is a prerequisite for
even tension and quiet running.
 Use only belts specified in the parts list. This is the only way to ensure that the
belts meet the stringent requirements.
 The belt tension must be checked even if the decanter is supplied as a complete
assembly.
 Check the belt tension after 0.5 - 1 operating hours. Use measuring device
0003-0534-000 for this purpose.
NOTICE Damage to motor and gear shaft
If the drive belts are re-tensioned with a tight coupling, the motor and gear shafts
can get damaged.
 Before tensioning the belts, loosen the rubber elements of the coupling.
The measuring device consists of:

• Indicating arm (1)
• Pressure surface (2)
• Pressure spring (3)
Fig. 45
 Push the display arm of the measuring

device to the end of the scale.
Fig. 46

Maintenance 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
 Place the measuring instrument in the

centre between the two belt pulleys on
one of the belts.
 Slowly press a finger onto the com-
pression surface. This will make the
display arm move into the scale.
 As soon as a clear click is heard or
felt, stop pressing.
 Carefully lift off the device without
moving the display arm.
Fig. 47
 Read off the measured value at the

intersection between the top edge of
the display arm and the scale.
 The specified value for ideally-
tensioned belts is
+50
- for new belts: 600 N
+50
- for run-in belts: 450 N
 Depending on the measuring result,
reduce or increase belt tension until it
is within the desired range.
Fig. 48

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Maintenance
Pos : 145 /BA/8000_D ek/11_Wartung/Getri ebe nachschmi eren/CD 3xx- xx- x0_Getriebe nac hsc hmier en @ 4\mod_1377771029879_18.doc x @ 304915 @ 2 @ 1
11.9 Re-lubricate the gearbox

The gear boxes are packed with grease. The grease quantity, grease quality and
lubrication intervals are specified in the "Lubrication and maintenance schedule".
Proceed as follows:
There is a risk of serious injury due to being pulled into the machine and through
ejection of machine parts or product residues.
 Do not loosen any part of the machine before the bowl has come to a standstill.
Fig. 49
 Unscrew the two screw plugs (B) for venting.

 Push the grease plug through vent holes (B).
 Re-grease through lubricating nipple (A) until fresh grease discharges through
one of the holes (B). Collect the discharging grease.
 Seal hole (B) through which the fresh grease has discharged.
 Continue to fill in grease until grease discharges from the second hole (B).
 Then seal the second hole (B) too.

Maintenance 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
When the gear box is replaced, proceed as follows before putting the decanter into
operation:
 Grease as described above.
 Accelerate the decanter to operating speed briefly and switch it off again.
 Relubricate again when the decanter is at standstill.
 Accelerate the decanter again briefly to operating speed and switch it off again.
 Relubricate again when the decanter is at standstill.
This procedure is necessary to ensure that all hollow spaces are packed with
grease. The decanter is now ready for operation.
Pos : 146 /BA/8000_D ek/11_Wartung/M otorlager/xCF xxx Motorlag er @ 0\mod_1330421437832_18.doc x @ 18762 @ 2 @ 1
11.10 Motor bearings

For lubricating the motor bearings, refer to the instructions of the motor manufac-
turer.
The following applies in the case of motors supplied by GEA Westfalia Separator:
• Deviations from the instruction manual of the motor manufacturer are specified
on a motor rating plate.
• Lubricate preferably when the machine is running.
Pos : 148.1 /BA/Standar d/00_Ü bersc hriften/Kapitel /12_Instands etz ung @ 0\mod_1328003270613_18.doc x @ 14220 @ 1 @ 1

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Repair
12 Repair
12.1 Avoiding damage during maintenance .................................................. 104

12.1.1 Special tools .......................................................................................... 104
12.1.2 Standard tools........................................................................................ 104
12.2 Screw torques ........................................................................................ 105
12.2.1 Screw torques in Newton meters (Nm) ................................................. 105
12.2.2 Screw tightening torques in inch-pound (inlb) ....................................... 106
12.3 Gaskets.................................................................................................. 106
12.3.1 Radial packing rings .............................................................................. 106
12.4 Replacing the shear pin ......................................................................... 107

Repair 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 148.2 /BA/Standar d/12_Instands etzung/Schäden_ver mei den_Instands etzung/Sc häden_ver mei den_Instands etz ung_Sep_D ek @ 5\mod_1379493244658_18.doc x @ 351670 @ 2 @ 1
12.1 Avoiding damage during maintenance

Safety and operating readiness of the centrifuge are conditional on the mainte-
nance being carried out properly.
Improperly executed maintenance can damage centrifuge parts. During operation,
this can lead to accidents with damage to persons and property.
 Centrifuges may only be maintained by persons qualified to perform these tasks,
e.g. service technicians from GEA Westfalia Separator and personnel trained
and authorized (certified) by GEA Westfalia Separator.
 Place dismantled centrifuge parts on a suitable base, e.g. rubber or wood.
 Secure dismantled centrifuge parts by suitable means to prevent them from
overturning or rolling away, e.g. with wooden wedges or square timbers.
 Never weld the bowl, hood or solids catcher.
 Do not machine the bowl, hood and solid catcher.
 Do not climb onto the centrifuge or parts of the centrifuge.
 After carrying out maintenance and repair work on centrifuges, reattach all pro-
tective devices.
Pos : 148.3 /BA/Standar d/12_Instands etzung/Wer kz euge/Spezi al wer kz euge @ 20\mod_1432109150973_18.doc x @ 942412 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.1 Special tools

The scope, type and number of the special tools are specified in the order-specific
parts list. Commercially available tools are not supplied.
Pos : 148.4 /BA/Standar d/12_Instands etzung/Wer kz euge/Standardwer kzeuge @ 20\mod_1432109034940_18.doc x @ 942377 @ 3 @ 1
12.1.2 Standard tools

Commercially available standard tools are not included in the supply schedule.
These include, for example, open-ended wrenches, ring spanners and screwdriv-
ers. These must be provided by the customer.

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Repair
Pos : 148.6 /BA/Standar d/11_War tung/Sc hr auben_Anz ugsmomente/Sc hrauben_Anz ugsmomente_N m @ 20\mod_1432107828850_18.doc x @ 942022 @ 23 @ 1
12.2 Screw torques

The torques apply for the following conditions:
• Metric screws with coarse-pitch threads.
- Hex head screws according to DIN EN ISO 4014
- Allen screws according to DIN EN ISO 4762
• Through holes according to DIN ISO 20273 (medium).
• Greased screws (total minimum coefficient of friction = 0.10).
• Torque wrench with a scatter (tolerance) of ±10 %.
• Material combinations:
- Steel-steel
- Stainless steel-stainless steel.
IMPORTANT: Screws whose torque deviates from this table are marked with the
required torque in the manual.
12.2.1 Screw torques in Newton meters (Nm)
Super
A2-70 A2-80 Hastelloy
Strength class 8.8 10.9 12.9 Duplex
A4-70 A4-80 2.4819
1.4501
Yield stress/yield strength 640 450
940 1100 600 550 360
in N/mm² 660 250
Parameter Torque in Nm
M4 2.6 3.9 4.5 1.9 2.5 1.9 1.5
M5 5.2 7.6 8.9 3.6 4.8 3.6 2.9
M6 9.0 13.2 15.4 6.3 8.4 6.3 5.0
M8 21.6 31.8 37.2 15.2 20.2 15.2 12.1
M 10 43.0 63.0 73.0 30.0 40.0 30.0 24.0
M 12 73.0 108.0 126.0 52.0 69.0 52.0 42.0
M 14 117.0 172.0 201.0 82.0 109.0 82.0 65.0
M 16 180.0 264.0 309.0 126.0 168.0 126.0 100.0
M 18 259.0 369.0 432.0 177.0
M 20 363.0 517.0 605.0 248.0
M 22 495.0 704.0 824.0 187.0
M 24 625.0 890.0 1041.0 237.0
M 30 1246.0 1795.0 2077.0 472.0
M 36 2164.0 3082.0 3607.0
Screws made of Super Duplex 1.4501 are treated like A4-70 screws while neglect-
ing the higher yield stress.
In the case of screws larger than M 16, an individual drop in strength due to the
degree of deformation of the screw raw material and the thread rolling procedure
must be taken into account.

Repair 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 148.8 /BA/Standar d/11_War tung/Sc hr auben_Anz ugsmomente/Sc hrauben_Anz ugsmomente_inc h_pound @ 0\mod_1327403383227_18.doc x @ 13756 @ 34 @ 1
12.2.2 Screw tightening torques in inch-pound (inlb)

The following formula is used to convert the torques (Ma) from “Nm“ to “inlb“:
Mainlb = MaNm x 8.85
Example:
Mainlb = Wanted (screw tightening torques in “inch-pound”)

MaNm = 50 (screw tightening torques in “Newtonmeter“)
Mainlb = 50 Nm x 8.85
Mainlb = 442.5 inlb
Pos : 150 /BA/8000_D ek/12_Ins tandsetzung/Dic htelemente/xCF xxx Dic htelemente @ 0\mod_1330419862597_18.doc x @ 18684 @ 2 @ 1
12.3 Gaskets
During all maintenance on the decanter:
 Use only gaskets that are in perfect condition!
 Replace worn or damaged gaskets immediately.
 Use only those sealing elements specified in the order-specific parts list.
 Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator.
Pos : 151 /BA/8000_D ek/12_Ins tandsetzung/R adi al-Wellendichtri nge/xCF xxx Radi al-Wellendic htring e @ 0\mod_1330420767357_18.doc x @ 18728 @ 3 @ 1
12.3.1 Radial packing rings

When fitting radial packing rings, pay attention to the following:
 Unsuitable radial packing rings cause damage to bearings.
 The radial packing rings for the scroll bearing assembly must be glued in.
- Remove the grease from the seat for the radial packing ring using a suitable
fluid.
- Apply Loctite adhesive type 245 to the entire circumference of the shaft seal-
ing ring.
 Do not use prohibited lubricants such as mounting paste or grease. These lubri-
cants result in the formation of oil carbon which damages the radial packing
rings within a very short space of time!
 Apply a thin coat of lubricant only to

the bearing surfaces (1) prior to as-
sembly.
 Use the lubricant sparingly.
 Be sure to use the same lubricant that
is used for roller bearing lubrication.
 Do not apply lubricant to the sealing
lips of the radial packing rings.
Fig. 50

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Repair
Pos : 153 /BA/Beginn_Option @ 1\mod_1344000760586_18.doc x @ 181441 @ @ 1
Begin option
Pos : 154 /BA/8000_D ek/12_Ins tandsetzung/(Haupt)Motor _aus bauen/Sc herbolzen austauschen/xC E 20x- xx- xx_Sc her bolz en aus tausc hen @ 4\mod_1378125087404_18.doc x @ 310670 @ 2 @ 1
12.4 Replacing the shear pin

The shear pin protects the decanter gear against damage due to inadmissible
overload.
If an inadmissibly high torque occurs during solids conveyance, e.g. due to block-
age of the scroll, the shear pin breaks and the differential speed and toque drop to
zero.
A broken shear pin can be recognised from the outside as follows:
• The lubricating nipple (1) protrudes around 41 mm from the hub.
- When the shear pin is intact, is only 27 mm.
• The lubricating nipple can be moved axially against the pressure spring (8).
Fig. 51
There is a risk of serious injury due to being pulled into the machine and through
ejection of machine parts or product residues.
 Do not loosen any part of the machine before the bowl has come to a standstill.
 Hinge up the protective hood.

 Dismantle the holder with proximity switch.
 Undo screws M8x70. Force off and remove bush (3).
 Unscrew screws M6x16. Remove disc (4) and driver (5).
 Remove the remaining fragments of shear pin (6) from bolt (1).

Repair 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
 Check seat and condition of gasket (7) and replace if necessary.
NOTICE Damage to the gear
Deviating shear pins will destroy the gear.

 Use only those shear pins specified in the parts list.
 Fit a new shear pin (6); to do this, the pressure spring (8) must be tensioned.
 For further assembly, proceed in reverse order from removal.
Pos : 155 /BA/Ende_Opti on @ 1\mod_1344260287765_18.doc x @ 181490 @ @ 1
End option
Pos : 157.1 /BA/Standar d/00_Ü bersc hriften/Kapitel /13_Außer betriebnahme @ 0\mod_1328016515064_18.doc x @ 14509 @ 1 @ 1

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Decommissioning
13 Decommissioning
13.1 Notes on long-time storage of the decanter and individual rotors ......... 110
13.2 Decommissioning the decanter ............................................................. 110
13.2.1 Painted parts.......................................................................................... 110
13.2.2 Unpainted areas and galvanised parts .................................................. 111
13.2.3 Gearbox / spare gearbox ....................................................................... 111
13.2.4 Drive motors .......................................................................................... 111
13.3 Maintenance schedule (machine shut-down for a prolonged period) ... 112
13.3.1 Maintenance work once a month........................................................... 113
13.3.2 Maintenance work once a year.............................................................. 113
13.3.3 Maintenance work before resuming operation ...................................... 114
13.4 Disposing of the centrifuge .................................................................... 115
13.4.1 Disposing of utilities ............................................................................... 115
13.4.2 Disposing of cleaning fluids ................................................................... 116

Decommissioning 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 157.2 /BA/Standar d/13_Auß erbetriebnahme/Hinweis e_zur _Langz eitl agerung/Hinweis e_z ur _Langz eitl agerung_Sep_Dek @ 0\mod_1331640855871_18.doc x @ 20088 @ 2 @ 1
13.1 Notes on long-time storage of the decanter and individual rotors

The decanter/rotor will get damaged if it is not operated for a prolonged period and
inadequate preserving measures are taken. This also applies for the time before
commissioning.
When the machine is shut down for longer than 12 months, special measures are
required to avoid the machine getting damaged during standstill.
If this action is not taken, the roller bearings of the machine in particular will be
damaged by corrosion and one-sided load. This bearing damage results in high
consequential costs.
The required preserving measures should be monitored by GEA Westfalia Separa-
tor Service.
Pos : 157.3 /BA/8000_D ek/13_Auß erbetri ebnahme/D ekanter _auß erbetriebs etz en/.CD/C E 20x/30x Dekanter_außer betriebsetzen (F ettschmi erung) @ 4\mod_1377598053399_18.doc x @ 292620 @ 2 @ 1
13.2 Decommissioning the decanter

For a long-term storage (standstill longer than one year), the decanter must be
prepared as follows after shut-down:
 Clean hood and catcher.
 Dismantle all feed and discharge lines of the machine and seal the openings.
- Product feed
- Solids discharge
- Liquid discharge
- Flocculent feed
 Before slackening the drive belts, sup-

port the drive motor so that no tensile
force acts on the vibration absorb-
ers (A).
- To do this, support strip (5) with
wedges (B).
Fig. 52
 Slacken and remove the flat belts.

the gear".
ings etc.).
 Pack the bowl bearings with grease.
Pos : 157.4 /BA/Standar d/13_Auß erbetriebnahme/Lac ki erte_T eile/Lac ki erte_T eile_D ek @ 0\mod_1331726306365_18.doc x @ 20194 @ 2 @ 1
13.2.1 Painted parts

An intact paint coating provides adequate corrosion protection. For this reason,
painted parts must be examined for damage or changes once a month.
Touch up the damage in accordance with the instructions of the paint manufactur-
er.
Pos : 157.5 /BA/8000_D ek/13_Auß erbetri ebnahme/Nic ht_lac ki erte_Bereic he_und_verzi nkte_Teil e/xCD/C E 20/30x Nicht_l ac kier te_Bereic he_und_verzinkte_T eile @ 4\mod_1377598623259_18.doc x @ 292654 @ 2 @ 1

13.2.2 Unpainted areas and galvanised parts

Unpainted areas and galvanised parts must be treated as follows:
 Carefully clean the area or part.
 Check and, when necessary, touch up the corrosion protection once a month.
Pos : 157.6 /BA/8000_D ek/13_Auß erbetri ebnahme/Getriebe_Ers atzg etriebe/.CD/C E 20/30x Getriebe_Ersatzgetri ebe (F ettschmi erung) @ 4\mod_1377598829274_18.doc x @ 292688 @ 3 @ 1
13.2.3 Gearbox / spare gearbox

age.
the gear".
ings etc.).
 Carefully clean the gearboxes. Spray on corrosion protection wax (WS Part-No.
6969-0022-010) Check and, when necessary, touch up the corrosion protection
once a month.
Pos : 157.7 /BA/Standar d/13_Auß erbetriebnahme/Antri ebsmotoren/Antriebs motor en_Sep_Dek @ 9\mod_1387456044159_18.doc x @ 615184 @ 3 @ 1
13.2.4 Drive motors

The drive motors must be prepared as follows for long-term storage.
• Option: Connect the space heaters for the motor winding. This is especially im-
portant in the case of high air humidity in the environment.
• Carefully clean the motor.
• Spray on anti-corrosive wax (see spare parts catalog).
• Check and, when necessary, touch up the corrosion protection once a month.
Pos : 158 /---Neue linke Seite--- @ 0\mod_1319807883675_0.doc x @ 9280 @ @ 1

Pos : 159 /BA/8000_D ek/13_Auß er betri ebnahme/Wartungspl an_l angfristig _auß erbetrieb_g esetzt/.CD/C E 20x Wartungspl an (Masc hine l angfristig außer Betrieb gesetzt) @ 4\mod_1378124942810_18.doc x @ 310635 @ @ 1
13.3 Maintenance schedule (machine shut-down for a prolonged period)
Fig. 53

IMPORTANT: Machines decommissioned for longer than one year require regular
maintenance to remain serviceable.
13.3.1 Maintenance work once a month

Machine compo-
Pos: Action Operator
nent
 Check paint finish. Touch up damage immediately. Skilled
10 Decanters  Check corrosion protection. If necessary, spray on corrosion
protection wax (WS Part-No. 6969-0022-010).
 Rotate the bowl (minimum 10 revolutions) Do not stop the Skilled
9 Bowl
bowl in the same position.
6 Gearbox, input  Rotate the gearbox (minimum 10 revolutions) Skilled
1 Drive motors  Rotate the motor shaft (minimum 10 revolutions) Skilled
13.3.2 Maintenance work once a year

Machine compo-
nent
 Renew corrosion protection. Skilled
10 Decanter housing  Spray on corrosion protection wax (WS Part-No. 6969-0022-
010)

13.3.3 Maintenance work before resuming operation

Machine compo-
nent
6 Gearbox  Renew grease filling Tspec
Protective rings, Tspec

7 clearers and bush-  Check wear and replace when necessary:
es / solid discharge
2 V-belts  Mount belts. Tspec
 Check for wear. Tspec

- When wear, damage or corrosion is detected on load-
9 Bowl and scroll
bearing bowl parts, contact GEA Westfalia Separator Ser-
vice.
5 Bowl bearings  Renew grease filling. Tspec
 Check the vibration absorbers for any changes. Tspec

Vibration isolators / Replace the vibration absorbers in the case of the following
frame abnormal signs:
4 • Cracks / deformations
Vibration isolators / • Discoloration
drive Defective vibration absorbers may cause substantial follow-up
damage.
Optional:
 Renew grease filling in the container and lines. Tspec
Automatic grease
 When the machine is running: Re-lubricate the motor bear-
12 lubrication of the
ings.
bowl bearings
- Pay attention to motor plate.
Pos : 160 /PRU/Standard/01_Sic her hei tshi nwei se/Legende_Ausführ ender @ 0\mod_1335966770171_18.doc x @ 107068 @ @ 1


Pos : 162.1 /BA/Standar d/13_Auß erbetriebnahme/Z entrifuge_entsorg en/Zentrifuge_ents orgen_Sep_Dek @ 0\mod_1334750424030_18.doc x @ 22624 @ 2 @ 1
13.4 Disposing of the centrifuge

When the centrifuge has reached the end of its useful service life, the plant opera-
tor is responsible for proper and correct disposal.
It is recommended to commission a company specialized in the disposal of ma-
chines or to obtain information from GEA Westfalia Separator service.
 Observe the local disposal regulations.
 Be sure to adhere to applicable environmental protection legislation.
 Have electrical connections disconnected by qualified personnel, e.g. electri-
cians.
IMPORTANT: Residual liquids in feed lines and utility lines can cause injury. Pro-
tective clothing must therefore be worn when dismantling lines.
WARNING Danger of acid and alkali burns
After cleaning, hot lye and acid residues can still be in the centrifuge and the pipe-
lines. When working on the centrifuge, contact with the lyes and acids can cause
burns.
 Wear acid-resistant protective gear, e.g. protective goggles, protective gloves,
protective overalls or protective suits.
 Take special care.
 Observe the standard operating procedures (SOPs) issued by the operator on
handling acids and caustics as well as the local disposal regulations.
 Be sure to adhere to applicable environmental protection legislation.
 Drain residual liquids in feed lines and utility lines into suitable vessels and dis-
pose of them properly.
 Observe regulations on product contact.
 Dismantle feed lines and utility lines, clean superficial impurities caused by lubri-
cants or product with suitable media and dispose of separately.
 Dismantle all seals and non-metallic materials, clean them to remove lubricants
and dispose of them separately or recycle.
 Separate and sort metal parts and recycle them.
Pos : 162.2 /BA/Standar d/13_Auß erbetriebnahme/Betri ebsstoffe_ents orgen/Betri ebs toffe_ents orgen_Sep_Dek @ 0\mod_1334736036864_18.doc x @ 22344 @ 2 @ 1
13.4.1 Disposing of utilities

When the centrifuge is decommissioned, the gear oil must be drained and dis-
posed of. The plant operator is responsible for the proper disposal of the utilities.
 Observe the local disposal regulations.
 Comply with applicable environmental protection legislation.
 Drain off gear oil into suitable vessels and dispose of it properly. See data sheet
for oil quantity.
Pos : 162.3 /BA/Standar d/13_Auß erbetriebnahme/R einigungsflüssigkeiten_ents orgen/Rei nigungs flüssig keiten_ents orgen @ 0\mod_1334737006872_18.doc x @ 22378 @ 2 @ 1

13.4.2 Disposing of cleaning fluids

Chemicals are used for the chemical cleaning process which are specified in the
user information or a datasheet issued with the user information. They are danger-
ous and can cause injuries and environmental damage.
WARNING Danger of acid and alkali burns
Danger of chemical burns when handling chemical cleaning fluids and danger of
burns by hot water.
 Wear acid-resistant protective gear, e.g. protective goggles, protective gloves,
protective overalls or protective suits.
 Take special care.
 Observe the standard operating procedures (SOPs) issued by the operator on
handling acids and caustics as well as the local disposal regulations.
 Comply with applicable environmental protection legislation.
 Drain residual liquids in feed lines and utility lines into suitable vessels and dis-
pose of them properly.
 Observe regulations on product contact.
Pos : 164.1 /BA/Standar d/00_Ü bersc hriften/Kapitel /14_Ers atzteile @ 0\mod_1328016648937_18.doc x @ 14543 @ 1 @ 1

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Spare parts
14 Spare parts
14.1 Use only genuine spare parts. ............................................................... 118

14.2 Notes on ordering spare parts ............................................................... 119
14.3 Storing wear parts and operating materials ........................................... 120
14.3.1 Gaskets and drive belts ......................................................................... 120
14.3.2 Roller bearings....................................................................................... 121
14.3.3 Lubricants .............................................................................................. 121

Spare parts 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 164.2 /BA/Standar d/14_Ersatzteile/Original _Ers atzteile/Original_Ersatzteile_Sep_D ek @ 8\mod_1385995574267_18.doc x @ 477076 @ 2 @ 1
14.1 Use only genuine spare parts.

All spare parts, wear parts and operating materials are originally packed by GEA
Westfalia Separator.
The original packing is provided with the

marking shown.
Fig. 54
WARNING Danger due to defective spare parts
Non-genuine or non-approved spare parts or operating materials reduce the avail-

ability of the centrifuge.
Non-genuine or non-approved spare parts or operating materials reduce the avail-
ability of the centrifuge.
 Use only genuine spare parts from GEA Westfalia Separator to assure the oper-
ating safety and optimum availability of the centrifuge.

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Spare parts
Pos : 164.4 /BA/Standar d/14_Ersatzteile/Hi nweis e_Ers atz teil bes tell ung/Hi nweis e_Ers atz teil bes tell ung _Dek @ 0\mod_1334753120493_18.doc x @ 22692 @ 2 @ 1
14.2 Notes on ordering spare parts

A spare parts catalogue is part of the documentation of the centrifuge. It contains
all spare parts, wear parts and operating materials.
Spare part kits are available for many machines which are customized to the
maintenance intervals in the maintenance schedule of the centrifuge. E. g.:
• Set of spare parts for an operating time of 4000 hours.
Rapid and correct supply of spare parts can only be guaranteed if your order con-
tains the following details:
• Centrifuge type: see nameplate
• Serial number: see nameplate
• Bowl serial number (can differ from the machine serial number, see spare parts
catalog).
• Designation: see spare parts catalogue.
• Part number: see spare parts catalogue.
The part number is sometimes engraved on the individual parts.
Information required for ordering third-party components:
All specifications on the nameplate of the subcontractor, e. g. pump type and pump
number.

Spare parts 8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16
Pos : 164.6 /BA/Standar d/13_Auß erbetriebnahme/Versc hleiß teil e_und_Betri ebs mittel _lag ern/Verschl eißteile_und_Betriebsstoffe_lag ern @ 0\mod_1331727170303_18.doc x @ 20330 @ 3 @ 1
14.3 Storing wear parts and operating materials

Pay attention to the following for storing wear parts and operating materials.
Pos : 164.7 /BA/Standar d/13_Auß erbetriebnahme/Dic htungen_und_Antriebsriemen/Dichtungen und Antriebsriemen_Sep_D ek @ 0\mod_1331727343908_18.doc x @ 20364 @ 3 @ 1
14.3.1 Gaskets and drive belts

Unfavourable storage conditions change the physical properties of rubber.
Possible consequences:
• Shortened service life
• Completely unserviceable
If the following instructions are adhered to, it is possible that gaskets and drive
belts will retain their properties for several years.
Requirements to be met by the storage room:
• Cool (+15 to max. +25 °C)
• Dry (less than 60 % relative air humidity)
• Dust-free (as possible)
• Dark, no direct solar radiation or bright artificial light (if necessary, paint the win-
dows red or orange).
• Moderately ventilated, draft-free (if necessary wrap up the parts or pack them in
antistatic foils or bags made of paper, polyethylene or polyamides).
Environmental requirements:
• Not in the vicinity of heat sources.
• Not together with solvents, fuels, lubricants, acids, disinfectants etc.
Method of storage:
• Stress-free, i.e. without tension, pressure or other deformation.
• Avoid different material compositions from coming in contact with one another.
• Avoid direct contact with metals (copper and manganese in particular have a
negative impact on rubber products).
• Drive belts are preferentially hung up on so-called "saddles" or large diameter
pipes. The diameter should be at least ten times the height of the drive belt
cross section.
• Very long drive belts can be stacked on top of each other in piles if they have
been folded together properly.
• Shorter drive belts can be stored in racks. Piles exceeding 3000 mm in height
should be avoided because otherwise the bottom drive belts will be deformed.
• Hooks and nails are not suitable for hanging up drive belts.

8408-9001-822 / 09.06.16 Spare parts
Pos : 164.9 /BA/Standar d/13_Auß erbetriebnahme/Wälzl ager/Wälzlag er @ 0\mod_1331728315418_18.doc x @ 20398 @ 3 @ 1
14.3.2 Roller bearings

Roller bearings must be kept in their original packing during storage; the packing
may only be opened at the workplace and directly prior to fitting. Otherwise there is
a risk that the bearings will become soiled and rust.
Larger bearings whose raceways have a relatively small thickness should be
stored horizontally, not vertically and be supported around the entire circumfer-
ence.
Before packing the roller bearings are immersed in slushing oil. This oil does not
resinify or harden and is neutral towards all commercially available roller bearing
greases. Roller bearings are reliably protected against external influences in their
original packaging.
However, this protection is only effective for a prolonged period when the packed
bearings are stored in a dry (relative air humidity 60%) and frost-free room.
No aggressive chemicals such as acids, ammonia or chloride of lime may be
stored in the same room.
Pos : 164.10 /BA/Standard/13_Auß erbetriebnahme/Sc hmiers toffe/Schmi erstoffe @ 0\mod_1331728467230_18.doc x @ 20432 @ 3 @ 1
14.3.3 Lubricants
Always keep lubricant containers tightly closed and store them in closed rooms.
Avoid large temperature fluctuations as they cause respiration of the containers. As
a result, moisture penetrate into the containers.
Clean the lubricant containers before opening them to prevent contaminants from
getting into the lubricant. Even the smallest foreign matter in the lubricant can dras-
tically reduce the life of the roller bearings.
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Inhalt ===

Pos : 166 /BA/Standar d/00_Titel_R üc kseite/R uec ks eite @ 28\mod_1447339274174_18.doc x @ 1026232 @ @ 1
We live our values-

Excellence • Passion • Integrity • Responsibility • GEA-versity
GEA Group is a global engineering company with multi-billion euro sales and operations
in more than 50 countries. Founded in 1881, the company is one of the largest providers of innova-
tive equipment and process technology. GEA Group is listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 Index.

Tel. +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Ruec ks eite ===

Lubrication and maintenance schedule
Model Series C. 20 (use up to 80 °C)

Series C. 20 (use up to 130 °C)
No. 8408-3001-231
Edition 16.03.2010
GEA Mechanical Equipment / GEA Westfalia Separator

2 8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Notizen
Notes
Note

8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010 3
1.1 Admissible product temperature .............................................................. 6

1.2 Who is authorised to carry out which operations ? .................................. 6
1.3 Important maintenance instructions ......................................................... 7
1.4 What spare parts may be used ? ............................................................. 7
1.5 What lubricants may be used ? ............................................................... 8
1.6 Service and maintenance contract with Westfalia Separator .................. 8
2 Product temperatures of 5 °C to 80 °C 9
2.1 After/during commissioning ................................................................... 11

2.2 Daily ....................................................................................................... 11
2.3 Monthly .................................................................................................. 11
2.4 Every 2000 operating hours, after 6 months at the latest ...................... 12
2.5 Every 4000 operating hours, after 12 months at the latest .................... 12
2.6 Every 8000 operating hours, after 3 years at the latest ......................... 13
2.7 Every 16000 operating hours, after 3 years at the latest ....................... 13
2.8 Pay attention to the specifications of the manufacturer! ........................ 13
2.9 Product-dependent intervals .................................................................. 14
2.10 Table of Lubricants ................................................................................ 14
3 Product temperatures of 80 °C to 130 °C 15

3.2 Daily ....................................................................................................... 17
3.3 Monthly .................................................................................................. 17

4 8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Notizen
Notes
Note

8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010 5
1.1 Admissible product temperature .............................................................. 6

1.2 Who is authorised to carry out which operations ? .................................. 6
1.3 Important maintenance instructions ......................................................... 7
1.4 What spare parts may be used ? ............................................................. 7
1.5 What lubricants may be used ? ............................................................... 8
1.6 Service and maintenance contract with Westfalia Separator .................. 8

6 8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010
1.1 Admissible product temperature

Pay attention to the decanter nameplate.
The product temperature is stated on the nameplate for which the decanter was
rated. Depending on the field of application, tools and torques, for example, are
selected.
Never exceed the maximum product temperature.

In the case of non-compliance, there is a risk of damage to persons and
property.
Changes may only be carried out after consultation with GEA Westfalia
Separator.
Fig. 1
1.2 Who is authorised to carry out which operations ?

The basis for the maintenance work to be carried out by the customer is the in-
struction manual furnished with the decanter.
Trained personnel may carry out the work routines described in the manual.
Advanced maintenance and repair work may only be carried out by the fol-
lowing personnel.
• Service personnel from Westfalia Separator
• “Central repair workshops” authorized by Westfalia Separator.
• Operating personnel who have received special training from Westfalia Sepa-
rator.

8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010 7
1.3 Important maintenance instructions

• Take special care when carrying out maintenance and lubrication work!
Carefully executed lubrication and maintenance improves operating times and
the service life of the decanter.
• Clean lubricating points prior to lubrication.
• Replace worn or damaged gaskets immediately.
• When operating the decanter in an explosion-hazarded zone, additional ser-
vice and maintenance work is required which exceeds the scope described in
this document.
The required operations are described in the respective manual for the ATEX
decanter, for example additional maintenance is necessary on the gearbox.
1.4 What spare parts may be used ?

The basis for spare parts procurement is the order-specific spare parts list fur-
nished with the decanter.
Use only those parts specified in the parts list.
Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia

Separator.
Fig. 2
The use of non-genuine parts leads to:

• Safety risks
• Lower durability and availability
• Increased maintenance requirement
If a safety risk arises, this may have legal consequences for the responsible
persons. In this case, Westfalia Separator shall assume no liability or warranty.

8 8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010
1.5 What lubricants may be used ?

Selection of a suitable lubricant is essential for correct functioning of the de-
canter. Wear is minimised. The service life and operating safety of the decanter
is increased.
For this reason, we recommend the lubricant filled in at the factory. Westfalia
Separator carries out continuous quality checks only for this product.
Notes on storage: The possible storage time when stored carefully in dry rooms
and with closed original containers is at least 24 months.
1.6 Service and maintenance contract with Westfalia Separator

When a service and maintenance contract is concluded with Westfalia Separa-
tor, the maintenance work is optimally adapted to the production process. This
can substantially lower maintenance costs.

8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010 9
2 Product temperatures of 5 °C to 80 °C

2.2 Daily ....................................................................................................... 11
2.3 Monthly .................................................................................................. 11

10 8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010
Fig. 3

8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010 11
Maintenance work Product temperature range 5 °C bis 80 °C

Machine component Lubricant
Pos. Operations Remarks
Assembly Quality Qty.
2.1 After/during commissioning
Check the belt tension after 0.5 - 1

2 V-belts operating hours.
Refer to the instruction manual.
10 Complete decanter Check the installation.
2.2 Daily
Re-grease roller bearings.

Bowl bearings / solids Refer to the instruction manual.
WS-0124 4g
side Under extreme conditions, re- 2 g correspond to
lubricate every 8 hours with 2 g one stroke with the
5 (e.g. with 24 h/day operation). lever-type hand gun
In the case of short-time operation, 0003-0429-000
Bowl bearings / liquid
re-lubricate after 4 operating hours WS-0124 4g
side
at the earliest.
Check running characteristics.
10 Complete decanter Shut down the decanter when un-
usual noises or vibrations occur.
2.3 Monthly
Clean the lock and check for per-

8 Housing
fect functionality.
Top up the storage tank of the
automatic grease lubrication.
Check grease lines.

Optional: The pause time
setting must be
Minimum lubrication quantity =
12 Automatic grease lubri- WS-0124 400 g checked when
cation of the bowl bear- 4 g per day and bowl bearing.
commissioning the
ings This corresponds to a pause time
decanter.
of 14,400 seconds on the decanter
control.
0,65 g grease are conveyed to
each bowl bearing during each
lubrication interval.

12 8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010

2.4 Every 2000 operating hours, after 6 months at the latest
Check condition and tension.

2 V-belts
Re-grease the gearbox

180 g 2 g correspond to
one stroke with the
6 Gearbox In extreme cases, the gearbox WS-0124 Filling quan-
lever-type hand gun
tity when
must be re-lubricated once a assembling 0003-0429-000
month.
16 Gas pressure springs Check the gas pressure springs.
Check the vibration isolators for

any changes.
Replace the vibration isolators in Defective vibration
Vibration isolators / the case of the following abnormal isolators may
4
Housing signs: cause substantial
– Cracks follow-up damage.
– One-sided dents
– Discolouration
10 Housing Clean grease collecting chambers.
The functional check

Optional: is done by lowering
Check vibration pick-up for proper
13 the limit value tempo-
Vibration pickup functionality. rarily while the ma-
chine is running.
Optional with standard Check wear.

drive
14 The running bush is supplied with
Mechanical overload fresh grease when re-lubricating
protection the gearbox.
Optional: Carry out visual check for damage.

Lifting devices / Replace damaged tools immedi-
set of tools ately.

8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010 13

2.6 Every 8000 operating hours, after 3 years at the latest
Replace V-belts.
2 V-belts
Bowl bearings / solids

Replace roller bearings. WS-0124 50 g
side
Renew grease filling. Shorter intervals may
5
Renew gaskets. be necessary
Bowl bearings / liquid Refer to the instruction manual. WS-0124 50 g
side
Replace the gasket at the gear Specially trained

6 Gearbox
output. personnel required.
Replace roller bearings.

11 Scroll bearings WS-0124 60 g
2-gear drive only Replace clutch.

15
Clutch Refer to the instruction manual.
Vibration isolators /
4 Replace vibration isolators.
Housing
2.8 Pay attention to the specifications of the manufacturer!
Re-grease / replace motor bear- The following applies in the case of mo-
ings. tors supplied by Westfalia Separator:
In the case of drive motors equipped with
1. Re-grease when commissioning
1 Drive motor a post-lubrication system, a nameplate
the decanter.
specifying grease quality, grease quantity
Re-grease only when the machine and lubrication intervals is located near to
is running. the grease nipple.

14 8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010

2.9 Product-dependent intervals
Check wear and replace when

necessary:
– Bowl shell
– Protective ring
– Vanes and wearing bushes in
7 Bowl the area of the ejection ports.
When wear, damage or corrosion
is detected on load-bearing bowl
parts, contact the factory.
Check the wear to the scroll and
9 Scroll wear liners.
Check the decanter and the elec-
trical components.
10 Complete decanter Check the frame, catcher and
product discharge for deposits.
Eliminate caking.
2.10 Table of Lubricants
Designation WS - Part-No /drum. Manufacturer
0015-0124-000 / 0.4 kg
WS-0124 High-pressure grease Cartridge according to
DIN 1284

8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010 15
3 Product temperatures of 80 °C to 130 °C

3.2 Daily ....................................................................................................... 17
3.3 Monthly .................................................................................................. 17

16 8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010
Fig. 4

8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010 17
Maintenance work Product temperature range 80 °C to 130 °C

3.1 After/during commissioning
Check the belt tension after 0.5 - 1

2 V-belts operating hours.
10 Complete decanter Check the installation.
3.2 Daily
Re-grease roller bearings.

Bowl bearings / solids Refer to the instruction manual.
WS-0124 4g
side Under extreme conditions, re- 2 g correspond to
lubricate every 8 hours with 2 g one stroke with the
5 (e.g. with 24 h/day operation). lever-type hand gun
In the case of short-time operation, 0003-0429-000
Bowl bearings / liquid
re-lubricate after 4 operating hours WS-0124 4g
side
at the earliest.
Check running characteristics.
10 Complete decanter Shut down the decanter when un-
usual noises or vibrations occur.
3.3 Monthly
Clean the lock and check for per-

8 Housing
fect functionality.
Top up the storage tank of the
automatic grease lubrication.
Check grease lines.

Optional: The pause time
setting must be
Minimum lubrication quantity =
12 Automatic grease lubri- WS-0124 400 g checked when
cation of the bowl bear- 4 g per day and bowl bearing.
commissioning the
ings This corresponds to a pause time
decanter.
of 14,400 seconds on the decanter
control.
0,65 g grease are conveyed to
each bowl bearing during each
lubrication interval.

18 8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010

Check condition and tension.

2 V-belts
Re-grease the gearbox

180 g 2 g correspond to
one stroke with the
6 Gearbox In extreme cases, the gearbox WS-0124 Filling quan-
lever-type hand gun
tity when
must be re-lubricated once a assembling 0003-0429-000
month.
16 Gas pressure springs Check the gas pressure springs.
Check the vibration isolators for

any changes.
Replace the vibration isolators in Defective vibration
Vibration isolators / the case of the following abnormal isolators may
4
Housing signs: cause substantial
– Cracks follow-up damage.
– One-sided dents
– Discolouration
10 Housing Clean grease collecting chambers.
The functional check

Optional: is done by lowering
Check vibration pick-up for proper
13 the limit value tempo-
Vibration pickup functionality. rarily while the ma-
chine is running.
Optional with standard Check wear.

drive
14 The running bush is supplied with
Mechanical overload fresh grease when re-lubricating
protection the gearbox.
Optional: Carry out visual check for damage.

Lifting devices / Replace damaged tools immedi-
set of tools ately.

8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010 19

Replace V-belts.
2 V-belts
Bowl bearings / solids

Replace roller bearings. WS-0124 50 g
side
5
Bowl bearings / liquid Refer to the instruction manual. WS-0124 50 g
side
Replace the gasket at the gear Specially trained

6 Gearbox
output. personnel required.
Replace roller bearings.

11 Scroll bearings WS-0124 60 g
2-gear drive only Replace clutch.

15
Clutch Refer to the instruction manual.
Vibration isolators /
4 Replace vibration isolators.
Housing
3.8 Pay attention to the specifications of the manufacturer!
Re-grease / replace motor bear- The following applies in the case of mo-
ings. tors supplied by Westfalia Separator:
In the case of drive motors equipped with
1. Re-grease when commissioning
1 Drive motor a post-lubrication system, a nameplate
the decanter.
specifying grease quality, grease quantity
Re-grease only when the machine and lubrication intervals is located near to
is running. the grease nipple.

20 8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010

3.9 Product-dependent intervals
Check wear and replace when

necessary:
– Bowl shell
– Protective ring
– Vanes and wearing bushes in
7 Bowl the area of the ejection ports.
When wear, damage or corrosion
is detected on load-bearing bowl
parts, contact the factory.
Check the wear to the scroll and
9 Scroll wear liners.
Check the decanter and the elec-
trical components.
10 Complete decanter Check the frame, catcher and
product discharge for deposits.
Eliminate caking.
3.10 Table of Lubricants
Designation WS - Part-No /drum. Manufacturer
0015-0124-000 / 0.4 kg
WS-0124 High-pressure grease Cartridge according to
DIN 1284

8408-3001-231 / 16.03.2010 21
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Notizen
Notes
Note

GEA Westfalia Separator GmbH
Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde (Germany)
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
Ersatzteilkatalog / Spare Parts Catalog
Typ / Model
UCD 205-00-00_30
Maschinen-Nr. / Serial number of machine

8061-484
Trommel-Nr. / Serial number of bowl

8061-484
Auftrags-Nr. / Order number

1841638077_02
Ausgabe / Edition
06.07.2016

Werner-Habig-Str. 1, D 59302 Oelde
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com
ETS Ersatzteilschlüssel / Spare part code
Teil oder Baugruppe lieferbar

Part or assembly available
Teil oder Baugruppe bedingt lieferbar. Rücksprache mit dem Herstellerwerk nehmen.
Part or assembly available to a limited extent. Contact manufacturer.
Teil oder Baugruppe in dieser Fertigungsstufe nicht lieferbar.

Part or assembly not available in this manufacturing stage.
3/42
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
1841638077 KLAER-DEKANTER UCD 205-00-00_30 5
1841638077_02 CLARIFYING DECANTER
KLAER-DEKANTER UCD 205-00-00_30 DECANTADOR CLARIFICADOR
CLARIFYING DECANTER
Typ / Model
UCD 205-00-00_30
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n

8061-484
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n

8061-484
Ausgabe / Edition
06.07.2016
Seite/Page
4/42 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
5/42
9987-0419-741 KLAER-DEKANTER UCD 205-00-00_30
1841638077 CLARIFYING DECANTER
KLAER-DEKANTER UCD 205-00-00_30 DECANTADOR CLARIFICADOR
1100 8408-1100-070 1 GESTELL VOLLST. 7
CLARIFYING DECANTER
FRAME, COMPL.
BASTIDOR, COMP.
6600 8408-6600-110 1 TROMMEL VOLLST. 13
BOWL, COMPL.
TAMBOR, COMP.
6539 8408-6539-080 1 SCHNECKE VOLLST. 22
SCROLL, COMPL.
SINFÍN, COMP.
3351 8408-3351-010 1 RIEMENANTRIEB VOLLST. 27
BELT DRIVE, COMPL.
ACCIONAMIENTO POR CORREA, COMP.
2297 8408-2297-070 1 SCHLEUDERGUTZULEITUNG VOLLST. 31
PRODUCT FEED LINE, COMPL.
LÍNEA ALIMENTACIÓN PRODUCTO, COMP.
9900 8408-9900-020 1 SATZ WERKZEUGE 33
Typ / Model SET OF TOOLS
JUEGO DE HERRAMIENTAS
UCD 205-00-00_30 9902 8408-9902-000 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE 37
SET OF SPARE PARTS
JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 3243 8408-3243-040 1 DREHZAHLINITIATOR VOLLST. 39
SPEED SENSOR, COMPL.
8061-484 INICIADOR DE VELOCIDAD, COMP.
1143 8408-1143-000 1 SATZ SCHALLSCHUTZTEILE 41
SET OF SOUND INSULATION PARTS
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n JUEGO DE PIEZAS INSONORIZANTES
9001 8408-9001-822 1 BETRIEBSANLEITUNG EN
8061-484 INSTRUCTION MANUAL EN
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES EN
1131 8408-3001-231 1 SCHMIERPLAN EN EN
Ausgabe / Edition 1150 8408-4100-090 1 MASSBLATT
8408-9056-141 1 DREHZAHLTABELLE EN EN
06.07.2016 1181 8408-9056-141 1 DREHZAHLTABELLE EN EN
Seite/Page
7/42
10 8405-2272-000 1 GRIFF
8408-1100-070 HANDLEGRIP
GESTELL VOLLST. EMPUÑADURA
20 0019-6901-400 2 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
FRAME, COMPL.
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
30 0021-4571-300 2 KU-SCHMIERNIPPEL
BALL-TYPE GREASE NIPPLE
BOQUILLA DE ENGRASE (ESFÉRICA)
40 8405-1106-000 2 VORREIBER (LINKS)
LOCKING LEVER (LEFT)
ALDABILLA (IZQ.)
50 8408-1116-040 1 RAHMEN GESCHW.
FRAME, WELDED
MARCO, SOLD.
60 0026-1348-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
Typ / Model HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
UCD 205-00-00_30 80 0026-0319-170 4 SPANNSTIFT
SPRING DOWEL SLEEVE
PASADOR DE SUJECIÓN
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0019-7039-400 4 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
8061-484 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
100 0026-1335-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ARANDELA _ DISCO
8061-484 HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
120 0026-1348-400 16 SCHEIBE
Ausgabe / Edition WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
06.07.2016 130 0018-8036-300 8 MUFFE
SOCKET
MANGUITO
140 8408-1017-080 1 FANGKAMMER VOLLST.
CATCH CHAMBER, COMPL.
CÁMARA COLECTORA, COMP.
Seite/Page
8408-1752-110 1 FAENGERUNTERTEIL GESCHW.
8408-1100-070 LOWER PART OF CATCHER, WELDED
GESTELL VOLLST. PARTE INFERIOR DEL COLECTOR, SOLD.
8408-1752-120 1 FAENGEROBERTEIL GESCHW.
FRAME, COMPL.
UPPER PART OF CATCHER, WELDED
PARTE SUPERIOR DEL COLECTOR, SOLD.
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
160 0026-1345-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
170 0013-0278-400 6 SECHSKANTMUTTER
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
180 8408-1470-020 2 LEISTE
METAL STRIP
LISTÓN
190 0021-3147-750 4 RUNDLAGER
Typ / Model RUBBER-METAL CUSHIONS
AMORTIGUADOR
UCD 205-00-00_30 210 0021-2738-000 1 GASDRUCKFEDER
GAS PRESSURE SPRING
RESORTE POR AIRE COMPRIMIDO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 220 8408-1705-000 1 FLUESSIGKEITSFAENGER VOLLST.
LIQUID CATCHER, COMPL.
8061-484 COLECTOR DE LIQUIDO, COMP.
8408-1752-010 1 FAENGEROBERTEIL GESCHW.
UPPER PART OF CATCHER, WELDED
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n PARTE SUPERIOR DEL COLECTOR, SOLD.
8408-1752-000 1 FAENGERUNTERTEIL GESCHW.
8061-484 LOWER PART OF CATCHER, WELDED
PARTE INFERIOR DEL COLECTOR, SOLD.
230 8408-1550-030 1 SCHUTZHAUBE GESCHW.
Ausgabe / Edition PROTECTIVE HOOD, WELDED
CAPERUZA DE PROTECCIÓN, SOL.
06.07.2016 240 0003-3870-800 4 STOPFEN
PLUG
TAPÓN
250 0003-0655-800 2 STOPFEN
PLUG
TAPÓN
Seite/Page
260 0019-9391-400 12 SENKSCHRAUBE
8408-1100-070 COUNTERSUNK SCREW
GESTELL VOLLST. TORNILLO AVELLANADO
FRAME, COMPL.
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
280 8405-1491-030 3 SCHARNIER
HINGE
BISAGRA
300 0021-3376-700 4 MASCHINENFUSS
MACHINE FOOT
PIE DE MAQUINA
310 0026-1335-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
330 8408-1005-000 1 SATZ DICHTRINGE F.GESTELL
Typ / Model SET OF GASKETS FOR FRAME
JUEGO DE JUNTAS PARA EL BASTIDOR
UCD 205-00-00_30 0004-3170-768 4.8 m DICHTUNGSPROFIL
MOULDED GASKET
PERFIL DE CIERRE HERMÉTICO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 340 8408-4940-510 1 SATZ SCHILDER
SET OF PLATES
8061-484 JUEGO DE RÓTULOS
0024-6573-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n RÓTULO ADHESIVO
8061-484 ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Ausgabe / Edition ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
06.07.2016 0024-3040-000 1 SCHILD
PLATE
RÓTULO
0024-5380-000 1 SCHILD
PLATE
RÓTULO
Seite/Page
0026-1571-300 10 KERBNAGEL
8408-1100-070 NOTCHED NAIL
GESTELL VOLLST. REMACHE ESTRIADO
0024-6482-000 4 SCHILD
FRAME, COMPL.
PLATE
RÓTULO
0024-6424-000 1 SCHILD
PLATE
RÓTULO
0024-6481-000 1 SCHILD
PLATE
RÓTULO
360 0018-2467-400 2 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
370 0018-0585-848 3 m ROHR
PIPE
TUBO
380 0018-5514-030 2 SCHWENKVERSCHRAUBUNG
Typ / Model SWIVEL JOINT
UNIÓN ROSCADA GIRATORIA
UCD 205-00-00_30 390 0026-5673-300 1 FAECHERSCHEIBE
FAN-TYPE LOCK WASHER
ARANDELA DENTADA
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 400 0026-1348-400 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
8061-484 ARANDELA _ DISCO
410 0026-1337-300 1 FEDERRING
LOCK WASHER
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ANILLO DE PRESIÓN
8061-484 HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
430 0018-1276-400 4 ROHRSCHELLE
Ausgabe / Edition PIPE CLIP
ABRAZADERA DE TUBO
06.07.2016 440 0019-6839-400 4 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
450 0019-6145-400 2 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
ALLEN SCREW
TORNILLO CILÍNDRICO
Seite/Page
460 0000-0006-162 4 ENTFAELLT
8408-1100-070 NOT APPLICABLE
GESTELL VOLLST. SE SUPRIME
470 0000-0006-162 4 ENTFAELLT
FRAME, COMPL.
NOT APPLICABLE
SE SUPRIME
480 0000-0006-162 1 ENTFAELLT
NOT APPLICABLE
SE SUPRIME
Typ / Model
UCD 205-00-00_30

8061-484

8061-484
Ausgabe / Edition
06.07.2016
Seite/Page
13/42
10 8408-3352-000 1 KEILRIEMENSCHEIBE
8408-6600-110 V-BELT PULLEY
TROMMEL VOLLST. POLEA PARA CORREA TRAPEZOIDAL
BOWL, COMPL.
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
30 0026-1348-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
40 8408-6305-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
50 0019-5382-050 2 RINGSCHRAUBE
EYE SCREW
ANILLA
60 0026-5848-170 2 SICHERUNGSRING
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
70 0024-6580-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
Typ / Model ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
UCD 205-00-00_30 80 8408-6305-010 2 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0026-5874-170 1 SICHERUNGSRING
SECURING RING
8061-484 ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
100 8408-3260-010 1 CYCLO-GETRIEBE M.ANSCHL.TEIL.V.
CYCLO GEAR WITH CONNECTION PARTS, COMPL.
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n 8408-3270-010 1 CYCLO-GETRIEBE VOLLST. 17
CYCLO GEAR, COMPL.
8061-484 TRANSMISIÓN CYCLO, COMP.
110 0015-0124-000 1 HOCHDRUCKFETT
HIGH PRESSURE GREASE
Ausgabe / Edition GRASA ALTA PRESIÓN
120 0011-1014-320 1 ZYLINDERROLLENLAGER
06.07.2016 CYLINDRICAL ROLLER BEARING
COJINETE DE RODILLOS CILÍNDRICOS
130 8408-6757-000 1 SCHUTZRING
GUARD RING
ANILLO DE PROTECCIÓN
Seite/Page
140 8408-6757-020 1 SCHUTZRING
8408-6600-110 GUARD RING
TROMMEL VOLLST. ANILLO DE PROTECCIÓN
BOWL, COMPL.
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
160 8408-6601-170 1 TROMMELMANTEL
BOWL SHELL
CAMISA DEL TAMBOR
ALLEN SCREW
180 8408-6391-020 1 SATZ SCHLEISSBUCHSEN
ET OF WEARING BUSHES
JUEGO DE CASQUILLOS DE DESGASTE
190 8405-6685-020 2 FLUEGEL M.PANZERUNG
VANE WITH HARD FACING
ALETA BLINDADA
200 8408-6726-020 2 REGULIERSCHEIBE
Typ / Model REGULATING RING
DIAFRAGMA DE REGULACIÓN
UCD 205-00-00_30 210 8408-6521-100 1 LAGERNABE
BEARING HUB
CUBO DE COJINETE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 220 0019-6900-400 8 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
8061-484 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
230 0026-1348-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ARANDELA _ DISCO
8061-484 ALLEN SCREW
Ausgabe / Edition HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
06.07.2016 260 0011-6014-560 1 RILLENKUGELLAGER
GROOVED BALL BEARING
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
270 8408-6595-060 1 BUCHSE
BUSHING
CASQUILLO
Seite/Page
280 8408-6136-010 2 LAGERGEHAEUSE VOLLST.
8408-6600-110 BEARING HOUSING, COMPL.
TROMMEL VOLLST. ALOJAMIENTO DE COJINETE, COMP.
0003-0180-800 2 STOPFEN
BOWL, COMPL.
PLUG
TAPÓN
0019-8919-030 2 VERSCHLUSSSCHRAUBE
SCREW PLUG
TORNILLO DE TOPE
0003-3867-800 2 STOPFEN
PLUG
TAPÓN
290 8408-6305-020 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
300 8408-6595-010 1 BUCHSE
BUSHING
CASQUILLO
Typ / Model ALLEN SCREW
UCD 205-00-00_30 320 8408-2705-110 1 EINLAUFROHR GESCHW.
INLET TUBE, WELDED
TUBO DE ENTRADA, SOLD.
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 330 8408-6007-020 1 SATZ DICHTRINGE F.TROMMEL 20
SET OF GASKETS FOR BOWL
8061-484 JUEGO ANILLOS ESTANQUEIDAD PARA TAMBOR
340 8408-6595-050 1 BUCHSE
BUSHING
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n CASQUILLO
8061-484
Ausgabe / Edition
06.07.2016
Seite/Page
17/42
220 8408-3305-110 1 RING
8408-3270-010 RING
CYCLO-GETRIEBE VOLLST. ANILLO
1040 8408-3286-050 2 WELLENDICHTRING
CYCLO GEAR, COMPL.
SHAFT SEALING RING
RETÉN PARA EJES
1140 8408-3159-050 1 O-RING
O-RING
JUNTA TÓRICA
1240 8408-3303-030 1 PASSFEDER
FEATHER KEY
CHAVETA
SHAFT SEALING RING
RETÉN PARA EJES
ALLEN SCREW
Typ / Model ALLEN SCREW
UCD 205-00-00_30 1730 8408-3161-050 12 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
ALLEN SCREW
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 1810 8408-3491-010 1 SPRENGRING
SNAP RING
8061-484 ANILLO DE RETENCIÓN
1960 0019-8905-400 2 VERSCHLUSSSCHRAUBE
SCREW PLUG
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n TORNILLO DE TOPE
2570 0007-1920-550 2 DICHTRING
8061-484 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
2790 8408-3295-000 6 USITRING
Ausgabe / Edition USIT RING
ANILLO USIT
06.07.2016 3520 0019-6129-150 2 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
ALLEN SCREW
ALLEN SCREW
Seite/Page
4540 0015-0124-000 2 HOCHDRUCKFETT
8408-3270-010 HIGH PRESSURE GREASE
CYCLO-GETRIEBE VOLLST. GRASA ALTA PRESIÓN
CYCLO GEAR, COMPL.
Typ / Model
UCD 205-00-00_30

8061-484

8061-484
Ausgabe / Edition
06.07.2016
Seite/Page
20/42
8408-6007-020 SHAFT SEALING RING
SATZ DICHTRINGE F.TROMMEL RETÉN PARA EJES
20 0007-2862-750 1 DICHTRING
SET OF GASKETS FOR BOWL
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-2300-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0007-1944-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-1802-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-2599-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1860-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
UCD 205-00-00_30

8061-484

8061-484
Ausgabe / Edition
06.07.2016
Seite/Page
22/42
10 8408-6649-010 1 MITNEHMER
8408-6539-080 DRIVER
SCHNECKE VOLLST. PIEZA DE ARRASTRE
SCROLL, COMPL.
ALLEN SCREW
30 8408-6515-290 1 SCHNECKE GESCHW.
SCROLL, WELDED
SINFÍN, SOLD.
8408-6065-080 1 SATZ SCHLEISSBLECHE 24
SET OF WEAR LINERS
JUEGO DE CHAPAS PROTECTORAS
40 0026-5873-170 1 SICHERUNGSRING
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
50 0011-6010-000 1 RILLENKUGELLAGER
GROOVED BALL BEARING
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
Typ / Model HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
UCD 205-00-00_30 70 8408-6375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 81 0015-0124-000 1 HOCHDRUCKFETT
8061-484 GRASA ALTA PRESIÓN
90 8408-6006-020 1 SATZ DICHTRINGE F.SCHNECKE 25
SET OF GASKETS FOR SCROLL
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n JUEGO JUNTAS PARA EL SINFÍN
100 6965-0605-500 1 PLASTIKBEUTEL
8061-484 PLASTIC BAG
BOLSA DE PLÁSTICO
Ausgabe / Edition
06.07.2016
Seite/Page
24/42
25/42
10 0007-1943-750 1 DICHTRING
8408-6006-020 GASKET
SATZ DICHTRINGE F.SCHNECKE JUNTA ANULAR
20 0007-1722-750 1 DICHTRING
SET OF GASKETS FOR SCROLL
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-1735-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Typ / Model
UCD 205-00-00_30

8061-484

8061-484
Ausgabe / Edition
06.07.2016
Seite/Page
27/42
10 8408-3328-010 1 SATZ MOTORANSCHLUSSTEILE 29
8408-3351-010 SET OF MOTOR CONNECTION PARTS
RIEMENANTRIEB VOLLST. JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE CONEXIÓN DEL MOTOR
20 5390-2829-039 1 DREHSTROMMOTOR
BELT DRIVE, COMPL.
THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
MOTOR TRIFÁSICO
30 8408-3308-000 1 GEWINDESTUECK
THREADED PIECE
PIEZA ROSCADA
40 8408-3356-130 1 KEILRIEMENSCHEIBE
V-BELT PULLEY
POLEA PARA CORREA TRAPEZOIDAL
50 0021-2787-790 1 SCHMALKEILRIEMEN
NARROW V-BELT
CORREA TRAPEZOIDAL ESTRECHA
60 0021-3464-200 1 RIEMENSCHEIBE VOLLST.
BELT PULLEY, COMPL.
POLEA PARA CORREA, COMP.
70 0021-3834-210 1 RIEMENSCHEIBE VOLLST.
Typ / Model BELT PULLEY, COMPL.
POLEA PARA CORREA, COMP.
UCD 205-00-00_30 80 0021-3854-790 1 SCHMALKEILRIEMEN
NARROW V-BELT
8061-484

8061-484
Ausgabe / Edition
06.07.2016
Seite/Page
29/42
10 8408-3453-010 1 BLECH
8408-3328-010 SHEET METAL
SATZ MOTORANSCHLUSSTEILE CHAPA
SET OF MOTOR CONNECTION PARTS
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
40 0026-1348-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
50 8408-3008-030 1 MOTORPLATTE
MOTOR PLATE
PLACA DEL MOTOR
60 0026-1348-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
Typ / Model HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
UCD 205-00-00_30 80 0019-7127-150 4 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0013-0005-400 8 SECHSKANTMUTTER
HEXAGON NUT
8061-484 TUERCA HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
110 0026-1348-400 2 SCHEIBE
8061-484 WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
Ausgabe / Edition
06.07.2016
Seite/Page
31/42
10 0018-8272-400 1 T-STUECK
8408-2297-070 T-PIECE
SCHLEUDERGUTZULEITUNG VOLLST. PIEZA EN T
20 0018-8237-400 1 SCHLAUCHAUSLASS
PRODUCT FEED LINE, COMPL.
HOSE OUTLET
BOQUILLA DE MANGUERA
30 0018-5981-300 2 SCHLAUCHSCHELLE
HOSE CLIP
ABRAZADERA DE MANGUERA
40 0018-8475-828 2 m SCHLAUCH
HOSE
MANGUERA
50 0018-5696-400 1 REDUZIERSTUECK
REDUCING PIECE
PIEZA DE REDUCCIÓN
60 0018-7860-400 1 REDUZIERSTUECK
REDUCING PIECE
PIEZA DE REDUCCIÓN
70 0018-1796-400 1 SCHLAUCHAUSLASS
Typ / Model HOSE OUTLET
BOQUILLA DE MANGUERA
UCD 205-00-00_30 80 0018-4861-828 2 m SCHLAUCH
HOSE
MANGUERA
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0018-3668-310 2 SCHLAUCHSCHELLE
HOSE CLIP
8061-484 ABRAZADERA DE MANGUERA

8061-484
Ausgabe / Edition
06.07.2016
Seite/Page
33/42
34/42
8408-9900-020 HEX HEAD SCREW
SATZ WERKZEUGE TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
SET OF TOOLS
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
30 0026-1335-400 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
40 8408-9868-000 1 HUELSE
SLEEVE
CASQUILLO
50 8408-9467-000 1 PLATTE
PLATE
PLACA
ALLEN SCREW
70 0026-5715-300 1 ZYLINDERSTIFT
Typ / Model CYLINDRICAL PIN
PASADOR CILÍNDRICO
UCD 205-00-00_30 80 8408-9869-000 1 BOLZEN
BOLT
PERNO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0013-0280-400 1 SECHSKANTMUTTER
HEXAGON NUT
8061-484 TUERCA HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
110 8408-9868-010 1 HUELSE
8061-484 SLEEVE
CASQUILLO
120 8408-9467-010 1 PLATTE
Ausgabe / Edition PLATE
PLACA
06.07.2016 130 0019-5220-150 1 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Seite/Page
150 8408-9969-000 1 BUCHSE
8408-9900-020 BUSHING
SATZ WERKZEUGE CASQUILLO
SET OF TOOLS
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
180 0026-1348-400 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
190 8408-9594-010 1 DRUCKRING
PRESSURE RING
ANILLO DE PRESIÓN
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
210 8408-9831-000 1 LASCHE
Typ / Model FIXING PLATE
LENGÜETA
UCD 205-00-00_30 220 8408-9910-000 1 AUSHEBEVORRICHTUNG VOLLST.
LIFTING DEVICE CPL.
DISPOSITIVO ELEVADOR, COMP.
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 230 0019-5384-050 2 RINGSCHRAUBE
EYE SCREW
8061-484 ANILLA
240 6968-0950-340 2 RUNDSCHLINGE
ROUND SLING
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ESLINGA REDONDA
250 0003-0429-000 1 HOCHDRUCK-HANDHEBELPRESSE
8061-484 HIGH-PRESSURE HAND-LEVER PRESS
PRENSA DE PALANCA DE ALTA PRESIÓN
0003-0429-010 1 HOECHSTDRUCKSCHLAUCH
Ausgabe / Edition MAXIMUM PRESSURE HOSE
TUBO FLEXIBLE DE PRESIÓN MÁXIMA
06.07.2016
Seite/Page
37/42
8408-9902-000 NARROW V-BELT
SATZ ERSATZTEILE CORREA TRAPEZOIDAL ESTRECHA
SET OF SPARE PARTS
NARROW V-BELT
30 0007-2862-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0007-2300-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-1943-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-1944-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1722-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
UCD 205-00-00_30 80 0007-1735-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0007-1802-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
8061-484 JUNTA ANULAR
SHAFT SEALING RING
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n RETÉN PARA EJES
120 0007-2599-750 2 DICHTRING
8061-484 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
130 0007-1860-750 1 DICHTRING
Ausgabe / Edition GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
06.07.2016 140 0015-0124-000 1 HOCHDRUCKFETT
GRASA ALTA PRESIÓN
150 0015-0124-000 1 HOCHDRUCKFETT
GRASA ALTA PRESIÓN
Seite/Page
39/42
10 8408-3144-020 1 HALTER
8408-3243-040 HOLDER
DREHZAHLINITIATOR VOLLST. SOPORTE
20 0005-3535-900 2 KABELBAND
SPEED SENSOR, COMPL.
CABLE TAPE
CINTA PARA CABLES
30 0018-6871-860 2 ROHRSCHELLE
PIPE CLIP
ABRAZADERA DE TUBO
ALLEN SCREW
50 0005-4463-630 1 REDUKTION
REDUCTION
REDUCCIÓN
60 0005-4147-280 1 KLEMMENKASTEN
TERMINAL BOX
CAJA DE BORNES
70 0005-3666-040 1 KENNZEICHNUNGSSCHILD
Typ / Model IDENTIFICATION PLATE
PLACA DE IDENTIFICACIÓN
UCD 205-00-00_30 80 0005-4485-900 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0005-0868-000 1 NAEHERUNGSINITIATOR
PROXIMITY SWITCH
8061-484 INICIADOR DE APROXIMACIÓN
ALLEN SCREW
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n TORNILLO CILÍNDRICO
8061-484 HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
Ausgabe / Edition HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
06.07.2016
Seite/Page
41/42
10 8408-1147-000 1 SATZ ISOLIERPLATTE
8408-1143-000 SET OF INSULATION PLATE
SATZ SCHALLSCHUTZTEILE JUEGO DE PLACAS AISLANTES
SET OF SOUND INSULATION PARTS
Typ / Model
UCD 205-00-00_30

8061-484

8061-484
Ausgabe / Edition
06.07.2016
Seite/Page
Type: NM038BY
Machine no.: D8384292-D8384293
Commission: 7300001704/000100
Date of release: 11.07.2016
Reference: 4580129471
Operating and Maintenance Instructions

Original Instructions
NETZSCH Pumps & Systems - Solutions you can trust v

The NETZSCH Group is an owner-managed technology company which operates
internationally and has its registered office in Germany.
The Business Units – Analyzing & Testing, Grinding & Dispersing and Pumps & Systems
– stand for tailored solutions of the highest quality. Over 2,500 employees at 130 sales
and production centres in 23 countries all over the world ensure that expert service is
always available close to our customers.
With
NEMO® progressing cavity pumps, TORNADO ® rotary lobe pumps, screw pumps,
grinding machines, dosing systems and accessories the Pumps & Systems Business Unit
offers customised and sophisticated solutions for the most diverse applications on a
global level.
© NETZSCH Pumpen & Systeme GmbH - Subject to technical changes.
NETZSCH Pumpen & Systeme GmbH

Geretsrieder Str. 1
84478 Waldkraiburg, Germany
Tel.: +49 - (0) 8638 - 63 0
Fax: +49 - (0) 8638 - 67 999
Email: info.nps@netzsch.com www.netzsch-pumpen.de
PAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0.0
PAGE
1 Safety Precautions 1.0
2 Description 2.0
3 Packaging, Transportation, Storage 3.0
4 Installation Instructions 4.0
5 Start-up 5.0
IPP - EN - en_30100_0001 - NM038BY - D8384292-D8384293 - 7300001704 - 000100 - NPSAGNM02 - 002.ETL13996 N 11.07.2016 17:58:33
6 Temporary Shutdown 6.0
7 Maintenance 7.0
8 Trouble-Shooting and Remedying 8.0
9 Dismantling and Assembly of the Pump Housing 9.0
10 Dismantling and Assembly of the Rotating Parts 10.0
11 Dismantling and Assembly of the Connecting Shaft 11.0
12 Dismantling and Assembly of the Shaft Sealing 12.0
13 Dismantling and Assembly of Special Units 13.0
14 Recommended Spare Parts 14.0
15 Sectional Drawings, Spare Parts List, Data Sheet 15.0
16 Contacts 16.0
17 Certificates / Annexes 17.0
issued: 30.08.2013 Revision: 7 text no.

copy to: 30100
3
Important Note
These Operating and Maintenance Instructions are to familiarise the user/operator
with the machine and the use of the machine.
This Instruction Manual:
• is only valid for this machine (see Machine Number and Order Confirmation
Number)
• contains important information on how to operate the machine safely, properly and
efficiently. Observing these instructions will help to avoid danger, to reduce repair
costs and downtimes and to increase the reliability and life of the machine
• must be read and applied by any person responsible for carrying out work with and
on the machine, such as:
- operation (including setting up, troubleshooting in the course of work, disposal of
production waste, fuels and consumables)
- maintenance (including service, inspection and repair)
- transport
• must always be available wherever the machine is in use
• shall be completed by the user or their authorized personnel to comply with
national requirements for the prevention of accidents and protection of the
environment
In addition to these operating instructions and the mandatory rules and regulations
for accident prevention and environmental protection in the country and place of use
of the machine, the generally recognized rules for safe and proper working of
machinery must also be observed.
4
PAGE
1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1.0
1 Safety Instructions
This manual contains basic instructions which must be observed when installing,
operating and servicing the machine / equipment. It is essential therefore for the user /
installer or responsible technician to read the manual thoroughly prior to installation
and operation.
A copy of the manual must always be at hand where the machine / equipment is
being used. In addition to the general safety instructions listed in this main section on
safety, it is necessary to observe the special safety rules included in other sections of
the manual, eg. for private use.
1.1 Safety Signs

The signs below are printed in the manual as general hazard / danger symbols to mark
those safety instructions whose non-observance can result in danger to personnel or

to the machine / equipment. These signs are:
Danger to general public
Risk of electric shock
Risk of injury from machinery
Danger from suspended loads
Damage to machinery
Risk of injury to eyes: goggles required.
issued: 24.05.2013 87 text no.

copy to: 30100
5
PAGE
1.0R
1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Warning plates located directly on the pump/equipment showing for example

- the correct direction of rotation
- the fluid connections
must always be observed and kept completely legible.
1.2 Personnel Qualifications and Training

Operating, maintenance, inspection and installation staff must possess the appropriate
qualifications for their work. Areas of responsibility, scope of authority and staff
supervision must be defined by the user.
If personnel do not have the necessary knowledge they must receive training and
instruction. If necessary, the user of the machine can arrange for such training and
instruction to be provided by NETZSCH or the supplier.
The user must also make sure that the content of the manual is fully understood by
the staff concerned.
Transportation
The responsible person must be familiar with the accident prevention regulations for
any hoisting gear and lifting accessories to be used.
Personal should be given appropriate instruction prior to undertaking transportation,
hoisting and lifting.
Mounting a drive
The responsible person must be trained and qualified as an industrial
mechanic/technician.
Installation
Start up, operation and maintenance

The responsible person must be familiar with the design and functioning of the plant
in which the machine is being installed.
They must understand the operating principle of the machine and have read the
manual and the safety instructions before commencing work on the machine.
The operators have to be trained for the operation of the machine.
Repair work
They must have knowledge of and be aware of the specific details of the machine as
detailed in this manual. Unskilled personnel must be trained and any repair work
undertaken must be checked by the responsible person.
text no. issued: 24.05.2013 Revision: 8

30100 copy to:
6
PAGE
1.3 Dangers arising from Non-Observance of the Safety Instructions

Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in danger to personnel as well as
to the environment and damage to the machine.
Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in the loss of claims for
compensation.
Non-observance of the safety instructions can, for example, have the following
consequences:
▲ Failure of correct functioning of the machine
▲ Failure of essential maintenance and servicing
▲ Danger to personnel from electricity, machinery and chemicals
▲ Danger to the environment from leakage of hazardous substances
1.4 Safety Conscious Working

In addition to the safety instructions given in this manual, it is essential to observe the
national accident prevention directives currently in force and any of the users own
internal regulations concerning work and safety.
1.5 Safety Instructions for the User / Operator

▲ If there is a risk of danger from any hot or cold machine component, the user must
fit protective guards to prevent such components from being touched (according to
Standard EN 563).
▲ Protective guards fitted to prevent contact with moving parts (eg. couplings) must
be in position when the machine is in use.
▲ Leakages (eg. from a shaft seals) of hazardous materials (eg. explosive, toxic, hot
material, etc.) must be discharged and disposed of in such a way that neither
personnel nor the environment are placed at risk. Legal directives must be
observed.
▲ All possible danger from electricity must be eliminated (eg. refer to the regulations
in force of your local power supply company).
A NEMO® pump is reliable and of high quality. Especially if in a NEMO® pump, parts
made of technical ceramics, such as the NEMO CERATEC® ceramic rotor, have been
built in, this guarantees for a long economic life-time.
The ceramic rotor and other ceramic parts in a pump can cause a danger if they are
not used properly and as intended.
The user has to investigate, what consequences are linked to a malfunction of the
ceramic materials and if safety measures have to be taken to protect people and
environment.
Beyond the warranty of our standard business conditions and the assured
characteristics named in the confirmation of order, any liability for - consequential -
harm caused by defect is excluded.

copy to: 30100
7
PAGE
1.1R
1.6 Safety Instructions for Maintenance, Inspection and Installation

The user must ensure that all maintenance, inspection and installation work is carried
out by authorized and qualified personnel who understand the operating instructions
and are adequately trained.
Work on the machine must only be carried out with the machine stopped and
electrical power supply turned off and isolated. The machine must be depressurised
and drained and must have cooled down. All procedures detailed in this manual for
stopping the machine must always be adhered to.
Machines used to harmful media must be decontaminated.
Immediately after the maintenance work is finished all safety devices and guards must
be re-installed and any safety trips must be tested.
Before putting the machine back into operation the instructions detailed in the "Start-
up" section of this manual should be observed.
1.7 Unauthorized Modifications and Manufacture of Spares

Modifications or changes to the machine are only permissible with the written
agreement of NETZSCH. Original spare parts and accessories authorized by NETZSCH
ensure safety. The use of spare parts and accessories not authorized by NETZSCH will
invalidate any claim for resulting consequential damages.
For operational and machine safety reasons the delivered machine may only be
operated with original spare parts and supporting materials according to guidelines by
NETZSCH.
1.8 Specified Use, Improper Application, Operational and Machinery

Safety
Delivered machine is only guaranteed safe for the intended use specified.
The machine was designed in accordance with the prescribed conditions of use. The
limits of use are stated in the order documentation and must be observed and
adhered to.
In accordance with current EC-law regarding the operator’s liability for plant and the
authority to operate such plant, NETZSCH is required to stet the conditions under
which the machine can be operated:
Spare and wearing parts from other manufacturers are not authorised for
use in the machine and the use of these is contrary to the instructions
contained in this operating manual.
If spare and wearing parts from another manufacturer are used adverse effects on
operational and working safety as well as reliability cannot be excluded.
Responsibility for all adverse effects on the operation of the machine, any associated
equipment and the plant and the consequences of such effects is the liability of the
user.

30100 copy to:
8
PAGE
For operational safety of its products NETZSCH Pumpen & systeme GmbH operates
extensive quality and safety procedures together with continuous production control
in the development and production of both pumps and spare parts to ensure
component compatibility and suitability for use.
1.9 Specific Points for the Use of a NEMO® Pump

A NEMO® pump must be used for the purpose only for which it was sold.
If you change or wish to change the process medium, you must check with either the
supplier or manufacturer that the pump is suitable for the new medium. This is
especially important with aggressive, poisonous or otherwise hazardous substances.
Pump criteria include:
1. Compatibility with the pumped media
2. Suitability for seal design / material, especially the shaft seal

3. Resistance to pressure and temperature of the media
The NEMO® pump is a positive displacement pump and as such is able to generate
pressures that exceed the pumps design limit.
A blockage or the chance closure of a valve in the discharge line can cause a pressure
rise manifold as high as can be tolerated by the installation. This can result in
the bursting of pipes, which must be avoided especially in the case of dangerous
media.
Corresponding safety equipment must therefore be installed, for example an
emergency stop button, a pressure relief valve with return pipe or a bursting disc.
During maintenance and repair work on the pump please note the following:
1. Ensure that the pump drive can not be turned on without authorization
2. When opening the pump follow the instructions for handling the medium (eg.
protective clothing, no smoking etc)
3. Before putting the pump back into operation ensure that all guards and other
safety devices (eg. drive–belt protection, coupling protection) are properly re–
installed
Always consider and observe your safety during operation, maintenance

and installation of the machine. Please adhere to the EC-Directive for
Machinery including national regulations and follow the European
Standard EN 292 with the accident prevention rules laid down by the
trade unions and other appropriate technical institutions.

copy to: 30100
9
PAGE
1.2R
1.10 Notes on Inspection and Repair

The statutory regulations on safety at work, accident prevention regulations and
environmental protection regulations oblige all commercial undertakings to protect
their employees, persons and the environment from the negative effects of handling
hazardous materials.
Important:
Machines and their parts may only be inspected / repaired if the ”Safety clearance
certificate” has been filled in correctly and fully by authorised and qualified
personnel and is available.
The ”Safety clearance certificate” can be downloaded from our website at:
”www.netzschpumpen.de” or please contact our service team (see section 16).
If special safety precautions are required when emptying and cleaning the machine,
the necessary information must be provided in the certificate.
The ”Safety clearance certificate” is part of the inspection/repair order and must
always be filled in and signed when NETZSCH is to carry out inspection/repair.
However, the reserved right of NETZSCH to reject this order remains unaffected.

30100 copy to:
10
PAGE
1.11 Instructions concerning explosion protection

The instructions below are to be considered and kept to when using pumps
in potentially explosive areas in order to guarantee durable explosion
protection of the pumps and avoid any danger of ignition.
The pumps have the approval for applications in areas II 2G IIB T4 X (-20 ≤
Ta ≤ +60 °C), II 2G IIB T3 X (-20 ≤ Ta ≤ +60 °C), II 2GD IIB T4 X (130 °C) X (-20
≤ Ta ≤ +60 °C), II 2GD IIB T3 (195 °C) X (-20 ≤ Ta ≤ +60 °C) or I M2 c X (+5 ≤
Ta ≤ +40 °C) according to the directive 94/9/EC (ATEX) [Ta = ambient
temperature].
It has to be taken into account that in case of aggregates the components
(e.g. gears, couplings) mounted on the pump must comply with the
regulations RL 94 /9 / EC as well. The relevant documentation concerning
these components has to be considered.

The application area of aggregates is determined by the application area of
the mounted component with the lowest approval and thus may deviate
from the allowed application area of the pump.
max. surface temperature for max. temperature of the con-

Temperature category
dust veying product
T4 130 °C 100 °C
T3 195 °C 165 °C
T2 295 °C 265 °C
T1 445 °C 415 °C
The declaration of conformity, as defined by the ATEX directive 94/9/EC, will

become invalid if spare parts other than the ones manufactured or approved by
NETZSCH are used.
The manufacturer's warranty, as granted in the ordering documents, will also become
invalid, because the safety of operator and/or machine can no longer be guaranteed.
The maximum conveying product temperatures apply when mechanical seals of

Messrs. Burgmann with carbide - carbide and carbide - carbon as sliding material
combinations are used.
In the case of other manufacturers or other sliding material combinations it is
necessary to consult the manufacturer.

copy to: 30100
11
PAGE
1.3R
1. Assembly and repair in potentially explosive areas

When performing assembly and repair work, it has to be seen to that no danger of
ignition arises especially during heating up the pump parts. This means e.g. heating up
by explosion-proof heating devices or exclusively in non-explosive areas. The
temperature of the heated part and the ignition temperature of the materials which
cause the danger of explosion have to be considered.
2. Dry-running protection
Under no circumstances is the pump to run dry. The pump is to be equipped with an
appropriate dry-running protection device.
The device for dry-running protection should be self-regulating.
This means that this device can give alarm signals and/or switch off the pump also in
case of failures in its own control system.
3. Overpressure protection
The pump must not be loaded over the maximum allowable pressure. The pump is to
be equipped with an appropriate overpressure protection device. The pump must not
convey against a closed slide valve.
The overpressure protection device should be self-regulating.
4. Drives
The drives must be adjusted to the performance of each pump. In the case of a
blocking of the pump, the drives must be turned off automatically by means of a
motor protection unit.
5. Potential equalization
All conductive parts of the pump are to be integrated in the potential equalization of
the pumping set unless the conductive connection to the ground potential is
guaranteed by the drive or connecting shafts or otherwise.
6. Stator
The stator is to be regularly checked for wear.
When the allowable wear limit is reached, the stator is to be replaced. Before
exchanging the conveying product, the pump operator has to consult the
manufacturer concerning the durability of the stator unless the stator has already
been confirmed for the intended application.
Inspection and maintenance interval of the stator:
- in the case of an operating time of > 16 h/day, at least twice a year
- in the case of an operating time of < 16 h/day, at least once a year.

30100 copy to:
12
PAGE
7. Joints / joint lubrication

The sealing and the lubrication of the joints are to be regularly checked. If necessary,
the seals and the lubricants are to be replaced.
Inspection and maintenance interval of the joints:
- in the case of an operating time of > 16 h/day, at least twice a year
- in the case of an operating time of < 16 h/day, at least once a year.
8. Inspection after initial startup

The aspects relevant for ensuring the explosion protection (such as lubrication and
wear check) are to be checked six months after the initial startup of the pump at the
latest.
9. Materials
Although being allowed as material for the pumps, aluminum should be avoided in
potentially explosive areas.
The pumps may only be used if, under the particular operating conditions, the
materials are resistant to mechanical and/or chemical influences or corrosion such that
the explosion protection will be maintained.
10. Gland
If a gland packing is applied it has to be observed that the permitted temperature
corresponding to the temperature category is not exceeded. Recommendation: fasten
the screws of the stuffing box gland only with low torque (approx. 5 Nm).
11. Dust layer

No dust layer of more than 5 mm is allowed on the pumps. Rotating parts (like drive
shaft, bearing carrier and drive stool of paddle agitators) must not run in a dust layer.
In respect of this the pumps have to be controlled at regular intervals and if necessary
the dust has to be removed.

copy to: 30100
13
14
This page is intentionally left blank.
E M O
N
PAGE
2 DESCRIPTION AND GENERAL DATA 2.0
N
P U
M P E
2 Description
The NEMO® pump is a progressing cavity Rotor
Rotor-
pump. STATOR position
Stellung
The main components which determine the
ROTOR
system discovered by Professor René Moineau 0°/360°
are a rotating part, called the rotor and a sta-
tic part, called the stator.
The rotor is a helical screw with an extreme-
ly large pitch, large thread depth and small
centre diameter with round cross-section for
1/2-geometry and elliptical cross-section for
2/3-geometry. The stator has a two start or
resp. 3 start thread and is double or resp. 1.5
the pitch length of the rotor. This provides 90°
space for the medium between the rotor and

stator. When the rotor turns round inside the
stator the medium moves continuously from
the inlet to the outlet.
The universal NEMO® pump system unifies
many positive characteristics of other pump
types:
180°
■ Like centrifugal pumps NEMO® pumps
have no suction or pressure valves, but do
have a stable flow rate in proportion to the
number of revolutions.
■ Like piston pumps NEMO® pumps have a
suction capability of up to 8.5 m vacuum
metric.
■ Like membrane and peristaltic pumps the 270°
NEMO® pump can transport every type of
inhomogenous, gaseous and abrasive media,
as well as those that are not of a liquid con-
sistency or contain solids and/or fibrous mate-
rial.
■ Like gear pumps and screw pumps the
NEMO® pump is capable of coping with high
medium viscosities.
■ Like piston, membrane, gear or screw Length and cross-sections through the rotor
pumps the NEMO® pump can perform dosing and stator with 1/2-geometry during a
operations. rotation.
Continued Page 2.0R
Date Name Signed Revision: 2

issued 03.08.98 Mangel Substitute for issue
approved 04.08.98 Hantschk of 18.03.94
released 05.08.98 Hantschk
text no. 30100 GB
copy to: 95
15
PAGE
2.0R
2 DESCRIPTION AND GENERAL DATA
1/2-geometry
2/3-geometry
Length and cross-sections through the stator with rotor
with reduced stator wall thickness
2.2 General Data
Noise emissions:
The maximum permitted noise emission level at a work place is 70 dB (A).
The noise level was measured in accordance with DIN Standard 45635-24-01-KL2
to assure that the pump does not exceed 70 dB (A).
Noises generated by the drive and pipes are not included in the above
emission value.
A prerequisite for the noise emission level of ≤ 70 dB (A) is that the pump
is operated in a cavity free regime and is bolted to a concrete base.
Revision: 4 Date Name Signed

Substitute for issue issued 04.11.98 Mangel
of 05.08.98 approved 05.11.98 Denk
GB text no. 30100
copy to: 95
16
E M O
N
PAGE
3 PACKAGING, TRANSPORTATION, STORAGE 3.0
N
P U
M P E
3 Packaging, Transportation, Storage

3.1 Packaging and Transportation
NEMO® pumps are shipped in railroad containers or crates

unless the customer specifies otherwise.
The packings are labelled and symbols give the handling instructions
in accordance with DIN 55402.
On receipt check for any transport damages.
Transport damages should be reported to the transporter immediately.
The pumps should be transported as closely as possible to the location
of installation and only there should they be uncrated.
Uncrated horizontal pumps should be lifted by using a shackle which

can be attached to the baseplate. The bolt holes of the frame or
the lifting lugs attached to the baseplate could be used as shown on
the installation drawing.
Vertical pumps should be lifted by using the bolt down holes,

lifting lugs or shackles attached to the baseplate. This is shown on
the installation drawing. For most applications, the drive is mounted
on top of the pump.
Be careful when lifting top heavy pumps. The centre of gravity may be
above the points where the lifting gear is attached to. If the case, secure
additionally against tipping over!
Vertical pumps should not be deposited unless they are secured vertically.
Hazards of tipping! Deposit only in horizontal position!
It is essential to avoid that the total pump unit be suspended with

eye bolts of the motor or gear box. These eye bolts should be used
for lifting the motor and/or the gear box only.
The Accident Prevention Rules, Section 18.4 relating to lifting accessories

for the lifting of loads (VBG 9a) must be strictly adhered to.
Because of the variety of possible pump designs and applications, only

general instructions can be given here. These should be good enough
for experienced assemblymen or transportation experts.
When in doubt, please ask for detailed information on the pump unit
concerned.
Continued Page 3.0R

approved 24.06.98 Denk of 07.12.94
released 25.06.98 Denk
text no. 30100 GB
copy to: 95
17
PAGE
3.0R
3 PACKAGING, TRANSPORTATION, STORAGE
When moving the pump or unit on wheels strictly attend to the following:
■ Pad lock the motor drive and secure against unintended starting up.
■ Move the pump unit carefully and slowly, especially where the ground is
uneven. Hazards of tipping!
■ Ensure a stable position of the pump or unit at the operating /storage place
and secure it by actuating all clamping devices on all the wheels or rollers
against voluntary moving away.
■ Where fitted loosely, carefully watch the pipe bends when pumping.
Power of repulsion!
■ Where necessary, secure the pump unit additionally with support blocks.
3.2 Storage
The pumps are preserved for transport unless specified otherwise.
In cases of longer storage the pumps should be handled as follows
until installation:
■ Stator:
If the pump is not to be used immediately, then the elastomer along
the contact line between rotor and stator may become permanently
distorted (compression-set). This will increase the break away torque.
Therefore, the stator should be removed and kept separately in a clean,
cool and dry environment.
Standard DIN 7716 summarizes detailed information on the storage
of rubber products, some of which is gathered here, and the following
notice applies to a storage for a period of up to six months.
General
Most of the rubber products may change their physical properties
under unfavourable conditions or if treated improperly, which will
result in a shorter lifetime.
Or they may become useless through excessive hardening, aging,
regenerating or permanent deformation, also because of blistering,
cracking or other damages appearing on the surfaces.
The changes may occur under the influence of oxygen, ozone, heat,
light, humidity, solvents or because of storing the products under
tension.
If stored and treated properly, the rubber products will keep their
properties, even over a long period of time (some years), almost
unchanged.
This does, however, not apply to uncured rubber compounds.
Continued Page 3.1

of 07.12.94 approved 24.06.98 Denk
GB text no. 30100
copy to: 95
18
E M O
N
PAGE
3 PACKAGING, TRANSPORTATION, STORAGE 3.1
N
P U
M P E
Store room
The environment in which rubber products are being kept must be
cool, dry, free of dust and rather airy, and they must not be stored in
the open, not even in a weather sheltered space.
Rubber products should be kept in surroundings not having less than
minus 10 °C and not more than plus 15 °C.
Store rooms should not be damp, and it must be ensured that there
will be no condensation.
Most favourable is an environment offering a relative humidity under
65 %.
Rubber products must be protected against light, particularly direct
sunlight or artificial light when having a high UV portion.
They should furthermore be kept away from ventilation, especially
draught, by wrapping them up.
As ozone is very aggressive and harmful there should be no store

room used which houses equipment likely to produce ozone, e.g.
electric motors or other equipment which might bring about sparks
or other electrical discharges.
There must be no solvents, oil, grease, lubricants or any chemicals
kept in a store room.
■ Rotor
Please support with wooden blocks and cover up against harm
from mechanical impact.
For rotors of RCC (material number 1.2436):
coat the surfaces with protective grease to avoid rusting.
■ Shaft Sealing by packing gland
Remove the gland and coat the exposed shaft surface
with grease.
■ Pump parts in stainless steel
No grease coating necessary.
■ Other, non-coated pump parts
Protect with grease.
■ Drives
Please observe the drive supplier's instructions.
Date Name Signed Revision:

approved 24.06.98 Denk of
text no. 30100 GB
copy to: 95
19
20
E M O
N
PAGE
4 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 4.0
N
P U
M P E
4 Mounting and Installation

If the NEMO® pump was stored and the rotor grease protected:
Remove the grease before installing the stator.
Clean the rotor thoroughly in order to avoid unsuitability of
the grease with the stator material and the pumping medium.
Screw the pump at all fixing points (bearing housing / drive
stool, end stud, support feet) using all fixing bores securely
down to the sub-structure (ground plate, machine frame,
foundation etc.).
4.1 Direction of Rotation

The direction of rotation of the pump is given on the model plate
and in the order confirmation. The direction of delivery of the

NEMO® pump is a function of the direction of rotation.
Changes must be agreed upon and confirmed by the supplier.
4.2 Pressure
If not explicitly confirmed otherwise in the order confirmation,
the maximum permissible pressure (e.g. when turning clockwise)
inside the pump housing (A)
– for models with pump housing of cast iron 6 bar
– for models with welded pump housing 10 bar.
The maximum permissible pressures inside the end flange (B)
is a function of the design applied for connections
– with flange: maximum nominal pressure (e.g. PN 16)
– with threaded internal socket: maximum 25 bar
– with DIN 11851 "dairy" thread up to DN 100 for one or two
stage pumps: max. 12 bar, for multi stage pumps: max. 25 bar
– for other versions: maximum permissible pressure of the socket
connection, but not more than 6 bar per pump stage, depending
on the stator installed.
4.3 Piping System

■ Arrange suction and pressure pipes so that when the pump is not
running, the medium is still present before and after the pump.
Sufficient media should remain inside in order to lubricate the
pump during restart.
Continued Page 4.0R

text no. 30100 GB
copy to: 95
21
PAGE
4 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
4.0R
■ The installation of a removable distance piece between the end flange (B)
and the pipe work is recommended in order to make the dismantling of
the stator easy. The distance piece (see sketch) needs to have a minimum
"ABL" disassembly length the values of which are shown in the table
below, depending on the pump size and the number of stages.
B A
STATOR
ABL
Disassembly length ABL in mm:
Number of stages
Pump
size 1 *) 2 3 4
015 90 160 230 310
021 130 230 340 450
031 170 310 450 590
038 230 430 630 830
045 270 500 730 960
053 320 600 880 1170
063 370 690 1010 1330
076 420 800 1170 1540
090 500 950 1390 1840
105 630 1180 1740 -
125 740 1400 - -
*) for one stage pumps with L or P geometry the ABL

values of 2 stage pumps are valid
Continued Page 4.1
Revision: Date Name Signed

of approved 20.06.03 Denk
GB text no. 30100
copy to: 95
22
PAGE
4 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 4.1
The disassembly length "ABL" is also shown in the arrangement drawings

in accordance with our Standard QSH V - TB 01 - 002.
■ Clean the pipe work and rinse thoroughly before installing the pump.
■ Connect the pipe work ensuring that no external stress attacks the
pump body. The installation of compensators between the pump and the
pipework is recommended:
– No risk of damage to the pump housing from pipelines "resting" on
the pump.
– No risk of damage to the pump housing through vibrating pipelines.
■ The twisting loads (Fx, Fy, Fz) and bending loads (Mx, My, Mz) permitted
to be put on the suction/discharge flange comply with the requirements

of API 676 and exceed the requirements of EN ISO 14847. They are shown
in the table below.
DN
z x
z x
DN
Continued Page 4.1R

issued 19.06.09 Marchionini Substitute for issue
text no. 30100 GB
copy to: 95
23
PAGE
4 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
4.1R
Pump type Standard nominal diameter Fx, Fy, Fz Mx, My, Mz
NM DN [N] [Nm]
015
(32) G1¼” 416 224
021
31 50 650 350
38 65 845 455 Screwed joints must not

be charged with loads
45
80 1040 560 which may result in
53
tightening or loosening
63 100 1300 700 these joints
76 125 1625 875
90
150 1950 1050
105
125 200 2600 1400
4.4 Shaft Sealing
■ Where applicable, ensure that adequate supply lines for the buffer,
flushing or quenching fluid for the shaft seals are connected before
the pump is put into operation.
For more details see Section 7.4!
4.5 Electrical Connection

All work relating to electricity shall only be made by authorized and
qualified personnel and it should be in compliance with the requirements
of the relevant national regulations!
In particular for control systems should the latest version of the

EC-Directive for Machinery 98/37/EEC, Annex I, Section 1.2 Controls
be carefully observed!
Note for frequency converter operation:
It is absolutely necessary to connect the PTC-resistors of the drive in case
of frequency converter operation to protect the drive against overheating.

Substitute for issue issued 08.02.2011 Marchionini
of 31.03.04 approved 08.02.2011 Denk
GB text no. 30100
copy to: 95
24
E M O
N
PAGE
5 START-UP 5.0
N
P U
M P E
5 Start-up
The NEMO® pump design requires strict attention to the following:
Never run the NEMO® pump dry!

A few rotations in dry condition
will damage the stator!
■ Before starting up for the first time, fill the pump with medium.
In the case of high viscosity media fill with a liquid.
Pump priming is vital to ensure lubrication of the rubber stator.
Fill the piping on the pump suction side.
In anti–clockwise rotation only: Fill the pump housing.
The NEMO® pump is a progressing cavity pump which can produce

pressures that may cause the bursting of vessels or pipes.
The power transmission train (shaft, coupling rod, joints, rotor)
of the pump may be overloaded thus resulting in damage
or breakage.
Also the pump housing parts with their connections may be
overloaded and break. There is a table in Section 4 of these
Maintenance and Operating Instructions showing the
pressure resistance of the pump housing parts.
Never run the pump against a closed inlet or outlet valve!
■ Open valves and vents before starting the pump!

■ Check the direction of rotation by briefly switching on
the pump motor.

text no. 30100 GB
copy to:
25
26
E M O
N
PAGE
6 TEMPORARY SHUTDOWN 6.0
N
P U
M P E
6 Temporary Shutdown
■ After stopping the pump empty and if necessary rinse it
or resp. apply anti-freezing agent if
– the medium might freeze due to the temperature surrounding

the pump. Especially where there is a danger of frost if the pump
is installed outside a building
– the medium tends to solidify or harden
– the medium tends to glue up the shaft seal.
■ Stator:
When stored for a long period, the elastomer along the contact
line between the rotor and stator may become permanently
distorted (compression-set).
This will increase the break away torque. For this reason, the stator
should be removed (please observe Section 9!), and stored in a cool,
dry place in air tight package to give protection against light and air.
■ Rotor:
Remove ceramic rotors (please observe Section 10!) and store away,
safe in the original packing.
Support other rotors on wooden blocks and cover to protect them
from mechanical damage, after the stator has been removed.
Rotors made of RCC (material number 1.2436):

Protect the rotor surfaces against corrosion with protective grease.
Remove the grease before re–installing the stator and
clean the rotor thoroughly in order to avoid unsuitability of
the grease with the pumping medium or the stator material.
■ Stand-by pump:
A stand-by pump is sometimes used as a back-up for the main
pump and, when standing idle for longer periods, should be
operated from time to time. The pump may otherwise become
seized when being started up. This is due to compression set
i.e. distortion of the stator against the surface of the rotor.

text no. 30100 GB
copy to: 95
27
28
E M O
N
PAGE
7 MAINTENANCE 7.0
N
P U
M P E
7 Maintenance
7.1 Pumps in General
■ The pumps should be regularly rinsed or cleaned if deposits of medium

are likely to build up (sedimentation).
If the pump needs to be opened to do this, ensure that the pump

and motor are switched off and cannot be turned on accidently
(eg. by removing the fuse).
Periodical standstill to allow for cleaning during operation depends on the

medium and type of operation.
■ The pump can be cleaned:
– through the cleaning ports provided

in the pump housing
– manually by dismantling the pump
– automatically (CIP cleaning) for special

housings with a flushing section
(important instructions for CIP procedures
are given in Section 5 (START UP).

text no. 30100 GB
copy to: 95
29
30
E M O
N
PAGE
7 MAINTENANCE 7.1
N
P U
M P E
7.2 Lubrication
The NEMO® pump does not require

frequent lubrication.
■ Maintenance of the drive should be carried out according

to the drive manufacturers instructions.
■ Maintenance
– where no manufacturers instructions are available and
– when normal conditions of use exist:
– Strip down the drive unit

– Remove the bearings
– Clean all parts

– Renew the lubricant
every 5000 operating hours or at least every two years.
Special lubricants are often specified for mechanically

controlled variable speed drives.
It is therefore important to follow the drive manufacturers
maintenance instructions.
Pump model with “mechanical seals” (sectional drawing W251.000):

The lubricating should be done:
■ when putting into operation
■ after every 350 hours of operation
■ before and after operation interruptions of 6 - 8 weeks.

issued 10.09.09 Marchionini Substitute for issue
text no. 30100 GB
copy to:
31
32
PAGE
7 MAINTENANCE 7.2
7.3 Lubricating the Joints

Journal Cross Joint and Pin Joint with SM-Pin Joint Seal
■ It is however advisable to change the oil and check the seals of the gear joints:
- when renewing worn joint parts
- when opening the pump for any reason.
The quantity of oil added per pin joint is

a function of the joint external diameter “D”:
Joint external diameter

Quantity of oil per joint
D [mm] Joint basic size
[cm3]
(see sketch)
28 NM 015 1,5
30 NM 021 2
40 NM 031 5
54 NM 038 15
65 NM 045 22
pin joint
76 NM 053 36
83 NM 063 78
102 NM 076 165
125 NM 090 205
148 NM 105 450
162 NM 125 470
journal cross joint: 175 NM 125 1650
D D
pin joint journal cross joint

copy to: 30100
33
PAGE
7.2R
7 MAINTENANCE
Lubricating Oil:
Designation
Seal
Industrial application according to Permitted Product
material
DIN 51502
CLP HC
“KLÜBER”
Food and Beverage FPM
460 KLÜBERSYNTH UH1 6-460 *)
Industry only EPDM
authorized under USDA H1
Authorized for use
in foodstuffs
FPM CLP “SHELL”
NBR 460 Omala 460
General Industry
CLP HC “KLÜBER”
EPDM
460 KLÜBERSYNTH UH1 6-460 *)
*) It is not quite harmless if swallowed in more than minor quantities.
At a sudden break in a joint up to 470 ml of lubricating oil together with metal

rubbings may enter the pumping medium. It is therefore of essential importance to
regularly check the state of the joint seals and renew in time, if necessary.
If the pin joints operate without lubricating oil or seals, there will be no risk of
contaminating the medium with oil. This operation, however, results in a higher
amount of rubbed off metal parts through wear on the joints. These metal rubbings
will inevitably and continuously come into contact with the pumping medium.

30100 copy to:
34
PAGE
7 MAINTENANCE
7.3
7.4 Shaft Sealing through Stuffing Box
7.4.1 Putting Into Operation

Before operation, it should be found out by visual check or on the order
confirmation whether the stuffing box housing is fitted with buffer fluid
connections and equipped with a buffer ring (7050).
With a buffer ring (7050) fitted between the packing rings and suitable
connection bores provided in the stuffing box
housing, it will be possible to proceed as follows: 7050
a) Adding a clear liquid as buffer medium

under slight excess pressure. This applies
for dirty or dangerous media or for the
exclusion of air at suction operation of
the pump.
b) Adding a lubricant.
c) Adding a cooling or warming fluid
or steam.
For a) and b) it is usually enough to just add
the buffer medium. However, the second connection
in the stuffing box housing should then be closed off.
For c) it is necessary to feed in and carry away the medium via the two
connection bores.
If for a compelling reason a stuffing box with buffer ring has to be
operated without a medium as described in a) to c), it is essential to
ensure that all the connection bores in the stuffing box are tightened
with plugs (please note the material resistance!). This is especially
important when the pump has to prime as otherwise air will be drawn
in through the bores.
Stuffing box packings have the function of minimizing, but not totally
eliminating the escape of medium. A lubricant or liquid coating is
required to reduce the shaft wear to a minimum and dissipate the heat
caused by friction.
Avoid touching the rotating shaft.
Risk of injury where the pin is visible!
The stuffing box gland should therefore be
tightened only gently by hand prior to
putting into operation. A high initial rate of
leakage should be permitted, particularly
with PTFE or PTFE–impregnated packings;
50 – 200 drops/min depending on the
medium and sliding velocity.
Continued Page 7.3R

approved 07.02.95 Eitler of 18.03.94
text no. 30100 GB
copy to: 95
35
PAGE
7.3R
7 MAINTENANCE
During the 30 minute running–in time

the minimum leakage rate should be set
by tightening the gland nuts in steps
approx. 1/6th of a turn each.
The stuffing box temperature should not
rise above normal, about 20 – 60 °C above the
temperature of the medium is permissible.
If there is a sudden jump in temperature and a notable reduction in

leakage, the gland must be slackened immediately and running–in
repeated.
The attainable leakage amounts depend, among other things, on the

medium, pressure, temperature, leakage gap, sliding velocity, shaft
movement and the packing material used.
In the event of increased peripheral leakage i.e. around the stuffing box
outer edges, the pump should be stopped and the packing rings briefly
compressed. Then the gland should be slackened and running–in
repeated.
7.4.2 Replacement
Please observe Safety Precautions 1.5, 1.6 und 1.8 !
Removal of old packing

After releasing the pressure on
the unit and removing the gland,
use the packing extractor to remove
all the old packing rings and debris
right down to the bottom of the
stuffing box.
Preparation of the stuffing box area

Thoroughly clean the stuffing box area and the shaft surface.
Replace corroded or worn shafts or sleeves.
Check the shaft bearing and the shaft concentricity.
Examine the gap in the gland and stuffing box base.
To reduce an excessively large gap, insert a washer or disc in order
to prevent the packing material from being extruded into the gap.
An alternative is to use extrusion–resistant packing material for the
first and last packing ring.
Continued Page 7.4

of 18.03.94 approved 07.02.95 Eitler
GB text no. 30100
copy to: 95
36
PAGE
7 MAINTENANCE
7.4
Selection of grade and size of packing

Before installing the packing, check once again whether you have chosen
a packing suitable for the operating conditions required.
Cutting the packing rings
Exactly cut rings are required: a packing cutter ensures exactly cut rings.
If no cutter is available, proceed as follows:
The ring cutting length LM is determined by the shaft diameter d and
the packing width s under the following formula:
LM = (d+s) · X · π (mm)
X = allowance factor:
X = 1.10 for shaft dia ≤ 60 mm
X = 1.07 for shaft dia ≤ 100 mm
X = 1.04 for shaft dia > 100 mm

These are mean values which may vary with specific packing grades and
types of application.
Example:
Shaft diameter d = 60 mm
Stuffing box diameter D = 80 mm
Packing width s:
s = (D – d) / 2 = (80 – 60) / 2 = 10 mm
Cutting length LM:
LM = (d + s) · 1.10 · π = (60 + 10) · 1.10 · π = 242 mm
D
d
h
ca. 12° - 20° ca. 12° - 20°
L
s
LM
Straight cuts
For rotating shafts we generally recommend cutting the packing straight
and at right angles to the shaft. In order to achieve parallel contact of the
cut ends without a gap when closing the packing ring, the cutting angle
on both ends should be about 12–20°.
By applying the above formula or using the packing cutter, the cut ring
will be slightly overlong.
Continued Page 7.4 R

approved 07.02.95 Eitler of 18.03.94
text no. 30100 GB
copy to: 95
37
PAGE
7.4R
7 MAINTENANCE
In conjunction with the straight cut this results in a slight bracing of the
rings against the stuffing box outer diameter, thus preventing co–rotation
of the packing rings on the product side as well as leakage to the outside.
Installation
■ Carefully twist open the die–pressed rings in
axial and radial direction just far enough to
enable them to be easily slipped over
the shaft. Excessive bending of the rings can
cause structural damage through kinking.
■ Install each ring separately as follows:
– insert into stuffing box with cut ends first
– place around shaft with each next cut ends
turned by 90°
– push into stuffing box compartment by
means of assembly shells or gland.
Never use pointed objects for this operation!
Risk of damaging the shaft and deforming
the packing material!
■ Only continue inserting rings into the stuffing box until the gland
projects for guidance into the stuffing box compartment by at least
approx. 1/2 of the packing width “s”.
■ Now press the rings home with the gland and tighten the nuts by hand.
Where a buffer ring is fitted, check that it is correctly positioned to the
connection even after the gland has been tightened.
7.4.3 Important Notes

Correct:
Lubrication through liquid or lubricant.
Not correct:
Lack of lubrication by liquid due to excessive
tightening of the gland nuts; impregnation
squeezing.
Consequences
due to excessive gland compression:
Dry running, burning of packing; heavy
wear on the seals and therefore high leakage.
Source reference:
This material (abridged and adapted) is taken with kind approval from the catalogue
of Burgmann / Wolfratshausen. It is also valid for other gland packing manufacturers.

of 08.02.95 approved 23.05.95 Eitler
GB text no. 30100
copy to: 95
38
E M O
N
PAGE
7 MAINTENANCE 7.5
N
P U
M P E
7.5 Shaft Sealing through Single Mechanical Seal

There are various constructions of mechanical seals. Especially
advantageous is the use of standard mechanical seals according
to DIN 24960. These seals have regardless of their brand the
same fitting dimensions which makes them interchangeable.
Mechanical seals with a coil spring can only be used for pumps
which are run in one direction of rotation.
■ The seal specification of a NEMO® pump is recorded

on the order confirmation sheet.
■ Pumps fitted with direction dependent seals
should never be run in the opposite direction of
the rotation arrow.
■ If excessive leakages occur the spring tension and the seal surfaces
should be checked, and the seal be replaced, if necessary.
Single mechanical seals usually work without any additional
equipment. Their application range can be increased by operating
them with a rinsing or cooling system.
a) Quench, in accordance with ISO 5199, Appendix E, Plan Nos. 08, 09, 10
or 13 or API 610, Appendix D, Plan No. 62.
Quench is the designation commonly used in sealing engineering for an
arrangement that applies a non pressurized external fluid to the atmospheric
side of a mechanical seal. The quench is used when
– a single mechanical seal will not work or only to a
limited extent without auxiliary measures or
– a double mechanical seal with pressurized buffer
fluid is not necessary.
Recommended for the following applications:
– Low temperature
(danger of freezing) 2 1 Atmos-
phere
Product 3
– Operation in a vacuum
(dry running)
– Media which must be

isolated from the atmos-
phere (eg. due to build up
of solid deposits or because 4
of less severe damage to the
environment, like smell).
Continued Page 7.5R

text no. 30100 GB
copy to:
39
PAGE
7 MAINTENANCE
7.5R
Leakages will be transportet away by the quenching liquid.

In vacuum operation dry running of the seals is avoided.
No pressure higher than that of the pumped medium in front of the

mechanical seal is allowed to build up in the quenching area (1) behind
the mechanical seal. Otherwise the counter ring will be pushed out of
the housing. Free discharge from (2) is necessary!
Closing off the quenching area from the atmosphere can be done in three
ways:
1. In the case that high emission levels can be tolerated:
Through a throttle bush (4). Cooling liquid not permanently
used, only released from time to time.
2. In the case that medium emission levels can be tolerated:
By a radial shaft seal ring (3). Permanent radial shaft seal
lubrication through quenching liquid is necessary.
b) Top lubrication
Attention: For vertically installed pumps

with overhead drive as type NT:
On initial start-up the mechanical seal has not come in contact

with the medium. It runs therefore dry for a short period of time
until the air is displaced from the pump housing.
■ On first start–up and if stood idle
for longer periods
lubricate the mechanical seal before
switching on the pump.
■ Apply water, glycerine or oil depending
on their compatibility with the pumping
medium and the elastomer of the
mechanical seal.
■ Fill the quench cup of the mechanical
seal housing.
Revision: Date Name Signed

of approved 24.06.03 Denk
GB text no. 30100
copy to: 95
40
PAGE
8 TROUBLE-SHOOTING AND REMEDYING 8.0
8 Trouble-Shooting and Remedying
8.1 Trouble Chart

The chart overleaf lists possible problems as
- the type
- the likely reason / cause
- the remedy
▲ A problem may have various causes:

➞ several boxes in the vertical column are marked with a cross
▲ A reason / cause may result in various problems:
➞ several boxes in the horizontal column are marked with a cross
8.2 How do you trace the kind of problem to find the possible
cause?
- the column describing a possible problem shows one or several boxes marked with
a cross
- on the corresponding lines you will find the possible reasons / cause and some
hints how to handle the problem
(Thus the actual cause of the problem can be narrowed down and eventually
detected.)
- if you find further cross-marked boxes on one of the lines and should there appear
corresponding problems as well, then the likely cause of the problem has been
detected
▲ The table helps in finding the root of the problem and will give you the remedy if it is
straight forward.
For more complicated problems the manufacturer has to be consulted.

copy to: 30100
41
PAGE
8.0R
8 TROUBLE-SHOOTING AND REMEDYING
Possible Problems
The pumped medium is unstable
The pumped medium is too little
The pump is no longer starting
The pump is no longer sucking
The stator life time is too short

The rotor life time is too short
The pump is running loudly
The shaft seal is leaking

The pressure is too low
The drive is overloaded

The pump is stuck
Possible Causes Remedy

Fill the pump up, then pump through manually
In new pumps or stators:
x x the static friction is too great.
using a suitable appliance; if necessary use
glycerine as lubricant in the stator.
The pump electrical equipment is not Check order information. Examine electrical
x x x x compatible with the electrical supply.. installation (possibly 2 phase operation).
Measure the pressure with a manometer and
x x x x The pressure is too high. check against order details. Reduce the
pressure or change the drive.
Remove foreign bodies and eliminate possible
x x x There are foreign bodies in the pump.
damage.
The temperature of the liquid medium is too If the liquid medium temperature cannot be
x x x x x high, the stator is too ductile. lowered, use a reduced diameter rotor.
Check whether the liquid medium agrees with
The stator has swollen, the elastomer is not
x x x x compatible with the medium.
the order requirements. Possibly change stator
material.
The solids content of the medium is too high
x x x x and leads to blockages.
Increase the liquid part of the medium.
The liquid medium sediments or hardens Clean the pump and rinse through after each
x x x x x x when left to stand. run.
Increase the suction liquid level, prevent
x x x There is air in the suction pipe.
turbulance and air bubbles at the inlet.
x x x x The suction pipe is leaking. Check seals and tighten pipe connections.
Stuffing box: tighten or renew. Mechanical

x x x x The shaft seal is leaking.
seal: renew seals, eliminate solid deposits.
In the case of adjustable drives: increase the

x x The rpm is too low.
rpm. If necessary change the drive.
Pumpe (Stator) erst auf Betriebstemperatur
With reduced diameter rotors: operating
x x x temperature has not been reached.
erwärmen.Warm up the pump (stator) to
operating temperature first of all.
Decrease suction resistance, lower the
The suction is too great or pressure too low
x x x x x x (cavitation).
temperature of the liquid medium, install the
pump at a lower location.
Fill up the pump, provide for dry running
x x x x x x The pump is running dry.
protection, move the pipes.
x x x x The stator is worn out. Replace with a new stator.

30100 copy to:
42
PAGE
8 TROUBLE-SHOOTING AND REMEDYING 8.1
Possible Problems
The pumped medium is unstable
The pumped medium is too little
The pump is no longer starting
The pump is no longer sucking
The stator life time is too short

The rotor life time is too short
The pump is running loudly
The shaft seal is leaking

The pressure is too low
The drive is overloaded

The pump is stuck
Possible Causes Remedy

Fit a new stator. Check the liquid medium
x x x x x x The stator material is brittle. agrees with order details; if necessary change
the stator material.
Change rotor, establish the cause. Wear and

x x x x x The rotor is worn out. tear, corrosion, cavitation; if necessary change
to a different material or coating.
Replace relevant parts, carefully reseal and
x The joints are worn out.
lubricate.
x x The pump and drive are not axially aligned. Re-align the unit.
The elastic element of the coupling is worn
x out.
Use a new connection and re-align the pump.
Replace roller bearings, lubricate, reseal. At

x x The roller bearings are destroyed. higher temperatures observe the lubricant and
the bearings.
In the case of adjustable drives : lower the rpm.
x The rpm is too high.
If necessary change the drive.
Measure the viscosity and compare with order
x The viscosity is too high. details. If necessary adjust viscosity or change
the drive.
Measure specific weight and compare with
The specific weight of the medium is too
x high.
order details. If necessary adjust specific weight
or change the drive.
Service stuffing box according to page 7.4, if
x x The stuffing box is incorrectly tightened.
necessary renew worn shaft.
The packing is not suited to the liquid Replace fitted packing with another packing
x medium. type.
x x Mechanical seal: rotation is incorrect. Change electrical connection.
Mechanical seal: mechanical seal and mating
x ring have failed.
Replace relevant rings with new ones.
Replace elastomers. Check whether the liquid

Mechanical seal: elastomers damaged,
x swollen or brittle.
medium agrees with order details, if necessary
change material.

copy to: 30100
43
44
9 DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLY PAGE
OF THE PUMP HOUSING 9.0
9 Dismantling and Assembly of the Pump Housing
9.1 Removal and Fitting of End Connection, Stator and Pump

Housing
The pump with attached pipework should be empty and must have cooled off.
Disconnect the pipework on the suction side and pressure side of the pump.
9.1.1 Dismantling
■ Remove securing screws (S) from support feet (2035)
to baseplate (G).
■ Unscrew hex nuts (3020) and remove with spring

washers (3015).
■ Withdraw end connection (2005) and first support
foot (2035/1) with washers (3070).
■ Support pump housing (2010) and stator (3005) with

wooden blocks.
■ Loosen hex nuts (3020), where fitted, and remove
thru bolts (3010).
■ Where fitted, remove second support foot (2035/2)
and washers (3070).

copy to: 30100
45
PAGE 9 DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLY
9.0R OF THE PUMP HOUSING
Caution for pumps with tubular rotors:

Where the walls of tubular rotors are worn in the
wear zones, pumping medium may occur inside the
rotor and may come out when pulling off the stator.
Ensure that protective measures have been taken
when pumping dangerous media!
■ Pull the stator (3005) out forward.
(A stator extractor can be supplied as special
accessory.)
■ Remove the hex nuts (2030) with spring washers

(2025).
■ Pull the pump housing (2010) off forward.
Pressure reduced execution:

■ Remove screws (2164) and spring washers (2167). W
■ Pull the pump housing (2010) completely forward,

off the mechanical seal housing of the shaft sealing
(W).
3005 2010 1999 1998

30100 copy to:
46
OF THE PUMP HOUSING 9.1
9.1.2 Assembly
■ Refit in reverse order.
When refitting the stator (3005) check direction of
stator (3005) is correct! The funnel-shaped inflow
side (E) of the stator (3005) must show to
- the pump housing (2010) when rotation is anti-
clockwise
- the end connection (2005) when rotation is
clockwise
when viewed on pump shaft end.
E
▲ Elastomer stators (A) have integrated front side
D
sealing profiles (D). They don't need additional
gaskets for sealing off the end connection (2005) and

the pump housing (2010).
▲ Solid stators (B) have no integrated front side sealing
profiles. Therefore additional gaskets (8005) should
A 2005
2010
be installed to seal off the end connection (2005) as B
well as the pump housing (2010).
8005
Be careful when engaging the stator (3005) and rotor
(1999). Do not trap your fingers.
Do not reach inside the stator.
■ Push stator (3005) with a rotating movement on to

rotor (1999).
■ Apply an assembly device and some glycerine to ease
engaging stator (3005) and rotor (1999).
When tightening the hex nuts (2030), a gap remains

between the lantern (0085) and the pump housing
(2010) or the mechanical seal housing of the shaft
sealing (W).
Do not try to close this gap by over-tightening
the hex nuts (2030)!
Lantern (0085) can break!

copy to: 30100
47
9.1R OF THE PUMP HOUSING
Torque values for hex nuts (2030):
Size M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30
Required torque [Nm] 8 15 30 45 75 80 100 120
Fastening the end connection (2005):

■ Screw hex nuts (3020/C) down into thru bolts (3010) 302
20/C
as far as possible.
■ Slip on the first washers (3070), the support foot
(2035/1), the second washers (3070), the end stud
(2005) and tighten with spring washers (3015) and
hex nuts (3020/A).
■ Fasten support foot (2035/1) from behind with hex
nuts (3020/C).
3
Ensure during refitting that the O-ring (8015) or,
where a heating jacket (3025) is installed, the O-rings
(8030) are in perfect condition and will sit correctly.
Ensure that the drain plug (2015) is not screwed too
tightly into the pump housing (2010), since otherwise
its conical thread may break the pump housing 5 08
(2010).
The torque should be about 40 - 50 Nm.

30100 copy to:
48
OF THE PUMP HOUSING 9.A
9.2 Assembly and disassembly of the iFD-Stator®

iFD-Stator® - new stator technology
The iFD-Stator® (3005) is a patented design and
comprises the stator (3000), the stator housing
(3001) and the stator clamping sleeve (3002). 3000
The iFD-Stator® is maintenance free.

The stator (3000) is simply replaced when worn: the
stator housing (3001) and clamping sleeve (3002) are
reused.
This reduces your purchasing quantities and creates 3002
less waste. This solution also means that the difficult
3001
disposal of composite materials is no longer an issue:
both to your advantage and that of the environment.
Recommendations for reordering the replacement stator (3000):

The replacement stator (3000) is simply ordered using the part number found on the
front page of your Operating and Maintenance Manual as well as on the pump
identification plate, together with the parts list reference no. 3000.
iFD-Stator® replacement:
a powerful connection and easy to use
Step 1: Loosen the thru bolts
■ Support the pump housing (2010) and iFD-Stator®
(3005) with wooden blocks. 3010 2005
■ Loosen the nuts (3020) and remove the end stub
(2005).
■ Remove the thru bolts (3010).
2010 3020
Step 2: Remove the iFD-Stator® (3005)
1999
■ Remove the complete iFD-Stator® (3005) from the
rotor (1999).
Tip:
3005
Disassembly is made easier when the iFD-Stator®
(3005) is rotated as the same time as it is drawn off
the rotor

copy to: BR, EX, I, LOG, RC 09101-1/2
49
9.B OF THE PUMP HOUSING
On the sleeve you will find icons as a reminder to clarify the following steps of the
procedure:
Step 3: Disassemble the stator housing (3001/3002)

■ Evenly compress the stator housing (3001) across its diameter with, for example, a
pair of screw clamps or a vice until the clamping force exerted by the sleeve (3002) on
the stator housing (3001) is released.
■ Now remove the clamping sleeve (3002).
CAUTION!
Do not compress more than necessary otherwise the
clamping sleeve will jam.
Tip: 3002
If the clamping sleeve does not loosen immediately, it
can be freed with a light blow in the lengthwise
direction using a plastic hammer.
■ Remove the clamps or vice compressing the housing.
3001
Step 4: Replace the stator (3000)

■ Slide the worn stator (3000) lengthwise out of the
stator housing (3001).
Clean all dirt and other deposits from the iFD-Stator®,
in particular from the contact surfaces between the
stator housing and the clamping sleeve and from the
inner surface of the stator housing.
CAUTION!
The contact surfaces between the stator and stator 3001
housing must be completely free of dirt and grease. 3000
Dry the stator (3000) and the stator housing (3001) fully.
Tip:
Only apply grease to the contact area between the stator housing and clamping
sleeve before reassembling the stator and housing.
Do not lubricate the contact surfaces of the stator (3000) and stator housing
(3001).

R 09101-1/2 copy to: BR, EX, I, LOG, RC
50
OF THE PUMP HOUSING 9.C
■ Slide the new stator (3000) into the stator housing (3001) with the inlet cone
positioned towards the input side of the pump and the faces at either end
protruding equally.
Tip:
Inspect the rotor when replacing the stator.
We recommend replacing the rotor (1999) as soon as clear signs of wear appear
Our Service Team would be pleased to answer any further questions you may have.
Step 5: Assemble the iFD-Stator® (3005)

■ To assemble the stator clamping sleeve (3002),
reclamp the stator housing (3001) across its diameter

and slightly compress the housing.
CAUTION! 3002
Only compress the housing until the the clamping
sleeve can be easily slid onto the housing.
■ Close the housing (3001) by sliding the clamping
sleeve (3002) over the housing guides - note that it
3001
should not be necessary to use force to do this.
Tip:
It is recommended that the clamping sleeve, which is shorter than the housing, is slid
on until it is sitting centrally on the housing.
■ Finally, release the housing from the clamps or vice.
CAUTION!
Check that the stator (3000) is centrally positioned in the stator housing (3001) before
releasing the clamps.
Step 6: Mount the iFD-Stator® (3005) on the pump

3010 2005
■ Slide the iFD-Stator® (3005) onto the rotor (1999)
with the label facing upwards.
The iFD-Stator® appears to be slightly oversize when
it being assembled - allowing it to be easily slid onto 2010 3020
the rotor. This greatly simplifies stator replacement
1999
and allows maintenance and downtimes to be
reduced to a minimum.
■ Reinsert the thru bolts (3010) in the pump housing
(2010) and reassemble the end stub (2005). 3005
■ Tighten all nuts (3020).
issued: 08.11.2010 Revision: 23.09.2010 text no.

copy to: BR, EX, I, LOG, RC 09101-2/2
51
9.D OF THE PUMP HOUSING
The axial compression of the whole iFD-Stators® ensures that the optimal pre-stress is
provided for the rotor. At the same time the axial compression ensures the sealing of
the housing ends.
Tip:
Record the replacement interval directly on the stator.
The empty label fields on the stator housing are intended to be used to record, for
example, maintenance dates or rotor replacement intervals and can be filled in using a
standard fibre-tip pen.
Explosion protection
VDE-conform earthing must be provided for both housing parts (3001) and (3002)
when used in an explosion-protected area.
Stator-Protector STP-2A
Connection of the STP-2A is described in text no. 13105.
text no. issued: 2 Revision: 08.11.2010

R 09101-2/2 copy to: BR, EX, I, LOG, RC
52
9.3 iFD stator® 2.0
9.3.1 Safety Precautions
The following formats are used for specific safety and other instructions:
DANGER!
Safety notice!
Non-observance of the following measures will cause death or serious injury immediately.
§ Measure
§ Measure
WARNING!
Safety notice!
Non-observance of the following measures may cause death or serious injury.
§ Measure
§ Measure
CAUTION!
Safety notice!
Non-observance of the following measures may moderate or minor injury.
§ Measure
§ Measure
NOTE!
Notice regarding damage to property!
Non-observance of the following measures may damage the machine or the product.
§ Measure
§ Measure
Notice
Please pay particular attention!
53
Dismantling and Assembly of the Pump Housing
Instructions:
Instruction with prerequisites:
9 List of the necessary prerequisites (e.g. preliminary work).
# List of the tools and materials required.

1. Working step
2. Working step
3. Working step with sub-items:
1. Sub-item 1
a) Sub-item
b) Sub-item
4. Next working step with sub-items :
1. Sub-item 1
a) Sub-item
b) Sub-item
Outcome of actions. (may be omitted)
Simple instruction:
1. Working step
a) Sub-item
b) Sub-item
Outcome of actions. (may be omitted)
In the instructions tools and materials are listed only if they are necessary in some explicit form or
execution, or if they are not included in the usual equipment of a mechanical workshop.
54
9.3.2 Overview
The patented iFD stator® 2.0 (3005) comprises:

• 3000: Elastomer
• 3001: Upper shell
• 3002: Lower shell
• 3003-1: Screws
• 3003-2: Flat fillet
• 3003-3: Round fillet
• 3006: Dirt protection fillet
• STP-2A: Stator protector (option)
Round fillet (3003-3), flat fillet (3003-2) and screws (3003-1)

together form the "closure" (3003).
The iFD stator® 2.0 is maintenance free. If there is wear,

only the elastomer (3000) is replaced. All other parts
continue to be used.
The machine number (see pump name plate or cover page

of the operating manual ) and the item number 3000 are
sufficient for reordering.
9.3.3 Removal
WARNING!
Hazardous conveyor media!
Risk of poisoning and chemical burns from the conveyor medium!
§ When using hazardous conveyor media, decontaminate the pump before opening.
§ Empty pump before opening.
§ Wear personal protective equipment.
Prepare removal:
9 The pump is decontaminated and completely emptied.
9 The pump is disassembled or the required space for
removing the stator (stator disassembly length) is free.
1. Take dirt protection fillet (3006) off.

2. Support pump housing (2010) and iFD stator® 2.0
(3005) with wooden blocks.
Ready to remove the iFD stator® 2.0.
21
55
If present - remove STP-2A:

1. Take the STP-2A's cable out of the guide slot.
2. Pull STP-2A out of the sensor protection tube.
STP-2A is removed.
Remove end connection and first support foot:

9 iFD stator® 2.0 and pump housing are secured against
falling by wooden blocks (see above).
9 If present: STP-2A is removed (see above).
1. Remove hex nuts (3020) and spring washers (3015).
2. Remove end connection (2005).
3. Remove washers (3070) and first support foot (2035).
End connection and first support foot are removed.
Remove stator bolts and second support foot:

9 End connection and first support foot are removed (see
above).
1. Remove hex nuts (3020).
2. Remove stator bolts (3010).
3. If present, remove second support foot (2035) and
washers (3070).
Stator bolts and second support foot are removed.
56
Remove iFD stator® 2.0:
9 Stator bolts and support feet are removed (see above).
1. Pull iFD stator® 2.0 (3005) off the rotor (1999).
Removal is made easier when the iFD stator® 2.0

(3005) is rotated at the same time as it is pulled off.
It is possible that the iFD stator® 2.0 (3005) can only be
pulled off with great difficulty. In this case, it may help if
the screws on the closure are already loosened at this
point (: Chapter 9.3.4 Disassembly).
iFD stator® 2.0 is removed.
Tip:
Check the condition of the rotor when replacing the stator.
We recommend replacing the rotor (1999) as soon as it shows clear signs of wear.
Our Service Team would be pleased to answer any further questions you may have at any time.
9.3.4 Disassembly
Fold away closure:

9 iFD stator® 2.0 and dirt protection fillet are removed (:
Chapter 9.3.3 Removal).
1. Loosen - do not remove - hex head screws (3003-1).
2. Fold down closure (3003).
Closure is folded away.
Remove upper shell:

9 Closure is folded away (see above).
1. Turn upper shell (3001) a little upwards.

2. In this position, take off the upper shell (3001).
Upper shell is removed.
57
Remove elastomer.
9 Upper shell is removed (see above).
1. Take elastomer (3000) out of lower shell (3002).
Elastomer is removed and can be replaced.
9.3.5 Cleaning
Clean parts:
9 The iFD stator® 2.0 is disassembled (: Chapter 9.3.4
Disassembly).
1. Clean dirt and deposits off all the iFD stator® 2.0
components.
In doing so, pay particular attention to the contact

surfaces between upper shell (3001) and lower shell
(3002).
The elastomer and both parts of the shell must be clean
and dry before assembly!
Parts are cleaned and ready for installation.
58
9.3.6 Assembly
All parts must be clean!

It is particularly important that there is no dirt between the elastomer and the upper and lower
shells during installation.
Prepare lower shell:

9 Parts are cleaned (: Chapter 9.3.5 Cleaning).
1. If this has not yet been done: As shown, assemble the
closure (3003) using the round fillet (3003-3), flat fillet
(3003-2) and screws (3003-1).
2. Push the closure (3003) into the guide of the lower shell
(3002) sideways.
3. Fold down the closure (3003).
This means the lower shell (3002) stands securely on
the work surface during the rest of the installation.
Lower shell is prepared.
59
Insert elastomer:
9 Lower shell is prepared (see above).
# Heat-conductive paste
1. If an STP-2A is built in:
Fill around half the sensor protection tube (see white
arrow) with heat-conductive paste.
2. Insert elastomer (3000) into lower shell (3002).
The sensor protection tube for the STP-2A must be
located at the milled cut-out of the lower shell (3002)
(see white arrow).
Pay attention to edges of elastomer and lower shell!
3. Align elastomer(3000) with a good eye in the centre of
the lower shell (3002).
Elastomer is inserted.
60
Insert upper shell:
9 The elastomer is inserted and aligned (see above).
1. Fit hook-shaped rear fillet of the upper shell (3001) in
counterpart of the lower shell (3002).
2. Close upper shell (3001) until there is the first
resistance from the elastomer (3000).
Upper shell is inserted.

61
Align upper shell.

9 The upper shell sits close onto the elastomer (see
above).
1. Align upper shell (3001) in the centre of the elastomer
(3000) and parallel to the lower shell (3002).
Upper shell is aligned.
Shut closure:
9 The upper shell is aligned (see above).
1. Swing the closure (3003) upwards.

2. Tighten screws (3003-1).
Tip:
The iFD stator® 2.0 can be particularly easily installed
when the screws are now only hand-tightened.
Do not tighten until assembly in the pump (: Chapter
9.3.7 Installation).
iFD stator® 2.0 is ready to be installed.
62
9.3.7 Installation
Attention!
The funnel-shaped inflow channel (A) on the front end of the
elastomer (3000) always faces the inlet side. This means
normally towards the rotor (1999) (pump housing). The flat
end (B) faces the end connection (2005).
Put iFD stator® 2.0 into position:

9 iFD stator® 2.0 is fully assembled (: Chapter 9.3.6
Assembly).
1. Coat inner surfaces of the elastomer a little with anti-
seize agent (e.g. glycerine).
2. Push iFD stator® 2.0 with the inflow cone (A) in the
suction direction of the pump onto the rotor (1999).
If an STP-2A dry running protector is fitted, the closure

must be facing upwards (different from the illustration),
so that STP-2A and heat-conductive paste remain in
position during operation.
iFD stator® 2.0 is in position.
Fit second support foot and stator bolts:

9 The iFD stator® 2.0 is in position (see above).
1. If present: put second support foot (2035) and washers

(3070) onto the lower stator bolts (3010)
If there is a second support foot present on the end

connection, both stator bolts (3010) must be attached
with hex nuts (3020) at both ends at the bottom.
2. Screw the stator bolts (3010) with the hex nuts (3020)
on the pump housing (2010).
Second support foot (if present) and stator bolts are fitted.
63
Fit end connection:

9 The second support foot (if present) and stator bolts are
fitted.
1. Screw hex nuts (3020/1) and washers (3070/1) onto
both lower stator bolts (3010) fully in the direction of the
pump housing.
2. Put support foot (2035) and washers (3070/2) onto the
lower stator bolts (3010).
3. Put end connection (2005) onto stator bolts (3010).
4. Put spring washers (3015) onto stator bolts (3010).
5. Screw hex nuts (3020/2) onto stator bolts (3010) and
tighten crosswise, until the ends of upper and lower
shells come up against the pump housing (2010) and
end connection (2005).
The axial compression of the whole iFD stator® 2.0

ensures that pre-loading for the rotor is optimal for
operation.
Between the iFD stator® 2.0 (3005) and the end
connection (2005) on the one side and the pump
housing (2010) on the other side, there must no longer
be any gap (s).
6. Tighten the support foot (2035) on the end connection

(2005) with the rear hex nuts (3020/1).
7. Tighten screws (3003-1) of the closure (: Chapter
9.3.6 Assembly) .
End connection is fitted.
If present - install STP-2A:

# Heat-conductive paste
1. If this has not already (: Chapter 9.3.6 Assembly) been
done during installation:
Fill around half the sensor protection tube in the
elastomer with heat-conductive paste.
2. Push STP-2A through the milled cut-out between upper
shell (3001) and lower shell (3002) into the sensor
protection tube as far as the limit stop.
3. Connect the cable of the STP-2A into the groove
between upper shell (3001) and lower shell (3002) (see
detailed section).
For STP-2A in ATEX design:

Adjust the STP-2A cable diameter by an appropriate
means (e.g. adhesive tape) to the diameter required to
secure it firmly.
STP-2A is installed.
64
Fit dirt protection fillet:
1. Fit dirt protection fillet (3006).
iFD stator® 2.0 is installed.
The installation is completed.
DANGER!
Sparking in explosion-protected areas.
Death or serious injury due to explosion!
§ In explosion-protected areas, all the pump's housing
parts must be earthed in accordance with the valid
guidelines and regulations.
Information about connecting the STP-2A can be found in a

separate datasheet (no. 13105).
65
66
OF THE ROTATING PARTS 10.0
10 Dismantling and Assembly of the 1999 1998 0085 1050 A

Rotating Parts with Pin Joints with
SM-Pin Joint Seal
10.1 Removal of Rotor and Coupling Rod

For removal of the rotor (1999) and coupling rod
(1998) the pin joints should be dismantled as follows:
■ Place the dismantled unit - consisting of lantern

(0085) with drive (A) and connecting shaft (1050),
coupling rod (1998) and rotor (1999) - on the
workbench with a wooden block supporting the 5600/5601
rotor (1999).
Basic joint size NM125:

■ Remove pins (5605/5606) and push sleeve
(5600/5601) to the middle of coupling rod (1998).
1998 5605/5606

5440 5048
■ Unscrew set screws (5048) out of screw
securing/sleeve (5115/1516). 1050
1999
■ Pull screw securing (5115/1516) back in direction of
the arrow.
■ Screw out wear bushings (5440) with O-ring
(8060/8061) out of the rotor (1999) / connecting
shaft (1050).
5115
5048 5116
Basic joint size NM021 - NM105:
5065/5066 1050/1999
■ Push the circlip (5065/5066) out of its groove and slip
off the head of rotor (1999) / connecting shaft
(1050).
■ If necessary hit the edge of screw securing/sleeve
(5115/5116) at an angle with the help of a wooden
block and a plastic hammer. Taking care not to 5015/5116 8060/8061
damage the O-rings (8060/8061)!

copy to: 30100
67
10.0R OF THE ROTATING PARTS
Joints at both sides:

■ Press the pin (5075/5076) out of the head of rotor /
connecting shaft and drain the oil into a receptacle.
■ Please dispose of this oil in the proper manner.
5075
5076
■ Using a screwdriver, carefully lever the SM-pin joint

seal (8235/8236) out of the head of rotor (1999) / 1998 1050/1999
connecting shaft (1050).
Taking care not to damage the SM-pin joint

seal (8235/8236).
8235/8236
■ Pull apart coupling rod (1998) and rotor (1999) /

■ Remove the O-rings (8060/8061) at rotor (1999) /
8060/8061
1998 1050/1999
■ Push the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236) towards the

head of coupling rod (1998). In the narrow coupling
rod section press the clamp ring (5425/5426) out of
the groove of the seal.
■ Slip the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236) and clamp ring
(5425/5426) off over the head of the coupling rod
(1998).
5425, 5426
8235, 8236 1998

30100 copy to:
68
10.2 Fitting the Rotor and Coupling Rod

For fitting the rotor (1999) with coupling rod (1998), the two pin joints should be
assembled as follows:
■ Slip the clamp ring (5425/5426) over the head of

coupling rod (1998).
■ Push the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236) over the head

of coupling rod (1998) towards its narrow section,
there sqeezing the clamp ring (5425/5426) into the
groove of the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236).
■ Push the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236) with the
correctly placed clamp ring (5425/5426) up to the
shoulder of coupling rod (1998).
5425/5426
Basic joint size NM021 - NM105: 1998 8235/8236

■ Slip the circlip (5065/5066) on to the coupling rod
(1998).
A B
■ Slide the sleeve (5115/5116) on to coupling rod
(1998) so the inside diameter of chamfering (A) is
being placed towards the coupling rod (1998)
extension.
Chamfering (A) will later on ease the installation over
the O-rings (8060/8061).
■ Orient the head of coupling rod (1998) until it is in
vertical position for the bore (B) for the pin
(5075/5076) 5065/5066 5115/5116
■ Slide the coupling rod (1998) with SM-pin joint seal

(8235/8236) into the bore of rotor (1999) / 1998 1050/1999
connecting shaft (1050) and insert the joint bolt
(5075/5076) from below and push up to the upper
edge of coupling rod (1998).
■ Support the joint bolt (5075/5076) against dropping
out.
■ Slide the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236) into the rotor
(1999) / connecting shaft (1050) only from below,
and in a slightly slanted position.
8235/8236 5075/5076

copy to: 30100
69
■ Lead the tip of a pump bottle with a suitable oil (see

Section 7.3) to the upper opening of the rotor (1999)
/ connecting shaft (1050).
2. 1.
■ Slowly fill with lubricating oil up to the filling port. 8235/8236
■ Lead the tip of the pump bottle through the small
1998
gap on the topside of SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236).
■ Slowly fill with lubricating oil up to the filling port.
5075
5076
■ Push the joint bolt (5075/5076) entirely into the bore
of head of rotor (1999) / connecting shaft (1050) and 1998 5075/5076
retain in place.
■ Only now, press the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236)
into the bore of headof rotor (1999) / connecting
shaft (1050) and push up to the shoulder. In doing so
the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236) should be slightly
bulbous around the outer surface.
■ Wipe off overflow oil. Use this oil for lubricating the
O-rings (8060/8061). 8235/8236
8060/8061 1050/1999
■ Slip the sleeve (5115/5116), with its chamfering (A)
forward, on to the head of rotor (1999) / connecting
shaft (1050) and push up to the shoulder.
5115/5116 1050/1999
■ Place the circlip (5065/5066) into its groove on the
rotor head (1999) / connecting shaft (1050) and 1998
carefully snap in place all around.
5065/5066 1050/1999

30100 copy to:
70

■ Slip the screw securing (5115/5116) over the head of 8235/8236
coupling rod (1998). 5425/5426
■ Slip the clamp ring (5425/5426) over the head of 5115/5116
■ Push the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236) over the head
of coupling rod (1998) towards its narrow section,
there sqeezing the clamp ring (5425/5426) into the 1998
2.
groove of the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236).
3.
■ Push the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236) with the
correctly placed clamp ring (5425/5426) up to the 1.
shoulder of coupling rod (1998).
5075 1998
■ Slide the coupling rod (1998) into the bore of rotor 5076
(1999) / connecting shaft (1050) and insert joint bolt 2.
(5075/5076).
■ Slide the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236) into the rotor
(1999) / connecting shaft (1050).
■ Screw wear bushing (5440) with O-ring (8060/8061) 1.
into the head of rotor (1999) / connecting shaft 8060
1050
(1050) until it stops. 8061
1999
3.
5440
■ Lead the tip of a pump bottle with a suitable oil (see
Section 7.3) to the upper opening of the rotor (1999) 1998
/ connecting shaft (1050).
■ Slowly fill with lubricating oil up to the filling port. 2.
1.
■ Lead the tip of the pump bottle through the small
gap on the topside of SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236).
■ Slowly fill with lubricating oil up to the filling port.
After the oil could settle for a few minutes:
8235/8236
■ Refill oil into both openings (1. und 2.).
1050/1999
■ Screw in the second wear bushing (5440) with O-ring

5440 8060/8061 5115/5116
(8060/8061) into the head of rotor (1999) /
connecting shaft (1050) until it stops. 2.
1.
1050/1999

copy to: 30100
71
■ Secure wear bushings (5440):

a) Turn out both wear bushings (5440) a little bit a) b) c)
(max. 30°!)
5440
b) the sides must have a position so that the screw
securing (5115/5116) can be pushed over the
wear bushings (5440).
c) Push screw securing (5115/5116) over the wear
bushings (5440). ≤30°
5115/5116
■ Secure screw securing (5115/5116) with set screws
5048
(5048).
■ Secure set screws (5048) with Loctite. 5440
5115
5116
5048
■ Push sleeve (5600/5601) to SM-pin joint seal
(8235/8236), without moving SM-pin joint seal 5600/5601
(8235/8236).
■ Secure sleeve (5600/5601) with pins (5605/5606).
■ Secure pins (5605/5606) with Loctite.
5605
1998 5606
Basic joint size NM021 - NM125:
1999 1998 0085 1050 A
Connecting shaft (1050), coupling rod (1998) und
rotor (1999) are now joined by the two pin joints.
Housing, stator und end connection may now be
fitted.

30100 copy to:
72
10.3 Dismantling and Assembly of the Rotating Parts

with Pin Joints with SM-Pin Joint Seal
(joint basic size NM015)
For removal and refitting of the rotor (1999) and coupling rod (1998)
the pin joints should be dismantled and re-assembled as follows:
Dismantling:
■ Push the SM-pin joint seal (8235) away from the

rotor (1999), drive shaft (1005) or connecting shaft
(1050) so the bore for the pin (5075) comes free.
1999
1005, 1050 8235
■ Press the pin (5075) out of the rotor (1999),

connecting shaft (1050) or drive shaft (1005).
Then withdraw the coupling rod (1998) from the
bore of rotor (1999), connecting shaft (1050) or drive
shaft (1005).
1999
1005
1050 5075 1998
■ Push the SM-pin joint seal (8235) towards the head

of coupling rod (1998). In the narrow coupling rod
section press the clamp ring (5425) out of the
groove of the seal. Then slip the SM-pin joint seal
(8235) and clamp ring (5425) off over the head of the
8235 5425 1998

Continued Page 10.3R
date name signed revision: 4

issued 22.05.95 Mangel substitute for the issue
approved 23.05.95 Eitler dated 04.05.95
text no. 30100 GB
copy to:
73
Re-Assembly:
■ Slip the clamp ring (5425) and the SM-pin joint seal
(8235) on over the head of the coupling rod (1998).
8235 5425 1998
■ Push the SM-pin joint seal (8235) towards the

narrow section on the head of coupling rod (1998)
and place the clamp ring (5425) back into the
groove of the SM-pin joint seal (8235).
Then move the SM-pin joint seal (8235) up to the
coupling rod (1998) shoulder.
8235 5425 1998
■ Place the head of coupling rod (1998) into the bore

of the rotor (1999), drive shaft (1005) or connecting
shaft (1050).
1999
1005
1050 1998
■ Join the rotor (1999), drive shaft (1005) or con-

5075
necting shaft (1050) and coupling rod (1998) by the
pin (5075).
Then push the SM-pin joint seal (8235) up to the
shoulder of the rotor (1999), drive shaft (1005) or
Re-assemble the second pin joint in the same

manner.
8235 1998
revision: 3 date name signed

substitute for the issue issued 02.05.95 Mangel
dated 23.02.95 approved 03.05.95 Eitler
GB text no. 30100
copy to:
74
10.4 Dismantling and Assembly of the Journal Cross Joints

(joint basic size NM125)
■ Remove the cylindrical head screws (5095 and 5101),

5095 1998
then separate the coupling rod (1998) and connec-
ting shaft (1050) from each other.
Every journal cross joint should remain closed and

full of lubricant.
5101 1050
■ If the outer rubber seal sleeve (8151) is undamaged,

the joint can generally be used again. Before
refitting, change the joint oil as described later on.
If damaged, remove the rubber seal sleeves (8151,

8150) and check the condition of the joints.
Procedure: see Page 10.5, Section 10.5.
8151

approved 23.03.95 Eitler dated 30.12.94
text no. 30100 GB
copy to:
75
Attention when draining off the oil:

The oil inside the journal cross joint may be under 5172
pressure. 5240
Wear goggles!
■ Remove the drain plug (5172) and lubricator (5450)
with gasket (5240) and drain the oil into a vessel.
Please dispose of this oil in the proper manner.
5240
■ Screw in the lubricator (5450) with a new gasket 5450
(5240).
5051, 5245
■ Remove the drain plug (5051) with gasket (5245).

A
Fill with fresh oil from below through the R 1/8" bore
in the lubricator (5450) until only oil without air
bubbles comes out of the screw tap on the drain plug
(5172).
Now move the joint about a little so air bubbles can B
rise. If necessary, fill again with oil from below.
■ When the joint is completely filled with oil, remove

5172
the discharge pipe (A) and screw in a drain plug
5240
(5172) with new gasket (5240). The built-in check
valve on the lubricator (5450) avoids oil leakage and
flow back.
Add some more oil under slight pressure until the
seals (8150, 8151) are ball shaped.
■ Now remove the feeding pipe (B).

Close filler R 1/8" opening in the lubricator (5450) 5245
with plug (5051) and new gasket (5245). 5051
■ Replace the O–rings (8060).

1998 5095
■ With cylindrical head screws (5095 and 5101) mount
the rotor (1999), coupling rod (1998) and connecting
8060
shaft (1005) on to the joints.
The cylindrical head screws (5095 and 5101) do not
have the same length; they should not be mixed up!
Use a torque key. The torque should correspond to
sectional drawing G… . 8060
Secure screws with Loctite*.
*For Loctite type see sectional drawing G… .
1050 5101
Continued Page 10.5

dated 24.03.95 approved 03.05.95 Eitler
GB text no. 30100
copy to:
76
5195
10.5 Removal and Fitting of the Rubber Seal Sleeves
■ For replacement of the rubber seal sleeves (8150, 5180

8151) the oil should be drained off first.
Procedure: See Page 10.4R, Section 10.4.
Remove cylindrical head screws (5195) and pull off
clamp rings (5180).
Worn or damaged rubber seal sleeves (8150, 8151)
can be cut up for better removal. 8151
■ Slide out the joint shells (5005).

Remove the vulcanized metal spacer ring (A) from
5005
inner rubber seal sleeve (8150).
5005
■ Check the condition of the joints.

The complete joint should be replaced when it is
worn or damaged, when there is stiffness in move-
ment and excessive slack or a corroded inner part
because of ruined rubber sleeves (8150, 8151).
■ Please send a worn or damaged joint to our address

for repair as special tools are necessary for replacing
or repairing the joint items.
An
Netz
s
Mo ch
hno
pum
pen
Gm
bH

approved 06.02.96 Denk dated 05.04.95
text no. 30100 GB
copy to:
77
■ Oil joint shell A (5005) and insert into the new inner
5005
rubber seal sleeve (8150). (A)
Please observe correct orientation.
See also sectional drawing G...
8150
■ Slide inner rubber seal sleeve (8150) on to joint G.
■ Turn joint G with rubber seal sleeve (8150) up side

5005
down. (B)
Oil joint shell B (5005) and slide under inner rubber
seal (8150) as far as it will go.
Do not use a tool especially pointed tools like screw 8150
drivers etc. so that no harm is done to the rubber seal
sleeve (8150).
5005
(A)
■ Apply some glycerine on the outer lip of the inner

8151
rubber seal sleeve (8150).
■ Slide outer rubber seal sleeve (8151) carefully on to

inner rubber seal sleeve (8150).
Do not use a tool especially pointed tools like screw

drivers etc. so that no harm is done to the rubber seal
sleeves (8150, 8151).
8150
■ Secure a clamp ring (5180) with 2 respectively 4

cylindrical head screws (5195), number of screws 5195
depending on the type of joint, and screw down with
5180
2 opposed screws simultaneously. Ensure the clamp
ring (5180) does not tilt.
Lubricant: See Page 10.4R, Section 10.4.

dated 05.04.95 approved 19.10.95 Hantschk
GB text no. 30100
copy to:
78
10.6 Replacing the Wear Sleeves of Adapter,

Rotor and Coupling Rod
(Basic joint size NM045 - NM125)
Basic joint size NM045-NM105:

The wear sleeves (5435, 5440) have a very tight fit.
A press should be used to remove or refit them.
It may be possible though to drive the damaged
sleeves out with a suitable mandrel. A rigid vice

however is needed at the least for pressing new
sleeves (5435, 5440) in again. 1998
Orient the wear sleeves (5435) so that their oval

bore agrees with the longitudinal axis of the
1998
Orient the centering bores at the sides of wear slee-
ves (5435) so that they are visible through the bores
of the head of the coupling rod after their inserti-
on.
No tool is necessary inserting the wear sleeves.
Fix the wear sleeves (5435) with set screws (5049) in 5435
the correct position and secure them with Loctite.
■ Generously oil the wear sleeves (5435, 5440).
Basic joint size NM045-NM105:

■ Every wear sleeve (5435, 5440) has got one smaller
outer diameter on one end for better insertion into
the bores of the coupling rod.
Ensure the sleeves are placed in the correct orien-
tation to the coupling rod (1998).
5435 5440

approved 20.12.05 Denk dated 25.06.03
text no. 30100 GB
copy to:
79
80
E M O
N

OF THE CONNECTING SHAFT 11.0
N
P U
M P E
11 Removal and Fitting of the Connecting Shaft

with Shaft Seal
Removal:
■ Push the circlip (1035) in the direction to the mechanical seal.
■ Remove pin (1030).
■ Remove the shaft seal housing (7005) and mechanical seal (7010)
together with connecting shaft (1050) and set ring (1035) from
drive stool (0085) and the drive shaft.
The thread of cylindrical head screw (1040) can be used as

forcing screw.
■ If a mechanical seal is installed, see description

"Removal and Fitting of Mechanical Seal" after Page 12.0.
Fitting:
■ Apply grease into the bore of the connecting shaft (1050) to avoid
rust (e.g. TCE-Metallic 600).
■ Assemble the shaft seal housing (7005) and mechanical seal (7010)
together with connecting shaft (1050) and set ring (1035) with
drive stool (0085) and push connecting shaft (1050) on to the
drive shaft.
At this please observe the installation direction of set ring (1035)
(please see mark).
■ If a mechanical seal is installed, see description

"Removal and Fitting of Mechanical Seal" after Page 12.0.
■ Connect the connecting shaft (1050) and the drive shaft by

pin (1030).
Push set ring (1035) on pin (1030).
date name signed revision:

approved 25.06.03 Denk dated
text no. 30100 GB
copy to:
81
82
E M O
N

OF THE SHAFT SEALING 12.0
N
P U
M P E
12.1 Removal and Fitting of the Single Mechanical Seal
■ Carefully slide out mechanical seal housing (7005) together

with the parts of the mechanical seal contained in it
from connecting shaft (1050).
■ Carefully push mechanical seal (7010) stationary seat
out of mechanical seal housing (7005).
Refitting is a simple reversal of the above procedure.

■ To reduce frictional forces during seal assembly, apply some glycerine
to the shaft and the seal housing in the area of the gaskets.
■ Special care must be taken when fitting double PTFE-coated gaskets:
the joint of the outer coating must point away from the seal assembly
direction, otherwise the coating may open or be pulled off!
Ensure that the distribution of pressure is uniform when inserting

the pressure sensitive counter rings. When inserting larger rings,
use a suitable mandrel.
Do not allow any foreign bodies to get between the sliding surfaces.
■ Exactly keep to the seal installation dimensions and
ensure that the sealing faces are correctly pressed together
(see table on sectional drawing W ... ).
■ Insert mechanical seal (7010) stationary seat into mechanical seal
housing (7005).
■ Insert mechanical seal housing (7005) together with the stationary seat
into the drive stool without the installed connecting shaft (1050).
■ If necessary take the installation dimension from the table and add
the thickness S of the set ring (7086) when existing.
■ Mark this installation dimension on the connecting shaft (1050).
■ Fix the rotating unit of the mechanical seal (7010) on the connceting
shaft (1050) depending on the installation dimension so that the
rotating unit of the mechanical seal (7010) or the set ring (7086) is at
the mark.
■ Insert connecting shaft (1050) with the rotating unit of the mechanical
seal (7010) into drive stool (0085) and install lip seal (7091, if existing.
Push the set ring (1035) on to connecting shaft (1050) and observe
at this the installation direction (see mark).
Push connecting shaft (1050) on to the drive shaft and connect with
pin (1030). Push the set ring (1035) on pin (1030).

text no. 30100 GB
copy to:
83
84
OF SPECIAL UNITS 13.0
Inspection Opening at the Pump Housing
gray cast iron model on from size NM045
2045 2055 2060

8050
G...
design for welded housings – nominal size DN 76,1 – ISO 2852
2018
2070
2650

text no. 30100 GB
copy to:
85
86
OF SPECIAL UNITS 13.1
Stator heating jacket
8030 3025 8030

Stator protecting tube
8030 3085 8030
Additional accessories, if fitted, pls. see after section 15.

text no. 30100 GB
copy to:
87
88
PAGE
14 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS 14.0
14 Recommended Spare Parts

In general, we have all spare parts in stock. Our subsidiaries and exclusive
representatives also hold a certain stock. For special cases and when short waiting
periods are not acceptable, we recommend to keep an amount of spare parts,
corresponding to the pump, in stock on site as follows:
- Rotor
- Stator
- Elastomer parts as O-rings and sleeves
- joint parts
- shaft seals
To avoid mistakes in delivery, please identify the parts by their position number shown
in the spare parts list or on the sectional drawing.
For placing a spare parts order, it is absolutely necessary to give the following details:
- Quantity / Unit
- Designation
- Pos. / Ident-Number
Note:
The sectional drawing may contain position numbers which do not show in the spare
parts list.
These parts have not been installed!
The spare parts list drawn up at the initial order

stage is valid for the scope of delivery.

copy to: 30100
89
90
15 SECTIONAL DRAWINGS, PAGE
SPARE PARTS LIST, DATA SHEET 15.0
15 Sectional Drawings, Spare Parts List, Data Sheet

copy to: 30100
91
92
1050
1030
1998
1999
G
W
9500
0140
0120
0125
3020
0560 (Option)
8210 2030
2115 2025
0085
1035
8015
2115 2020
8210
2016 2010
3070
8012
3020
2035
Zeichnung-Nr.: Type:
8010 Drawing No.: 015
3005 NM - BY------
125
2015 NMBY010.000
3010
Maßst./Scale: 1 : X Datum / date Name / name Unterschrift/Signature
Revision: 2
3020 gezeichnet / drawn 17.08.2010 Thoma
geprüft / checked 17.08.2010 Preintner
Ersatz für Ausgabe vom:
3070 freigegeben / released 17.08.2010 Preintner Replacement for Version of:
Verteiler:
2005 3020 3015 2035 2 / 3 / 49 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 56 / 58 / 94 / 95 / 97 / 98 / exp. 06.07.2004
Distributor:
93
94
1050
1998
1030
1999
G
9500
0140
0120
0125
2030
2025
0085
1035
W 2020
0560 (Option)
8015
2167
2164
2016
2010
8012
3070
8010
2015
Zeichnung-Nr.: Type:
2035 Drawing No.: 015
NM - BY------ (P)
3020 125
NMBY010.001
3005
3010 ßst./Scale: 1 : X Datum / date Name / name
gezeichnet / drawn Revision:
3020 31.03.2014 Thoma
geprüft / checked 31.03.2014 Denk
3070 Ersatz für Ausgabe vom:
freigegeben / released 31.03.2014 Denk Replacement for Version of:
Verteiler:
2005 3020 3015 2035 Distributor: 2 / 3 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 58
95
96
7040 7015 7030 7025 7035 7040 7015 7030 7025 7035
"G"
7050
Type
Spülanschluß
flushing connection "G"
N M0 15
N M0 21 Stopfbuchse Type:
Zeichnung-Nr.:
N M0 31 G 1/ 8 Drawing No.: ohne/mit Kammerring NM015B/S- (P)
N M0 4 5 Stuffing Box -
N M0 53 W208.000 NM105B/S- (P)
without/with Buffer Ring
N M0 63 Maßst./Scale: 1 : X Datum / date Name / name Unterschrift/Signature
N M0 76 Revision: 3
gezeichnet / drawn 20.08.2009 Thoma
G 1/4
N M0 90 geprüft / checked 20.08.2009 Preintner
N M10 5 freigegeben / released 20.08.2009 Denk Replacement for Version of:
Verteiler:
2 / 3 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 58 / 49 / 95 / 97 / 98 / exp 11.12.2006
Distributor:
97
98
Loctite 245
Loctite 638 Loctite 638

7010 7005 7010 7086 7005 7126 7010 7005 7126
Dw
Dw
Dw
MG1-G60 KU / EN12756 (DIN24960) NU / EN12756 (DIN24960)
7086 7086 7086
X1 X2 X3
Dw 35 - Dw 100
K U / EN127 5 6 N U / E N 12 7 5 6
M G 1- G 6 0
Dw (D IN 24 96 0 ) (D IN 2 4 9 6 0 )
X1 X2 X3
25 116,5 116,5 - Type:
Zeichnung-Nr.:
35 152,1 139,6 152,1 Drawing No.: Einf. wirk. GLRD NM015B/S- (P)
40 147,5 137,5 147,5 Single Mechanical Seal -
W209.000 NM105B/S- (P)
43 165,5 150,5 165,5
55 181 158,5 181 Maßst./Scale: 1 : X Datum / date Name / name Unterschrift/Signature
Revision: 5
65 201,5 174 201,5 gezeichnet / drawn 29.07.2011 Thoma
70 207 187 207 Ersatz für Ausgabe vom:
85 219 189 219 Verteiler:
2 / 3 / 49 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 58 / 94 / 95 / 97 / 98 / exp 20.08.2009
100 249 224 249 Distributor:
99
100
Loctite 638 Loctite 638 Loctite 638

7010 7126 7005 7091 7010 7126 7005 7091 7010 7126 7005 7091
Dw
Dw
Dw
7086 7086
7086
X1 X2 X3
G dw 35 - Dw 100
KU / NU /
M G 1- G 6 0 E N12 7 5 6 E N12 7 5 6
Dw (DI N 2 49 6 0 ) (D I N2 49 6 0 ) G
X1 X2 X3
25 106 116,5 -
Einf. wirk. GLRD Type:
35 131,6 139,6 152,1 G 1/8 Zeichnung-Nr.:
Drawing No.: mit Quenchanschluß NM015B/S- (P)
40 130 137,5 147,5
Single Mechanical Seal -
43 143 150,5 165,5 W210.000 NM105B/S- (P)
55 155,5 158,5 181 with Quench
65 171 174 201,5 Revision: 5
G 1/4 geprüft / checked
70 176,8 187 207 29.07.2011 Denk
85 182,5 189 219 Verteiler:
2 / 3 / 49 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 58 / 94 / 95 / 97 / 98 / exp 20.08.2009
100 218,5 224 249 Distributor:
101
102
7040 7015 7030 7025 7035 7040 7015 7030 7025 7035
G 1/4
7050
Stopfbuchse Type:
Zeichnung-Nr.:
Drawing No.: ohne/mit Kammerring
Stuffing Box NM125B-(P)
The heart of your process W219.000 without/with Buffer Ring
29.06.2004 Preintner
Verteiler:
Distributor:
2/3 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 58 / exp
103
104
mit Loctite 245 gesichert mit Loctite 245 gesichert mit Loctite 638 mit Loctite 245 gesichert mit Loctite 638
secured with Loctite 245 secured with Loctite 245 eingedichtet secured with Loctite 245 eingedichtet
sealed with sealed with
7010 7086 7005 7010 7086 7005 7126 7010 7086 7005 7126
MG1/G60 KU / DIN24960 NU / DIN24960

14 39 14
Type:
Zeichnung-Nr.:
Drawing No.: Einf. wirk. GLRD
Single Mechanical Seal NM125B-Z (P)
The heart of your process W220.000
Revision: 1
gezeichnet / drawn 06.12.2006 Preintner
Verteiler:
Distributor:
2/3 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 58 / exp 29.06.2004
105
106
mit Loctite 245 gesichert mit Loctite 638 mit Loctite 245 gesichert mit Loctite 638 mit Loctite 245 gesichert mit Loctite 638
secured with Loctite 245 eingedichtet secured with Loctite 245 eingedichtet secured with Loctite 245 eingedichtet
sealed with sealed with sealed with
7010 7086 7005 7126 7091 7010 7086 7005 7126 7091 7010 7086 7005 7126 7091
MG1/G60 KU / DIN24960 NU / DIN24960

44,5 39 14
(1:5) Zeichnung-Nr.: Einf. wirk. GLRD Type:

G1/4 Drawing No.: mit Quenchanschluß
Single Mechanical Seal NM125B-Z (P)
with Quench
Revision: 1
Verteiler:
Distributor:
2 / 3 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 58 / exp 29.06.2004
107
108
mit Loctite 245 gesichert mit Loctite 638 mit Loctite 245 gesichert mit Loctite 638
secured with Loctite 245 eingedichtet secured with Loctite 245 eingedichtet
sealed with sealed with
7010 7005 7010 7086 7005 7126 7010 7005 7126
MG1/G60 KU / DIN24960 NU / DIN24960

25
Type:
Zeichnung-Nr.:
Drawing No.: Einf. wirk. GLRD
Single Mechanical Seal NM125B-B (P)
Revision: 1
Verteiler:
Distributor:
2 / 3 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 58 / 95 / exp 08.03.2006
109
110
mit Loctite 245 gesichert mit Loctite 638 mit Loctite 245 gesichert mit Loctite 638 mit Loctite 245 gesichert mit Loctite 638
secured with Loctite 245 eingedichtet secured with Loctite 245 eingedichtet secured with Loctite 245 eingedichtet
sealed with sealed with sealed with
7010 7086 7005 7126 7091 7010 7086 7005 7126 7091 7010 7005 7126 7091
MG1/G60 KU / DIN24960 NU / DIN24960

30,5 25
G 1/4
Einf. wirk. GLRD Type:
Zeichnung-Nr.:
Drawing No.: mit Quenchanschluß
Single Mechanical Seal NM125B-B (P)
with Quench
Revision: 1
Verteiler:
Distributor: 2 / 3 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 58 / 95 08.03.2006
111
112
mit Loctite 245 gesichert
secured with Loctite 245
7157
7010 7162 7005 7135 7091 7011 7075
B-B
B
7130 7165
Ausführung Z-Gelenk
version Z-joint
Type:
Zeichnung-Nr.: Laufwerkdichtung mit Schmieranschluß und NM015B/S (P)
Drawing No.: WDR-Ausrücksicherung -
Single Mech. Seal NM105B/S (P)
W251.000 with Lubrication connection and lipseal-securing .
NM125B
Revision: 2
Verteiler:
Distributor: 2 / 3 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 58 06.11.2007
113
114
7141 7005 7106 7011
Dw
X
7126 7126
Dw X G
25 72
35 94 G 1/8
40 86,5
43 104
55 115
65 124
G 1/4
70 131
85 141,8
100 149,3
Dopp. wirk. GLRD Type:
Zeichnung-Nr.:
Drawing No.: M74D NM015B/S- (P)
Double Mechanical Seal -
W258.000 NM105B/S- (P)
M74D
Revision: 2
Verteiler:
Distributor: 2 / 3 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 58 / 94 / 95 / 98 17.12.2010
115
116
7010 7005 7008 7007 7010 7086 7005 7008 7007 7010 7005 7008 7007
G
G
G
Dw
Dw
Dw
7086 7086 7126 7126

Loctite 638 7086 Loctite 638
X1 X2 X3
Dw 35 - Dw 100
K U / E N127 56 N U / E N127 56
MG1-G 60
Dw (DIN2496 0) (D IN 24 96 0) G
X1 X2 X3
25 106 116,5 - Einf. wirk. GLRD Type:
Zeichnung-Nr.:
35 131,6 139,6 152,1 G 1/8 Drawing No.: mit Spülanschluß NM015B/S- (P)
40 130 137,5 147,5 Single Mechanical Seal -
W262.000 NM105B/S- (P)
43 143 150,5 165,5 with flushing connection
55 155,5 158,5 181 Maßst./Scale: 1 : X Datum / date Name / name Unterschrift/Signature
Revision: 1
65 171 174 201,5 gezeichnet / drawn 29.07.2011 Thoma
G 1/4 geprüft / checked 29.07.2011 Denk
70 176,8 187 207 Ersatz für Ausgabe vom:
85 182,5 189 219 Verteiler:
2 / 3 / 49 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 58 / 98 16.02.2010
100 218,5 224 249 Distributor:
117
118
ab NM063 ab NM063
from NM063 from NM063
1998 5065 5115 5075 1040 1045 1050/1999 1998 5425 8235 5065 8060 5115 5075 8060 1040 1045 1050/1999
mit Loctite 245 gesichert mit Loctite 245 gesichert

secured with Loctite 245 secured with Loctite 245
nur/only NM015B- (P)
1998 5065 5115 5075 1050/1999 1998 5425 8235 5075 1050/1999
Bolzengelenk Type:
Zeichnung-Nr.:
Drawing No.: ohne/mit SM-Bolzenabdichtung NM015B/S- (P)
Pin Joint -
G146.000 NM105B/S- (P)
without/with SM-Pin Joint Seal
Revision: 2
Verteiler:
Distributor: 2/3 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 58 / 49 / 95 / 97 /98 14.10.2003
119
120
ab NM063 ab NM063
from NM063 from NM063
1998 5065 5115 5075 1040 1045 1050/1999 1998 5425 8235 5065 8060 5115 5075 8060 1040 1045 1050/1999
mit Loctite 245 gesichert mit Loctite 245 gesichert

5440 5435 secured with Loctite 245 5435 5440 secured with Loctite 245
Bolzengelenk mit Verschl.-Buchse Type:

Zeichnung-Nr.:
Drawing No.: ohne/mit SM-Bolzenabdichtung NM045B/S- (P)
Pin Joint with Wear Sleeves -
G147.000 NM105B/S- (P)
without/with SM-Pin Joint Seal
Revision: 1
Verteiler:
Distributor: 2 / 3 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 58 / 49 / 95 / 97 / 98 23.05.2003
121
122
123
124

5115
5115
1999 8060 5440 8235 5425 5425 8235 5048 5440 8060 1050
5048
5049 5435 5075 1998 5075 5435 5049 1040 1045
Loctite 245
Loctite 245
Bolzengelenk mit Verschleißbuchse Type:

Zeichnung-Nr.:
Drawing No.: und SM-Bolzenabdichtung NM125B-(P)
pin joint with wear sleeve
G158.001 and SM-pin joint seal
22.08.2011 Rosam
geprüft / checked 22.08.2011 Rückerl
freigegeben / released 22.08.2011 Kamal Replacement for Version of:
Verteiler:
Distributor: 2 / 3 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 58 / 94 / 95 / 97 / 98
125
126
Loctite 245
5115
5425 8235 5048 5440 8060 1050/1999
1998 5605 5600 5075 5435 5049 1040 1045
Type:
Zeichnung-Nr.: Bolzengelenk mit Verschleißbuchse
Drawing No.: und SM-Bolzenabdichtung und Schutzhülse
pin joint with wear sleeve NM125B-(P)
G181.000 and SM-pin joint seal and sleeve
05.09.2011 Rosam
geprüft / checked 05.09.2011 Rückerl
Verteiler:
Distributor: 2 / 3 / 50 / 51 / 52 / 58 / 94 / 95 / 97 / 98
127
128
SPARE PARTS LIST 11.07.2016 Page 1
1 2 3 4
Part Unit Designation Ident-No
Pos. Quant. Size/Dimension Norm Material/Surface
0085 1 ST lantern
NM038B-
0120 4 ST spring washer
DIN127
0125 4 ST hex head screw
DIN933
0140 4 ST hex nut
DIN934
1030 1 ST pin
1035 1 ST ring
NM038B
1050 1 ST connecting shaft
NM038B
1998 1 ST coupling rod
NM038--
1999 1 ST rotor
NM038--
2005 1 ST end connection
NM038--
2010 1 ST pump housing
NM038-Y
2015 1 ST drain plug
DIN910
2016 1 ST drain plug
DIN910
NM038BY - D8384292-D8384293 - 7300001704 - 000100 - NPSAGNM02 002.ETL13996
2020 4 ST stud screw

DIN939
DIN127
2030 4 ST hex nut
DIN934
2035 1 ST support foot
NM038-1
3005 1 ST stator
NM038--
3010 4 ST stator bolt
NM038-0
DIN127
3020 6 ST hex nut
DIN934
3070 4 ST disk / washer
DIN125
Model
Commission-Nr. Product: NEMO® aggregate NPSAGNM02
7300001704/000100 Type: NM038BY 00
129
SPARE PARTS LIST 11.07.2016 Page 2
Last Page
1 2 3 4
Part Unit Designation Ident-No
Pos. Quant. Size/Dimension Norm Material/Surface
5065 2 ST circlip
NM038/N
5075 2 ST joint bolt
NM038/N
5115 2 ST safety sleeve
NM038/N
5425 2 ST clamp ring
NM038/N
5990 0 L lubricant oil
DIN5150
7005 1 ST mechanical seal housing
NM038--
7010 1 ST mechanical seal
MG1-G60
8010 1 ST gasket
DIN7603
8012 1 ST gasket
DIN7603
8015 1 ST O-ring
DIN3770
8060 4 ST O-ring
DIN3770
8235 2 ST SM®-pin joint seal
NM038/N
9000 1 ST base plate
NM038BY

9500 1 ST drive
9900 1 ST name plate

OBERFLÄ
Model
Commission-Nr. Product: NEMO® aggregate NPSAGNM02
7300001704/000100 Type: NM038BY 00
130
Förderkennlinie / Performance Curve
NM038--01L Statorwerkstoff / elastomer quality: standard
Q [m³/h]
18 2 bar
4 bar
6 bar
16
14
12
10
0 n [1/min]
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
0 1 2
nm03801l - NM038BY - D8384292-D8384293 - 7300001704 - 000100 - NPSAGNM02
vgm [m/s]
P [kW]
2
4
3 6
2 bar
4
3,5
2,5
1,5
3 4 bar
2
2,5
2 bar
1
2
1,5 2 bar
1,5
1
0,5
1
0,5
0,5
0 n [1/min]
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
Losbrechmoment / starting torque T(L) = 60 Nm Druck / pressure T

2 bar 32 Nm
4 bar 42 Nm
6 bar 49 Nm
Gültigkeit für Wasser (1 cP) bei 20 °C. Toleranzen nach VDMA 24284 (+10%/-5%).
Valid for water (1 cP) at 20 °C (70 °F). Tolerances are in accordance with VDMA 24284 (+10%/-5%).
Rev.: 03/2007 Technische Änderungen vorbehalten. / Technical changes reserved. www.netzsch-pumpen.de

131
DATA SHEET 11.07.2016
Product: NEMO® aggregate Commission-Nr.: 7300001704/000100

Type: NM038BY
medium
pumped medium Dünnschlamm
Specific gravity assumed 0,95 - 1,10 kg/dm3
Particle size assumed 0,00 - 3,00 mm
pH value assumed 6,00 - 9,00
solids content approx. 3,00 - 5,00 %TS (weight%)
dynamic viscosity assumed 100,00 - 300,00 mPa/s
performance
capacity (Q-nom) approx. 2,00 m3/h
capacity (Q-min) approx. 0,50 m3/h
capacity (Q-max) approx. 4,00 m3/h
differential pressure (Q-nom) 3,00 bar
differential pressure (Q-min) 3,00 bar
differential pressure (Q-max) 3,00 bar
pressure on press.conn.(Q-nom) 3,00 bar
pressure on press.conn.(Q-min) 3,00 bar
pressure on press.conn.(Q-max) 3,00 bar
speed (Q-nom) approx. 97,00 1/min
speed (Q-min) approx. 30,00 1/min
speed (Q-max) approx. 187,00 1/min
rubbing velocity (Q-nom) 0,29 m/s
rubbing velocity (Q-min) 0,09 m/s
rubbing velocity (Q-max) 0,55 m/s
frequency Q-nom approx. 40 Hz
frequency Q-min. approx. 12 Hz
frequency Q-max. approx. 77 Hz
power required at pump (Q-nom) 0,35 kW
power required at pump (Q-min) 0,11 kW
power required at pump (Q-max) 0,67 kW
operating torque (Q-nom) 34,10 Nm
operating torque (Q-min) 34,10 Nm
operating torque (Q-max) 34,10 Nm
starting torque (Q-nom) 66,00 Nm
starting torque (Q-min) 66,00 Nm
starting torque (Q-max) 66,00 Nm
operating temperature (Q-min) assumed 20 ° C
operating temperature (Q-max) assumed 20 ° C
aggregate
Aggregat execution NEMO® pump w.base plate/drive
installation aggregate horizontal
general conditions
Installation area in building
Ambient temperature approx. 20° C

133

Type: NM038BY
humidity up to 50%
operating mode Continuous operation
operating hours 8,00 h/day
service voltage (V) 400
number of phases 3
operating frequency 50 Hz
painting
Aggregat colour RAL6026 (opalgreen)
coating system system 2
coating thickness 100my
O/M instructions
medium CD
number 3
language for O&M's English
language for spare parts ist English
despatch method by mail
medium Download
number 1
language for 2nd O&M's English
language 2nd spare parts list English
documentation
EU Machine Regulations Declaration of Conformity
general
sense of rotation to the left, viewed on drive
name plate material Stainless steel(self-adhesive)
name plate language German
name plate specification standard w.logo
lantern
material lantern 0.6025 (cast iron)
drive flange diameter 200
drive shaft diameters 30,000
shaft length 60
cross drilling l / d l=27/d=8
housing /endstud
housing material 0.6025 (Cast iron)
Flange/hopper position vertically upwards
function of housing connection suction connection
flange design pump housing Flange acc.to DIN EN 1092-1
pump housing flange diameter DN65 PN16 (4-hole)
end connection flange design Flange acc.to DIN EN 1092-1
end connection flange DN DN65 PN16 (4-hole)
discharge flange arrangement axial centrical
function end connection pressure connection

134

Type: NM038BY
housing seals NBR
shaft sealing
shaft sealing type type MG1-G60
shaft seal materials Q1Q1VGG
rotating parts
rotating parts materials CrNiMo17-12-2
joints
joint execution pin joint
joint sealing execution SM Pin joint seal
joint sealing material NBR/1.4401
joint lubrication Mineral oil Omala 460
rotor
rotor material CrSt.hard.(Chrome steel hard.)
rotor temperature range 20° C normal size
stator
stator material NEMOLAST® S62L
stator jacket material steel
stator bolt material 1.4301 (AISI 304)
make / type
manufacturer (gearmotor) Nord
type SK20-90LP/4
type addendum -F(AL) TF
execution
drive construction B5
drive ratio 11,65
thrust bearing strengthened
winding voltage (V) 230/400
voltage range 220-240/380-420
Power-saving mode IE3
frequency (Hz) 50
number of poles 4
number of phases 3
power (kW) 1,50
Rated current 3,23
Cos Phi 0,79
speed (rpm) 121
drive speed 1.415
axial load (Nm) 5.600
protection type IP55
insulation class F, used in accordance w.B
thermal monitoring wind.prot.3PTCi w/o tripping
drive flange diameter 200
drive shaft diameters 30,000

135

Type: NM038BY
shaft length 60
cross drilling l / d l=27/d=8
drawing No. WN0146 (acc.Platform)
sub assembly
material base plate steel powder coated
base plate execution base plate hat trapeziform

136
issued:
copy to:
16 Contacts
22.08.2013
Revision:
16 CONTACTS
text no. 10
16000
16.0
PAGE
137
138
1 Contacts
Geretsrieder Str. 1
84478 Waldkraiburg, Germany
Telephone: +49 8638 63-0
Fax: +49 8638 67981
E-mail: info.nps@netzsch.com
Internet: http://www.netzsch.com
Team of advisors:
During our German business hours from Monday to Thursday 08:00 to 17:00 and Friday 08:00
to 15:00, you can reach your personal contact person via the standard telephone numbers, fax or
email:
Business Field Environmental & Energy Business Field Food & Pharmaceutical
Telephone: +49 8638 63-1010 Telephone: +49 8638 63-1030
Fax: +49 8638 63-2333 Fax: +49 8638 63-2358

E-mail: info.nps@netzsch.com E-mail: info.nps@netzsch.com
Business Field Chemical, Pulp & Paper Business Field Oil & Gas
Fax: +49 8638 63-2327 Fax: +49 8638 63-2333
E-mail: info.nps@netzsch.com E-mail: info.nps@netzsch.com
Spare part service Technical Service

Fax: +49 8638 67999 Fax: +49 8638 67999
E-mail: info.nps@netzsch.com E-mail: service.nps@netzsch.com
In emergencies, we can be reached outside our business hours and at weekends and on
German national holiday at:
+49 8638 63 63 63
Direct contact details for your advisor and our service points all over the world are available on our
website:
http://www.netzsch.com
The "Safety clearance certificate" is available to download from our download area:
http://www.netzsch-pumpen.de
139
140
issued:
copy to:
22.08.2013
Revision:
17 Certificates / Annexes
10
17 CERTIFICATES / ANNEXES
text no.
16000
17.0
PAGE
141
142
EC Declaration of Conformity
as laid out in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
The manufacturer: NETZSCH Tel.: +49 8638 63-0

Pumpen & Systeme GmbH Fax: +49 8638 67981
Geretsrieder Str. 1 E-Mail: info.nps@netzsch.com
D-84478 Waldkraiburg
hereby declares that the progressing cavity pump NEMO®:
Type: NM038BY Constructed: 2016
Machine no.: D8384292-D8384293 Commission: 7300001704/000100
complies with the relevant requirements of the following directives of the European Parliament and
Council:
- 2006/42/EC of 17 May 2006
The following harmonised standards were applied:

- EN ISO 12100:2010 - EN 809:1998+A1:2009/AC:2010
This declaration loses its validity should the machine be modified or not be used as
intended.
Authorised representative: Reinhard Denk (Head of Design)

Geretsrieder Straße 1
Waldkraiburg, on the 11.07.2016
Hisham Kamal, Reinhard Denk,

Head of Product Management Head of Design NKE00 12.10.2012
143
144
EU Declaration of Conformity
as laid out in the Directives 2004/108/EG and 2014/35/EU
The manufacturer: NETZSCH Tel.: +49 8638 63-0

Pumpen & Systeme GmbH Fax: +49 8638 67981
Geretsrieder Str. 1 E-Mail: info.nps@netzsch.com
hereby declares that the machine:
Type: NM038BY Constructed: 2016
Machine no.: D8384292-D8384293 Commission: 7300001704/000100
complies with the relevant requirements of the following directives of the European Parliament and
Council:
- 2004/108/EC of 15 December 2004
- 2014/35/EU of 26 February 2014
This declaration loses its validity should the machine be modified or not be used as
intended.
Authorised representative: Reinhard Denk (Head of Design)

Geretsrieder Straße 1
Waldkraiburg, on the 11.07.2016
Hisham Kamal, Reinhard Denk,

Head of Product Management Head of Design NKNEV 20.04.2016
145
146
IPM - EN - en_21100_0001 - NM038BY - D8384292-D8384293 - 7300001704 - 000100 - NPSAGNM02 002.ETL13996 N 11.07.2016 17:58:33
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
6052802 1915
IPM - EN -/ en_21100_0068 - NM038BY - D8384292-D8384293 - 7300001704 - 000100 - NPSAGNM02 002.ETL13996 N 11.07.2016 17:58:33
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
Inductive sensor NJ5-11-N-G
Dimensions
M14x1
Ø 11
14
31
3
19
0102
Model Number
NJ5-11-N-G
Features
• Comfort series
• 5 mm not embeddable
Technical Data
• Usable up to SIL2 acc. to IEC 61508
General specifications
Switching element function NAMUR, NC
Connection Rated operating distance sn 5 mm
Installation not embeddable
Output polarity NAMUR
Assured operating distance sa 0 ... 4.05 mm
BN Reduction factor rAl 0.4
L+
Reduction factor rCu 0.3
Reduction factor r304 0.85
BU Nominal ratings
L- Nominal voltage Uo 8V
Switching frequency f 0 ... 3000 Hz
Hysteresis H typ. 5 %
Current consumption
Measuring plate not detected ≥ 3 mA
Measuring plate detected ≤ 1 mA
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature -25 ... 100 °C (-13 ... 212 °F)
Mechanical specifications
Connection type cable PVC , 2 m
Core cross-section 0.34 mm2
Housing material Stainless steel 1.4305 / AISI 303
Sensing face PVDF
Protection degree IP68
General information
Use in the hazardous area see instruction manuals
Category 2G; 1D
Compliance with standards and directives
Standard conformity
NAMUR EN 60947-5-6:2000
Standards EN 60947-5-2:2007
IEC 60947-5-2:2007
Approvals and certificates
UL approval cULus Listed, General Purpose
Date of issue: 2012-02-09 112726_eng.xml
CSA approval cCSAus Listed, General Purpose

Release date: 2012-02-09 14:47
Subject to modifications without notice Copyright Pepperl+Fuchs

Pepperl+Fuchs Group
www.pepperl-fuchs.com
USA: +1 330 486 0001
fa-info@us.pepperl-fuchs.com
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
fa-info@pepperl-fuchs.com
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
fa-info@sg.pepperl-fuchs.com
1
ATEX 2G
Instruction Manual electrical apparatus for hazardous areas
Device category 2G for use in hazardous areas with gas, vapour and mist
Directive conformity 94/9/EG
Standard conformity EN 60079-0:2006, EN 60079-11:2007
Ignition protection "Intrinsic safety"
Use is restricted to the following stated conditions
CE symbol 0102
Ex-identification ¬ II 2G Ex ia IIC T6
EC-Type Examination Certificate PTB 00 ATEX 2048 X

Appropriate type NJ 5-11-N...
Effective internal capacitance Ci ≤ 45 nF ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
Effective internal inductance Li ≤ 50 µH ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
General The apparatus has to be operated according to the appropriate data in the data
sheet and in this instruction manual. The EC-Type Examination Certificate has to
be observed. The special conditions must be adhered to!
Directive 94/9/EG and hence also EC-Type Examination Certificates apply in gene-
ral only to the use of electrical apparatus under atmospheric conditions.
The use in ambient temperatures of > 60 °C was tested with regard to hot surfaces
by the mentioned certification authority.
If the equipment is not used under atmospheric conditions, a reduction of the per-
missible minimum ignition energies may have to be taken into consideration.
Highest permissible ambient temperature The temperature ranges, according to temperature class, are given in the EC-Type
Examination Certificate.
Installation, Comissioning Laws and/or regulations and standards governing the use or intended usage goal
must be observed. The intrinsic safety is only assured in connection with an appro-
priate related apparatus and according to the proof of intrinsic safety.
Maintenance No changes can be made to apparatus, which are operated in hazardous areas.
Repairs to these apparatus are not possible.
Special conditions
Protection from mechanical danger When used in the temperature range below -20 °C the sensor should be protected
from knocks by the provision of an additional housing.
Electrostatic charging Electrostatic charges must be avoided on the mechanical housing components.
Dangerous electrostatic charges on the mechanical housing components can be
avoided by incorporating these in the equipotential bonding.
112726_eng.xml
Release date: 2012-02-09 14:47 Date of issue: 2012-02-09

2 Pepperl+Fuchs Group
USA: +1 330 486 0001
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
ATEX 1D
Instruction Manual electrical apparatus for hazardous areas
Device category 1D for use in hazardous areas with combustible dust

Directive conformity 94/9/EG
Standard conformity IEC 61241-11:2002: draft; prEN61241-0:2002
type of protection intrinsic safety "iD"
Use is restricted to the following stated conditions
CE symbol 0102
Ex-identification ¬ II 1D Ex iaD 20 T 108 °C (226.4 °F)

The Ex-relevant identification may also be printed on the accompanying adhesive
label.
EC-Type Examination Certificate ZELM 03 ATEX 0128 X
Appropriate type NJ 5-11-N...
Effective internal capacitance Ci ≤ 45 nF ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
Effective internal inductance Li ≤ 50 µH ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
General The apparatus has to be operated according to the appropriate data in the data
sheet and in this instruction manual.
The EC-Type Examination Certificate has to be observed.
The special conditions must be adhered to!
Maximum housing surface temperature The maximum surface temperature of the housing is given in the EC-Type Exami-
nation Certificate.
Installation, Comissioning Laws and/or regulations and standards governing the use or intended usage goal
must be observed.
The intrinsic safety is only assured in connection with an appropriate related
apparatus and according to the proof of intrinsic safety.
The associated apparatus must satisfy at least the requirements of category ia IIB
or iaD. Because of the possibility of the danger of ignition, which can arise due to
faults and/or transient currents in the equipotential bonding system, galvanic isola-
tion in the power supply and signal circuits is preferable. Associated apparatus wit-
hout electrical isolation must only be used if the appropriate requirements of IEC
60079-14 are met.
The intrinsically safe circuit has to be protected against influences due to lightning.
When used in the isolating wall between Zone 20 and Zone 21 or Zone 21 und
Zone 22 the sensor must not be exposed to any mechanical danger and must be
sealed in such a way, that the protective function of the isolating wall is not
impaired. The applicable directives and standards must be observed.
If the Ex-relevant identification is exclusively printed on the included adhesive label,
this must be applied in the direct vicinity of the sensor! The surface to which the
label is to applied must be clean and free from grease! The applied adhesive label
must be durable adlegible to protect it against the possibility of chemical corrosion!
Maintenance No changes can be made to apparatus, which are operated in hazardous areas.
Repairs to these apparatus are not possible.
Special conditions
Electrostatic charging The connection cables are to be laid in accordance with EN 50281-1-2 and must not
normally be subjected to chaffing during use.
Electrostatic charges must be avoided on the mechanical housing components.
Dangerous electrostatic charges on the mechanical housing components can be
avoided by incorporating these in the equipotential bonding.
112726_eng.xml
Release date: 2012-02-09 14:47 Date of issue: 2012-02-09

Pepperl+Fuchs Group
USA: +1 330 486 0001
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
3
Motors | Automation | Energy | Transmission & Distribution | Coatings
Manual Geral de Instalação, Operação e

Manutenção de Motores Elétricos
Installation, Operation and Maintenance
Manual of Electric Motors
Manual General de Instalación, Operación
y Mantenimiento de Motores Eléctricos
Installations-, Betriebs- und
Wartungsanleitung für Elektrische Motoren
--
www.weg.net
Português 2
English 57
Español 111
Deutsch 167
57 Motores Elétricos
www.weg.net
INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL OF ELECTRIC MOTORS
This manual provides information about WEG induction motors fitted with squirrel cage,
permanent magnet or hybrid rotors, low, medium and high voltage, in frame sizes IEC 56
to 630 and NEMA 42 to 9606/10.
The motor lines indicated below have additional information that can be checked in their
respective manuals:
g Smoke Extraction Motors;
g Electromagnetic Brake Motors;
g Hazardous Area Motors.
These motors meet the following standards, if applicable:

g NBR 17094-1: máquinas Elétricas Girantes - Motores de Indução - Parte 1: trifásicos
g NBR 17094-2: Máquinas Elétricas Girantes - Motores de Indução - Parte 2: monofásicos
g IEC 60034-1: Rotating Electrical Machines - Part 1: Rating and Performance
g NEMA MG 1: Motors and Generators
g CSA C 22.2 N°100: Motors and Generators
g UL 1004-1: Rotating Electrical Machines - General Requirements
If you have any questions regarding this manual please contact your local WEG branch,
contact details can be found at www.weg.net.
58 Manual of Electric Motors

www.weg.net
Table of Contents
1. Terminology......................................................................................................... 61
2. Initial Recommendations................................................................................ 62
2.1. Warning Symbol.......................................................................................................................... 62
2.2. Receiving Inspection................................................................................................................. 62
2.3. Nameplates................................................................................................................................... 63
3. Safety Instructions......................................................................................... 66
4. Handling and Transport................................................................................ 67

4.1. Lifting............................................................................................................................................... 67
4.1.1. Horizontal motors with one eyebolt....................................................................................... 67
4.1.2. Horizontal motor with two eyebolts...................................................................................... 68
4.1.3. Vertical motors . ...................................................................................................................... 69
4.1.3.1. Procedures to place W22 motors in the vertical position................................................ 69
4.1.3.2. Procedures to place HGF motors in the vertical position............................................... 70
4.2 Procedures to place W22 vertical mount motors in horizontal position..... 71
5. Storage.................................................................................................................. 73
5.1. Exposed machined Surfaces.................................................................................................. 73
5.2. Storage........................................................................................................................................... 73
5.3 Bearings.......................................................................................................................................... 74
5.3.1 Grease lubricated bearings..................................................................................................... 74
5.3.2 Oil lubricated bearings............................................................................................................ 74
ENGLISH
5.3.3 Oil Mist lubricated bearings.................................................................................................... 75
5.3.4 Sleeve bearing.......................................................................................................................... 75
5.4. INSULATION RESISTANCE.............................................................................................................. 75
5.4.1. Insulation resistance measurement...................................................................................... 75
6. Installation.......................................................................................................... 78
6.1. Foundations.................................................................................................................................. 79
6.2. MOTOR MOUNTING......................................................................................................................... 81
6.2.1. Foot mounted motors.............................................................................................................. 81
6.2.2. Flange mounted motors......................................................................................................... 81
6.2.3. Pad mounted motors.............................................................................................................. 82
6.3. Balancing....................................................................................................................................... 82
6.4. Couplings....................................................................................................................................... 82
6.4.1. Direct coupling......................................................................................................................... 83
6.4.2. Gearbox coupling.................................................................................................................... 83
6.4.3. Pulley and belt coupling......................................................................................................... 83
6.4.4. Coupling of sleeve bearing motors....................................................................................... 83
6.5. Leveling.......................................................................................................................................... 84
6.6. Alignment....................................................................................................................................... 84
6.7. Connection of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors.............................. 85
6.8. Connection of the cooling water system...................................................................... 85
6.9. Electrical connection............................................................................................................ 85
Manual of Electric Motors 59

www.weg.net
6.10. Connection of the thermal protection devices....................................................... 88

6.11. Resistance Temperature Detectors (Pt-100)................................................................. 89
6.12. Connection of the space heaters..................................................................................... 91
6.13. Starting Methods..................................................................................................................... 92
6.14. Motors driven by Frequency Inverter........................................................................... 93
6.14.1. Use of dV/dt filter.................................................................................................................... 93
6.14.1.1. Motor with enameled round wire....................................................................................... 93
6.14.1.2. Motor with prewound coils................................................................................................ 93
6.14.2. Bearing insulation.................................................................................................................. 94
6.14.3. Switching frequency.............................................................................................................. 94
6.14.4. Mechanical speed limitation................................................................................................ 94
7. Commissioning..................................................................................................... 95
7.1. Initial Start-up ............................................................................................................................ 95
7.2. Operating conditions .............................................................................................................. 97
7.2.1.Limits of vibration .................................................................................................................... 98
8. Maintenance......................................................................................................... 99
8.1. General Inspection.................................................................................................................... 99
8.2. Lubrication................................................................................................................................... 99
8.2.1. Grease lubricated rolling bearings...................................................................................... 100
8.2.1.1. Motor without grease fitting.............................................................................................. 102
8.2.1.2. Motor with grease fitting................................................................................................... 102
8.2.1.3. Compatibility of the Mobil Polyrex EM grease with other greases.............................. 102
8.2.2. Oil lubricated bearings......................................................................................................... 103
ENGLISH
8.2.3. Oil mist lubricated bearings................................................................................................. 103

8.2.4. Sleeve bearings..................................................................................................................... 103
8.3. Motor assembly and disassembly.................................................................................... 104
8.3.1. Terminal box........................................................................................................................... 105
8.4. Drying the stator winding insulation............................................................................ 105
8.5. Spare parts................................................................................................................................. 106
9. Environmental Information........................................................................ 107

9.1. Packaging..................................................................................................................................... 107
9.2. Product........................................................................................................................................ 107
10. Troubleshooting chart x solutions.................................................... 108
11. Warranty Term................................................................................................ 109
12. Ec declaration of conformity.................................................................110

www.weg.net
1. Terminology
Balancing: the procedure by which the mass distribution of a rotor is checked and, if necessary, adjusted to
ensure that the residual unbalance or the vibration of the journals and/or forces on the bearings at a frequency
corresponding to service speed are within specified limits in International Standards.
[ISO 1925:2001, definition 4.1]
Balance quality grade: indicates the peak velocity amplitude of vibration, given in mm/s, of a rotor running free-
in-space and it is the product of a specific unbalance and the angular velocity of the rotor at maximum
operating speed.
Grounded Part: metallic part connected to the grounding system.
Live Part: conductor or conductive part intended to be energized in normal operation, including a neutral
conductor.
Authorized personnel: employee who has formal approval of the company.
Qualified personnel: employee who meets the following conditions simultaneously:

g Receives training under the guidance and responsibility of a qualified and authorized professional;
g Works under the responsibility of a qualified and approved professional.
Note: The qualification is only valid for the company that trained the employee in the conditions set out by the authorized and qualified
professional responsible for training.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
2. Initial Recommendations
Electric motors have energized circuits, exposed rotating parts and hot surfaces that may cause serious
injury to people during normal operation. Therefore, it is recommended that transportation, storage,
installation, operation and maintenance services are always performed by qualified personnel.
Also the applicable procedures and relevant standards of the country where the machine will be installed must
be considered.
Noncompliance with the recommended procedures in this manual and other references on the WEG website
may cause severe personal injuries and/or substantial property damage and may void the product warranty.
For practical reasons, it is not possible to include in this Manual detailed information that covers all construction
variables nor covering all possible assembly, operation or maintenance alternatives.
This Manual contains only the required information that allows qualified and trained personnel to carry out their
services. The product images are shown for illustrative purpose only.
For Smoke Extraction Motors, please refer to the additional instruction manual 50026367 available on the
website www.weg.net.
For brake motors, please refer to the information contained in WEG 50006742 / 50021973 brake motor manual
available on the website www.weg.net.
For information about permissible radial and axial shaft loads, please check the product technical catalogue.
The user is responsible for the correct definition of the installation environment and application
characteristics.
During the warranty period, all repair, overhaul and reclamation services must be carried out by WEG
ENGLISH
authorized Service Centers to maintain validity of the warranty.
2.1. Warning Symbol
Warning about safety and warranty.
2.2. Receiving Inspection

All motors are tested during the manufacturing process.
The motor must be checked when received for any damage that may have occurred during the transportation.
All damages must be reported in writing to the transportation company, to the insurance company and to
WEG. Failure to comply with such procedures will void the product warranty.
You must inspect the product:
g Check if nameplate data complies with the purchase order;
g Remove the shaft locking device (if any) and rotate the shaft by hand to ensure that it rotates freely.
g Check that the motor has not been exposed to excessive dust and moisture during the transportation.
Do not remove the protective grease from the shaft, or the plugs from the cable entries. These protections must
remain in place until the installation has been completed.

www.weg.net
2.3. Nameplates
The nameplate contains information that describes the construction characteristics and the performance of the
motor. Figure 2.1 and Figure 2.2 show nameplate layout examples.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
ENGLISH
Figure 2.1 - IEC motor nameplate.

www.weg.net
ENGLISH
Figure 2.2 - NEMA motor nameplate

www.weg.net
3. Safety Instructions
The motor must be disconnected from the power supply and be completely stopped before conducting
any installation or maintenance procedures. Additional measures should be taken to avoid accidental
motor starting.
Professionals working with electrical installations, either in the assembly, operation or maintenance,
should use proper tools and be instructed on the application of standards and safety requirements,
including the use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) that must be carefully observed in order to
reduce risk of personal injury during these services.
Electric motors have energized circuits, exposed rotating parts and hot surfaces that may cause serious
injury to people during normal operation. It is recommended that transportation, storage, installation,
operation and maintenance services are always performed by qualified personnel.
Always follow the safety, installation, maintenance and inspection instructions in accordance with the applicable
standards in each country.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
4. Handling and Transport

Individually packaged motors should never be lifted by the shaft or by the packaging. They must be lifted only by
means of the eyebolts, when supplied. Use always suitable lifting devices to lift the motor. Eyebolts on the frame
are designed for lifting the machine weight only as indicated on the motor nameplate. Motors supplied on pallets
must be lifted by the pallet base with lifting devices fully supporting the motor weight.
The package should never be dropped. Handle it carefully to avoid bearing damage.
Eyebolts provided on the frame are designed for lifting the machine only. Do not use these eyebolts for
lifting the motor with coupled equipment such as bases, pulleys, pumps, reducers, etc.
Never use damaged, bent or cracked eyebolts. Always check the eyebolt condition before lifting the motor.
Eyebolts mounted on components, such as on end shields, forced ventilation kits, etc. must be used for lifting
these components only. Do not use them for lifting the complete machine set.
Handle the motor carefully without sudden impacts to avoid bearing damage and prevent excessive mechanical
stresses on the eyebolts resulting in its rupture.
To move or transport motors with cylindrical roller bearings or angular contact ball bearings, use always
the shaft locking device provided with the motor.
All HGF motors, regardless of bearing type, must be transported with shaft locking device fitted.
4.1. Lifting
Before lifting the motor ensure that all eyebolts are tightened properly and the eyebolt shoulders are in
contact with the base to be lifted, as shown in Figure 4.1. Figure 4.2 shows an incorrect tightening of the
eyebolt.
Ensure that lifting machine has the required lifting capacity for the weight indicated on the motor nameplate.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.1 - Correct tightening of the eyebolt Figure 4.2 - Incorrect tightening of
the eyebolt.
The center-of-gravity may change depending on motor design and accessories. During the lifting
procedures the maximum allowed angle of inclination should never be exceeded as specified below.
4.1.1. Horizontal motors with one eyebolt

For horizontal motors fitted with only one eyebolt, the maximum allowed angle-of-inclination during the lifting
process should not exceed 30º in relation to the vertical axis, as shown in Figure 4.3.
30° Max.
Figure 4.3 - Maximum allowed angle-of-inclination for motor with one eyebolt.
www.weg.net
4.1.2. Horizontal motor with two eyebolts

When motors are fitted with two or more eyebolts, all supplied eyebolts must be used simultaneously for the
lifting procedure.
There are two possible eyebolt arrangements (vertical and inclined), as shown below:
g For motors with vertical lifting eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.4, the maximum allowed lifting angle should not
exceed 45° in relation to the vertical axis. We recommend to use a spreader bar for maintaining the lifting
elements (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor surface.
45° Max.
Figure 4.4 - Maximum resulting angle for motors with two or more lifting eyebolts.
g For HGF motors, as shown in Figure 4.5, the maximum resulting angle should not exceed 30° in relation to the
vertical axis.
ENGLISH
30° Max.
Figure 4.5 - Maximum resulting angle for horizontal HGF motors
g For motors fitted with inclined eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.6, the use of a spreader bar is required for
maintaining the lifting elements (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor
surface.
Figure 4.6 - Use of a spreader bar for lifting.

www.weg.net
4.1.3. Vertical motors

For vertical mounted motors, as shown in Figure 4.7, the use of a spreader bar is required for maintaining the
lifting element (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor surface.
Figure 4.7 - Lifting of vertical mounted motors.
Always use the eyebolts mounted on the top side of the motor, diametrically opposite, considering the
mounting position. See Figure 4.8.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.8 - Lifting of HGF motors.
4.1.3.1. Procedures to place W22 motors in the vertical position

For safety reasons during the transport, vertical mounted Motors are usually packed and supplied in horizontal
position.
To place W22 motors fitted with eyebolts (see Figure 4.6), to the vertical position, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that the eyebolts are tightened properly, as shown in Figure 4.1;
2. Remove the motor from the packaging, using the top mounted eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.9;
Figure 4.9 - Removing the motor from the packaging.

www.weg.net
3. Install a second pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.10;
Figure 4.10 - Installation of the second pair of eyebolts.
4. Reduce the load on the first pair of eyebolts to start the motor rotation, as shown in Figure 4.11. This
procedure must be carried out slowly and carefully.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.11 - End result: motor placed in vertical position.
These procedures will help you to move motors designed for vertical mounting. These procedures are also
used to place the motor from the horizontal position into the vertical position and vertical to horizontal.
4.1.3.2. Procedures to place HGF motors in the vertical position

HGF motors are fitted with eight lifting points: four at drive end and four at non-drive end. The HGF motors are
usually transported in horizontal position, however for the installation they must be placed in the vertical
position.
To place an HGF motor in the vertical position, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the motor by using the four lateral eyebolts and two hoists, see Figure 4.12;
Figure 4.12 - Lifting HGF motor with two hoists.

www.weg.net
2. Lower the hoist fixed to motor drive end while lifting the hoist fixed to motor non-drive end until the motor
reaches its equilibrium, see Figure 4.13.
Figure 4.13 - Placing HGF motor in vertical position
3. Remove the hoist hooks from the drive end eyebolts and rotate the motor 180° to fix the removed hooks into
the two eyebolts at the motor non-drive end, see Figure 4.14.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.14 - Lifting HGF motors by the eyebolts at the non-drive end.
4. Fix the removed hoist hooks in the other two eyebolts at the non-drive end and lift the motor until the vertical
position is reached, see Figure 4.15.
Figure 4.15 - HGF motor in the vertical position
These procedures will help you to move motors designed for vertical mounting. These procedures are also
used to place the motor from the horizontal position into the vertical position and vertical to horizontal.
4.2 Procedures to place W22 vertical mount motors in horizontal position
To place W22 vertical mount motor in horizontal position, proceed as follows:

www.weg.net
1. Ensure that all eyebolts are tightened properly, as shown in Figure 4.1;
2. Install the first pair of eyebolts and lift the motor as shown in Figure 4.16;
Figure 4.16 - Install the first pair of eyebolts
3. Install the second pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.17;

ENGLISH
Figure 4.17 - Install the second pair of eyebolts
4. Reduce the load on the first pair of eyebolts for rotating the motor, as shown in Figure 4.18. This procedure
must be carried out slowly and carefully.
Figure 4.18 - Motor is being rotated to horizontal position
5. Remove the first pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.19.
Figure 4.19 - Final result: motor placed in horizontal position

www.weg.net
5. Storage
If the motor is not installed immediately, it must be stored in a dry and clean environment, with relative humidity
not exceeding 60%, with an ambient temperature between 5 ºC and 40 ºC, without sudden temperature
changes, free of dust, vibrations, gases or corrosive agents. The motor must be stored in horizontal position,
unless specifically designed for vertical operation, without placing objects on it. Do not remove the protection
grease from shaft end to prevent rust.
If the motor are fitted with space heaters, they must always be turned on during the storage period or when the
installed motor is out of operation. Space heaters will prevent water condensation inside the motor and keep
the winding insulation resistance within acceptable levels. Store the motor in such position that the condensed
water can be easily drained. If fitted, remove pulleys or couplings from the shaft end (more information are given
on item 6).
The space heaters should never be energized when the motor is in operation.
5.1. Exposed machined Surfaces

All exposed machined surfaces (like shaft end and flange) are factory-protected with temporary rust inhibitor. A
protective film must be reapplied periodically (at least every six months), or when it has been removed and/or
damaged.
5.2. Storage
The stacking height of the motor packaging during the storage period should not exceed 5 m, always
considering the criteria indicated in Table 5.1:
Table 5.1 - Max. recommended stacking height
ENGLISH
Packaging Type Frame sizes Maximum stacking quantity
IEC 63 to 132 Indicated on the top side of
Cardboard box
NEMA 143 to 215 the cardboard box
IEC 63 to 315
06
NEMA 48 to 504/5
IEC 355
Wood crate 03
NEMA 586/7 and 588/9
HGF IEC 315 to 630
Indicated on the packaging
HGF NEMA 5000 to 9600
Notes:
1) Never stack larger packaging onto smaller packaging.
2) Align the packaging correctly (see Figure 5.1 and Figure 5.2).
Figure 5.1 - Correct stacking

X
Figure 5.2 - Incorrect stacking

www.weg.net
3) The feet of the crates above should always be supported by suitable wood battens (Figure 5.3) and never stand on the steel tape or
without support (Figure 5.4).
Figure 5.3 - Correct stacking

X XFigure 5.4 - Incorrect stacking
4) When stacking smaller crates onto longer crates, always ensure that suitable wooden supports are provided to withstand the weight
(see Figure 5.5). This condition usually occurs with motor packaging above IEC 225S/M (NEMA 364/5T) frame sizes.
ENGLISH
Figure 5.5 - Use of additional battens for stacking
5.3 Bearings
5.3.1 Grease lubricated bearings
We recommend rotating the motor shaft at least once a month (by hand, at least five revolutions, stopping the
shaft at a different position from the original one). If the motor is fitted with shaft locking device, remove it before
rotating the shaft and install it again before performing any handling procedure. Vertical motors may be stored
in the vertical or in horizontal position. If motors with open bearings are stored longer than six months, the
bearings must be relubricated according to item 8.2 before commissioning of the motor.
If the motor is stored for longer than 2 years, the bearings must be replaced or removed, washed, inspected
and relubricated according to item 8.2.
5.3.2 Oil lubricated bearings

The motor must be stored in its original operating position and with oil in the bearings. Correct oil level must be
ensured. It should be in the center of the sight glass.
During the storage period, remove the shaft locking device and rotate the shaft by hand every month, at least
five revolutions, thus achieving an even oil distribution inside the bearing and maintaining the bearing in good
operating conditions. Reinstall the shaft locking device every time the motor has to be moved.
If the motor is stored for a period of over six months, the bearings must be relubricated according to Item 8.2
before starting the operation. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must be
replaced or removed, washed according to manufacturer instructions, checked and relubricated according to
Item 8.2. The oil of vertical mounted motors that are transported in horizontal position is removed to prevent oils
leaks during the transport. These motors must be stored in vertical position after receiving and the bearing
must be lubricated.

www.weg.net
5.3.3 Oil Mist lubricated bearings

The motor must be stored in horizontal position. Lubricate the bearings with ISO VG 68 mineral oil in the
amount indicated in the Table 5.2 (this is also valid for bearings with equivalent dimensions). After filling with oil,
rotate the shaft by hand, at least five revolutions)
During the storage period, remove the shaft locking device (if any) and rotate the shaft by hand every week, at
least five revolutions, stopping it at a different position from the original one. Reinstall the shaft locking device
every time the motor has to be moved. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must
be replaced or removed, washed according to manufacturer instructions, checked and relubricated according
to item 8.2.
Table 5.2 - Amount of oil per bearing
Bearing Size Amount of Oil (ml) Bearing Size Amount of Oil (ml)
6201 15 6309 65
6202 15 6311 90
6203 15 6312 105
6204 25 6314 150
6205 25 6315 200
6206 35 6316 250
6207 35 6317 300
6208 40 6319 350
6209 40 6320 400
6211 45 6322 550
6212 50 6324 600
6307 45 6326 650
6308 55 6328 700
ENGLISH
The oil must always be removed when the motor has to be handled. If the oil mist system is not operating after
installation, fill the bearings with oil to prevent bearing rusting. During the storage period, rotate the shaft by
hand, at least five revolutions, stopping it at a different position from the original one. Before starting the motor,
all bearing protection oil must be drained from the bearing and the oil mist system must be switched ON.
5.3.4 Sleeve bearing

The motor must be stored in its original operating position and with oil in the bearings. Correct oil level must be
ensured. It should be in the middle of the sight glass. During the storage period, remove the shaft locking
device and rotate the shaft by hand every month, at least five revolutions, and at 30 rpm, thus achieving an
even oil distribution inside the bearing and maintaining the bearing in good operating conditions. Reinstall the
shaft locking device every time the motor has to be moved.
If the motor is stored for a period of over six months, the bearings must be relubricated according to the Item
8.2 before starting the operation.
If the motor is stored for a period longer than the oil change interval, or if it is not possible to rotate the motor
shaft by hand, the oil must be drained and a corrosion protection and dehumidifiers must be applied.
5.4. INSULATION RESISTANCE
We recommend measuring the winding insulation resistance at regular intervals to follow-up and evaluate its
electrical operating conditions. If any reduction in the insulation resistance values are recorded, the storage
conditions should be evaluated and corrected, where necessary.
5.4.1. Insulation resistance measurement

We recommend measuring the winding insulation resistance at regular intervals to follow-up and evaluate its
electrical operating conditions. If any reduction in the insulation resistance values are recorded, the storage
conditions should be evaluated and corrected, where necessary.
The insulation resistance must be measured in a safe environment.

www.weg.net
The insulation resistance must be measured with a megohmmeter. The machine must be in cold state and
disconnected from the power supply.
To prevent the risk of an electrical shock, ground the terminals before and after each measurement.
Ground the capacitor (if any) to ensure that it is fully discharged before the measurement is taken.
It is recommended to insulate and test each phase separately. This procedure allows the comparison of the
insulation resistance between each phase. During the test of one phase, the other phases must be grounded.
The test of all phases simultaneously evaluates the insulation resistance to ground only but does not evaluate
the insulation resistance between the phases.
The power supply cables, switches, capacitors and other external devices connected to the motor may
considerably influence the insulation resistance measurement. Thus all external devices must be disconnected
and grounded during the insulation resistance measurement.
Measure the insulation resistance one minute after the voltage has been applied to the winding. The applied
voltage should be as shown in Table 5.3.
Table 5.3 - Voltage for the insulation resistance
Winding rated voltage (V) Testing voltage for measuring the insulation resistance (V)
< 1000V 500
1000 - 2500 500 - 1000
2501 - 5000 1000 - 2500
5001 - 12000 2500 - 5000
> 12000 5000 - 10000
The reading of the insulation resistance must be corrected to 40 °C as shown in the Table 5.4.
Table 5.4 - Correction Factor for the Insulation Resistance corrected to 40 °C

ENGLISH
Measuring temperature Correction factor of the Measuring temperature of Correction factor of the
of the insulation insulation resistance the insulation resistance insulation resistance
resistance (°C) corrected to 40 °C (°C) corrected to 40 °C
10 0.125 30 0.500
11 0.134 31 0.536
12 0.144 32 0.574
13 0.154 33 0.616
14 0.165 34 0.660
15 0.177 35 0.707
16 0.189 36 0.758
17 0.203 37 0.812
18 0.218 38 0.871
19 0.233 39 0.933
20 0.250 40 1.000
21 0.268 41 1.072
22 0.287 42 1.149
23 0.308 43 1.231
24 0.330 44 1.320
25 0.354 45 1.414
26 0.379 46 1.516
27 0.406 47 1.625
28 0.435 48 1.741
29 0.467 49 1.866
30 0.500 50 2.000

www.weg.net
The motor insulation condition must be evaluated by comparing the measured value with the values
indicated in Table 5.5 (corrected to 40 °C):
Table 5.5 - Evaluation of the insulation system
Limit value for rated voltage Limit value for rated voltage
Situation
up to 1.1 kV (MΩ) above 1.1 kV (MΩ)
Dangerous. The motor can not
Up to 5 Up to 100
be operated in this condition
5 to 100 100 to 500 Regular
100 to 500 Higher than 500 Good
Higher than 500 Higher than 1000 Excellent
The values indicated in the table should be considered only as reference values. It is advisable to log all
measured values to provide a quick and easy overview on the machine insulation resistance.
If the insulation resistance is low, moisture may be present in the stator windings. In this case the motor
should be removed and transported to a WEG authorized Service Center for proper evaluation and repair
(This service is not covered by the warranty). To improve the insulation resistance through the drying
process, see section 8.4.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
6. Installation
The insulation resistance must be measured in a safe environment.
Check some aspects before proceeding with the installation:
1. Insulation resistance: must be within the acceptable limits. See item 5.4.
2. Bearings:
a. Rolling bearings: oxidized bearings must be replaced. If no oxidation is detected, lubricate the bearings as
described in Item 8.2. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must be replaced
before starting the motor.
b. Sleeve bearing: if sleeve bearing motors are stored longer than the recommended oil change interval, the
oil must be changed before machine starting. Don’t forget to remove the dehumidifiers when you drain the
oil from the motor and to fill it again with new oil before starting the machine. For more details, see item
8.2.
3. Operating conditions of the start capacitors: If single-phase motors are stored for a period of over two years,
it is recommended to change the start capacitors before motor starting since they lose their operating
characteristics.
4. Terminal box:
a. the inside of the terminal box must be clean and dry.
b. the contacts must be correctly connected and corrosion free. See 6.9 and 6.10.
c. the cable entries must be correctly sealed and the terminal box cover properly mounted in order to ensure
the degree of protection indicated on the motor nameplate.
5. Cooling: the cooling fins, air inlet and outlet openings must be clean and unobstructed. The distance
between the air inlet openings and the wall should not be shorter than ¼ (one quarter) of the diameter of the
air inlet. Ensure sufficient space to perform the cleaning services. See item 7.
6. Coupling: remove the shaft locking device (where fitted) and the corrosion protection grease from the shaft
ENGLISH
end and flange just before installing the motor. See item 6.4.
7. Drain hole: the motor must always be positioned so the drain hole is at the lowest position (If there is any
indication arrow on the drain, the drain must be so installed that the arrow points downwards).
Motors supplied with rubber drain plugs leave the factory in the closed position and must be opened
periodically to allow the exit of condensed water. For environments with high water condensation levels and
motor with degree of protection IP55, the drain plugs can be mounted in open position (see Figure 6.1).
For motors with degree of protection IP56, IP65 or IP66, the drain plugs must remain at closed position (see
Figure 6.1), being opened only during the motor maintenance procedures.
The drain system of motors with Oil Mist lubrication system must be connected to a specific collection
system (see Figure 6.12).
Closed position Open position
Figure 6.1 - Detail of the rubber drain plug mounted in closed and open position.

www.weg.net
8.Additional recommendations:
a. Check the direction of motor rotation, starting the motor at no-load before coupling it to the load.
b. Vertical mounted motors with shaft end down must be fitted with drip cover to protect them from liquids
or solids that may drop onto the motors.
c. Vertical mounted motors with shaft end up must be fitted with water slinger ring to prevent water
penetration inside the motor.
Remove or fix the shaft key before starting the motor.
6.1. Foundations
The foundation is the structure, structural element, natural or prepared base, designed to withstand the
stresses produced by the installed equipment, ensuring safe and stable performance during operation. The
foundation design should consider the adjacent structures to avoid the influences of other installed equipment
and no vibration is transferred through the structure
The foundation must be flat and its selection and design must consider the following characteristics:
a) T
he features of the machine to be installed on the foundation, the driven loads, application, maximum
allowed deformations and vibration levels (for instance, motors with reduced vibration levels, foot flatness,
flange concentricity, axial and radial loads, etc. lower than the values specified for standard motors).
b) Adjacent buildings, conservation status, maximum applied load estimation, type of foundation and fixation
and vibrations transmitted by theses constructions.
If the motor is supplied with leveling/alignment bolts, this must be considered in the base design.
Please consider for the foundation dimensioning all stresses that are generated during the operation of
the driven load.
ENGLISH
The user is responsible for the foundation designing and construction.
The foundation stresses can be calculated by using the following equations (see Figure 6.2):
F1 = 0,5 * g * m - (4 * Tb / A)
F2 = 0,5 * g * m + (4 * Tb / A)
Where:
F1 and F2 = lateral stresses (N);

g = gravitational acceleration (9,8 m/s2);
m = motor weight (kg);
Tb = breakdown torque (Nm);
A = distance between centerlines of mounting holes in feet or base of the machine (end view) (m).

www.weg.net
The motors may be mounted on:

g Concrete bases: are most used for large-size motors (see Figure 6.2);
g Metallic bases: are generally used for small-size motors (see Figure 6.3).
F1 F1
A
F2 F2
Figure 6.2 - Motor installed on concrete base Figure 6.3 - Motor installed on metallic base
A
The metallic and concrete bases may be fitted with sliding system. These types of foundations are generally
used where the power transmission is achieved by belts and pulleys. This power transmission system is easier
to assemble/disassemble and allows the belt tension adjustment. Other important aspect of this foundation
type is the location of the base locking screws that must be diagonally opposite. The rail nearest the drive
pulley is placed in such a way that the positioning bolt is between the motor and the driven machine. The other
rail must be placed with the bolt on the opposite side (diagonally opposite), as shown in Figure 6.4 .
To facilitate assembly, the bases may have the following features:

ENGLISH
g shoulders and/or recesses;

g anchor bolts with loose plates;
g bolts cast in the concrete;
g leveling screws;
g positioning screws;
g steel & cast iron blocks, plates with flat surfaces.
Figure 6.4 - Motor installed on sliding base
After completing the installation, it is recommended that all exposed machined surfaces are coated with
suitable rust inhibitor.

www.weg.net
6.2. MOTOR MOUNTING
Footless motors supplied with transportation devices, according to Figure 6.5, must have their devices
removed before starting the motor installation.
Figure 6.5 - Detail of the transportation devices for footless motors.
6.2.1. Foot mounted motors

The drawings of the mounting hole dimensions for NEMA or IEC motors can be checked in the respective
technical catalogue.
The motor must be correctly aligned and leveled with the driven machine. Incorrect alignment and leveling may
result in bearing damage, generate excessive vibration and even shaft distortion/breakage.
For more details, see section 6.3 and 6.6. The thread engagement length of the mounting bolt should be at
ENGLISH
least 1.5 times the bolt diameter. This thread engagement length should be evaluated in more severe
applications and increased accordingly.
Figure 6.6 shows the mounting system of a foot mounted motor indicating the minimum required thread
engagement length.
L = 1.5 x D
D
Figure 6.6 - Mounting system of a foot mounted motor
6.2.2. Flange mounted motors
The drawings of the flange mounting dimensions, IEC and NEMA flanges, can be checked in the technical
catalogue.
The coupling of the driven equipment to the motor flange must be properly dimensioned to ensure the required
concentricity of the assembly.
Depending on the flange type, the mounting can be performed from the motor to the driven equipment flange
(flange FF (IEC) or D (NEMA)) or from the driven equipment flange to the motor (flange C (DIN or NEMA)).
For the mounting process from the driven equipment flange to the motor, you must consider the bolt length,
flange thickness and the thread depth of the motor flange.
If the motor flange has tapped through-holes, the length of the mounting bolts must not exceed the
tapped through-hole length of the motor flange, thus preventing damage to the winding head.

www.weg.net
For flange mounting the thread engagement length of the mounting bolt should be at least 1.5 times the bolt
diameter. In severe applications, longer thread engagement length may be required.
In severe applications or if large motors are flange mounted, a foot or pad mounting may be required in addition
to the flange mounting (Figure 6.7). The motor must never be supported on its cooling fins.
Figure 6.7 - Mounting method of flange mounted motors with frame base support
Note:
When liquid (for example oil) is likely to come into contact with the shaft seal, please contact your local WEG representative.
6.2.3. Pad mounted motors

Typically, this method of mounting is used in axial fans. The motor is fixed by tapped holes in the frame. The
dimensions of these tapped holes can be checked in the respective product catalogue. The selection of the
motor mounting rods/bolts must consider the dimensions of the fan case, the installation base and the thread
depth in the motor frame.
ENGLISH
The mounting rods and the fan case wall must be sufficiently stiff to prevent the transmission of excessive
vibration to the machine set (motor & fan). Figure 6.8 shows the pad mounting system.
Figure 6.8 - Mounting of the motor inside the cooling duct
6.3. Balancing
Unbalanced machines generate vibration which can result in damage to the motor. WEG motors are
dynamically balanced with “half key” and without load (uncoupled). Special balancing quality level must be
stated in the Purchase Order.
The transmission elements, such as pulleys, couplings, etc., must balanced with “half key” before they
are mounted on the motor shaft.
The balance quality grade meets the applicable standards for each product line.
The maximum balancing deviation must be recorded in the installation report
6.4. Couplings
Couplings are used to transmit the torque from the motor shaft to the shaft of the driven machine. The following
aspects must be considered when couplings are installed:
g Use proper tools for coupling assembly & disassembly to avoid damages to the motor and bearings.
Whenever possible, use flexible couplings, since they can absorb eventual residual misalignments during the
g
machine operation.
The maximum loads and speed limits informed in the coupling and motor manufacturer catalogues cannot
g
be exceeded.
g Level and align the motor as specified in sections 6.5 and 6.6, respectively.

www.weg.net
Remove or fix the shaft key firmly when the motor is operated without coupling in order to prevent
accidents.
6.4.1. Direct coupling

Direct coupling is characterized when the Motor shaft is directly coupled to the shaft of the driven machine
without transmission elements. Whenever possible, use direct coupling due to lower cost, less space required
for installation and more safety against accidents.
Do not use roller bearings for direct coupling, unless sufficient radial load is expected.
6.4.2. Gearbox coupling

Gearbox coupling is typically used where speed reduction is required.
Make sure that shafts are perfectly aligned and strictly parallel (in case of straight spur gears) and in the right
meshing angle (in case of bevel and helical gears).
6.4.3. Pulley and belt coupling

Pulleys and belts are used when speed increase or reduction between motor shaft and driven load is required.
Excessive belt tension will damage the bearings and cause unexpected accidents such as breakage of
the motor shaft.
6.4.4. Coupling of sleeve bearing motors
Motors designed with sleeve bearings must be operated with direct coupling to the driven machine or a
ENGLISH
gearbox. Pulley and belts can not be applied for sleeve bearing motors.
Motors designed with sleeve bearings have 3 (three) marks on the shaft end. The center mark is the indication
of the magnetic center and the 2 (two) outside marks indicate the allowed limits of the rotor axial movement, as
shown in Figure 6.9.
The motor must be so coupled that during operation the arrow on the frame is placed over the central mark
indicating the rotor magnetic center. During start-up, or even during operation, the rotor may freely move
between the two outside marks when the driven machine exerts an axial load on the motor shaft. However,
under no circumstance, the motor can operate continuously with axial forces on the bearing.
Axial Clearance
Figure 6.9 - Axial clearance of motor designed with sleeve bearing

www.weg.net
For coupling evaluation consider the maximum axial bearing clearance as shown in Table 6.1.
The axial clearance of the driven machine and coupling influence the maximum bearing clearance.
Table 6.1 - Clearance used for sleeve bearings
Bearing size Total axial clearance (mm)

9* 3+3=6
11* 4+4=8
14* 5 + 5 =10
18 7,5 + 7,5 = 15
* For Motors in accordance with API 541, the total axial clearance is 12.7 mm
The sleeve bearings used by WEG were not designed to support axial load continuously.
Under no circumstance must the motor be operated continuously at its axial clearance limits.
6.5. Leveling
The motor must be leveled to correct any deviations in flatness arising from the manufacturing process and the
material structure rearrangement. The leveling can be carried out by a leveling screw fixed on the motor foot or
on the flange or by means of thin compensation shims. After the leveling process, the leveling height between
the motor mounting base and the motor cannot exceed 0.1 mm.
If a metallic base is used to level the height of the motor shaft end and the shaft end of the driven machine, level
only the metallic base relating to the concrete base.
Record the maximum leveling deviations in the installation report.
6.6. Alignment
The correct alignment between the motor and the driven machine is one of the most important variables that
extends the useful service life of the motor. Incorrect coupling alignment generates high loads and vibrations
ENGLISH
reducing the useful life of the bearings and even resulting in shaft breakages. Figure 6.10 illustrates the
misalignment between the motor and the driven machine.
Motor shaft Driven machine shaft
Max.
misalignment
Driven machine
offset (mm)
Motor
offset (mm)
Figure 6.10 - Typical misalignment condition
Alignment procedures must be carried out using suitable tools and devices, such as dial gauge, laser alignment
instruments, etc. The motor shaft must be aligned axially and radially with the driven machine shaft.
The maximum allowed eccentricity for a complete shaft turn should not exceed 0.03 mm, when alignment is
made with dial gauges, as shown in Figure 6.11. Ensure a gap between couplings to compensate the thermal
expansion between the shafts as specified by the coupling manufacturer.
Dial gauge
Reference
Line
GAP
Parallel alignment Angular alignment
84 Manual of Electric Motors Figure 6.11 - Alignment with dial gauge.

www.weg.net
If alignment is made by a laser instrument, please consider the instructions and recommendations provided by
the laser instrument manufacturer.
The alignment should be checked at ambient temperature with machine at operating temperature.
The coupling alignment must be checked periodically
Pulley and belt couplings must be so aligned that the driver pulley center lies in the same plane of the driven
pulley center and the motor shaft and the shaft of the driven machine are perfectly parallel.
After completing the alignment procedures, ensure that mounting devices do not change the motor and
machine alignment and leveling resulting into machine damage during operation.
It is recommended to record the maximum alignment deviation in the Installation Report.
6.7. Connection of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors

When oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors are installed, connect the existing lubricant tubes (oil inlet and
oil outlet tubes and motor drain tube), as shown in Figure 6.12. The lubrication system must ensure continuous
oil flow through the bearings as specified by the manufacturer of the installed lubrication system.
Inlet
ENGLISH
Drain
Outlet
Figure 6.12 - Oil supply and drain system of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors
6.8. Connection of the cooling water system

When water cooled motors are installed, connect the water inlet and outlet tubes to ensure proper motor
cooling. According to item 7.2, ensure correct cooling water flow rate and water temperature in the motor
cooling system.
6.9. Electrical connection

Consider the rated motor current, service factor, starting current, environmental and installation conditions,
maximum voltage drop, etc. to select appropriate power supply cables and switching and protection devices.
All motors must be installed with overload protection systems. Three-phase motors should be fitted with phase
fault protection systems.
Before connecting the motor, check if the power supply voltage and the frequency comply with the
motor nameplate data. All wiring must be made according to the connection diagram on the motor
nameplate. Please consider the connection diagrams in the Table 6.2 as reference value.
To prevent accidents, check if motor has been solidly grounded in accordance with the applicable standards.

www.weg.net
Table 6.2 - Typical connection diagram for three-phase motors.

1 2 3
1
1
1 22
2 33 3
1 2 3
Type of 111 222 333
Configuration Quantity of Leads Connection
L1 1
L1 L2
L1
L2 2 diagram
L2 L3L33
L3 LL
L
connection L1
L1 L2
L1 L2 L3
L2 L3
L3
L
L
L
L1
L1 1 L2
L2 2 L3
L3 3 L1
L
L1 L2 L3
3 - 66 44 55
66 44 55 6 66 44
6 4L1 55 L2 6 L3 4 55 6 4L
6
6 4 4 5 5 6 4
6 4 5
4 5 6
6 4 4
666
11 422 5334 4 5 6 611 4422 5533 666
11 4422
4
116 224 335 1 16 224 335 116 224
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1
1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2
1
1L1
L1 222 L3
L2
L2 33
L3
L3 1L1
L1
1 L2 222 L3
L2
L2 33
L3
L3 1
1L1
L1 222
L2
L2
6 Δ-Y
L1
L1
L1
1 L2
1 L2
L2 2 L333 L1
L3 L1
L1 1 L2
L2 2 L333
L3
L1
L1
L1
1 L2
1 L2 L2 2
L16 L2
L1 L2 4 L3 L3 5 L1 L1 L2 6 L2 L3 4 L3 5 L16 L2
L1 L2 4
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
44 55 66 4 5 6 44 55
4 5 6 L144 4 L2 55 5L3 66 6 4 5
4L1 L2
4
7
4 5 L36
5
8
5 6
9
6 4
7
4 5
8
5 6
9 4L1 L2
4
7
5
5
8
44777 5588 8 6699 9 44777 5588 8 666 99
9 4
44777 558 58
8
1
714 8
7 2
825 9 3
936 1
714 8
7 2
825 9 3
936 1
714 8
7 2
825
771 1 8822 9933 771 1 8822 9933 771 1 8822
YY - Y L1
L1
L1
17 L2
1
11 L2 L2
L2
28 L3
2
22 L3 L3
L333
39 L1
3 L1
L1
17 L2
1
11 L2 L2
L2
28 L3
2
22 L3 L3
L3
33
39
3 L1L1
L1
1 L2
1117 L2 L2
L2
2
2228
L1
L1 L2 L3 L1
L1 L2 L3 L1
L1 L2
L1 4 L2 5 L3 6 L1 4 L2 5 L3 6 L1 4 L2 5
L1 1 L2
L1 L2 2 L3 L3 3 L1 L1 1 L2 L2 2 L3 L3 3 L1 1 L2
L1 L2 2
L17 L28 L39 L17 L28 L39 L17 L28
9 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
44 5 66 4 5 6 44 5
L1 44 L25 5 L3 6 L144 4 L25 5 L36 6 L1 4 L25 5
47 5
7
4 58 6
8
5 69
9
6 47 5
7
4 58 6
8
5 69
9
6
4
47 5
7 58
8
ΔΔ - Δ 447 7 58 5 8 69 6 9 4 477 58 5 8 69 6 9 44477 58 5 5 8
Single Speed 777
1
71
14 88 2
82
25 99 3
9336 777
1
71
14 88 2
82
25 99 3
93
36 777
1
71
14 88 2
8225
L1 1
17 L2 82
28 L3 93
39 L1 1
17 L2 82
28 L3 93
39 L1 1
17 L2 82
28
L1L1
L1
1 1 L2
L2
L22 2 L3
L3
L33 3 L1L1
L1
1 1 L2 L2
L2
22 L3
L3
L33 3 L1L1
L1
1 1 L2L2
L2
2 2
L1 1
L1 1 L2 2
L2 2 L3 3
L3 3 1
L1 1 L2
L1 2
L2 2 L3 3
L3 3 1
L1 1 L2
L1 L2 22
L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5 L3 L3 6 L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5 L3 L3 6 L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5
11 12 10 L1 11 L2 12L39 10 L1
11 7 12 L210 L39 11 12 10 11 12 10 L1 11 L2
11 12
11
11 12 10
12 10 7 11
10 118 12
11 12 10
12 10
10 1111
11 12 12810
12 10 11
10 11 12
11 12 10 10 11 12
11 12 10
12 10 7 11
10 118 11
11 1
5
11
5 12
11 6
12
126 10 4
10
104 1 5
11
11 2
5 12 6
12
126 10 34
10
104 5
11
11 1
5 12 6
12
12 6 10 2 4
10
4 311
10 55 12
11
11 66 10
12
12 44
10
10
11
5
11
5 12
11 6
12
126 10 4
10
104 1 55 2 1
11
11 6
1
1
115
115 6
12 6 4
104 11
115 5 126 6 4
10 4 11115 5 126 6 4
104 115 5 12 6
12 6 10 4
104 115
115 6
12 6 4
104 11115 5 12
16
5
88 6
5811669999124444
77 L1 5
8L2
8 6
9
5811669912449 L3 4
77 L15
8 8 6
9
581166991244 9L2 4
77 L3 5
88 6
9 9
581166991244 4
77 5
88 6
99
581166991244 4
77 L1 5
8L2
8
5811669 69
ΔΔ - YY - Δ - Y 558 7710 558 47 710 558 47710 558 47710 558 710 558
2
82
8
88225
63
993
93
936 1
71
714 882
2
8
8 2
5
2
63
993
9
9 3
36 1
7
71
14 8
882
2
8 2
5
2
63
993
9
9 3
36 1
7
714
1 882
2
8
82
25
63
9
9
993 3
6
3 1
7
71
14
2
888
225 969
82 336 747
93 1
71
714 888
225 969
82 3
9
L2
L22
2 L3
L3 3
3
771
L1
L11 L2
L2 2
2 L3
L3 3
3 L1771
L1 1 L2L2 22 L3
L3 3
3
771
L1
L11 L2
L2 2
2 L3
L33
3
771
L1
L11 L2
L22 L3
2 93
L3 3 L1
3 71
L117 L2 L2
2
22 L3 L3933
L2
2
L2 8
211L3 L3
3312L19 L1
1 1 7
110 L2 L2
2 8
211L3 L3
3 9
312L1 L1
1 1 7
110 L2 L2
2 8
211L3 L3
3 312L19 L1
1 1 7
110 L2 L2
2 8
211L3 L3
3 9
312L1 L1
1 1
1107 L2
2
L2 8
211L3L3
3
312L19 L1
1 1
110 L2 L2
2 211 8 L3 333
L3
L2
L2 L3
2 L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L2 2 L3L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L2 2 L3L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L2 L3
2 L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L252L3 L3
L363L1 L1
L141 L2 L2
L252L3 L3
L3
L2
L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2
L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L2 L3 9 L1
8 PART-WINDING 7 L2 8 L3 9 L1 7 L2 8 L3 L17 L2
9WYE-DELTA 8 L3 9 L1 7 L2 8 L3 9 L1 7
PART-WINDIN L2 8 L
PART-WINDING WYE-DELTA PART-WINDIN
PART-WINDIN
12 PART-WINDING
2 PART-WINDING
3 1
PART-WINDING 2 3 1 2 3 WYE-DELTA
WYE-DELTA
1
WYE-DELTA 2 3 1 2 PART-WINDIN
3 1
PART-WINDIN
PART-WINDIN
2
L2STARTPART-WINDING
PART-WINDING
L3 L1 L2 RUN
L3 L1 L2START L3 WYE-DELTA
WYE-DELTA
L1 L2 RUN
L3 L1 L2 PART-WINDING
PARTIDAPART-WINDING
L3 L1 OPERA
L2 L3
PART-WINDING
START
START RUN
RUN START
START WYE-DELTARUN RUN PARTIDA
PARTIDA PART-WINDIN OPER
OPER
START
START PART-WINDING RUN
RUN START
START WYE-DELTA RUN
RUN PARTIDA
PARTIDA OPERA
OPERA
12START
12
START 1010 11 1111 1212RUNRUN 10
10 11 11
11 12
START
12 10
START 1010 11 11
11 12 12
12 RUN
RUN 10
10 11 11
11 12
PARTIDA
12
PARTIDA 1010 1111 OPERA
OPERA 12
12 11
Δ - PWS 1212
START 1010 11 1212 RUN 10
10 11 12
START
12 10 11 12 RUN1010 11 PARTIDA
1212 1010 1111 OPERA 12
12 1 1
12
77 10
12 10
START88 11
10 11
99
11 12
77 10
12 10
RUN88 11
10 11
99
11 12
12 START
66 10 10
1044 11 11
55 12
11 12
66 10
12 10
RUN
44 11
10 11
55
11 12
12 10
7PARTIDA
88
10 11
99
11 OPER12
77 10
12 18
1
12
127 10 PART-WINDING
8 11 9 12
127 7 10 88 119 9 12
12 66 104 4 11
55
WYE-DELTA 12
6 6 10
44 11
55 12
127
7 1010 PART-WINDIN
8 1111 9 12
127 7 18 8
8
Part-winding start 7
6
712 84
6
76
8
4
8 10 95 9
5
9511 776 6
7 12884
6 4
8410995 5
9 11 667
5 6
7712 448 4
8 10559
8 5
911 667
9 6
7 12448
7 4
8810559 5
911
9
7
6
712 84
6
8
4
8 10 95
4
9
5
9511 776 6
7612884 4
8 4
776
6
1 884
4
2
4 995
5
3 76
6
1 844
2 95
5
3 671 482 59
3 67
1 48
2 59
3 777
6
6
1
6 884
4
PARTIDA
2 995
5
3 OPER766
1 844
2
61 START 2 53 17 44RUN 28 55 39 7 START
16 88 8 24 99 935 77 7 16 88 8
RUN
24 99 935 17 44 28 53 53 17 42 42
66117 444 2 28 553 39 6661 1 42 2 53 3 77711 82 2 933 71 1 822 933 61
661 42 2 5339 66161
422
L1112
1 L2
6 2L2 2
210 L3
4 3L33
311
5 L1 1
1126 L2 L2 2
210 L3
4 3L33
3115 L1 1
1127 22 L22210 L3
8 33 3
311
9 1L1 L11
112 2
L2
210 L33
311 L1112
1 L2
6 2L22
210 L3
4 3L3311
5 L1 11126 L L2 21
L1
11
L1
L1 L2 L3
2 L3
3 L1
1L1
1 22 L2 L3 L3
3 L1
11
L1 L2
L2 L3
L3 17 22
L1 L2
L2 8 33 L3
L3 9 L1
11
L1 L2 L3
2 L3 L1
3 L1
1L1
1 22 L
L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L393 L1
82 L3 L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L3
82 L3 93
L1
L161 L2
L1 L2
L2 42 L3
L3
L3 53 L1
L1
L161 L2 L2
L2 42 L3
L3
L353 L1
L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L3
82 L3 93 L1 L171 L2 L2
L2 8
L1
L16 L2 L24 L3 L35 44 L1 L1 556 L2 L2 664 L3L35 L1 L1 L2 L244L3 L3 55 L1 L166 L2 L2 L3 L3 L1
L16 L2 L24 L3 L35 44 L1 L1 556 L2 L2 664
L1 L2 L34 4 5
L1 6 6
L2 L3 7
L1 L2 8 4 9 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 L6
4 5 5 6 44 L35 5 6 6L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L34 4 5 L1 6
5 6
1 2 3444 11 555 21 666 32 3 1 4424 11 3555 2 666 31 2 3 1 2 3444 11 522 6332
5 5 1 6 6
14 22 25 33 36 14 22 25 33 36 1 225 33
YY - Y L1 L2 L31 1 L1
2 L2
3 L3 L1 L2 11 L3 2 L1
3 L2 L3 L1 L2 L31 14 L1 2 L3
111 222 333 111 222 333 111 222 333
ENGLISH
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 L2 L3
Variable Torque L1
L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 6 L1 L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L36 L1
L1
L1 4 L252 L3
1 L2 L
L6
L1
L1 LOW L2 SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2 L3 L3 MENOR L1 L2
L1 L2
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1LOWLOW L2 L3
SPEED L1
HIGH L2SPEED L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR L1 L2ROTA
ROTA L3
L11 L2
LOW
LOW L2
L33
SPEED
2SPEED
SPEED L3
L1
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH L1 1 L2 L22
SPEED
L33
SPEED
SPEED L3
MENOR
MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1
L2
1 ROTAÇROTAÇ
ROTA
L2 2 L3 L3
LOW
44 5SPEED SPEED 66 HIGH 44 SPEED SPEED
55 66 MENOR
MENOR 44 ROTAÇ 55 66
LOW
LOW4 55 5SPEED 6 HIGH
HIGH 4 SPEED 5 66 MENOR 4 ROTAÇ 5 6
4
4LOW
4 5 SPEED 6
6 HIGH44 5 5SPEED 6 4 ROTA
4 5
5 6 6
4L1
411 L2 55522 6L3 6
633 4L14
411 L2 555
22 6L3 6
63 4
L14
411 L2 55522 6L 6
63
14 225 336 14 225 33 3 14 225 33 3
1
1LOW 2 SPEED 3 11 2 2SPEED 36 MENOR 1
1 ROTA 2 3 3
Δ - YY 1
11 22 33 2 3 HIGH 1
11 22 33 3 1
11 22 33 2
6 L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Constant Torque L1
L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 6 L1 L1
L1 L2
4 L25 L3 L3
L363 L1
L1
1
4 L25 L3L2 2 L
L6
L1
L1 LOW L2 SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2SPEED
L2 L3
L3 MENOR
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1LOWLOW
LOW L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR
MENOR L1
L11 L2 L2 ROTA
ROTA
ROTA L3
L33
L11 2SPEED 3 HIGH 1 L2 SPEED
2 3 MENOR ROTA 2
44 L2
LOW
LOW SPEED
55SPEED L3
66 HIGH
HIGH L144 SPEED 55 L3
SPEED
SPEED 6 MENOR
MENOR L144 ROTAÇ L2
ROTA 55 L6
Double Speed LOW
LOW44 5SPEED 5SPEED 6 6 HIGH
HIGH 44 SPEED 5 66 6 MENOR 4 ROTA 5
4LOW
4 5 SPEED
5 6
6 HIGH 4 5
4 5SPEED
5 6
6 MENOR 4
4 ROTA
4
5
5 6
5 66
Dahlander 441 L2
L1 552 6 L3633 4 411 L2
L1 552 6L3 633 441 L2
L1 552 6 63
1 1
14 225 336 2 114 225 3362 11
14 22 25 L3
1 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 3 1 ROTA 2 3 3
111LOW 22 SPEED 33 111 222SPEED
HIGH 33 MENOR 1
11 22 33 2
YY - Δ L1 L2 2 L3 L1 L2 2 L3 L1 L22 L3
L1L1
L1 41 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 63 L1 L1
L1 41 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L363 L1L1
L1 41 L2 L25 L L
Constant Output L1
L1 LOW L2SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2SPEED L3
L3 MENOR L1 L2
L1 L2 L3
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1 LOW
LOW L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR
MENOR L1
L11 L2 L2ROTA
ROTA
ROTA L3L3
LOW
L11 L2 2SPEED L33 HIGH L1 1 L2 SPEED
2 L3 3 MENOR L1 ROTA 2
LOW
LOW
LOW SPEED
SPEED
SPEED
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
SPEED
SPEED
SPEED MENORROTAÇ
MENOR ROTAL
L2
MENOR
7 88 ROTAÇ 99
77 8LOW 8LOW 99SPEED 77 88 HIGH 99HIGHSPEED 77 88 99 7 8
MENOR
7 8 ROTA 9
7 7 88 9 9 SPEED 77 8 8 99 SPEED
77 88 99 77
11 882L18 9
93 L
3
777
71 8
1 2L1
8 L293 L3
3
9 71 2
17 82 39 93L1 L2 7 71L3 8
1 822 99 93
3 777 1 822 2 99 L29 3
1 82 2 993 3 771 1 882 93 7711 82 3 1 3
117 82
4 28LOW
5 3
669SPEED11 17 82
4 28 93
5 3 9
6HIGH 17 82
SPEED
4 28 93
5 3669 11
447 22
11MENOR
4 5
2
58 3ROTA
5 36
3
3669
111
4 4
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
6 6 14 4
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
66
6 11
1
44
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
6 6 441 25 52 6 63
41
4 552 66 5 6 3 4 1 5 2 6 3 4
4 55 663
1 5 2 6 444 5
55 L3 66 6
44
L1 L258 L3 69 444 L2
L1 555 L3 666 4L1
4L1 L258 L3 69 L1L1
L1
L2
74 L2L2
L2 8 L3 L39
9 Δ - Y - YY L1
L1
L1
7
L1
4 L2 L2
L2 L3 6
L25L3 L3
L3 L1 7
L14 L2
L1 L2
L1 L25 L3
L2 L3
8 L3
L3
L36
9 L1
L1
ONLY
7
L14 L2 L2
L25L3
L2FOR
L3
L3
L3 6
L1
L1
L1 L25L3
MENOR
L2
MENOR L3 6
L3
L1 1 L2L2 L3 L1 L2 ONLY
L1 L2 FOR
L3 L1
L1 1 L2
MENOR
L2
MENOR 2L3 L3 3
LOW
LOWL1
L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
2L3 L3 3 HIGH
HIGH L11L2
L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
2L3 L33 L11 L2
ONLY
L1
ONLY L2FOR2FOR
L3L3 3 MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
L1 L2
LOW
LOW
LOW L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
SPEED
4 SPEED L3 6
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
SPEED L3 ONLY
STARTING
ONLYL1
STARTING
STARTING
ONLY L2FOR
FOR
5 L36
FOR
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
4
ROTAÇÃO
MENOR 5 L36
LOW
LOW
5 HIGH4SPEED 5 6 ONLY 4 FOR
STARTING
STARTING ROTAÇÃO
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
LOW SPEED SPEED HIGH
HIGH SPEED SPEED ONLY FOR
STARTING
STARTING
STARTING
ROTAÇÃO
ROTAÇÃO
LOW SPEED
L1 L211 11L3 2 2
2 3 3 HIGH
3 L1 L2 L3 66 SPEED 6 6 4 4 L15 5
4STARTING5L2 L3 L1 L2
ROTAÇÃO 11 L322 33
1 2 33
1 2 2 3 3 6 4 4 5 5 MENOR 11 2 2 3
LOW SPEED 111 222 333 HIGH SPEED 666 444ONLY 555 FOR 111 222 333
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 6 L2 L3
STARTING
4 5 ROTAÇÃO L1 1 L2 2 L3
Double Speed L1 L2
L1
L1 L2 L3 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1 L2 L3 L3
L3 L1
L1 L2
L2 L3
L
6 - LOWL1 L2
L1 L2
L2 SPEED L3
L3 HIGH
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
SPEED
L2 L3
L3 MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
L2ROTA
ROTA
L3
L3
L3
Double Winding LOW
L1
LOW
L1
LOW
LOW
L2
L2
1 SPEED
SPEED
SPEED
2 L3
SPEED
L3
L3 3
HIGH
L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH
HIGH
L2
L2
6 SPEED
SPEED
SPEEDL3
4 L3
SPEED
L3 5
MENOR
MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1 1 ROTA
L2
L2 ROTA
ROTA2 L
L3
L3 3
LOW L1 L2
SPEED HIGH L1 L2
SPEED MENOR
MENOR L1 L2
ROTA
LOW
LOW SPEED SPEED HIGH
HIGH SPEED SPEED MENOR ROTAÇ ROTA
LOW SPEED HIGH SPEED MENOR ROT
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L
Equivalent table for lead identificationLOW SPEED HIGH SPEED MENOR ROTA
Lead identification on the wiring diagram 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NEMA MG 1 Part 2 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12
IEC 60034-8 U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U3 V3 W3 U4 V4 W4
Single Speed
JIS (JEC 2137) - up to 6 terminals U V W X Y Z
JIS (JEC 2137) - above 6 terminals U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U5 V5 W5 U6 V6 W6
Double Speed NEMA MG 1 Part 21) 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
(Dahlander / IEC 60034-8 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
Double Winding) JIS (JEC 2137) 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
1) NEMA MG 1 Part 2 defines T1 to T12 for two or more winding, however WEG adopts 1U to 4W.

www.weg.net
If motors are supplied without terminal blocks, insulate the cable terminals with suitable insulation material that
meets the power supply voltage and the insulation class indicated on the motor nameplate.
Ensure correct tightening torque for the power cable and grounding connections as specified in Table 8.7
The clearance distance (see Figure 6.13) between non-insulated live parts with each other and between
grounded parts must be as indicated in Table 6.3.
Clearance distance
Clearance distance
ENGLISH
Clearance distance Clearance distance
Figure 6.13 - Clearance distance representation

Table 6.3 - Minimum clearance distance (mm) x supply voltage.
Voltage Minimum clearance distance (mm)

U ≤ 440 V 4
440 < U ≤ 690 V 5.5
690 < U ≤ 1000 V 8
1000 < U ≤ 6900 V 45
6900 < U ≤ 11000 V 70
11000 < U ≤ 16500 V 105
Even when the motor is off, dangerous voltages may be present inside the terminal box used for the
space heater supply or winding energization when the winding is used as heating element.
Motor capacitors will hold a charge even after the power has been cut off. Do not touch the capacitors
and/or motor terminals, before discharging the capacitors completely.

www.weg.net
After the motor connection has been completed, ensure that no tool or foreign body has been left inside
the terminal box.
Unused cable inlet holes in the terminal box must be properly closed to ensure the degree of protection
indicated on the motor nameplate.
The cable inlets used for power supply and control must be fitted with components (for example, cable-
glands and conduits) that meet the applicable standards and regulations in each country.
If the motor is fitted with accessories, such as brakes and forced cooling systems, these devices must
be connected to the power supply according to the information provided on their nameplates and with
special care as indicated above.
All protection devices, including overcurrent protection, must be set according to the rated machine conditions.
These protection devices must protect the machine against short circuit, phase fault or locked rotor condition.
The motor protection devices must be set according to the applicable standards.
Check the direction of rotation of the motor shaft. If there is no limitation for the use of unidirectional fans, the
shaft rotation direction can be changed by reversing any two of the phase connections. For single-phase motor,
check the connection diagram indicated on the motor nameplate.
6.10. Connection of the thermal protection devices

If the motor is supplied with temperature monitoring devices, such as, thermostat, thermistors, automatic
thermal protectors, Pt-100 (RTD), etc., they must be connected to the corresponding control devices as
specified on the accessory nameplates. The non-compliance with this procedure may void the product
warranty and cause serious material damages.
ENGLISH
Do not apply test voltage above 2.5 V on thermistors and current above 1 mA on RTDs (Pt-100)
according to IEC 60751 standard.
Figure 6.14 and Figure 6.15 show the connection diagram of the bimetal thermal protector (thermostats) and
thermistors, respectively.
Figure 6.14 - Connection of the bimetal thermal protectors (thermostats)
Figure 6.15 - Thermistor connection

www.weg.net
The alarm temperature limits and thermal protection shutdowns can be defined according to the application;
however these temperature limits can not exceed the values in Table 6.4.
Table 6.4 - Maximum activation temperature of the thermal protections
Maximum temperature of the protection setting (°C)
Component Insulation class
Alarm Tripping
B - 130
Winding F 130 155
H 155 180
Bearing All 110 120
Notes:
1) The number and type of the installed protection devices are stated on the accessory nameplate of the motor.
2) If the motor is supplied with calibrated resistance, (for example, Pt-100), the motor protection system must be set according to the
operating temperatures indicated in Table 6.4.
6.11. Resistance Temperature Detectors (Pt-100)

The thermocouples Pt-100 are made of materials, whose resistance depends on the temperature variation,
intrinsic property of some materials (usually platinum, nickel or copper), calibrated resistance. Its operation is
based on the principle that the electric resistance of a metallic conductor varies linearly with the temperature,
thus allowing a continuous monitoring of the motor warm-up through the controller display ensuring a high level
of precision and answer stability. These devices are widely used for measuring temperatures in various industry
sectors.
In general these devices are used in installations where precise temperature control is required, for example, in
installation for irregular or intermittent duty.
The same detector may be used for alarm and tripping purposes.
Table 6.5 and Figure 6.16 show the equivalence between the Pt-100 resistance and the temperature.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
Table 6.5 - Equivalence between the Pt-100 resistance and the temperature.
ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω
-29 88.617 17 106.627 63 124.390 109 141.908 155 159.180
-28 89.011 18 107.016 64 124.774 110 142.286 156 159.553
-27 89.405 19 107.404 65 125.157 111 142.664 157 159.926
-26 89.799 20 107.793 66 125.540 112 143.042 158 160.298
-25 90.193 21 108.181 67 125.923 113 143.420 159 160.671
-24 90.587 22 108.570 68 126.306 114 143.797 160 161.043
-23 90.980 23 108.958 69 126.689 115 144.175 161 161.415
-22 91.374 24 109.346 70 127.072 116 144.552 162 161.787
-21 91.767 25 109.734 71 127.454 117 144.930 163 162.159
-20 92.160 26 110.122 72 127.837 118 145.307 164 162.531
-19 92.553 27 110.509 73 128.219 119 145.684 165 162.903
-18 92.946 28 110.897 74 128.602 120 146.061 166 163.274
-17 93.339 29 111.284 75 128.984 121 146.438 167 163.646
-16 93.732 30 111.672 76 129.366 122 146.814 168 164.017
-15 94.125 31 112.059 77 129.748 123 147.191 169 164.388
-14 94.517 32 112.446 78 130.130 124 147.567 170 164.760
-13 94.910 33 112.833 79 130.511 125 147.944 171 165.131
-12 95.302 34 113.220 80 130.893 126 148.320 172 165.501
-11 95.694 35 113.607 81 131.274 127 148.696 173 165.872
-10 96.086 36 113.994 82 131.656 128 149.072 174 166.243
-9 96.478 37 114.380 83 132.037 129 149.448 175 166.613
-8 96.870 38 114.767 84 132.418 130 149.824 176 166.984
-7 97.262 39 115.153 85 132.799 131 150.199 177 167.354
-6 97.653 40 115.539 86 133.180 132 150.575 178 167.724
-5 98.045 41 115.925 87 133.561 133 150.950 179 168.095
-4 98.436 42 116.311 88 133.941 134 151.326 180 168.465
-3 98.827 43 116.697 89 134.322 135 151.701 181 168.834
ENGLISH
-2 99.218 44 117.083 90 134.702 136 152.076 182 169.204

-1 99.609 45 117.469 91 135.083 137 152.451 183 169.574
0 100.000 46 117.854 92 135.463 138 152.826 184 169.943
1 100.391 47 118.240 93 135.843 139 153.200 185 170.313
2 100.781 48 118.625 94 136.223 140 153.575 186 170.682
3 101.172 49 119.010 95 136.603 141 153.950 187 171.051
4 101.562 50 119.395 96 136.982 142 154.324 188 171.420
5 101.953 51 119.780 97 137.362 143 154.698 189 171.789
6 102.343 52 120.165 98 137.741 144 155.072 190 172.158
7 102.733 53 120.550 99 138.121 145 155.446 191 172.527
8 103.123 54 120.934 100 138.500 146 155.820 192 172.895
9 103.513 55 121.319 101 138.879 147 156.194 193 173.264
10 103.902 56 121.703 102 139.258 148 156.568 194 173.632
11 104.292 57 122.087 103 139.637 149 156.941 195 174.000
12 104.681 58 122.471 104 140.016 150 157.315 196 174.368
13 105.071 59 122.855 105 140.395 151 157.688 197 174.736
14 105.460 60 123.239 106 140.773 152 158.061 198 175.104
15 105.849 61 123.623 107 141.152 153 158.435 199 175.472
16 106.238 62 124.007 108 141.530 154 158.808 200 175.840

www.weg.net
Figure 6.16 - Ohmic resistance of the Pt-100 x temperature
6.12. Connection of the space heaters

Before switching ON the space heaters, check if the space heaters connection have been made according to
the connection diagram shown on the space heater nameplate. For motors supplied with dual voltage space
ENGLISH
heaters (110-127/220-240 V), see Figure 6.17.
Figure 6.17 - Dual voltage space heater connection.
The space heaters should never be energized when the motor is in operation.

www.weg.net
6.13. Starting Methods

Whenever possible, the motor starting must be Direct On Line (DOL) at rated voltage. This is the most simple
and feasible starting method. However, it must only be applied when the starting current does not affect the
power supply. Please consider the local electric utility regulations when installing a motor.
High inrush current may result in:
a) high voltage drop in the power supply line creating unacceptable line disturbance on the distribution system;
b) requiring oversized protection system (cables and contactor) increasing the installation costs.
If DOL starting is not allowed due to the reasons mentioned above, an indirect starting method compatible with
the load and motor voltage to reduce the starting current may be used.
If reduced voltage starters are used for starting, the motor starting torque will also be reduced.
Table 6.6 shows the possible indirect starting methods that can be used depending on the number of the
motor leads.
Table 6.6 - Starting method x number of motor leads.
Number of leads Possible starting methods
Autotransformer
3 leads
Soft-starter
Star-Delta
6 leads Autotransformer
Soft-Starter
Series/Parallel
Part Winding
9 leads
Autotransformer
ENGLISH
Soft-Starter
Star-Delta
Series/Parallel
12 leads Part Winding
Autotransformer
Soft-Starter
Table 6.7 shows examples of possible indirect starting methods to be used according to the voltage indicated
on the motor nameplate and the power supply voltage.
Table 6.7 - Starting methods x voltage
Nameplate Operating Autotransformer Starting by series/ Part-winding Starting by
Star-delta
voltage voltage Starting parallel switch Starting soft-starter
220 V YES YES NO NO YES
220/380 V
380 V NO YES NO NO YES
220 V NO YES YES YES YES
220/440 V
230 V NO YES YES YES YES
230/460 V
380/660 V 380 V YES YES NO NO YES
220 V YES YES YES YES YES
220/380/440 V 380 V NO YES YES YES YES
440 V YES YES NO NO YES
The WQuattro line motors must be started direct on-line (DOL) or driven by a frequency inverter in scalar
mode.

www.weg.net
6.14. Motors driven by Frequency Inverter
The operation with frequency inverter must be stated in the Purchase Order since this drive type may
require some changes of the motor design.
Wmagnet Motors must only be driven by WEG frequency inverter.
The frequency inverter used to drive motors up to 690 V must be fitted with Pulse With Modulation (PWM) with
vector control.
When a motor is driven by a frequency inverter at lower frequencies than the rated frequency, you must reduce
the motor torque to prevent motor overheating. The torque reduction (derating torque) can be found in the item
6.4 of the “Technical Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available on the site
www.weg.net.
If the motor is operated above the rated frequency, please note:

g That the motor must be operated at constant output;
g That the motor can supply max. 95% of its rated output;
g Do not exceed the maximum speed and please consider:
g max. operating frequency stated on the additional nameplate;
g mechanical speed limitation of the motor.
Information on the selection of the power cables between the frequency inverter and the motor can be found in the item
6.4 of the “Technical Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available at www.weg.net.
6.14.1. Use of dV/dt filter

6.14.1.1. Motor with enameled round wire
ENGLISH
Motors designed for rated voltages up to 690 V, when driven by frequency inverter, do not require the use of
dV/dT filters, provided that following criteria are considered.
Criteria for the selection of motors with round enameled wire when driven by frequency inverter 1
Inverter MTBP 3
Peak voltage at the dV/dt
Motor rated votage 2 Rise Time 3 Time between pulses
motor terminals (max) inverter output (max)
(min.) (min)
Vnom ≤ 460 V ≤ 1600 V ≤ 5200 V/µs
460 < Vnom ≤ 575 V ≤ 1800 V ≤ 6500 V/µs
≥ 0,1 µs ≥ 6 µs
575 < Vnom ≤ 690 V 4 ≤ 1600 V ≤ 5200 V/µs
575 < Vnom ≤ 690 V 5 ≤ 2200 V ≤ 7800 V/µs
Notes:
1. For the application of motors with round enameled wires designed for 690 < Vnom ≤ 1100 V, please contact WEG.
2. For the application of dual voltage motors, example 380/660 V, consider the lower voltage (380 V).
3. Information supplied by the inverter manufacturer.
4. When not stated in the Purchase Order that the motor will be driven by frequency inverter.
5. When stated in the Purchase Order that the motor will be driven by frequency inverter.
6.14.1.2. Motor with prewound coils

Motors with prewound coils (medium and high voltage motors regardless of frame sizes, and low voltage
motors from IEC 500 / NEMA 800 frame on), designed for the use with frequency inverters, do not require the
use of filters, provided they comply with the criteria in Table 6.8.
Table 6.8 - Criteria to be considered when using motor with prewound coils to be drive by frequency inverters
Turn to turn insulation (phase-phase) Phase-ground insulation

Type of Peak voltage at Peak voltage at
Motor rated voltage dV/dt at the motor dV/dt at the motor
modulation the motor the motor
terminals terminals
terminals terminals
Sinusoidal ≤ 5900 V ≤ 500 V/µs ≤ 3400 V ≤ 500 V/µs
690 < Vnom ≤ 4160 V
PWM ≤ 9300 V ≤ 2700 V/µs ≤ 5400 V ≤ 2700 V/µs
Sinusoidal ≤ 9300 V ≤ 500 V/µs ≤ 5400 V ≤ 500 V/µs
4160 < Vnom ≤ 6600 V
PWM ≤ 14000 V ≤ 1500 V/µs ≤ 8000 V ≤ 1500 V/µs

www.weg.net
6.14.2. Bearing insulation

Only the motors in IEC frame size 400 (NEMA 680) and larger are supplied, as standard, with insulated bearing.
If motor must be driven by frequency inverter, insulate the bearing according to Table 6.9.
Table 6.9 - Recommendation on the bearing insulation for inverter driven motors
Frame size Recommendation
IEC 315 and 355
NEMA 445/7, 447/9, L447/9, 504/5, 5006/7/8, 5009/10/11, 586/7, g Insulated bearing/end shield
5807/8/9, 5810/11/12 and 588/9 g Grounding between shaft and frame by grounding brush
IEC 400 and larger g Insulated NDE bearing
NEMA 680 and larger g Grounding between shaft and frame by grounding brush
When motors are supplied with shaft grounding system, monitor the grounding brush constantly during
its operation and, when it reaches the end of its useful life, it must be replaced by another brush with the
same specification.
6.14.3. Switching frequency

The minimum inverter switching frequency must not be lower than 2.5 kHz and should not exceed 5 kHz.
The non-compliance with the criteria and recommendations indicated in this manual may void the
product warranty.
6.14.4. Mechanical speed limitation

Table 6.10 shows the maximum speeds allowed for motors driven by frequency inverter.
ENGLISH
Table 6.10 - Maximum motor speed (in rpm).

Frame size Maximum speed for
DE-bearing
IEC NEMA standard motors
6201
6202
63-90 143/5 6203 10400
6204
6205
100 - 6206 8800
6207 7600
112 182/4
6307 6800
132 213/5 6308 6000
160 254/6 6309 5300
180 284/6 6311 4400
200 324/6 6312 4200
6314 3600
6315 3600
6316 3200
6319 3000
6220 3600
225-630 364/5-9610
6320 2200
6322 1900
6324 1800
6328 1800
6330 1800
Note:
to select the maximum allowed motor speed, consider the motor torque derating curve.
For more information on the application of frequency inverters, contact WEG or check the “Technical Guidelines
for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available at www.weg.net.

www.weg.net
7. Commissioning
7.1. Initial Start-up
After finishing the installation procedures and before starting the motor for the first time or after a long period
without operation, the following items must be checked:
If the nameplate data (voltage, current, connection diagram, degree of protection, cooling system, service
g
factor, etc.) meet the application requirements.

g If the machine set (motor + driven machine) has been mounted and aligned correctly.
If the motor driving system ensures that the motor speed does not exceed the max. allowed speed indicated
g
in Table 6.10.
g Measure the winding insulation resistance, making sure it complies with the specified values in item 5.4.
g Check the motor rotation direction.
Inspect the motor terminal box for damage and ensure that it is clean and dry and all contacts are rust-free,
g
the seals are in perfect operating conditions and all unused threaded holes are properly closed thus ensuring
the degree of protection indicated on the motor nameplate.
Check if the motor wiring connections, including grounding and auxiliary equipment connection, have been
g
carried out properly and are in accordance with the recommendations in item 6.9.
Check the operating conditions of the installed auxiliary devices (brake, encoder, thermal protection device,
g
forced cooling system, etc.).

Check bearing operating conditions. If signs of oxidation are detected, replace the bearings. If no sign of
g
oxidation is detected, relubricate the bearings as described in item 8.2. If the motors are stored for more than
two years, the bearings must be replaced before starting the motor.
g When motors are fitted with sleeve bearings, ensure:

g correct oil level for the sleeve bearing. The oil level should be in the center of the sight glass (see Figure 6.8);
g that the motor is not started or operated with axial or radial loads;
that if the motor is stored for a period equal or longer than the oil change interval, the oil must be changed
g
ENGLISH
before starting the motor.
g Inspect the capacitor operating condition, if any. If motors are installed for more than two years, but were
never commissioned, it is recommended to change the start capacitors since they lose their operating
characteristics.
g Ensure that the air inlet and outlet opening are not blocked. The minimum clearance to the nearest wall (L)
should be at least ¼ of the fan cover diameter (D), see Figure 7.1. The intake air temperature must be at
ambient temperature.
L
Figure 7.1- Minimum clearance to the wall

www.weg.net
Please consider the minimum distances shown in the Table 7.1 as reference value
Table 7.1 - Minimum distance between the fan cover and wall
Frame size Distance between the fan cover and the wall (L)
IEC NEMA mm inches
63 - 25 0.96
71 - 26 1.02
80 - 30 1.18
90 143/5 33 1.30
100 - 36 1.43
112 182/4 41 1.61
132 213/5 50 1.98
160 254/6 65 2.56
180 284/6 68 2.66
200 324/6 78 3.08
225 364/5
85 3.35
250 404/5
444/5
280 445/7 108 4.23
447/9
L447/9
504/5
315 122 4.80
5006/7/8
5009/10/11
586/7
588/9
355 136 5.35
5807/8/9
5810/11/12
6806/7/8
400 147 5.79
6809/10/11
450 7006/10 159 6.26
500 8006/10 171 6.73
ENGLISH
560 8806/10 185 7.28

630 9606/10 200 7.87
g nsure correct water flow rate and water temperature when water cooled motors are used. See item 7.2.
e
g ensure
that all rotating parts, such as pulleys, couplings, external fans, shaft, etc. are protected against
accidental contact.
Other tests and inspections not included in the manual may be required, depending on the specific installation,
application and/or motor characteristics.
After all previous inspections have been carried out, proceed as follows to start the motor:
g Start the motor on no-load (if possible) and check the motor direction of rotation. Check for the presence of
any abnormal noise, vibration or other abnormal operating conditions.
g Ensure the motor starts smoothly. If any abnormal operating condition is noticed, switch off the motor, check
the assembly system and connections before the motor is started again.
g If excessive vibrations are noticed, check if the motor mounting bolts are well tightened or if the vibrations are
not generated and transmitted from adjacent installed equipment. Check the motor vibration periodically and
ensure that the vibration limits are as specified in item 7.2.1.
g Start the motor at rated load during a short time and compare the operating current with the rated current
indicated on the nameplate.
g Continue to measure the following motor variables until thermal equilibrium is reached: current, voltage,
bearing and motor frame temperature, vibration and noise levels.
g Record the measured current and voltage values on the Installation Report for future comparisons.
As induction motors have high inrush currents during start-up, the acceleration of high inertia load requires an
extended starting time to reach full speed resulting in fast motor temperature rise. Successive starts within
short intervals will result in winding temperature increases and can lead to physical insulation damage reducing
the useful life of the insulation system. If the duty cycle S1 / CONT. is specified on the motor nameplate, this
means that the motor has been designed for:
two successive starts: first start from cold condition, i. e., the motor windings are at room temperature and
g
the second start immediately after the motor stops.

one start from hot condition, i. e., the motor windings are at rated temperature.
g
The Troubleshooting Chart in section 10 provides a basic list of unusual cases that may occur during motor
operation with the respective corrective actions
www.weg.net
7.2. Operating conditions

Unless otherwise stated in the Purchase Order, electric motors are designed and built to be operated at
altitudes up to 1000 meters above sea level and in a temperature range from -20 °C to +40 °C. Any deviation
from the normal condition of motor operation must be stated on the motor nameplate. Some components must
be changed if the ambient temperature is different from the specified one. Please contact WEG to check the
required special features.
For operating temperatures and altitudes differing from those above, the factors indicated in Table 7.2 must be
applied to the nominal motor power rating in order to determine the derated available output (Pmax = Pnom x
correction factor).
Table 7.2 - Correction factors for altitude and ambient temperature.
Altitude (m)
T (°C)
1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
10 0.97 0.92 0.88
15 0.98 0.94 0.90 0.86
20 1.00 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.83
25 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.89 0.85 0.81
30 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.78
35 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.90 0.88 0.84 0.80 0.75
40 1.00 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.80 0.76 0.71
45 0.95 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.81 0.78 0.74 0.69
50 0.92 0.90 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.72 0.67
55 0.88 0.85 0.83 0.81 0.78 0.76 0.73 0.70 0.65
60 0.83 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.70 0.67 0.62
65 0.79 0.76 0.74 0.72 0.70 0.68 0.66 0.62 0.58
70 0.74 0.71 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.58 0.53
75 0.70 0.68 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.53 0.49
80 0.65 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.48 0.44
Motors installed inside enclosures (cubicles) must be ensured an air renewal rate in the order of one cubic
meter per second for each 100 kW installed power or fraction of installed power. Totally Enclosed Air Over
ENGLISH
motors - TEAO (fan and exhaust / smoke extraction) are supplied without cooling fan and the manufacturer of
the driven machine is responsible for sufficient motor cooling. If no minimum required air speed between motor
fins is indicated on the motor nameplate, ensure the air speed indicated in the table 7.3 is provided. The values
shown in Table 7.3 are valid for 60 Hz motors. To obtain the minimum air speed for 50 Hz motors, multiply the
values in the table by 0.83.
Table 7.3 - Minimum required air speed between motor fins (metres/second).
Frame Poles
IEC NEMA 2 4 6 8
63 to 90 143/5 14 7 5 4
100 to 132 182/4 to 213/5 18 10 8 6
160 to 200 254/6 to 324/6 20 20 12 7
225 to 280 364/5 to 444/5 22 22 18 12
315 to 355 445/7 to 588/9 25 25 20 15
The voltage and frequency variations may affect the performance characteristics and the electromagnetic
compatibility of the motor. The power supply variations should not exceed the values specified in the applicable
standards. Examples:
ABNT NBR 17094 - Parts 1 and 2. The motor has been designed to supply the rated torque for a combined
g
variation in voltage and frequency:

g Zone A: ±5% of the rated voltage and ±2% of the rated frequency.
g Zone B: ±10% of the rated voltage and +3% -5% of the rated frequency.
When operated continuously in Zone A or B, the motor may show performance variations and the operating
temperature may increase considerably. These performance variations will be higher in Zone B. Thus it is not
recommended to operate the motor in Zone B during extended periods.
g IEC 60034-1. The motor has been designed to supply the rated torque for combined variation in voltage and
frequency:
g Zone A: ±5% of the rated voltage and ±2% of the rated frequency.
g Zone B: ±10% of the rated voltage and +3% -5% of the rated frequency.
When operated continuously in Zone A or B, the motor may show performance variations and the operating
temperature may increase considerably. These performance variations will be higher in Zone B. Thus it is not
recommended to operate the motor in Zone B during extended periods. For multivoltage motors (example 380-
415/660 V), a ±5% voltage variation from the rated voltage is allowed.
www.weg.net
g NEMA MG 1 Part 12. The motor has been designed to be operated in one of the following variations:
g ±10% of the rated voltage, with rated frequency;
g ±5% of the rated frequency, with rated voltage;
g A combined variation in voltage and frequency of ±10%, provided the frequency variation does not exceed
±5%.
If the motor is cooled by ambient air, clean the air inlet and outlet openings and cooling fins at regular intervals
to ensure a free airflow over the frame surface. The hot air should never be returned to the motor. The cooling
air must be at room temperature limited to the temperature range indicated on the motor nameplate (if no room
temperature is specified, please consider a temperature range between -20 °C and +40 °C).
Table 7.4 shows the minimum required water flow for water cooled motors considering the different frame sizes
and the maximum allowed temperature rise of the cooling water after circulating through the motor. The inlet
water temperature should not exceed 40 °C.
Table 7.4 - Minimum required water flow and the maximum allowed
temperature rise of the cooling water after circulating through the motor
Frame size Flow rate Maximum allowed water

IEC NEMA (litres/minute) temperature rise (°C)
180 284/6 12 5
200 324/6 12 5
225 364/5 12 5
250 404/5 12 5
444/5
280 445/7 15 6
447/9
315 504/5 16 6
586/7
355 25 6
588/9
Motors fitted with oil mist lubrication systems can be operated continuously for a maximum of one hour after
ENGLISH
the failure of the oil pumping system.
Considering the sun’s heat increases the operating temperature, externally mounted motors should always be
protected from direct sunlight exposure.
Each and every deviation from the normal operating condition (tripping of the thermal protection, noise and
vibration level increase, temperature and current rise) should be investigated and corrected by WEG Authorized
Service Centers.
Motors fitted with cylindrical roller bearings require a minimum radial load to ensure a normal operation.
For information regarding the radial preload, please contact WEG.
7.2.1.Limits of vibration
The vibration severity is the maximum vibration value measured at all positions and in all directions as
recommended in the standard IEC 60034-14. Table 7.5 specifies the limits of the maximum vibrations
magnitudes according to standard IEC 60034-14 for shaft heights IEC 56 to 400, for vibrations grades A and B.
The vibration severity limits in Table 7.5 are given as RMS values (Root Mean Square values or effective values)
of the vibration speed in mm/s measured in free suspension condition.
Table 7.5 - Recommended limits for the vibration severity according to standard IEC 60034-14
Shaft height [mm] 56 < H < 132 132 < H < 280 H > 280
Vibration Grade Vibration severity on elastic base [mm/s RMS]
A 1.6 2.2 2.8
B 0.7 1.1 1.8
Notes:
1-T he values in Table 7.5 are valid for measurements carried out with decoupled machines (without load) operated at rated voltage and
frequency.
2 - The values in Table 7.5 are valid regardless of the direction of rotation of the machine.
3-T he values in Table 7.5 are not applicable to single-phase motors, three-phase motors powered by a single-phase system or to
machines mounted in situ or coupled with inertia flywheels or to loads.
According to NEMA MG 1, the allowed vibration limit for standard motors is 0.15 in/s (peak vibration in in/s).
Note:
For the load operation condition, the use of the standard ISO 10816-3 is recommended for evaluating the motor vibration limits. In the
load condition the motor vibration will be influenced by several factors, such as, type of the coupled load, condition of the motor fixation,
alignment condition under load, structure or base vibration due to other equipments, etc.

www.weg.net
8. Maintenance
The purpose of the maintenance is to extend the useful life of the equipment. The non-compliance with one of
these previous items can cause unexpected machine failures.
If motors with cylindrical roller or angular contact bearings are to be transported during the maintenance
procedures, the shaft locking device must always be fitted. All HGF motors, regardless of the bearing type,
must always be transported with the shaft locking device fitted.
All repairs, disassembly and assembly related services must be carried out only by qualified and well-trained
personnel by using proper tools and techniques. Make sure that the machine has stopped and it is
disconnected from the power supply, including the accessory devices (space heater, brake, etc.), before any
servicing is undertaken.
The company does not assume any responsibility or liability for repair services or maintenance operations
executed by non-authorized Service Centers or by non qualified service personnel. The company shall have no
obligation or liability whatsoever to the buyer for any indirect, special, consequential or incidental loss or
damage caused or arising from the company’s proven negligence
8.1. General Inspection
The inspection intervals depend on the motor type, application and installation conditions. Proceed as follows
during inspection:
g V
isually inspect the motor and coupling. Check if abnormal noises, vibrations, excessive heating, wear signs,
misalignment or damaged parts are noticed. Replace the damaged parts as required.
g Measure the insulation resistance according to the item 5.4.
g C
lean the motor enclosure. Remove oil spills and dust accumulation from the motor frame surface to ensure
a better heat transfer to the surrounding ambient.
g Check cooling fan condition and clean the air inlet & outlet openings to ensure a free air flow over the motor.
g Investigate the actual condition of the seals and replace them, if required.
ENGLISH
g D
rain the condensed water from inside the motor. After draining, reinstall the drain plugs to ensure the degree
of protection as indicated on the motor nameplate. The motor must always be positioned so the drain hole is
at the lowest position (see item 6).
g C
heck the connections of the power supply cables, ensuring the correct clearance distance between live and
grounded parts, as specified in Table 6.3.
g C
heck if the tightening torque of the bolted connections and mounting bolts meets the tightening torque
specified in Table 8.7.
g C
heck the status of the cable passages, the cable gland seals and the seals inside the terminal box and
replace them, if required.
g C
heck the bearing operating conditions. Check for the presence of any abnormal noise, vibration or other
abnormal operating conditions, like motor temperature rise. Check the oil level, the lube oil condition and
compare the workings hours with the informed life time.
g Record and file all changes performed on the motor.
Do not reuse damaged or worn parts. Damaged or worn parts must be replaced by parts supplied by
the manufacturer and must be installed as if they were the original parts.
8.2. Lubrication
Proper lubrication plays a vital role in the motor performance. Only use the grease or oil types, amounts and
lubrication intervals recommended for the bearings. This information is available on the motor nameplate and
the lubrication procedures must be carried out according to the type of lubricant (oil or grease).
When the motor is fitted with thermal protection devices for bearing temperature control, consider the operating
temperature limits shown in Table 6.4.
The maximum operating temperature of motors used in special applications may differ from those shown in
Table 6.4. The grease and oil disposal should be made in compliance with applicable laws in each country
Please contact WEG when motors are to be installed in special environments or used for special
applications.

www.weg.net
8.2.1. Grease lubricated rolling bearings
Excess grease causes bearing overheating, resulting in bearing failure.
The lubrication intervals specified in Table 8.1, Table 8.2, Table 8.3 and Table 8.4 consider an absolute
temperature on the bearing of 70 °C (up to frame size IEC 200 / NEMA 324/6) and 85 °C (for frame size IEC
225 / NEMA 364/5 and above), the motor running at rated speed, a motor mounted in horizontal position and
greased with Mobil Polyrex EM grease. Any variation of the parameters listed above must be evaluated.
Table 8.1 - Lubrication intervals for ball bearings

LUBRICATION INTERVALS (hours)
Frame W21 TEFC W22 TEFC

Bearing Amount of ODP
Poles (Totally Enclosed Fan (Totally Enclosed Fan
designation grease (g) (Open Drip Proof)
Cooled) Cooled)
IEC NEMA 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
2 18100 15700 22000 20000
4
160 254/6 6309 13 20000 20000
6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 13700 11500 17000 14000
4
180 284/6 6311 18 20000 20000
6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 11900 9800 15000 12000
4
ENGLISH
200 324/6 6312 21 20000 20000

6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 18000 14400 4500 3600 5000 4000
4 11600 9700 14000 12000
6314 27
6 20000 20000 16400 14200 20000 17000
8 19700 17300 24000 20000
364/5 *Upon *Upon *Upon

2 14000 3500 4000
404/5 request request request
444/5 4 6316 34 10400 8500 13000 10000
225 445/7
6 20000 20000 14900 12800 18000 16000
250 447/9
280 L447/9 8 18700 15900 20000 20000
315 504/5
*Upon *Upon *Upon
355 5008 2 9600 2400 3000
request request request
5010/11
586/7 4 6319 45 9000 7000 11000 8000
588/9 6 20000 20000 13000 11000 16000 13000
8 17400 14000 20000 17000
4 7200 5100 9000 6000
6 6322 60 20000 20000 10800 9200 13000 11000
8 15100 11800 19000 14000

www.weg.net
Table 8.2 - Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings

LUBRICATION INTERVALS (hours)
Amount
Frame W21 TEFC W22 TEFC
Bearing of ODP
Poles (Totally Enclosed Fan (Totally Enclosed Fan
designation grease (Open Drip Proof)
Cooled) Cooled)
(g)
IEC NEMA 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
2 19600 13300 9800 16000 12000
4
160 254/6 NU309 13 20000
6 20000 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 18400 12800 9200 6400 11000 8000
4 19100
180 284/6 NU311 18
6 20000 20000 20000 25000 25000
20000
8
2 15200 10200 7600 5100 9000 6000
4 17200 21000
200 324/6 NU312 21
6 20000 20000 20000 25000
20000 25000
8
4 17800 14200 8900 7100 11000 9000
364/5 6 NU314 27 13100 11000 16000 13000
20000 20000
404/5 8 16900 15100 20000 19000
444/5 4 15200 12000 7600 6000 9000 7000
225 445/7 6 NU316 34 19000 11600 9500 14000 12000
250 447/9 20000
8 20000 15500 13800 19000 17000
280 L447/9
315 504/5 4 12000 9400 6000 4700 7000 5000
355 5008 6 NU319 45 19600 15200 9800 7600 12000 9000
5010/11 8 20000 20000 13700 12200 17000 15000
586/7 4 8800 6600 4400 3300 5000 4000
588/9 6 NU322 60 15600 11800 7800 5900 9000 7000
8 20000 20000 11500 10700 14000 13000
ENGLISH
Table 8.3 - Lubrication intervals for ball bearings - HGF line
Frame Bearing Amount of Lubrication intervals (hours)
Poles
IEC NEMA designation grease (g) 50Hz 60Hz
2 6314 27 3100 2100
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
6320 50 4500 4500
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T 4-8
6316 34 4500 4500
2 6314 27 3100 2100
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and
6322 60 4500 4500
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T 4-8
6319 45 4500 4500
2 6315 30 2700 1800
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8T and
6324 72 4500 4500
400 C/D/E 6809/10/11T 4-8
6319 45 4500 4500
2 6220 31 2500 1400
6328 93 4500 3300
4
450 7006/10 6322 60 4500 4500
6328 93 4500 4500
6-8
6322 60 4500 4500
6330 104 4200 2800
4
6324 72 4500 4500
500 8006/10
6330 104 4500 4500
6-8
6324 72 4500 4500
6330 104 4200 2800
4
6324 72 4500 4500
500 8006/10
6330 104 4500 4500
6-8
6324 72 4500 4500
560 8806/10 4-8
*Upon request
630 9606/10 4-8

www.weg.net
Table 8.4 - Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings - HGF line
Frame Bearing Amount of Lubrication intervals (hours)
Poles
IEC NEMA designation grease (g) 50 Hz 60 Hz
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8 and 4 4300 2900
NU320 50
315C/D/E 5009/10/11 6-8 4500 4500
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9 and 4 3500 2200
NU322 60
355C/D/E 5810/11/12 6-8 4500 4500
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and 4 2900 1800
NU324 72
400C/D/E 6809/10/11 6-8 4500 4500
4 2000 1400
450 7006/10 6 NU328 93 4500 3200
8 4500 4500
4 1700 1000
500 8006/10 6 NU330 104 4100 2900
8 4500 4500
4 75 2600 1600
560 8806/10 NU228 + 6228
6-8 106 4500 4500
4 92 1800 1000
630 9606/10 6 NU232 + 6232 120 4300 3100
8 140 4500 4500
For each increment of 15 ºC above the bearing temperature, the relubrication intervals given in the Table must
be halved. The relubrication interval of motors designed by the manufacturer for mounting in horizontal position,
but installed in vertical position (with WEG authorization), must be halved.
For special applications, such as: high and low temperatures, aggressive environments, driven by frequency
inverter (VFD - frequency inverter), etc., please contact WEG about the required amount of grease and the
relubrication intervals.
8.2.1.1. Motor without grease fitting

ENGLISH
Motors without grease fittings must be lubricated in accordance with the existing Maintenance Plan. Motor
disassembly must be carried out as specified in Item 8.3. If motors are fitted with shielded bearings (for
example, ZZ, DDU, 2RS, VV), these bearings must be replaced at the end of the grease service life.
8.2.1.2. Motor with grease fitting
To lubricate the bearings with the motor stopped, proceed as follows:
Motors with grease fittings must be stopped to be lubricated. Proceed as follows:
Before lubricating, clean the grease nipple and immediate vicinity thoroughly;
g
Lift grease inlet protection;

g
Remove the grease outlet plug;

g
Pump in approximately half of the total grease indicated on the motor nameplate and run the motor for about
g
1 (one) minute at rated speed;

Switch-off the motor and pump in the remaining grease;
g
Lower again the grease inlet protection and reinstall the grease outlet protection.
g

To grease the motor while running, proceed as follows:
Before lubricating, clean the grease nipple and immediate vicinity thoroughly;
g
Pump the total grease indicated on the motor nameplate;

g
Lower again the grease inlet protection.

g
For lubrication, use only manual grease gun.
If Motors are provided with a spring device for grease removal, the grease excess must be removed by pulling
the rod and cleaning the spring until the spring does not remove more grease.
8.2.1.3. Compatibility of the Mobil Polyrex EM grease with other greases

The Mobil Polyrex EM grease has a polyurea thickener and a mineral oil thus being compatible with greases
that contain:
Lithium based thickener, lithium-based complex thickener, polyurea thickener and refined mineral oil;
g
The used grease must have in its formulation corrosion and oxidation inhibitors.
g
In general terms, greases with the same type of soap are compatible to each other. However, depending on the
proportion of the mixture there may be incompatibility. In such a case, it is not recommended to mix different
types of greases without contacting the supplier or WEG beforehand.
www.weg.net
8.2.2. Oil lubricated bearings

To change the oil of oil lubricated motor proceed as follows:
g s
witch-off the motor;
g r
emove threaded oil drain plug;
g o
pen the valve and drain the oil;
g c
lose the drain vale again;
g r
einstall the threaded oil drain plug;
g fi
ll-up with the type and amount of oil as specified on the nameplate;
g c
heck oil level. The oil level is OK when the lubricant can be viewed approximately in the center of the sight
glass;
g r
einstall oil inlet plug;
g c
heck for oil leaks and ensure that all not used threaded plugs are closed with plugs.
The bearing lubricating oil must be replaced as specified on the nameplate or whenever changes in the oil
properties are noticed. The oil viscosity and pH must be checked periodically. The oil level must be checked
every day and must be kept in the center of the sight glass.
Please contact WEG, when oils with different viscosities should be used.
Note:
The HGF vertical mounted motors with high axial thrust are supplied with grease lubricated DE-bearings and with oil lubricated NDE-
bearings. The DE-bearings must be lubricated according to recommendations in item 8.2.1. Table 8.5 specifies the oil type and the
amount of oil required for this motor lubrication.
Table 8.5 - Oil properties for HGF vertical mounted motors with high axial thrust
Frame Bearing Lubricant

Poles Oil (liters) Interval (h) Lubricant
Mounting - High axial thrust
IEC NEMA designation specification

315L/A/B e 5006/7/8T e
4-8 29320 20
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T
355L/A/B e 5807/8/9T e ISO VG150
4-8 29320 26
ENGLISH
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T Renolin mineral oil with
400L/A/B e 6806/7/8T e 8000 DTA 40 / antifoam and
4-8 29320 37 SHC 629 antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T
additives
450 7006/10 4-8 29320 45
8.2.3. Oil mist lubricated bearings

Check the service conditions of the seals and if replacement is required use only original components. Clean
the seal components before assembly (bearing caps, end shields, etc.).
Apply joint sealant between the bearing caps and end shields. The joint sealant must be compatible with the
used lubricating oil. Connect the oil lubricant tubes (oil inlet and oil outlet tubes and motor drain tube), as shown
in Figure 6.12.
8.2.4. Sleeve bearings
The lubricating oil of sleeve bearings must be changed at the intervals specified in Table 8.6. To replace the oil,
proceed as follows:
g N
DE-bearing: remove the protection plate from the fan cover;
g D
rain the oil through the drain hole located at the bottom of the bearing (see Figure 8.1);
g C
lose the oil drain hole;
g R
emove the oil inlet plug;
g F
ill the sleeve bearing with the specified oil and with the amount of oil specified in;
g C
heck the oil level and ensure it is kept close to the center of the sight glass;
g I
nstall the oil inlet plug;
g C
heck for oil leaks. Oil inlet
Oil sight glass
Oil outlet
Figure 8.1 - Sleeve bearing Manual of Electric Motors 103

www.weg.net
Table 8.6 - Oil properties for sleeve bearings.
Frame Bearing Oil Lubricant

Poles Interval (h) Lubricant
IEC NEMA designation (liters) Specification
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T ISO VG32
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and mineral oil with
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T Renolin
2 9-80 2.8 8000 antifoam and
DTA 10
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T additives
450 7006/10
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
9-90
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T
2.8 ISO VG46
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and
9-100 mineral oil with
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T
4-8 8000 Renolin DTA 15 antifoam and
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and
11-110 antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T
4.7 additives
450 7006/10
11-125
500 8006/10
The lubricating oil must be replaced as specified on the nameplate or whenever changes on the oil properties
are noticed. The oil viscosity and pH must be checked periodically. The oil level must be checked every day
and kept in the center of the sight glass.
Please contact WEG, when oils with different viscosities are to be used.
8.3. Motor assembly and disassembly
All repair services on motors should be always performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with
the applicable laws and regulations in each country. Always use proper tools and devices for motor
disassembly and assembly.
ENGLISH
Disassembly and assembly services can be carried out only after the motor has been disconnected
from the power supply and is completely stopped.
Dangerous voltages may be present at the motor terminals inside the terminal box since capacitors can
retain electrical charge for long periods of time even when they are not connected directly to a power source or
when space heaters are connected to the motor or when the motor windings are used as space heaters.
Dangerous voltages may be present at the motor terminals when they are driven by frequency inverter even
when they are completely stopped.
Record the installation conditions such as terminal connection diagram, alignment / leveling conditions before
starting the disassembly procedures. These records should be considered for later assembly.
Disassemble the motor carefully without causing scratches on machined surfaces or damaging the threads.
Assemble the motor on a flat surface ensuring a good support base. Footless motors must be fixed/locked on
the base to prevent accidents.
Handle the motor carefully to not damage the insulated components such as windings, insulated rolling
bearings, power cables etc.
Seal elements, such as joint seals and bearing seals should always be replaced when wear or damage is
noticed.
Motors with degree of protection higher than IP55 are supplied with joint and screw seal Loctite 5923 (Henkel)
Clean the components and apply a new coat of Loctite 5923 on the surfaces before assembly.

www.weg.net
8.3.1. Terminal box

Proceed as follows to remove the terminal box cover and to disconnect/connect the power supply cables and
the cables of the accessory devices:
g E
nsure that during the screw removal the terminal box cover does not damage the components installed
inside the terminal box.
g I
f the terminal box cover is fitted with lifting eyebolt, lift the terminal box cover always by its lift eyebolt.
g I
f motors are supplied with terminal blocks, ensure the correct tightening torque on the motor terminals as
specified in Table 8.7.
g E
nsure that the cables do not contact sharp edges.
g E
nsure that the original IP degree of protection is not changed and is maintained as indicate on the motor
nameplate. The power supply cables and the control cables must always be fitted with components (cable
glands, conduits) that meet the applicable standards and regulations of each country.
g E
nsure that the pressure relief device is in perfect operating condition, if provided. The seals in the terminal
box must be in perfect condition for reuse and must be reinstalled correctly to ensure the specified degree of
protection.
g E
nsure the correct tightening torque for the securing bolts of the terminal box cover as specified in Table 8.7.
Table 8.7 - Tightening torque for the securing bolts [Nm]

Screw type and seal M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
Hex bolt/hex socket bolt
- 4 to 7 7 to 12 16 to 30 30 to 50 55 to 85 120 to 180 230 to 360
(without seal)
Combined slotted screw
- 3 to 5 5 to 10 10 to 18 - - - -
(without seal)
(with seal with metallic - - - 13 to 20 25 to 37 40 to 55 50 to 65 -
stop/cord)
Combined slotted screw
(with flat seal 'and/or - 3 to 5 4 to 8 8 to 15 - - - -
ENGLISH
mettallic stop/cord)
- - - 8 to 15 18 to 30 25 to 40 35 to 50 -
(with flat seal)
Terminal blocks 1 to 1,5 1,5 to 4 3 to 6,5 6 to 9 10 to 18 15,5 to 30 30 to 50 -
Grounding terminals - 3 to 5 5 to 10 10 to 18 30 to 50 55 to 85 120 to 180 -
8.4. Drying the stator winding insulation

Dismantle the motor completely. Remove the end shields, the rotor with the shaft, the fan cover, the fan and the
terminal box before the wound stator with the frame is transferred to the oven for the drying process. Place the
wound stator in the oven heated to max. 120 °C for two hours. For larger motors a longer drying time may be
required. After the drying process has been concluded, allow the stator to cool to room temperature. Measure
the insulation resistance again as described in item 5.4. Repeat the stator drying process if the required
insulation resistance does not meet the values specified in Table 5.3. If the insulation resistance does not
improve despite several drying processes, evaluate the causes of the insulation resistance drop carefully and an
eventual replacement of the motor winding may be required. If in doubt contact WEG.
To prevent electrical shock, discharge the motor terminals immediately before, and after each
measurement. If the motor is equipped with capacitors, these must be discharged before beginning any
repair.

www.weg.net
8.5. Spare parts

When ordering spare parts, always provide complete motor designation, indicating the motor type, the code
number and the serial number, which are stated on the motor nameplate.
Spare parts must always be purchased from WEG authorized Service Centers. The use of non-original spare
parts can cause motor failure, performance drop and void the product warranty.
The spare parts must be stored in a clean, dry and properly ventilated room, with relative air humidity not
exceeding 60%, with ambient temperature between 5 °C and 40 °C, free of dust, vibrations, gases, corrosive
smokes and at constant temperature. The spare parts must be stored in their normal mounting position without
placing other components onto them.
ENGLISH
Figure 8.2 - Exploded view of the components of a W22 motor

www.weg.net
9. Environmental Information
9.1. Packaging
WEG electric motors are supplied in cardboard, plastic or wooden packaging. These materials can be recycled
and must be disposed according to the applicable laws and regulations in each country. All wood used in the
packaging of WEG motors come from the company reforestation program and is not submitted to any chemical
conservation treatment.
9.2. Product
Electric motors consist mainly of ferrous metals (steel plates and cast iron), non ferrous metals (copper and
aluminum) and plastic materials.
In general, electric motors have relatively long service live. However when they must be discarded, WEG
recommends to dismantle the motor, sort the different materials and send them for recycling.
No-recyclable materials should be disposed of at industrial landfills according to the applicable environmental
laws and regulations in each country, or co-processed in cement kilns or incinerated.
The recycling service providers, the disposal in industrial landfills, the waste co-processing or the incineration
process must be properly authorized by the state environment agency to carry out these activities.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
10. Troubleshooting chart x solutions

This troubleshooting chart provides a basic list of problems that may occur during motor operation, possible
causes and recommended corrective actions. In case of doubts, please contact WEG Service Center.
Problem Possible cause Corrective action

Check the control panel and the motor
Power cables are interrupted.
power supply cables.
Blown fuses. Replace blown fuses.
Motor does not start, neither coupled nor
decoupled Correct the motor connection according to
Wrong motor connection.
connection diagram.
Check motor shaft to ensure that it rotates
Locked rotor.
freely.
Load toque is too high during start-up. Do not start the motor on load.
The motor starts at no-load, but fails when
load is applied. It starts very slowly and Check the installation dimensioning
does not reach the rated speed. Too high voltage drop in the power cables (transformer, cable cross section, relays,
circuit breakers, etc.)
Defective transmission component or Check the transmission force, the coupling
defective driven machine. and the alignment.
Align / level the motor with the driven
Misaligned / unleveled base.
machine
Unbalanced components or unbalanced
Balance the machine set again
driven machine
Abnormal / excessive noise Different balancing methods used for motor
Balance the motor again
and coupling balancing (halve key, full key)
Wrong motor direction of rotation Reverse the direction of rotation
Loose bolts Retighten the bolts
Foundation resonance Check the foundation design
ENGLISH
Damaged bearings Replace the bearings

Clean air inlet and outlet and cooling fins
Check the minimum required distance
Insufficient cooling between the fan cover and nearest walls.
See item 7
Check air temperature at inlet
Measure motor current, evaluate motor
Overload
application and if required, reduce the load
Number of starts per hour is too high or the
Reduce the number of starts per hour
load inertia moment is too high
Check the motor power supply voltage.
Motor overheating Power supply voltage too high Power supply voltage must not exceed the
tolerance specified in item 7.2
Check the motor power supply voltage and
the voltage drop. Power supply voltage
Power supply voltage too low
must not exceed the tolerance specified in
item 7.2
Interrupted power supply Check the connection of the power cables
Check for blown fuses, wrong commands,
Voltage unbalance at the motor terminals voltage unbalance in the power line, phase
fault or interrupted power cables
Direction of rotation is not compatible with Check if the direction of rotation matches
the unidirectional fan the rotation arrow indicated on end shield
Excessive grease / oil
Clean the bearing and lubricate it
Grease / oil aging
according to the provided
The used grease / oil does not matches the recommendations
specified one
Bearing overheating
Lubricate the bearing according to the
Lack of grease / oil provided recommendations
Excessive axial or radial forces due to Reduce the belt tension
the belt tension Reduce the load applied to the motor

www.weg.net
11. Warranty Term

WEG Equipamentos Elétricos S/A, Motor Unit, offers warranty against defects in workmanship and materials for
their products for a period of 18 months from the invoice issue date by factory or distributor / dealer, limited to
24 months from date of manufacture. Motors of the HGF Line are covered for a period of 12 months from the
invoice issue date by the factory or distributor / dealer, limited to 18 months from the date of manufacture.
The paragraph above contains the legal warranty periods. If a warranty period is defined in a different way in
the commercial, technical proposal of a particular sale, that will override the time limits set out above.
The periods above are independent of installation date and provided that the following requirements are met:
proper transportation, handling and storage; correct installation in specified environmental conditions free of
aggressive agents; operation within the capacity limits and observation of the Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual; execution of regular preventive maintenance; execution of repairs and/or changes only by
personnel with WEG‘s written authorization; in the occurrence of an anomaly, the product must be available to
the supplier for the minimum period necessary to identify the cause of the anomaly and to repair it properly; the
buyer must immediately notify WEG of any defects occurred and they must be later confirmed as
manufacturing defects by WEG. The warranty does not include assembly and disassembly services at the
buyer’s premises, costs of product transportation, as well as travel, lodging and meals expenses for the
technical assistance staff when requested by the customer. The warranty service will be provided exclusively at
a WEG authorized Technical Assistance or at the plant.
Components, parts and materials whose useful life is usually less than 12 (twelve) months are not covered by
the warranty.
Under no circumstance will warranty services extend the warranty period of the equipment. However, new
warranty equivalent to the original one will be due only to the components repaired or replaced by WEG.
The present warranty is limited to the product supplied. WEG will not be liable for damages to people, third
parties, other equipment and facilities, loss of profits or other incidental or consequential damages.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
12. Ec declaration of conformity
WEG Equipamentos Elétricos S/A

Av. Prefeito Waldemar Grubba, 3000
89256-900 - Jaraguá do Sul - SC - Brazil,
and its authorised representative established in the European Community,

WEGeuro - Industria Electrica SA
Rua Eng Frederico Ulrich, Apartado 6074
4476-908 - Maia - Porto - Portugal
hereby declare that the products:
WEG induction motors and components for using in these motors:
Three-phase
IEC frames 63 to 630
Nema frames 42, 48, 56 and 143 to 9610
……………
Single-phase
IEC frames 63 to 132
Nema frames 42, 48, 56 and 143 to 215
……………
when installed, maintained and used in applications for which they were designed, and in compliance with the relevant
installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions, comply with the requirements of the following European Directives
ENGLISH
and standards where applicable:
Directives:
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
Regulation (EC) No 640/2009
Directive 2009/125/EC
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC (induction motors are considered inherently benign in terms of electromagnetic compatibility)
Standards:
EN 60034-1/2-1/5/6/7/8/9/11/12/14/30 and 60204-1
From 29/12/2009 on low voltage electric motors are no longer considered under the scope of the current Machinery
Directive 2006/42/EC.
CE marking in: 1996
Milton Oscar Castella

Engineering Director
Jaraguá do Sul, May 31st, 2011

WEG Worldwide Operations
ARGENTINA COLOMBIA MEXICO SINGAPORE
WEG EQUIPAMIENTOS WEG COLOMBIA WEG MEXICO WEG SINGAPORE
ELECTRICOS Bogotá Huehuetoca Singapore
San Francisco - Cordoba Phone: +57 1 416 0166 Phone: +52 55 5321 4231 Phone: +65 68589081
Phone: +54 3564 421 484 info-co@weg.net info-mx@weg.net info-sg@weg.net
info-ar@weg.net www.weg.net/co www.weg.net/mx www.weg.net/sg
www.weg.net/ar
FRANCE VOLTRAN - WEG Group SCANDINAVIA
WEG PINTURAS - Pulverlux WEG FRANCE Tizayuca - Hidalgo WEG SCANDINAVIA
Buenos Aires Saint Quentin Fallavier - Lyon Phone: +52 77 5350 9354 Kungsbacka - Sweden
Phone: +54 11 4299 8000 Phone: +33 4 74 99 11 35 www.voltran.com.mx Phone: +46 300 73 400
tintas@weg.net info-fr@weg.net info-se@weg.net
www.weg.net/fr NETHERLANDS www.weg.net/se
AUSTRALIA WEG NETHERLANDS
WEG AUSTRALIA GERMANY Oldenzaal - Overijssel UK
Victoria WEG GERMANY Phone: +31 541 571 080 WEG ELECTRIC MOTORS U.K.
Phone: +61 3 9765 4600 Kerpen - North Rhine Westphalia info-nl@weg.net Worcestershire - England
info-au@weg.net Phone: +49 2237 9291 0 www.weg.net/nl Phone: +44 1527 513 800
www.weg.net/au info-de@weg.net info-uk@weg.net
www.weg.net/de PERU www.weg.net/uk
AUSTRIA WEG PERU
WATT DRIVE - WEG Group GHANA Lima UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
Markt Piesting - Viena ZEST ELECTRIC GHANA Phone: +51 1 472 3204 WEG MIDDLE EAST
Phone: +43 2633 404 0 WEG Group info-pe@weg.net Dubai
watt@wattdrive.com Accra www.weg.net/pe Phone: +971 4 813 0800
www.wattdrive.com Phone: +233 30 27 664 90 info-ae@weg.net
info@zestghana.com.gh PORTUGAL www.weg.net/ae
BELGIUM www.zestghana.com.gh WEG EURO
WEG BENELUX Maia - Porto USA
Nivelles - Belgium INDIA Phone: +351 22 9477705 WEG ELECTRIC
Phone: +32 67 88 84 20 WEG Electric India info-pt@weg.net Duluth - Georgia
info-be@weg.net Bangalore - Karnataka www.weg.net/pt Phone: +1 678 249 2000
www.weg.net/be Phone: +91 80 4128 2007 info-us@weg.net
info-in@weg.net RUSSIA and CIS www.weg.net/us
BRAZIL www.weg.net/in WEG ELECTRIC CIS
WEG EQUIPAMENTOS ELÉTRICOS Saint Petersburg ELECTRIC MACHINERY
Jaraguá do Sul - Santa Catarina WEG INDUSTRIES INDIA Phone: +7 812 363 2172 WEG Group
Phone: +55 47 3276-4002 Hosur - Tamil Nadu info-ru@weg.net Minneapolis - Minnesota
info-br@weg.net Phone: +91 4344 301 501 www.weg.net/ru Phone: +1 612 378 8000
www.weg.net/br info-in@weg.net www.electricmachinery.com
www.weg.net/in SOUTH AFRICA
CHILE ZEST ELECTRIC MOTORS VENEZUELA
WEG CHILE ITALY WEG Group WEG INDUSTRIAS VENEZUELA
Santiago WEG ITALIA Johannesburg Valencia - Carabobo
Phone: +56 2 784 8900 Cinisello Balsamo - Milano Phone: +27 11 723 6000 Phone: +58 241 821 0582
info-cl@weg.net Phone: +39 02 6129 3535 info@zest.co.za info-ve@weg.net
www.weg.net/cl info-it@weg.net www.zest.co.za www.weg.net/ve
www.weg.net/it
CHINA SPAIN
WEG NANTONG JAPAN WEG IBERIA
Nantong - Jiangsu WEG ELECTRIC MOTORS Madrid
Phone: +86 0513 8598 9333 JAPAN Phone: +34 91 655 30 08
info-cn@weg.net Yokohama City - Kanagawa info-es@weg.net
www.weg.net/cn Phone: +81 45 550 3030 www.weg.net/es
info-jp@weg.net
www.weg.net/jp
The values shown are subject to change without prior notice.
For those countries where there is not a WEG own operation, find our local distributor at www.weg.net.
Cod: 50033244 | Rev: 05 | Date (m/y): 04/2013
Grupo WEG - Motors Business Unit

Jaraguá do Sul - SC - Brazil
Phone: +55 47 3276 4000
motores@weg.net
www.weg.net
1.452.638.077 / 00 / 22.08.2016
We live our values.
Excellence • Passion • Integrity • Responsibility • GEA-versity
GEA Group is a global engineering company with multi-billion euro sales and
operations in more than 50 countries. Founded in 1881, the company is one of the
largest providers of innovative equipment and process technology. GEA Group is
listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 Index.

Tel.: +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@gea.com, www.gea.com
Sulanate of Oman
BLOWER
Warranty Certificate

08 MIR Centrifuge

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

08 MIR Centrifuge

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sultanate of Oman

Saraya Bandar Jissah

Title Material Inspection Request – Centrifuge Document no. MS-ME-PE&E-SBJ-50-008

Contractor Drake and Scull International L.L.C. Manufacturer

Client Saraya Bandar Jissah Rev.no 00

Material Inspection Request

Drake and Scull International L.L.C.

Title Material Inspection Request – Centrifuge Document no. MS-ME-PE&E-SBJ-50-008

Contractor Drake and Scull International L.L.C. Manufacturer

Client Saraya Bandar Jissah Rev.no 00

Contractor Drake and Scull International L.L.C. Manufacturer MAPRO

Client Saraya Bandar Jissah Rev.no 00

Drake and Scull International L.L.C.

Contractor Drake and Scull International L.L.C. Manufacturer MAPRO

Client Saraya Bandar Jissah Rev.no 00

Approved Data Sheet

Drake and Scull International L.L.C.

Drake and Scull International L.L.C.

Frame, hood and drive ä Lowest power consumption Auxiliary equipment

engineering for a better world GEA Mechanical Equipment

Components Standard Option F

Bowl and scroll Stainless steel CrNiMo Super duplex steel H

Solids discharge — Slide valve 1850 t 500 890 t 1650

GEA Mechanical Equipment

Liquid contacted parts Material BEST FIT Version

Bowl shell 1.4362-G * -

Bowl shell 1.4470 F51

* This is the same material as 1.4470-B1 !

Customer : GEA WESTFALIA SEPARATOR GMBH

Frame : 132M Enclosure : IP55 (TEFC)

Performed Checked Revision Approved

Corrosion protection :61

- Blast-cleaning abrasives for outside and inside, sharp and angular.

- Perform a visual inspection of degree of surface cleanliness,

- After blasting, components must be primed within max. 24 hours in order

- Relative humidity may not exceed 85 %.

- Air temperature may not be below 15 °C or above 35 °C during painting.

- Surface temperature must be at least 3 °C above the dew point.

Worked: Checked: Standard Checked: GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

Information on special request

- Test of paint resistance using solvent.

Corrosion protection to DIN EN ISO 12944-5

Observe general specifications in line with WSN66-1100-01.

 Blast-clean individual parts

 Prime with 2-component EP primer

 Apply temporary protection to machined surfaces if necessary

Worked: Checked: Standard Checked: GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

Drake and Scull International L.L.C.

specific energy consumption (kWh/m³)

capacity in m³/h incl. flocculent / dilution water (if installed)

Mechanical Separation / GEA Westfalia Separator

decanter bowl speed starting time motor

CD 205-00-02 5500 100 132 2915 7,5 50 13,7

Contractor Drake and Scull International L.L.C. Manufacturer MAPRO

Client Saraya Bandar Jissah Rev.no 00

Drake and Scull International L.L.C.

Contractor Drake and Scull International L.L.C. Manufacturer MAPRO

Client Saraya Bandar Jissah Rev.no 00

Drake and Scull International L.L.C.

Notify Party (No calin shall attach for failure to notify) 1Y

Pre-Carriage by ! Port of Loading

-CONTINUED ON ATTACHED STATEMENT­ //FREIGHT PREPAID//

Total No Temperature Control Instructions:

-- Freight Details, Charges Etc.

Blast-clean individual parts

Prime with 2-component EP primer

Apply temporary protection to machined surfaces if necessary

-CONTINUED ON ATTACHED STATEMENT //FREIGHT PREPAID//